Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1

Download Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations pdf for free of cost. Addition and subtraction are the basics you have to learn in maths to become a master. Make use of Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations and start your preparation for exams. Quick and easy learning is possible with the help of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations

The topics covered in this Addition and Subtraction Situations are Vocabulary, Addition: Add To, Solve Add To Problems, etc. If you start practicing the problems from now itself you can score top in the exams. After practicing the problems we suggest you solve the questions given at the end of the chapter. So that you can know in which topic you are lagging and practice number of times. Simply tap the link who wish to practice and solve the problems.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Addition: Add To

Lesson: 2 Solve Add To Problems

Lesson: 3 Solve Put Together Problems

Lesson: 4 Solve Put Together Problems with Both Addends Unknown

Lesson: 5 Solve Take From Problems

Lesson: 6 Solve Compare Problems: More

Lesson: 7 Solve Compare Problems: Fewer

Lesson: 8 Solve Add To Problems with Change Unknown

Lesson: 9 Connect Put Together and Take Apart Problems

Performance Task

Addition and Subtraction Situations Vocabulary

Oraganize it

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 1
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 1
LABELLING:

Define it

Use your vocabulary cards to match.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 2
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 2

EXPLANATION:
MATCHING :

Lesson 1.1 Addition: Add To

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model the story.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 1
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of bears = 4
Number of more bears added  = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of bears = Number of bears  + Number of more bears added
=4 + 2 =6

Hence, Total number of bears = 6.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 2
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 3
Addition equation: __________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of cats = 5
Number of more cats added = 1
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total Number of cats = Number of cats  + Number of more cats added
=5 + 1 = 6

Hence, total number of cats = 6.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 4
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 5
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of crabs = 3
Number of crabs added more = 6
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of crabs = Number of crabs + Number of crabs added more
=3 + 6 = 9

Hence, Total number of crabs = 9.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 6
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 7
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of pigs = 8
Number of pigs added more = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of pigs = Number of pigs + Number of pigs added more
=8 + 2 = 10

Hence, Total number of pigs = 10.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Complete the picture and the story.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 8
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 9
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of owls in the picture = 3
Number of owls added more = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of owls in the picture = Number of owls in the picture  + Number of owls added more
=3 + 3 = 6

Hence,  Total number of owls in the picture = 6.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 10
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of fishes = 5
Number of fishes added more = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of fishes = Number of fishes +  Number of fishes added more
=5 + 3 = 8

Hence, Total number of fishes =  8.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 11
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of tortoise = 2
Number of tortoise added more = 7
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of tortoise = Number of tortoise + Number of tortoise added more
=2 + 7 = 9

Hence, total number of tortoise = 9.

Addition: Add To Practice 1.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 13
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of foxes = 6
Number of foxes added more = 1
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of foxes = Number of foxes + Number of foxes added more
=6 + 1 = 7
Hence, Total number of foxes = 7.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 14
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 15
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of bugs = 7
Number of bugs added more = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of bugs = Number of bugs  + Number of bugs added more
=7 + 3 = 10
Hence, the Total number of bugs = 10.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 16
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 17
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of parrots = 6
Number of parrots added more = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of parrots = Number of parrots  + Number of parrots added more
=6 + 2 = 8
Hence, Total number of parrots = 8.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
There are 2 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 18. 7 more Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 18 join them. How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 18 are there now?

 

___________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 18
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of ducks = 2
Number of ducks added more = 7
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of ducks = Number of ducks + Number of ducks added more
= 2 + 7 = 9
Hence, the Total number of ducks = 9.

Review and Refresh

Write the number of objects.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 19
Answer:
GIVEN:
Apples in the picture.
COUNT:
Number of apples first row = 4
Number of apples second row = 3
EXPLANATION:
Total number of apples in both rows = Number of apples first row + Number of apples second row
= 4 + 3 = 7
Hence, the Total number of apples in both rows = 7.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 20
Answer:
GIVEN:
Bananas in the picture.
COUNT:
Number of Bananas first row = 4
Number of Bananas second row = 4
Number of Bananas third row = 2
EXPLANATION:
Total number of Bananas in all three rows = Number of Bananas first row + Number of Bananas second row + Number of Bananas third row
= 4 + 4 +2
= 8 + 2
= 10.
Hence, Total number of Bananas in all three rows = 10.

Lesson 1.2 Solve Add To Problems

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model the story.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 1
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of hats = 5
Number of hats added more = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of hats = Number of hats + Number of hats added more
= 5 + 2 = 7

Hence, Total number of hats= 7.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 2
Addition equation:
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 3
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of balls = 4
Number of balls added more = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of balls = Number of balls + Number of balls added more
= 4 + 2 = 6
Hence, number of balls = 6.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 4
Addition equation:
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 5
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of rabbits = 4
Number of rabbits more added = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of rabbits = Number of rabbits + Number of rabbits more added
= 4 + 4  = 8
Hence, number of rabbits = 8.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 6
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 7
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of books = 2
Number of books added more = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of books = Number of books + Number of books added more
= 2 + 2 = 4
Hence, Total number of books = 4.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 8
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 9
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of ants = 3
Number of ants added more = 5
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of ants = Number of ants  + Number of ants added more
= 3 + 5 = 8
Hence, Total number of ants = 8.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 10
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 11
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of chocolates eaten by me = 9
Number of chocolates eaten by me more = 1
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of chocolates eaten by me = Number of chocolates eaten by me + Number of chocolates eaten by me more
= 9 + 1 = 10.
Hence, Total number of chocolates eaten by me = 10.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER
Complete the picture and the story
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 12
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 13
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of snails = 4
Number of snails added more = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of snails = Number of snails  + Number of snails added more
= 4 + 3 = 7

Hence, Total number of snails = 7.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 14
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of apples with me = 3
Number of apples I purchased = 7
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of apples I am having = Number of apples with me  + Number of apples I purchased
= 3 + 7 = 10.

Hence, Total number of apples I am having = 10.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 15
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of cube boxes = 6
Number of cube boxes more added given by your Friend= 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of cube boxes = Number of cube boxes + Number of cube boxes more added given by your Friend
= 6 + 3 = 9

Hence, Total number of cube boxes = 9.

Solve Add To Problems Practice 1.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 16
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 17
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of pencils = 2
Number of pencils  purchased more = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of pencils  = Number of pencils + Number of pencils purchased more
= 2 + 3 = 5
Hence, Total number of pencils = 5.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 18
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 19
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of flowers = 6
Number of flowers added more = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of flowers = Number of flowers + Number of flowers added more
= 6 + 4 = 10
Hence, Total number of flowers = 10.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 20
__________ + ___________ = ___________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 21
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of butterflies = 5
Number of butterflies added more = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of butterflies = Number of butterflies + Number of butterflies added more
= 5 + 4 = 9
Hence, Total number of butterflies = 9.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER
Complete the picture and the story.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 22
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 23
__________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of Frogs = 7
Number of Frogs more added = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of frogs = Number of Frogs + Number of Frogs more added
= 7 + 3 = 10

Hence, Total number of frogs = 10.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have 2 Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 24. You buy 4Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 24. How many Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 24 do you have now?

_____________ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 24

Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of balls = 2
Number of balls purchased more = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of balls = Number of balls + Number of balls purchased more
= 2 + 4 = 6
Hence, Total number of balls = 6.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Use the picture to complete the number bond.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of lemons = 6
Number of circle bonding given = 3
EXPLANATION:
DIVISION:
The picture of the number bond with lemons = 6/3 = 2 in each circle.
Hence, the picture is below:

Lesson 1.3 Solve Put Together Problems

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model the story.

You have 7 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 1 and 2 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 2. How many toys do you have in all?

 

______ toys
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of robot toys =7
Number of car toys = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of toys = Number of robot toys + Number of car toys
= 7 + 2 = 9

Hence, total number of toys = 9.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 3 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 3 and 1 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 4 How many balls do you
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 5
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of volleyballs = 3
Number of footballs = 1
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of balls = Number of volleyballs + Number of footballs
= 3 + 1 = 4
Hence, total number of balls = 4.

Question 2.
There are 2 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 6 and 6 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 7 How many fish are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 8
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of green fishes = 2
Number of yellow fishes = 6
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of fishes = Number of green fishes + Number of yellow fishes
= 2 + 6 =8

Hence, total number of fishes = 8.

Question 3.
You have 1 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 9 and 5 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 10. How many pets do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 11
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of dogs = 1
Number of cats = 5
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of pets = Number of dogs + Number of cats
= 1 + 5 = 6
Hence, total number of pets = 6.

Question 4.
There are 4 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 12 and 6 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 13. How many animals are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 14
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of Horses = 4
Number of Hens = 6
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of animals = Number of Horses + Number of Hens
= 4 + 6 = 10
Hence, total number of animals = 10.

Question 5.
MP Number Sense
Number Sense Circle two groups of bugs to match the addition problem. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 15
3 + 5 = __________
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 3 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 16 and 4 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 17 . Your friend has 8 flowers. Who has more flowers?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 18
Model:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 19
Addition equation:

Who has more flowers?                You                  Friend

Show and Grow
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of purple flower I am having = 3
Number of yellow flower I am having = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of flowers I am having = Number of purple flower I am having + Number of yellow flower I am having
= 3 + 4 =7
Total Number of flowers my Friend having = 8
COMPARISION:
Number of flowers has more flowers = Total number of flowers I am having  or Total Number of flowers my Friend having
=>
Hence, my Friend has more flowers than me.

Question 6.
You have 4 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 20 and 5 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 21 . Your friend has 7 leaves. Who has more leaves?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 22
Addition equation:

Who has more leaves?               You              Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of  orange leaves with me = 4
Number of  green leaves with me= 5
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of leaves with me= Number of  orange leaves with me + Number of  green leaves with me
= 4 + 5 = 9
Total number of leaves my friend having = 7
COMPARISION:
Number of leaves who is having more = Total number of leaves with me or Total number of leaves my friend having
=
Hence, number of leaves with me are more than my friend.

Solve Put Together Problems Practice 1.3

Question 1.
You buy 1 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 23 and 7 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 24. How many pieces of fruit do you buy in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of pineapples purchased = 1
Number of bananas purchased = 7
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of fruits purchased = Number of pineapples purchased + Number of bananas purchased
= 1 + 7 = 8
Hence, Total number of fruits purchased = 8.

Question 2.
There are 5 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 26 and 5 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 27 . How many birds are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 28
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of koala birds = 5
Number of kuku  birds = 5
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of birds = Number of koala birds + Number of kuku  birds
= 5 + 5 = 10
Hence, Total number of birds = 10.

Question 3.
MP Number Sense
Circle two groups of hats to match the addition problem. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 29
6 + 1 = 7
Answer:

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have 4 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 30 and 5 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 31. You friend has 8 cars. Who has more cars?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 32
Who has more cars?                You              Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of blue cars with me = 4
Number of yellow cars with me = 5
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of cars with me = Number of blue cars with me+ Number of yellow cars with me
= 4 + 5 = 9
Number of cars my friend has = 8
COMPARISION:
Number of cars who has more = Total number of cars with me  or Number of cars my friend has
=
Hence, total number of cars with me are more than my friend.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Write the number for each type of pepper. Write the number for the whole.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 33
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of yellow pepper =  3 or three
Number of red pepper =  3 or three
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of pepper = Number of yellow pepper + Number of red pepper
=  3 + 3 = 6 or Six.
Hence, Total number of pepper = 6 or Six.

Lesson 1.4 Solve Put Together Problems with Both Addends Unknown

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model the story.

There are 10 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 34. Some are on the court and some are on the rack Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 34.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 35
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of cubes on the court = 6
Number of cubes on the rack = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of cubes = Number of cubes on the court + Number of cubes on the rack
= 6 + 4 = 10

Hence, total number of cubes = 10.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
There are 7 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 36 Some are on a tree. Some more are on the ground. Draw the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 36
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 37
Addition equation: ________ = ________ + _______
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of apples on the tree = 4
Number of apples on the ground = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of apples = Number of apples on the tree + Number of apples on the ground
= 4 + 3 = 7.
PICTURE :

Hence, drawn the picture.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
There are 5 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 38 Some are on a couch. Some more are on a rug. Draw the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 38
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 39
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of dogs on a couch = 3
Number of dogs on a rug = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of dogs = Number of dogs on a couch + Number of dogs on a rug
= 3 + 2 = 5
PICTURE:

Hence, picture is drawn.

Question 3.
There are 8 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 40 Some are in a pond. Some more are in the grass. Draw two different pictures to show the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 40
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 41
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of snakes = 8
FIGURE:1:
Number of snakes in a pond = 4
Number of snakes in a grass = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of snakes = Number of snakes in a pond + Number of snakes in a grass
= 4 + 4 = 8
FIGURE:2:
Number of snakes in a pond = 3
Number of snakes in a grass = 5
Total number of snakes = Number of snakes in a pond + Number of snakes in a grass
= 3 + 5 = 8
PICTURE:

Hence, Total number of snakes = 8.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton has 4 toy trucks. Some are red. The rest are blue. Write two different addition equations to describe his trucks.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 42
Answer:
GIVEN:
EQUATION:1:
Number of red trucks toys Newton has = 3
Number of blue trucks toys Newton has = 1
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of toy trucks Newton has = Number of red trucks toys Newton has + Number of blue trucks toys Newton has
= 3 + 1 =4.
Hence, total number of toy trucks Newton has = 4.
EQUATION:2:
Number of red trucks toys Newton has = 2
Number of blue trucks toys Newton has = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of toy trucks Newton has = Number of red trucks toys Newton has + Number of blue trucks toys Newton has
= 2 + 2 =4.
Hence, total number of toy trucks Newton has = 4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 7 ribbons. Some are blue. The rest are red. You have more blue ribbons than red ribbons. How many blue and red ribbons can you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 43
2 blue 5 red           4 blue 3 red
6 blue 1 red           3 blue 4 red
Show how you know:
Answer:
Total number of ribbons = 7.
Some are blue and rest are red.
Blue ribbons are more than red ribbons.
EXPLANATION:
GIVEN:
1. 2 blue 5 red
Blue ribbons are more than red balls.
Number of blue ribbons are less than red.
Hence, this case is not  the correct count of ribbons.
2.  4 blue 3 red
Number of blue ribbons are more than red.
Number of blue ribbons = 4
Number of red ribbons = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of ribbons = Number of blue ribbons + Number of red ribbons
= 4 + 3 = 7.
Hence, this case is the correct count of ribbons.
3.6 blue 1 red
Blue ribbons are more than red balls.
Number of blue ribbons are more than red.
Number of blue ribbons = 6
Number of red ribbons = 1
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of ribbons = Number of blue ribbons + Number of red ribbons
= 6 + 1 = 7.
Hence, this case is the correct count of ribbons.
4.  3 blue 4 red
Number of blue ribbons are less than red.
So, this case is not  the correct count of ribbons.
Hence, Total number of ribbons can be 4 blue 3 red if not 6 blue 1 red ball.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
There are lo kites. Some are green. The rest are yellow. There are more yellow kites than green kites. How many green and yellow kites can there be?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 44
4 green 6 yellow               6 green 4 yellow
5 green 5 yellow               3 green 7 yellow
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of kites = 10.
Some are green and rest are yellow.
There are more yellow kites than green kites.
EXPLANATION:
1. 4 green 6 yellow
There are more yellow kites than green kites.
Number of green kites = 4
Number of yellow kites = 6
ADDITION:
Total number of kites = Number of green kites + Number of yellow kites
= 4 + 6 = 10.
2.  6 green 4 yellow
Here, number of green kites are more than yellow kites. So, this cannot be the count of kites.
3. 5 green 5 yellow
Here, both the number of green and yellow kites are same. This means the condition given is not fulfilled. So, this cannot be the count of kites.
4.  3 green 7 yellow
There are more yellow kites than green kites.
Number of green kites = 3
Number of yellow kites = 7
ADDITION:
Total number of kites = Number of green kites + Number of yellow kites
= 3 + 7 = 10.
Hence, the total number of kites can be 4 green 6 yellow or 3 green 7 yellow kites.

Solve Put Together Problems with Both Addends Unknown Practice 1.4

Question 1.
There are 6 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 45 Some are on a hill. Some more are in the grass. Draw the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 45
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 46

_____________ = ____________ + ____________
Answer:
Number of ants on hill = 4
Number of ants in the grass = 2
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of ants = Number of ants on hill + Number of ants in the grass
= 4 + 2 = 6
PICTURE:

Hence,  Total number of ants = 6.

Question 2.
There are 8Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 47 Some are in the water. Some more are on the dirt. Draw the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 47
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 48
_____________ = ____________ + ____________
Answer:
Number of frogs in the water = 3
Number of frogs on the dirt = 5
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of frogs = Number of frogs in the water+ Number of frogs on the dirt
= 3 + 5 = 8
PICTURE:

Hence, Total number of frogs = 8.
Question 3.
There are 5Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 49 . Some are inside a bin. Some more are outside the bin. Draw two different pictures to show the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 49 .
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 50
Answer:
PICTURE:1:
Number of balls are inside a bin = 1
Number of balls are outside the bin = 4
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of balls = Number of balls are inside a bin + Number of balls are outside the bin
= 1 + 4
=5
PICTURE:2:
Number of balls are inside a bin = 2
Number of balls are outside the bin = 3
EXPLANATION:
ADDITION:
Total number of balls = Number of balls are inside a bin + Number of balls are outside the bin
= 2 + 3
= 5

Hence, total number of balls = 5.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have 9 hats. Some are blue. The rest are red. You have more red hats than blue hats. How many red and blue hats can you have?
4 red 5 blue 6 red 3 blue
3 red 6 blue 7 red 2 blue
Show how you know:
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of hats = 9
Some are blue. The rest are red.
You have more red hats than blue hats.
EXPLANATION:
1. 4 red 5 blue
Here, red are less than blue hats. So, this are not the count of hats.
2. 6 red 3 blue
Here, red are more than blue hats.
Number of red hats = 6
Number of blue hats = 3
ADDITION:
Total number of hats =  Number of red hats + Number of blue hats
= 6 + 3 = 9
3. 3 red 6 blue
Here, red are less than blue hats. So, this are not the count of hats.
4.  7 red 2 blue
Here, red are more than blue hats.
Number of red hats = 6
Number of blue hats = 3
ADDITION:
Total number of hats =  Number of red hats + Number of blue hats
= 6 + 3 = 9
Hence, Total number of hats can be 6 red 3 blue or 7 red 2 blue.

Review & Refresh

Use the picture to write a subtraction sentence.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 51
___________ – ___________ = _____________
Answer:
Number of sea horse in first row = 4
Number of sea horse in second row = 4
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the rows = Number of sea horse in first row – Number of sea horse in second row
= 4 – 4 = 0
Hence, Difference in the rows = 0.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 52
___________ – ___________ = _____________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of dolphins left side in the picture = 6
Number of dolphins right side in the picture = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the dolphins in both the sides of the picture = Number of dolphins left side in the picture – Number of dolphins right side in the picture
= 6 – 3  = 3
Hence, Difference in the dolphins in both the sides of the picture = 3.

Lesson 1.5 Solve Take From Problems

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model the story.

There are 6 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 53 3 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 53 hop away How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 53 are left.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 54
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of rabbits = 6
Number of rabbits left away = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of rabbits left = Total number of rabbits – Number of rabbits left away
= 6 – 3 = 3

Hence, Number of rabbits left = 3.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
There are 6 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 55.
2 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 55 jump away.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 55 are left?
Subtraction equation:
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 55
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of monkeys = 6
Number of monkeys jump away = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of monkeys left = Total number of monkeys – Number of monkeys jump away
= 6 – 3 = 3
Hence,  Number of monkeys left = 3.

Question 2.
There are 8 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 56.
A monkey eats 5 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 56
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 56 are left?
Subtraction equation:
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 56
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of bananas = 8
Number of bananas monkey ate = 5
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of bananas left = Total number of bananas – Number of bananas monkey ate
= 8 – 5 = 3
Hence, Number of bananas left = 3.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
There are 7 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 57.
3 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 57 walk away.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 57 are left?
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 57
Answer:
Total number of ants = 7
Number of ants ran away = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of ants left =  Total number of ants – Number of ants ran away
= 7 – 3 = 4
Hence, Number of ants left = 4.

Question 4.
There are 8 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 58
6 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 58 fly away.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 58 are left?
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 58
Answer:
Total number of birds = 8
Number of birds flew = 6
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of birds left = Total number of birds – Number of birds flew
= 8 – 6 = 2.
Hence, Number of birds left = 2.

Question 5.
10 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 59 play.
5 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 59 run away.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 59 are left?
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 59
Answer:
Total number of cats = 10
Number of cats run cats = 5
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of cats left = Total number of cats  – Number of cats run cats
= 10 – 5 = 5
Hence, Number of cats left = 5.

Question 6.
MP Precision
Find the difference. Draw a picture to match.
7 – 4 = ______
Answer:
7 – 4 = 3
EXPLANATION:
Out of 7 blocks remove 4 blocks = ????
DIFFERENCE
7 – 4 = 3
PICTURE:

Hence, picture is drawn.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

7 students play tag.
2 of them leave.
How many students are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 60
Which equation matches the story?
9 – 7 = 2
7 – 2 = 5
7 – 5 = 2
Show how you know:

 

____ students are left.
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of students playing tag = 7
Number of students left away = 2
EXPLANATION:
Number of students left = Total number of students playing tag – Number of students left away
= 7 – 2 = 5
Hence, Number of students left = 2
EQUATION matching the answer = 7 – 2 = 5 not others 9 – 7=2 nor 7 – 5 = 2.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You have 9 coins. You give 3 coins away. How many coins are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 61
Which equation matches the story?
9 – 3 = 6
6 – 3 = 3
Show how you know:

 

____ coins are left.
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of coins = 9
Number of coins  given away = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of coins left = Total number of coins – Number of coins  given away
= 9 – 3
= 6
Hence, Number of coins left = 6.
EQUATION matching the story is 9 – 3 = 6 not 6 – 3 = 3.

Solve Take From Problems Practice 1.5

Question 1.
There are 5 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 62
3 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 62 leave.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 62 are left?
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 62
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of tigers = 5
Number of tigers left away= 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of tigers left = Total number of tigers – Number of tigers left away
= 5 – 3
= 2
Hence, Number of tigers left = 2.

Question 2.
There are 7 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 63.
A cat eats 5 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 63.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 63 are left?
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 63
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of fishes = 7
Number of fishes cat ate = 5
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of fishes left =  Total number of fishes – Number of fishes cat ate
= 7 – 5
= 2.
Hence, Number of fishes left = 2.

Question 3.
You have 10 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 64.
You give away 10 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 64.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 64 do you have left?
___________ – __________ = __________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 64
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of balls = 10
Number of balls given away = 10
EXPLANATION:
Number of balls left = Total number of balls – Number of balls given away
= 10 – 10
= 0
Hence, Number of balls left = 0.

Question 4.
MP Precision
Find the difference. Draw a picture to match.
8 – 2 = _______
Answer:
8 – 2 = 6
EXPLANATION:
Out of 8 blocks remove 2 blocks = ????
Difference:
8 – 2 = 6
PICTURE:

Hence, picture is drawn.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
6 students play soccer. 4 of them leave. How many students are left?

Which equation matches the story?
6 – 2 = 4
8 – 6 = 2
6 – 4 = 2
Show how you know:

____ students are left.
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of students playing soccer = 6
Number of students left away the soccer = 4
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of students left in the game = Total number of students playing soccer – Number of students left away the soccer
=6 – 4
=2
Hence, Equation matches our story is 6 – 4 = 2 not other 6 – 2 = 4, 8 – 6 = 2.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Write the numbers of dogs and bones. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 65
Answer:

GIVEN:
Number of dogs = 7
Number of dog bones = 10
EXPLANATION:
COMPARISION:
Number of dogs : Number of dog bones
=>
Hence, comparison is done and greater number is also marked circle.

Lesson 1.6 Solve Compare Problems: More

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model the story.

Newton has 4 apples. Descartes has 6 apples. Who has more apples? How many more?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 66
Answer:
Number of apples Descartes has more than Number of apples Newton has.
Therefore, Descartes has 2 apples more than Newton has.
GIVEN:
Number of apples Newton has = 4
Number of apples Descartes has = 6
SUBTRACTION:
Number of apples who has more = Number of apples Descartes has  – Number of apples Newton has
= 6 – 4
=2
Hence, Number of apples Descartes has more than Number of apples Newton has.
Therefore, Descartes has 2 apples more than Newton has.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 7 books. Your friend has 3 books. How many more books do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 67
Subtraction equation: _________ – _________ = __________ more books
Answer:
I am having 4 books more than my friend has.
GIVEN:
Number of books I have = 7
Number of books my friend has = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of books who has more = Number of books I have – Number of books my friend has
= 7 – 3
= 4
Hence,  I am having 4 books more than my friend has.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Your friend has 6 crayons. You have 3 crayons. How many more crayons does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 68
_________ – _________ = __________ more crayons
Answer:
My friend has 3 crayons more than me.
GIVEN:
Number of crayons my friend has = 6
Number of crayons I am having = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of crayons who has more by = Number of crayons my friend has – Number of crayons I am having
= 6 – 3
= 3
Hence, my friend has 3 crayons more than me.

Question 3.
There are 9 purple flowers and 5 yellow flowers. Draw the missing flowers. How many more purple flowers are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 69
_________ – _________ = __________ more purple flowers
Answer:
Purples  flowers are 4 more than the yellow flowers.
GIVEN:
Number of purple flowers = 9
Number of yellow flowers = 5
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the flowers = Number of purple flowers – Number of yellow flowers
= 9 – 5
=4.
PICTURE:
MISSING FLOWERS are 5 yellow flowers. Picture is below:

Hence, purples  flowers are 4 more than the yellow flowers.

Question 4.
You have 2 yellow buckets. Your friend has 6 blue buckets. Draw the missing buckets. How many more buckets does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 70
_________ – _________ = __________ more buckets
Answer:
Number of more buckets  my friend having than me are 4 blue buckets.
GIVEN:
Number of yellow buckets I am having = 2
Number of blue buckets my friend having = 6
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of more buckets does my friend having = Number of yellow buckets I am having – Number of blue buckets my friend having
= 6 – 2
= 4
PICTURE:
MISSING BUCKETS are 6 blue buckets. Picture is below:

Hence, Number of more buckets  my friend having than me are 4 blue buckets.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 2 dog puppets. You have more cat puppets than dog puppets. How many more cat puppets do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 71
Draw a picture:

 

Subtraction equation:

___________ more cat puppets
Answer:
Cats are 1 more than dog puppets
GIVEN:
Number of dog puppets  = 2
You have more cat puppets than dog puppets.
=> Number of cat puppets  = 3

PICTURE:

 

EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of cats more than dog puppets = Number of cat puppets  – Number of dog puppets
= 3 – 2
=1
Hence, cats are 1 more than dog puppets.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You have 9 toy cars. You have more cars than trucks. How many more cars do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 72
Draw a picture:

 

Subtraction equation:

 

__________ more toy cars
Answer:
Number of toy cars more than trucks = 1.
GIVEN:
Number of toy cars = 9
You have more cars than trucks.
=> Number of trucks = 8

PICTURE: MISSING TOYS are 8 trucks.

EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of toy cars more than trucks =Number of toy cars –  Number of trucks
= 9 – 8
= 1
Hence, Number of toy cars more than trucks = 1.

Solve Compare Problems: More Practice 1.6

Question 1.
There are 4 blue scarves and 3 green scarves. How many more blue scarves are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 73
____________ – ____________ = ___________ more blue scarf
Answer:
There are blue scarfs 1 more than red scarfs.
GIVEN:
Number of blue scarves = 4
Number of green scarves = 3
EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the scarves = Number of blue scarves – Number of green scarves
= 4 – 3
= 1
Hence, there are blue scarfs 1 more than red scarfs.

Question 2.
You have 6 strawberries and 2 blueberries. Draw the missing fruit. How many more strawberries do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 74
____________ – ____________ = ___________ more straw berries
Answer:
There are 4 strawberries more than blue berries.
GIVEN:
Number of strawberries = 6
Number of  blueberries = 2
PICTURE:
MISSING FRUITS are 2 blueberries.

EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the berries = Number of strawberries – Number of  blueberries
= 6 – 2
= 4
Hence, there are 4 strawberries more than blue berries.

Question 3.
You have 2 blue towels. Your friend has 7 red towels. Draw the missing towels. How many more towels does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 75
____________ – ____________ = ___________ more towels
Answer:
My friend has 5 red towels more than me.
GIVEN:
Number of blue towels I have = 2
Number of red towels my friend has = 7
PICTURE: MISSING TOWELS are 7 red towels.

EXPLANATION:
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the towels between me and my friend = Number of red towels my friend has – Number of blue towels I have
= 7 – 2
= 5
Hence, my friend has 5 red towels more than me.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have 3 toy bears. You have more yo-yos than toy bears. How many more yo-yos do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 76
Answer:
There are 2 yo-yos more than toy bears.
GIVEN:
Number of toy bears = 3
You have more yo-yos than toy bears.
Number of yo-yos = 5
PICTURE: MISSING  TOYS are 5 yo-yos. Picture is below:

EXPLANATION:
Difference in the toys = Number of yo-yos – Number of toy bears
= 5 – 3
= 2
Hence, there are 2 yo-yos more than toy bears.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Write the number of each type of sea creature. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction Situations 77
Answer:
There are 2 jelly fishes more than star fishes.
GIVEN:
Number of star fish = 3

Read more

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2

Get Big Ideas Math Book 2rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 on this page. This BIM Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 Answer Key is useful for the students while preparing for the exams and preparation tests. You can download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 PDF for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20

Understand all the concepts of BIM 2nd Grade Solutions for 2nd Chapter Fluency and Strategies within 20. Most of the students may think that learning fluency and strategies within 20 is not an easy topic. So, we are giving a detailed step by step explanation for all the topics in a simple manner. So go through the following sections and start your preparation with love and joy.

The different topics in Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 Solution Key are Add in Any Order, Use Doubles, Add Three Numbers, Count On and Count Back to Subtract, Relate Addition, Subtraction, and others.  Just tap the below links and start your preparation. By using these links you can score the highest marks in the exams.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Add in Any Order

Lesson: 2 Use Doubles

Lesson: 3 Add Three Numbers

Lesson: 4 Make a 10 to Add

Lesson: 5 Count On and Count Back to Subtract

Lesson: 6 Relate Addition and Subtraction

Lesson: 7 Get to 10 to Subtract

Lesson: 8 Practice Addition and Subtraction

Lesson: 9 Problem Solving: Addition and Subtraction

Chapter: 2 – Fluency and Strategies within 20

Fluency and Strategies within 20 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 1

Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 2

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Vocabulary-Organize It

Define It
Use your vocabulary cards to match.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Vocabulary-Define-It-Question-1

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 4
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 5

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Vocabulary-Define-It-Question-2

Lesson 2.1 Add in Any Order

Explore and Grow

Use the table to find the sum. Change the order of the addends. Write the new equation.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 6

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order-Explore-and-GrowBig-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order-Explore-and-Grow

Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 5 + 6 and 6 + 5 are both equal to 11. The expressions is represented by red color and sum by green.
The expressions 4 + 9 and 9 + 4 are both equal to 13. The expressions are represented by blue color and sum by yellow.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order- Show-and-Grow-question-1

Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 6 + 3 and 3 + 6 are both equal to 9. The addend 6 is represented by orange color and addend 3 by blue.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 8

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order- Show-and-Grow-question-2

Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 5 + 1 and 1 + 5 are both equal to 6. The addend 5 is represented by yellow color and addend 1 by green.

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new equation.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order- Show-and-Grow-question-3
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 8 +2 and 2 + 8
 are both equal to the sum 10. 

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order- Show-and-Grow-question-4
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 4 + 3 and 3 + 4
 are both equal to the sum 7. 

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new equation.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 4 + 3 and 3 + 4
 are both equal to the sum 7. 

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 12
Answer:
7 + 3 = 10                   3 + 7 = 10
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 7 + 3 and 3 +  7
 are both equal to the sum 10. 

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 13
Answer:
6 + 5 = 11                     5 + 6 = 11
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 6 + 5 and 5 + 6
 are both equal to the sum 11. 

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 14
Answer:
17 = 9 + 8                         17 = 8 + 9
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 9 + 8 and 8 +9
 are both equal to the sum 17. 

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 15
Answer:
2 = 0 + 2                          2 = 2 +0
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 0 + 2 and 2 + 0
 are both equal to the sum 2. Adding 0 to any number gives the sum the number itself. 

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Which shape completes the equation?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-10

Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You paint 12 shapes. 8 are rectangles. The rest are circles. How many circles do you paint?
Write two equations that describe your shapes:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 17
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 18

Answer:
Given:
Total number of shapes painted = 12
Number of rectangles painted = 8
Number of circles painted = total shapes painted – number of rectangles painted
12 – 8 = 4
8 + 4 = 12
4 + 8 = 12
Total circles painted = 4.

Show and Grow

Question 11.
There are 13 race cars. 6 of them have numbers. The rest do not. How many race cars do not have numbers?
Write two equations that describe your shapes:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 19
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 19.1
Explain how you know your answer is correct.
_______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
Answer:
Total number of race cars = 13
Number of race cars with numbers = 6.
Number of race cars without number = total number of race cars – Number of race cars with numbers
13 – 6 = 7.
number of race cars with number + number of race cars without number = total number of race cars
6 + 7 = 13
when we reverse the order
7 + 6 = 13
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
Given total race cars = 13
Race cars with number = 6
To find the race cars without number we need to minus race cars with number from the total
13 – 6 = 7

Add in Any Order Homework & Practice 2.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 20

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-in-Any-Order-Homework-Practice-2.1-Question-1
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
Given 6 blue linking cubes and 4 red linking cubes
Adding blue and red gives the sum.
6 + 4 = 10.
when we reverse the colors order
adding  red  and  blue gives the sum .
4 + 6 = 10.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-in-Any-Order-Homework-Practice-2.1-Question-2
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
Given 1 yellow linking cubes and 8 orange linking cubes
Adding yellow and orange cube gives the sum
1 + 8 = 9.
when we reverse the colors order
adding orange and yellow cubes gives the sum
8 + 1 = 9.

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends.
Write the new equation.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 22
Answer:
7 + 0 = 7                      0 + 7 = 7
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
Adding any number to 0 gives the sum the number itself.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 23
Answer:
2 + 4 = 6               4 + 2 = 6
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 2 + 4 and  4 + 2 gives the same sum 6.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 24
Answer:
15 = 8 + 7                       7 + 8 = 15
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 8 + 7 and 7 +8  gives the same sum 15.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 25
Answer:
11 = 3 + 8        8 +3 = 11
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
The expressions 3 + 8 and 8 + 3 gives the same sum 11.

Question 7.
Number Sense
Complete each equation.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-in-Any-Order-Homework-Practice-2.1-Question-7
Explanation:
Changing the order of the addends in the expressions.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 14 blocks. 8 are cubes. The rest are cylinders. How many cylinders do you have?
Write two equations that describe your blocks:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 27

Answer:
Total number of Blocks = 14
Number of cubes = 8.
Number of Cylinders = total number Blocks – Number of Cubes
14 – 8 = 6.
Number of cylinders = 6
number of Cubes + number of Cylinders = total number Blocks
8 + 6 = 14
when we reverse the order the expression
6 + 8 = 14
Explanation:
Given total Blocks = 14
Number of cubes = 8
From the above calculation
Number of Cylinder = 6
Blocks = number of cubes + number of cylinders
8 + 6 = 14
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
6 + 8 = 14.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
There are 16 kids in a class. 7 have gone camping. The rest have not. How many kids have not gone camping?
Write two equations that describe the kids:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 28

Answer:
Total number Kids in the class= 16
Number of kids gone camping = 7.
Number of kids who have not gone camping = Total number of kids in the class – Number of kids gone camping
16 – 7 = 9.
Number of kids who have not gone camping = 9
number of kids who have gone camping + number of kids who have not gone camping = total number kids in the class
7 + 9 = 16.
when we reverse the order the expression
9 + 7 = 16.
Explanation:
Given total number kids in the class = 16
Number of kids who have gone camping = 7
From the above calculation
Number of kids who have not gone camping = 9
Total number kids in the class = number of kids who have gone camping + number of kids who have not gone camping
7 + 9 = 16
Changing the order of the addends does not change the sum.
9 + 7 = 16.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
Which time does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 29

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-in-Any-Order-Homework-Practice-2.1-Review-&-Refresh-Question-10
Explanation:
Half past 5 means 5:30. In the fig first three images indicate 5:30 where as half past 6 means 6:30.

Lesson 2.2 Use Doubles

Explore and Grow

Find each sum. How are the equations alike? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 30

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Explore-and-Grow

Explanation:
First two expressions are double. 6 + 6, 7 + 7
In the next  two expression
one is doubles plus 1 expression 6 + 7.
second is doubles minus 1 expression 7 + 6.

Show and Grow

Find the sum. Write the double you used.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 31
Answer:
4 + 5 = 9
4 + 4 = 8
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
4 + 5 is equal to 4 + 4 and 1 more.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 32
Answer:
7 + 6 = 13
7 + 7 = 14
Explanation:
Doubles minus 1
7 + 6 is equal to 1 less than 7 + 7.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 33

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Show-and-Grow-Question-3

Explanation:
Doubles minus 1
6 + 5 is equal to 1 less than 6 + 6.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 34

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Show-and-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
8 + 9  is equal to 8 + 8 and 1 more.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 35
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
3 + 4 is equal to 3 + 3 and 1 more

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 36
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Doubles minus 1
8 + 7 is equal to 1 less than 8 + 8

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 37

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
5 + 6 is equal to 1 less than 5 + 5.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 38
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.2-Use-Doubles-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-8
Explanation:
Doubles minus 1
10 +9 is equal to 1 less than 10 + 10.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 39
Answer:
2 + 3 = 5
2 + 2 = 4
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
2 + 3 is equal to 2+2 and 1 more.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 40

Answer:
5 + 4 = 9
5 + 5 = 10
Explanation:
5 + 4 is equal 1 less than 5 + 5.
Doubles minus 1.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 41

Answer:
6 + 7 = 13
6 + 6 = 12
Explanation:
6 + 7  is equal to 6 + 6 and 1 more.
Doubles plus 1.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 42
Answer:
9 + 8 = 17
9 + 9 = 18
Explanation:
9 + 8 is equal 1 less than 9 + 9.
Doubles minus 1.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
What double might Newton be thinking?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 43
Answer:
Given
Sum greater than 4
Addends less than 5
As per the above information the doubles can be 3 + 3, 4 + 4.
Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You make 9 mud pies. Your friend makes 1 fewer than you. How many mud pies do you and your friend make in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 44
Addition equation:
What double can you use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 45
Answer:
Number of mud pies i make = 9
My friend makes 1 fewer mud pies then me = 9- 1 = 8
Total number of Mud pies we both make = 9 + 8 = 17.
Double
9 + 9 = 18.
9 + 8 is 1 less than 9 + 9
Doubles minus 1.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You score 6 goals. Your friend scores 1 more than you. How many goals do you and your friend score in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 46
Answer:
Number of goals i scored = 6
Number of goals my friend scored = 6 + 1 = 7
Total number of goals we both scored = 6 + 7 = 13.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend jump in 13 puddles in all. You jump in 7. How many puddles does your friend jump in?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 47
Answer:
Total number of puddles me and my friend jumped = 13
Total number of puddles i jumped = 7
Number of puddles my friend jumped = 13 – 7 = 6.
7 + 6 = 13.

Use Doubles Homework & Practice 2.2

Find the sum. Write the double you used.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 48
Answer:
4 + 3 = 7
4 + 4 = 8
Explanation:
Doubles minus 1
4 + 3 is equal to 1 less than 4 + 4.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 49
Answer:
5 + 6 = 11
Doubles 5 + 5 = 10
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
5 + 6 is equal to 5 + 5 and 1 more

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 50
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Use-Doubles- Homework-&-Practice-2.2-Question-3
Explanation:
Doubles minus 1
9 + 8 is equal to 1 less than 9 + 9

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2- Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Use-Doubles- Homework-&-Practice-2.2-Question-4
Explanation:
6 + 7 is equal to 6 + 6 and 1 more.
Doubles plus 1.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 52
Answer:
8 + 7 = 15
8 + 8 = 16
Explanation:
8 + 7 is equal to 1 less than 8 + 8.
Doubles minus 1.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 53

Answer:
9 + 10 = 19
9 + 9 = 18
Explanation:
Doubles plus 1
9 + 10 is equal to 9 + 9 and 1 more.

Question 7.
Number Sense
Which doubles can you use to find 8 + 9?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 54
Answer:
To find the expression 8 + 9
8 + 9 is equal to 8 + 8 and 1 more
8 +9 is equal to 1 less than 9 + 9.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You tell 5 jokes. Your friend tells 1 fewer than you. How many jokes do you and your friend tell in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 55
Answer:
Number of jokes i told = 5
Number of jokes my friend told = 5 – 1 = 4
Total number of jokes me and my friend told in together = 5 + 4 = 9
9 jokes together.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Newton paints 3 paw prints. Descartes paints 1 more than Newton. How many paw prints do they paint in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 56
Answer:
Number of paw prints by Newton paints = 3
Number of paw prints by Descartes paints is 1 more than newton = 3 + 1 = 4
Total number of paw prints both Newton and Descartes paint =3 + 4 = 7
Total 7 paw prints.

Review & Refresh

Is the equation true or false?

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 57
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Use-Doubles-Homework-&-Practice-2.2-Review-&-Refresh-Question-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 58
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Use-Doubles-Homework-&-Practice-2.2-Review-&-Refresh-Question-11

Lesson 2.3 Add Three Numbers

Explore and Grow

Find the sums.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 59
What is the same? What is different?
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Explore-and-Grow
The sum remains same.
The difference is the order of the addends added.
Explanation:
Changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
In all the three expressions the sum is same :14

Show and Grow

Circle two addends to add first. Write their sum. Then find the sum of all three addends.

Question 1.
7 + 3 + 4 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 60
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Show-and-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 7, 4 give the sum 11
and then adding the another addend 3 to the sum 11.
Gives the sum 14.

Question 2.
1 + 5 + 3 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 61
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Show-and-Grow-Question-2
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 1 , 5 give the sum 6.
and then adding the another addend 3 to the sum 6.
Gives the sum 9.

Question 3.
9 + 4 + 4 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Show-and-Grow-Question-3
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 4, 4 give the sum 8.
and then adding the another addend 9 to the sum 8.
Gives the sum 17.

Question 4.
5 + 2 + 5 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Show-and-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 5, 2 give the sum 7.
and then adding the another addend 5 to the sum 7.
Gives the sum 12.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
3 + 5 + 5 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 5, 2 give the sum 7.
and then adding the another addend 5 to the sum 7.
Gives the sum 12.

Question 6.
9 + 0 + 7 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 9, 0 give the sum 9.
and then adding the another addend 7 to the sum 9.
Gives the sum 16.

Question 7.
4 + 2 + 3 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 2, 3 give the sum 5.
and then adding the another addend 4 to the sum 5.
Gives the sum 9.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 62
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-8

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 63
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 64
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 65
Answer :
9 + 5 + 6 = 20

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 66
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-12

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 67
Answer :
3 + 7 + 7 = 17
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 5, 2 give the sum 7.
and then adding the another addend 5 to the sum 7.
Gives the sum 12.

Question 14.
Structure
Write the missing addends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 68
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-14

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 6 presents. Newton and Descartes each have 4 presents. How many presents are there in all?
Addition equation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 69
Answer :
Number of presents with me = 6
Number of presents with Newton = 4
Number of Presents with Descartes = 4
Total Number of presents in all = 6 + 4 + 4 = 14

Show and Grow

Question 15.
You have 8 crayons. Newton and Descartes each have 5 crayons. How many crayons are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 70
Answer :
Number of Crayons with me = 8
Number of Crayons with Newton = 5
Number of Crayons with Descartes = 5
Total Number of Crayons in all = 8 + 5 + 5 = 18

Question 16.
You, Newton, and Descartes eat 18 apple slices in all. Newton and Descartes each eat 6 slices. How many apple slices do you eat?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 71
Answer :
Number of apples slices eaten by Me , Newton and Descartes = 18
Number of apples eaten by Newton =6
Number of apples eaten by Descartes = 6
Total Number of apples eaten by Newton and Descartes = 6 + 6 = 12
Number of apple slices eaten by me = 18 – 12 = 6

Question 17.
A treasure chest has 20 jewels in all. 7 are blue. 6 are green. The rest are red. How many jewels are red?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 72
Answer :
Number of jewels in Treasure chest = 20
Number of blue jewels = 7
Number of green jewels = 6
Number of blue and green jewels = 7 + 6 = 13
Number of red jewels = 20 – 13 = 7

Add Three Numbers Homework & Practice 2.3

Circle two addends to add first. Write their sum. Then find the sum of all three addends.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 73
Answer :
2 + 5 + 1 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-1
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 5, 1 give the sum 6.
and then adding the another addend 2 to the sum 6.
Gives the sum 8.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 74
Answer
6 + 4 + 4 = 14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-2
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 4, 4 give the sum 8.
and then adding the another addend 6 to the sum 8.
Gives the sum 14.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 75
Answer :
0 + 8 + 7 = 15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-3
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 8, 7 give the sum 15.
and then adding the another addend 0 to the sum 15.
Gives the sum 15.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 76
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-4
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 6, 5 give the sum 11.
and then adding the another addend 5 to the sum 11.
Gives the sum 11.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 77
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-5
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 4, 9 give the sum 13.
and then adding the another addend 0 to the sum 13.
Gives the sum 13.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 78

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-6
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 3, 3 give the sum 6.
and then adding the another addend 3 to the sum 6.
Gives the sum 9.

Question 7.
2 + 8 + 7 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-7
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 8, 7 give the sum 15.
and then adding the another addend 2 to the sum 15.
Gives the sum 17.

Question 8.
9 + 8 + 1 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-8
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 8, 1 give the sum 9.
and then adding the another addend 9 to the sum 9.
Gives the sum 18.

Question 9.
8 + 7 + 5 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-9
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 7, 5 give the sum 12.
and then adding the another addend 8 to the sum 12.
Gives the sum 20.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Complete the number puzzle so that each branch has a sum of 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 79
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-10
Explanation :
Sum should be 20
8 + ____ + 7 = 20  so , _____= 20 – 15 = 5
10 + ____ + 10 = 20 so , _______ = 20 – 20 = 0
_____ +  3 + 9 = 20 so , _____ = 20 – 12 = 8
4 + 7 + _____ = 20 so, _____ = 20 – 11 = 9

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You, Newton, and Descartes have 17 stampers in all. Newton and Descartes each have 6. How many stampers do you have? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 80
Answer :
Number of stampers with me , Newton and Descartes = 17
Number of Stampers with Newton = 6
Number of stampers with Descartes = 6
Total Number of stampers with Newton and Descartes = 6 + 6 = 12
Number of Stampers with me = 17 – 12 = 5 Stampers

Question 12.
Make a quick sketch. Complete the sentences.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 81
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Add-Three-Numbers-Homework-Practice-2.3-Question-12

Lesson 2.4 Make a 10 to Add

Explore and Grow

Use counters and the ten frames to find the sum. How can you make a 10 to solve?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 82
Answer :

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.4-Make-a-10-to-Add-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
We have 7counters in first table and 6 counters in second table. To make ten counters in first table we should move 3 counters from second table to first table. then,we will have ten counters in first table and 3 in second table. add both 10 + 3 = 13
So, 7 + 6 = 13 .
Show and Grow

Make a 10 to add.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 83
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.4-Make-10-to-Show-Grow-Add-Question-1
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 7  as  6 + 1 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 6 to 10 we get sum , 16 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 84
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.4-Make-10-to-Show-Grow-Add-Question-2
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 5 as  4 + 1 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 4 to 10 we get sum , 14 .

Question 3.
6 + 8 = ?
10 + __ = ___
So, 6 + 8 = ___
Answer :
6 + 8 =
4 + 2 + 8 =
10 + 4 = 14
So, 6 + 8 = 14
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 then write addend 6  as  4 + 2 .
then add 8 + 2 we get , 10 and then later add 4 to 10 we get sum , 14 .

Question 4.
7 + 4 = ?
10 + __ = ___
So, 7 + 4 = ___
Answer :
7 + 4 =
7 + 3 + 1 =
10 + 1 = 11
So, 7 + 4 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 then write addend 4 as  3 + 1 .
then add 7 + 3 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Make a 10 to add.

Question 5.
2 + 9 = ?
10 + __ = ___
So, 2 + 9 = ___
Answer :
2 + 9 =
1 + 1 + 9 =
1 + 10 = 11
So, 2 + 9 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 2 as  1 + 1 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Question 6.
8 + 4 = ?
10 + ___ = __
So, 8 + 4 = ___
Answer :
8 + 4 =
2 + 2 + 8 =
2 + 10 = 12
So, 8 + 4 = 12
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 then write addend 4  as  2 + 2 .
then add 2 + 8 we get , 10 and then later add 2 to 10 we get sum , 12 .

Question 7.
9 +6 = ?
10+ ___ = ___
So, 9 + 6 = ___
Answer :
9 + 6 =
9 + 1 + 5 =
10 + 5 = 15
So, 9 + 6 = 15
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 6  as  5 + 1 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 5 to 10 we get sum , 15 .

Question 8.
7 + 7 = ?
10 + __ = ___
So, 7 + 7 = ___
Answer :
7 + 7 =
7 + 3 + 4 =
10 + 4 = 14
So, 7 + 7 = 14
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 then write addend 7 as  3 + 4 .
then add 7 + 3 we get , 10 and then later add 4 to 10 we get sum , 14 .

Question 9.
6 + 5 = ___
Answer :
6 + 5 =
6 + 4 + 1 =
10 + 1 = 11
So, 6 + 5 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 6 as 10 we should add 4 to the 6 then write addend 5  as  4 + 1 .
then add 6 + 4 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Question 10.
8 + 9 = ___
Answer :
8 + 9 =
7 + 1 + 9 =
7 + 10 = 17
So, 8 + 9 = 17
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 8  as  7 + 1 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 7 to 10 we get sum , 17 .

Question 11.
7 + 5 = ___
Answer :
7 + 5 =
7 + 3 + 2=
10 + 2 = 12
So, 7 + 5 = 12
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 then write addend 5 as  3 + 2 .
then add 7 + 3 we get , 10 and then later add 2 to 10 we get sum , 12 .

Question 12.
6 + 6 = ___
Answer :
6 + 6 =
6 + 4 + 2 =
10 + 2 = 12
So, 6 + 6 = 12
Explanation :
To make addend 6 as 10 we should add 4 to the 6 then write addend 6  as  4 + 2 .
then add 6 + 4 we get , 10 and then later add 2 to 10 we get sum , 12 .

Question 13.
9 + 9 = ___
Answer :
9 + 9 =
9 + 1 + 8 =
10 + 8 = 18
So, 9 + 9 = 18
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 9 as  1 + 8 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 8 to 10 we get sum , 18 .

Question 14.
8 + 7 = __
Answer :
8 + 7 =
5 + 2 + 8 =
10 + 5 = 15
So, 8 + 7 = 15
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 then write addend 7  as  5 + 2 .
then add 8 + 2 we get , 10 and then later add 5 to 10 we get sum , 15 .

Question 15.
__ = 4 + 7
Answer :
4 + 7 =
1 + 3 + 7 =
1 + 10 = 11
So, 4 + 7 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 then write addend 4  as  1 + 3 .
then add 3 + 7 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Question 16.
__ = 9 + 4
Answer :
9 + 4 =
9 + 1 + 3 =
10 + 3 = 13
So, 9 + 4 = 13
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 then write addend 4  as  1 + 3 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .

Question 17.
__ = 8 + 8
Answer :
8 + 8 =
6 + 2 + 8 =
6 + 10 = 16
So, 8 + 8 = 16
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 then write addend 8 as  6 + 2 .
then add 2 + 8 we get , 10 and then later add 6 to 10 we get sum , 16 .

Question 18.
__ = 6 + 8
Answer :
6 + 8 =
4 + 2 + 8 =
4 + 10 = 14
So, 6 + 8 = 14
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 then write addend 6  as  4 + 2 .
then add 2 + 8 we get , 10 and then later add 4 to 10 we get sum , 14 .

Question 19.
Number Sense
How can you make a 10 to find 7 + 6?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 85
Answer :
7 + 6 =
7 + 3 + 3 =
10 + 3 = 13
So, 7 + 6 = 13

7 + 6 =
3 + 4 + 6 =
3 + 10 = 13
So, 7 + 6 = 13
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 then write addend 6  as  3 + 3 .
then add 3 + 7 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .
To make addend 6 as 10 we should add 4 to the 6 then write addend 7  as  3 + 4 .
then add 4 + 6 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 13 boys and 4 girls in a line. How many girls must join the line so that the numbers of boys and girls are equal?
Addition equation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 86
Answer :
Number of boys = 13
Number of girls = 4
Number of girls required to add more to become 13 = 4 + _____ = 13 = 13 – 4 = 9
Therefore, Number of girls must join the line so that the numbers of boys and girls are equal = 9 girls .

Show and Grow

Question 20.
There are 16 seals and 7 whales. How many whales must join them so that the numbers of seals and whales are equal?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 87
Answer :
Number of Seals = 16
Number of Whales = 7
Number of whales must join them so that the numbers of seals and whales are equal = 7 + ____ = 16 = 16 – 7 = 9
Therefore, Number of whales must join them so that the numbers of seals and whales are equal = 9

Question 21.
You and your friend count 15 stars in all. You count 8. How many stars does your friend count?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 88
Answer :
Number of stars Counted by me and my friend = 15
Number of stars counted by me = 8
Number of stars Counted by my friend = 15 – 8 = 7

Question 22.
There are 17 fish in a tank. 9 are green. The rest are blue. How many fish are blue?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 89
Answer :
Number of Fishes = 17
Number of green Fishes = 9
Number of blue Fishes = 17 – 9 = 8

Make a 10 to Add Homework & Practice 2.4

Make a ten to add.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 90
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Make-10-Add-Homework-Practice-2.4-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 91
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Make-10-Add-Homework-Practice-2.4-Question-2

Question 3.
7 + 6 = ?
10 + __ = ___
So, 7 + 6 = ___
Answer :
7 + 6 =
7 + 3 + 3 =
3 + 10 = 13
So, 7 + 6 = 13
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 then write addend 6 as  3 + 3 .
then add 3 + 7 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .

Question 4.
8 + 3 = ___
10 + __ = ___
So, 8 + 3 = __
Answer :
8 + 3=
8 + 2 + 1 =
1 + 10 = 11
So, 8 + 3 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 then write addend 3  as  2 + 1 .
then add 2 + 8 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Make a 10 to add.

Question 5.
3 + 9 = ___
Answer :
3 + 9 =
2 + 1 + 9 =
2 + 10 = 12
So, 3 + 9 = 12
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 so write addend  3 as  2 + 1 .
then add 1 + 9 we get , 10 and then later add 2 to 10 we get sum , 12 .

Question 6.
8 + 8 = ___
Answer :
8 + 8 =
8 + 2 + 6 =
10 + 6 = 16
So, 8 + 8 = 16
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 so write addend  8 as  2 + 6 .
then add 8 + 2 we get , 10 and then later add 6 to 10 we get sum , 16 .

Question 7.
7 +4 = ___
Answer :
7 + 4 =
7 + 3 + 1 =
10 + 1 = 11
So, 7 + 4 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 so write addend  4 as  3 + 1 .
then add 7 + 3 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Question 8.
4 + 9 = ___
Answer :
4 + 9 =
3 + 1 + 9 =
10 + 3 = 13
So, 4 + 9 = 13
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 so write addend 4 as  3 + 1 .
then add 1 + 9 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .

Question 9.
___ = 6 + 9
Answer :
6 + 9 =
5 + 1 + 9 =
10 + 5 = 15
So, 10 + 5 = 15
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 so write addend  6 as  5 + 1 .
then add 1 + 9 we get , 10 and then later add 5 to 10 we get sum , 15 .

Question 10.
___ = 4 + 8
Answer :
4 + 8 =
2 + 2 + 8 =
10 + 2 = 12
So, 4 + 8 = 12
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 so write addend  4 as  2 + 2 .
then add 8 + 2 we get , 10 and then later add 2 to 10 we get sum , 12 .

Question 11.
__ = 7 + 8
Answer :
7 + 8 =
5 + 2 + 8 =
10 + 5 = 15
So, 7 + 8 = 15
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 so write addend  7 as  5 + 2 .
then add 8 + 2 we get , 10 and then later add 5 to 10 we get sum , 15 .

Question 12.
___ = 9 + 2
9 + 2 =
9 + 1 + 1 =
10 + 1 = 11
So, 9 + 2 = 11
Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 so write addend 2 as  1 + 1 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

Question 13.
Number Sense
Complete each equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 92

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Make-10-Add-Homework-Practice-2.4-Question-13

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
There are 12 giraffes and 5 elephants. How many elephants must join them so that the numbers of giraffes and elephants are equal?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 93
Answer :
Number of Giraffes = 12
Number of Elephants = 5
Number of more elephants must join them so that the numbers of giraffes and elephants are equal = 12 – 5 = 7
Therefore 7 more elephants must join them so that the numbers of giraffes and elephants will be equal .

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
There are 14 horses on a farm. 7 are brown. The rest are white. How many are white?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 94
Answer :
Number of Horses = 14
Number of Brown Horses = 7
Number of White Horses = 14 – 7 = 7

Review & Refresh

Compare.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 95
Answer :
21 < 22
Explanation :
21 is lesser than 22

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 96
Answer :
43 > 34
Explanation :
43 is greater than 34

Lesson 2.5 Count On and Count Back to Subtract

Explore and Grow

Show two ways to find the difference on the number lines.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 97
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 13 and count back 9.the arrow ending at 4 shows the difference.
Count on to find the difference – Start at 9 and count on to 13.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 98
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 11 and count back 5.the arrow ending at 6 shows the difference.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 99
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 15 and count back 8.the arrow ending at 7 shows the difference.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 100
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 9 and count back 6.the arrow ending at 3 shows the difference.

Question 4.
16 – 8 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 16 and count back 8.the arrow ending at 8 shows the difference.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 101

Question 5.
11 – 8 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 11 and count back 8.the arrow ending at 3 shows the difference.

Question 6.
10 – 6 = ___
Answer :

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-6

Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 10 and count back 6. The arrow ending at 4 shows the difference.

Question 7.
14 – 6 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 14 and count back 6. The arrow ending at 8 shows the difference.

Question 8.
11 – 4 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-8
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 11 and count back 4. The arrow ending at 7 shows the difference.

Question 9.
15 – 9 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-9
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 15 and count back 9. The arrow ending at 6 shows the difference.

Question 10.
16 – 7 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 16 and count back 7. The arrow ending at 9 shows the difference.

Question 11.
14 – 9 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 14 and count back 9. The arrow ending at 5 shows the difference.

Question 12.
12 – 4 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-12
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 12 and count back 4. The arrow ending at 8 shows the difference.

Question 13.
10 – 7 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-13
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 10 and count back 7. The arrow ending at 3 shows the difference.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 102
Answer :
8 – 4 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-14
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 8 and count back 4. The arrow ending at 4 shows the difference.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 103
Answer :
11 – 6 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-15
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 11 and count back 6. The arrow ending at 5 shows the difference.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 104
Answer :
18 – 9 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-16
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 18 and count back 9. The arrow ending at 9 shows the difference.

Question 17.
__ = 9 – 2
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-17
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 9 and count back 2. The arrow ending at 7 shows the difference.

Question 18.
___ = 13 – 5
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-18
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 13 and count back 5. The arrow ending at 8 shows the difference.

Question 19.
__ = 14 – 7
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-19
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 14 and count back 7. The arrow ending at 7 shows the difference.

Question 20.
Structure
What strategy did Newton use to solve? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 105
Answer :
13 – 8 = 5
The Method Used here is Count On to find the difference
Explanation :
It started at 8 and count on to 13 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 13 backpacks in your classroom. 9 are taken. How many backpacks are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 106
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 107
Answer :
Number of backpacks = 13
Number of backpacks taken = 9
Number of backpacks left = 13 – 9 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson 2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 10 and count back 6. The arrow ending at 4 shows the difference.

Show and Grow

Question 21.
There are 17 trays in a stack. 7 are used. How many trays are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 108
Answer :
Number of trays = 17
Number of used trays = 7
Number of trays left  =17 – 7 = 10
Therefore 10 trays are not used .

Question 22.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton wants to download some songs. 8 songs are downloaded. There are 6 songs left. How many songs did Newton want to download?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 109
Answer :
Number of songs downloaded = 8
Number of songs left for downloading = 7
Total Number of songs = 8 + 7 = 15 .
Therefore , newton want to download 15 songs .

Count On and Count Back to Subtract Homework & Practice 2.5

Question 1.
7 – 5 = __
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-1Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 7 and count back 5. The arrow ending at 2 shows the difference.

Question 2.
11 – 7 = __
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-2
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 11 and count back 7. The arrow ending at 4 shows the difference.

Question 3.
12 – 5 = __
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-3
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 12 and count back 5. The arrow ending at 7 shows the difference.

Question 4.
17 – 8 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-4
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 17 and count back 8. The arrow ending at 9 shows the difference.

Question 5.
7 – 2 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-5
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 7 and count back 2. The arrow ending at 5 shows the difference.

Question 6.
16 – 9 = ___
Answer :

Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 16 and count back 9. The arrow ending at 5 shows the difference.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 110
Answer :
9 – 3 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-7
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 9 and count back 3. The arrow ending at 6 shows the difference.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 111
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-8
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 13 and count back 4. The arrow ending at 9 shows the difference.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 112
Answer :
12 – 6 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-9
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 12 and count back 6. The arrow ending at 6 shows the difference.

Question 10.
___ = 10 – 8
Answer :
10 – 8 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-10
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 10 and count back 8. The arrow ending at 2 shows the difference.

Question 11.
__ = 8 – 5
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-11
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 11 and count back 5. The arrow ending at 3 shows the difference.

Question 12.
__ = 12 – 3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-12
Explanation :
Count back to find the difference – start at 12 and count back 3. The arrow ending at 9 shows the difference.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Complete the squares so the differences on the outside are correct.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 113
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-&-Practice-2.5-Question-13
Explanation :
9 – 4 = 5
7 – 4 = 3
9 – 7 = 2
4 – 4 = 0
All above equations are correct

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
15 kids are in line to play four square. 7 of them leave. How many kids are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 114
Answer :
Number of kids = 15
Number of kids left the play = 7
Number of kids left to play = 15 – 7 = 8

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
Newton has 6 pieces of macaroni. Descartes has 15. How many fewer pieces does Newton have than Descartes?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 115
Answer :
Number of pieces of macaroni with Newton = 6
Number of pieces of macaroni with Descartes = 15
Number of fewer pieces does Newton have than Descartes = 15 – 6 = 9
Therefore , Newton 9 fewer pieces than Descartes .

Question 16.
Precision
Draw more lines to show fourths.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 116

Lesson 2.6 Relate Addition and Subtraction

Explore and Grow

Write an addition equation. Complete the part-part-whole model to match. Write a related subtraction equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 117
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.6-Relate-Addition-Subtraction-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 9 and 6 to get 15 is the opposite of 15 minus 9, leaving 6 or the opposite of 15 minus 6, leaving 9

Show and Grow

Question 1.
5 + 3 = ___
8 – 5 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 118
Answer :
5 + 3 = 8
8 – 5 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.6-Relate-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 5 and 3 to get 8 is the opposite of 8 minus 5, leaving 3 or the opposite of 8 minus 3, leaving 5

Question 2.
4 + 7 = __
11 – 4 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 119

Answer :
4 + 7 = 11
11 – 4 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.6-Relate-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 4 and 7 to get 11 is the opposite of 11 minus 4, leaving 7 or the opposite of 11 minus 7, leaving 4

Question 3.
3 + 9 = ___
12 – 3 = ___
Answer :
3 + 9 = 12
12 – 3 = 9
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 3 and 9 to get 12 is the opposite of 12 minus 9, leaving 3 or the opposite of 12 minus 3, leaving 9

Question 4.
8 + 6 = ___
14 – 8 = ___
Answer :
8 + 6 = 14
14 – 8 = 6
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 8 and 6 to get 14 is the opposite of 14 minus 8, leaving 6 or the opposite of 14 minus 6, leaving 8

Question 5.
7 + 8 = ___
15 – 7 = ___
Answer :
7 + 8 = 15
15 – 7 = 8
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 7 and 8 to get 15 is the opposite of 15 minus 7, leaving 8 or the opposite of 15 minus 8, leaving 7

Question 6.
9 + 9 = ___
18 – 9 = ___
Answer :
9 + 9 = 18
18 – 9 = 9
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 9 and 9 to get 18 is the opposite of 18 minus 9, leaving 9

Question 7.
4 + 5 = ___
9 – 4 = ___
Answer :
4 + 5 = 9
9 – 4 = 5
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 4 and 5 to get 9 is the opposite of 9 minus 4, leaving 5 or the opposite of 9 minus 5, leaving 4

Question 8.
5 + 7 = __
12 – 7 = ___
Answer :
5 + 7 = 12
12 – 7 = 5
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 5 and 7 to get 12 is the opposite of 12 minus 7, leaving 5 or the opposite of 12 minus 5, leaving 7

Question 9.
8 + 8 = ___
16 – 8 = ___
Answer :
8 + 8 = 16
16 – 8 = 8
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 8 and 8 to get 16 is the opposite of 16 minus 8, leaving 8

Question 10.
5 + 2 = ___
7 – 2 = ___
Answer :
5 + 2 = 7
7 – 2 = 5
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 5 and 2 to get 7 is the opposite of 7 minus 2, leaving 5 or the opposite of 7 minus 5, leaving 2

Question 11.
4 + 6 = ___
10 – 4 = ___
Answer :
4 + 6 = 10
10 – 4 = 6
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 4 and 6 to get 10 is the opposite of 10 minus 4, leaving 6 or the opposite of 10 minus 6, leaving 4

Question 12.
2 + 6 = ___
8 – 2 = ___
Answer :
2 + 6 = 8
8 – 2 = 6
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 2 and 6 to get 8 is the opposite of 8 minus 2, leaving 6 or the opposite of 8 minus 6, leaving 2

Question 13.
7 + 7 = ___
14 – 7 = ___
Answer :
7 + 7 = 14
14 – 7 = 7
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 7 and 7 to get 14 is the opposite of 14 minus 7, leaving 7

Question 14.
6 + 5 = ___
11 – 6 = ___
Answer :
6 + 5 = 11
11 – 6 = 5
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 6 and 5 to get 11 is the opposite of 11 minus 5, leaving 6 or the opposite of 11 minus 6, leaving 5

Question 15.
9 + 6 = ___
15 – 6 = __
Answer :
9 + 6 = 15
15 – 6 = 9
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 9 and 6 to get 15 is the opposite of 15 minus 9, leaving 6 or the opposite of 15 minus 6, leaving 9

Question 16.
3 + 8 = ___
11 – 8 = ___
11 – 3 = __
Answer :
3 + 8 = 11
11 – 8 = 3
11 – 3 = 8
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 3 and 8 to get 11 is the opposite of 11 minus 8, leaving 3 or the opposite of 11 minus 3, leaving 8

Question 17.
9 + 7 = ___
16 – 9 = ___
16 – 7 = ___
Answer :
9 + 7 = 16
16 – 9 = 7
16 – 7 = 9
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 9 and 7 to get 16 is the opposite of 16 minus 9, leaving 7 or the opposite of 16 minus 7, leaving 9

Question 18.
8 + 5 = ___
13 – 5 = ___
13 – 8 = ___
Answer :
8 + 5 = 13
13 – 5 = 8
13 – 8 = 5
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 8 and 5 to get 13 is the opposite of 13 minus 5, leaving 8 or the opposite of 13 minus 8, leaving 5

Question 19.
Structure
Complete the number bond. Write related addition and subtraction equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 120
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.6-Relate-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-19
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 7 and 8 to get 15 is the opposite of 15 minus 7, leaving 8 or the opposite of 15 minus 8, leaving 7

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 17 glow sticks. You give away 9 of them. How many glow sticks do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 121
Which addition fact can help you subtract?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 123
Answer :
Number of Glow sticks = 17
Number of glow sticks given away = 9
Number of glow sticks left = 17 – 9 = 8

Show and Grow

Question 20.
A box of sidewalk chalk has 20 pieces. You use 10 of them. How many pieces are not used?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 124
Answer :
Number of chalks = 20
Number of chalks used = 10
Number of chalks not used = 20 – 10 = 10

Question 21.
There are 7 more butterflies than birds. There are 8 birds. How many butterflies are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 125
Answer :
Number of birds = 8
Number of butterflies = 7 more butterflies than birds = 7 + 8 = 15

Question 22.
A kitchen drawer has 9 fewer forks than spoons. There are 15 spoons. How many forks are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 126
Answer :
Number of spoons = 15
Number of forks = 9 fewer forks than spoons = 15 – 9 = 6

Relate Addition and Subtraction Homework & Practice 2.6

Question 1.
5 + 5 = ___
10 – 5 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 127
Answer :
5 + 5 = 10
10 – 5 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Relate-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.6-Question-1
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 5 and 5 to get 10 is the opposite of 10 minus 5, leaving 5

Question 2.
5 + 8 = ___
13 – 8 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 128
Answer :
5 + 8 = 13
13 – 8 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Relate-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.6-Question-2

Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 5 and 8 to get 13 is the opposite of 13 minus 5, leaving  8 or the opposite of 13 minus 8, leaving 4

Question 3.
3 + 4 = ___
7 – 3 = ___
Answer :
3 + 4 = 7
7 – 3 = 4

Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 3 and 4 to get 7 is the opposite of 7 minus 3, leaving  4 or the opposite of 7 minus 4, leaving 3

Question 4.
8 + 6 = __
14 – 6 = ___
Answer :
8 + 6 = 14
14 – 6 = 8
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 8 and 6 to get 14 is the opposite of 14 minus 6, leaving 8 or the opposite of 14 minus 8, leaving 6

Question 5.
6 + 6 = ___
12 – 6 = ___
Answer :
6 + 6 = 12
12 – 6 = 6
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 6 and 6 to get 12 is the opposite of 12 minus 6, leaving 6

Question 6.
5 + 6 = ___
11 – 6 = __
11 – 5 = ___
Answer :
5 + 6 = 11
11 – 6 = 5
11 – 5 = 6
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 5 and 6 to get 11 is the opposite of 11 minus 6, leaving 5 or the opposite of 11 minus 5, leaving 6

Question 7.
9 + 8 = ___
17 – 9 = ___
17 – 8 = ___
Answer :
9 + 8 = 17
17 – 9 = 8
17 – 8 = 9
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 9 and 8 to get 17 is the opposite of 17 minus 9, leaving 8 or the opposite of 17 minus 8, leaving 9

Question 8.
7 + 9 = ___
16 – 9 = ___
16 – 7 = ___
Answer :
7 + 9 = 16
16 – 9 = 7
16 – 7 = 9
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 7 and 9 to get 16 is the opposite of 16 minus 9, leaving 7 or the opposite of 16 minus 7, leaving 9

Question 9.
Number Sense
Find the sums. Write a related subtraction equation for each addition equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 129
Answer :
4 + 9 = 13 and 13 – 4 = 9
7 + 5 = 12 and 12 – 7 = 5
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 4 and 9 to get 13 is the opposite of 13 minus 4, leaving 9
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 7 and 5 to get 12 is the opposite of 12 minus 7, leaving 5

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
You have 13 colors of modeling clay. You use 7 of them to make a sculpture. How many colors are not used?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 130
Answer :
Number of colors with me = 13
Number of colors used = 7
Number of colors not used = 13 – 7 = 6 colors

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
There are 7 more snails than caterpillars. There are 4 caterpillars. How many snails are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 131
Answer :
Number of caterpillars = 4
Number of snails = 7 more snails than caterpillars.  = 7 + 4 = 11

Question 12.
You have 6 bears. Some are brown. The rest are black. You have more brown bears than black bears. How many brown and black bears can you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 132
Show how you know:
Answer :
Option 1 and Option 4
Explanation :
Number of bears = 6
brown bears > black bears
we cant say the exact number of black or brown bears but as per options we can solve
Option 1 – 5 brown and 1 black satisfy the condition.
Option 4 – 4 brown and 2 black satisfy the condition.
brown bears > black bears

Lesson 2.7 Get to 10 to Subtract

Explore and Grow

How can you use the number line to find the missing number?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 133
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.7-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
Number of linking arrows represent the subtrahend of above equation = 4

Show and Grow

Get to 10 to subtract.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 134
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20- Lesson 2.7-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
The subtrahend 6 is written as 3 + 3 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 135
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20- Lesson 2.7-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 2 + 6 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 6 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 4.

Question 3.
14 – 8 = ?
10 – __ = __
So, 14 – 8 = ___.
Answer :
14 – 8
14- (4 + 4)
10 – 4 = 6
So, 14 – 8 = 6
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 4 + 4 so that the Minuend 14 is subtracted with 4 to get 10. then 4 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 6.

Question 4.
16 – 7 = ?
10 – __ = __
So, 16 – 7 = ___
Answer :
16 – 7
16 – (6 + 1 )
10 – 1= 9
So, 16 – 7 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as 6 + 1 so that the Minuend 16 is subtracted with 6 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Get to 10 to subtract.

Question 5.
12 – 6 = ?
10 – __ = __
So, 12 – 6 = __
Answer :
12 – 6 =
12 – (2 + 4 )
10 – 4 = 6
So, 12 – 6 = 6
Explanation :
The subtrahend 6 is written as 2 + 4 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 4 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 6.

Question 6.
13 – 7 = __
10 – __ = __
So, 13 – 7 = ___
Answer :
13 – 7 =
13 – (3 + 4)
10 – 4 = 6
So, 13 – 7 = 6
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as 3 + 4 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 4 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 6.

Question 7.
15 – 9 = ?
10 – __ = ___
So, 15 – 9 = ___
Answer :
15 – 9 =
15 – (5 + 4)
10 – 4 = 6
So, 15 – 9 = 6
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 5 + 4 so that the Minuend 15 is subtracted with 5 to get 10. then 4 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 6.

Question 8.
14 – 6 = ?
10 – __ = __
So, 14 – 6 = __
Answer :
14 – 6 =
14 – ( 4 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 14 – 6 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 6 is written as 4 + 2 so that the Minuend 14 is subtracted with 4 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Question 9.
13 – 8 = ___
Answer :
13 – 8 =
13 – ( 3 + 5 )
10 – 5 = 5
So, 13 – 8 = 5
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 3 + 5 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 5 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 5.

Question 10.
12 – 4= ___
Answer :
12 – 4 =
12 – ( 2 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 12 – 4 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 4 is written as 2 + 2 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Question 11.
17 – 9 = __
Answer :
17 – 9 =
17 – ( 7 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 17 – 9 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 7 + 2 so that the Minuend 17 is subtracted with 7 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Question 12.
15 – 8 = __
Answer :
15 – 8 =
15 – ( 5 + 3 )
10 – 3 = 7
So, 15 – 8 = 7
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 5 + 23 so that the Minuend 15 is subtracted with 5 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 13.
12 – 7 = ___
Answer :
12 – 7 =
12 – ( 2 + 5 )
10 – 5 = 5
So, 12 – 7 = 5
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as  2 + 5 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 5 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 5.

Question 14.
13 – 4 = ___
Answer :
13 – 4 =
13 – ( 3 + 1 )
10 – 1 = 9
So, 13 – 4 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 4 is written as 3 + 1 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 15.
__ = 12 – 3
Answer :
12 – 3 =
12 – ( 2 + 1 )
10 – 1 = 9
So, 12 – 3 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 3 is written as 2 + 1 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 16.
__ = 16 – 7
Answer :
16 – 7 =
16 – ( 6 + 1 )
10 – 1 = 9
So, 16 – 7 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as 6 + 1 so that the Minuend 16 is subtracted with 6 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 17.
___ = 14 – 9
Answer :
14 – 9 =
14 – ( 4 + 5 )
10 – 5 = 5
So, 14 – 9 = 5
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 4 + 5 so that the Minuend 14 is subtracted with 4 to get 10. then 5 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 5.

Question 18.
__ = 12 – 9
Answer :
12 – 9 =
12 – ( 2 + 7 )
10 – 7 = 3
So, 12 – 9 = 3
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 2 + 7 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 7 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 3.

Question 19.
Number Sense
How can you get to 10 to find 13 −5?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 136
Answer :
13 – 5 =
13 – ( 3 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 13 – 5 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 5 is written as 3+ 2 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A first-aid kit has 16 bandages. You use 7 of them. How many bandages are left?
Equation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 137
Answer :
Number of bandages = 16
Number of used bandages = 7
Number of bandages not used = 16 – 7 = 9

Show and Grow

Question 20.
There are 12 elephants at a watering hole. 5 of them leave. How many elephants are left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 138
Answer :
Number of Elephants at watering hole = 12
Number of Elephants left the watering hole  = 5
Number of Elephants at Watering hole now = 12 – 5 = 7

Question 21.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 17 hot-air balloons on the ground. 5 of them take off at 1:00. 4 more take off at 1:30. How many balloons are still on the ground?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 139

Explain how you found the number of balloons still on the ground.
______________________________________
______________________________________
Answer :
Number of hot-air balloons on the ground = 17
Number of balloons take off at 1 : 00 = 5
Number of balloons take off at 1 : 30 = 4
Number of balloons left on ground = 17 – 5 – 4 = 8

Get to 10 to Subtract Homework & Practice 2.7

Get to 10 to subtract

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 140
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Homework-Practice-2.7-Question-1
Explanation :
The subtrahend 5 is written as 2+ 3 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 141
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Homework-Practice-2.7-Question-2
Explanation :
The subtrahend 6 is written as 5+ 1 so that the Minuend 15 is subtracted with 5 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 3.
16 – 8 = ?
10 – __ = __
So, 16 – 8 = __
Answer :
16 – 8
16 – (6 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 16 – 8 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 6+ 2 so that the Minuend 16 is subtracted with 6 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Question 4.
13 – 9 = ?
10 – __ = ___
So, 13 – 9 = ___
Answer :
13 – 9
13 – ( 3 + 6 )
10 – 6 = 4
So, 13 – 9 = 4
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 3+ 6 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 6 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 4.

Question 5.
14 – 5 ___
Answer :
14 – 5
14 – (4 + 1 )
10 – 1 = 9
So, 14 – 5 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 5 is written as 4+ 1 so that the Minuend 14 is subtracted with 4 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 6.
16 – 7 = ___
Answer :
16 – 7
16 – (6 + 1 )
10 – 1 = 9
So, 16 – 7 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as 6 + 1 so that the Minuend 16 is subtracted with 6 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 7.
12 – 8 = __
Answer :
12 – 8
12 – (2 + 6 )
10 – 6 = 4
So, 12 – 8 = 4
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 2+ 6 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 6 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 4.

Question 8.
13 – 8 = __
Answer :
13 – 8
13 – (3 + 5 )
10 – 5 = 5
So, 13 – 8 = 5
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 3+ 5 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 5 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 5.

Question 9.
__ = 16 – 9
Answer :
16 – 9
16 – (6 + 3 )
10 – 3 = 7
So, 16 – 9 = 7
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 6+ 3 so that the Minuend 16 is subtracted with 6 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 10.
___ = 14 – 7
Answer :
14 – 7
14 – (4 + 3 )
10 – 3 = 7
So, 14 – 7 = 7
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as 4+ 3 so that the Minuend 14 is subtracted with 4 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 11.
__ = 12 – 4
Answer :
12 – 4
12 – (2 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 12 – 4 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 4 is written as 2+ 2 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Question 12.
___ = 18 – 9
Answer :
18 – 9
18 – (8 + 1 )
10 – 1 = 9
So, 18 – 9 = 9
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 8+ 1 so that the Minuend 18 is subtracted with 8 to get 10. then 1 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 9.

Question 13.
Number Sense
Complete each equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 142
Answer :
14 – 8 = 10 – 6
13 – 6 = 10 – 3
15 – 7 = 10 – 2

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes has 18 items to sell at a garage sale. He sells 9 of them. How many items does he have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 143
Answer :
Number items with Descartes = 18
Number of items sold = 9
Number of items left for sale = 18 – 9 = 9

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 12 penguins. 5 of them leave to find food at 5:00. 3 more leave at 5:30. How many penguins are left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 144
Answer :
Number of Penguins = 12
Number of penguins left at 5 : 00 = 5
Number of penguins left at 5 : 30 = 3
Remaining Number of penguins = 12 – 5 – 3 = 4

Review & Refresh

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 145
Answer :
19 is a Odd Number .
Explanation :
An odd number is a number that cannot be divided into two equal groups.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 146
Answer :
12 is a Even number .
Explanation :
An even number is a number that can be divided into two equal groups.  Even numbers end in 2, 4, 6, 8 and 0 regardless of how many digits they have.

Lesson 2.8 Practice Addition and Subtraction

Explore and Grow

You have 6 yellow buttons and 8 red buttons. Write four equations that describe your buttons.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 147
Answer :
Number of Yellow buttons = 6
Number of Red buttons = 8
Total Number of buttons = 6 + 8 = 8 + 6 = 14

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
3 + 9 = ___
Answer :
3 + 9 = 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-1

Question 2.
8 – 6 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-2
2 + 6 = 8
So, 8 – 6 = 2

Question 3.
11 – 4 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-3
7 + 4 = 11
So, 11 – 4 = 7

Question 4.
7 + 7 = __
Answer :
7 + 7 = 14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-4

Question 5.
9 + 8 = ___
Answer :
9 + 8 = 17
8 + 8 = 16
Explanation :
9 + 8 is one more than 8 + 8 or 9 + 8
So, 9 + 8 = 17

Question 6.
10 – 7 = __
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-6
3 + 7 = 10
So, 10 – 7 = 3

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 148
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation :
Any number added to 0 gives the number itself.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 149
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 150
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 151
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 152
Answer : 

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 153
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12
Explanation :
Any number added to 0 gives the number itself.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 154
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 155

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-14

Question 15.
__ = 9 + 1
Answer :
10 = 9 + 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-15

Question 16.
__ = 4 + 5
Answer :
9 = 4 + 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-16

Question 17.
___ = 11 – 8
Answer :
3 = 11 – 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-17
3 + 8 = 11
So, 11 – 8 = 3

Question 18.
___ = 9 – 5
Answer :
4 = 9 – 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-16
4 + 5 = 9
So, 9 – 5 = 4

Question 19.
__ = 7 + 9
Answer :
16 = 7 + 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-19

Question 20.
___ = 7 – 1
Answer :
6 = 7 – 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-20
1 + 6 = 7
So, 7 – 1 = 6

Question 21.
___ = 8 + 4
Answer :
12 = 8 + 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-21

Question 22.
__ = 14 – 7
Answer :
7 = 14 – 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.8-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Question-22

Question 23.
Repeated Reasoning
Find the missing addend. Explain how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 156
Answer :
8 + _____ = 13
8 + 5 = 13
Explanation :
To get 13 what should be added to 8
if we add 5 to 8 we get sum 13 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Show and Grow

How many more students have brown hair than blonde hair?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 157
Answer :
Number of students with brown hair = 14
Number of students with black hair = 9
Number of students with blonde hair = 7
Number of more students have brown hair than blonde hair = 14 – 7 = 7
Equation: 14 – 7 = 7
Therefore 7 students more students have brown hair than blonde hair

How many students do not have brown hair?
Equation: 9 + 7
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 158
Answer :
Number of students with out brown hair = ( number of students with blonde and black hair ) = 9 + 7 = 16

Question 24.
How many fewer students have hazel eyes than brown eyes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 159
Answer :
Number of students with Blue Color= 8
Number of students with Brown color = 12
Number of students with Hazel Color = 4
Number of students fewer have hazel eyes than brown eyes = 12 – 4 = 8

DIG DEEPER!
How many students do not have brown eyes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 160
Answer :
Number of students do not have brown eyes = students with blue color and Hazel color = 8 + 4 = 12

Practice Addition and Subtraction Homework & Practice 2.8

Question 1.
3 + 5 = ___
Answer :
3 + 5 = 8

Question 2.
5 + 7 = ___
Answer :
5 + 7
2 + 3 + 7
= 2 + 10 = 12

Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 so write addend 5 as  2 + 3 .
then add 3 + 7 we get , 10 and then later add 2 to 10 we get sum , 12 .

Question 3.
13 – 6 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-3
Explanation :
The subtrahend 6 is written as 3+ 3 so that the Minuend 13 is subtracted with 3 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 4.
12 – 8 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-4
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 2+ 6 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 6 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 4.

Question 5.
6 + 0 = __
Answer :
6 + 0 = 6
Explanation :
Any number added to 0 gives the sum the number itself .

Question 6.
15 – 8 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-6
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 5+ 3 so that the Minuend 15 is subtracted with 5 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 161
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 162
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-8

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 163
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 164
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-10
Explanation :
Any number subtracted with 1 gives the difference of previous number .

Question 11.
___ = 5 + 5
Answer :
5 + 5 = 10

Question 12.
___ = 3 – 0
Answer :
3 – 0 = 3
Explanation :
Any number subtracted with 0 gives the difference the number itself .

Question 13.
Number Sense
Which expressions have a sum or difference that is greater than 10?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 165

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
How many fewer students choose a sandwich than pizza?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 166
Answer :
Number of students chooses sandwich = 9
Number of students chooses pasta = 4
Number of students chooses pizza = 15
Number of fewer students chooses a sandwich than pizza = 15 – 9 = 4
Therefore 4 fewer students chooses a sandwich than pizza .

DIG DEEPER!
How many students do not choose pizza?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 167

Answer :
Number of students do not choose pizza = number of students who chooses sandwich and pasta
= 9 + 4 = 13
Therefore, Number of students do not choose pizza = 13

Question 15.
Circle groups of 4. Write a repeated addition equation to match.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 168
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Practice-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-15
Explanation :
Number of birds = 16
Number of groups = 4
Number of birds in each group = 16 ÷ 4 = 4
Therefore, 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = 16 each group contains 4 birds .

Lesson 2.9 Problem Solving: Addition and Subtraction

Explore and Grow

Model the story.

You have 5 puzzle pieces. Your friend has 9. How many more pieces does your friend have than you?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 169
Answer :
Number of puzzles with me = 5
Number of puzzles with my friend = 9
Number of more pieces does my friend have than me = 9 – 5 = 4

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 7 more keychains than your friend. You have 15 keychains. How many keychains does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 170
Answer :
Number of key chains with me = 15
Number of key chains with my friend = You have 7 more keychains than your friend = 15 -7 = 8
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Lesson-2.9-Problem-Solving-Addition-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-1

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Some friends are at a community pool. 7 more join them. Now there are 12. How many friends were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 172
Answer :
Number of friends at community pool = x
Number of friends joined  = 7
Number of friends now at pool = 15 = x + 7
x + 7 = 15
x = 15 – 7 = 8
Therefore, Number of friends at community pool = 8

Question 3.
Some friends are playing miniature golf. 8 of them leave. There are 6 left. How many friends were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 173
Answer :
Number of friends playing golf = x
Number of friends left = 8
Number of friends now playing golf = 6
Number of friends at the start = x- 8 = 6
x= 8+ 6 = 14
Therefore, 14 friends were there to start.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton has 5 fewer fish than Descartes. Newton has 8 fish. Your friend uses a bar model to find how many fish Descartes has. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 174
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 174.1
Answer :
Yes he is correct
Explanation :
Number of fishes with Newton = 8
Number of fishes with Descartes = Newton has 5 fewer fish than Descartes. that means Descartes 5 more fishes than Newton = 8 + 5 = 13

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

15 kids play at a park. 6 of them leave. 9 more kids come to the park. How many kids are at the park now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 175
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 176
Answer :
Number of kids playing in the park = 15
Number of kids left the park = 6
Number of kids remaining in the park = 15 – 6 = 9
Number of kids joined the park = 9
Total number kids now in the park = 9 + 9 = 18

Question 5.
You have 13 baseball cards. You give 5 away. Then you get 4 more. How many baseball cards do you have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 157.1
Answer :
Number of base balls cards with me = 13
Number of base balls cards given away = 5
Number of base balls cards remaining with me now = 13 – 5 = 8
Number of base balls cards added = 4
Total Number of base balls cards now = 8 + 4 = 12

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 7 adult lions and some cubs in a pride. The pride has 13 lions in all. 3 more cubs are born. How many cubs are in the pride now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 178
Explain how you solved this problem.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 179
Answer :
Number of Adults lions = 7
Number of Lions = 13
Number of cubs are more than 3
Number of cubs = 13 – 7 = 6
Therefore, Number of cubs in the pride = 6

Problem Solving: Addition and Subtraction Homework & Practice 2.9

Question 1.
You have 3 more movies than your friend. You have 10 movies. Your friend has 5 video games. How many movies does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 180
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 181
Answer :
Number of movies with me = 10
You have 3 more movies than your friend
Number of movies with my friend = 10 – 3 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Problem-Solving-Addition-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-2.9-Question-1

Question 2.
Some friends are at a skating rink. 6 more join them. Now there are 11. How many friends were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 182
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 183
Answer :
Number of Friends at skating rink = x
Number of friends joined = 6
Number of Friends now at skating rink = 11
Number of Friends at skating rink = 11 – 6 = 5
Therefore, 5 friends were there to start

Question 3.
Structure
There are 9 bananas in a bunch. A monkey eats some. There are 5 bananas left. Which picture shows how many bananas the monkey ate?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 184
Answer :
Number of Bananas = 9
Number of Bananas left = 5
Number of Bananas eaten by Monkey = 9 – 5 = 4
Picture 4 shows 4 Bananas .

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You make 4 snow angels and Newton makes 5. Descartes makes 3 more snow angels. How many snow angels are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 185
Answer :
Number of snow angels made by me = 4
Number of Snow angels made by Newton = 5
Number of Snow angels made by Descartes = 3
Total Number of Snow angels = 4 + 5 + 3 = 12

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Newton has 9 glitter pens. Descartes has 2 fewer than Newton. How many glitter pens do they have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 186
Answer :
Number of Glitter pens with Newton= 9
Number of Glitter pens with Descartes = Descartes has 2 fewer than Newton = 9 – 2 = 7
Number of Glitter pens in all = 9 + 7 = 16

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Which two shapes combine to make the shape on the left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 186.1
Answer :
Triangle and semi-circle combine to make the above shape .

Fluency and Strategies within 20 Performance Task

Question 1.
You and your friend check out books from the library as shown in the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 187
a. You have one more adventure book than science books. How many books do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 188
Answer :
Number of History books with me = 5
Number of science books with me = 7
Number of Adventure books with me = one more adventure books than science books = 7 + 1 = 8
Total Number of Books with me N= science + History + Adventure = 7 + 5 + 8 = 20

b. You and your friend have the same number of books. Your friend has more science books than history books. Your friend has an even number of adventure books. How many science books and adventure books does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 189
Answer :
Total Number of books with me = Total Number of books with my friend = 20
Science books > History books
Number of history books with my Friend = 8
Number of Science books with my friend let it be = 10
Number of books remaining = 20 – 8 – 10 = 2
Number of Adventure books = 2 even number
So, all the given conditions are satisfied .

c. How many books do you and your friend have in all that are not history books?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 190
Answer :
Number of History books with me and my friend = 5 + 8 = 13
Number of Books with me and my friend = 20 + 20 = 40
Number of books in all that are not history books = 40 – 13 = 27 Books.

d. You return 3 books on Monday and 6 books on Thursday. How many books do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 191
Answer :
Number of books with me = 20
Number of books returned on Monday = 3
Number of books returned on Thrusday = 6
Number of books left now = 20 – 3 – 6 = 20 – 9 = 11 Books.

Fluency and Strategies within 20 Activity

To Play:
Place your cube on 0. Roll a die to see how many spaces to move. Write an equation that matches on the Joey Jump Add or Subtract Recording Sheet. Continue until you reach the food and then return to the pouch.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 192

Fluency and Strategies within 20 Chapter Practice

2.1 Add in Any Order

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 193
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order-Question-1
Explanation :
Changing the Order of addends doesn’t change the sum. The Expressions 7 + 2 and  2 + 7 have the sum  9 .

Question 2.
Number Sense
Complete each equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 194
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.1-Add-in-Any-Order-Question-2
Explanation :
Changing the Order of addends doesn’t change the sum. The Expression a + b = b +a = c ,the sum .

2.2 Use Doubles

Find the sum. Write the double you used.

Question 3.
6 + 5 = ___
___ + ___ = ___
Answer :
6 + 5 = 11
5 + 5 = 10
Explanation :
Doubles plus 1
6 + 5 is equal to 5 + 5 and 1 more.

Question 4.
8 +9 = ___
___ + ___ = ___
Answer :
8 + 9 = 17
8 + 8 = 16
Explanation :
Doubles plus 1
8 + 9 is equal to 8 + 8 and 1 more.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 195
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.2-Use-Doubles-Question-5
Explanation :
Changing the Order of addends doesn’t change the sum. The Expressions 3 + 2 and  2 + 3 have the sum  5 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 196
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.2-Use-Doubles-Question-6
Explanation :
Changing the Order of addends doesn’t change the sum. The Expressions 7 + 8 and  8 + 7 have the sum  15 .

2.3 Add Three Numbers

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 197
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-7
Explanation :
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 8, 0 give the sum 8
and then adding the another addend 6 to the sum 8.
Gives the sum 14.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 198
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-8
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 1, 3 give the sum 4
and then adding the another addend 9 to the sum 4.
Gives the sum 13.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 199
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-9
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 8, 8 give the sum 16
and then adding the another addend 4 to the sum 16.
Gives the sum 20.

Question 10.
4 + 8 + 8 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-9
Explanation:
Addends are represented in circle and Sum is represented in square.
First adding two addends 8, 8 give the sum 16
and then adding the another addend 4 to the sum 16.
Gives the sum 20.

Question 10.
Structure
Write the missing addends.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 200
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.3-Add-Three-Numbers-Question-10

2.4 Make a ten to Add

Make a 10 to add

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 201
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.4-Make-a-ten-to-Add-Question-11

Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 so write addend 8 as  1 + 7 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 7 to 10 we get sum , 17 .

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 202

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.4-Make-a-ten-to-Add-Question-12

Explanation :
To make addend 7 as 10 we should add 3 to the 7 so write addend 6 as  3 + 3 .
then add 7 + 3 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .

Question 13.
9 + 6 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.4-Make-a-ten-to-Add-Question-13

Explanation :
To make addend 9 as 10 we should add 1 to the 9 so write addend 6 as  1 + 5 .
then add 9 + 1 we get , 10 and then later add 5 to 10 we get sum , 15 .

Question 14.
4 + 7 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.4-Make-a-ten-to-Add-Question-14

Explanation :
To make addend 4 as 10 we should add 6 to the 4 so write addend 7 as  6 + 1 .
then add 4 + 6 we get , 10 and then later add 1 to 10 we get sum , 11 .

2.5 Count On and Count Back to Subtract

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 203

Question 15.
12 – 8 = __
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Question-15
Start at 12 and count back to 8 . The arrow ends at 4 showing the difference . So, 12 – 8 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Question-15-b
Start at 8 count on to 12. So, 12 – 8 = 4

Question 16.
14 – 5 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Question-16-a
Start at 14 and count back to 5 . The arrow ends at 9 showing the difference . So, 14 – 5 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Question-16-b
Start at 5 count on to 14. So, 14 – 5 = 9

Question 17.
17 – 9 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Question-17-a
Start at 17 and count back to 9 . The arrow ends at 8 showing the difference . So, 17 – 9 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.5-Count-On-and-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Question-17-b
Start at 9 count on to 17. So, 17 – 9 = 8

2.6 Relate Addition and Subtraction

Question 18.
7 + 6 = __
13 – 6 = ___
13 – 7 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 204
Answer :
7 + 6 = 13
13 – 6 = 7
13 – 7 = 6

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.6-Relate-Addition-and-Subtraction-Question-18
Explanation :
Addition and subtraction are inverse operations because one operation can “undo” the other operation.
Adding 7 and 6 to get 13 is the opposite of 13 minus 7, leaving 6 or the opposite of 13 minus 6, leaving 7.

2.7 Get to 10 to Subtract

Get to 10 to subtract

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 205
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.7-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Question-19
Explanation :
The subtrahend 4 is written as 2+ 2 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 2 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 8.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 206
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.7-Get-to-10-to-Subtract-Question-20
Explanation :
The subtrahend 8 is written as 5 + 3 so that the Minuend 15 is subtracted with 5 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 21.
16 – 9 = ___
Answer :
16 – 9 =
16 – ( 6 + 3 )
10 – 3 = 7
So, 16 – 9 = 7
Explanation :
The subtrahend 9 is written as 6+ 3 so that the Minuend 16 is subtracted with 6 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 22.
14 – 7 = ___
Answer :
14 – 7 =
14 – ( 4 + 3 )
10 – 3 = 7
So, 14 – 7 = 7
Explanation :
The subtrahend 7 is written as 4 + 3 so that the Minuend 14 is subtracted with 4 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

2.8 Practice Addition and Subtraction

Question 23.
8 + 3 = ___
Answer :
8 + 3 = 11

Question 24.
13 – 7 = ___
Answer :
12 – 4 =
12 – ( 2 + 2 )
10 – 2 = 8
So, 12 – 4 = 8
Explanation :
The subtrahend 5 is written as 2+ 3 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 207
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.8-Practice-Addition-and-Subtraction-Question-25

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 208
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.8-Practice-Addition-and-Subtraction-Question-26

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 209
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.8-Practice-Addition-and-Subtraction-Question-27

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 210
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.8-Practice-Addition-and-Subtraction-Question-28

Question 29.
__ = 5 + 8
Answer :
5 + 8
3 + 2 + 8
3 + 10 = 13
So, 5 + 8 = 13
Explanation :
To make addend 8 as 10 we should add 2 to the 8 so write addend 5 as  3 + 2 .
then add 2 + 8 we get , 10 and then later add 3 to 10 we get sum , 13 .

Question 30.
__ = 12 – 5
Answer :
12 – 5 =
12 – ( 2 + 3 )
10 – 3 = 7
So, 12 – 5 = 7
Explanation :
The subtrahend 5 is written as 2+ 3 so that the Minuend 12 is subtracted with 2 to get 10. then 3 is subtracted from 10 , we get difference as 7.

2.9 Problem Solving: Addition and Subtraction

Question 31.
Some friends are playing laser tag. 4 of them leave. There are 8 left. How many friends were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 211
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 212
Answer :
Number of friends playing = x
Number of friends left = 4
Number of friends left = 8 = x-4
x= 8 + 4 = 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-2-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Fluency-and-Strategies-within-20-Chapter-Practice-2.9-Problem-Solving-Addition-and-Subtraction-Question-31

Conclusion:

I hope that you can resolve all your queries and access your preparation standard using the Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 20 Solution Key. Step by step explanation for all questions are available at Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 2nd Chapter Fluency and Strategies within 20 Answer Key. Bookmark our site to find the solution key of all Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11

Are you been looking for assistance to solve Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison questions? If yes, then stay here. On this page, we have given a direct link to download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Answer Key PDF for free of cost. This solution key is useful for the students to complete their homework within time. It contains a detailed explanation solution for every problem of BIM 3rd Grade 11th Chapter Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Solutions

The exact solution and step by step answer for each and every question from BIM 3rd Grade 11th Chapter Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison are included below. The various lessons from Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison are Equivalent Fractions, Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line, Relate Fractions and Whole Numbers, Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator, Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator, Compare Fractions on a Number Line, Compare Fractions, and Compare and Order Fractions.

By learning these topics, you will be able to solve real-life math questions. Tap on the quick links mentioned here to get questions and answers of every concept. A better preparation plan and study material like Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison is helpful to improve your math skills.

Lesson 1 Equivalent Fractions

Lesson 2 Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line

Lesson 3 Relate Fractions and Whole Numbers

Lesson 4 Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator

Lesson 5 Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator

Lesson 6 Compare Fractions on a Number Line

Lesson 7 Compare Fractions

Lesson 8 Compare and Order Fractions

Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison

Lesson 11.1 Equivalent Fractions

Explore and Grow   

Use the model to write fractions that are the same size as \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 1
Answer: fraction \(\frac{4}{8}\) , fraction\(\frac{8}{16}\) are the same size as fraction \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Reasoning
Can you write a fraction with a denominator of that is the same size as \(\frac{3}{4}\)? Explain.
Answer: It is nothing but equivalent fraction \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{21}{28}\) are equivalent fraction.

Think and Grow: Model Equivalent Fractions

Two or more numbers that have the same value are equivalent. Two or more fractions that name the same part of a whole are equivalent fractions.

Example
Use the models to find an equivalent fraction for \(\frac{2}{3}\) .
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 2

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-2

Show and Grow

Use the models to find an equivalent fraction. Both models show the same whole.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 3
Answer:\(\frac{2}{8}\)

Explanation: \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 2/8 are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-3

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 4
Answer: 1/3

Explanation: \(\frac{2}{6}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-4

Question 3.
Shade 1 part of the model. Then divide the model into 4 equal parts. Write the equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 5
Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-5
\(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the models to find an equivalent fraction. Both models show the same whole.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 6
Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-6
\(\frac{2}{4}\) and \(\frac{4}{8}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 7
Answer: \(\frac{3}{3}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-7

Explanation: \(\frac{6}{6}\) and \(\frac{3}{3}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 6.
Shade 1 part of the model. Then divide the model into 6 equal parts. Write the equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 8
Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-8

Explanation: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Find the equivalent fraction
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 9
Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-9

Explanation:
The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.
Here the numerator of both the fractions is different.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 10
Answer: \(\frac{2}{2}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-10

Explanation:
The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.
Here the numerator of both the fractions is different.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 11
Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-11

Explanation:
The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.
Here the numerator of both the fractions is different.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 12
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-12

Explanation:
The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.
Here the numerator of both the fractions is different.

Question 11.
Structure
Descartes shades \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a rectangle. Divide and shade the model to show an equivalent fraction for \(\frac{3}{4}\).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 13
Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-13

Explanation:
The number equivalent to \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{6}{8}\).
So you have to divide the rectangle into 8 equal parts and shade 6 parts among them.

Question 12.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which model does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 14
Answer: 4 figure is different

Explanation: From the above pictures 1 and 2 are equivalent fractions the first rectangle represent \(\frac{4}{8}\) and the second represents \(\frac{2}{4}\) both give the answer as \(\frac{1}{2}\)
The fourth figure has 4 parts and 1 part is shaded. So, the name of the fraction is \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You, Newton, and Descartes divide your posters for a science fair as shown.You finish 3 parts, Newton finishes 2 parts, and Descartes finishes 4 parts.Who has finished the same amount?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 15

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-15

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You, Newton, and Descartes divide your submarine sandwiches as shown. You eat 1 part, Newton eats 2 parts, and Descartes eats 2 parts. Who eats the same amount?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 16
Answer:
Given,
You eat 1 part, Newton eats 2 parts, and Descartes eats 2 parts.
You and Newton eats the same amount

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend have small pizzas. You cut your pizza sixths. Your friend cuts her pizza into eighths. You eat \(\frac{3}{6}\) of your pizza. Your 6 friend eats the same amount of her pizza. What fraction of her pizza does your friend eat? How many slices does your friend eat? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
You and your friend have small pizzas. You cut your pizza sixths.
Your friend cuts her pizza into eighths. You eat \(\frac{3}{6}\) of your pizza. Your 6 friend eats the same amount of her pizza.
That means \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus your friend eats \(\frac{3}{4}\) part of the pizza.

Equivalent Fractions Homework & Practice 11.1

Use the models to find an equivalent fraction. Both models show the same whole.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 17
Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-17

Explanation: \(\frac{4}{6}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 18
Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-18

Explanation: \(\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{3}{6}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 3.
Shade 1 part of the model. Then divide the model into 8 equal parts. Write the equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 19
Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-19 (1)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-19
Explanation: \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Find the equivalent fraction
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 20
Answer: \(\frac{8}{8}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-20

Explanation: \(\frac{2}{2}\) and \(\frac{8}{8}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 21
Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-21
Explanation: \(\frac{6}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 22
Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-22
Explanation: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 23
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-23
Explanation: \(\frac{2}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{2}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 8.
Open-Ended
Divide one model into an odd number of equal parts and the other model into an even number of equal parts. Then model and write two equivalent fractions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 24
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-24
Explanation: \(\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You, Newton, and Descartes divide your portrait canvases as shown. You paint 2 parts, Newton paints 2 parts, and Descartes paints 8 parts. Who paints the same amount of the portrait canvas?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 25
Answer: You and Descartes

Explanation:
You, Newton, and Descartes divide your portrait canvases as shown.
You paint 2 parts, Newton paints 2 parts, and Descartes paints 8 parts.
You completed 2 of 2 parts.
Descartes paints 8 of 8 parts.
\(\frac{2}{2}\) = 1
\(\frac{8}{8}\) = 1
Thus you and Descartes completes the same amount of the portrait canvas.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend paint 2 roundabouts for a park. You divide your roundabout into thirds. Your friend divides his roundabout into sixths. You paint \(\frac{1}{3}\) of your roundabout. Your friend paints the same amount of his roundabout. What fraction does your friend paint? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 26
Answer:
Given,
You and your friend paint 2 roundabouts for a park. You divide your roundabout into thirds.
Your friend divides his roundabout into sixths.
You paint \(\frac{1}{3}\) of your roundabout. Your friend paints the same amount of his roundabout.
\(\frac{6}{6}\)

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
Round to the nearest ten to estimate the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 27
Answer: 540
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-27

Explanation:
The nearest ten estimation for 431 is 430
and for 109 Nearest ten estimation  is 110
hence
430
+ 110
540

Question 12.
Round to the nearest hundred to estimate the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.1 28
Answer: 820

Explanation:
The nearest ten estimation for 551 is 550
and for 268 Nearest ten estimation  is 270
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.1-28

Lesson 11.2 Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Use Fraction Strips to label thirds on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 1
Use Fraction Strips to label sixths on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 2
Use the number lines to complete the equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 3
Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-3
Explanation: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Structure
How can you tell whether fractions are equivalent using a number line?
Answer:
Step 1: Locate the original fraction on the number line. We’ll first need to locate our fraction on the number line.
Step 2: Divide each your newly created divisions from step 1 into two even spaces.
Step 3: Find the equivalent fraction.
Step 4: Repeat steps 2 and 3 to find more equivalent fractions.

Think and Grow: Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line

You can use a number line to find equivalent fractions. Equivalent fractions represent the same point on a number line.

Example
Use a number line to find an equivalent fraction for \(\frac{3}{4}\).
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 4
Step 1: Plot \(\frac{3}{4}\) on a number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 5
Step 2: Divide the number line into eighths. Label each tick mark to show eighths.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 6

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-6

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the number line to find an equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 7
Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-7
The fractions \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{6}\) are on the same point.
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Question 2.
Write two fractions that name the point shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 8
Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-8
The fractions \(\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\) are on the same point.
So,\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write two fractions that name the point shown.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 9
Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-9

The fractions \(\frac{4}{6}\) and \(\frac{1}{2}\) are on the same point.
So,\(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 10
Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-10

The fractions \(\frac{4}{8}\) and \(\frac{1}{2}\) are on the same point.
So,\(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 11
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-11

The fractions \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are on the same point.
So,\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 12
Answer:  \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-12
The fractions \(\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\) are on the same point.
So,\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{6}{8}\) are equivalent because they are not the same distance from 0. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 13
Answer: No your friend is not correct. \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{6}{8}\) are equivalent fractions irrespective of the distance on the number line.

Question 8.
Reasoning
Explain why \(\frac{1}{3}\) is equal to two \(\frac{1}{6}\)s
Answer:
Divide \(\frac{1}{3}\) by 2. You get \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton rests after biking \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a race. Descartes rests after biking \(\frac{2}{6}\) of the same race. Do they rest at the same point along the race path?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 14
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 15
They ______ rest at the same point.
Explain: No they do not rest at the same point. Because \(\frac{2}{3}\) is not equal to \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-15

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Newton hikes \(\frac{7}{8}\) of a trail. Descartes hikes \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the same trail. Do they hike the same distance along the trail?
Answer:
Newton hikes \(\frac{7}{8}\) of a trail. Descartes hikes \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the same trail.
You have to compare both the fractions.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) is greater than \(\frac{3}{4}\).
By this, we can say that does not hike the same distance along the trail.

Question 10.
Newton chases Descartes for \(\frac{3}{6}\) mile. Descartes turns around and chases Newton an equal distance.Write two equivalent fractions that can describe how far Descartes chases Newton.
Answer:
The equivalent fractions of \(\frac{3}{6}\) are
\(\frac{3}{6}\) × \(\frac{2}{2}\) = \(\frac{6}{12}\)
\(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus the two The equivalent fractions of \(\frac{3}{6}\) are \(\frac{6}{12}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You cut a quiche into 8 equal slices. Your family eats \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the quiche. How many slices does your family eat? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
You cut a quiche into 8 equal slices. Your family eats \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the quiche.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 8 = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus your family eats 4 equal slices.

Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line Homework & Practice 11.2

Question 1.
Use the number line to find an equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 16
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-16
By seeing the above number we can find the equivalent fraction of \(\frac{2}{8}\).
\(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are on the same point.

Question 2.
Write two fractions that name the point shown
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 17
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-17

By seeing the above number we can find the equivalent fraction of \(\frac{1}{2}\).
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Write two fractions that name the same point shown.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 18
Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-18

By seeing the above number we can find the equivalent fraction of \(\frac{6}{8}\).
\(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 19
Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-19

By seeing the above number we can find the equivalent fraction of \(\frac{4}{6}\).
\(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 5.
Which One Doesn’tBelong?
Which not fraction does belong with the other three? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 20
Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-20
The fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\) does not belong to other three fractions.

Question 6.
Reasoning
How do you know that \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\) are equivalent when plotting the fractions on a number line?
Answer:
No, they are not equivalent. The numerators are equals, but the denominators are not, they are not equivalent. If the first one would be 6/8, they would be equivalent, because we can simplify the fractions by 2 and we got 3/4 again.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You run \(\frac{6}{8}\) of a race. Your friend runs \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the same race. Do you and your friend run the same distance?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 21.1
Answer:
Given,
You run \(\frac{6}{8}\) of a race. Your friend runs \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the same race.
The equivalent fraction of \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{6}{8}\)
By this we can say that you and your friend run the same distance.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You have a frame that holds 8 pictures. You fill \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the frame. How many pictures do you put in the frame? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
You have a frame that holds 8 pictures. You fill \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the frame.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 8 = 2
Thus you put 2 pictures in the frame.

Review & Refresh

What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 21
Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)
By seeing the figure we can name the fraction of the shaded part. The box is divided into 3 parts among them 2 parts are shaded.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-21

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.2 22
Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)
By seeing the figure we can name the fraction of the shaded part. The circle is divided into 6 parts among them 4 parts are shaded.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.2-22

 

Lesson 11.3 Relate Fractions and Whole Numbers

Explore and Grow

Use Fraction Strips to complete the fractions. Draw to show your models.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 1
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-1

Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Repeated Reasoning
How many more fourths did you use to model 2 than you did to model 1? How many more fourths would you need to model 3? Complete the fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 2
Answer: 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-2

Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Think and Grow: Equivalent Fractions and Whole Numbers

Example
Write the numbers 1 and 2 as fractions. The number line shows 2 wholes. Each whole is divided into1 equal part.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-3

Example
Write equivalent fractions for the numbers 1 and 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 4

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-4

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the number line. Then complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 5
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-5

Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the number line. Then write equivalent fractions for the numbers 3 and 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 6
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-6

Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Write two equivalent fractions for the whole number.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 7
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-7
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-8
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-9
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Write the equivalent whole number.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-10
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-11
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 12

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-12

Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 9.
You cut a sandwich into 4 pieces. You eat the whole sandwich. What fraction of the sandwich do you eat?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 13
Answer:
Given,
You cut a sandwich into 4 pieces. You eat the whole sandwich.
\(\frac{4}{4}\) = 1
Thus you eat \(\frac{4}{4}\) fraction of the sandwich.

Question 10.
Number Sense
Write three fractions that are equivalent to 6 using the denominators 1, 2, and 6.
Answer:
\(\frac{6}{6}\) = 1
\(\frac{12}{6}\) = 2
\(\frac{36}{6}\) = 6

Question 11.
Use a number line to show \(\frac{5}{5}\) = 1.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 11

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You run around a track 12 times. Each lap is \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile. How many miles do you run? Write your answer as a whole number and as a fraction.
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 14
You run _____ or ______ miles.

Answer:
Given,
You run around a track 12 times. Each lap is \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile.
12 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3 mile
You run 3 miles.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You ride your bike around a city block 24 times. Each time around is \(\frac{1}{6}\) mile. How many miles do you ride? Write your answer as a 6 whole number and as a fraction.
Answer:
Given,
You ride your bike around a city block 24 times. Each time around is \(\frac{1}{6}\) mile.
24 × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 4
Thus you ride 4 miles.

Question 13.
There are 5 Great Lakes: Lake Erie, Lake Huron, Lake Michigan, Lake Ontario, and Lake Superior. You complete a project and use 1 whole poster for each lake. Write a fraction that gives the number of posters you use in all.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 15
Answer:
Lake Michigan is \(\frac{1}{1}\)
Lake Huron is \(\frac{2}{1}\)
Lake Erie is \(\frac{3}{1}\)
Lake Ontario is \(\frac{4}{1}\)
Lake Superior is \(\frac{5}{1}\)

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friends order 3 pizzas. Each pizza is cut into 8 slices. You and your friends eat \(\frac{16}{8}\) of the pizzas. Write a fraction that shows the number of eighths that are left.
Answer:
Given that,
You and your friends order 3 pizzas. Each pizza is cut into 8 slices.
You and your friends eat \(\frac{16}{8}\) of the pizzas.
3 × 8 = 24 slices
\(\frac{24}{8}\)– \(\frac{16}{8}\) = \(\frac{8}{8}\)
Thus 8 slices are left in the pizza.

Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line Homework & Practice 11.3

Question 1.
Complete the number line. Then write equivalent fractions for the numbers 3 and 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-16
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Write two equivalent fractions for the whole number.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-17
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-18
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-19
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Write the equivalent whole number.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-20
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-21
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-22
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 8.
Precision
Match each whole number to its equivalent fractions.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-23
Explanation: The equivalent fractions can be defined as fractions with different numerators and denominators that represent the same value or proportion of the whole.

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says a fraction equivalent to 3 has a 3 in the denominator and a 1 in the numerator. Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Answer:
Descartes says a fraction equivalent to 3 has a 3 in the denominator and a 1 in the numerator.
Yes 3 is equivalent to \(\frac{3}{1}\)
Thus Descartes is correct.

Question 10.
Patterns
Describe and complete the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.3-24
The fraction is the multiples of 8. So, the pattern is 8/8, 16/8, 24/8, 32/8, 40/8.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You run around a park 18 times. Each lap is \(\frac{1}{6}\) mile. How many miles do you run? Write your answer as a whole number and as a fraction.
Answer:
Given that,
You run around a park 18 times. Each lap is \(\frac{1}{6}\) mile.
18 × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3
Thus you run 3 miles or \(\frac{18}{6}\) miles

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Christopher Columbus had 3 ships on his first NiñaPintavoyage: the , the , and the Santa Maria. You complete a project and use 1 whole poster for each ship. Write a fraction that gives the number of posters you use in all.
Answer:
Given,
Christopher Columbus had 3 ships on his first NiñaPintavoyage: the , the , and the Santa Maria.
You complete a project and use 1 whole poster for each ship.
\(\frac{3}{3}\) = 1
Thus you use 1 poster for each ship.
Thus you use 3 posters for all the ships.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
A teacher has 4 tables. Each table is divided into 4 sections. \(\frac{12}{4}\) of the tables have 4 supplies on them. Write a fraction that shows the number of fourths not that do have supplies on them.
Answer:
Given,
A teacher has 4 tables. Each table is divided into 4 sections.
4 × 4 = 16 sections
\(\frac{12}{4}\) of the tables have 4 supplies on them.
\(\frac{12}{4}\) = 3
3 of the tables have 4 supplies.
The fraction that shows the number of fourths not that do have supplies on them is \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Review & Refresh

Estimate. Then find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 14.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 25
Answer: 890

Explanation:
The nearest ten estimation for 837 is 840
and for 46 Nearest ten estimation  is 50
840
+  50
890

Question 15.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 26
Answer: 510

Explanation:
The nearest ten estimation for 396 is 400
and for 108 Nearest ten estimation  is 110
400
+ 110
510

Question 16.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.3 27
Answer: 830

Explanation:
The nearest ten estimation for 551 is 550
and for 279 Nearest ten estimation  is 280
550
+ 280
830

Lesson 11.4 Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator

Explore and Grow

Color to show each fraction. Circle the greater fraction.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 1
Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) is the greater fraction

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-1

Construct Arguments
Explain to your partner how you can compare fractions with the same denominator.
Answer:
if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction

Think and Grow: Compare Fractions That have the Same Denominator

Example
Compare \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{7}{8}\).
One Way: Use Fraction Strips.
The fractions have the same denominator, 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 2
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-3

Another Way:
When the denominators are the same, the whole is divided into the same number of equal parts. So, look at the numerators 3 and 7 to compare.The fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 4

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-4

Show and Grow

Shade to compare the fractions
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 5
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-5
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 6
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-6

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction

Apply and Grow: Practice

Shade to compare the fractions.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-7

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-8

Explanation: Here the numerator and denominator of the fractions are the same so

Compare.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-9

Explanation:
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
2 is less than 3.
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{3}{3}\)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-10
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
So, \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-11

Explanation:
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
3 is greater than 1.
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-12

Explanation:
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
4 is greater than 2.
So, \(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-13

Explanation:
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
5 is less than 6.
So, \(\frac{5}{8}\) < \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Question 10
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-14

Explanation:
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
0 is less than 1.
So, \(\frac{0}{4}\) < \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 11.
Number Sense
Which statements are true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-15

Question 12.
Writing
How can you show that \(\frac{3}{8}\) is less than \(\frac{6}{8}\)?
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-7 (1)

Explanation:
Compare the fractions. The denominators of both the fractions are the same so you have to compare the numerators.
3 is less than 6.
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Question 13.
Structure
Which statement correctly compares the fraction of circles shaded in Group A to the fraction of circles shaded in Group B?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-16

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton and Descartes have the same number of chores. Newton finishes \(\frac{2}{3}\) of his chores. Descartes finishes \(\frac{1}{3}\) of his chores. Who finishes more of his chores?
Model:
______ finishes more of his chores.
Explain:

Answer: Newton finishes more of his chores

Explanation:
Given,
Newton and Descartes have the same number of chores.
Newton finishes \(\frac{2}{3}\) of his chores. Descartes finishes \(\frac{1}{3}\) of his chores.
Compare both the fractions \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Therefore Newton finishes more of his chores.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
At the pet store, a green lizard is \(\frac{5}{6}\) foot long. A brown lizard is \(\frac{6}{6}\) foot long. You pick up the longer lizard. Which lizard do you pick up?
Answer:
Given,
At the pet store, a green lizard is \(\frac{5}{6}\) foot long.
A brown lizard is \(\frac{6}{6}\) foot long. You pick up the longer lizard.
Compare both the fractions \(\frac{5}{6}\) and \(\frac{6}{6}\)
\(\frac{5}{6}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)
Therefore you pick up brown lizard.

Question 15.
You and a friend each have a burrito. The burritos are the same size. You eat \(\frac{3}{4}\) of your burrito. Your friend eats \(\frac{1}{4}\) of his burrito. Who has less burrito left to eat? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 17
Answer:
Given,
You and a friend each have a burrito. The burritos are the same size.
You eat \(\frac{3}{4}\) of your burrito. Your friend eats \(\frac{1}{4}\) of his burrito.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)
You have less burrito left to eat.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
You walk \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the distance to the library from your home. Your friend walks \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the distance to school from his home. You walk a greater distance than your friend. Explain how this is possible.
Answer:
Given,
You walk \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the distance to the library from your home. Your friend walks \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the distance to school from his home.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator Homework & Practice 11.4

Shade to compare the fractions
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-18

if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
3 is greater than 1
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-19
if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
\(\frac{1}{2}\) < \(\frac{2}{2}\)

Compare
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-20
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
5 is less than 7.
So, \(\frac{5}{8}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-21

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
6 is greater than 5.
So, \(\frac{6}{6}\) > \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-22

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
1 is less than 2.
So, \(\frac{1}{3}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-23

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
2 is less than 4.
So, \(\frac{2}{4}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-24

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
0 is less than 1.
So, \(\frac{0}{3}\) < \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-25

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
3 is less than 4.
So, \(\frac{3}{6}\) < \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says \(\frac{3}{4}>\frac{2}{4}\). Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: Your friend is correct.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = 0.75
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.50
\(\frac{3}{4}>\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 10.
Logic
Two fractions are equivalent and have the same denominator. What must be true about the numerators of the fractions?
Answer:
Two fractions are equivalent fractions when they represent the same part of a whole. Since equivalent fractions do not always have the same numerator and denominator, one way to determine if two fractions are equivalent is to find a common denominator and rewrite each fraction with that denominator.

Open-Ended
Write a number to make the statement true.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 26
Answer: 5

Explanation:
Here the denominators of both the fractions are the same. You have to write the numerator of less than 6.
So, to make the statement true we are writing 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-26

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 27
Answer: 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-27

Explanation:
Here the denominators of both the fractions are the same. You have to write the numerator of greater than 2.
So, to make the statement true we are writing 4.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 28
Answer: 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.4-28

Explanation:
Here the denominators of both the fractions are the same. You have to write the numerator of less than 4.
So, to make the statement true we are writing 1.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
You and your friend had the same number of baby teeth. You have lost \(\frac{3}{4}\) of your baby teeth. Your friend has lost \(\frac{2}{4}\) of her baby teeth. Who has lost more teeth?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.4 29
Answer: you have lost more teeth

Explanation:
Given,
You and your friend had the same number of baby teeth. You have lost \(\frac{3}{4}\) of your baby teeth. Your friend has lost \(\frac{2}{4}\) of her baby teeth.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = 0.75
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.50
\(\frac{3}{4}>\frac{2}{4}\)
Thus you lost more teeth.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
Two classes each paint a mural. The murals are the same size. The third-grade class paints \(\frac{5}{8}\) of one mural. The fourth-grade class paints \(\frac{7}{8}\) of the other mural. Which class has less left to paint? Explain.
Answer: The fourth-grade class has one part left to paint

Review & Refresh

Find the product.
Question 16.
9 × 80 = _____
Answer: 720

Explanation:
Multiply 9 with 80 we get 720
9 × 80 = 720

Question 17.
5 × 30 = _____
Answer: 150

Explanation:
Multiply 5 with 30 we get 150
5 × 30 = 150

Question 18.
6 × 40 = _____
Answer: 240

Explanation:
Multiply 6 with 40 we get 240
6 × 40 = 240

Lesson 11.5 Compare Fractions with Same Numerator

Explore and Grow

Color to show each fraction. Circle the greater fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-1

Precision
How can you use Fraction Strips to check your answer? Draw to show.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 11 Answer Key

Think and Grow: Compare Fractions That Have the Same Numerator

Example
Compare \(\frac{2}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\).
One Way: Use Fraction Strips
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 2

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-2

Another Way:
When the numerators are the same, look at the denominators 4 and 6 to compare the sizes of the parts.
• The more parts the whole is divided into, the smaller the parts are.
• The fewer parts the whole is divided into, the larger the parts are.
The fraction with the greater denominator is the lesser fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-3

Show and Grow

Shade to compare the fractions.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-4
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-5
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Apply and Grow: Practice

Shade to compare the fractions
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-6
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-7
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Compare
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-8
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-9
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-10
Explanation: Here the numerator and denominator of the fractions are the same so  \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-11
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-12
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-13
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 11.
Use the models to compare two fractions that have the same numerators.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-14
Here the numerators are the same and the denominators are different. The denominator with the highest number will be the lesser fraction.
8 > 4.
Thus 2/8 > 2/4

Question 12.
You spend \(\frac{2}{3}\) of an hour playing soccer on Wednesday. You spend \(\frac{2}{6}\) of an hour playing soccer on Friday. On which day do you spend more time playing soccer? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
You spend \(\frac{2}{3}\) of an hour playing soccer on Wednesday.
You spend \(\frac{2}{6}\) of an hour playing soccer on Friday.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Thus you spend more time playing soccer on wednesday.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says \(\frac{1}{4}>\frac{1}{2}\) because \(\frac{1}{4}\) of one circle is bigger than \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the other circle. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 15
Answer: Your friend is incorrect.
The size of the circles is different.
\(\frac{1}{4}>\frac{1}{2}\)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton and Descartes have piggy banks that are the same size. Newton fills \(\frac{3}{4}\) of his bank with pennies. Descartes fills \(\frac{3}{6}\) of his bank with pennies. Whose bank is filled more?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 16
Explain:
______ bank is filled more.
Answer: Newton bank is filled more

Explanation:
Given,
Newton and Descartes have piggy banks that are the same size.
Newton fills \(\frac{3}{4}\) of his bank with pennies. Descartes fills \(\frac{3}{6}\) of his bank with pennies.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Thus Newton bank is filled more

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You use \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a bottle of glitter for an art project. Your friend uses \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a bottle for his art project. The bottles are the same size. Who uses more glitter?
Answer:
Given,
You use \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a bottle of glitter for an art project.
Your friend uses \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a bottle for his art project. The bottles are the same size.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus you used more glitter.

Question 15.
A train and a plane are traveling the same distance from New York to Pittsburgh. The train completes \(\frac{5}{8}\) of its journey. The plane completes \(\frac{5}{6}\) of its journey. Which is farther away from Pittsburgh? Explain.
Answer:
A train and a plane are traveling the same distance from New York to Pittsburgh.
The train completes \(\frac{5}{8}\) of its journey. The plane completes \(\frac{5}{6}\) of its journey.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) < \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
You cut a piece of lasagna that is \(\frac{1}{8}\) of a tray. Your friend cuts a piece of lasagna that is \(\frac{1}{6}\) of a tray. Your piece is larger than your friend’s piece. Explain how this is possible.
Answer:
You cut a piece of lasagna that is \(\frac{1}{8}\) of a tray.
Your friend cuts a piece of lasagna that is \(\frac{1}{6}\) of a tray.
Your piece is larger than your friend’s piece.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) < \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Your piece is smaller than your friend’s piece.

Compare Fractions with Same Numerator Homework & Practice 11.5

Shade to compare the fractions
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-17
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-18
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Compare
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-19
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-20
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-21
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-22
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-23
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-24
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Question 9.
Use the models to compare two fractions that have the same numerators.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-25
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) Equal to \(\frac{4}{8}\).

Question 10.
Newton says that if two fractions have the same numerator, then the fraction with the greater denominator is the greater fraction. Is Newton correct? Explain.
Answer: wrong

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction.
Example: \(\frac{4}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{5}\).

Question 11.
Writing
How is comparing fractions with the same numerator similar to comparing fractions with the same denominator? How is it different?
Answer:
if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction.
Example: \(\frac{4}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{5}\).
if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
Example: \(\frac{5}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{8}\).

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
You play a video game for \(\frac{1}{2}\) of an hour. Your friend plays the video game for \(\frac{1}{6}\) of an hour. Who plays the video 6 game longer? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 26
Answer:
Given,
You play a video game for \(\frac{1}{2}\) of an hour.
Your friend plays the video game for \(\frac{1}{6}\) of an hour.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus you play a video game for a long time.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Two cars have the same-sized gasoline tank. Tank A is \(\frac{4}{6}\) full. Tank B is \(\frac{4}{8}\) full. Which tank is less full? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
Two cars have the same-sized gasoline tank.
Tank A is \(\frac{4}{6}\) full.
Tank B is \(\frac{4}{8}\) full.
\(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Tank B is less filled.

Review & Refresh

Plot the fraction on the number line.
Question 14.
\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 27
Answer:
Plot the given fraction on the below number line..
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-27

Question 15.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.5 28
Answer:
Plot the given fraction on the below number line..
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.5-28

Lesson 11.6 Compare Fractions on a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Use Fraction Strips to plot each fraction on the number line. Circle the greater fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 1
Answer:

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction

Construct Arguments
Tell your partner how to use a number line to compare the fractions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 2
Answer:
Step-1 Draw a number line from 0 to 1
Step-2 plot the fractions from \(\frac{0}{7}\) to \(\frac{7}{7}\)
Step-3 Now put a mark on \(\frac{1}{7}\) \(\frac{3}{7}\)
Step-4 Now compare the distance of both the fractions on the number line
Step-5 Here the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
Step-6 \(\frac{1}{7}\) less than \(\frac{3}{7}\)

Think and Grow: Compare Fractions on a Number Line

On a number line, fractions to the left are less than fractions to the right. Fractions to the right are greater than fractions to the left.
Example
Use a number line to compare \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Plot the fractions on a number line. Both have the same denominator.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 3
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 4

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-3

Example
Use number lines to compare \(\frac{2}{8}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Plot each fraction on a number line. Both fractions have the same numerator.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 5

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-5

Show and Grow

Use the number line to compare the fractions.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-6
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{5}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{6}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-7
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) equal to  \(\frac{2}{4}\).

Apply and Grow: Practice

Compare.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-8
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{3}{4}\) equal to  \(\frac{6}{8}\).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-9
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{4}{4}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-10
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{4}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-11
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{6}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-12
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{4}{8}\) equal to \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-13
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{6}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-14
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{5}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{7}{8}\).

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-15
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{6}\) Lesser than \(\frac{2}{6}\).

Question 11.
Write a fraction that is greater than \(\frac{5}{6}\).
Answer: \(\frac{6}{6}\).

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{6}{6}\) Greater than \(\frac{5}{6}\).

Question 12.
Write a fraction that is less than \(\frac{3}{4}\).
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\).

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 13.
Newton buys \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound of cheese. Descartes buys \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound of cheese. Who buys more cheese?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 16
Answer:  Descartes buys More \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound of cheese.

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 14.
Number Sense
Which fractions are greater than \(\frac{2}{4}\)?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 17
Answer:  \(\frac{4}{4}\) is greater than \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{4}\) is greater than \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Does the recipe call for more salt or more pepper?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 18
Models:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 19
The recipe calls for more _______.
Explain:

Answer:
By seeing the above table we can find the recipe call for more salt or more pepper.
The recipe calls for more salt.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Show and Grow

Question 15.
Does the recipe above call for more Creole seasoning or more lemon juice?
Answer:
By seeing the above table we can find the recipe call for more Creole seasoning or more lemon juice.
The recipe calls for more lemon juice.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Question 16.
You and your friend each catch a fish. Your fish is \(\frac{5}{3}\) feet long, and your friend’s fish is \(\frac{2}{3}\) foot long. Whose fish is shorter? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
You and your friend each catch a fish.
Your fish is \(\frac{5}{3}\) feet long, and your friend’s fish is \(\frac{2}{3}\) foot long.
\(\frac{5}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{3}\)
5 is greater than 2.
Thus your friend’s fish is shorter.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You eat \(\frac{4}{8}\) of a quesadilla. Your friend eats \(\frac{2}{8}\) of a different quesadilla. Can you tell who ate more quesadilla? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 20
Answer:
Given,
You eat \(\frac{4}{8}\) of a quesadilla. Your friend eats \(\frac{2}{8}\) of a different quesadilla.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)
Thus you ate more quesadilla.

Compare Fractions on a Number Line Homework & Practice 11.6

Use the number line to compare the fractions
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-21
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{8}\) Lesser than \(\frac{5}{8}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-22
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{2}{6}\) Equal to \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Compare
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 23
Answer:
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{3}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{4}\).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-24
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{3}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{4}{6}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-25
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{3}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-26
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{3}\) Equal to \(\frac{2}{6}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-27
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{2}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{2}{6}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-28
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{6}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-29
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{4}{4}\).

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 30
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-30
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 31
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.6-31
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{3}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{4}\).

Question 12.
Write a fraction that is greater than \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{3}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 13.
Write a fraction that is less than \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 14.
Writing
Explain how to compare \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\) on a number line.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Grade 3 Chapter 11
By seeing the number line we can say that \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{4}{3}\)

Question 15.
Number Sense
Which fractions are less than \(\frac{4}{6}\)?

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 32
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{6}\) and \(\frac{1}{6}\) are less than \(\frac{4}{6}\).

Modeling Real Life
Use the recipe shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.6 33
Question 16.
Does the recipe call for more butter or more sugar? Explain.
Answer:
Recipe call for butter is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Recipe call for sugar is \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the recipe call for more sugar.

Question 17.
Does the recipe call for less flour or less nuts? Explain.
Answer:
Recipe call for flour is \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Recipe call for nuts is \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{2}\) > \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus the recipe call for less nuts.

Review & Refresh

Find the missing number.
Question 18.
98 + ____ = 98
Answer: 0

Explanation:
Add 98 with 0 we get 98

Question 19.
52 + (____ + 16) = (52 + 28) + 16
Answer: 28

Explanation:
The associative property allows us to change groupings of addition and keep the same value. (a+b)+c = a+(b+c)
hence the missing number is 28

Question 20.
33 + _____ + 46 = 33 + 46
Answer: 0
Explanation:
Fill the blank with 0 we get 33 + 46

Question 21.
14 + 67 = 67 + ______
Answer: 148

Explanation:
Add 14,67 & 67 we get 148

Lesson 11.7 Compare Fractions

Explore and Grow

Use a strategy to find the greater fraction.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{8}\)

Use a different strategy to check your answer.
Answer:
if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction

Construct Arguments
Tell your partner which strategy you prefer. Explain.
Answer:
I will compare the denominators to find which fraction is greater or lesser.
In the given fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\)
In this case, the numerators are the same and denominators are different.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest one.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Think and Grow: Compare Fractions

Example
Compare \(\frac{5}{6}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 1
Use Fraction Strips.
In some cases, it is easier to compare the This is an image333parts that are missing. Notice that each fraction is 1 part away from being equivalent to 1. Compare the missing pieces.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 2

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-2

Example
Compare \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{8}\).
The denominators are the same. Compare the numerators, 3 and 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-3

Example
Compare \(\frac{4}{6}\) and \(\frac{4}{8}\).
The numerators are the same. Look at the denominators 6 and 8 to compare the sizes of the parts. The fraction with the greater denominator is the lesser fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 4

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-4

Show and Grow

Compare.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 5
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-5

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-6
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{3}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{5}{6}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-7
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{0}{6}\) Equal to \(\frac{0}{2}\).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-8
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{8}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{7}{8}\).

Apply and Grow: Practice

Compare
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-9
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{4}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-10
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{3}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{3}{6}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-11
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{7}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-12
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{6}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-13
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{4}\) equal to \(\frac{2}{8}\).

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-14
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{2}{4}\) equal to \(\frac{2}{8}\).

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-15
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) equal to \(\frac{4}{8}\).

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-16
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{2}{3}\) lesser than \(\frac{5}{6}\).

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-17
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{3}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Complete the statement.
Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-18
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{3}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{5}{6}\).

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-19
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-20
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 17.
Newton and Descartes have the same-sized lunch. Newton eats \(\frac{2}{3}\) of his lunch. Descartes eats \(\frac{1}{2}\) of his lunch. Who eats more of his lunch?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 21
Answer:
Given,
Newton and Descartes have the same-sized lunch. Newton eats \(\frac{2}{3}\) of his lunch. Descartes eats \(\frac{1}{2}\) of his lunch.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus Newton eats more of his lunch.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the fractions and symbols to make two true statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-22

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton walks \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile to school. Descartes walks \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile to school. Who walks farther to school?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 23
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
_______ walks farther to school.

Answer:
Given,
Newton walks \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile to school.
Descartes walks \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile to school.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus Descartes walks farther to the school.

Show and Grow

Question 19.
Two apartment buildings have the same number of floors. New carpeting is installed on \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the floors in Building A and \(\frac{3}{6}\) of the floors in Building B. Which building has more floors with new carpeting?
Answer:
Given,
Two apartment buildings have the same number of floors.
New carpeting is installed on \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the floors in Building A and \(\frac{3}{6}\) of the floors in Building B.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Building A has more floors with new carpeting.

Question 20.
Newton buys \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of peanuts and \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of cashews.Which weighs less? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 24
Answer:
Given,
Newton buys \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of peanuts and \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of cashews.
Compare both the fractions
\(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus Cashews weights less than peanuts.

Question 21.
DIG DEEPER!
You are painting a backdrop for a school play. You paint \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the backdrop blue. You paint more of the backdrop yellow than blue. What fraction can represent the part of the backdrop that is yellow? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
You are painting a backdrop for a school play.
You paint \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the backdrop blue. You paint more of the backdrop yellow than blue.
\(\frac{3}{3}\) – \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the fraction can represent the part of the backdrop that is yellow is \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Compare Fractions Homework & Practice 11.7

Compare
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-25
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{2}{4}\) Greater than \(\frac{2}{6}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-26
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) equal \(\frac{3}{6}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-27
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-28
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{6}{6}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-29
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{3}{4}\) equal \(\frac{6}{8}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 30
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-30
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) lesser than\(\frac{7}{8}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 31
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-31
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{3}{6}\) Greater than \(\frac{3}{8}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 32
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-32
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{2}{3}\) lesser than\(\frac{3}{4}\).

Complete the statement
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 33
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-33
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{5}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{6}{6}\).

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 34
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-34
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{7}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{6}{8}\).

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 35
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-35
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 12.
Number Sense
Which statements are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 36
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.7-36

Question 13.
Writing
Explain how to compare \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{7}{8}\) using missing pieces.
Answer:
The least common denominator (LCD) is: 24.
Rewriting as equivalent fractions with the LCD:
2/3 = 16/24
7/8 = 21/24
Comparing the numerators of the equivalent fractions we have:
16/24 < 21/24
\(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
Newton and Descartes each have a phone with the same amount of storage. Newton’s storage is \(\frac{3}{4}\) full. Descartes’s storage is \(\frac{2}{8}\) full. Whose phone has more storage left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 37
Answer:
Given,
Newton and Descartes each have a phone with the same amount of storage.
Newton’s storage is \(\frac{3}{4}\) full. Descartes’s storage is \(\frac{2}{8}\) full
\(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)
Descartes phone has more storage left

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
A restaurant wants to serve two different-sized hamburgers. The larger hamburger will be \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound. Name a fraction that could represent the other hamburger’s size.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.7 38
Answer:
Given,
A restaurant wants to serve two different-sized hamburgers. The larger hamburger will be \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound.
The other size could represent \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Review & Refresh

Question 16.
There are 37 students on a bus. The bus stops 5 times. Seven students get off at each stop. How many students are left on the bus?
Answer:
Given,
There are 37 students on a bus. The bus stops 5 times. Seven students get off at each stop.
5 × 7 = 35
37 – 35 = 2
Therefore 2 students left on the bus

Lesson 11.8 Compare and Order Fractions

Explore and Grow

Plot the fractions on the number line. Order the fractions from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-1

Explanation: Ordering fraction simply means arranging fraction either from the smallest to the largest (ascending order) or largest to smallest (descending order). There are two common methods of ordering fractions.

Reasoning
How can you use the fraction \(\frac{1}{2}\) to compare and order fractions?
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{2}{2}\), \(\frac{3}{2}\), \(\frac{4}{2}\)

Think and Grow: Compare and Order Fractions

Example
Order the fractions \(\frac{7}{8}, \frac{1}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{8}\) from least to greatest.
Plot the fractions on the number line. All 3 fractions have the same denominator,8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 2
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-2

Example
Order the fractions \(\frac{2}{4}, \frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\) and from least to greatest.
Use Fraction Strips. All three fractions have the same numerator, 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 4

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Order the fractions \(\frac{3}{3}, \frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{3}{8}\) from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-5

Apply and Grow: Practice

Order the fractions from least to greatest
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-6
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from least to greatest

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-7

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from least to greatest

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-8
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from least to greatest

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-9

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from least to greatest

Order the fractions from greatest to least.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-10
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Greatest to least

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-11
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Greatest to least

Question 8.
Reasoning
Three fractions have the same denominator. How do you know which fraction is the greatest?
Answer:
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
Example:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-10

Question 9.
Open-Ended
Write a fraction that is between \(\frac{2}{8}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Answer:

Question 10.
Patterns
The fractions below are in order from least to greatest. Describe and complete the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-12

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A construction crew replaces \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile of a road on Monday, \(\frac{1}{4}\)mile of the road on Tuesday, and \(\frac{1}{6}\) mile of the road on Wednesday. On which day does the crew replace the longest piece of the road? On which day does the crew replace the shortest piece? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 13
Model:
The crew replaces the longest piece of the road on ______ and the shortest piece on ______.
Explain:
The crew replaces the longest piece of the road on Tuesday and the shortest piece on Monday.

Explanation:
A construction crew replaces \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile of a road on Monday, \(\frac{1}{4}\)mile of the road on Tuesday, and \(\frac{1}{6}\) mile of the road on Wednesday
Order of fraction from longest piece to shortest piece is \(\frac{1}{4}\) , \(\frac{1}{6}\) \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Show and Grow

Question 11.
You place three plants in order from shortest to tallest. A cactus is \(\frac{4}{6}\) foot tall, a fern is \(\frac{4}{4}\) foot tall, and an aloe vera plant is \(\frac{4}{8}\) foot tall. Which plant is first? Which plant is last? Explain.
Answer:
Given,
place three plants in order from shortest to tallest. A cactus is \(\frac{4}{6}\) foot tall, a fern is \(\frac{4}{4}\) foot tall, and an aloe vera plant is \(\frac{4}{8}\) foot tall
\(\frac{4}{8}\) , \(\frac{4}{6}\) , \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Question 12.
You measure the lengths of three spiders. The longest one is \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch long. The shortest one is \(\frac{1}{4}\) inch long. What is a possible length for the third spider? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 14
Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given,
You measure the lengths of three spiders. The longest one is \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch long. The shortest one is \(\frac{1}{4}\) inch long.
so possibility length for the third spider is \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
You are ordering three fractions. You know which fraction is the greatest and which fraction is the least. What do you know about the third fraction?
Answer:
Example:
if You measure the lengths of three spiders. The longest one is \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch long. The shortest one is \(\frac{1}{4}\) inch long.
so possibility length for the third spider is \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Compare and Order Fractions Homework & Practice 11.8

Order the fractions from least to greatest
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-15

Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Least to Greatest

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-16
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Least to Greatest

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-17
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Least to Greatest

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-18
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Least to Greatest

Order the fractions from greatest to least.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-19
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Greatest to least

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-20
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Greatest to least

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-21
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Greatest to least

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-22
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from Greatest to least

Question 9.
Reasoning
Three fractions have the same numerator. How do you know which fraction is the greatest?
Answer:if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction.
Example:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-22

Question 10.
Precision
Which set of fractions is ordered from least to greatest?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-11.8-23
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction
by using this statement we can write the order of fractions from least to greatest

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You survey your classmates about their favorite subject. \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the students choose math, \(\frac{1}{8}\) choose reading, \(\frac{2}{8}\) and choose science.Which subject receives the most votes? Which8subject receives the least votes? Explain.
Answer:
Given, You survey your classmates about their favorite subject. \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the students choose math, \(\frac{1}{8}\) choose reading, \(\frac{2}{8}\) and choose science
Math subject receives the most votes
\(\frac{5}{8}\) , \(\frac{2}{8}\) , \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Which subject receives the least vote is
reading of  \(\frac{1}{8}\) having least vote

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A carpenter has three drill bits. The thickest one is \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch. The thinnest one is \(\frac{3}{8}\) inch. What is a possible width for the third drill bit? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 11.8 24
Answer:  \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:
Given
A carpenter has three drill bits. The thickest one is \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch.
The thinnest one is \(\frac{3}{8}\) inch
The possibility of Width for the third drill bit is \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
You clean the lunch tables. There are 6 rows of tables with 7 tables in each row. How many tables do you clean?
Answer: 42

Explanation:
Given clean lunch tables There are 6 rows of tables with 7 tables in each row
we apply the row multiply columns concept
so 6 × 7 we get 42
Therefore the number of tables cleaned is 42

Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Performance Task

Question 1.
You invite five friends to dinner. You start making chili using the recipe shown at 4:00.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 1
a.What time should you tell your friends the chili will be ready?
Answer: by seeing the above image you can tell to your friends that the chili will be ready in 60 minutes

b.Which ingredient do you use the same amount of as crushed garlic?
Answer: chili powder is the ingredient that use the same amount as crushed garlic

c. Do you use more chopped green pepper or onion?
Answer: we use more chopped green pepper than onion

d. How many ounces of beans do you use in all?
Answer: 2 8 ounce  cans of pinto beans and 2 8- an ounce cans of black beans
so we get 32 ounces of beans in all

e. You know there is \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of diced tomatoes in each serving. How many cups of diced tomatoes do you need?
Answer:
No.of servings are 16
You know there is \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of diced tomatoes in each serving
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 16 we get 4
Thus we need 4 cups of diced tomatoes

f. You and your friends each eat 2 servings of chili. How many servings are left? Write an equation to solve. Use letters to represent unknown numbers.
Answer:  12
No.of servings are 16
You and your friends each eat 2 servings of chili we get 2+2= 4
thus 16-4 we get 12 servings are left

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 2

Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Activity

Fraction Spin and Compare
Directions:
1.Players take turns.
2.On your turn, spin both spinners. Cover a box that makes the statement true.
3.If there are no fractions left that make the statement true, then you lose your turn.
4.Play until all boxes are covered.
5.The player with the most boxes covered wins!
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison 3

Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Chapter Practice

11.1 Equivalent Fractions

Use the models to find an equivalent fraction. Both models show the same whole.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 1
Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-1
Explanation: \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 2
Answer:  \(\frac{4}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-2
Explanation: \(\frac{8}{8}\) and \(\frac{4}{4}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 3.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which one does belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-3
Explanation: above all the figures has the fraction \(\frac{4}{6}\) except circled figure
so second doest belong to the other three

11.2 Equivalent Fractions on a Number Line

Write two fractions that name the point shown.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-4
Explanation: \(\frac{6}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-5
Explanation: \(\frac{2}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{2}\) are equivalent fractions both gives the same answer.

11.3 Relate Fractions and Whole Numbers

Question 6.
Complete the number line. Then write equivalent fractions for the numbers 1 and 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-6

Write two equivalent fractions for the whole number.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-7

Explanation:
2 is equivalent to the fractions \(\frac{8}{4}\) and \(\frac{12}{6}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-8

Explanation:
6 is equivalent to the fractions \(\frac{18}{3}\) and \(\frac{24}{4}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-9

Explanation:
4 is equivalent to the fractions \(\frac{8}{2}\) and \(\frac{32}{8}\).

Write the equivalent whole number.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-10

The number equivalent to \(\frac{1}{1}\) and \(\frac{4}{4}\) is 1.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-11
The number equivalent to \(\frac{24}{8}\) and \(\frac{12}{4}\) is 3.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-12
The number equivalent to \(\frac{24}{6}\) and \(\frac{16}{4}\) is 4.

11.4 Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator

Shade to compare the fractions.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-13
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{3}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-14
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{2}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{2}\).

Compare
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-15
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-16
By seeing the above number we can find the equivalent fraction of
\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-17
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{5}{6}\).

11.5 Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator

Compare.
Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-18
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-19
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{4}{4}\).

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-20
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{3}\) Greater than \(\frac{2}{4}\).

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-21
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{3}{6}\) Greater than \(\frac{3}{8}\).

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 22
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-22
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{6}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{6}{6}

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-23
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So [latex]\frac{3}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{3}{4}

Question 24.
Modeling Real Life
Your glass of orange juice is [latex]\frac{1}{2}\) full. Your friend’s glass of orange juice is \(\frac{1}{3}\) full. Your friend has more orange juice. Explain how this is possible.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 24
Answer:
Given,
Your glass of orange juice is \(\frac{1}{2}\) full.
Your friend’s glass of orange juice is \(\frac{1}{3}\) full. Your friend has more orange juice.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus your friend has more orange juice.

11.6 Compare Fractions on a Number Line

Compare
Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-25
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{3}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-26
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{6}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{4}

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-27
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So [latex]\frac{4}{8}\) lesser than \(\frac{4}{6}

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-28
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So [latex]\frac{5}{8}\) Greater than \(\frac{3}{8}\).

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-29
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{5}{6}\) Greater than \(\frac{2}{6}\).

Question 30.
Write a fraction that is greater than \(\frac{1}{8}\).
Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\).

Explanation:
The fraction greater than \(\frac{1}{8}\) is \(\frac{3}{8}\).

Question 31.
Write a fraction that is less than \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Explanation:
The fraction less than \(\frac{2}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\).

11.7 Compare Fractions

Compare.
Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 32
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-32
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{1}\) Greater than \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 33
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-33
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{3}{6}\) Greater than \(\frac{5}{6}\).

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 34
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-34
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{4}{6}\) Greater than \(\frac{4}{8}\).

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 35
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-35
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{1}{3}\) lesser than \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 36
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-36
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction. So \(\frac{2}{2}\) Greater than \(\frac{2}{8}\).

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 37
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-37
Explanation: if the Numerator and denominators are different then we have to make the denominator as common and then compare the fractions. So \(\frac{3}{4}\) lesser than \(\frac{7}{8}\).

Question 38.
Number Sense
Which statements are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 38
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-38
all the statements are true

11.8 Compare and Order Fractions

Order the fractions from least to greatest.
Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 39
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-39
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction.

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 40
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-40
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-41
Explanation: if the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 42
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-11-Understand-Fraction-Equivalence-and-Comparison-chp-42
Explanation: if the numerators are the same, denominators are different then we have to compare the Denominator of both the fractions. The fraction with the Greater denominators is the lesser fraction.

Question 43.
Modeling Real Life
You, your friend, and your cousin have the same-sized aquarium. You fill your aquarium \(\frac{2}{3}\) full, your friend fills hers \(\frac{2}{6}\) full, and your cousin fills his \(\frac{2}{4}\) full. Which aquarium is the least full? Which aquarium is the most full? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison chp 43
Answer:
Given,
You, your friend, and your cousin have the same-sized aquarium.
You fill your aquarium \(\frac{2}{3}\) full, your friend fills hers \(\frac{2}{6}\) full, and your cousin fills his \(\frac{2}{4}\) full.
\(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{4}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Conclusion:

I wish the detailed solutions of Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade Book Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison are useful for the students to learn the concept. Please share this BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 11 Understand Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Answer Key to your friends to solve their doubts and queries. You can contact us through the comment section. Stay in touch with us to get the latest editions of all the Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapters solutions.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals

All topics in Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals are provided below. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals topics are given with problems, answers, explanations, practice tests, quiz, and, etc. Take every option we provided for you to prepare well for the exam. Students can easily become math experts by referring to Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals. Download Big Ideas Grade 5 Math Answers Ch 3 Add and Subtract Decimals to refer to in later times of your practice. Free PDF of BIM Grade 5 Chapter 3 Math Answers are given on this page.

Big Ideas 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals Math Book Answer Key

Practice all the problems given here and cross-check the answers to verify your preparation level. As per your preparation, concentrate on the topics. Practice more and gain more knowledge using Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals. Big Ideas Math Book 5th Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals is the best source to prepare for the exams and grab knowledge.

Lesson: 1 Estimate Sum and Differences

Lesson: 2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals

Lesson: 3 Add Decimals

Lesson: 4 Subtract Decimals

Lesson: 5 Add and Subtract Decimals

Lesson: 6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals

Lesson: 7 Problem Solving: Money

Chapter: 3 – Add and Subtract Decimals

Lesson 3.1 Estimate Sum and Differences

Explore and Grow

Estimate each sum or difference.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1 Estimate Sum and Differences

Construct Arguments
Compare your answers to your partner’s answers. Explain why they are the same or why they are different.

Answer:
My Friend and My answers are the same in the process of addition and subtraction.

Think and Grow: Estimate Sums and Differences

You can use rounding or compatible numbers to estimate sums and differences of decimals.+
Example
Estimate 27.21 + 48.73.
One Way: Use rounding. Round each addend to the nearest whole number. Then find the sum of the rounded numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 2
So, 27.21 + 48.73 is about _____.
Answer:
So, 27.21 + 48.73 is about 76.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Estimate Sums and Differences-example

Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 3
So, 27.21 + 48.73 is about _______.
Answer:
So, 27.21 + 48.73 is about 80.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Estimate Sums and Differences-example.

Example
Estimate 388.5 + 103.2.
One Way: Use rounding. Round each number to the nearest ten. Then find the difference of the rounded numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 4
So, 388.5 – 103.2 is about ______.
Answer:
So, 388.5 – 103.2 is about 492.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Estimate Sums and Differences-Example..

Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 5
So, 388.5 – 103.2 is about ______.
Answer:
So, 388.5 – 103.2 is about  505.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Estimate Sums and Differences-Example....

Show and Grow

Estimate the sum or difference.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Estimate Sums and Differences-Show and Grow1
Sum of 112.18 + 47.99 = 160.17

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Estimate Sums and Differences-Show and Grow2

Difference of 68.8 – 29.7 = 39.1.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Estimate the sum or difference.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Apply and Grow-Practice1
Difference of 7.95 – 1.72 = 6.23.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Apply and Grow-Practice4
Sum of 237.5 + 345.1 = 582.6.

Question 5.
67.5 + 15.1
Answer:
Sum of 67.5 + 15.1 = 82.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Apply and Grow-Practice5

Question 6.
418.9 – 14.7
Answer:
Difference of 418.9 – 14.7 = 404.2.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Apply and Grow-Practice6

Question 7.
13.9 – 8.21
Answer:
Difference of 13.9 – 8.21 = 5.69.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Apply and Grow-Practice7

Question 8.
208.6 + 56.9
Answer:
Sum of 208.6 + 56.9 = 265.5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Apply and Grow-Practice8

Question 9.
Number Sense
Descartes estimates a sum by rounding each number to the nearest ten. His estimate is 140. Which sums could he have estimated?
83.6 + 59.8
106.92 + 44.68
130.8 + 4.68
73.5 + 67.4
Answer:
Descartes estimates a sum of 73.5 + 67.4 = 140.9 to be 140 by rounding each number to the nearest ten.

Explanation:
First, we need to calculate the sum by rounding each number to the nearest ten:
83.6 + 59.8 = 143.4
106.92 + 44.68 = 151.6
130.8 + 4.68 = 135.48
73.5 + 67.4 = 140.9

Question 10.
Precision
Does rounding 209.11 – 104.53 to the nearest ten or to the nearest hundred give an estimate that is closer to the actual difference? Explain.
Answer:
Estimation to  the difference by rounding to nearest ten ( 209 – 105 = 104 )is closer to the actual difference ( 209.11 – 104.53 = 104.58 ).

Explanation:
First, Estimate the actual difference:
209.11 – 104.53 = 104.58
Second, Estimate the difference by rounding to nearest ten:
209 – 105 = 104
Third, Estimate the difference by rounding to nearest hundred:
200 – 100 = 100

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton packs a suitcase to fly on a plane. His suitcase needs to weigh less than 50.0 pounds. Should Newton overestimate or underestimate the weight of his suitcase? Explain.
Answer: Newton should overestimate the weight of his suitcase because the weigh should not be more than 50.0 pounds.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
About how many feet taller is One World Trade Center than the Empire State Building?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 10
Round the height of each building to the nearest hundred because you do not need a precise answer.
One World Trade Center: 1,800 feet
Empire State Building: 1,500 feet
Subtract the estimated height of the Empire State Building from the estimated height of One World Trade Center.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 11
One World Trade Center is about ______ feet taller than the Empire State Building.
Answer:
One World Trade Center is about  300 feet taller than the Empire State Building.

Explanation:
One World Trade Center: 1,800 feet
Empire State Building: 1,500 feet
Subtract the estimated height of the Empire State Building from the estimated height of One World Trade Center.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life
Difference of 1800 – 1500 = 300 feet.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
About how many more tons does the African elephant weigh than the hippopotamus?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 12
Answer:
Weight of African Elephant is 3.4 Tons more than the Weight of Hippopotamus.

Explanation:
Weight of African Elephant = 5.7 Tons
Weight of Hippopotamus = 2.3 Tons
Difference:
Weight of African Elephant – Weight of Hippopotamus = 5.7 – 2.3 = 3.4 Tons

 

Question 13.
One cup of wild rice has 6.5 grams of protein. One cup of shredded chicken has 36.9 more grams of protein than 1 cup of wild rice. About how many grams of protein are in 1 cup of chicken?
Answer:
1 cup of chicken = 43.4 grams of protein.

Explanation:
One cup of wild rice = 6.5 grams
One cup of shredded chicken has 36.9 more grams of protein than 1 cup of wild rice
=> 1 cup of chicken = 36.9 grams + 6.5 grams
=> 1 cup of chicken = 43.4 grams of protein.

Question 14.
The speed Earth orbits the Sun is 18.5 miles per second. This speed is 3.3 miles per second slower than the speed Venus orbits the Sun. About how fast does Venus orbit the Sun?
Answer:
Speed of Venus orbit the Sun is 15.2 miles fast than the Earth orbit per second.

Explanation:
Speed of Earth orbits the Sun = 18.5 miles
This speed is 3.3 miles per second slower than the speed Venus orbits the Sun
=> Speed of  Venus orbit the Sun = 18.5 – 3.3 miles = 15.2 miles

Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1

Estimate the sum or difference.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 13
Answer:
Sum of 76.81 + 2.17 =78.98.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 14
Answer:
Difference of 79.1 – 32.8 = 46.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.2

Question 3.
418.44 – 23.61
Answer:
Difference of 418.44 – 23.61 = 442.05
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.3

Question 4.
90.7 + 2.3
Answer:
Sum of 90.7 + 2.3 = 93
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.4

Question 5.
6.24 – 3.8
Answer:
Difference of 6.24 – 3.8 = 2.44
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.5...

Question 6.
837.51 + 149.27
Answer:
Sum of 837.51 + 149.27 = 986.78
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.6

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Write a decimal addition problem that has an estimated sum of 35.
Answer:
Sum of 16.3+18.7 = 35

Explanation:
16.3+18.7 =??
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.1-Estimate Sum and Differences Homework & Practice 3.1.7-Open-Ended

Question 8.
Reasoning
Describe a situation when you would estimate the difference of 25.4 and 19.8 to the nearest whole number.
Answer:
Estimate the difference between 25.4  and  19.8 by to round each number to the nearest whole number and then subtract the rounded numbers.

Explanation:
Rounding number to nearest whole number of 25.4 = 25
Rounding number to nearest whole number of 19.8 = 20
Difference = Rounding number to nearest whole number of 25.4 – Rounding number to nearest whole number of 19.8
= 25 – 20
= 5

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend participates in a 3.1-mile race. She walks for 1.4 miles of the race and runs the rest. About how many miles does your friend run?
Answer:
Number of miles my Friend runs = 1.7 miles.

Explanation:
Number of miles the race is my Friend participates  = 3.1 mils
Number of miles my Friend walks = 1.4 miles
Number of miles my Friend runs = Number of miles the race is my Friend participates  – Number of miles my Friend walks
=>  3.1 – 1.4
=> 1.7 miles.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Your phone has 16,000 megabytes of total storage space. About how much storage space is free?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.1 15
Answer:
Free Storage space left in Phone = 2944.8 megabytes

Explanation:
Total storage space of Phone = 16000 megabytes
Memory Storage for Photos = 3111.1 megabytes
Memory Storage for Applications = 5345.3 megabytes
Memory Storage for Music = 4598.8 megabytes
Free Storage space = Total storage space of Phone – ( Memory Storage for Photos + Memory Storage for Applications +
Memory Storage for Music)
=> 16000 – ( 3111.1 + 5345.3 + 4598.8 )
=> 16000 – 13055.2
=> 2944.8 megabytes

Review & Refresh

Find the sum.
Question 11.
\(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{4}{8}\) = ______
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\) .

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{2+4}{8}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{5}{2}\) = ______
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{5}{2}\) = \({3}\) .

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{5}{2}\) = \(\frac{1+5}{2}\) = \(\frac{6}{2}\) = \({3}\)

Question 13.
1 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) = ______
Answer:
1 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\) .

Explanation:
1 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{4+1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Lesson 3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use base ten blocks to find 1.4 + 0.7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 1

Use base ten blocks to find 1.16 – 0.89.
Answer:
So, 1.16 – 0.89 = 0.27

Explanation:
1.16 – 0.89 = Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals. – Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals...= Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals.....

Repeated Reasoning
Why can you use base ten blocks to model ones, tenths, and hundredths?
Answer:
Yes, we can use base ten blocks to model ones, tenths, and hundredths because they represent the numeral values in blocks which helps is east calculation and understanding.

Think and Grow: Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals

You have used models to add or subtract whole numbers. You can use similar models to add or subtract decimals.
Example
Find 1.5 + 2.7.
Make a quick sketch. Add the tenths, then the ones.
Regroup 10 tenths as 1 one.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 2
So, 1.5 + 2.7 = _____.
Answer:
So, 1.5 + 2.7 = 3.2

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 2

Example
Find 2.42 – 1.24.

So, 2.42 – 1.24 = _____.
Answer:
So, 2.42 – 1.24 = 1.18

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Think and Grow-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals-Example

Show and Grow

Make a quick sketch to find the sum or difference.
Question 1.
3.15 + 0.92 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 4
Answer:
3.15 + 0.92 = 4.07

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Show and Grow1

Question 2.
1.26 – 0.83 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 5
Answer:
1.26 – 0.83 = 0.43

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Show and Grow2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Make a quick sketch to find the sum or difference.
Question 3.
1.61 + 0.22 = _____
Answer:
1.61 + 0.22 = 1.83

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Question 4.
2.4 – 1.3 = _____
Answer:
2.4 – 1.3 = 1.1

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Apply and Grow-Practice4

Question 5.
2.2 + 0.9 = _______
Answer:
2.2 + 0.9 = 3.1

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Apply and Grow-Practice5

Question 6.
1.56 – 1.08 = ______
Answer:
1.56 – 1.08 = 0.48

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Apply and Grow-Practice6

Question 7.
Number Sense
Newton adds two decimals that are each greater than 0.5. What can you conclude about the sum?
Answer:
If Newton’s adds two decimals that are each greater than 0.5 then the Sum of the decimal numbers is going to be more than 0.5.

Explanation:
First Decimal Number= 1.2
Second Decimal Number = 0.8
Sum = First Decimal Number + Second Decimal Number
= 1.2 + 0.8 = 2.0

Question 8.
Structure
Write an equation represented by the quick sketch.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 6
Answer:
The Equation for the given quick Sketch :
3.54 + 1.63 = 5.17

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a model to find 1.31 – 0.4.
Answer:
1.31 – 0.4 = 0.91.54

Explanation:
1.31 – 0.4 = ???
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Apply and Grow-Practice6-DIG DEEPER!-9

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
How much longer is the duration of the wooden roller-coaster ride than the duration of the steel roller-coaster ride?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 7
Find the difference of the durations: 4.25 – 1.50.
Make a quick sketch of 4.25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 8
So, 4.25 – 1.50
Answer:
So, 4.25 – 1.50 = 2.75.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life.
So, 4.25 – 1.50 = ???
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life...

Show and Grow

Question 10.
A football player completes a 40-yard dash in 5.84 seconds. Another player completes it in 4.56 seconds. How much longer does it take the first player to complete the 40-yard dash than the second player?
Answer:
Time taken by the the first player to complete the 40-yard dash 1.28 seconds more than the second player.

Explanation:
Time taken by the First player to complete the 40-yard dash = 5.84 seconds
Time taken by the Second player to complete the 40-yard dash = 4.56 seconds
Time taken by the the first player to complete the 40-yard dash than the second player = Time taken by the First player to complete the 40-yard dash – Time taken by the Second player to complete the 40-yard dash
= 5.84 seconds – 4.56 seconds
= 1.28 seconds.

Question 11.
What is the total length of the narwhal?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 9
Answer:
Total Length of whole body Narwhal = 16.40 feet.

Explanation:
Length of Narwhal tusk = 4.92 feet
Length of Narwhal Body = 11.48 feet
Total Length of whole body Narwhal = Length of Narwhal tusk + Length of Narwhal Body
= 4.92 feet + 11.48 feet
= 16.40 feet.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
An Olympic gymnast scores 6.6 points for skill. She starts with 10.0 points for execution, then loses 0.4 point for execution errors. What is the gymnast’s final score?
Answer:
Final score points of Olympic gymnast = 16.2.

Explanation:
Score points of Olympic gymnast for skill = 6.6
Score points of Olympic gymnast for execution = 10.0
Score points lost of Olympic gymnast for execution errors = 0.4
Final score points of Olympic gymnast = Score points of Olympic gymnast for skill + Score points of Olympic gymnast for execution – Score points lost of Olympic gymnast for execution errors
= 6.6 + 10.0 – 0.4
= 16.6 – 0.4
= 16.2

Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2

Make a quick sketch to find the sum or difference.
Question 1.
2.6 + 1.3 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 10
Answer:
2.6 + 1.3 = 3.9.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2.1

Question 2.
1.36 – 0.25 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 11
Answer:
1.36 – 0.25 = 1.11

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2.2

Question 3.
0.84 – 0.17 = _____
Answer:
0.84 – 0.17 = 0.67.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2.3

Question 4.
1.25 + 1.55 = _____
Answer:
1.25 + 1.55 = 2.80.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2.4

Question 5.
2.6 – 1.9 = ______
Answer:
2.6 – 1.9 = 0.7.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2.5

Question 6.
3.9 + 0.6 = ______
Answer:
3.9 + 0.6 = 4.5.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.2.6

Question 7.
Structure
Write an equation represented by the quick sketch.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 12
Answer:

Question 8.
Number Sense
What is the greatest possible difference of two decimals to the hundredths place that are between 0 and 1?
Answer:
0.01 is the greatest possible difference of two decimals to the hundredths place that are between 0 and 1.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a decimal addition equation that requires regrouping the tenths. Explain how you know you need to regroup to add.
Answer:
Find the Sum of 1.5 +2.7 = 4.2

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.2-DIG DEEPER-9.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
The fastest 1-mile sack race was completed in 16.68 minutes. The fastest 1-mile piggyback race was completed in 11.18 minutes. How much longer did it take to complete the sack race than the piggyback race?
Answer:
Time taken to complete the sack race than the piggyback race = 5.5 minutes.

Explanation:
Time taken to complete fastest 1-mile sack race = 16.68 minutes
Time taken to complete fastest 1-mile piggyback race  = 11.18 minutes
Time taken to complete the sack race than the piggyback race = Time taken to complete fastest 1-mile sack race – Time taken to complete fastest 1-mile piggyback race
= 16.68  – 11.18
= 5.5 minutes

Question 11
Modeling Real Life
How many pounds of honey do the hives produce in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 13
Answer:
Total number of pounds of Honey produced by Hive A  and Hive B = 36.23 lb.

Explanation:
Number of pounds of Honey Hive A  produce = 15.25 lb.
Number of pounds of Honey Hive B  produce = 20.98 lb.
Total number of pounds of Honey produced Hive A and Hive B = Number of pounds of Honey Hive A  produce + Number of pounds of Honey Hive B  produce
= 15.25 + 20.98
= 36.23 lb.

Review & Refresh

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 14
Answer:
Perimeter of Rectangle = 102 yards.

Explanation:
Length of Rectangle = 32 yards.
Width of Rectangle = 19 yards
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (l + w)
= 2( 32 + 19 )
= 2 × 51
= 102 yards.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.2 15
Answer:
Perimeter of Rectangle = 114 mm.

Explanation:
Length of Rectangle = 36 mm
Width of Rectangle = 21 mm
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (l + w)
= 2 ( 36 + 21 )
= 2 × 57
= 114 mm.

Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals

Explore and Grow

Find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 1
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 2

Use a model to find the sum. Draw your model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add DecimalsBig-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals..
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals..

Construct Arguments
+-?
Answer:
The adding of decimals is same as to that of adding of whole numbers because here the process we do is adding the numbers in both.

Think and Grow: Add Decimals

To add decimals, add like place values.
Example
Add: 52.76 + 38.18. Estimate ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 4
Answer:
Sum of 52.76  +38.18 = 90.94
90.94 is close to 91.

Show and Grow

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow1..
5.6 is close to 6.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow2
1.76 is close to 2.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow3.
93.7 is close to 94.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow3.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow4...
16.51 is close to 17.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow4

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow3...
8.89 is close to 9.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice1
Check:
8.89 – 1.07
= 7.82.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow6...
38.7 is close to 39.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice6
Check:
38.7 – 15.1
= 23.6.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow7....
640.89 is close to 641.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow7

Check:
640.89 – 78.04
= 562.65.

Question 8.
2.5 + 4.6 = _____
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow8..
7.1 is close to 7.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow8

Check:
7.1 – 4.6
= 2.5.

Question 9.
107.5 + 63.5 = _____
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow9..
171.0 is close to 171.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow9
Check:
171.0 – 63.5
= 107.5.

Question 10.
49.87 + 32.53 = ______
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow10..
82.40 is close to 82.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow10
Check:
82.40 – 32.53
= 49.87.

Question 11.
96.5 + 4.1 = _____
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow11..
100.6 is close to 101.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Show and Grow11
Check:
100.6 – 4.1
= 96.5.

Question 12.
Number Sense
Which expressions have a sum greater than 24.7?
20.9 + 3.8
15.96 + 9.51
14.23 + 9.85
10.62 + 14.11
Answer:
The Sum of 15.96 + 9.51= 25.74 which is  greater than 24.7.

Explanation:
First, find the sum:
20.9 + 3.8 = 24.7
15.96 + 9.51 = 25.47
14.23 + 9.85 = 24.08
10.62 + 14.11 = 24.73

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 34.5 + 6.8 and gets a sum of 413. Without adding, explain how you know your friend’s answer is correct.
Answer:
My Friend’s answer is incorrect because he did not add the digits correctly .

Explanation:
Find the Sum :
34.5 + 6.8 = 41.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-YOU BE THE TEACHER13

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You have 6.5 megabytes of storage space left on your tablet. Do you have enough space to download both of the ebooks?
Add the ebook file sizes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 12
Compare the sum of the file sizes to the available space on your tablet.
You ______ have enough room to download both ebooks.
Answer:
I  have enough space to download both ebooks.

Explanation:
Storage space for tale of the Monster = 3.8 megabytes
Storage space for In the Game = 2.5 megabytes
Total storage for tale of the Monster and In the Game = 3.8 + 2.5 = 6.3 megabytes
Storage space left on the Tablet = 6.5 megabytes
Storage space left after downloading the eBooks = Storage space left on the Tablet  – Total storage for tale of the Monster and In the Game
= 6.5 – 6.3
= 0.2 megabytes

Show and Grow

Question 14.
A chef needs 3.75 pounds of fish for a dinner party. She catches a fish that is 2.50 pounds and another fish that is 1.75 pounds. Does she catch enough fish for her dinner party?
Answer:
She catches enough fish for her dinner party in fact 0.5 pounds more weight fish she catches.

Explanation:
Weight of first fish = 2.50 pounds
Weight of Second Fish = 1.75 pounds
Weight of both Fishes = 2.50 + 1.75 = 4.25 pounds
Weight of the fish needed for a dinner party = 3.75 pounds
Difference:
Weight of fishes caught – Weight of the fish needed for a dinner party
= 4.25 – 3.75
= 0.5 pounds

Question 15.
Your school’s long jump record is 5.51 meters. You jump 3.38 meters on your first attempt. Your second attempt is 1.56 meters longer than your first. Do you break your school’s record?
Answer:
I have broke the school record by jumping more 2.81 meters than the record distance.

Explanation:
Distance long jump record in the school = 5.51 meters
Distance jumped on my first attempt = 3.38 meters
Your second attempt is 1.56 meters longer than your first.
=> Distance jumped on my second attempt = 1.56+ 3.38 meters = 4.94 meters
Total distance jumped by me = Distance jumped on my first attempt + Distance jumped on my second attempt
= 3.38 + 4.94
= 8.32 meters
Difference:
Total distance jumped by me – Distance long jump record in the school
= 8.32 – 5.51
= 2.81 meters

Question 16.
The melting point of aluminum is 403.86 degrees Celsius cooler than the melting point of gold. What is the melting point of gold?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 13
Answer:
The melting point of Gold = 1063.32  degrees Celsius.

Explanation:
The melting point of aluminum = 660.32 degrees Celsius
The melting point of aluminum is 403.86 degrees Celsius cooler than the melting point of gold.
=> Let the melting point of Gold be X
=> X- 403.86 = 660.32
=> X = 660.32 + 403
=> X = 1063.32  degrees Celsius.

Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.1..
8.8 is close to 9.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.1
Check:
8.8 – 1.3 = 7.5.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.2..
683.89 is close to 684.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.2
Check:
683.89 – 82.31 = 601.58.

Question 3.
19.73 + 7.16 = _____
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.3..
26.89 is close to 27.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.3
Check:
26.89 – 7.16 = 19.73.

Question 4.
84.6 + 44.7 = ______
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.4..
129.3 is close to 129.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.4
Check:
129.3 – 44.7 = 84.6.

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 5.
123.98 + 47.65 = _____
Answer:
123.98 + 47.65 = 171.63.
171.63 is close to 172.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.5
Check:
171.63 – 47.65
= 123.98.

Question 6.
427.8 + 13.2 = _____
Answer:
427.8 + 13.2 = 441.0
441 is close to 441.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.6
Check:
441.0 – 13.2 = 427.8.

Question 7.
Reasoning
Your friend adds 46.7 and 5.4. Without calculating, is the sum greater than or less than 51? Explain.
Answer:
Answer is greater than 51 because the Sum of 46.7 + 5.4 = 52.1.

Explanation:
First Find the Sum:
46.7 + 5.4 = 52.1.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.3 Add Decimals-Add Decimals Homework & Practice 3.3.7

Question 8.
Writing
Explain why it is important to use place value to line up the numbers when adding decimals.
Answer:
When we add whole numbers,  in the Value (cents) column above, you line up the numbers so that the digits in the ones place-value column are aligned. In order to keep the numbers in the proper place-value column when adding decimals, align the decimal points.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You need 10.5 pounds of fruit for a fruit salad. You buy 3.8 pounds of apples and 6.7 pounds of pears. Do you buy enough fruit?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.3 16
Answer:
Yes, there are enough fruits for a fruit salad.

Explanation:
Weight of fruits for a fruit salad needed = 10.5 pounds
Weight of Apples purchased = 3.8 pounds
Weight of pears purchased = 6.7 pounds
Total Weight of apples And Pears purchased = Weight of Apples purchased + Weight of pears purchased
= 3.8  + 6.7
= 10.5 pounds
=> Compare:
Weight of fruits for a fruit salad needed : Total Weight of apples And Pears purchased
= 10.5 pounds :10.5 pounds

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
A scientist has 200.59 grams of mercury. She has 135.23 fewer grams of zinc. How many grams of zinc does she have?
Answer:
Zinc she has is 65.36 grams.

Explanation:
Mercury a Scientist has = 200.59 grams
She has 135.23 fewer grams of zinc
=> Let the Zinc be X
=> X + 135.23 = 200.59
=> X = 200.59 – 135.23
=> X = 65.36 grams.

Review & Refresh

Find the factor pairs for the number.
Question 11.
24
Answer:
Factor pairs of 24 :
1 × 24
2 × 12
3 × 8
4 × 6

Question 12.
36
Answer:
Factor pairs of 36 :
1 × 36
2 × 18
3 × 12
4 × 9
6 × 6

Question 13.
17
Answer:
Factor pairs of 17 :
1 × 17
17 is a prime number so it has 1 and itself as factors.

Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals

Explore and Grow

Find the difference.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 2
Use a model to find the difference. Draw your model.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract DecimalsBig-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-

Construct Arguments
How is subtracting decimals similar to subtracting whole numbers?
Answer:
Subtracting decimals is similar to subtracting whole numbers because the process is same for both kind of numbers that is subtracting.

Think and Grow: Subtract Decimals

To subtract decimals, subtract like place values.

Example
Subtract: 18.93 – 7.66.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 4

Show and Grow

Find the difference. Then check your answer.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow1..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow1

Check:
36.3 + 35.3 = 71.6

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow2..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow2
Check:
52.43 + 10.65 = 63.08.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow3..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow3
Check:
15.56 + 9.19 = 24.75.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the difference. Then check your answer.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice4..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice4
Check:
5.7 + 1.8 = 7.5.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice5..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice5
Check:
2.81 + 81.11 = 83.92.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice6..

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice6
Check:
8.9 + 5.7 = 14.6.

Question 7.
856.02 – 48.12 = _______
Answer:
856.02 – 48.12 = 807.90.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice7
Check:
48.12 + 807.90 = 856.02.

Question 8.
3.76 – 0.53 = _____
Answer:
3.76 – 0.53 = 3.23.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice8
Check:
0.53 + 3.23 = 3.76.

Question 9.
27.5 – 21.7 = ______
Answer:
27.5 – 21.7 = 5.8.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice9
Check:
21.7 + 5.8 = 27.5.

Question 10.
737.2 – 2.8 = _____
Answer:
737.2 – 2.8 = 734.4.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice10
Check:
2.8 + 734.4 = 737.2.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 534.8 – 23.9. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 11
Answer:
My Friend’s answer is incorrect because he misplaced the digits and then did their difference.

Explanation:
First find the Difference:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Add Decimals-YOU BE THE TEACHER11

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Find y.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 12
Answer:
y = 2.2

Explanation:
d + 26.4 = 38.7
=> d = 38.7 – 26.4
=> d = 12.3
d = y + 10.1
Substitute d = 12.3 in d = y + 10.1
=> d = y + 10.1
=> 12.3 = y + 10.1
=> y = 12.3 – 10.1
=> y = 2.2

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The world record for the longest dog tongue is 18.58 centimeters. The previous record was 11.43 centimeters. By how many centimeters was the record broken?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 13
Subtract the previous record,11.43 centimeters, from the current record,18.58 centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 14
So, the record was broken by ________ centimeters.

Answer:
Length of the record was broken by 7.15 centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 14

Explanation:
Length of world record for the longest dog tongue = 18.58 centimeters
Length of previous world record for the longest dog tongue = 11.43 centimeters
Length of the record was broken = Length of world record for the longest dog tongue – Length of previous world record for the longest dog tongue
= 18.58 centimeters – 11.43 centimeters
= 7.15 centimeters.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
The average high summer temperature in Death Valley, California, is 46.7 degrees Celsius. The hottest temperature ever recorded is 56.7 degrees Celsius. How much greater is the hottest recorded temperature than the average high temperature?
Answer:
The hottest recorded temperature is greater by 10 degrees Celsius than the average high temperature.

Explanation:
The average high summer temperature in Death Valley, California = 46.7 degrees Celsius
The hottest temperature ever recorded = 56.7 degrees Celsius.
Difference:
=The hottest temperature ever recorded  – The average high summer temperature in Death Valley, California
= 56.7 – 46.7
= 10 degrees Celsius

Question 14.
An athlete’s fitness tracker reads 2.69 miles at noon. The figure shows the athlete’s fitness tracker before going to sleep that night. How many miles were recorded after noon?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 15
Answer:
Reading of an athlete’s fitness tracker recorded after noon = 3.65 miles.

Explanation:
Reading of an athlete’s fitness tracker  at noon = 2.69 miles
Reading of an athlete’s fitness tracker before going to sleep=6.34 miles
Reading of an athlete’s fitness tracker recorded after noon = Reading of an athlete’s fitness tracker before going to sleep – Reading of an athlete’s fitness tracker  at noon
= 6.34 – 2.69
= 3.65 miles.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend is using a pattern to knit a 139.7-centimeter-long scarf. He has already knitted 61.8 centimeters. How many centimeters of scarf does he have left to knit? Write your answer as a mixed number.
Answer:
Length of scarf  left to knit = 77.9/100 centimeters

Explanation:
Length of long scarf pattern to knit = 139.7 centimeter
Length of scarf already knitted = 61.8 centimeters
Length of scarf  left to knit = Length of long scarf pattern to knit – Length of scarf already knitted
= 139.7 centimeter – 61.8 centimeters
= 77.9 centimeters

Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4

Find the difference. Then check your answer.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4.1
Check:
21.5 + 13.0
= 34.5.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4.2
Check:
38.51 + 958.23
= 996.74.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4.3
Check:
3.8 + 19.7
= 23.5.

Find the difference. Then check your answer.
Question 4.
856.02 – 48.12 = ______
Answer:
856.02 – 48.12
= 807.90
Check:
48.12 + 807.90
= 856.02

Question 5.
3.76 – 0.53 = ______
Answer:
3.76 – 0.53
= 3.23
Check:
0.53 + 3.23
= 3.76.

Question 6.
27.5 – 21.7 = ______
Answer:
27.5 – 21.7
= 5.8
Check:
21.7 + 5.8
= 27.5.

Question 7.
737.2 – 2.8 = _______
Answer:
737.2 – 2.8
= 734.4.
Check:
2.8 + 734.4
= 737.2.

Question 8.
Number Sense
Which statements describe the difference of 134.6 and 78.9?
The difference is 55.7.
The difference is greater than 55.
The difference is less than 55.07.
Answer:
The difference is 55.7 is the correct statement.

Explanation:
First find the Difference:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4-Number Sense
The difference is 55.7.
The difference is greater than 55.
The difference is less than 55.07.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.4 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4-DIG DEEPER-9
Explanation:
Missing digit in tenths place:
Add tenths place 3 + 8 =11, => 1
Subtract the tenths digits and ones digits to get the missing digit in tens place.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.4 Subtract Decimals-Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.4-DIG DEEPER-9

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
The world record for the longest fingernails on a pair of female hands is 576.41 centimeters. The world record for the longest fingernails on a single hand is 909.60 centimeters. How much longer is the world record for the longest fingernails on a single hand than the world record for the longest fingernails on a pair of female hands?
Answer:
The world record for the longest fingernails on a single hand is 333.19 centimeters longer than the world record for the longest fingernails on a pair of female hands.

Explanation:
Length of the world record for the longest fingernails on a pair of female hands = 576.41 centimeters.
Length of the world record for the longest fingernails on a single hand = 909.60 centimeters.
Difference:
Length of the world record for the longest fingernails on a single hand – Length of the world record for the longest fingernails on a pair of female hands
= 909.60 –  576.41
= 333.19 centimeters.

Review & Refresh

Find the product.
Question 11.
80 × 10 = ______
Answer:
Multiplication:
80 × 10 = 800.

Question 12.
30 × 90 = _______
Answer:
Multiplication:
30 × 90 = 2700.

Question 13.
60 × 70 = _______
Answer:
Multiplication:
60 × 70 = 4200.

Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals

Explore and Grow

Add the decimals.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 1
Answer:
1.36 + 2.5 + 2.78
= 3.86 + 2.78
= 6.64.

Explanation:
Count the given values:
1.36 + 2.5 + 2.78 = ???
Add the decimal values:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals

Reasoning
How did you find the sum? What other ways can you find the sum?
Answer:
First count the figures given place values and later add the decimals values.
Other ways are like counting total figures n doing the addition of them.

Think and Grow: Add and Subtract Decimals

Example
Add: 7.39 + 4.16 + 9. Estimate ________
Use place value to line up the addends. Add the hundredths, then the tenths, and then the ones.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 2

Answer:
7.39 + 4.16 + 9.00 = 20.55.
20.55 is close to 21.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Think and Grow-Add and Subtract Decimals

Example
Find 18.46 + 13.31 – 5.6. Estimate _______
Use order of operations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 3
Answer:
26.17 is close to 26.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Think and Grow-Add and Subtract Decimals-example

Show and Grow

Evaluate. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
6.84 + 2.9 + 5.22 = ______
Answer:
6.84 + 2.9 + 5.22 = 14.96
14.96 is close to 15.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow1
Check:
14.96 – 5.22 – 2.9
= 9.74 – 2.9
=6.84.

Question 2.
41.55 – 14.09 + 42.4 = ______
Answer:
41.55 – 14.09 + 42.4 = 69.86.
69.86 is close to 70.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Show and Grow2
Check:
69.86 – 42.4 + 14.09
= 27.46 + 14.09
= 41.55.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Evaluate. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 3.
5.3 – 1.7 – 2 = _____
Answer:
5.3 – 1.7 – 2 = 3.6 – 2 = 1.6
1.6 is close to 2.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice3
Check:
1.6 + 2 + 1.7
= 3.6 + 1.7
= 5.3.

Question 4.
14.08 + 6.15 – 9.3 = ______
Answer:
14.08 + 6.15 – 9.3 = 10.93
10.93 is close to 11.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice4
Check:
10.93 + 9.3 – 6.15
= 20.23 – 6.15
= 14.08.

Question 5.
24.7 – 5.1 + 3.75 = _____
Answer:
24.7 – 5.1 + 3.75 = 19.6 + 3.75 = 23.35
23.35 is close to 23.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice5
Check:
23.35 – 3.75 + 5.1
= 19.6 + 5.1
= 24.7.

Question 6.
32.6 + 6 + 15.1 = ______
Answer:
32.6 + 6 + 15.1 = 38.6 + 15.1 = 53.7.
53.7 is close to 54.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Apply and Grow-Practice6
Check:
53.7 – 15.1 – 6
= 38.6 – 6
= 32.6

 

Question 7.
You have $35.50. You buy a movie for $15.89 and music for $12.50. How much money do you have left?
Answer:
Amount left with me = $7.11.

Explanation:
Total money I have = $35.50
Cost of movie purchased = $15.89
Cost of music purchased = $12.50
Total amount spent on music and movie = $15.89 + $12.50 = $28.39
Amount left with me = Total money I have – Total amount spent on music and movie
= $35.50 – $28.39
= $7.11

Question 8.
You ride your bike each day over the weekend. How far do you ride your bike altogether?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 4
Answer:
Total Distance covered over all travelled on bike = 7.55 miles.

Explanation:
Distance covered on Friday = 1.6 miles
Distance covered on Saturday = 2.85 miles
Distance covered on Sunday = 3.1 miles
Total Distance covered over all = Distance covered on Friday+ Distance covered on Saturday + Distance covered on Sunday
= 1.6 + 2.85 + 3.1
= 4.45 + 3.1
= 7.55 miles.

Question 9.
Logic
Your friend finds 5.31 + 2.8 – 1.27 and gets the answer 4.32. Is your friend’s answer reasonable? Explain.
Answer:
My friend answer is incorrect because the correct answer is 7 not 4.32.

Explanation:
First do the adding the equation:
5.31 + 2.8 – 1.27
= 8.11 – 1.27
= 6.84
6.84 is close to 7.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-DIG DEEPER-10
Explanation:
First add hundredths place then tenths values.
Secondly add ones and tens values checking the sum and numbers given for adding.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-DIG DEEPER-10

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A lifeguard walks around the perimeter of the lazy river ride. How far does the lifeguard walk?
Find the perimeter of the lazy river by adding all of the side lengths.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 6
The lifeguard walks _______ feet.
Answer:
The lifeguard walks  637.50 feet.

Explanation:
Length of the side of the river = 216.75 feet
Length of the side of the river = 216.75 feet
Length of the base of the river = 204 feet
Perimeter  of the river = Length of the side of the river + Length of the side of the river + Length of the base of the river
= 216.75 + 216.75  + 204
= 433.50 + 204
= 637.50 feet.

Show and Grow

Question 11.
You ride your skateboard around the perimeter of the park. How far do you ride your skateboard?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 7
Answer:
Perimeter of the park = 184.8 m

Explanation:
Length of side of the park = 67.2 m
Length of the base of the park = 39.6 m
Length of the Height of the park = 78 m
Perimeter of the park = Length of side of the park + Length of the base of the park + Length of the Height of the park
= 67.2 + 39.6 + 78
= 106.8 + 78
= 184.8 m

Question 12.
A German shepherd weighs 24.75 pounds less than the Bernese mountain dog. A husky weighs 21.67 pounds less than the German shepherd. How much does the husky weigh?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 8
Answer:
Weight of Husky dog = 56.91 lb.

Explanation:
Weight of Bernese mountain dog = 103.33 lb.
A German shepherd weighs 24.75 pounds less than the Bernese mountain dog.
=> 103.33 – 24.75
=.> 78.58 lb.
A husky weighs 21.67 pounds less than the German shepherd.
=> 78.58 – 21.67
=> 56.91 lb.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend launches a water balloon 136.33 yards. Your cousin launches a balloon 15.67 yards farther than your friend and 8.33 yards farther than you. How much farther do you launch a balloon than your friend?
Answer:
I have launched 24 yards a balloon farther than my friend.

Explanation:
Length of my friend a water balloon = 136.33 yards
Your cousin launches a balloon 15.67 yards farther than your friend and 8.33 yards farther than you.
=>  136.33 + 15.67 = 152 + 8.33 = 160.33 yards
Difference:
Your cousin launches a balloon 15.67 yards farther than your friend and 8.33 yards farther than you – Length of my friend a water balloon
= 160.33 – 136.33
= 24 yards

Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5

Evaluate. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
2.8 + 7 + 5.3 = _______
Answer:
2.8 + 7 + 5.3 = 9.8 + 5.3 = 15.1.
15.1 is close to 15.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5.1
Check:
15.1 – 5.3 – 7
= 9.8 – 7
= 2.8.

Question 2.
14.86 + 5.72 – 3 = ______
Answer:
14.86 + 5.72 – 3 = 20.58 – 3 = 17.58.
17.58 is close to 18.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5.2
Check:
17.58 + 3 – 5.72
= 20.58 – 5.72
= 14.86.

Question 3.
28.95 – 4.12 – 0.7 = ______
Answer:
28.95 – 4.12 – 0.7 = 24.83 – 0.7 = 24.13.
24.13 is close to 24.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5.3
Check:
24.13 + 0.7 + 4.12
= 24.83 + 4.12
= 28.95.

Question 4.
10.6 – 10.35 + 34.27 = _____
Answer:
10.6 – 10.35 + 34.27 = 0.25 + 34.27 = 34.52.
34.52 is close to 35.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5.4
Check:
34.52 – 34.27 + 10.35
= 0.25 + 10.35
= 10.60.

Question 5.
19.36 + 24 + 8.5 = ______
Answer:
19.36 + 24 + 8.5 = 43.36 + 8.5 = 51.86.
51.86 is close to 52.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5.5
check:
51.86 – 8.5 -24
= 43.36 – 24
= 19.36.

Question 6.
5 – 0.2 – 1.37 = ______
Answer:
5 – 0.2 – 1.37 = 4.8 – 1.37 = 3.43.
3.43 is close to 3.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Add and Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.5.6
Check:
3.43 + 1.37 + 0.2
= 4.8 + 0.2
= 5.

Question 7.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which addition problem does not involve adding zeros to line up the place values?
5.39 + 1.76 + 40.9
25 + 1.8 + 6.3
18.5 + 6.2 + 0.7
12.49 + 10.8 + 0.13
Answer:
The equations 25 + 1.8 + 6.3, 18.5 + 6.2 + 0.7 and 12.49 + 10.8 + 0.13 does not involve adding of zeros to line up the place values.

Explanation:
First, find the sum:
5.39 + 1.76 + 40.9 = 7.15 + 40.9 = 48.05
25 + 1.8 + 6.3 = 26.8 + 6.3 =  33.1
18.5 + 6.2 + 0.7 = 24.7 + 0.7 = 25.4
12.49 + 10.8 + 0.13 = 23.29 + 0.13 = 23.42

Question 8.
Logic
Which expressions have an estimate greater than 10?
4.9 + 2.5 + 3.8
8.1 – 4.3 + 2.7
10.9 – 0.2 – 0.1
10.8 + 3.6 – 5.2
Answer:
The Equation 4.9 + 2.5 + 3.8 and 10.9 – 0.2 – 0.1 have an estimate greater than 10.

Explanation:
First, add and subtract the equation:
4.9 + 2.5 + 3.8 = 7.4 + 3.8 = 11.2
8.1 – 4.3 + 2.7 = 3.8 + 2.7 = 6.5
10.9 – 0.2 – 0.1 = 10.7 – 0.1 =10.6
10.8 + 3.6 – 5.2 = 14.4 – 5.2 = 9.2

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You run across the length of the soccer field until you reach the middle, and then run back. Then you run across the entire length of the field. How far do you run altogether?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 9
Answer:
Length of the total run altogether = 137.16 m.

Explanation:
Length of the entire soccer field = 91.44 m
Length of the half soccer field = 45.72 m
Length of the total run altogether = Length of the entire soccer field + Length of the half soccer field
= 91.44  + 45.72
= 137.16 m

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Three pumpkins are catapulted at a contest. How much farther does Pumpkin C travel than Pumpkin A?
• Pumpkin A travels 0.61 mile.
• Pumpkin B travels 0.28 mile farther than Pumpkin A.
• Pumpkin C travels 0.06 mile farther than Pumpkin B.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 10
Answer:
Pumpkin C travel 0.34 miles longer than Pumpkin A.

Explanation:
Pumpkin A travels= 0.61 mile.
Pumpkin B travels 0.28 mile farther than Pumpkin A.
=> 0.61 + 0.28 = 0.89 miles
Pumpkin C travels 0.06 mile farther than Pumpkin B.
=> 0.89 + 0.06 = 0.95 miles
Difference between the Pumpkin C and Pumpkin A= Pumpkin C travels – Pumpkin A travels
= 0.95 – 0.61
= 0.34 miles

Review & Refresh

Determine whether the shape has line symmetry. Draw each line of symmetry.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Review & Refresh-11

Explanation:
No, there is no line symmetry in the given shape.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Review & Refresh-12

Explanation:
No, there is no line symmetry in the given shape.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.5 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Review & Refresh-13

Explanation:
No, there is no line symmetry in the given shape.

Lesson 3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use mental math to find each sum.
6.5 + 3.1 + 3.5 = ______
10. 79 + 6.25 = ______
Answer:
6.5 + 3.1 + 3.5 = 13.1.
10. 79 + 6.25 = 17.04.

Explanation:
Given 6.5 + 3.1 + 3.5,
6.5 and 3.5 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
6.5 + 3.1 + 3.5 = 3.1 + (6.5 + 3.5) Associative Property
= 3.1 + 10
= 13.1

10. 79 + 6.25 = 17.04.

Reasoning
Explain how you used mental math to find each.
Answer:
For the first one, I have rearranged the numbers  to add compatibles numbers first. Later used Associative Property to add them.
Second equation directly I have added the given numbers.

Think and Grow: Use mental math to Add or Subtract Decimals

Example
find 12.4 + 3.9 + 7.6.
Notice that 12.4 and 7.6 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
12.4 + 3.9 + 7.6 = 3.9 + 12.4 + 7.6 Commutative Property
= 3.9 + (12.4 + 7.6) Associative Property
= 3.9 + 20
= _____
So, 12.4 + 3.9 + 7.6 = _______.

Answer:
So, 12.4 + 3.9 + 7.6 = 23.9.

Explanation:
Notice that 12.4 and 7.6 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
12.4 + 3.9 + 7.6 = 3.9 + 12.4 + 7.6 Commutative Property
= 3.9 + (12.4 + 7.6) Associative Property
= 3.9 + 20
= 23.9.

Example
Use mental math to find 6.75 – 4.46.
Use compensation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 1
You subtracted 0.04 more than 4.46, so you must add 0.04 to2.25 to find the answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 2
So, 6.75 – 4.46 = _____.

Answer:
So, 6.75 – 4.46 = 2.29.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 1
Subtract 0.04 more than 4.46, so you must add 0.04 to 2.25 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-Lesson 3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals-Think and Grow-Use mental math to Add or Subtract Decimals

Show and Grow

Use mental math to find the sum or difference.
Question 1.
4.25 + 1.36 + 2.75 = ______
Answer:
4.25 + 1.36 + 2.75 = 8.36.

Explanation:
4.25 + 1.36 + 2.75 = ????
Notice that 4.25 and 2.75 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
4.25 + 1.36 + 2.75 = 1.36 + 4.25 + 2.75 Commutative Property
= 1.36 + (4.25 + 2.75 )Associative Property
= 1.36 + 7.00
= 8.36

Question 2.
12.78 + 5.25 = _____
Answer:
12.78 + 5.25 = 18.03.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Show and Grow2
Add 0.05 more than 5.25, so you must subtract 0.05 to 18.08 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Show and Grow2..

Question 3.
17.4 – 13.6 = _____
Answer:
17.4 – 13.6 = 3.8.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Show and Grow3
Subtract 0.4 more than 13.6, so you must add 0.4 to 3.4 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Show and Grow3...

Question 4.
29.8 – 2.27 = _____
Answer:
29.8 – 2.27 = 27.53.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Show and Grow4
Subtract 0.03 more than 2.27, so you must add 0.03 to 27.50 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Show and Grow4..

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use mental math to find the sum or difference.
Question 5.
1.25 + 2.45 + 1.75 = _____
Answer:
So, 1.25 + 2.45 + 1.75 = 5.45.

Explanation:
1.25 + 2.45 + 1.75 = ???
Notice that 1.25 and 1.75 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
1.25 + 2.45 + 1.75 =  2.45 + 1.25 + 1.75 Commutative Property
= 2.45 + (1.25 + 1.75) Associative Property
= 2.45 + 3.00
= 5.45.

Question 6.
8.4 + 6.15 + 2.6 = ______
Answer:
So, 8.4 + 6.15 + 2.6 = 17.15.

Explanation:
8.4 + 6.15 + 2.6 = ???
Notice that 8.4 and 2.6 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
8.4 + 6.15 + 2.6 = 6.15 + 8.4 + 2.6 Commutative Property
= 6.15 + (8.4 + 2.6)  Associative Property
= 6.15 + 11.00
= 17.15

Question 7.
17.82 – 15.61 = _____
Answer:
17.82 – 15.61 = 2.21.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Apply and Grow-Practice7
Subtract 0.09 more than 15.61, so you must add 0.09 to 2.12 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Apply and Grow-Practice7..

Question 8.
35.7 – 13.8 = _____
Answer:
35.7 – 13.8 = 21.9.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Apply and Grow-Practice8
Subtract 0.2 more than 13.8, so you must add 0.2 to 21.7 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Apply and Grow-Practice8..

Question 9.
Two years ago, your friend was1.25 meters tall. Today, your friend is1.48 meters tall. How many meters did your friend grow?
Answer:
Height my friend grew = 0.23 meters.

Explanation:
Height of my Friend two years ago = 1.25 meters
Height of my Friend today = 1.48 meters
Height my friend grew = Height of my Friend today – Height of my Friend two years ago
= 1.48 – 1.25
= 0.23 meters

Question 10.
Clothing items are donated to an organization. How many pounds of clothing are donated altogether?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 3
Answer:
Total weight of all clothing donated together = 134.8 pounds.

Explanation:
Weight of Shirts donated = 37.4 pounds.
Weight of Pants donated = 54.8 pounds.
Weight of Coats donated = 42.6 pounds.
Total weight of all clothing donated together = Weight of Shirts donated + Weight of Pants donated + Weight of Coats donated
= 37.4 +  54.8 + 42.6
= 134.8 pounds.

Question 11.
Reasoning
Can you use the Commutative Property to find the difference of two decimals? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, we can Commutative Property to find the difference of two decimals because the methodology we doing is subtraction in between the numerals. So, there wont be any difference expect the points.

 

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Use each digit from 1 through 8 once to complete the problem.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 4
Answer:

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-DIG DEEPER-12

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A city receives 75.5 inches of snowfall and 45.27 inches of rainfall in 1 year. How much more snowfall does the city receive than rainfall?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 5
Use compensation to find the difference between the amounts of snowfall and rainfall: 75.5 – 45.27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 6
So, the city receives _______ inches more snowfall than rainfall.
Answer:
So, the city receives 30.23 inches more snowfall than rainfall.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Show and Grow

Question 13.
On average, a left-handed professional baseball player runs from home plate to first base in 4.2 seconds. The record is 3.1 seconds. How much faster is the record than the average time?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 7
Answer:
1.1 seconds is faster the record than the average time.

Explanation:
Time taken on an average, a left-handed professional baseball player runs from home plate to first base = 4.2 seconds
Time of record = 3.1 seconds
Difference in the time = Time taken on an average, a left-handed professional baseball player runs from home plate to first base  – Time of record
= 4.2 – 3.1
= 1.1 seconds

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
The distances of each part of a triathlon are shown in the table. What is the total distance? How many more miles are traveled on land than in water?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 8
Answer:
Total Distance travelled on land than in water = 30.07 miles.

Explanation:
Distance travelled to Swimming = 0.93 miles
Distance travelled on Bike = 24.8 miles
Distance travelled by Running = 6.2 miles
Total Distance travelled on land = Distance travelled on Bike – Distance travelled by Running
= 24.8  + 6.2
= 31 miles
Total Distance travelled on land than in water = Total Distance travelled on land  – Distance travelled to Swimming
= 31 – 0.93
= 30.07 miles

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You paint a meter stick for a craft. You paint 30.7 centimeters blue and 67.9 centimeters green. How many millimeters are not painted?
Answer:
Length of meter stick not painted = 14 millimeters

Explanation:
Length of blue paint painted on meter stick = 30.7 centimeters
Length of green paint painted on meter stick = 67.9 centimeters
Total length of meter stick painted = Length of blue paint painted on meter stick  + Length of green paint painted on meter stick
= 30.7 + 67.9
= 98.6 centimeters
Conversion:
1 meter = 100 centimeters
Length of meter stick not painted = 100 centimeters – 98.6 centimeters = 1.4 centimeters.
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
1.4 centimeter = ???
cross multiplication:
1.4 × 10 ÷ 1
= 14 ÷ 1
= 14 millimeters.

Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6

Use mental math to find the sum or difference
Question 1.
2.73 + 2.14 = ______
Answer:
2.73 + 2.14 = 4.87.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.1
Add 0.06 more than 2.14, so you must subtract 0.06 to 4.93 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.1..

Question 2.
54.3 + 14.1 = ______
Answer:
54.3 + 14.1 = 68.40

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.2

Add 0.9 more than 14.1, so you must subtract 0.9 to 69.3 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.2..

Question 3.
19.86 – 7.2 = ______
Answer:

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.3

Subtract 0.8 more than 7.2, so you must add 0.8 to 11.86 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.3..

Question 4.
41.19 – 0.58 = _______
Answer:
41.19 – 0.58 =

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.4
Subtract 0.02 more than 0.58 , so you must add 0.02 to 40.59 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.4..

Question 5.
6.5 + 2.32 + 1.5 = _____
Answer:
6.5 + 2.32 + 1.5 = 10.32.

Explanation:
Notice that 6.5 and 1.5 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
6.5 + 2.32 + 1.5  = 2.32 + 6.5 + 1.5 Commutative Property
= 2.32 + (6.5 + 1.5)  Associative Property
= 2.32 + 8.0
= 10.32.

Explanation:

Question 6.
2.25 – 1.15 = ______
Answer:
2.25 – 1.15 = 1.10.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.6
Subtract 0.05 more than 1.15 , so you must add 0.05 to 1.05 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.6-Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals Homework & Practice 3.6.6..

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 23.74 – 13.18. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 9
Answer:
My Friend answer is correct because he used mental math to do the sum of the given numbers.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 9

Question 8.
Writing
Describe a situation when you would use the Commutative Property to add decimals using mental math.
Answer:

The Commutative Property of Addition states that the order of the addends does not change the sum.
Let’s test the property using simple whole numbers.

4+5+9=18       4+9+5=18         5+4+9=18        5+9+4=18         9+5+4=18          9+4+5=18

As you can see, we can add the three addends (4, 5, and 9) in many different orders. The Commutative Property of Addition works also works for four, five, six addends, and it works for decimal addends, too.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Use mental math to find the missing number.
Answer:

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
How much wider is the wingspan of the albatross than the length of an 8.89-foot-long alligator?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 10
Answer:
2.06 feet wider is the wingspan of the albatross than the length of an 8.89-foot-long alligator.

Explanation:
Length of Albatross wingspan = 10.95 feet
Length of  long Alligator = 8.89 foot
Difference:
Length of Albatross wingspan – Length of  long Alligator
= 10.95 – 8.89
= 2.06 feet

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend buys 3.5 meters of blue ribbon, 2.25 meters of red ribbon, and 3.75 meters of white ribbon. How much ribbon does she buy in all?
Answer:
Total Length of all ribbons = 9.50 meters.

Explanation:
Length of blue ribbon = 3.5 meters
Length of red ribbon = 2.25 meters
Length of white ribbon = 3.75 meters
Total Length of all ribbons = Length of blue ribbon + Length of red ribbon + Length of white ribbon
= 3.5 + 2.25 + 3.75
= 5.75 + 3.75
= 9.50 meters

Review & Refresh

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.6 11
Question 12.
Name a line segment.
Answer:
Line segment = CD or DE or EF

Explanation:
In  geometry, a line segment is a part of a  line that is bounded by two distinct end  points , and contains every point on the line between its endpoints.

Question 13.
Name two different rays.
Answer:
EF and AB are two different Rays.

Explanation:
In geometry, a ray can be defined as a part of a  line that has a fixed starting point but no end point. It can extend infinitely in one direction.

Question 14.
Name two different lines.
Answer:
EA and DF are different lines.

Explanation:
In geometry, a line can be defined as a straight one- dimensional figure that has no thickness and extends endlessly in both directions. It is often described as the shortest distance between any two points.

Lesson 3.7 Problem Solving: Money

Explore and Grow

Use addition or subtraction to make several item Cost conclusions about the prices of the items in the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 1
Answer:
Total cost of all items = $180.77.

Explanation:
Cost of Video game = $54.93
Cost of Selfie stick = $15.08
Cost of Power Bank = $27.36
Cost of Speaker = $83.40
Total cost of all items = Cost of Video game + Cost of Selfie stick + Cost of Power Bank + Cost of Speaker
= $54.93 + $15.08 + $27.36 + $83.40
= $70.01 + $27.36 + $83.40
= $97.37 + $83.40
= $180.77.

Precision
Switch papers with your partner. Check your partner’s work for reasonableness.
Answer: Both the answers are reasonableness because the answers procedure is same and answers match.

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Money

Example
You have$11.83. You earn $13.75 more doing chores. Then you buy headphones for $12.39. How much money do you have left?
Understand the Problem
What do you know?
• You have $11.83.
• You earn $13.75 more.
• You buy headphones for $12.39.

What do you need to find?
• You need to find how much money you have left.

Make a Plan
How will you solve?
Write and solve an equation to find the amount of money you have left.

Solve
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 2
Let s represent the amount of money you have left.
s = 11.83 + 13.75 – 12.39
= ______ − 12.39
= ______
You have $ ______ left.
Answer:
Amount left out with me = $13.19.

Explanation:
Amount of money I have = $11.83
Amount of money I have earned = $13.75
Cost of Headphones = $12.39
Amount left out with me = Amount of money I have + Amount of money I have earned + Cost of Headphones
= $11.83 + $13.75 – $12.39
= $25.58 – $12.39
= $13.19.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have $32.63. You earn $28.42 more washing windows. Then you buy a video game for $35.95.How much money do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 3
Answer:
Amount of money left with me = $25.1.

Explanation:
Amount of money I have = $32.63
Amount of money earned = $28.42
Cost of Video game = $35.95
Amount of money left with me = Amount of money I have + Amount of money earned + Cost of Video game
= $32.63 + $28.42 – $35.95
= $61.05 – $35.95
= $25.1.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 2.
You buy 3 cell phone games that cost $5 each and an in-game purchase for $1.69. How much money do you spend?
Answer:
Total Cost of money spent = $16.69

Explanation:
Cost of 3 cell phones games = 3 × $5 = $15
Cost of an in-game = $1.69
Total Cost of money spent = Cost of 3 cell phones games + Cost of an in-game
= $15 + $1.69
= $16.69.

Question 3.
Newton buys a movie ticket that costs $4.50, a drink that costs $2.25, and a bag of popcorn that costs $4.75. How much money does Newton spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 4
Answer:
Total amount spent = $11.50.

Explanation:
Cost of movie ticket = $4.50
Cost of a drink = $2.25
Cost of a bag of popcorn = $4.75
Total amount spent = Cost of movie ticket + Cost of a drink + Cost of a bag of popcorn
= $4.50 + $2.25 + $4.75
= $6.75 + $4.75
= $11.50.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 4.
Your friend buys a remote control car for$17.89 and some batteries for $5.49. He gives the cashier $25. How much change does he receive?
Answer:
Amount of change he receives = $1.62.

Explanation:
Cost of remote control car = $17.89
Cost of Some batteries = $5.49
Money given to cashier = $25
Amount of change he receives = Money given to cashier- Cost of remote control car + Cost of Some batteries –
= $25 – $17.89 + $5.49
= $25 – $23.38
= $1.62.

Question 5.
Your cousin has $156.34 in his bank account. He withdraws $15.50 one day and $6.75 the next day.  How much money is in his bank account now?
Answer:
Amount left in his bank account = $134.09.

Explanation:
Amount of money my cousin has in bank account = $156.34
Amount of money he withdraws one day = $15.50
Amount of money he withdraws next day = $6.75
Amount left in his bank account = Amount of money my cousin has in bank account – Amount of money he withdraws one day –
Amount of money he withdraws next day
= $156.34 – $15.50 – $6.75
= $156.34 – $22.25
= $134.09.

Question 6.
Adult admission to open skate night costs $5.75. Admission for children under 13 costs $1.50 less than adult admission. What is the total admission cost for two 12-year-olds?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 5
Answer:
Total admission cost for two 12-year-olds = $10.

Explanation:
Cost of Adult admission to open skate night = $5.75
Cost of Admission for children under 13 costs $1.50 less than adult admission
=> $5.75 – $1.50
=> $4.25
Total admission cost for two 12-year-olds = Cost of Adult admission to open skate night  + Cost of Admission for children under 13
= $5.75 + $4.25
= $10.

Question 7.
Descartes buys a book for $14.99 and a bookmark. He pays with a $20 bill and receives $3.96 in change. How much does the bookmark cost?
Answer:
Cost of the book mark = $1.05.

Explanation:
Cost of the book and a bookmark = $14.99
Amount paid by a bill = $20
Amount of money received as change = $3.96
Cost of the book mark = Amount paid by a bill – Cost of the book and a bookmark – Amount of money received as change
= $20 – $14.99 – $3.96
= $5.01 – $3.96
= $1.05.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You pay for colored pencils, a coloring book, and a pencil sharpener with two $20 bills. Your change is $17.42. How much does the pencil sharpener cost?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 6
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of the pencil sharpener.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 7
Let c represent the cost of the pencil sharpener.
c = 40 – (8.99 + 5.99) – 17.42
= 40 – ______ – 17.42
= ____ − 17.42
= _____
The pencil sharpener costs $ _____.
Answer:
Cost of the pencil sharpener costs = $7.6.

Explanation:
Cost of the coloring book = $5.99
Cost of the colored pencils = $8.99
Amount received as change = $17.42
Amount paid in two bills = $20 × 2 = $40
Cost of the pencil sharpener costs = Amount paid in two bills  – (Cost of the coloring book + Cost of the colored pencils) + Amount received as change
= $40 – ( $5.99 + $8.99 ) – $17.42
= $40 – $14.98 – $17.42
= $25.02 – $17.42
= $7.6.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Newton pays for a new collar, a bag of dog food, and a box of bones with four $5 bills. His change is $4.02. How much does the box of bones cost?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 8
Answer:
Cost of the box of bones = $3.39.

Explanation:
Cost of a bag of dog food = $5.49
Cost of a dog’s new collar = $7.10
Amount of change he receives = $4.02
Amount paid in four bills = $5 × 4 = $20.
Cost of the box of bones = Amount paid in four bills – (Cost of a bag of dog food – Cost of a dog’s new collar) – Amount of change he receives
= $20 – ($5.49 + $7.10) – $4.02
= $20 – $12.59 – $4.02
= $7.41 -$4.02
= $3.39.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend buys the scooter and the helmet. Your friend has two gift cards that are worth the same amount. Your friend uses both gift cards and pays an additional $2.49. What is the amount on each gift card?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 9
Answer:
Cost of the each gift cards = $75.

Explanation:
Cost of the Helmet = $27.50
Cost of the Scooter = $124.99
Amount of money paid additionally = $2.49
Let the gifts cards be X.
= 2Cost of the each gift cards + Amount of money paid additionally = (Cost of the Helmet + Cost of the Scooter)
=> 2X + $2.49 = $27.50 + $124.99
=> 2X + $2.49 = $152.49
=> 2X = $152.49 – $2.49
=> 2X = $150.00
=> X = $150.00 ÷ 2
=> X = $75.

Problem Solving: Money Homework & Practice 3.7

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 1.
A musician buys an electronic keyboard for $89.94 and 2 books of sheet music for $7.99 each. How much does she spend in all?
Answer:
Total cost of money spent = $105.92.

Explanation:
Cost of an electronic keyboard = $89.94
Cost of two books of sheet music = $7.99 × 2 = $15.98
Total cost of money spent = Cost of an electronic keyboard + Cost of two books of sheet music
= $89.94 +  $15.98
= $105.92

Question 2.
You have$28.49. You spend $14.95 at a bowling alley. You win $35.00 for setting the record score for your age group. How much money do you have now?
Answer:
Amount of money I have now = $48.54.

Explanation:
Amount of money I have = $28.49
Amount spent at a bowling alley = $14.95
Amount of money won = $35.00
Amount of money I have now = Amount of money I have – Amount spent at a bowling alley  + Amount of money won
=> $28.49 – $14.95 + $35.00
=> $13.54 +  $35.00
=> $48.54.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 3.
Newton wins a $50 gift card toa craft store. He uses the card to buy a scrapbook for $19.99 and a set of markers for $10.75. How much money is left on his gift card?
Answer:
Amount of money left on his gift card = $19.26.

Explanation:
Amount of money won for a gift card to a craft store = $50
Amount of money spent to buy a scrapbook by using card = $19.99
Amount of money spent to buy a set of markers by using card = $10.75
Amount of money left on his gift card = Amount of money won for a gift card to a craft store – (Amount of money spent to buy a scrapbook by using card  + Amount of money spent to buy a set of markers by using card)
= $50 – ($19.99 + $10.75)
= $ 50 – $30.74
= $19.26.

Question 4.
A dancer buys a tutu for $48.75 and the ballet shoes. She gives the cashier $80. How much change does she receive?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 10
Answer:
Amount of change received = $4.76.

Explanation:
Cost of the  ballet shoes = $26.49
Cost of the tutu = $48.75
Amount given to cashier = $80
Amount of change received = Amount given to cashier – (Cost of the tutu + Cost of the ballet shoes )
= $80 – ( $ 26.49 + $48.75)
= $80 – $75.24
= $4.76

Question 5.
A theater director buys props for$116.20 and costumes for $494.85. He has $194.27 left. How much money did he have to start?
Answer:
Amount of money he  have started = $805.32.

Explanation:
Cost of props = $116.20
Cost of the costumes = $494.85
Amount left with him = $194.27
Amount of money he  have started = Cost of the costumes + Cost of props + Amount left with him
= $116.20 + $494.85 + $194.27
= $611.05 + $194.27
= $805.32

Question 6.
Descartes uses a metal detector at a beach. He finds 3 quarters, 6 dimes,2 nickels, and 5 pennies. He drops1 quarter and 2 pennies into the water. Then he finds 4 more dimes. How much money does Descartes have now?
Answer:
Total amount of money Descartes have now = 163 pennies.

Explanation:
Number of dimes found = 6
Number of quarters found = 3
Number of pennies found = 5
Number of nickels found = 2
Number of quarters dropped into water= 1
Number of pennies dropped into water = 2
Number of dimes found later = 4
Conversion:

Total number of quarters = Number of quarters found  – Number of quarters dropped into water
=> 3 – 1 = 2
Quarter into pennies
=> 1 Quarter = 25 pennies
=> 2 Quarter  = 25 × 2 = 50 pennies.

Total number of dimes = Number of dimes found  + Number of dimes found later
=> 6 +4 = 10
Dimes into pennies
=> 1 Dime = 10 pennies
=> 10 Dime = 10 × 10 = 100 pennies

Total number of Nickels = Number of nickels found
=> 2
Nickels into pennies
=> 1 Nickel = 5 pennies
=> 2 nickels = 2 × 5 = 10 pennies

Total Number of pennies = Number of pennies found – Number of pennies dropped into water
=> 5 – 2
=>3 pennies
Total amount of money Descartes have now = Total number of quarters  + Total number of dimes + Total number of Nickels + Total Number of pennies
= 50 pennies + 100 pennies + 10 pennies + 3pennies
= 163 pennies.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Descartes wants to buy a ball launcher for Newton for $12.50. He has one $10 bill, two $5 bills, three $1 bills, and two quarters. Make a table to find four ways Descartes could pay for the ball launcher.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 11
Answer:
Amount of change Descartes receives = $11.00.

Explanation:
Cost of a ball launcher = $12.50
Number of bills he has worth $10 = 1
Number of bills he has worth $5 = 2
Number of bills he has worth $1 = 3
Number of quarters he has = 2
Conversion:
Quarter into Dollars
1 Quarter = $0.25
=>2 Quarter = 0.25 × 2 = $0.50.

Amount given to cashier =  Number of bills he has worth $10 + Number of bills he has worth $5 + Number of bills he has worth $1 +
Number of quarters he has
=> $10 + $5 + $5 + $1 + $1 + $1 + $0.50
=> $23.50

Amount of change Descartes receives = Amount given to cashier – Cost of a ball launcher
=> $23.50 – $12.50
= $11.00
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Problem Solving-Money Homework & Practice 3.7.7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Your science teacher pays for an ultraviolet light, a beaker, and a glowing liquid kit with five $5 bills. The ultraviolet light costs $13.29. The beaker costs $7.99. Your teacher’s change is $0.77. What is the cost of the glowing liquid kit?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3.7 12
Answer:
Cost of the glowing liquid kit = $2.95

Explanation:
Cost of the ultraviolet light = $13.29
Cost of the beaker = $7.99
Amount of change teacher receives= $0.77

Your science teacher pays an ultraviolet light, a beaker, and a glowing liquid kit with five $5 bills
=> Cost of the ultraviolet light  + Cost of the beaker  + Cost of the glowing liquid kit + Amount of change teacher receives = 5 × $5
=> $13.29 + $7.99 + Cost of the glowing liquid kit + $0.77 = $25
=> $22.05 + Cost of the glowing liquid kit = $25
=> Cost of the glowing liquid kit = $25 – $22.05
=> Cost of the glowing liquid kit = $2.95

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent length.
Question 9.
10 ft = _____ in.
Answer:
10 ft = 120 in.

Explanation:
Conversion:
1 feet = 12 inches
=> 10 feet = 10 × 12 =120 inches.

Question 10.
2 mi = ______ ft
Answer:
2 mi = 10560 ft

Explanation:
Conversion:
1 Mile = 5280 feet
2 mi = 5280 × 2 = 10560 ft

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) yd = ______ ft
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) yd = \({1}\) feet.

Explanation:
Conversion:
1 Yard = 3 Feet
\(\frac{1}{3}\) yd = \(\frac{1}{3}\) yd  × \({3}\) = \({1}\) feet

Add and Subtract Decimals Performance Task

The table shows the average amount of rainfall each month Rainfall in Mobile, Alabama. Mobile, Alabama
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 1
Question 1.
About how many inches of rainfall does the city get Average Month Rainfall during June, July, and August combined?
Answer:
Average rainfall during June, July, and August = 6.77 inches.

Explanation:
Rainfall rate in June month = 6.10 inches
Rainfall rate in July month = 7.24 inches
Rainfall rate in August month = 6.97 inches
Average rainfall during June, July, and August = Rainfall rate in June month + Rainfall rate in July month + Rainfall rate in August month ÷ 3
= 6.10 + 7.24  + 6.97  ÷ 3
= 20.31 ÷ 3
= 6.77 inches

Question 2.
How many more inches of rainfall does the city usually get in July than in October?
Answer:
3.54 inches. of Rainfall is more in the city in July  month than in October month.

Explanation:
Rainfall in July month = 7.24 inches
Rainfall in October month = 3.70 inches
Comparison:
= Rainfall in July month – Rainfall in October month
= 7.24  – 3.70
= 3.54 inches.

Question 3.
a. Round each rainfall amount to the nearest tenth. About how many inches of rainfall does Mobile get each year?
b. How can you check whether your answer is reasonable?
Answer:
a)  The total Rainfall Mobile gets each year = 66.22 inches.
b) We can check the answer is reasonable or not by rounding it to its nearest 10.

Explanation:
a) Round each rainfall amount to the nearest tenth.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Performance Task-3
5 and above rainfall rate is said to be rounded to its nearest 10 as 10.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Performance Task

b)
We can check the answer is reasonable or not by rounding it to its nearest 10.
63 is close reasonable to 66.22.

 

Question 4.
The average yearly amount of rainfall in Seattle, Washington, is about 3 feet.
a. Write an expression to find about how many more inches of rain Mobile, Alabama, usually gets than Seattle each year.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 2
b. Seattle is known for being one of the rainiest cities in the United States, even though it usually gets less rain than Mobile each year. Why do you think Seattle is known as the rainiest city?
Answer:
a) 30.22 inches of rain Mobile, Alabama, usually gets than Seattle each year.

b) Seattle is known for being one of the rainiest cities in the United States, even though it usually gets less rain than Mobile each year. This means that Seattle has more frequent rain, but the light rain results in low totals than compared to rainfall in Mobile, Alabama.

Explanation:
a)The average yearly amount of rainfall in Seattle, Washington, is about 3 feet.
=> Average Rainfall of Seattle, Washington  = 3 feet.
Total Average of  Rainfall in Mobile, Alabama = 66.22 inches
Difference :
1 feet = 12 inches
=> 3 feet = 12 × 3 = 36 inches
Total Average of  Rainfall in Mobile, Alabama – Average Rainfall of Seattle, Washington
= 66.22 – 36
= 30.22 inches

b)
Seattle is known for being one of the rainiest cities in the United States, even though it usually gets less rain than Mobile each year. This means that Seattle has more frequent rain, but the light rain results in low totals than compared to rainfall in Mobile, Alabama.

Add and Subtract Decimals Activity

Decimal Dots
Directions:
1. Players take turns connecting two dots, each using a different color.
2. On your turn, connect two dots, vertically or horizontally. If you close a square around an expression, then evaluate the expression. If you do not close a square, your turn is over.
3. Continue playing until all expressions are evaluated.
4. The player with the most evaluated expressions wins!
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals 3

Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice

3.1 Estimate the Sum or Differences.

Estimate the sum or difference.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 1
Answer:
741.26 + 103.75 = 845.31.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice.1

 

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 2
Answer:
89.5 – 41.8 = 47.7.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice.2

Question 3.
13.47 – 9.82
Answer:
13.47 – 9.82 = 3.65.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice.3

Question 4.
64.9 + 17.5
Answer:
64.9 + 17.5 = 82.4.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice.4

Question 5.
Number Sense
Descartes estimates a difference by rounding each number to the nearest whole number. His estimate is 6. Which problems could he have estimated?
97.5 – 91.8
10.3 – 4.6
23.7 – 18.1
7.2 – 0.8
Answer:
His Problems of estimation to 6 are 97.5 – 91.8 and 7.2 – 0.8.

Explanation:
First  round the numbers to nearest whole number later , find the difference:
97.5 – 91.8 = 98 – 92 = 6
10.3 – 4.6 = 10 – 5 = 5
23.7 – 18.1 = 23 – 18 = 5
7.2 – 0.8 = 7 – 1 = 6

3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals

Make a quick sketch to find the sum or difference.
Question 6.
0.27 + 0.19
Answer:
0.27 + 0.19 = 0.46.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals-6

Question 7.
2.52 – 1.36 = ______
Answer:
2.52 – 1.36 = 1.16.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.2 Use Models to Add or Subtract Decimals-7

3.3 Add Decimals

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 8
Answer:
10.36 + 0.29 = 10.65.
10.65 is reasonable.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals.4
Check:
10.65 – 0.29
=10.36.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 9
Answer:
461.2 + 78.5 = 539.7
539.7 is reasonable.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals.9
Check:
539.7 – 78.5
= 461.2.

Question 10.
97.65 + 23.08 = _____
Answer:
97.65 + 23.08 = 120.73.
120.73 is reasonable.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals-10
Check:
120.73 – 23.08
= 97.65.

Question 11.
63.39 + 4.05 = _____
Answer:
63.39 + 4.05 = 67.44.
67.44 is a reasonable.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals-11
Check:
67.44 – 4.05
=63.39.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
You want to conduct an experiment. You need 0.5 cup of water and the same amount of oil. How many cups of liquid do you need for the experiment?
Answer:
Total number of cups required of liquid = 1 cup.

Explanation:
Amount of water required = 0.5 cup
Amount of oil required = 0.5 cup
Total number of cups required of liquid = Amount of water required + Amount of oil required
= 0.5 + 0.5
= 1 cup

3.4 Subtract Decimals

Find the difference. Then check your answer.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 13
Answer:
86.5 – 49.4 = 37.1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals- 3.4 Subtract Decimals - 13
Check:
37.1 + 49.4
= 86.5

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 14
Answer:
37.82 – 5.07 = 32.75.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals- 3.4 Subtract Decimals - 14
Check :
32.75 + 5.07
= 37.82.

Question 15.
582.58 – 33.21 = _____
Answer:
582.58 – 33.21 = 549.37.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals- 3.4 Subtract Decimals - 15
Check:
549.37 + 33.21
= 582.58.

Question 16.
99.2 – 8.6 = _____
Answer:
99.2 – 8.6 = 90.6.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.3 Add Decimals- 3.4 Subtract Decimals - 16
Check:
90.6 + 8.6
= 99.2.

3.5 Add and Subtract Decimals

Evaluate. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 17.
9.28 – 5.4 – 2.75 = _____
Answer:
9.28 – 5.4 – 2.75 = 1.13.
1.13 is reasonable.

Explanation:
9.28 – 5.4 – 2.75 =  ???
9.28 – 5.4 – 2.75 = 3.88 – 2.75 = 1.13.
Check:
1.13 + 2.75 + 5.4
= 3.88 + 5.4
= 9.28.

Question 18.
2 + 18.6 – 7.9 = ______
Answer:
2 + 18.6 – 7.9 = 12.7.
12.7 is reasonable.

Explanation:
2 + 18.6 – 7.9 = ???
2 + 18.6 – 7.9
= 20.6 – 7.9
= 12.7
Check:
12.7 + 7.9 – 18.6
= 20.6 – 18.6
= 2

Question 19.
26 – 0.8 + 13.1 = ______
Answer:
26 – 0.8 + 13.1 = 38.3
38.3 is reasonable.

Explanation:
26 – 0.8 + 13.1 = ???
26 – 0.8 + 13.1
= 25.2 + 13.1
= 38.3

Check:
38.3 – 13.1 + 0.8
= 25.2 + 0.8
= 26

Question 20.
1.72 + 4 + 35.68
Answer:
1.72 + 4 + 35.68 = 41.4
41.4 is reasonable.

Explanation:
1.72 + 4 + 35.68 = ???
1.72 + 4 + 35.68
= 5.72 + 35.68
= 41.4

Check:
41.4 – 35.68 -4
= 5.72 – 4
= 1.72

Question 21.
Modeling Real Life
How many inches of snowfall Month Snowfall (inches)are recorded altogether?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 21
Answer:
Total Snowfall in all three months = 70.50 inches.

Explanation:
Snowfall in the month of December = 27.5
Snowfall in the month of January = 30.75
Snowfall in the month of February = 12.25
Total Snowfall in all three months = Snowfall in the month of December – Snowfall in the month of January – Snowfall in the month of February
= 27.5 + 30.75 + 12.25
= 58.25 + 12.25
= 70.50 inches.

3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals

Use mental math to find the sum or difference.
Question 22.
6.3 + 2.98 + 5.7 = ______
Answer:
6.3 + 2.98 + 5.7 = 14.98.

Explanation:
Given 6.3 + 2.98 + 5.7 =
6.3 and 5.7 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
6.3 + 2.98 + 5.7 = 2.98 + (6.3 + 5.7) Associative Property
= 2.98 + 12
= 14.98.

Question 23.
9.1 + 4.57 + 8.03 = _____
Answer:
9.1 + 4.57 + 8.03 = 21.7.

Explanation:
Given 9.1 + 4.57 + 8.03
4.57 and 8.03 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
9.1 + 4.57 + 8.03 = 9.1 + (4.57 + 8.03) Associative Property
= 9.1 + 12.6
= 21.7

Question 24.
25.7 – 14.9 = _____
Answer:
25.7 – 14.9 = 10.8.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals-24
Subtract 0.1 more than 14.9 , so you must Add 0.1 to 10.7 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals-24..

Question 25.
9.24 – 2.67 = _____
Answer:
9.24 – 2.67 = 6.57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals-25
Subtract 0.03 more than 2.67 , so you must Add 0.03 to 6.54 to find the answer.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals-25..

Question 26.
Number Sense
Use mental math to find the missing number.
9.2 + n + 2.5 = 15.8
Answer:

Explanation:
Given 6.5 + 3.1 + 3.5,
6.5 and 3.5 are compatible numbers. Use addition properties to rewrite the problem.
6.5 + 3.1 + 3.5 = 3.1 + (6.5 + 3.5) Associative Property
= 3.1 + 10
= 13.1

3.7 Problem Solving: Money

Question 27.
Newton buys a board game for $9.99 and a pack of trading cards for $2.99. He gives the cashier a $20 bill. How much change does he receive?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 27
Answer:
Amount of money change received = $7.02.

Explanation:
Cost of a board game = $9.99
Cost of a pack of trading cards = $2.99
Amount of bills paid to cashier = $20
Amount of money change received = Amount of bills paid to cashier – ( Cost of a pack of trading cards + Cost of a board game  )
= $20 – ( $9.99 + $2.99 )
= $20 – $12.98
= $7.02.

Question 28.
Descartes has $378.97 in his bank account. He withdraws $59.50 one day and then deposits $20.44 the next day. How much money is in his bank account now?
Answer:
Amount of money left in the bank account = $339.91.

Explanation:
Amount of money Descartes has in his bank account= $378.97
Amount of money withdrawn = $59.50
Amount of money he deposited later = $20.44
Amount of money left in the bank account = Amount of money Descartes has in his bank account – Amount of money withdrawn +  Amount of money he deposited later
= $378.97 – $59.50 + $20.44
= $319.47 + $20.44
= $339.91

Question 29.
Modeling Real Life
A bowling alley charges $7.50 for each person to bowl and $2.25 to rent a pair of shoes. How much does it cost you and your friend to bowl and rent shoes?
Answer:
Amount of money charged  for me and my friend to bowl and rent shoes = $9.75.

Explanation:
Amount of money charged for each person to bowl = $7.50
Amount of money charged as rent for a pair of shoes = $2.25
Amount of money charged  for me and my friend to bowl and rent shoes = Amount of money charged for each person to bowl +
Amount of money charged as rent for a pair of shoes
= $7.50 + $2.25
= $9.75.

Question 30.
Reasoning
Your friend wants to buy a magic kit for $18.75. He has two $10 bills, one $5 bill, four $1 bills, and 3 quarters. Make a table to find three ways your friend could pay for the magic kit.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals chp 30
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-3.6 Use Mental Maths to Add or Subtract Decimals-Reasoning-30

Explanation:
Cost of the a magic kit = $18.75
Number of $10 bills my friend has = 2 = $10 × 2 = $ 20.
Number of $5 bills my friend has = 1 = $5 × 1 = $5.
Number of $1 bills my friend has = 4 = $ 1 × 4 = $ 4.
Number of Quarters my friend has = 3
Conversion:
1 Quarter = 0.25 dollar
=> 3 Quarter = 3 × 0.25 = $0.75.
Amount of money my friend has = Number of $10 bills my friend has + Number of $5 bills my friend has + Number of $1 bills my friend has + Number of Quarters my friend has
= $20 + $5 + $4 + $0.75
= $ 25 + $4 + $0.75
= $29 + $0.75
= $29.75.

Add and Subtract Decimals Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Using the order of operations, which operation should you perform last to evaluate the expression?
(4 × 6) + (100 ÷ 10) – (3 + 4)
A. addition
B. subtraction
C. multiplication
D. division
Answer:
A. addition.

Explanation:
Given Equation:
According to DMAS rule:
First Division:
=> (4 × 6) + (100 ÷ 10) – (3 + 4)
=> (4 × 6) + 10 – (3 + 4)
Second Multiplication:
=> (4 × 6) + 10 – (3 + 4)
=> 24 + 10 – (3 + 4)
Third Addition:
=> 24 + 10 – (3 + 4)
=> 24 + 10 + 1
=> 34 +1
=> 35.

Question 2.
Which numbers round to 4 when rounded to the nearest whole number?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 2
Answer:
4.03, 3.98, 4.1 are the numbers round to 4 when rounded to the nearest whole number.

Explanation:
Round all options to nearest whole number:
4.03 –  4
4.5  – 5
44.2 – 44
3.98 – 4
3.46 – 3
4.1 – 4

Question 3.
Which bike trail does the figure show?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 3
A. River Run
B. Straight and Fast
C. Twist and Turn
D. Wood Way

Answer:
Total distance from A to E = 4.5 km
=> River Run bike trail the figure shows.

Explanation:
First add all the distances given in the map:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-Add and Subtract Decimals Cumulative Practice-3
Distance from A to B = 1.75 km
Distance from B to C = 1.0 km
Distance from C to D = 0.5 km
Distance from D to E = 0.75 km
Distance from E to A = 0.5 km
Total distance from A to E = Distance from A to B + Distance from B to C + Distance from C to D + Distance from D to E
Distance from E to A
= 1.75 + 1.0  + 0.5  +  0.75  + 0.5
= 2.75 + + 0.5  +  0.75  + 0.5
= 3.0 +  0.75  + 0.5
= 3.75 + 0.5
= 4.25 km.

Question 4.
What is 0.045 written as a fraction?
A. \(\frac{45}{100}\)
B. \(\frac{1,000}{45}\)
C. \(\frac{45}{1,000}\)
D. \(\frac{450}{1,000}\)
Answer:
C. \(\frac{45}{1,000}\)

Explanation:
0.045 fraction= 45 ÷ 1000.

Question 5.
A recipe calls for 3 eggs. Newton makes 5 batches of the recipe, and Descartes makes 2 batches of the recipe. Which expressions can you use to determine how many eggs Newton and Descartes use in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 5
Answer:
The Expression used = (5 × 3) + ( 2 × 2 ).

Explanation:
A recipe calls for 3 eggs.
Number of recipe batches Newton makes = 5
=>Number of eggs used by Newton = 5 × 3
Number of recipe batches Descartes makes = 2
=>Number of eggs used by  Descartes = 2 × 2
Number of eggs both used = Number of eggs used by Newton + Number of eggs used by  Descartes
= (5 × 3) + ( 2 × 2 )
= 15 + 4
= 19.

Question 6.
What is the difference of 97.63 and 4.98?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 6
Answer:
97.63 -4.98 = 92.65.

Explanation:
Difference:
97.63 -4.98 =???
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-Add and Subtract Decimals Cumulative Practice-6

Question 7.
What is 60.25 written in word form?
A. sixty twenty-five
B. sixty and twenty-five tenths
C. sixty and twenty-five
D. sixty and twenty-five hundredths
Answer:
D. sixty and twenty-five hundredths

Explanation:
Number name of 60.25 = ????

Question 8.
Find 55.6 – 3.97.
A. 1.59
B. 51.63
C. 52.37
D. 59.57
Answer:
55.6 – 3.97 = 51.63.

Explanation:
55.6 – 3.97 = ???
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice-Add and Subtract Decimals Cumulative Practice-8

Question 9.
What is the value of the expression?
[21 ÷ (3 + 4)] – 2
A. 9
B. 4 R1
C. 1
D. 2
Answer:
C. 1

Explanation:
[21 ÷ (3 + 4)] – 2
= [21 ÷ (7)] – 2
= 3 – 2
=1

Question 10.
Which statement correctly compares the decimals?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 10
Answer:
A. 0.1 > 0.111.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 10

Question 11.
What is the value of n?
n – 9.02 = 3.85
A. 12.87
B. 5.17
C. 3.87
D. 12
Answer:
n = 12.87.

Explanation:
n = ??
n – 9.02 = 3.85
n = 3.85 + 9.02
n = 12.87.

Question 12.
Which property is shown?
35 + (15 + 7) = (35 + 15) + 7
A. Associative Property of Addition
B. Commutative Property
C. Distributive Property
D. Associative Property of Multiplication
Answer:
A. Associative Property of Addition.

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
35 + (15 + 7) = (35 + 15) + 7

Question 13.
Newton estimates a sum by rounding each number to the nearest ten. His estimate is 140. Which problems could he have estimated?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 13
Answer:
123.5 + 19.6, 87.6 + 50.4, 65.43 + 71.59 problem he have estimated.

Explanation:
First, find all sums of given Equations:
123.5 + 19.6 = 124 + 20 = 144.
87.6 + 50.4  = 88 + 50 = 138.
65.43 + 71.59 = 65 + 72 = 137.
98.03 + 34.56 = 98 + 34 = 132.

Question 14.
What is five hundred four thousand, eleven written in standard form?
A. 54,011
B. 54,110
C. 504,110
D. 504,011
Answer:

Explanation:

Question 15.
Which expressions have a value of 8?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 15
Answer:
30 ÷ ( 5 × 2 ) + 5, 4 × ( 5 – 3 ) , (16 ÷ 8) + ( 3 × 2 )  are expressions having a value of 8.

Explanation:
First, solve the equations:
30 ÷ ( 5 × 2 ) + 5 = 30 ÷ 10 + 5 = 3 + 5 = 8.
55 – 7 ÷ 6 = 55  – 1.167 = 53.833.
4 × ( 5 – 3 ) = 4 × 2 = 8.
(16 ÷ 8) + ( 3 × 2 ) = 2 + 6 = 8.

Question 16.
Descartes wins a $50 gift card to a sporting goods store. He uses the card to buy two baseballs for $1.79 each, a baseball glove for $14.99, and a baseball bat for $12.25. About how much money is left on his gift card?
A. $21
B. $19
C. $31
D. $18
Answer:
Total amount left on his gift card= $19.18.

Explanation:
Amount of gift card won for a sporting goods store = $50
Cost of the two baseballs  = $1.79 each = > 2 × 1.79 = $3.58
Cost of a baseball glove = $14.99
Cost of a baseball bat = $12.25
Total amount left on his gift card= Amount of gift card won for a sporting goods store – (Cost of the two baseballs + Cost of a baseball glove + Cost of a baseball bat )
= $50 – ( $3.58 + $14.99 + $12.25)
= $50 – ( $18.57 + $12.25)
= $50 – $30.82
= $19.18.

Question 17.
What is the value of 4× 105?
A. 45
B. 400,000
C. 40,000
D. 200
Answer:
4× 105   = B. 400,000.

Explanation:
4× 105
= 4 × 10 ×10 × 10 × 10 × 10
= 4 × 100000
= 400,000

Question 18.
The dimensions of two rectangles are shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals cp 18
Part A Write an expression to determine how much greater the area of the green rectangle is than the area of the yellow rectangle.
Part B Evaluate the expression.
Part C Explain how you used order of operations to evaluate the expression.
Answer:
Part A : Area of the green rectangle  > Area of the yellow rectangle
9ft × 8ft >  7ft × 5ft

Part B: Evaluate the expression.
9ft × 8ft >  7ft × 5ft
=> 72ft > 35ft

Part C:
I used the order of DMAS rule.
Division, Multiplication, Addition and Subtraction order of operations to evaluate the expression

Explanation:
Part A:
Length of the green rectangle = 9ft
Width of the green rectangle = 8ft
Area of the green rectangle = Length of the green rectangle × Width of the green rectangle
= 9ft × 8ft
= 72 ft.
Length of the yellow rectangle = 7ft
Width of the yellow rectangle = 5ft
Area of the yellow rectangle = Length of the yellow rectangle × Width of the yellow rectangle
= 7ft × 5ft
= 35ft

Part C: Explain how you used order of operations to evaluate the expression.
I used the order of DMAS rule.
Division, Multiplication, Addition and Subtraction order of operations to evaluate the expression.

Add and Subtract Decimals STEAM Performance Task

Students can buy pencils, notebooks, and other supplies at your school’s student store. The table below shows the money in the student store account.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals spt 1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals spt 2

Question 1.
Line 1 shows how much money was in the account at the start of the school year. Line 2 shows a payment of $85.89 for supplies. Complete the account balance for Line 2.
Answer:
Amount of money left in the account = $14.11.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice- Add and Subtract Decimals STEAM Performance Task-1

Explanation:
Amount in the account at the start of the school year = $100.00
Amount in the account used for supplies = $85.89
Amount of money left in the account = Amount in the account at the start of the school year – Amount in the account used for supplies = $100.00 – $85.89
= $ 14.11

Question 2.
The store has forty-four dollars and thirty cents in sales for the first week and thirty-two dollars and twelve cents in sales for the second week. The sales each week are deposited into the student store account. Fill in the deposits and balances for Lines 3 and 4.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice- Add and Subtract Decimals STEAM Performance Task-2

Explanation:
Amount of money received in sales for the first week = forty-four dollars and thirty cents = $44.30
Amount of money received in sales for the second week = thirty-two dollars and twelve cents = $ 32.12

Question 3.
The balance after the third week of sales is $115.68. How much money did the store have in sales during the third week? Fill in the deposit and balance for Line 5.
Answer:
Amount of money received in sales for the third week  = $25.15.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice- Add and Subtract Decimals STEAM Performance Task-3

Explanation:
Amount of money balance after the third week of sales = $115.68
Amount of money received in sales for the first week = forty-four dollars and thirty cents = $44.30
Amount of money received in sales for the second week = thirty-two dollars and twelve cents = $ 32.12
Amount of money left in the account = $14.11
Amount of money received in sales for the third week + Amount of money received in sales for the first week + Amount of money received in sales for the second week + Amount of money left in the account = Amount of money balance after the third week of sales
= Amount of money received in sales for the third week  + $44.30 + $32.12 + $14.11 = $115.68
=> Amount of money received in sales for the third week  + $76.42 + $14.11 = $115.68
=> Amount of money received in sales for the third week + $90.53 = $115.68
=> Amount of money received in sales for the third week  = $115.68 – $90.53
=>Amount of money received in sales for the third week  = $25.15.

You are in charge of purchasing supplies for the student store. All of the supplies for the student store are purchased and then sold at a higher price so the store can earn a profit.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals spt 3
Question 4.
You want to buy 300 more pencils. You find two different quantities to buy.
a. Which pencils will you buy to get $35.99$19.99the best value? Justify your answer.
b. You pay about $0.24 for each pencil. How much do you think the store should charge for each pencil to earn a profit? Explain.
c. How much profit does the store earn from selling 100 pencils using your recommended price? Explain.
d. You want to buy some notebooks for a total of $25.24 and 300 pencils. You have a $5 coupon. How much do you spend on notebooks and pencils?
e. Write out the check to buy the supplies. What is the account balance now? Fill in the payment and balance for line 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals spt 4
Answer:
a) I would like to purchase 300 pencils from Pencil assortment A because the cost of each pencil is lesser than Pencil assortment B.

b)Cost the pencil to be sold = $0.30 because 0.06 is the profit range of 4 % out of 0.24.

c) The profit store owns from selling 100 pencils using your recommended price is $30.

d) Cost of the Notebooks and pencils = $115.24

e) Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-3-Add-and-Subtract-Decimals-3.7-Add and Subtract Decimals Chapter Practice- Add and Subtract Decimals STEAM Performance Task-4

Explanation:
a) Cost of 150pencil from Pencil assortment A = $ 35.99
=> Cost of each pencil from Pencil assortment A = $35.99 ÷ 150 = $ 0.2399
Cost of 75pencil from Pencil assortment B = $19.99
=> Cost of each pencil from Pencil assortment B = $19.99 ÷ 75 = $0.2665

b) Cost of pencil is purchased by me = $0.24
Cost the pencil to be sold = $0.24 + $0.06 = $0.30
Because 0.06 is the profit range of 4 % out of 0.24.

c) Cost of each pencils to be sold = $0.30
Cost of 100 pencils to be sold = $0.30 × 100 = $30.

d) Total Cost of the Notebooks = $25.24
Cost of 300 pencils = $0.30 ×300 = $90
Amount of coupon used to pay = $5
Cost of the Notebooks and pencils = Total Cost of the Notebooks + Cost of 300 pencils
= $25.24 + $90
= $115.24.

e) Current account balance = $115.68

Conclusion:

Hope the information provided in the above pdf is helpful for all the students in Grade 5. Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 3 Add and Subtract Decimals for free of cost. Keep in touch with us to get the latest updates of all Grade 5 chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7

Students who are unable to solve the textbook problems can go through the Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers. The provided solutions to all the questions asked from Compare Two-Digit Numbers concepts will help you in real-time calculations also. Refer to Grade 1 Bigideas Math Answer Key of Ch 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers to understand the solving methods in depth. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers was explained by the math professionals in a simple way.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers

A major goal of our discussion is to explore the knowledge required to teach effectively to students. Go through the below attached links and get the Big Ideas Math 1st Grade 1 Answer Key for Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers for better preparation and score best marks in the exams. Thus make use of these topic-wise links and solve each and every question covered in this Bigideas Math Answers Grade 1 Ch 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers.

Lesson: 1 – Compare Numbers 11 to 19

Lesson: 2 – Compare Numbers

Lesson: 3 – Compare Numbers Using Place Value

Lesson 4: Compare Numbers Using Symbols

Lesson: 5 – Compare Numbers Using a Number Line

Lesson 6: 1 – More, 1 Less; 10 More, 10 Less

Performance Task

Compare Two-Digit Numbers Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
fewer
more

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 1
Answer:
4 strawberries are more, 2 strawberries are fewer.

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the first set has more number of strawberries than the second set.

Define It:

Use your vocabulary cards to complete the puzzle.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 2
Answer:
1 ) Greater than
2 ) Compare
3 ) Less than

Explanation:
we have to write the signs in the word form in the puzzle.
Use the clues given in the question and solve the puzzle.
Across means, we have to write the answer in the horizontal.
Down means, we have to write the answer in the vertical.

Lesson 7.1 Compare Numbers 11 to 19

Explore and Grow

Model each number. Circle the greater number.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 3
15

17
Answer: 17 is greater.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
15 is smaller than 17.
Thus 17 is greater

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 4
Answer:
15 is greater than 12 and 12 is less than 15.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
15 is greater than 12.
12 is smaller than 15

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 5
Answer:
18 is greater than 14 and 14 is less than 18.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
18 is greater than 14
14 is smaller than 18

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 6
Answer:
13 is greater than 11 and 11 is less than 13.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
13 is greater than 11
11 is smaller than 13

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 7
Answer:
19 is greater than 17 and 17 is less than 19.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
19 is greater than 17
17 is smaller than 19

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 8
Answer:
18 is greater than 16 and 16 is less than 18.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
18 is greater than 16
16 is smaller than 18

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 9
Answer:
19 is greater than 15 and 15 is less than 19.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
19 is greater than 15
15 is smaller than 19

Make quick sketches to compare the numbers.

Question 7.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 10
Answer:
11 < 12 and 12 > 11

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
12 is greater than 11
11 is smaller than 12

Question 8.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 11
Answer:
15 > 13 and 13 < 15

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
15 is greater than 13
13 is smaller than 15.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER
Choose two numbers to complete the sentences.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 12
__________ is greater than ________ _________ is less than ________ .

Answer:
13 is greater than 12 and 12 is less than 13
16 is greater than 15 and 15 is less than 16
19 is greater than 18 and 18 is less than 19.

Explanation:
There are group of numbers
comparing each number with the other
and representing greater numbers and lesser numbers.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 16 tickets. Your friend has 11 tickets and wins 8 more. Who has more tickets?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 13
You                Friend
Number of tickets:
Models:
Compare: _________ is greater than _________.
Who has more tickets? You             Friend

Answer:
Number of tickets: 35
Models: Tickets
Compare:
19 is greater than 16.

Explanation:
I have 16 tickets and my friend has 11 tickets and wins 8 more.
My friend has more tickets.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have 7 feathers and find 6 more. Your friend has 12 feathers. Who has more feathers?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 14
You            Friend
Number of feathers:
Models:
Compare: _________ is greater than _________.
Who has more feathers? You             Friend

Answer:
Number of feathers: 25
Models: Feathers
Compare: 13 is greater than 12. I have more feathers.

Explanation: I have 7 feathers and found 6 more
6 + 7 = 13
and my friend has 12 featherswhich is lesser than me.

Compare Numbers 11 to 19 Practice 7.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 15
Answer:
16 is greater than 12 and 12 is less than 16.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
16 is greater than 12
12 is smaller than 16.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 16
Answer:
18 is greater than 13 and 13 is less than 18.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
18 is greater than 13
13 is smaller than 18.

Make quick sketches to compare the numbers.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 17
Answer:
19 > 12 and 12 < 19.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
19 is greater than 12
12 is smaller than 19.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 18
Answer:
11 < 17 and 17 > 11

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
17 is greater than 11
11 is smaller than 17.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 19
Answer:
17 > 13 and 13 < 17

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
17 is greater than 13
13 is smaller than 17.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 20
Answer:
12 < 14 and 14 > 12.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
14 is greater than 12
12 is smaller than 14.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER
Choose two numbers to complete the sentences.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 21
__________ is greater than ________ .

__________ is less than ________ .
Answer:
12 is greater than 11 and 11 is less than 12.
14 is less than 15 and 15 is greater than 14.
17 is less than 18 and 18 is greater than 17.

Explanation:
There are group of numbers
comparing each number with the other
and representing greater numbers and lesser numbers.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Your tower has 16 red blocks. Your friend’s tower has 10 red blocks and 4 blue blocks. Who uses more blocks?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 22
__________ is greater than ________ .
Who has more? You Friend
Answer:
Me has 16 and my friend has 14.
So, 16 is greater than 14. Me has more.

Explanation:
My towel has 16 red blocks.
my friend has 10 red 4 blue in total 14 blocks
so, me has more blocks than my friend.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Make a quick sketch to complete the sentence.
59
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 23
________ is ________ tens and ________ ones.
Answer:
59 is 5 tens and 9 ones.

Explanation:
My friend has 59 choclates
there are sepereted with tens and ones.

Lesson 7.2 Compare Numbers

Explore and Grow

Model each number. Circle the greater number.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 24
34

26
Answer:
34 is greater.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
34 is greater than 26
thus 34 is greater.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 25
Answer:
50 is greater than 48 and 48 is less than 50.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
50 is greater than 48
48 is smaller than 50

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 26
Answer:
37 is greater than 34 and 34 is less than 37.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
37 is greater than 34
34 is smaller than 37

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 27
Answer:
30 is greater than 28 and 28 is less than 30.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
30 is greater than 28
28 is smaller than 30.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 28
Answer:
45 is greater than 41 and 41 is less than 45.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
45 is greater than 41
41 is smaller than 45.

Question 5.
Make quick sketches to compare the numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 29
Answer:
80 > 63 and 63 < 80.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
80 is greater than 63
63 is smaller than 80

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a number that is greater than 90 but less than 94. Show how you know.
____________
Answer:
92

Explanation:
Is less than 94 the number which is greater than 90 is 91,92,93.
in 120 chart the number line wise we can see as 90, 91, 92, 93

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton collects 61 acorns. Descartes collects 75 acorns. Who collects more acorns?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 30
Models: Newton              Descartes

Compare: ___________ is greater than ___________ .
Who collects more acorns? Newton               Descartes
Answer:
75 is greater than 61. Descartes collects more acorns.

Explanation:
Newton collects 61 acorns.
Descartes collects 75 acornes.
75 is greater than 61
so, descartes has more.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You pick 57 blueberries. Your friend picks 53 blueberries. Who picks more blueberries?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 31
Models: You              Friend

Compare: ____________ is greater than ____________ .
Who pics more blueberries? You            Friend
Answer:
57 is greater than 53.
You picks more blueberries.

Explanation:
I pick 57 blueberries.
My friend has 53 blueberries
57 > 53 so, I collected more blueberries.

Compare Numbers Practice 7.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 32
Answer:
64 is greater than 46 and 46 is less than 64.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
64 is greater than 46
46 is smaller than 64

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 33
Answer:
39 is greater than 35 and 35 is less than 39.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
39 is greater than 35
35 is smaller than 39

Question 3.
Make quick sketches to compare the numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 34
Answer:
91 > 70 and 70 < 91

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
91 is greater than 70
70 is smaller than 91

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 35
Answer:
86 > 68 and 68 < 86.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
86 is greater than 68
68 is smaller than 86

Question 5.
MP Number Sense
Choose 2 numbers between 50 and 99. Write a sentence to compare the numbers.

___________                              ____________
Answer:
51 and 98.
These two numbers are in between 50 and 99.

Explanation:
There are apples on the tree from 50 to 90
A monkey came over there and plucked 51 and 98
It is monkeys choice it can pluck any of the fruit from 50 to 99.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You collect 37 stamps. Your friend collects 27 stamps. Who collects more stamps?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 36

Who collects more stamps? You               Friend
Answer:
You collect more stamps.

Explanation:
I have collected 37 stams
and my friend collected 27 stamps
37 > 27
so, I collected more stamps.

Review & Refresh

Circle the taller object.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 37
Answer:

The second lamp is taller.

Explanation:
Cubes are the measuring attribute
one lamp is compared with the other lamp
2 is taller than the 1

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 38
Answer:
The first building is taller.

Explanation:
Cubes are the measuring attribute
one building is compared with the other building
1 is taller than the 2

Lesson 7.3 Compare Numbers Using Place Value

Explore and Grow

Model each number. What is the same about the models? What is different? Circle the greater number.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 39

32
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 40

23
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 40
Answer:

Explanation:
3 tens and 2 ones
2 tens and 3 ones. 32 is greater. This about tens and ones.

Show and Grow

Compare. Which digits help you decide?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 41
__________ tens __________ one                          __________ tens __________ one
Answer:
6 tens and 1 ones, 5 tens and 3 ones.
61 is greater than 53 and 53 is less than 61.

Explanation:
Compare the number of two whole numbers.
61 is greater than 53
53 is smaller than 61.

Question 2.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 42
__________ tens __________ ones                        __________ tens __________ one
Answer:
7 tens and 0 ones, 7 tens and 4 ones.

74 is greater than 70 and 70 is less than 74.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Compare. Which digits help you decide?

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 43
__________ tens __________ ones                    __________ tens __________ one
Answer:
3 tens and 9 ones, 4 tens and 8 ones.
48 is greater than 39 and 39 is less than 48.
48 > 39 and 39 < 48

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 44
__________ tens __________ ones                    __________ tens __________ one
Answer:
8 tens and 0 ones, 6 tens and 2 ones.
80 > 62 and 62 < 80.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 45
Answer:
26 > 23 and 23 < 26.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
26 is greater than 23
23 is smaller than 26.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 46
Answer:
51 < 86 and 86 > 51.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
81 is greater than 51
51 is smaller than 86.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 47
Answer:
17 < 71 and 71 > 17.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
71 is greater than 17
17 is smaller than 71.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 48
Answer:
97 > 92 and 92 < 97

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
97 is greater than 92
92 is smaller than 97.

Question 9.
MP Precision
Match each ball with its bucket.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 49
Answer:
less than 65 is 58 and 62 and 64,
Greater than 65 is 67, 68 and 73.

Explanation:
There are 2 buckets first bucket collects less than 65
and second bucket collects greater than 65
There are some ballons with 58, 67, 62, 64, 73, 68.
They are seperated according to the representaion.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Who has more points?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 50

Compare: _________ is greater than ________ .
_________ has more points.
Answer:
8 is greater than 7,
Descartes has more points.

Explanation:
Newton has 7 points and descartes has 8 points
descartes has more

Show and Grow:

Question 10.
Who has more points?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 51
Compare: _________ is greater than ________ .
_________ has more points.
Answer:
8 is greater than 2,
Newton has more points.

Explanation:
Newton has 8 points and descartes has 7 points
so, newton has more points

Compare Numbers Using Place Value Practice 7.3

Compare. Which digits help you decide?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 52
__________ ten __________ ones                   __________ tens __________ ones
Answer:
1 ten and 6 ones,1 tens and 2 ones.
16 > 12 and 12 < 16.

Explanation:
16 can be written as one ten and six ones
12 can be written as one ten and two ones.
16 is greater than 12
12 is less than 16

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 53
Answer:
32 < 38 and 38 > 32.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
38 is greater than 32
32 is smaller than 38.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 54
Answer:
7 < 25 and 25 > 7.

Explanation:
Compare the number of blocks of two whole numbers.
25 is greater than 7
7 is smaller than 25.

Question 4.
MP Precision
Match each card with its pile.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 55
Answer:
Less than 85 are 79 and 81 and 84,
Greater than 85 are 87,89 and 93.

Explanation:
There are two walls first wall represents less than 85 and
second wall represents greater than 85
there are stickers numbered 93, 79, 84, 81, 87, 89
and placed according to the walls required.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Who earns more points?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 56
____________ is greater than ___________ .
Who earns more points? You            Friend
Answer: 41 is greater than 14

Explanation:
In you first basket 1 ball = 10 that is 4 x 10 = 40
second basket 1 ball = 1 total 40+1 = 41
In friend first basket 1 ball= 10 that is 1 x 10 = 10
second basket 4 balls= 4 x 1= 4 total 10+ 4 = 14
41 is greaterthan 14

Review & Refresh

Is the equation true or false?

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 57
Answer:
True
15 – 9 = 6 and 11 – 5 = 6

Explanation:
jim has 15 choclates in that 9 has given to his sister
so 6 remaining
rim has 11 choclates in that 5 has given to his sister
so 6 is remaining
so both sisters have 6 each.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 58
Answer:
True
4 + 7 = 11 and 16 – 4 = 11

Explanation:
jim has 4 choclates and 7 has given to his sister
so 11 in all
rim has 16 choclates in that 4 has given to his sister
so 11 is remaining
so both sisters have 11 each.

Lesson 7.4 Compare Numbers Using Symbols

Explore and Grow

Make quick sketches. Complete the sentences.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 59
Answer:

25 < 27, 25 + 2 = 27, 28 > 27

Show and Grow

Make quick sketches to model each number. Compare.

Question 1.
53 ____________ 39.
53 ○ 39
Answer:
53 is greater than 39,
53 > 39.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 53 and 39
53 is greater than 39.

Question 2.
28 _____________ 34.
28 ○ 34
Answer:
28 is less than 34,
28 < 34.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 28 and 34
34 is greater than 28.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
61 ______________ 72
61 ○ 72
Answer:
61 is Less than 72.
61 < 72

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 61 and 72
72 is greater than 71.

Question 4.
47 ______________ 47.
47 ○ 47
Answer:
47 is equal to 47.
47 = 47

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 41 and 41
41 is equal to 41.

Compare.

Question 5.
83 _______________ 49.
83 ○ 49
Answer:
83 is greater than 49,
83 > 49.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 83 and 49
83 is greater than 49.

Question 6.
75 ______________ 99.
75 ○ 99
Answer:
75 is less than 99,
75 < 99.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 75 and 99
99 is greater than 75.

Question 7.
54 ○ 70
Answer:
54 is less than 70,
54 < 70.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 54 and 70
70 is greater than 54..

Question 8.
17 ○ 9
Answer:
17 is greater than 9,
17 > 9.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 17 and 9
17 is greater than 9.

Question 9.
86 ○ 86
Answer:
86 is equal to 86,
86 = 86.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 86 and 86
86 is equal to 86

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
19 Choose 2 cards for each problem. Compare the numbers. Use each card once.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 60
Answer: 13 < 24 |  89 > 63 | 24 = 24.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 90 beads. Your friend has 75 beads. Who has more beads?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 61
Models:

Compare: __________ ○ ___________
who has more beads? You Friend
Answer:
Me has more beads, 90 > 75.

Explanation:
I have 90 beads and my friend has 75 beads
90 > 75
so, my friend has more.

Show and Grow

Question 11.
You have 48 toy figures. Your friend has 54 toy figures. Who has fewer toy figures?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 62
Models:

Compare: __________ ○ ___________
who has more beads? You Friend
Answer:
My friend has more toys, Me has fewer toys. 48 < 54.

Explanation:
I have 48 toy figures and my friend has 54 toy figures
48 < 54
so, i have fewer toys

Compare Numbers Using Symbols Practice 7.4

Make quick sketches to model each number. Compare.

Question 1.
37 ______________ 15.
37 ○ 15
Answer:
37 is greater than 35,
37 > 35.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 37 and 35
37 is greater than 35.

Question 2.
22 ______________ 22.
22 ○ 22
Answer:
22 is equal to 22,
22 = 22.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 22 and 22
22 is equal to 22.

Compare.

Question 3.
97 ○ 79
Answer:
97 is greater than 79,
97 > 79.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 97 and 79
97 is greater than 79.

Question 4.
51 ○ 83
Answer:
51 is lesser than 83,
51 < 83.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 51 and 83
83 is greater than 51.

Question 5.
39 ○ 62
Answer:
39 is less than 62,
39 < 62.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 62 and 39
62 is greater than 39.

Compare.

Question 6.
19 ○ 91
Answer:
19 is less than 91,
19 < 91.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 19 and 91
91 is greater than 19.

Question 7.
73 ○ 68
Answer:
73 is greater than 68,
73 > 68.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 73 and 68
73 is greater than 68.

Question 8.
32 ○ 32
Answer:
32 is equal to 32,
32 = 32.

Explanation:
Comaring the two whole numbers 32 and 32
32 is equal to 32

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Use each of the numbers once to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 63
81 > __________
56 < __________
21 = __________
Answer:
81 > 45
56 < 74
21 = 21

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Who has more points?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 64
__________ ○ _________
___________ has more points.
Answer:
37 < 68,
Descartes has more points.

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
6 + 8 = ___________
Answer: 14

Explanation:
To put two or more numbers or amounts together to get a total is adding
6 + 8 = 14

Question 12.
12 + 5 = ___________
Answer: 17

Explanation:
To put two or more numbers or amounts together to get a total is adding
12 + 5 = 17

Question 13.
___________ = 0 + 11
Answer: 11

Explanation:
To put two or more numbers or amounts together to get a total is adding
11= 0 + 11

Question 14.
___________ = 4 + 9
Answer: 13

Explanation:
To put two or more numbers or amounts together to get a total is adding
13 = 4 + 9.

Lesson 7.5 Compare Numbers Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Circle a number that is less than 45. Underline a number that is greater than 45. How do you know you are correct?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 65
Answer:
43 is circled and it is less than 45.
48 is underlined and it is greater than 45.
As the number line shows 40 to 50

Show and Grow

Compare.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 66
43 ○ 48
Answer:
43 is less than 48, 43< 48.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 43 and 48
and represented on the number line

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 66
44 ○ 36
Answer:
44 is greater than 36, 44 > 36.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 44 and 36
and represented on the number line

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 66
39 ○ 39
Answer:
39 is equal to 39, 39 = 39.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 39 and 39
and represented on the number line

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 66
31 ○ 50
Answer:
31 is less than 50, 31< 50.

compared the two whole numbers 31 and 50
and represented on the number line

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 66
37 ○ 33
Answer:
37 is greater than 33, 37 > 33.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 37 and 33
and represented on the number line

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 66
38 ○ 42
Answer:
38 is less than 42, 38 < 42

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 42 and 38
and represented on the number line

Apply and Grow: Practice

Compare.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71
65 ○ 66
Answer:
65 is less than 66, 65 < 66.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 65 and 66
and represented on the number line

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71
71 ○ 81
Answer:
71 is less than 81, 71 < 81.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 71 and 81
and represented on the number line

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71
83 ○ 85
Answer:
83 < 85, 83 is less than 85.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 83 and 85.
and represented on the number line

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71
74 ○ 69
Answer:
74 > 69, 74 is greater than 69.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 74 and 69
and represented on the number line

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71
78 ○ 77
Answer:
78 is greater than 77, 78 > 77.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 78 and 77
and represented on the number line

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71
72 ○ 72
Answer:
72 is equal to 72

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 72 and 72
and represented on the number line

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 13.
_________ > 47
Answer:
48 > 47.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 47 and 48
and represented on the number line

Question 14.
_________ < 76
Answer:
75 < 76.

Explanation:
The below number line shows 75 is less than 76
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71

Question 15.
81 = ________
Answer:
81 = 81.

Explanation:
The below number line shows 81 is equal to 81
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton is thinking of a number that is less than 83 and greater than 74. His number has 6 ones. What is Newton’s number?
__________
Answer: 76,

Explanation:
Newton has 7 tens and 6 ones

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

The number on your bus is less than 91. Which buses can be yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 67
Show how you know:
Answer:
88 and 90 can be mine.

Show and Grow

Question 17.
The number on your plane is greater than 58. Which planes can be yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 68
Show how you know:
Answer:
It might be 60 or 63
By seeing the number on plane.

Compare Numbers Using a Number Line Practice 7.5

Compare.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 69
53 ○ 56
Answer:
53 < 56, 53 is less than 56.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 53 and 56
and represented on the number line

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 69
70 ○ 60
Answer:
70 is greater than 60, 70 > 60

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 70 and 60
and represented on the number line

Question 3.
63 ○ 67
Answer:
63 is less than 67, 63 < 67.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 63 and 67
and represented on the number line

Question 4.
68 ○ 55
Answer:
68 is greater than 55, 68 > 55.

Explanation:
compared the two whole numbers 55 and 68
and represented on the number line

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 5.
55 < _________
Answer:
55 < 56, 55 is less than 56

Explanation:
The below number line shows 55 is less than 56
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 69

Question 6.
62 = __________
Answer:
62 = 62, 62 is equal to 62.

Explanation:
The below number line shows 62 is equal to 62
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 69

Question 7.
75 > _________
Answer:
75 > 74, 75 is greater than 74.

Explanation:
The below number line shows 75 is greater than 74.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 71

Question 8.
MP Structure
How can you use a number line to tell whether 68 is greater than or less than 42?
Answer:
The below number line represents 68 is greater than 42

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
The number on your taxi is greater than 40. Which taxis can be yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 70
Show how you know:
Answer:
46 or 51 is mine as they are greater than 40.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
You have 9 pencils. 7 are blue. The rest are orange. How many orange pencils do you have?

___________ orange pencils
Answer:
2 orange pencils

Lesson 7.6 1 More, 1 Less; 10 More, 10 Less

Explore and Grow

Model 43. Use your model to complete the sentences.

1 more than 43 is ___________ .
1 less than 43 is ___________ .
10 more than 43 is ___________ .
10 less than 43 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 43 is 44 .
1 less than 43 is 42 .
10 more than 43 is 53 .
10 less than 43 is 33 .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 72
1 more than 47 is ___________ .
1 less than 47 is ___________ .
10 more than 47 is ___________ .
10 less than 47 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 47 is 48 .
1 less than 47 is 46 .
10 more than 47 is 57 .
10 less than 47 is 37.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 73
1 more than 61 is ___________ .
1 less than 61 is ___________ .
10 more than 61 is ___________ .
10 less than 61 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 61 is 62 .
1 less than 61 is 60.
10 more than 61 is 71 .
10 less than 61 is 51 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 74
1 more than 39 is ___________ .
1 less than 39 is ___________ .
10 more than 39 is ___________ .
10 less than 39 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 39 is 40 .
1 less than 39 is 38 .
10 more than 39 is 49 .
10 less than 39 is 29 .

Question 4.
1 more than 56 is ___________ .
1 less than 56 is ___________ .
10 more than 56 is ___________ .
10 less than 56 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 56 is 57 .
1 less than 56 is 55.
10 more than 56 is 66 .
10 less than 56 is 46.

Question 5.
1 more than 75 is ___________ .
1 less than 75 is ___________ .
10 more than 75 is ___________ .
10 less than 75 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 75 is 76 .
1 less than 75 is 74 .
10 more than 75 is 85 .
10 less than 75 is 65.

Question 6.
1 more than 33 is ___________ .
1 less than 33 is ___________ .
10 more than 33 is ___________ .
10 less than 33 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 33 is 34 .
1 less than 33 is 32.
10 more than 33 is 43 .
10 less than 33 is 23 .

Question 7.
1 more than 80 is ___________ .
1 less than 80 is ___________ .
10 more than 80 is ___________ .
10 less than 80 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 80 is 81 .
1 less than 80 is 79 .
10 more than 80 is 90 .
10 less than 80 is 70.

Question 8.
1 more than 12 is ___________ .
1 less than 12 is ___________ .
10 more than 12 is ___________ .
10 less than 12 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 12 is 13 .
1 less than 12 is 11.
10 more than 12 is 22 .
10 less than 12 is 2 .

Question 9.
MP Number Sense
Make a quick sketch for the number that is 10 less than the model. What is the new number?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 75
Answer:
32 is the number which is 10 less than the shown figure.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 25 markers. Newton has 10 more than you. Descartes has 1 fewer than Newton. How many markers does Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 76
Models:

___________ markers
Answer:
Models: Markers,
Descartes has 24.

Explanation:
You have 25 markers.
Newton has 10 more than you.
Descartes has 1 fewer than Newton.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have 42 party blowers. Descartes has 10 fewer than you. Newton has 1 more than Descartes. How many party blowers does Newton have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 77
Models:

____________ party blowers
Answer:
Models: party blowers
33 party blowers

1 More, 1 Less; 10 More, 10 Less Practice 7.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 78
1 more than 63 is ___________ .
1 less than 63 is ___________ .
10 more than 63 is ___________ .
10 less than 63 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 63 is 64 .
1 less than 63 is 62.
10 more than 63 is 73 .
10 less than 63 is 53 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 79
1 more than 80 is ___________ .
1 less than 80 is ___________ .
10 more than 80 is ___________ .
10 less than 80 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 80 is 81 .
1 less than 80 is 79 .
10 more than 80 is 90 .
10 less than 80 is 70.

Question 3.
1 more than 82 is ___________ .
1 less than 82 is ___________ .
10 more than 82 is ___________ .
10 less than 82 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 82 is 83 .
1 less than 82 is 81 .
10 more than 82 is 92 .
10 less than 82 is 72 .

Question 4.
1 more than 16 is ___________ .
1 less than 16 is ___________ .
10 more than 16 is ___________ .
10 less than 16 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 16 is 17 .
1 less than 16 is 15 .
10 more than 16 is 26 .
10 less than 16 is 6 .

Question 5.
1 more than 68 is ___________ .
1 less than 68 is ___________ .
10 more than 68 is ___________ .
10 less than 68 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 68 is 69 .
1 less than 68 is 67 .
10 more than 68 is 78 .
10 less than 68 is 58 .

Question 6.
MP Number Sense
Make a quick sketch for the number that is 1 more than the model. What is the new number?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 80
Answer:

The below figure shows 1 more than the model.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You have 75 party cups. Descartes has lo more than you. Newton has I fewer than Descartes. How many party cups does Newton have?

_____________ party cups
Answer:
Descartes has 10 more than me is 85
Newton has 1 fewer than descartes that is 84

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
You have 17 erasers. Your friend takes some of them. You have 9 left. How many erasers did your friend take?

_____________ erasers
Answer:
My friend has taken 8 erasers
17 – 9 = 8

Compare Two-Digit Numbers Performance Task

Question 1.
Your school is having a toy drive. Each class wants to collect more than 100 toys.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 81

a. Your friend’s class collects 81 toys. Your cousin’s class collects 72 toys. Whose class collects more toys?

Your ____________ ‘s class collects more toys.
Answer:
Friends class collects toys = 81
Cousins class collects toys 72
My friends class collects more toys.

b. Your class collects 10 more toys than your friend’s class. Does your class reach the goal?
Yes                No
Answer:
If my friend class collect 10 more toys then the toys will be 82
Yes, they reach the goal.

Question 2.
Use the clues to match each class with the number of toys it collects.

  • Class A collects 10 fewer toys than Class C.
  • Class B collects the fewest number of toys.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 82
Answer:
class a = 78
class b = 68
Class c = 88.

Compare Two-Digit Numbers Chapter Practice

Compare Numbers 11 to 19 Homework & Practice 7.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 83
Answer:
15 is greater than 14
14 is less than 15.

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 15 and 14
15 is greater than 14 and 14 is smaller than 15

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 84
Answer:
16 is less than 19
19 is greater than 16.

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 16 and 19
19 is greater than 16 and 16 is smaller than 19

Compare Numbers Homework & Practice 7.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 85
Answer:
47 is less than 52
52 is greater than 47

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 86
Answer:
36 is greater than 33
33 is less than 36.

Question 5.
MP Structure
Write a number that is greater than 78 but less than 82. Show how you know.

______________
Answer:
79 is the number that is greater than 78 and less than 82

Compare Numbers Using Place Value Homework & Practice 7.3

Compare. Which digits help you decide?

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 87
__________ tens ___________ ones                    __________ tens ___________ ones
Answer:
4 tens and 6 ones
5 tens and 5 ones.

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 46 and 55
55 is greater than 46 and 46 is smaller than 55

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 88
__________ tens ___________ ones                   __________ tens ___________ ones
Answer:
8 tens and 9 ones
9 tens and 8 ones

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 8 and 9
9 is greater than 8 and 8 is smaller than 9

Question 8.
MP Precision
Match each chip with its box.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 89
Answer:
Less than 45 is 37,40 and 43.
Greater than 45 is 43,49 and 50.

Compare Numbers Using Symbols Homework & Practice 7.4

Make quick sketches to model each number. Compare.

Question 9.
84 ______________ 68.
84 ○ 68
Answer:
84 is greater than 68
84 > 68

Question 10.
29 ______________ 42.
29 ○ 42
Answer:
29 < 42
29 is less than 42

Compare Numbers Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 7.5

Compare.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 90
62 ○ 70
Answer:
62 <70

Explanation:
the numbers are represented on number line
62 is greater than 70

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 90
78 ○ 69
Answer:
78>69.

Explanation:
they are represented on the number line
78 is greater than 69

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 90
75 ○ 68
Answer: 75 > 68
Explanation:
75 is greater than 68
75>68

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 90
64 ○ 73
Answer:
64 < 73

Explanation:
they are represented on the number line
64 is less than 73

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 15.
__________ < 36
Answer:
35 < 36

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 35 and 36
36 is greater than 35 and 35 is smaller than 36

Question 16.
28 = __________
Answer:
28 = 28

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 28 and 28
28 is equal to 28

Question 17.
____________ > 9
Answer:
10 > 9

Explanation:
compare the blocks of two whole numbers 10 and 9
10 is greater than 9 and 9 is smaller than 10

Question 18.
Modeling Real Life
The number on your train is less than 34. Which trains can be yours?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 91
Show how you know:
Answer:
The number on my train is less than 34 which might be 29 or 30
and circled the numbers 29 and 30.

1 More, 1 Less; 10 More, 10 Less Homework & Practice 7.6

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 92
1 more than 82 is ___________ .
1 less than 82 is ___________ .
10 more than 82 is ___________ .
10 less than 82 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 82 is 83 .
1 less than 82 is 81 .
10 more than 82 is 92 .
10 less than 82 is 72 .

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 93
1 more than 29 is ___________ .
1 less than 29 is ___________ .
10 more than 29 is ___________ .
10 less than 29 is ___________ .
Answer:
1 more than 29 is 30 .
1 less than 29 is 28 .
10 more than 29 is 39 .
10 less than 29 is 19 .

Question 21.
Modeling Real Life
You have 34 oranges. Newton has I fewer than you. Descartes has 10 fewer than Newton. How many oranges does Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 94

________________ oranges
Answer:
Newton has one fewer than me is 34 – 1 = 33
Descrates has 10 fewer than newton 33 – 10 = 23
Descartes has 10 oranges.

Compare Two-Digit Numbers Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
6 people play basketball. Shade the circle next to the picture that shows how many more people need to join the group so there are 10 in all.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 95

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 96
Answer:
6 people play basketball, 4 people should be added to make 10.

Question 2.
Shade the circles next to the choices that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 97
○ 6 tens and 3 ones
○ 3 tens and 6 ones
○ 63
○ 36
Answer:
Shaded the circle next to the choices that match the model

Question 3.
Newton has 8 toys. Shade the circle next to the picture that does not show a way he could share his toys with Descartes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 98
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 99
Answer:

7 + 2 is 9
Newton has 8 toys.

Question 4.
A group of students are at a carnival. 4 of them leave. There are 8 left. How many students were at the carnival to start?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 100
__________ ○ __________ = __________ students
Answer:
4 + 8 = 12 students.

Question 5.
Shade the circle next to the number that completes the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 101
○ 70
○ 62
○ 64
○ 73
Answer:
73 is the number.

Question 6.
Circle the two numbers that complete the addition sentence.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 102
Answer:
5 + 5 + 9 = 19

Question 7.
Shade the circle next to the number that tells how many ferrets are outside the cage.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 103
○ 5
○ 4
○ 0
○ 1
Answer:
There are no ferrets are outside the cage.

Question 8.
Use the picture to complete the sentence.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 104
___________ tens and __________ ones is __________ .
Answer:
11 tens and 7 ones.

Question 9.
Is each equation true or false?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 105
Answer:
1 = 9 False
4 = 4 True
5 = 2 False
7 = 7 True

Question 10.
Write <, >, or = to compare the numbers.
21 ○ 45
98 ○ 97
67 ○ 60
36 ○ 36
Answer:
21 < 45
98 > 97
67 > 60
36 = 38

Question 11.
4 boats are docked. Some more join them. Now there are 6. Shade the circle next to the models that show how many more boats joined the first group.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers 106
Answer:

Question 12.
Write two addition equations that can be solved using the double 7 + 7.
  7   + ________ = ___________               7   + ________ = ___________
Answer:
7 + 70 =77
7 + 7 = 14.

Explanation:
when 7 is added with 70 makes 77
and if 7 is added with another 7 then it makes 14.

Conclusion:

I hope the info presented in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 7 Compare Two-Digit Numbers is satisfactory for all the students. The students of grade 1 can clarify their queries by posting their comments in the below comment section. Bookmark our Big Ideas Math Answer site to get the Answer key for all the BIM Grade 1 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3

Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade 3rd Chapter Addition to 100 Strategies: It is very important for the students to learn the fundamental concepts in maths. To help out the students, we are presenting the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies Answer Key in pdf format. Download BIM Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies PDF. This pdf will help you out to finish the assignments in time.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies

The different topics covered in Big Ideas Math 3rd Chapter Addition to 100 Strategies Answer Key are Add Tens Using a Number Line, Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line, Use Place Value to Add, Decompose to Add Tens and Ones, Use Compensation to Add, Practice Addition Strategies, Addition to 100 Strategies, and others. Know more details about the addition or sum concept using 100 strategies.

Practice all the problems included in Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Answer Key 3rd Chapter Addition to 100 Strategies to score good marks in the test. Before you start the preparation, have a look at the BIM Book Grade 2 Chapter 3 Solutions. We have covered the answers for all the problems topic-wise. Hence click on the below-attached links and complete your homework effortlessly.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Add Tens Using a Number Line

Lesson: 2 Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line

Lesson: 3 Use Place Value to Add

Lesson: 4 Decompose to Add Tens and Ones

Lesson: 5 Use Compensation to Add

Lesson: 6 Practice Addition Strategies

Lesson: 7 Problem Solving: Addition

Chapter 3: Addition to 100 Strategies

Addition to 100 Strategies Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 1

Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 2
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-100-Strategies-Vocabulary-Organize-It

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the words.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-100-Strategies-Vocabulary-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 4
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-100-Strategies-Vocabulary-Question-2

Chapter 3 Vocabulary cards

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 5
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 6
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-3-Vocabulary-cards

Lesson 3.1 Add Tens Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Color and show how you can use the hundred chart to solve.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 7
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Explore-and-Grow
Explanation:
27 + 10 = 37
We notice from the above figure that 27 is added to 10 means from 27 mustard  yellow coloring starts for 10 numbers and stops at 36 . where 37 is the sum and it is highlighted with yellow color.
62 + 30 = 92
We notice from the above figure that 62 is added to 30 means from 62 mustard  yellow coloring starts for 30 numbers and stops at 91 . where 92 is the sum and it is highlighted with yellow color.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
70 + 30 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 8
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show-and-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
The open number line start at 70 and 30 is same as 3 tens So, count on 3 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 70 to 100. It ends at 100 showing the sum .
So ,  70 + 30 = 100 .

Question 2.
38 + 40 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 9
Answer :
38 + 40 = 78
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show-and-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
The open number line starts at 38 and 40 is the same as 4 tens So, count on 4 tens. Then the linking jumps move to the right from 38 to 78. It ends at 78 showing the sum.
So ,  38 + 40 = 78

Question 3.
22 + 60 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 10
Answer :
22 + 60 = 82
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show-and-Grow-Question-3
Explanation :
The open number line start at 22 and 60 is same as 6 tens So, count on 6 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 22 to 82. It ends at 82 showing the sum .
So ,  38 + 60 = 82

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 4.
60 + 30 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 11
Answer :
60 + 30 = 90
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-4
Explanation :
The open number line start at 60 and 30 is same as 3 tens So, count on 3 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 60 to 90. It ends at 90 showing the sum .
So ,  60 + 30 = 90

Question 5.
51 + 20 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 12
Answer :
51 + 20 = 71
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation :
The open number line start at 51 and 20 is same as 2 tens So, count on 2 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 51 to 20. It ends at 20 showing the sum .
So , 51 + 20 = 71

Question 6.
49 + 50 = ___
Answer :
49 + 50 = 99
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation :
The open number line start at 49 and 50 is same as 5 tens So, count on 5 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 49 to 50. It ends at 99 showing the sum .
So , 49 + 50 = 99

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend used an open number line to solve 40 + 20. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 13
Answer :
Yes, he is correct.
40 + 20 = 60
Explanation :
The open number line start at 40 and 20 is same as 2 tens So, count on 2 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 40 to 60. It ends at 60 showing the sum .
So , 40 + 20 = 60

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 66 berries and pick 30 more. Your friend picks 90 berries. Who has more berries?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 14
Addition equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 15
Answer :
Number of berries with me = 66
Number of berries picked by me = 30
Total Number of berries with me = 66 + 30 = 96
Number of berries with my friend = 90
I have more berries than my friend .
96 > 90 .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You have 34 feathers and collect 50 more. Your friend has 85 feathers. Who has more feathers?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 16
Answer :
Number of Feathers with me = 34
Number of features collected by me = 50
Total Number of features with me = 34 + 50 = 84
Number of features with my friend  = 85
84 < 85
My friend is having more features than me

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 49 stickers. Your friend gives you some more. Now you have 79. How many stickers did your friend give you?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 17
Answer :
Number of stickers with me = 49
Total number of stickers with me now = 79
Number of stickers given by friend to me = 79 – 49 = 30
Therefore, Number of stickers given by friend to me = 30

Add Tens Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 3.1

Question 1.
40 + 40 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 18
Answer :
40 + 40 = 80
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.1-Question-1
Explanation :
The open number line start at 40 and 40 is same as 4 tens So, count on 4 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 40 to 80. It ends at 80 showing the sum .
So , 40 + 40 = 80

Question 2.
65 + 20 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 19
Answer:
65 + 20 = 85
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.1-Question-2
Explanation :
The open number line start at 65 and 20 is same as 2 tens So, count on 2 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 65 to 20. It ends at 20 showing the sum .
So , 65 + 20 = 85

Question 3.
14 + 60 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 20
Answer :
14 + 60 =74
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.1-Question-3
Explanation :
The open number line start at 14 and 60 is same as 6 tens So, count on 6 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 14 to 74. It ends at 74 showing the sum .
So , 14 + 60 = 74

Question 4.
Number Sense
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 21
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.1-Question-4
Explanation :
The open number line start at 43 and 30 is same as 3 tens So, count on 3 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 43 to 30. It ends at 73 showing the sum .
So , 43 + 30 = 73

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Newton has 31 stamps and buys 20 more. Descartes has 50 stamps. Who has more stamps?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 22
Answer :
Number of stamps with Newton = 31
Number of stamps bought by newton = 20
Total Number of stamps with newton = 31 + 20 = 51
Number of stamps with Descartes = 50
51 > 50
Newton have more stamps than Descartes .

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 64 rocks. Your friend gives you some more. Now you have 94 rocks. How many rocks did your friend give you?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 23
Answer :
Number of rocks with me = 64
Number of rocks given by friend = x
Total Number of rocks with me now = 94
Number of rocks given by friend = 94 – 64 = 30
Therefore, Number of rocks given by friend = 30

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 24
Answer :
15 is odd number
Explanation :
A number which is divisible by 2 and generates a remainder of 0 is called an even number.
Odd numbers are whole numbers that cannot be divided exactly into pairs. Odd numbers, when divided by 2, leave a remainder of 1. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 … are sequential odd numbers. Odd numbers have the digits 1, 3, 5, 7 or 9 in their ones place.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 25
Answer :
8 is a even number as it is exactly divisible by 2
Explanation :
A number which is divisible by 2 and generates a remainder of 0 is called an even number.
Odd numbers are whole numbers that cannot be divided exactly into pairs. Odd numbers, when divided by 2, leave a remainder of 1. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 … are sequential odd numbers. Odd numbers have the digits 1, 3, 5, 7 or 9 in their ones place.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 26
Answer :
12 is even number as it is exactly divisible by 2
Explanation :
A number which is divisible by 2 and generates a remainder of 0 is called an even number.
Odd numbers are whole numbers that cannot be divided exactly into pairs. Odd numbers, when divided by 2, leave a remainder of 1. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 … are sequential odd numbers. Odd numbers have the digits 1, 3, 5, 7 or 9 in their ones place.

Lesson 3.2 Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line

Color and show how you can use the hundred chart to solve.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 27
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line

Show and Grow

Question 1.
69 + 12 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 28
Answer :
69 + 12 = 81
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
The open number line start at 69 and 12 is same as 1 tens and 2 ones So, count on 1 tens and 2 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 69 to 81. It ends at 81 showing the sum .
So , 69 + 12 = 81

Question 2.
55 + 34 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 29
Answer :
55 + 34 = 89
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
The open number line start at 55 and 34 is same as 3 tens and 4 ones So, count on 3 tens and 4 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 55 to 89. It ends at 89 showing the sum .
So , 55 + 34 = 89

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
15 + 32 = __

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 30
Answer:
15 + 32 = 47
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation :
The open number line start at 15 and 32 is same as 3 tens and 2 ones So, count on 3 tens and 2 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 15 to 32. It ends at 47 showing the sum .
So , 15 + 32 = 47

Question 4.
52 + 26 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 31
Answer :
52 + 26 = 78
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-4
Explanation :
The open number line start at 5 and 26 is same as 2 tens and 6 ones So, count on 2 tens and 6 ones. Then the linking jumps move to right from 52 to 26. It ends at 78 showing the sum .
So , 52 + 26 = 78

Question 5.
38 + 41 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 32
Answer :
38 + 41 = 79
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation :
The open number line start at 38 and 41 is same as 4 tens and 1 ones So, count on 4 tens and 1 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 38 to 41. It ends at 79 showing the sum .
So , 38 + 41 =79

Question 6.
65 + 33 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 33
Answer :
65 + 33 = 98
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation :
The open number line start at 65 and 33 is same as 3 tens and 3 ones So, count on 3 tens and 3 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 65 to 33. It ends at 98 showing the sum .
So , 65 + 33 = 98

Question 7.
Reasoning
Complete the number line and the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 34
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.2-Add-Tens-and-Ones-Using-a-Number-Line-Question-7
Explanation:
The open number line start at 46 . we have 2 tens and ___ ones. we have find the number of ones in the above figure. after adding two tens to the 46 we get 66 . if we add 4 to 66 only then the sum becomes 70. so the number ones are 4 .
Then the linking jumps move to right from 46 to 70. It ends at 70 showing the sum .
So , 46 + 24 = 70

Question 8.
There are 31 tadpoles. Then 19 more join them. How many tadpoles are there now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 35
Answer :
Number of tadpoles = 31
Number of tadpoles joined = 19
Total Number of tadpoles now = 31 + 19 = 50
Therefore, Total Number of tadpoles now = 50 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your class plants 21 trees. Your friend’s class plants 39. How many more trees does your friend’s class plant than your class?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 36
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 36.1
Answer :
Number of plants planted by my class = 21
Number of plants planted my friend’s class = 39
Number of more trees does my friend’s class plant than my class = 39 – 21 = 18

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your friend pops 76 bubbles on a piece of bubble wrap. You pop 88. How many more bubbles do you pop than your friend?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 37
Answer :
Number of bubbles popped by my friend = 76
Number of bubbles popped by me = 88
Number of more bubbles popped by me than my friend = 88 – 76 = 12
Therefore, Number of more bubbles popped by me than my friend = 12

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 45 bouncy balls. You find some more. Now you have 91. How many bouncy balls did you find?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 38
Answer :
Number of bouncy balls with me = 45
Total Number of bouncy balls with me now = 91
Number of bouncy balls found by me = 91 – 45 = 46
Therefore Number of bouncy balls found by me =  46

Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 3.2

Question 1.
64 + 31 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 39
Answer :
64 + 31 = 95
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-1
Explanation :
The open number line start at 64 and 31 is same as 3 tens and 1 ones So, count on 3 tens and 1 ones .Then the linking jumps move to right from 64 to 95. It ends at 95 showing the sum .
So , 64 + 31 = 95

Question 2.
29 + 56 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 40
Answer :
29 + 56 = 85
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-2
Explanation :
The open number line start at 29 and 56 is same as 5 tens and 6 ones So, count on 5 tens and 6 Ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 29 to 85. It ends at 85 showing the sum .
So , 29 + 56 = 85

Question 3.
18 + 62 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 41
Answer :
18 + 62 = 80
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-3
Explanation :
The open number line start at 18 and 62 is same as 6 tens and 8 ones So, count on 6 tens and 8 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 18 to 80. It ends at 80 showing the sum .
So , 18 + 62 = 80

Question 4.
72 + 11 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 42
Answer :
72 + 11 = 83
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-4
Explanation :
The open number line start at 72 and 11 is same as 1 tens and 1ones So, count on 1 tens and 1 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 72 to 83. It ends at 83 showing the sum .
So , 72 + 11 = 83

Question 5.
53 + 27 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 43
Answer :
53 + 27 = 80
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-5
Explanation :
The open number line start at 53 and 27 is same as 2 tens and 7 Ones So, count on 2 tens and 7 Ones. Then the linking jumps move to right from 53 to 80. It ends at 80 showing the sum .
So , 53 + 27 = 80

Question 6.
46 + 32 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 44
Answer :
46 + 32 = 78
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-6
Explanation :
The open number line start at 46 and 32 is same as 3 tens and 2 Ones So, count on 3 tens and 2 Ones. Then the linking jumps move to right from 46 to 78. It ends at 78 showing the sum .
So , 46 + 32 = 78

Question 7.
Structure
Show 27 + 43 two ways.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 45

Answer :
27 + 43 = 70
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-7-2
43 + 27 = 70
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-7
Explanation :
The open number line start at 27 and 43 is same as 4 tens and 3 Ones So, count on 4 tens and 3 Ones .Then the linking jumps move to right from 27 to 70. It ends at 70 showing the sum .
So , 27 + 43 = 70
The open number line start at 43 and 27 is same as 2 tens and 7 Ones So, count on 2 tens and 7 Ones .Then the linking jumps move to right from 43 to 70. It ends at 70 showing the sum .
So , 43+ 27 = 70

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You bake 36 muffins on Friday. You bake 24 on Saturday. How many more muffins do you bake on Friday?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 46
Answer :
Number of muffins baked on Friday = 36
Number of muffins baked on Saturday = 24
Number of muffins baked more on Friday than Saturday = 36 – 24 = 12
Therefore, 12 more muffins are baked on Friday

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton has 61 bugs. Then he finds some more. Now he has 78. How many bugs did Newton find?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 46.1

Answer :
Number of bugs with Newton = 61
Total Number of bugs with newton now = 78
Number of bugs found by Newton = 78 -61 = 17

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 47
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-10
Explanation:
From the above picture we notice, 3 stack of ten cubes and 5 cubes so the Numbers have two digits. … The left digit is the tens’ place. It tells you that there are 3 tens. The last or right digit is the ones’ place which is 5. So,
Number is 35

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 48
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice-3.2-Question-11
Explanation:
From the above picture we notice, 6 stack of ten cubes and 1 cube .the Numbers have two digits. … The left digit is the tens’ place. It tells you that there are 6 tens. The last or right digit is the ones’ place which is 1. So,
Number is 61

Lesson 3.3 Use Place Value to Add

Explore and Grow

How can you use a model to solve?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 49Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 50
Answer :
37 + 15 = 52
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the 10 tens values and ones values . Write the number formed . So, the number is  52

Show and Grow

Use place value to break apart the addends. Then find the sum.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 51
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  52

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 52
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  87

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 53
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  64

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 54
Answer :

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-4

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  92

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use place value to break apart the addends. Then find the sum.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 55
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Question-5
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  88

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 56

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Question-6
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  99

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 57
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Question-7
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  89

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 58
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Question-8
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  46

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 59

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Question-9
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  80

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 60
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Question-10
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  63

Question 11.
Number Sense
Solve. Think: Does the same number make both equations true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 61
Answer :
No, it requires different numbers
16 + __________ = 27
16 + 11 = 27

____ + 27 = 48
21 + 27 = 48

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You use 72 blocks to make a building. Your friend uses 14 more than you. How many blocks does your friend use?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 62
Addition equation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 63
Answer :
Number of blocks used by me = 72
Number of blocks used by my friend = 72 + 14  = 86
Addition Equation :
72 + 14 = 86
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Show and Grow

Question 12.
Your friend has 57 beads. You have 21 more than your friend. How many beads do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 64
Answer :
Number of beads with my friend  = 57
Number of beads with me = 57 + 21
Addition equation :
57 + 21 = 78
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.3-Use-Place-Value-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-12

Question 13.
You have 68 grapes. 38 are red. The rest are green. How many grapes are green?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 65
Answer :
Number of grapes with me = 68
Number of red grapes = 38
Number of green grapes = 68 – 38 = 40
Therefore, Number of green grapes = 40 .

Use Place Value to Add Homework & practice 3.3

Use place value to break apart the addends. Then find the sum.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 66
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use-Place-Value-Add-Homework-practice-3.3-Question-1
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  92

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 67
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use-Place-Value-Add-Homework-practice-3.3-Question-2
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  88

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 68
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use-Place-Value-Add-Homework-practice-3.3-Question-3
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  100

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 69
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use-Place-Value-Add-Homework-practice-3.3-Question-4
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  91

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
You buy two packs of pens. You buy 49 pens in all. Which color pens do you buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 69.1
Answer :
Total pens = 49
Number of blue pens = 25
Number of black pens = 12
Total blue and black pens = 25 + 12 = 37
Total blue black are not equal to 49 so these are not bought .
Number of red pens = 24
Total number of blue and black pens = 25 + 24 = 49
Therefore the color pens which are bought are black and blue as there total numbers pens are equal to 49 .

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Newton picks 41 flowers. Descartes picks 28 more than Newton. How many flowers does Descartes pick?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 70
Answer :
Number of flowers picked by Newton = 41
Number of flowers picked by Descartes = 28 more than Newton = 28 + 41 = 69

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You have 57 marbles. 36 are yellow. The rest are blue. How many blue marbles do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 71
Answer :
Number of marbles with me = 57
Number of yellow marbles = 36
Number of blue marbles = total marbles – yellow marbles = 57 – 36 = 21
Therefore, Number of blue marbles = 21 .

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 72
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use-Place-Value-Add-Homework-practice-3.3-Question-8
Explanation:
The number before rows tell us how many groups we have.
The number after rows tell us how many are in each group.
The number at the end, after the equal signs is the total number of items .
we add number of items in each row as many times of number of rows .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 73
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use-Place-Value-Add-Homework-practice-3.3-Question-9
Explanation:
The number before rows tell us how many groups we have.
The number after rows tell us how many are in each group.
The number at the end, after the equal signs is the total number of items .
we add number of items in each row as many times of number of rows .

Lesson 3.4 Decompose to Add Tens and Ones

Explore and Grow

Use a model to solve.

Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 74

Which addend did you break apart to add ? Explain.
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
Answer :
50 + 18 = 68

Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 18 . Break 18 into tens and ones that is 10 + 8. Add the tens to the first addend that is 50 + 10 = 60. Then add the ones that is 60 + 8 = 68.
So, the sum is 68 .

Show and Grow

Use place value to break apart an addend. Then find the sum.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 75
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 12 . Break 12 into tens and ones that is 10 + 2. Add the tens to the first addend that is 61 + 10 = 71. Then add the ones that is 71 + 2 = 73.
So, the sum is 73 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 76
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 24 . Break 24 into tens and ones that is 20 + 4. Add the tens to the first addend that is 74 + 20 = 94. Then add the ones that is 94 + 4 = 98.
So, the sum is 98.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 77
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 44 . Break 44 into tens and ones that is 40 + 4. Add the tens to the first addend that is 23 + 40 = 63. Then add the ones that is 63 + 4 = 67.
So, the sum is 67 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 78
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 53 . Break 53 into tens and ones that is 50 + 3. Add the tens to the first addend that is 31 + 50 = 81. Then add the ones that is 81 + 3 = 84.
So, the sum is 84 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use place value to break apart an addend. Then find the sum.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 79
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 11 . Break 11 into tens and ones that is 10 + 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 71 + 10 = 81. Then add the ones that is 81 + 1 = 82.
So, the sum is 82 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 80
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 23 . Break 23 into tens and ones that is 20 + 3.  Add the tens to the first addend that is 65 + 20 = 85. Then add the ones that is 85 + 3 = 88.
So, the sum is 88

.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 81
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 47 . Break 47 into tens and ones that is 40 + 7. Add the tens to the first addend that is 32 + 40 = 72. Then add the ones that is 72 + 7 = 79.
So, the sum is 79 .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 82
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 43 . Break 43 into tens and ones that is 40 + 3. Add the tens to the first addend that is 25 + 40 = 65. Then add the ones that is 65 + 3 = 68.
So, the sum is 68 .

Question 9.
54 + 36 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 36 . Break 36 into tens and ones that is 30 + 6. Add the tens to the first addend that is 54 + 30 = 84. Then add the ones that is 84 + 6 = 90.
So, the sum is 90 .

Question 10.
21 + 61 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 61 . Break 61 into tens and ones that is 60 + 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 21 + 60 = 81. Then add the ones that is 81 + 1 = 82.
So, the sum is 82 .

Question 11.
Precision
Which expressions have a sum of 72.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 83
Answer :
Two Equations 41 + 31 and 11 + 61 have sum of 72 .
Explanation :
52 + 22 = 74
51 + 11 = 62
41 + 31 = 72
47 + 30 = 77
11 + 61 = 72

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 32 coins in a piggy bank. You put in 45 more. How many coins are in the bank now?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 84
Addition equation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 85
Answer :
Number of Coins = 32
Number of coins added in piggy bank = You put in 45 more = 32 + 45 = 77
Therefore, Number of coins in bank = 77

Show and Grow

Question 12.
There are 81 fans at a game. 18 more arrive. How many fans are at the game now?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 86
Answer :
Number of fans  = 81
Number of fans arrived = 18 more
Number of fans at the game = 81 + 18 = 99 fans .

Question 13.
You have 54 songs on a music player. Your friend has 31 more than you. How many songs does your friend have ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 86.1
Answer :
Number of songs in my music player = 54
Number of songs my friend have = 31 more than me = 31 + 54 = 85

Decompose to Add Tens and Ones Homework & Practice 3.4

Use place value to break appart an addend. Then find the sum.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 87
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-1
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 34 . Break 34 into tens and ones that is 30 + 4. Add the tens to the first addend that is 53 + 30 = 83. Then add the ones that is 83 + 4 = 87.
So, the sum is 87 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 88
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-2
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 13 . Break 13 into tens and ones that is 10 + 3. Add the tens to the first addend that is 46 + 10 = 56. Then add the ones that is 56 + 3 = 59.
So, the sum is 59 .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 89
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-3
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 73 . Break 73 into tens and ones that is 70 + 3. Add the tens to the first addend that is 14 + 70 = 84. Then add the ones that is 84 + 3 = 87.
So, the sum is 87 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 90

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-4
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 67 . Break 67 into tens and ones that is 60 + 7. Add the tens to the first addend that is 31 + 60 = 91. Then add the ones that is 91 + 7 = 98.
So, the sum is 98 .

Question 5.
28 + 61 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-5
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 28 . Break 28 into tens and ones that is 60 + 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 28 + 60 = 88. Then add the ones that is 88 + 1 = 89.
So, the sum is 89 .

Question 6.
51 + 41 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-6
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 41 . Break 41 into tens and ones that is 40 + 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 51 + 40 = 91. Then add the ones that is 91 + 1 = 92.
So, the sum is 92 .

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the numbers to complete the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 91
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You see 38 ladybugs. Then you see 21 more. How many ladybugs do you see?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 92
Answer :
Number of lady bugs seen = 38
Number of Lady bugs seen later = 21 more = 38 + 21 = 59
Therefore, Total Number of lady bugs seen = 59

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You read for 18 minutes and play outside for 35 minutes. How many minutes do you read and play in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 93
Answer :
Minutes used for reading = 18
Minutes used to played = 35
Number of Minutes used to read and play = 18 + 35 = 53

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 94
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Homework-Practice-3.4-Question-10

Lesson 3.5 Use Compensation to Add

Explore and Grow

Match the numbers that make a ten.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 95

How can making a ten help you add greater numbers?
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
Making a ten help you us in adding numbers easily . It helps to divide the addend into tens part and ones part. tens parts can be easily added to any numbers then later the ones part is added .

Show and Grow

Use compensation to add.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 96
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 1 is taken from addend 5 and added to 59 addend to make 59 a decade number that is 59 + 1 = 60
Then add the changed addends we get, 4 + 60 = 64 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 97
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 4 is taken from addend 37 and added to 16 addend to make 16 a decade number that is 16 + 4 = 20
Then add the changed addends we get, 33 + 20 = 53 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use compensation to add.

Question 3.
52 + 19 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 98
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 1 is taken from addend 52 and added to 19 addend to make 19 a decade number that is 19 + 1 = 20
Then add the changed addends we get, 51 + 20 = 71 .

Question 4.
43 + 8 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 99
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-4
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 2 is taken from addend 43 and added to 8 addend to make 8 a decade number that is 8 + 2 = 10
Then add the changed addends we get, 41+ 10 = 51 .

Question 5.
26 + 35 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 100
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 5 is taken from addend 26 and added to 35 addend to make 35 a decade number that is 35 + 5 = 40
Then add the changed addends we get, 21 + 40 = 61 .

Question 6.
68 + 15 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 101
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 5 is taken from addend 68 and added to 15 addend to make 15 a decade number that is 15 + 5 = 20
Then add the changed addends we get, 63+ 20 = 83 .

Question 7.
Structure
Show two different ways to use compensation to find 25 + 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 102
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 3 is taken from addend 25 and added to 17 addend to make 17 a decade number that is 17 + 3= 20
Then add the changed addends we get, 22+ 20 = 42 .
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 5 is taken from addend 17 and added to 25 addend to make 25 a decade number that is 25 + 5= 30
Then add the changed addends we get, 30+ 12= 42 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You need 100 tickets for a prize. You have 79 and win 17 more. Do you have enough tickets for a prize?
Addition equation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 103
Answer :
Number of Tickets for a prize = 100
Number of tickets with me = 79
Number of tickets won = 17
Total Number of tickets with me = 79 + 17 = 96
100 > 96 .
No, I don’t have enough tickets for a prize .

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You need to set up 80 chairs. You set up 32. Your friend sets up 49. Do you and your friend set up enough chairs?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 104
Answer :
Numbers chairs required to setup = 80
Number of chairs set up by me = 32
Number of chairs set up by my friend = 49
Total chairs set up by me and my friend = 32 + 49 = 81
80 < 81
Yes, me and my friend set up enough chairs .

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You need 50 containers of slime for a party. You have 28. You buy 17 more. How many more containers do you need?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 105
Answer :
Number of containers required for slime a party = 50
Number of containers with me = 28
Number of containers bought = 17
Total Number of containers with me = 28 + 17 =45
Number of containers required more = 50 – 45 = 5

Use Compensation to Add Homework & Practice 3.5

Use compensation to add.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 106
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-1
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 1 is taken from addend 31 and added to 46 addend to make 31 a decade number that is 31 – 1 = 30
Then add the changed addends we get, 47+ 30 = 77 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 107
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-2
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 5 is taken from addend 27 and added to 15 addend to make 15 a decade number that is 15 + 5 = 20
Then add the changed addends we get, 22+ 20 = 42 .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 108
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-3
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 4 is taken from addend 34 and added to 66 addend to make 66 a decade number that is 34 – 4 = 30
Then add the changed addends we get, 70+ 30 = 100 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 109
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-4
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 1 is taken from addend 56 and added to 29 addend to make 29 a decade number that is 29 + 1 = 30
Then add the changed addends we get, 55+ 30 = 85 .

Use compensation to add.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 110
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-5
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 4 is taken from addend 75 and added to 6 addend to make 6 a decade number that is 6 + 4 = 10
Then add the changed addends we get, 71+ 10 = 81 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 111
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-6
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 2 is taken from addend 44 and added to 38 addend to make 38 a decade number that is 38 + 2 = 40
Then add the changed addends we get, 42+ 40 = 84 .

Question 7.
Writing
Explain why you make one addend a decade number when using compensation to add.
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
Answer :
Addends are numbers used in addition problems, they refers to the numbers that are added together. … When solving addition problems, it is advisable to make one of the addends a tens number because, it makes the addition operation easier to manipulate.
Compensation is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition that involves adjusting one of the addends to make the equation easier to solve. Some students may prefer this strategy as an alternative to left-to-right addition or the breaking up the second number strategy.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You want to read 50 pages. You read 18 on Monday and 27 on Tuesday. Do you reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 112
Answer :
Number of pages i want to read = 50
Number of pages read on Monday = 18
Number of pages read on Tuesday = 27
Number of pages read by me on Monday and Tuesday = 18 + 27 = 45
50 > 45 .
No, I didn’t reach the goal. More 5 pages required to read .

Review & Refresh

Draw one line to show the parts

Question 9.
2 squares
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 113
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-9
Explanation :
The above rectangle is divided into 2 squares by drawing a line in the middle of the rectangle. it is drawn on half of the length of the rectangle .

Question 10.
2 triangles
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 114
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Use Compensation-Add-Homework-Practice-3.5-Question-10
Explanation :
Draw any line from any of the vertexes of the triangle . It divided the given triangle into two equal triangles as shown in the above diagram .

Lesson 3.6 Practice Addition Strategies

Explore and Grow

Use any strategy to find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 115

Compare your strategy to your partner’s strategy. How are your strategies alike? How are they different?
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Explore-Grow
Explanation :
In the first method We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 76
In the Second Method The addend which we break apart to add is 41 . Break 41 into tens and ones that is 40 + 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 35 + 40 = 75. Then add the ones that is 75 + 1 = 76.
So, the sum is 76 .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
50 + 35 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 85

Question 2.
64 + 32 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 96

Question 3.
19 + 26 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 45

Question 4.
78 + 13 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 91

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
32 + 41 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 41 . Break 41 into tens and ones that is 40 + 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 32 + 40 = 72. Then add the ones that is 72 + 1 = 73.
So, the sum is 73 .

Question 6.
56 + 18 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 18 . Break 18 into tens and ones that is 10 + 8. Add the tens to the first addend that is 56 + 10 = 66. Then add the ones that is 66 + 8 = 74.
So, the sum is 74 .

Question 7.
47 + 36 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 36 . Break 36 into tens and ones that is 30 + 6. Add the tens to the first addend that is 47 + 30 =77 . Then add the ones that is 77 + 6 = 83.
So, the sum is 83 .

Question 8.
91 + 9 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 9 . Break 9 into tens and ones that is 10 – 1. Add the tens to the first addend that is 91 + 10 = 101. Then add the ones that is 101 – 1 = 100.
So, the sum is 100 .

Question 9.
___ = 67 + 22
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 22 . Break 22 into tens and ones that is 20 + 2. Add the tens to the first addend that is 67 + 20 =87 . Then add the ones that is 87 + 2 = 89.
So, the sum is 89 .

Question 10.
__ = 51 + 39
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Lesson-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 39 . Break 39 into tens and ones that is 30 + 9. Add the tens to the first addend that is 51 + 30 = 81  . Then add the ones that is 51 + 39 = 90.
So, the sum is 90 .

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend breaks apart an addend to solve 24 + 56. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 115.1

Answer :
Yes , he is correct.
Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 56 . Break 56 into tens and ones that is 50 + 6. Add the tens to the first addend that is 24 + 50 = 74  . Then add the ones that is 74 + 6 = 80.
So, the sum is 80 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You collect 23 cans of a food drive. Your friend collects 35 more than you. How many cans does your friend collect?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 116
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 117

Answer :
Number of cans collected by me = 23
Number of cans collected by my friend = 35 more than me
Number of cans collected by my friend = 35+ 23 = 58

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You jump rope 67 times today. Tomorrow you want to jump rope 15 more times than you did today. How many times should you jump rope tomorrow?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 118
Answer :
Number of rope jumps today by me = 67
Number of rope jumps by me for tomorrow = 15 more times than you did today
Number of rope jumps by me for tomorrow = 15 + 67 = 82

Question 13.
Your friend uses 19 fewer nails than you to build a birdhouse. Your friend uses 13 nails. How many nails do you use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 119
Answer :
Number of nails used by my friend = 13
Number of nails used by me = x
Your friend uses 19 fewer nails than me
x – 19 = 13
x = 13 + 19
x = 32
Therefore , Number of nails used by me = 32

Question 14.
The book club has 27 fewer students than the art club. The book club has 24 students. How many students are in the art club?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 120
Answer :
Number of students in book club = Numbers of students in art club – 27
Number of students in book club = 24
Numbers of students in art club = 24 + 27 (From given condition ) = 51

Practice Addition Strategies Homework & Practice 3.6

Question 1.
20 + 40 = __
Answer :
20 + 40 = 60
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Homework-Practice-3.6-Question-1

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 60

Question 2.
60 + 26 = ___
Answer :
60 + 26 = 86
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Homework-Practice-3.6-Question-2
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 86

Question 3.

19 + 61 = ___
Answer :
19 + 61 = 80
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Homework-Practice-3.6-Question-3
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 80

Question 4.

43 + 28 = ___
Answer :
43 + 28 = 71
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Homework-Practice-3.6-Question-4
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 71

Question 5.
__ = 45 + 46
Answer :
45 + 45 = 91
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Homework-Practice-3.6-Question-5
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 91

Question 6.
__ = 33 + 59
Answer :
33 + 59 = 92
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Homework-Practice-3.6-Question-6
Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 92

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses compensation to solve 28 + 33. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 121
Answer :
No , he is wrong .
Explanation :
After adding 2 to 28 then we should subtract 2 from 33 .then we get 28 + 2 = 30 and 33 – 2 = 31 . now add the changed addends we get 30 + 31 = 61 .
So, the sum is 61 .

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 15 blue crayons and 26 red crayons. How many crayons do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 122
Answer :
Number of blue crayons = 15
Number of red crayons = 26
Total number of crayons = 15 + 26 = 41

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
The home team scores 46 points. The visiting team scores 13 more than the home team. How many points does the visiting team score?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 123
Answer :
Score of home team = 46
Score of visiting team = 13 more than the home team = 13 + 46 = 59
Therefore, visiting team score = 59 points .

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 124
Answer :
Number of Drums = 5
Number of Guitars = 5 + 4 = 9
5< 9
It means the number of Guitars are greater than the number of drums.

Lesson 3.7 Problem Solving: Addition

Model the story.

Newton has 15 books. Descartes has 22 more. How many books does Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 125
Answer :
Number of books with Newton =15
Number of books with Descartes = 22 more = 22 + 15  = 37

How many books do Newton and Descartes have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 125.1
Answer :
Total Number of books with Newton and Descartes = 15 + 37 = 52

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 7 cherries. You pick 6 more. Your friend has 45 cherries. How many cherries do you and your friend have in all?
Answer :
Number of cherries with me = 7
Number pf cherries picked by me = 6
Total Number of cherries with me = 7 + 6 = 13
Number of cherries with my friend = 45
Total Number of cherries with me and my friend = 13 + 45 = 58

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
You have 15 blueberries. You pick 12 more. Your friend picks 32 blueberries. How many blue berries do you and your friend pick in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 127
Answer :
Number of blueberries with me = 15
Number of blueberries picked by me = 12 more
Total Number of blueberries with me = 15 + 12 = 27
Number of blueberries with my friend = 32
Total Number of blueberries with me and my friend = 27 + 32 = 59

Question 3.
You have 26 green crayons. You find 10 more. You have 16 red crayons. How many crayons do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 128
Answer :
Number of Green crayons with me = 26
Number of green crayons found = 10
Total Number of green crayons = 26 + 10 = 36
Number of red crayons = 16
Total Number of crayons = 36 + 16 = 52

Question 4.
You take 24 pictures on Friday. You take 20 more on Saturday. You and your friend take 50 pictures in all. How many pictures does your friend take?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 129
Answer :
Number of pictures taken on Friday by me= 24
Number of pictures taken on Saturday by me = 20 + 24 = 44
Number of pictures taken by me and my friend = 50
Number of pictures taken by friend = 50 – 44 = 6

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 31 children at a craft fair. There are 20 more adults than children at the craft fair. How many people are at the craft fair in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 130
Circle what you know.
Underline what you need to find.
Solve:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 131
Answer :
Number of children at craft fair= 31
Number of adults at craft fair = 20 more than children’s = 20 + 31 = 51
Total Number of people at craft fair = 31 + 51 = 82.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your friend has 40 pens. You have 16 more than your friend. How many pens do you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 132
Answer :
Number of pens with my friend = 40
Number of pens with me = 16 more than my friend. = 16 + 40 = 56 .
Total Number of pens with me and my friend = 40 + 56 = 96

Question 6.
You plant 28 seeds. Your friend plants 13 more than you. How many seeds do you and your friend plant in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 133
Answer :
Number of seeds planted by me = 28
Number of seeds planted by my friend = 13 more than me = 13 + 28 = 41
Total Number of seeds planted by me and my friend = 28 + 41 = 69

Problem Solving: Addition Homework & Practice 3.7

Question 1.
You see 14 zebras and 4 elephants at the zoo. Then you see 20 snakes. How many animals do you see in all?
Answer :
Number of zebras = 14
Number of elephants = 4
Number of snakes = 20
Total Number of animals = Number of zebras + Number of elephants + Number of snakes = 14 + 4 + 20 = 38

Question 2.
You win 14 tokens at one game and 15 at another. You and your friend have 40 tokens in all. How many tokens does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 134
Answer :
Number of tokens won in one game = 14
Number of tokens won in another game = 15
Total Number of tokens with me = 14 + 15 = 29
Number of tokens with me and my friend = 40
Number of tokens with my friend = total tokens – number of tokens with me = 40 – 29 = 11

Question 3.
Your class sells 40 raffle tickets. Your friend’s class sells 15 more than your class. How many raffle tickets do your class and your friend’s class sell in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 135
Answer :
Number of raffle tickets sold by my class = 40
Number of tickets sold my friends class = 15 more than my class = 15 + 40 = 55
Total Number of tickets sold by my class and friends class = 40 + 55 = 95

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend picks 33 apples. You pick 11 more than your friend. How many apples do you and your friend pick in all? Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 136
Answer :
Number of apples picked my friend = 33
Number of apples picked by me = 11 more than my friend = 11 + 33 = 44
Total Number of apples with me and my friend = 33 + 44 = 77 apples.

Review & Refresh

Get to 10 to subtract

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 137
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Problem-Solving-Addition-Homework-Practice-3.7-Question-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 138
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Problem-Solving-Addition-Homework-Practice-3.7-Question-6

Addition to 100 Strategies Performance Task 3

Question 1.
You go to an amusement park. The wait times and ride times for the rides are shown below.
a. Find the total number of minutes it takes to wait and ride each ride.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 139
Answer :
Total Time = Wait time + Ride Time
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Performance-Task 3-Question-1
b. How many more minutes do you spend at the log ride than at the bumper cars?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 140
Answer :
Number of minutes at log ride = 68 minutes.
Number of minutes at Bumper cars = 44 minutes .
Number of more minutes spend at the log ride than at the bumper cars = 68 – 44 = 24 minutes.

c. You want to ride 2 different rides in less than 90 minutes. Which rides can you ride?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 141
Answer :
The two rides which i can ride less than 90 minutes are Ferris wheel and Bumper cars.
Explanation :
Number of minutes at Ferris wheel = 42
Number of minutes at Bumper cars = 44
Total Time = 42 + 44 = 86
86 > 90 minutes.

Question 2.
At 12:30, you spend 25 minutes eating lunch and 30 minutes playing games. How many more minutes are there until the show starts?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 142
Answer :
Time spent in eating lunch = 25 minutes
Time spent in playing games = 30 minutes
Total Time = 25 + 30 = 55 minutes
From 12 : 30 total time spent is 55 minutes so the time is 1:25
The show starts at 1 : 30.
The time left to start the show is 5 minutes.

Addition to 100 Strategies Activity

Three in a Row: Addition

To Play: Players take turns. On your turn, spin both spinners. Add the two numbers and cover the sum. Continue playing until a player gets three in a row.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 143

Addition to 100 Strategies Chapter Practice 3

3.1 Add Tens Using a Number Line

Question 1.
30 + 40 = __
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 144
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-Number-Line-Question-1
Explanation :
The open number line start at 30 and 40 is same as 4 tens So, count on 4 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 30 to 70. It ends at 70 showing the sum .
So , 30 + 40 = 70

Question 2.
26 + 50 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 145
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.1-Add-Tens-Using-Number-Line-Question-2
Explanation :
The open number line start at 26 and 50 is same as 5 tens So, count on 5 tens .Then the linking jumps move to right from 26 to 70. It ends at 76 showing the sum .
So , 26 + 50 = 76

3.2 Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line

Question 3.
46 + 33 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 146
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.2-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Question-3
Explanation :
The open number line start at 46 and 33 is same as 3 tens and 3 ones So, count on 3 tens and 3 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 46 to 79. It ends at 79 showing the sum .
So , 46 + 33 = 79 .

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You find 57 bugs. Your friend finds 12 more than you. How many bugs does your friend find?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 147
Answer :
Number of bugs found by me = 57
Number of bugs found by my friend = 12 more than you = 57 + 12 = 69
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.2-Add-Tens-Ones-Using-Number-Line-Question-4
Explanation :
The open number line start at 57 and 12 is same as 1 tens and 2 ones So, count on 1 tens and 2 ones.Then the linking jumps move to right from 57 to 69. It ends at 69 showing the sum .
So , 57 + 12 = 69

3.3 Use Place Value o Add

Use place value to break apart the addends. Then find the sum.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 148
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.3-Use-Place-Value-Add-Question-5

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is  87

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 149
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.3-Use-Place-Value-Add-Question-6

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 86

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 150
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.3-Use-Place-Value-Add-Question-7

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 96

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 151
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.3-Use-Place-Value-Add-Question-8

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 81

3.4 Decompose to Add Tens and Ones

Use place value to break apart an addend. Then find the sum.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 152
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Question-9

Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 42 . Break 42 into tens and ones that is 40 + 2. Add the tens to the first addend that is 37 + 40 = 77. Then add the ones that is 77 + 2 = 79.
So, the sum is 79 .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 153
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.4-Decompose-Add-Tens-Ones-Question-10

Explanation :
The addend which we break apart to add is 26 . Break 26 into tens and ones that is 20 + 6. Add the tens to the first addend that is 51 + 20 = 71. Then add the ones that is 71 + 6 = 77.
So, the sum is 77 .

Question 11.
Precision
Which expressions have a sum of 95?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 154
Answer :
Expressions : 43 + 52 , 31 + 64  and 73 + 22 have sum of 95
Explanation :
43 + 52 = 95
25 + 30 = 55
31 + 64 = 95
73 + 22 = 95
71 + 12 = 83

3.5 Use Compensation to Add

Use compensation to add.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 155
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Question-12
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 5 is taken from addend 66 and added to 25 addend to make 25 a decade number that is 25 + 5 = 30
Then add the changed addends we get, 61 + 30 = 91 .

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 156
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.5-Use-Compensation-Add-Question-13
Explanation :
Takes ones from one addend to make other addend number a decade number . Here 1 is taken from addend 53 and added to 39 addend to make 39 a decade number that is 39+ 1 = 40
Then add the changed addends we get, 52 + 40 = 92 .

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
You and your friend want to find 90 seashells. You find 45. Your friend finds 51. Do you and your friend reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 157
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 158
Answer :
Total Numbers of seashells to be found = 90
Number of shells found by me = 45
Number of shells found by my friend = 51
Total Number of shells found by me and my friend = 45 + 51 = 96
90 < 96 .
Yes, we reached the goal .

3.6 Practice Addition Strategies

Question 15.
47 + 36 = __
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Question-15

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 83

Question 16.
50 + 19 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Question-16

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 69

Question 17.
32 + 55 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Question-17

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 87

Question 18.

54 + 26 = ___
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Addition-to-100-Strategies-Chapter-Practice-3-3.6-Practice-Addition-Strategies-Question-18

Explanation :
We use place value and break the addends into tens and ones. Then add the tens values and ones values .Write the number formed . So, the number is 80

3.7 Problem Solving: Addition

Question 19.
Newton has 23 rocks. He finds 7 more. Descartes has 51 rocks. How many rocks do Newton and Descartes have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 159
Answers :
Number of rocks with Newton = 23
Number of rocks found by newton = 7
Total number of rocks with newton = 23 + 7 = 30
Number of rocks with Descartes = 51
Total Number of rocks with Newton and Descartes = 30 + 51 = 81

Question 20.
Your friend has 22 bracelets. You have 16 more. How many bracelets do you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies 160
Answer :
Number of bracelets with my friend = 22
Number of bracelets with me = 16
Total Number of bracelets with me and my friend = 22 + 16 = 38 Bracelets
Therefore, Total Number of bracelets with me and my friend = 38 Bracelets.

Conclusion:

I hope that the detailed solutions provided at Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 3 Addition to 100 Strategies Answer Key are useful for the students. By referring to this solution key, you can solve exercise problems on your own. In this way, you can assess your strengths and weaknesses and concentrate on the areas you are lagging in. Students can stay in touch with us to find the solutions for all Big Ideas Math Answer Key for Grade 2 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

Searching for the best material for Integers, Number Lines, and Coordinate Plane? If yes, then there is a one-stop solution for your search. We are providing the Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answers Ch 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pdf in the next sections. Follow our material and make your preparation as expected. You can easily score marks if you practice all the problems of BIM 6th Grade Answer Key which gives the step by step solution to all the problems. Scroll to the next sections to find various details like tasks, examples, answer keys, free pdf’s and so on.

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane free pdf is here. Download BIM 6th Grade Chapter 8 Solution Key pdf from the below given links. If you are really worried about your preparation, then definitely you have to check this article. Because we are providing all the tips and tricks to solve the problems. Before starting your practice, understand all the concepts and learn each and every small topic, so that you can overcome all your weakess and score better marks. Follow all the concepts involving Integers, Comparing and Ordering Integers, Rational Numbers etc.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Integers

  • Lesson 8.1 Integers
  • Integers Homework & Practice 8.1

Lesson: 2 Comparing and Ordering Integers

  • Lesson 8.2 Comparing and Ordering Integers
  • Comparing and Ordering Integers Homework & Practice 8.2

Lesson: 3 Rational Numbers

  • Lesson 8.3 Rational Numbers
  • Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 8.3

Lesson: 4 Absolute Value

  • Lesson 8.4 Absolute Value
  • Absolute Value Homework & Practice 8.4

Lesson: 5 The Coordinate Plane

  • Lesson 8.5 The Coordinate Plane
  • The Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.5

Lesson: 6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane

  • Lesson 8.6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane
  • Polygons in the Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.6

Lesson: 7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities

  • Lesson 8.7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities
  • Writing and Graphing Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.7

Lesson: 8 Solving Inequalities

  • Lesson 8.8 Solving Inequalities
  • Solving Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.8

Chapter: 8 – Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Connecting Concepts
  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Chapter Review
  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Practice Test
  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Cumulative Practice

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Designing a CubeSat
A CubeSat is a type of miniature satellite that is used for space research. Each CubeSat has the dimensions shown and a mass of no more than 1.33 kilograms.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 1
Watch the STEAM Video “Designing a CubeSat.” Then answer the following questions.
1. For what fields of study do you think CubeSats can be used?
2. Tony says g-forces are a measure of how heavy you feel.  e table shows the g-forces on a CubeSat at three points in time. Why can g-forces be as high as 6 during a rocket launch and as low as 0 in space?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 2
3. What would happen to a CubeSatthatcannot withstand a g-force of 6? a g-force of 0?

Performance Task

Launching a CubeSat
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given information about three different types of Cubesats that you can purchase.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 3
You will determine which of the three CubeSats is the best option for a mission. Why might g-force, pressure, and temperature be important considerations for making your decision?

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Getting Ready for Chapter

Chapter Exploration
Question 1.
Work with a partner. Plot and connect the points to make a picture.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Exploration-Question-1

Question 2.
Create your own “dot-to-dot” picture. Use at least 20 points.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Exploration-Question-2

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
negative numbers
opposites
inequality
quadrants

Lesson 8.1 Integers

Exploration 1

Reading and Describing Temperatures
Work with a partner. The thermometers show the temperatures in four cities.
Honolulu, Hawaii
Anchorage, Alaska
Death Valley, California
Seattle, Washington
a. Match each temperature with its most appropriate location.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 1
Answer:
Honolulu, Hawaii  – 110 degrees Fahrenheit
Anchorage, Alaska – 0 degrees Fahrenheit
Death Valley, California – 80 degrees Fahrenheit
Seattle, Washington – 40 degrees Fahrenheit

b. What do all of the temperatures have in common?
Answer :
Measuring in degrees fahrenheit and Readings

c. What does it mean for a temperature to be below zero? Provide an example. Can you think of any other situations in which numbers may be less than zero? Maintain OversightHow does this exploration help you represent numbers less than 0?
Answer:
Temperature to be below zero means cold weather starts .
Example:
When used by weather forecasters in the U.S., it means “below 0°F”. ( It essentially means, “It’s gonna be cold; bring your mittens and a warm hat.”

d. The thermometers show temperatures on a vertical number line. How else can you represent numbers less than zero? Provide an example.
Answer:

In general, we can represent a change in temperature with a positive number if it increases and a negative number if it decreases. Then we can find the final temperature by adding the initial temperature and the change.

Positive numbers are greater than 0. They can be written with or without a positive sign (+).
1 5 20 10,000

Negative numbers are less than 0. They are written with a negative sign (−).
-1 -5 -20 -10,000

Two numbers that are the same distance from 0 on a number line, but on opposite sides of 0, are called opposites. The opposite of 0 is 0.

Try It

Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 1.
A hiker climbs 900 feet up a mountain.
Answer:
+900, 900 feet
Explaination :
Positive numbers are greater than 0. They can be written with or without a positive sign (+).

Question 2.
You have a debt of $24.
Answer:
-24
Explaination :
Debt is an amount of money borrowed by one party from another.
Debt of $24 is represented as -24.

Question 3.
A student loses 5 points for not showing work on a quiz.
Answer:
-5
Explaination :
lose is a another meaning of negative.
Student loses 5 points is indicated as -5.

Question 4.
A savings account earns $10.
Answer:
+10
Explaination :
Earns is another vocabulary to positive.
earns $10 is represented as +10 or 10.

Graph the integer and its opposite.
Question 5.
6
Answer:
(6, -6)
Explanation:
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 6.
-4
Answer:
(4, -4)
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 7.
-12
Answer:
(12, -12)
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 8.
1
Answer:
(1, -1)
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

WRITING INTEGERS Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 9.
A baseball is thrown at a speed of 78 miles per hour.
Answer:
+78
Explanation :
A baseball is thrown at a speed of 78 miles per hour. So, thrown indicated +ve
+78 or 78.

Question 10.
A submarine is 3750 feet below sea level.
Answer:
-3750
Explanation :
submarine is 3750 feet below sea level. so, below indicates -ve
-3750

GRAPHING INTEGERS Graph the integer and its opposite.
Question 11.
8
Answer:
(8, -8)
Explaination :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 12.
– 7
Answer:
(7 -7)
Explaination :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 13.
11
Answer:
(11, -11)
Explaination :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 14.
VOCABULARY
Which of the following numbers are integers?
18, 4.1, -9, \(\frac{1}{6}\) , 1.75, 22
Answer:
An integer is defined as a number that can be written without a fractional component.

18, -9, 22

Question 15.
VOCABULARY
List three words or phrases used in real life that indicate negative integers.
Answer:

minus , below , down , debt, low.

Question 16.
WRITING
Describe the opposite of a positive integer, the opposite of a negative integer, and the opposite of zero.
Answer:
Opposite of positive integer is negative integer.
A negative integer is a whole number that has value less than zero. Negative integer are normally whole numbers, for example, -3, -5, -8, -10 etc
Opposite of negative integer is positive integer.
The positive integer are the numbers 1, 2, 3, … , sometimes called the counting numbers or natural numbers, for example , +1, 2 , +3 ……..
Opposite of zero
We do not consider zero to be a positive or negative number. So, zero (0) opposite is zero(0).

Question 17.
The world record for scuba diving is 332 meters below sea level. Write an integer that represents a new world record. Explain.
Answer:
1090 ft is represented as the new world record in scuba diving.
Explanation:
converting m to ft
1 m – 3.2808 ft
332 m – 1090 ft.

Question 18.
The indoor and outdoor temperatures are shown. The freezing point of water is 32°F. Write integers that represent how each temperature must change to reach the freezing point of water. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 4
Answer:
Given:
Freezing point of water = 32°F
From the pic the outdoor temperature = 25°F
To reach the freezing point of water outdoor we need to increase the temperature outdoor temperature.
32°F -25°F = 7°F
Outdoor temperature should be increased by 7°F.
From the pic indoor temperature= 68°F
Similarly, to reach the freezing point of water indoor we need to decrease the indoor temperature.
68°F -32°F = 36°F
Indoor temperature should be reduced by 36°F.

Question 19.
An ion is an atom that has a positive or negative electric charge. When an ion has more protons than electrons, it has a positive charge. When an ion has fewer protons than electrons, it has a negative charge. Explain what it means for an atom to have an electric charge of zero.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 5
Answer:
When an atom has an equal number of electrons and protons, it has an equal number of negative electric charges (the electrons) and positive electric charges (the protons). The total electric charge of the atom is therefore zero and the atom is said to be neutral.

Integers Homework & Practice 8.1

Review & Refresh

Find the volume of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 6
Answer:
Given:
Length of cuboid : 4/5 mm
Width of the cuboid: 1/2 mm
Height of the cuboid: 3/8 mm
Volume of the cuboid = l*w*h
\(\frac{4}{5}\)*\(\frac{1}{2}\)*\(\frac{3}{8}\)= (4x1x3)/(5x2x8)=3/20
\(\frac{3}{20}\) cubic mm.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 7
Answer:
Given:
Length of cuboid : 4/5 yd
Width of the cuboid: 5/8 yd
Height of the cuboid: 3/4 yd
Volume of the cuboid = l*w*h
\(\frac{4}{5}\)*\(\frac{5}{8}\)*\(\frac{3}{4}\)= (4x5x3)/(5x8x4)=3/8
\(\frac{3}{8}\) cubic yd.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 8
Answer:
Given:
Length of cuboid : 15/4 ft
Width of the cuboid: 4/3 ft
Height of the cuboid: 8/5 ft
Volume of the cuboid = l*w*h
\(\frac{15}{4}\)*\(\frac{4}{3}\)*\(\frac{8}{5}\)= (15x4x8)/(4x3x5)=8
\(\frac{8}{1}\) cubic ft.

Factor the expression using the GCF.
Question 4.
4m + 32
Answer:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.
4m + 32
divide the equation by 4
\(\frac{4m}{4}\) + \(\frac{32}{4}\)
\(\frac{4(m + 8)}{1}\)
4 is the greatest common factor.

Question 5.
18z – 22
Answer:
18z – 22
Take 2 common we get,
2 ( 9z – 11)
2 is the greatest common factor.
Explanation:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.

Question 6.
38x + 80
Answer:
38x + 80
Take 2 common we get,
2 ( 19z + 40)
no more possible to simplify so
2 is the greatest common factor.
Explanation:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.

Question 7.
42n – 27s
Answer:
42n – 27s
Take 3 common we get,
3 (14n – 9s)
no more possible to simplify so
3 is the greatest common factor.
Explanation:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.

Question 8.
The height of a statue is 276 inches. What is the height of the statue in meters? Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.
A. 1.09 m
B. 7.01 m
C. 108.66 m
D. 701.04 m
Answer:
1 inch = 0.025 m
Height of a statue = 276 inches
convert it into meters =276 inch x 0.025 = 7.01 m
So,
B is the answer.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

OPEN-ENDED Describe a situation that can be represented by the integer. (See Exploration 1, p. 345.)
Question 9.
– 6
Answer:
The Temperature is decreased by 6 °F

Question 10.
12
Answer:
Earned bonus of 12 points

Question 11.
– 45
Answer:
Had lose of 45 coins .

WRITING INTEGERS Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 12.
A football team loses 3 yards.
Answer:
-3
As loses represents negative

Question 13.
The temperature is 6 degrees below zero.
Answer:
below zero indicates negative
-6 degrees

Question 14.
You earn $15 raking leaves.
Answer:
Earn represents positive
+15$

Question 15.
A person climbs 600 feet up a mountain.
Answer:
+600 feet as its up a mountain.

Question 16.
You withdraw$42 from an account.
Answer:
-42$ withdraw from my account.

Question 17.
An airplane climbs to 37,500 feet.
Answer:
An airplane climbs to +37,500 feet

Question 18.
The temperature rises 17 degrees.
Answer:
Temperature rises indicates increase +17 degrees

Question 19.
You lose 56 points in a video game.
Answer:
I lose -56 points from my video game.

Question 20.
A ball falls 350 centimeters.
Answer:
A ball falls -350 centimeters

Question 21.
You receive 5 bonus points in class.
Answer:
I receive +5 points in class.

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
On December 17, 1903, the Wright brothers accomplished the first powered flight. The plane traveled a distance of 120 feet. Write this distance as an integer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 9
Answer:
Distance Traveled by the plane = 120 feet.
It means +120 .

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A stock market gains 83 points. The next day, the stock market loses 47 points. Write each amount as an integer.
Answer:
+83 = Stock Market gains 83 points.
– 47 = The next day the stock market loses 47 points.

GRAPHING INTEGERS
Graph the integer and its opposite.
Question 24.
– 5
Answer:
The opposite of -5 = +5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-GRAPHING-INTEGERS-Question-24

Question 25.
– 8
Answer:
The opposite of -8 = +8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-25

Question 26.
14
Answer:
The opposite of 14 = -14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-26

Question 27.
9
Answer:
The opposite of 9 = -9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-27

Question 28.
– 14
Answer:
The opposite of -14 = +14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-28

Question 29.
20
Answer:
The opposite of +20 = -20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-29

Question 30.
– 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-30

Question 31.
18
Answer:
The opposite of 18 is -18
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-31

Question 32.
30
Answer:
The opposite of 30 is – 30
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-32

Question 33.
– 150
Answer:
The opposite of -150 is 150
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-33
Question 34.
– 32
Answer:
The opposite of – 32 is 32
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-34

Question 35.
400
Answer:
The opposite of 400 is -400
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-35

Question 36.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend describes the positive integers. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 10
Answer:
No
Explanation:
The natural numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ……… are called positive integers.
Positive numbers are represented to the right of zero on the number line. Positive numbers are greater than negative numbers as well a zero.
Because zero is neither positive nor negative . Zero is a neutral number.

USING A NUMBER LINE Identify the integer represented by the point on the number line.
Question 37.
A
Answer:
The point A is marked at 5

Question 38.
B
Answer:
The point B is marked at -8

Question 39.
C
Answer:
The point C is marked at -15

Question 40.
D
Answer:
The point D is marked at 18

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 11

Question 41.
DIG DEEPER!
Low tide, represented by the integer −1, is 1 foot below the average water level. High tide is 5 feet higher than low tide.
a. What does 0 represent in this situation?
b. Write an integer that represents the average water level relative to high tide.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 12
Answer a :
The Low Tide = -1
Average water level = 0
Explanation:
As the low tide is just below average water level . When average water level =0
Then low tide can be – 1
Answer b :
High Tide = 4
Explanation:
High tide is 5 feet higher than low tide so we get
High Tide = -1 + 5 = 4
An integer that represents the average water level relative to high tide = 4

Question 42.
REPEATED REASONING
Consider an integer n.
a. Is the opposite of n always less than 0? Explain your reasoning.
b. What can you conclude about the opposite of the opposite of n? Justify your answer.
c. Describe the meaning of −[−(−n)]. What is it equal to?
Answer a:
Only if n is a positive integer
Explanation:
The integer n is a positive integer then  only the negative integer of n is always less than 0 Positive numbers are represented to the right of zero on the number line and Negative numbers are represented to the left of zero on the number line.

Answer b :
n is a integer . opposite of n is -n and opposite of (opposite of n) = opposite of (-n)= +n

Answer c :
– x – = +
– x + = –
−[−(−n)]= means minus of minus of minus n
−[−(−n)]= – (+ n)= -n

Question 43.
In a game of tug-of-war, a team wins by pulling the flag over its goal line. The flag begins at0. During a game, the flag moves 8 feet to the right,12 feet to the left, and 13 feet back to the right.Did a team win? Explain. If not, what does each team need to do in order to win?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 13
Answer:
Flag begins at 0
After First pull:
The flag moves 8 feet to the right means = 0 + 8 =8
After Second pull:
The flag is at 8 now then it moves 12 feet to the left .
Now the flag is at = 8 – 12 = -4
After Third pull:
Now the flag is at -4 now then it moves to 13 feet to the right
Then the flag is at = -4 + 13 = 9
Now the flag is at 9 that means to win the flag should cross goal line that means + 10
No team wins
To win the right side team the flag should move 1 or more to the right
To win the left side team the flag should move 11 or more to the left.

Lesson 8.2 Comparing and Ordering Integers

EXPLORATION 1

Seconds to Liftoff
Work with a partner. You are listening to a command center before the liftoff of a rocket. You hear the following:
“T minus 10 seconds . . . go for main engine start . . . T minus 9 . . . 8 . . . 7 . . . 6 . . . 5 . . . 4 . . . 3 . . . 2 . . . 1 . . . we have liftoff.”
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 1
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 2
a. Represent these events on a number line.
Answer:
Rocket clears launchpad tower = +6 = A Event
Launch Verification = -16 = B Event
Main Engine Start = -3 = C Event
Rocket Topping sequence complete = -110 = D Event
Launch control system enabled = -90 = E Event
Boosters ignite = 0 = F Event
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.2-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Exploration-1
b. List the events in the order they occurred. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
1 – Rocket Topping sequence complete = -110 = D Event
2 – Launch control system enabled = -90 = E Event
3 – Launch Verification = -16 = B Event
4 – Main Engine Start = -3 = C Event
5 – Boosters ignite = 0 = F Event
6 – Rocket clears launchpad tower = +16 = A Event
As per the above number line the events which take place are ordered from left side to right side

c. Extend the number line in part(a) to show events in an astronaut’s day. Include at least five events before liftoff and at least five events after liftoff. Use the Internet or another reference source to gather information.
Answer:
1 – Rocket Topping sequence complete = -110 = D Event
2 – Launch control system enabled = -90 = E Event
3 – Launch Verification = -16 = B Event
4 – Main Engine Start = -3 = C Event
5 – Boosters ignite = 0 = F Event
6 – Rocket clears launchpad tower = +6 = A Event
7- Stage 1 Burnout = +16 = G Event
8 – Fairing Jettison = +25 = H Event
9 – Stage 1 Separation = + 30 = I Event
10 – Stage 2 Ignition = +35 = J Event
11 – Transfer to the launch pad = – 120 = K Event
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.2-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Exploration-1-C

Recall that on a horizontal number line, numbers to the left are less than numbers to the right. Numbers to the right are greater than numbers to the left. On a vertical number line, numbers below are less than numbers above. Numbers above are greater than numbers below.

Try It

Copy and Complete the statement using < or >.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 3
Answer:
0 > -4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents. Think what the value is.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 4
Answer:
-5 < 5
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 5
Answer:
-8 < -7
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents. Think what the value is.

Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 4.
-2, -3, 3, 1, -1
Answer:
-3, -2, -1, 1, 3

Question 5.
4, -7, -8, 6, 1
Answer:
-8, -7, 1, 4, 6

Question 6.
In Example 3, what is the least possible integer value of the number?
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
ORDERING INTEGERS Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 7.
6, – 4, – 1, 3, 5
Answer:
-4, -1,  3, 5, 6

Question 8.
– 7, – 9, 0, 8, – 2
Answer:
-9, -7, -2, 0, 8

Question 9.
WRITING
Explain how to determine which of two integers is greater.
Answer:

We are used to big positive numbers meaning a big value – the bigger the number, the more, or higher, or longer, or expensive, or whatever the number represents.

With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents and what the value is.

Question 10.
REASONING
The positions of four fish are shown.
a. Use red, blue, yellow, and green dots to graph the positions of the fish on a horizontal number line and a vertical number line.
b. Explain how to use the number lines from part(a) to order the positions from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 6.1
Answer a :
The position of red fish = -4
The position of Yellow fish = -6
The position of green fish = 0
The position of Blue fish = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Self-Assessment-for-Concepts-Skills-Question -10-1a
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Self-Assessment-for-Concepts-Skills-Question -10-2a
Answer b:
Least to greatest numbers are
-6, -4, 0, 8
Explanation:
From the above horizontal number line we notice that the numbers from left to right of number line  represent least to greatest numbers.

Question 11.
NUMBER SENSE
a and bare negative integers. Compare a and b. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 6
Answer:

b > a
Explanation:
we notice that the numbers from left to right of number line  represent least to greatest numbers.The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents. Think what the value is..

Question 12.
The freezing temperature of nitrogen is −210°C, and the freezing temperature of oxygen is −219°C. A container of nitrogen and a container of oxygen are both cooled to −215°C. Do the contents of each container freeze? Explain.
Answer:
The temperature of liquid nitrogen can readily be reduced to its freezing point 63 K (−210 °C; −346 °F) by placing it in a vacuum chamber pumped by a vacuum pump
The temperature at which a substance freezes is called the freezing point. The freezing point of oxygen is -219°C . This means that they need to be cooled to lower temperatures to make them freeze.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
The diagram shows the daily high temperatures during a school week. Was a positive Celsius temperature recorded on Tuesday? on Friday? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 7
Answer:
No
Explanation:
The natural numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ……… are called positive integers.
Positive numbers are represented to the right of zero on the number line. Positive numbers are greater than negative numbers as well a zero.
Because zero is neither positive nor negative . Zero is a neutral number.
Therefore positive Celsius temperature recorded on Monday and Friday .

Comparing and Ordering Integers Homework & Practice 8.2

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-a.2

Review & Refresh

Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 1.
You walk up 83 stairs.
Answer:
up indicates + .so it is + 83

Question 2.
A whale is 17 yards below sea level.
Answer:
Below indicates – . So it is -17

Question 3.
An organization receives a $75 donation.
Answer:
Receives indicates +. So it is +$75

Question 4.
A rock falls 250 feet off a cliff.
Answer:
Falls indicates – . So it is -250

Question 5.
What is the area of the trapezoid?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 8
A. 6.3 ft2
B. 44.1 ft2
C. 50.4 ft2
D. 88.2 ft2
Answer:
Height of Trapezoid = 4.2ft
Base 1 of Trapezoid = 12ft
Base 2 of Trapezoid = 9 ft
Area of Trapezoid = half-height × (base1 + base2) = \(\frac{4.2}{2}\) (12 + 9)
=2.1 × 21 = 44.1 ft2

Divide. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{5} \div \frac{1}{9}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{5}\)÷latex]\frac{9}{1}[/latex]= 9/5=1.8

Question 7.
\(\frac{2}{5} \div \frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
(2/5) /(1/3) = (2×3) /5 = 6/5=1.2

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\)× \(\frac{1}{3}\)=\(\frac{1}{12}\) = 0.083

Question 9.
\(\frac{4}{7}\) ÷ 8
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{8}\)=\(\frac{1}{14}\) =0.071

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

OPEN-ENDED Name an event that could occur at the given time (in seconds) in Exploration 1. Describe when the event occurs in the order of events from the exploration. (See Exploration 1, p. 351.)

Question 10.
– 300
Answer:

Question 11.
– 150
Answer:

Question 12.
10
Answer:

COMPARING INTEGERS Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 9
Answer:
3 > 0
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 10
Answer:
-2 < 0
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 11
Answer:
6 > -6
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 12
Answer:
3 > -4
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 13
Answer:
-1 < 4
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 14
Answer:
-7 > -8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 15
Answer:
-3 < -2
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 16
Answer:
-5 > – 10
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend compares two integers. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 17
Answer:
No My friend is wrong.
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
-1 is nearer to 0 than -3 so -1 is greater
-3 < – 1

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 18
Answer:
Yes it is True .
– 7 < -3

ORDERING INTEGERS Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 23.
0, – 1, 2, 3, – 3
Answer:
-3, -1, 0, 2, 3
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 24.
– 4, – 2, – 3, 2, 1
Answer:
-4, -3, -2, 1, 2
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 25.
– 2, 3, – 3, – 4, 4
Answer:
-4, -3, -2, 3, 4
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 26.
5, – 11, – 9, 3, – 4
Answer:
-11, -9, -4. 3, 5
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 27.
– 3, 8, 4, 0, – 13
Answer:
-13, -3, 0, 4, 8
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 28.
– 7, 2, 6, – 4, 3
Answer:
-7, -4, 2, 3, 6
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 29.
12, – 8, – 16, 7, 1
Answer:
-16, -8, 1, 7, 12
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 30.
10, – 10, 30, – 30, – 50
Answer:
-50, -30, -10, 10, 30
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 31.
– 5, 15, – 10, – 20, 25
Answer:
-20, -10, -5, 15, 25
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An archaeologist discovers the two artifacts shown.
a. What integer represents ground level?
b. A dinosaur bone is 42 centimeters below ground level. Is it deeper than both of the artifacts? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 19
Answer a :
An integer represents ground level = 0 (as it is neutral)
Answer b :
Dinosaur bone is at = – 42cms
First artifact is at =-38 cms
Second artifact is at = – 44 cms
No it not depper than both the artifacts.
Explanation:
It is in between the artifacts. as -42 lies in between -38 and -44

Question 33.
REASONING
A number is between −2 and −10. What is the least possible integer value of this number? What is the greatest possible integer value of this number?
Answer:
The numbers between -2 and -10 = -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8, -9
Greatest value = -3
Least Value = – 9
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 34.
NUMBER SENSE
Describe the locations of the integers m and n on a number line for each situation.
a. m < n
b. m > n
c. n > m
Answer a :
m < n where m = 1 and n = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-a
Answer b :
m > n where n = -1 and m = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-b
Answer c :
n > m where n = 5 and m = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-c

CRITICAL THINKING Tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 20
Question 35.
A positive integer is greater than its opposite.
Answer:
YES,
Explanation:
The opposite number of a positive number is negative numbers. Negative are always lesser than positive numbers.

Question 36.
An integer is less than its opposite and greater than 0.
Answer:
No
Explanation:
integer = 5
The opposite of 5 is -5
Here integer is not less than its oppositeand greater than 0 it is -5 < 5 .

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the highest and lowest elevations for five states.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 21
a. Order the states by their highest elevations, from least to greatest.
b. Order the states by their lowest elevations, from least to greatest.
c. What does the lowest elevation for Florida represent?
Answer a :
Florida < Louisiana <Arkansas < Tennessee < California
345< 535 < 2753 < 6643 < 14494
Answer b :
California < Louisiana < Florida < Arkansas < Tennessee
-282 < -8 < 0 < 55 < 178

Question 38.
NUMBER SENSE
Point A is on a number line halfway between −17 and 5. Point Bis halfway between Point A and 0. What integer does Point B represent?
Answer:
Point A = half way between -17 and 5 = (- 17 + 5) ÷ 2 = – 12÷2 = -6
Point B = halfway between Point A and 0 = (-6 + 0) ÷ 2= -6 ÷ 2 = – 3
Therefore Point B represent -3 integer

Question 39.
REASONING
Eleven Fahrenheit temperatures are shown on a map during a weather report. When the temperatures are ordered from least to greatest, the middle temperature is below off. Do you know exactly how many of the temperatures are represented by negative numbers? Explain.
Answer:

Question 40.
PUZZLE
Nine students each choose one integer. Here are seven of them:
5, − 8, 10, − 1, − 12, − 20, and 1.
a. When all nine integers are ordered from least to greatest, the middle integer is 1. Describe the integers chosen by the other two students.
b. When all nine integers are ordered from least to greatest, the middle integer is −3. Describe the integers chosen by the other two students.

Answer a :
Order the numbers so that 1 is in the middle:
-20, -12, -8, -1, 1, 5, 10, x, x -> The other 2 numbers must be greater than 1, as the range can be 2 < x, x being the number chosen
Answer b .
Order the numbers so that -3 is in the middle:
x, -20, -12, -8, (-3), -1, 1, 5, 10 -> The other number must be less than -3, as the range is x < – 3, x being the number chosen

Lesson 8.3 Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1

Locating Fractions on a Number Line
Work with a partner. Represent the events on a number line using a fraction or a mixed number.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 1
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 2

Integers, fractions, and decimals make up the set of rational numbers. A rational number is a number that can be written as a – b, where a and b are integers and b ≠ 0.

Try It

Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 1.
2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 1
The opposite of 1 is -1

Question 2.
–\(\frac{4}{5}\)
Answer:
–\(\frac{4}{5}\)= – ( 4 ÷ 5) = – 0.8
The opposite of – 0.8 is 0.8

Question 3.
– 3.5
Answer:
The opposite of – 3.5 is 3.5

Question 4.
5.25
Answer:
The opposite of 5.25 is -5.25

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 3
Answer:
–\(\frac{4}{7}\) = -0.57
–\(\frac{1}{7}\)= -0.14
– 0.57   <  -0.14

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 4
Answer:
–\(\frac{5}{3}\) = -1.66
–\(\frac{11}{6}\) = -1.83
-1.66 > – 1.83

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 5
Answer:
– 0.5  <  0.3

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 6
Answer:
-6.5  > – 6.75

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 7
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{3}\) = -0.66
–\(\frac{5}{9}\) = -0.55
-0.66  < -0.55

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 8
Answer:
–\(\frac{9}{4}\)= – 2.25
–\(\frac{19}{8}\)= -2.375
-2.25  >  -2.375

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 9
Answer:
-1.7   >   -2.4

Question 12.
NUMBER SENSE
Which statement is not true?
A. On a number line, −2\(\frac{1}{6}\) is to the left of −2\(\frac{2}{3}\).
B. −2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) is less than −2\(\frac{1}{6}\).
C. On a number line, −2\(\frac{2}{3}\) is to the left of −2\(\frac{1}{6}\).
Answer A :
−2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = −\(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.33
−2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = −\(\frac{4}{3}\) = -1.33
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-12-a
Answer B :
−2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = − \(\frac{4}{3}\) = -1.33
−2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = −\(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.33
-1.33  <  – 0.33
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Answer C :
−2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = − \(\frac{4}{3}\) = -1.33
−2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = −\(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.33
From the above number line we notice that -1.33 is left of -0.33

Question 13.
WRITING
Explain how to determine whether a number is a rational number.
Answer:
The rational number which is represented in the \(\frac{p}{q}\)form and where q is not equal to zero.
Examples :
\(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{7}{3}\)

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Question 14.
You and your friend rappel down a cliff. Your friend descends 0.11 mile and then waits for you to catch up. You descend and your current change in elevation is −0.12 mile. Have you reached your friend? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 10
Answer:
Distance traveled by my friend = 0.11

Question 15.
The table shows the changes in the value of a stock over a period of three days. On which day does the value of the stock change the most? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 11
Answer:
Change in stock is most in day 3 that is – 0.45
Explanation:
On day 1 the stock change is -0.42
On day 2 there is no stock change that is 0
On day 3 the stock change is -0.45
From 0 to -0.45 change is more

Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 8.3

Review & Refresh

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 12
Answer:
5 < 8

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 13
Answer:
-4 > -7

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 14
Answer:
2 > -5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 15
Answer:
0 > -3

Question 5.
You pay $48 for 8 pounds of chicken. Which is an equivalent rate?
A. $44 for 4 pounds
B. $28 for 4 pounds
C. $15 for 3 pounds
D. $30 for 5 pounds
Answer:
$30 for 5 pounds
Explanation:
You pay $48 for 8 pounds of chicken.
$48 = 8 Pounds
$__ = 5 Ponds.
Do Cross Multiplication
(48 × 5)÷8 = 6  × 5 = $30

Find the whole.
Question 6.
40% of what number is 24?
Answer:
40 % = 24
100 % = ?
The answer is 60.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 24 = 40% × ?
2400 ÷ 40 = 60.
Therefore answer is 60.

Question 7.
12% of what number is 9?
Answer:
12 % = 9
100 % = ?
The answer is 75.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 9 = 12% × ?
900 ÷ 12 = 75.
Therefore answer is 75.
Question 8.
48% of what number is 84?
Answer:
48 % = 84
100 % = ?
The answer is 175.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 84 = 48% × ?
8400 ÷ 48 = 175.
Therefore answer is 175.

Question 9.
140% of what number is 98?
Answer:
140 % = 98
100 % = ?
The answer is 70.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 98 = 140% × ?
9800 ÷ 140 = 70.
Therefore answer is 70.

Multiply.
Question 10
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-11
Question 12.
3.7 × 4.854
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-12

Question 13.
2.9 × 8.8609
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-13

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

USING TOOLS Use a fraction or a mixed number to represent the time on a number line. Let 0 represent noon. (See Exploration 1, p. 357.)
Question 14.
8:30 A.M.
Answer:

Question 15.
12:15 P.M.
Answer:

Question 16.
3:12 P.M.
Answer:

GRAPHING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 17.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = 0.6
The opposite of 0.6 = – 0.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-17
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘0.6’, is ‘-0.6’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 18.
– 4.3
Answer:
The opposite of -4.3 = 4.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-18
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘4.3’, is ‘-4.3’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 19.
2.15
Answer:
The opposite of 2.15 = -2.15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-19
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 20.
– \(\frac{3}{7}\)
Answer:
–\(\frac{3}{7}\) = -0.4
The opposite of -0.4 = 0.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-20
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘0.4’, is ‘-0.4’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 21.
– 0.4
Answer:
The opposite of -0.4 = 0.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-20
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 22.
5\(\frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{16}{3}\)=5.3
The opposite of 5.3 = -5.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-22
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘5.3’, is ‘-5.3’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 23.
– 2\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
– 2\(\frac{1}{4}\)=- \(\frac{9}{4}\)=-2.25
The opposite of -2.25 = 2.25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-23
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 24.
-5 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer:
-5 \(\frac{3}{10}\) =- \(\frac{3}{2}\) = -1.5
The opposite of -1.5 = 1.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-24
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 18
Answer:
-3\(\frac{1}{3}\)  >  -3\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 19
Answer:
–\(\frac{1}{2}\) < –\(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 20
Answer:
–\(\frac{3}{4}\)   < \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 21
Answer:
-2\(\frac{2}{3}\)  <  -2\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 22
Answer:
-1\(\frac{5}{6}\)  <  -1\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 23
Answer:
-4.6  > – 4.8

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 24
Answer:
-0.12  <  -0.05

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 25
Answer:
2.41  >  -3.16

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 26
Answer:
-3.524  >  -3.542

ORDERING RATIONAL NUMBERS Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 34.
1.3, – 2, – 1.8, 0, – 1.75
Answer:
-2, -1.8, -1.75, 0, 1.3
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 35.
– 4, – 4.35, – 4.9, – 5, – 4.3
Answer:
-5, -4.9, -4.35, – 4.3 , -4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 36.
1.6, 1.2, 0, 0.8, – 0.1
Answer:
-0.1, 0, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 37.
\(-\frac{1}{2}, \frac{1}{8}, \frac{3}{4},-1,-\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
-0.5, 0.125, 0.75, -1, -0.25 above fractions in decimals points
-1, -0.5, -0.25, 0.125, 0.75
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 38.
\(-2 \frac{3}{10},-2 \frac{2}{5},-2,-2 \frac{1}{2},-3\)
Answer:
-2.3, -0.8, -2, -2.5, -3
-3, -2.5, -2.3, -2, -0.8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 39.
\(-\frac{1}{20},-\frac{5}{8}, 0,-1,-\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer:
-0.05, -0.625, 0, -1, -0.75
-0.75, -0.625, -0.05, -1, 0
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In rough water, a small sand dollar burrows v centimeter into the sand. A larger sand dollar burrows -1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) centimeters into the sand. Which sand dollar burrowed deeper?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 27
Answer:
small sand dollar burrows = – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = -0.5
Larger sand dollar burrows = -1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) =- \(\frac{5}{4}\) = -1.25cms
The Larger sand dollar burrows deeper .
Explanation:
Here don’t consider the negative signs from ground level that is 0 it is Large sand dollar that is burrowed deeper.

Question 41.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Two golfers calculate their average scores relative to par over several rounds of golf. Golfer A has an average score of −1\(\frac{1}{4}\). Golfer B has an average score of −1\(\frac{3}{8}\). Who has the lesser average score?
Answer:
Average score of Golfer A = −1\(\frac{1}{4}\)=−\(\frac{5}{4}\)=−1.25
Average score of Golfer B = −1\(\frac{3}{8}\)= −\(\frac{11}{8}\)=−1.375
The golfer B has lesser average score.
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 42.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The apparent magnitude of a star measures how bright the star appears as seen from Earth. The brighter the star, the lesser the number. Which star is the brightest?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 28
Answer:
The Deneb is the brightest star = 1.25 (positive number greatest number than all others )
Sirius < Canopus < Alpha Centauri  < Antares < Deneb
-1.46 < -0.72 < -0.27 < 0.96 < 1.25
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 43.
REPEATED REASONING
The daily water level relative to the pier is recorded for seven straight days at a tide station on the Big Marco River in Florida. On which days is the water level higher than on the previous day? On which days is it lower? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 29
Answer:
The water level on Sun =−\(\frac{3}{25}\) =−0.12
The water level on Mon=−\(\frac{7}{20}\)= −0.35
The water level on Tue= −\(\frac{27}{50}\) =−0.54
The water level on Wed=−\(\frac{13}{20}\)=−0.65
The water level on Thrus=−\(\frac{16}{25}\)=−0.64
The water level on Fri=−\(\frac{53}{100}\)=−0.53
The water level on Sat =−\(\frac{1}{3}\)=−0.33
Explanation:
On Monday The water level is compared to previous day= – 0.12 – ( – 0.35 ) = 0.23
On Tuesday The water level is compared to previous day=-0.35 – ( -0.54) = 0.19
On Wednesday The water level is compared to previous day= -0.54 – ( – 0.65) =0.11
On Thrusday The water level is compared to previous day= – 0.65 – ( – 0.64)=0.01
On Friday The water level is compared to previous day= – 0.64 – ( – 0.53)=0.11
On Saturday The water level is compared to previous day = – 0.53 – ( -0.33 )=0.20
On Monday the water level is more compared to the previous day .
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 44.
DIG DEEPER!
A guitar tuner allows you to tune a guitar string to its correct pitch. The units on a tuner are measured in cents. The units tell you how far the string tone is above or below the correct pitch.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 30
a. What number on the tuner represents a correctly tuned guitar string?
b. Which strings have a pitch below the correct pitch?
c. Which string has a pitch closest to its correct pitch?
d. Which string has a pitch farthest from its correct pitch?
e. The tuner is rated to be accurate to within 0.5 cent of the true pitch. Which string could possibly be correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer a :
The Number on the tuner represents a correctly tuned guitar string = 0
Answer b :
The string below the correct pitch = 6
Explanation:
As The string 6 is only -0.3 distance away from the correctly tuned guitar string other than strings.
Answer c :
A pitch closest to its correct pitch = 6
Explanation:
As The string 6 is only -0.3 distance away from the correctly tuned guitar string other than strings. which is the least distance between them.
Answer d :
String which is pitch farthest from its correct pitch is 1.
Explanation:
As The string 1 is only -3.6 distance away from the correctly tuned guitar string other than strings. which is the Farthest distance between them.
Answer e :
No string tuner is rated to be accurate to within 0.5 cent of the true pitch
Explanation:
Correct tuner is at 0
0.5 cent of the true pitch = 0
Which is not possible

Question 45.
NUMBER SENSE
What integer values of x make the statement − \(\frac{3}{x}\) < − \(\frac{x}{3}\) true?
Answer:
− \(\frac{3}{x}\) < − \(\frac{x}{3}\)
X  should be more than 3 .
if x is in the numerator in the fraction form it resultant will be more when divided by 3
If x is in the denominator in the fraction form it resultant will be less when 3 is divided by x
Explanation:
For example: take x = 4
− \(\frac{3}{4}\) =−0.75
− \(\frac{4}{3}\) = −1.33
−0.75 < −1.33

Lesson 8.4 Absolute Value

EXPLORATION 1
Comparing Positions of Objects
Work with a partner. The diagram shows the positions of several objects.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 1
a. What integer represents sea level? How can you compare the positions of objects relative to sea level?
Answer:
An integer represents sea level = 0
You can compare the positions of objects relative to sea levels by number of meters above and below as given in the above figure.

b. Which pairs of objects are the same distance from sea level? How do you know?
Answer:
Whale and sea plane
Explanation:
Whale and sea plane are at -1000 and 1000 meters below and above respectively from sea level.
Both are at equidistant from the sea level.

c. The vesselsKaiko, Alvin, and Jason Jr.move to be the same distance from sea level as the Boeing 747. About how many meters did each vessel travel?
Answer:
Distance of Boeing 747 from sea level = 5000 metres.
Distance of  Kaiko below sea level = – 7000 metres
Distance of  Alvin below sea level = -4500 metres
Distance of  Janson Jr.below sea level = 4000 metres
Explanation:
To travel same distance as Boeing 747 the Kaiko should travel + 2000 metres towards the sea level so that it comes at 5000 metres below sea level.
To travel same distance as Boeing 747 the Alvin should travel – 500 metres below the sea level so that it comes at 5000 metres below sea level.
To travel same distance as Boeing 747 the Janson Jr should travel -1000 metres below the sea level so that it comes at 5000 metres below sealevel.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 2

Try It

Find the absolute value.
Question 1.
|8|
Answer:
|8| = 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 2.
|-6|
Answer:
|-6| = 6
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 3.
|0|
Answer:
|0| = 0
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 4.
\(\left| \frac { 1 }{ 4 } \right| \)
Answer:
\(\left| \frac { 1 }{ 4 } \right| \) = 0.25
|0.25| = 0.25
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 5.
\(\left|-7 \frac{1}{3}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|-7 \frac{1}{3}\right|\) = – 7.33
|-7.33|=7.33
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 6.
|- 12.9|
Answer:
|- 12.9| = 12.9
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 3
Answer:
|-4|=4
4 > -2
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 4
Answer:
|5| = 5
-5 < 5
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 5
Answer:
|9|=9
9 < 10
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 6
Answer:
|-3.9| = 3.9
3.9 = 3.9
Explanation:
Both the integers are same so equal.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
COMPARING VALUES Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 7
Answer:
|-6| = 6
6 > 3
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 8
Answer:
|-3.5| = 3.5
3.5 < 4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 9
Answer:
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)=2.5
-4\(\frac{3}{4}\)=-\(\frac{19}{4}\) = – 4.75
|-4.75|= 4.75
2.5 > 4.75
Explanation:
Convert the fraction form into decimals form . later write absolute values and compare the values. The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 14.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 10
Answer:
What is the absolute value of – 3.
What integer is 3 units to the left of 0
Explanation:
Rest of the two statements describe the distance between -3 to 0.

Question 15.
Describe the position of an object in your classroom using a negative rational number. Then describe the position of a second object using a positive rational number. Which number has a greater absolute value? What does this mean?
Answer:
The position of my pen is -6 cms from my bench.
The position of my books is +3 cms from my bench.
The absolute value of -6 = 6
The absolute value of 3 = 3
6 > 3
Explanation:
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x . All absolute values are positive.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the elevations of several checkpoints along a hiking trail.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 11
a. Which checkpoint is farthest from sea level?
b. Which checkpoint is closest to sea level?
c. Between which checkpoints do you reach sea level? Explain your reasoning.
Answer a :
The Farthest checkpoint from sea level = 5
Explanation:
It is -142 in elevation feet
Answer b :
The closest checkpoint from sea level = 4
Explanation:
It is 12 in elevation feet
Answer c :
No we cant .
Explanation:
Sea level = 0
We need to get 0 between two check points then the check points reach sea level.
Elevation feet between 1 and 2 check points = 110 – 38 = 72
Elevation feet between 2 and 3 check points = 38 – (-24) = 72
Elevation feet between 3 and 4 check points = – 24 -12 = -36
Elevation feet between 4 and 5 check points =12 – (-142) = 154

Absolute Value Homework & Practice 8.4

Review & Refresh

Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 1.
2.4, – 3.2, – 1.8, 0.6, – 1.3
Answer:
-3.2 < -1.8 < -1.3<0.6<2.4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater. With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 2.
– 0.3, 0.7, – 1.5, 0, 2.2
Answer:
-1.5< -0.3<0<0.7<2.2
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{2}{3}, 2, \frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
0.75, 0.5, 0.6, 2,0.25
All the above fractions are represented in decimals now compare
0.25<0.5<0.6<0.75<2
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{5}, 1 \frac{2}{5},-2 \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{5},-2 \frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
0.2, 1.4, -2.75, 0.8, -2.5
All the above fractions are represented in decimals now compare
-2.75<-2.5<0.2<0.8<1.4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 12
Answer:
Slope = 0
Y-intercept : (0 , 9/5)
Plot each graph on the same coordinate system.
9/5, 18/10 , 27/15.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Absolute-Value-Homework-Practice-8.4-Question-5
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 13
Answer:
Slope = 0
Y-intercept : (0 , 7/3)
Plot each graph on the same coordinate system.
7/3 , 14/6, 21/9 .

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Absolute-Value-Homework-Practice-8.4-Question-6

Evaluate the expression when a = 2, b = 5, and c = 8.
Question 7.
5 + c
Answer:
5 + c =
Take c = 8
5 + 8 = 13

Question 8.
b – 4
Answer:
take b=5
5 – 4 = 1

Question 9.
\(\frac{c}{a}\)
Answer:
take a =2 and c= 8
\(\frac{8}{2}\) = 4

Question 10.
b * c
Answer:
take b = 5 and c = 8
5 × 8 = 40

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

COMPARING POSITIONS OF OBJECTS Tell which object is farther from sea level. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 363.)

Question 11.
Scuba diver: −15 m
Dolphin: −22 m
Answer:
The Dolphin = – 22m is farther from sea level
Explanation:
Distance cant be negative so just consider the value and compare the distance which is greater.
15 < 22

Question 12.
Seagull: 12 m
School of fish: −4 m
Answer:
Seagull = 12m is farther from sea level
Explanation:
Distance cant be negative so just consider the value and compare the distance which is greater.
12 > 4

Question 13.
Shark:−40 m
Flag on a ship: 32 m
Answer:
Explanation:
Shark = – 40 m
Distance cant be negative so just consider the value and compare the distance which is greater.
40 > 32

FINDING ABSOLUTE VALUE Find the absolute value.
Question 14.
|- 2|
Answer:
|- 2| = 2
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 15.
|23|
Answer:
|23|=23
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 16.
|11|
Answer:
|11|=11
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 17.
|- 68|
Answer:
|-68|=68
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 18.
|- 8.35|
Answer:
|-8.35|=8.35
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 19.
\(\left|\frac{1}{6}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|\frac{1}{6}\right|\) = |0.16|=0.16
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 20.
|14.06|
Answer:
|14.06|=14.06
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 21.
\(\left|-\frac{5}{8}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|-\frac{5}{8}\right|\)= |-0.625| = 0.625
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 22.
\(\left|-3 \frac{2}{5}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|-3 \frac{2}{5}\right|\) = |-3.4|= 3.4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 23.
|1.026|
Answer:
|1.026|=1.026
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 24.
\(\left|1 \frac{1}{3}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|1 \frac{1}{3}\right|\)= \(\left| \frac{4}{3}\right|\) =|1.3| = 1.3
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 25.
|- 6.308|
Answer:
|-6.308|=6.308
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 26.
REASONING
Write two integers that have an absolute value of 10.
Answer:
– 10 and 10
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 27.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the absolute value of 14. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 14
Answer:
Wrong
All absolute values are positive.
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

COMPARING VALUES Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 15
Answer:
|-8| = 8
6 < 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 16
Answer:
|-3|= 3
3 = 3
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 17
Answer:
|-4.3| = 4.3
4.3 > 3.4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 18
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{9}\)= -0.22
\(\frac{1}{5}\)= 0.2
|-0.22|=0.22
0.22>0.2
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 19
Answer:
|-0.05|= 0.05
0.05 > 0
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 20
Answer:
|-5.5|= 5.5
|-3.1| = 3.1
5.5 > 3.1
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 21
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = 0.75
–\(\frac{2}{5}\)= – 0.4
|-0.4| = 0.4
0.75 > 0.4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 22
Answer:
|-6.8|=6.8
|8.25|=8.25
6.8 < 8.25
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 23
Answer:
|12| = 12
– 12 < 12
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the change in the balance of a bank account after each of three transactions. Which transaction has the greatest effect on the balance of the account? Which transaction has the least effect on the balance of the account?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 24
Answer:
Transaction has the greatest effect on the balance of the account = 3
Transaction which has the least effect on the balance of the account = 1

ORDERING VALUES Order the values from least to greatest.
Question 38.
5, 0, |- 1|, |4| , – 2
Answer:
|- 1| = 1
|4| = 4
-2<0<1<4<5
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 39.
|- 3|, |5| , – 3, – 4, |- 4|
Answer:
|- 3| = 3
|5| = 5
|- 4|=4
-4< -3< 3 < 4 < 5
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 40.
10, |- 6|, 9, |3|, -11, 0
Answer:
|- 6| = 6
|3| = 3
-11<0<3<6<9<10
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 41.
– 18, |30|, – 19, |- 22|, – 20, |- 18|
Answer:
|30| = 30
|- 22| = 22
|- 18|=18
-20 < -19< – 18 <18<22<30
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

SIMPLIFYING EXPRESSIONS Simplify the expression.
Question 42.
– |2|
Answer:
– |2| = – 2
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 43.
– |6|
Answer:
-|6| = -6
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive..

Question 44.
– |- 1|
Answer:
|1| = 1
-1
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 45.
REASONING
The coldest possible temperature is called absolute zero. It is represented by 0 K on the Kelvin temperature scale.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 25
a. Which temperature is closer to 0 K: 32°F or − 50°C?
Answer:
As per the given we notice is 32°F

b. What do absolute values and temperatures on the Kelvin scale have in common?
Answer:
All the temperatures and absolute values are positive in kelvin scale.

CRITICAL THINKING
Tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain.
Question 46.
The absolute value of a number is greater than the number.
Answer:
False
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 47.
The absolute value of a negative number is positive.
Answer:
True
Explanation:
All absolute values are positive.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.

Question 48.
The absolute value of a positive number is its opposite.
Answer:
False
Explanation:
Opposite value of a positive number is negative. but all absolute values are positive so the given statement is wrong .

MATCHING Match the account balance with the debt that it represents. Explain your reasoning.
Question 49.
account balance = −$25
Answer: B. debt = $25

Question 50.
account balance < −$25
Answer: C. debt < $25

Question 51.
account balance > −$25
Answer: A. debt > $25

A. debt > $25
B. debt = $25
C. debt < $25

Question 52.
PATTERNS
A palindrome is a word or sentence that reads the same forward as it does backward.
a. Graph and label the following points on a number line: A =− 2, C =− 1, E = 0, R =− 3. Then, using the same letters as the original points, graph and label the absolute value of each point on the same number line.
b. What word do the letters spell? Is this a palindrome?
c. Assign letters to points on a number line to make up your own palindrome using the process in part(a).
Answer a :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Absolute-Value-Homework-&-Practice-8.4-Question-52-a
Answer b :
Letters spell – RACE and ECAR  Yes, it is a palindrome .

Answer c:
It is shown in the above diagram .

Question 53.
CRITICAL THINKING
Find values of x and y so that |x| < |y| and x > y.
Answer:

Lesson 8.5 The Coordinate Plane

Extending the Coordinate Plane
Work with a partner. Previously, you plotted points with positive coordinates in a coordinate plane like the one shown at the right.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 1
a. You can also plot points in which one or both of the coordinates are negative numbers. Create ordered pairs with different combinations of positive and negative coordinates, as described below. Then plot the ordered pairs and explain how you extended the coordinate plane shown.
(positive, positive) (negative, positive)
(negative, negative) (positive, negative)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1-a
b. How many regions of the coordinate plane are created by the x-axis and y-axis? What do the points in each of these regions have in common?
Answer:
The four regions are covered with one point .
The numbers on a coordinate grid are used to locate points. Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).
c. The photo shows the reflection, or mirror image, of a mountain in a lake. When you fold the photo on its axis, the mountain and its reflection align.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 2
c. Actual A mountainoAxisAMath PracticeReflectionReof mountain Check ProgressHow can you check your progress to make sure you are reflecting your point correctly?
Plot a point and its reflection in one of the axes. Explain your reasoning. What do you notice about the coordinates of the points?
Answer:
As per the above image we notice that the axis is equal to the axis of the graph . the graph is divided into 4 Quadrants as shown in below graph.
A coordinate plane is a two-dimensional plane formed by the intersection of a vertical line called y-axis and a horizontal line called x-axis. These are perpendicular lines that intersect each other at zero, and this point is called the origin.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1-c
As the reflection is formed in fourth quadrant an example of reflection is marked in the above graph .

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 3

Try It

Use the graph in Example 1 to write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1-a
As shown in example one the points are mentioned below
Question 1.
Point P
Answer:
(1,2)
The point P is marked in the Quadrant I as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 2.
Point Q
Answer:
(-2,1)
The point Q is marked in the Quadrant II as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question3.
Point R
Answer:
(-2,2)
The point R is marked in the Quadrant III as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 4.
Point S
Answer:
(2,-3)
The point S is marked in the Quadrant IV as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 5.
(3, -1)
Answer:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph. Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-5
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 6.
(-5, 0)
Answer:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-6
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 7.
(- 2.5, -1)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-7
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 8.
(-1\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
-1\(\frac{1}{2}\) = –\(\frac{3}{2}\) = -1.5
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.5
(-1.5, 0.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-8
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Reflect the point in (a) the x-axis and (b) the y-axis.
Question 9.
(3, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-9

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 10.
(4, 0)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-10

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 11.
(- 5, 1.5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-11

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Reflect the point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis.
Question 12.
(3, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-12Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 13.
(- 1, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-13
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 14.
(- 4, – 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-14
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 15.
(5, – 2.5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-15

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
WRITING ORDERED PAIRS Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point shown in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 4
Question 16.
Point A
Answer:
X coordinate is 2
Y coordinate is 1
(2,1)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 17.
Point B
Answer:
X coordinate is 0
Y coordinate is -3
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 18.
Point C
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is -3
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

PLOTTING ORDERED PAIRS Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 19.
J(2, 5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-19
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 2 units right and 5 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 20.
K (4, – 6)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-20
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units right and 6 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant IV

Question 21.
L (- 3, – 2\(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
– 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)=- \(\frac{5}{2}\))=-2.5
L (-3, -2.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-21
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 3 units left and 6 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant III

REFLECTING POINTS
Reflect the point in the given axis or axes.
Question 22.
(9, 8); x-axis
Answer:
Plot (9,8) and (9,-8)
Explanation:
To reflect (9,8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 9,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 8 is -8
So the reflection of (9,8)in the x-axis is (9,-8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-22

Question 23.
(−7, 3); y-axis
Answer:
Plot (-7,3) and (7,3)
Explanation:
To reflect (-7,3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -7 is 7
So the reflection of (-7,3)in the x-axis is (7,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-23

Question 24.
(6, −4); x-axis then y-axis
Answer:
Plot (6,-4), (6,4) and (-6,4)
Explanation:
To reflect (6,-4) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -4 is 4
To reflect (6,4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6 is -6
So the reflection of (6,-4)in the x-axis is (6,4)
So then reflection of (6,4)in the y-axis is (-6,4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-24

Question 25.
(2.5, −4); y-axis then x-axis
Answer:
Plot (2.5, -4) , (-2.5,-4)  and (-2.5,4)
Explanation:
To reflect (2.5,-4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2.5 is -2.5
To reflect (-2.5,-4) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -2.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -4 is 4
So the reflection of (2.5,-4)in the y-axis is (-2.5,-4)
So then reflection of (-2.5,-4)in the x-axis is (-2.5,4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-25

Question 26.
DIG DEEPER
At a park, the welcome center is located at (0, 0), the theater is located at(2, 4), and the restrooms are located at(−4.5, 6). The snack bar is exactly halfway between the welcome center and the theater. Graph each location in a coordinate plane.
Answer:
Welcome Centre is located at (0,0)
Theater is located at (2, 4)
Restrooms are located at (−4.5, 6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-26
Explanation:
Halfway between the welcome center and the theater is known by joining both W and T points. we notice now that (2,2) is exactly half way between them so the Snack bar is at (2,2)

Question 27.
The table shows the elevations of a submarine each hour from noon to 5:00 P.M. Display the data in a line graph. Then describe the change in elevation over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 5
Answer:
The ordered pairs are (0,-4.5), (1,-3), (2,-2.5), (3,-2), (4,-3.5) and (5,-4)
Plot the ordered pairs and then connect the points with line segments
The elevations of a submarine increases up to 3:00 P.M then later the elevations decreases up to 5:00 P.M
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-27

The Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.5

Review & Refresh

Find the absolute value.
Question 1.
|35|
Answer:
|35| = 35
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Quest ion 2.
|- 18|
Answer:
|- 18| = 18
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 3.
|4.7|
Answer:
|4.7| = 4.7
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 4.
|- 6\(\frac{7}{12}\)|
Answer:
|- 6\(\frac{7}{12}\)|= |- \(\frac{79}{12}\)|= |-6.58| =6.58
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 5.
What is the ratio of ducks to swans?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 6
A. 4 : 9
B. 4 : 5
C. 5 : 4
D. 5 : 9
Answer:
Total Number of Ducks = 5
Total Number of Swans = 4
Ratio = Total Number of Ducks ÷ Total Number of Swans = 5 ÷ 4 =  \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Graph the equation.
Question 6.
y = 8x
Answer:

Use the slope-intercept form to find the slope and y-intercept.
Slope

y-intercept

 

Explanation:
x =
0
y =  0
and
x =
1
y= 8
Any line can be graphed using two points. Select two  values, and plug them into the equation to find the corresponding  values.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-6

Question 7.
y = 3x + 7
Answer:

Use the slope-intercept form to find the slope and y-intercept.
Slope: 3
y-intercept: ( 0 , 7)
x = -7/3
y =  0
and
x = 0

y= 7
Any line can be graphed using two points. Select two  values, and plug them into the equation to find the corresponding  values.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-7

Question 8.
y = \(\frac{2}{5}\)x + 2
Answer:
y = \(\frac{2}{5}\)x + 2
y = 0.4x + 2

Use the slope-intercept form to find the slope and y-intercept.
Slope: 0.4
y-intercept: ( 0 , 2)
x = -5
y =  0
and
x = 0

y= 2
Any line can be graphed using two points. Select two  values, and plug them into the equation to find the corresponding  values.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-8

Tell which property the statement illustrates.
Question 9.
(2 . P) . 3 = 2 . (p . 3)
Answer:
The Associative Property of Multiplication states that numbers in a multiplication expression can be regrouped using parentheses
Associative Property of Multiplication
For any real numbers ab, and c, (a • b) • c = a • (b • c).

Question 10.
m + 0 = m
Answer:
The addition property of 0 states that for any number being added to zero, the sum is the same number.Zero is called the additive identity.

Question 11.
w . 1 = w
Answer:
The multiplication property of 1 states that for any number multiplied by one, that answer is that same number and one is called the multiplicative identity.

Question 12.
15 + k = k + 15
Answer:
Commutative property of addition: Changing the order of addends does not change the sum.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

DESCRIBING REFLECTIONS Describe the reflection shown in the image. (See Exploration 1, p. 369.)
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 7
Answer:
The image shows the reflection image or mirror image when folded on its y-axis . both the real image and reflection image gets aligned.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 8
Answer:
The image shows the reflection image or mirror image of a arrow and shoes . when you fold the photo on its y-axis the arrow and shoes its reflection align.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 9
Answer:
The image shows the reflection or mirror image of a den in water. when you fold the photo on its x-axis, the den in the water and its reflection align.

WRITING ORDERED PAIRS Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 10
Question 16.
Point A
Answer:
X coordinate is 3
Y coordinate is 1
(3,1)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 17.
Point B
Answer:
X coordinate is -3
Y coordinate is -2
(-3,-2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 18.
Point C
Answer:
X coordinate is -2
Y coordinate is 4
(-2,4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 19.
Point D
Answer:
X coordinate is 1
Y coordinate is 2
(1,2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 20.
Point E
Answer:
X coordinate is 2
Y coordinate is -2
(2,-2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 21.
Point F
Answer:
X coordinate is 0
Y coordinate is -4
(0,-4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 22.
Point G
Answer:
X coordinate is -4
Y coordinate is 2
(-4,2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 23.
Point H
Answer:
X coordinate is -4
Y coordinate is -4
(-4,-4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 24.
Point I
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is 0
(4,0)
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 25.
Point J
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is -4
(4,-4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

PLOTTING ORDERED PAIRS Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 26.
K (4, 3)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-&-Practice-8.5-Question-26
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units Right and 3 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 27.
L (1, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-&-Practice-8.5-Question-27
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 1 units Right and 2 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 28.
M (0, 6)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-28
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 6 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 29.
N (3, – 7)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-29
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 3 units Right and 7 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant IV

Question 30.
P (- 5, – 9)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-30
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 5 units left and 9 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant III

Question 31.
R (8, 0)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-31
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 8 units Right and y is 0 remains at the same point. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 32.
S (- 1.5, 0)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-32
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 1.5 units left and y is 0 remains at the same point. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant II

Question 33.
T (3.5, 1.5)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-33
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 3.5 units Right and 1.5 units up Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 34.
U (2, – 4)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-34
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 2 units left and 4 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant IV

Question 35.
V (- 4, 1)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-35
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units left and 1 units up . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant II

Question 36.
W (2\(\frac{1}{2}\), 0)
Answer:
2\(\frac{1}{2}\)=\(\frac{5}{2}\)=2.5
W(2.5,0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-37
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 2.5 units Right and y is 0 so it remains on the same point . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 37.
Z (- 4, – 5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-37
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units left and 5 units down . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant III

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend describes how to plot the point. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 11
Answer:
No , he is wrong.
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units Right and 5 units up . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 12
Answer:
Yes he is right
The Point is in Quadrant II

MODELING REAL LIFE InExercises 40 – 44, use the map of the zoo.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 13
Question 40.
Which exhibit is located at (2, 1)?
Answer:
Reptiles

Question 41.
Name an attraction on the positive y-axis.
Answer:
Flamingo cafe

Question 42.
Is parking available in Quadrant II? If not, name a quadrant in which you can park.
Answer:
No, You can Park in Quadrant III and Quadrant IV

Question 43.
Write two different ordered pairs that represent the location of the Rain Forest.
Answer:
(5,-2) and (5,-1)

Question 44.
Which exhibit is closest to (−8, −3)?
Answer:
Safari Africa

REFLECTING POINTS IN ONE AXIS
Reflect the point in (a) the x-axis and (b) the y-axis.
Question 45.
(3, 2)
Answer:
Plot (3, 2) , (3,-2)  and (-3.-2)
Explanation:
To reflect (3,2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 2 is -2
To reflect (3,2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 3 is -3
So then reflection of (3,2)in the x-axis is (3,-2)
So the reflection of (3,2)in the y-axis is (-3,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-45

Question 46.
(- 4, 4)
Answer:
Plot (-4, 4) , (-4,-4)  and (4,4)
Explanation:
To reflect (-4,4) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 4 is -4
To reflect (-4,4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -4 is 4
So then reflection of (-4,4)in the x-axis is (-4,-4)
So the reflection of (-4,-4)in the y-axis is (4,4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-46

Question 47.
(- 5, – 6)
Answer:
Plot (-5, -6) , (-5,6)  and (5,-6)
Explanation:
To reflect (-5,-6) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -6 is 6
To reflect (-5,-6) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -6,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5 is 5
So then reflection of (-5,-6)in the x-axis is (-5,6)
So the reflection of (-5,-6)in the y-axis is (5,-6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-47

Question 48.
(4, – 7)
Answer:
Plot (4, -7) , (4,7)  and (-4,-7)
Explanation:
To reflect (4,-7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -7 is 7
To reflect (4,-7) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 4 is -4
So then reflection of (4,-7)in the x-axis is (4,7)
So the reflection of (4,-7)in the y-axis is (-4,-7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-48

Question 49.
(- 9, 3)
Answer:
Plot (-9, 3) , (-9,-3)  and (9,3)
Explanation:
To reflect (-9,3) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -9,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 3 is -3
To reflect (-9,3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -9 is 9
So then reflection of (-9,3)in the x-axis is (-9,-3)
So the reflection of (-9,3)in the y-axis is (9,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-49

Question 50.
(6, – 2)
Answer:
Plot (6, -2) , (6,2)  and (-6,-2)
Explanation:
To reflect (6, -2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -2 is 2
To reflect (6, -2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6 is -6
So then reflection of (6, -2) in the x-axis is (6,2)
So the reflection of (6, -2) in the y-axis is (-6,-2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-50

Question 51.
(0, – 1)
Answer:
Plot (0, – 1) , (0,1)  and (0,-1)
Explanation:
To reflect (0, – 1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -1 is 1
To reflect (0, – 1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -1 is 1
So then reflection of (0, – 1) in the x-axis is (0,1)
So the reflection of ((0, – 1) in the y-axis is (0,-1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-51

Question 52.
(- 8, 0)
Answer:
Plot (-8, 0) , (-8,0)  and (8,0)
Explanation:
To reflect (-8, 0)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -8,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0 is 0
To reflect (-8, 0) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -8 is 8
So then reflection of (-8, 0) in the x-axis is (-8,0)
So the reflection of (-8, 0) in the y-axis is (8,0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-52

Question 53.
(- 3.5, 2)
Answer:
Plot (-3.5, 2) , (-3.5,-2)  and (3.5,2)
Explanation:
To reflect (-3.5, 2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -3.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 2 is -2
To reflect (-3.5, 2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -3.5 is 3.5
So then reflection of (-3.5, 2) in the x-axis is (-3.5,-2)
So the reflection of (-3.5, 2) in the y-axis is (3.5,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-53

Question 54.
(2.5, 4.5)
Answer:
Plot (2.5, 4.5) , (2.5,-4.5)  and (-2.5,4.5)
Explanation:
To reflect (2.5, 4.5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 2.5 ,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 4.5 is -4.5
To reflect (2.5, 4.5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4.5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2.5 is -2.5
So then reflection of (2.5, 4.5) in the x-axis is (2.5,-4.5)
So the reflection of (2.5, 4.5) in the y-axis is (-2.5,4.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-54

Question 55.
(-5 \(\frac{1}{2}\), 3)
Answer:
-5 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = – \(\frac{11}{2}\) = -5.5
(-5.5, 3 )
Plot (-5.5, 3 ) , (-5.5,-3)  and (5.5,3)
Explanation:
To reflect (-5.5, 3 ) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 3 is -3
To reflect (-5.5, 3 ) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5.5 is 5.5
So then reflection of (-5.5, 3 ) in the x-axis is (-5.5,-3)
So the reflection of (-5.5, 3 ) in the y-axis is (5.5,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-55

Question 56.
(\(\frac{1}{4}\), \(-\frac{7}{8}\))
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25
\(-\frac{7}{8}\) = -0.8
(0.25,-0.8)
Plot (0.25,-0.8) , (0.25,0.8)  and (-0.25,-0.8)
Explanation:
To reflect (0.25,-0.8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0.25,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -0.8 is 0.8
To reflect (0.25,-0.8)in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -0.8 ,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 0.25 is -0.25
So then reflection of (0.25,-0.8) in the x-axis is (0.25,0.8)
So the reflection of (0.25,-0.8) in the y-axis is (-0.25,-0.8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-55

REFLECTING POINTS IN BOTH AXES
Reflect the point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis.
Question 57.
(4, 5)
Answer:
Plot (4, 5) , (4,-5)  and (-4,-5)
Explanation:
To reflect(4, 5)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 5 is -5
To reflect (4, -5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 4 is -4
So then reflection of (4, 5) in the x-axis is (4,-5)
So the reflection of (4,-5) in the y-axis is (-4,-5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-57

Question 58.
(- 1, 7)
Answer:
Plot (-1, 7) , (-1,-7)  and (1,-7)
Explanation:
To reflect (-1, 7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -1,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 7 is -7
To reflect (-1,-7)  in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -1 is 1
So then reflection of (-1, 7) in the x-axis is (-1,-7)
So the reflection of (-1,-7)  in the y-axis is (1,-7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-58

Question 59.
(- 2, – 2)
Answer:
Plot (- 2, – 2) , (-2,2)  and (2,2)
Explanation:
To reflect(- 2, – 2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -2 is 2
To reflect (-2,2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -2 is 2
So then reflection of (- 2, – 2) in the x-axis is (-2,2)
So the reflection of (-2,2) in the y-axis is (2,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-59

Question 60.
(6, – 7)
Answer:
Plot (6, – 7) , (6,7)  and (-6,7)
Explanation:
To reflect (6, – 7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate  -7 is 7
To reflect (6,7)  in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6 is -6
So then reflection of (6, – 7) in the x-axis is (6,7)
So the reflection of (6,7)  in the y-axis is (-6,7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-60

Question 61.
(- 8, – 8)
Answer:
Plot (- 8, – 8) , (-8,8)  and (8,8)
Explanation:
To reflect (- 8, – 8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -8,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -8 is 8
To reflect (-8,8) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 8,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 8 is -8
So then reflection of (- 8, – 8) in the x-axis is (-8,8)
So the reflection of (-8,8) in the y-axis is (8,8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-61

Question 62.
(5, 9)
Answer:
Plot (5, 9) , (5,-9)  and (-5,-9)
Explanation:
To reflect (5, 9) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 9 is -9
To reflect (5,-9) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -9,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 5 is -5
So then reflection of (5, 9) in the x-axis is (5,-9)
So the reflection of (5,-9) in the y-axis is (-5,-9)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-62

Question 63.
(0, – 2)
Answer:
Plot (0, – 2) , (0,2)  and (0,2)
Explanation:
To reflect (0, – 2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate  -2 is 2
To reflect (0,2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2 is -2
So then reflection of (0, – 2)in the x-axis is (0,2)
So the reflection of (0,2) in the y-axis is (0,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-63

Question 64.
(- 9, 0)
Answer:
Plot (-9, 0) , (-9,0)  and (9,0)
Explanation:
To reflect (-9, 0) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -9,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0 is 0
To reflect (9,0) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 9 is -9
So then reflection of (-9, 0)in the x-axis is (-9,0)
So the reflection of (-9,0)  in the y-axis is (9,0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-64

Question 65.
(6.5, – 10.5)
Answer:
Plot (6.5, -10.5) , (6.5,10.5)  and (-6.5,10.5)
Explanation:
To reflect (6.5, -10.5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -10.5 is 10.5
To reflect (6.5,10.5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate,10.5, the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6.5 is -6.5
So then reflection of (6.5, -10.5) in the x-axis is (6.5,10.5)
So the reflection of (6.5,10.5) in the y-axis is (-6.5,10.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-65

Question 66.
(- 0.4, 0.7)
Answer:
Plot (- 0.4, 0.7) , (-0.4,-0.7)  and (0.4,-0.7)
Explanation:
To reflect (- 0.4, 0.7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -0.4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0.7 is -0.7
To reflect (-0.4,-0.7) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -0.7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -0.4 is 0.4
So then reflection of(- 0.4, 0.7) in the x-axis is (-0.4,-0.7)
So the reflection of (-0.4,-0.7) in the y-axis is (0.4,-0.7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-66

Question 67.
(\(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\))
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)=0.3
\(\frac{2}{3}\)=0.6
Plot (0.3,0.6), (0.3,-0.6) and (-0.3,-0.6)
Explanation:
To reflect (0.3,0.6) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0.3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0.6 is -0.6
To reflect (0.3,-0.6) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -0.6,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 0.3 is -0.3
So then reflection of (0.3,0.6) in the x-axis is (0.3,-0.6)
So the reflection of (0.3,-0.6) in the y-axis is (-0.3,-0.6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-67

Question 68.
(- 1\(\frac{2}{5}\), – 1\(\frac{4}{5}\))
Answer:
– 1\(\frac{2}{5}\) = –\(\frac{7}{5}\) = -1.4
– 1\(\frac{4}{5}\) = –\(\frac{9}{5}\) =-1.8
(-1.4,-1.8)
Plot (-1.4,-1.8) , (-1.4,1.8)  and (1.4,-1.8)
Explanation:
To reflect (-1.4,-1.8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -1.4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -1.8 is 1.8
To reflect (-1.4,1.8)  in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 1.8,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate  -1.4 is 1.4
So then reflection of (-1.4,-1.8) in the x-axis is (-1.4,1.8)
So the reflection of (-1.4,1.8)  in the y-axis is (1.4,-1.8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-68

Question 69.
STRUCTURE
Reflect a point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis. Then reflect the original point in the y-axis followed by the x-axis. Do you get the same results? Explain.
Answer:

REASONING Describe the possible location(s) of the point (x, y).
Question 70.
x > 0, y > 0
Answer:
For point (x,y) if x>0 then you would be going in the positive direction on the x axis. This eliminates quadrants II and III because the x axis is negative there. Now you’re down to either quadrant I or quadrant IV. Given that y>0, the y values on the y axis are more than 0 so they are becoming positive. This means that (x, y) must be in quadrant I.

Question 71.
x < 0, y < 0
Answer:
For Point (x,y) if x < 0 then you would be going in negative direction on the x axis , This elimates quadrants I and IV because the axis is positive there.Now you’re down to either Quadrant II or Quadrant III. Given that  y< 0,the values on the y axis are less than 0 so they are becoming negative. This means that (x,y) must be in Quadrant III.

Question 72. x > 0, y < 0
Answer:
For point (x,y) if x>0 then you would be going in the positive direction on the x axis. This eliminates quadrants II and III because the x axis is negative there. Now you’re down to either quadrant I or quadrant IV. Given that y<0, the y values on the y axis are less than 0 so they are becoming negative. This means that (x, y) must be in quadrant IV

Question 73. x > 0
Answer:
For point (x,y) if x>0 then you would be going in the positive direction on the x axis. This eliminates quadrants II and III because the x axis is negative there. Now you’re down to either quadrant I or quadrant IV.

Question 74.
y < 0
Answer:
Given that y<0, the y values on the y axis are less than 0 so they are becoming negative. It can be in Quadrant III and Quadrant IV.

Question 75.
x = 0, y = 0
Answer:
Either x or y or both are on the x or y axis

CRITICAL THINKING
Tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.
Question 76.
The x-coordinate of a point on the x-axis is zero.
Answer:
True
Explanation:
Since every point on the x – axis has no distance (zero distance) from the x – axis, therefore, the y – coordinate of every point lying on the x – axis is always zero. Thus, the coordinates of any point on the x – axis are of the form (x, 0), where x is the distance of the point from the y – axis

Question 77.
The y-coordinates of points in Quadrant III are positive.
Answer:
No. Never True
Explanation:
In the III Quadrant all X- coordinates are negative.
In the III Quadrant all Y- coordinates are negative.

Question 78.
The x-coordinate of a point in Quadrant II has the same sign as the y-coordinate of a point in Quadrant IV.
Answer:
True.
Explanation:
In Quadrant II x-coordinate of a point is negative
In Quadrant IV y-coordinate of a point  is negative.
Both the signs are negative and same.

Question 79.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the number of people who participate in a blood drive each year for 9 years. Display the data in a line graph. Then describe the change in the number of participants over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 14
Answer:
Write the ordered pair
(1,140)
(2,136)
(3,134)
(4,132)
(5,131)
(6,135)
(7,136)
(8,142)
(9,145)
Plot and label the ordered pairs,then connect the ordered pairs with line segments.
The number of participants are decreased from year 1 to year 5. then later there is a increase in the participants from year 6 to year 9.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-79

Question 80.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the amount of carbon dioxide emissions of a country, relative to an environmental standard, each year for 7 years. Display the data in a line graph. Then describe the change in carbon dioxide emissions over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 15
Answer:

Question 81.
PATTERNS
The table shows the total miles run through each of 18 weeks for a marathon training program.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 16
a. Create a table for the distance run during each week of training.
b. Display the data from part(a) in a line graph.
c. Explain the pattern shown in the graph. (a, b)
Answer:

Question 82.
LOGIC
Two points are plotted in the coordinate plane. Plot each of the following ordered pairs in the same coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 17
a. P (a, – b)
b. Q (- a, b)
c. R (c, – d)
d. S (- c, – d)
e. T (c, – a)
f. U (- d, – b)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-82
Explanation:
From the above Graph we know a , b c and d numbers
a = -3 ; b =2 ; c=-1 and d = -2
then now plot the given points.
a. P (a, – b) = (-3, -2)
b. Q (- a, b) = (3 , 2)
c. R (c, – d) = ( -1, 2)
d. S (- c, – d) = ( 1, 2)
e. T (c, – a) =( -1, 3)
f. U (- d, – b) = (2 , -2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-82-a

Lesson 8.6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane

EXPLORATION 1

Drawing Polygons in the Coordinate Plane
Work with a partner.
a. Write three ordered pairs that meet the following requirements. Then plot the ordered pairs in a coordinate plane, like the one shown.
• Two of the ordered pairs have the same x-coordinates.
• Two of the ordered pairs have the same y-coordinates.
• Two of the points are in the same quadrant. The other point is in a different quadrant.
Answer:
The ordered pairs which follow above conditions are these points (1,2)  (1,3)(-1,2)

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 1
b. The points represent the vertices of a polygon. What conclusions can you make about the polygon?
Answer:
The points are joined with line segments. it forms a right angled triangle as shown in above graph.
c. Can you plot another point to form a rectangle? a trapezoid? If so, what measures of the quadrilateral can you calculate?
Answer:
From the below graph by marking point D(-1,3) it forms a Rectangle.
By marking another point you cant make trapezoid it is not possible.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1

You can use ordered pairs to represent vertices of polygons. To draw a polygon in a coordinate plane, plot and connect the vertices.

Try It

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 1.
A (0, 0), B (5, 7), C (4, 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-1

Question 2.
W (4, 4), X (7, 4), Y (2 \(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2), Z (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2)
Answer:
Y (2 \(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2) = Y ( \(\frac{5}{2}\), – 2) = Y(2.5,-2)
Z (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2) = Z (-0.5 , -2)
W (4, 4), X (7, 4), Y(2.5,-2) , Z (-0.5 , -2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-2

Find the distance between the points.
Question 3.
(6, 6.5), (2, 6.5)
Answer:
d=√((x_2-x_1)²+(y_2-y_1)²)
d=√((6-2)²+(6.5-6.5)²)
d=√((4)²+(0)²)
d=√((4)²) = 4

Question 4.
(- 4, 2), (- 4, – 5)
Answer:
d=√((x_2-x_1)²+(y_2-y_1)²)
d=√((-4-(-4))²+(-5-2)²)
d=√((0)²+(-7)²)
d=√((-7)²) = √(49) = 7
Distance cant be negative

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

DRAWING A POLYGON
Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 5.
A (- 5, – 7), B (- 2, 4), C (5, -1)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-5

Question 6.
D (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), 6), E (3, 1), F (0, – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
D (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), 6) = D(-0.5, 6)
F (0, – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\))= F (0, – \(\frac{9}{2}\)) = F( 0 , 4.5)
D(-0.5, 6),E (3, 1), F( 0 , 4.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-6

FINDING DISTANCES Find the distance between the points.
Question 7.
(2, 7), (2, 9)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|9| – |7| = 2
So the distance between the points (2, 7), (2, 9) is 2

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-7

Question 8.
(- 3, – 8), (6, – 8)
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-8
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-3| + |6| = 9
So the distance between the points (- 3, – 8), (6, – 8) is 9

Question 9.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which pair of points does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 2
Answer:
(6,-3) and (6,3) is different from other 3 points.

Question 10.
A digital map of your hometown is shown in a coordinate plane in which the coordinates are measured in miles. The map shows your house at (−2, −7), your school at(5, −7), and your friend’s house at (−2, 1). How far is your house from your school? How far is your house from your friend’s house?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 3
Answer:
Plot the points (−2, −7), (5, −7) and (−2, 1)
House is located at (-2,-7)
Friends house is located at ( – 2,1)
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|-7| + |1| = 7 + 1 = 8
So the distance between the points (-2,-7) (-2,1) is 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-10

Question 11.
You design a tree house using a coordinate plane in which the coordinates are measured in feet. The vertices of the floor are (−2, −3), (−2, 4), (5, 4), and (5, −3). Find the perimeter (in yards) and the area (in square yards) of the floor.
Answer:
Plots the points (−2, −3), (−2, 4), (5, 4), and (5, −3)
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|4| + |-3| = 4 + 3 = 7
So the distance between the points (−2, −3), (−2, 4), is 7
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|5| + |-2| = 5 + 2 = 7
So the distance between the points (5, 4), and (−2, 4),  is 7
The image formed is a Square as its length and breadth are equal
Area of square = s × s = 7 × 7 = 49
Perimeter of square = 4s = 4 × 7 = 28

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-11

Polygons in the Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.6

Review & Refresh

Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 4
Question 1.
Point A
Answer:
(1,4)
Explanation:
x coordinate is 1
y coordinate is 4
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 2.
Point B
Answer:
X coordinate is -2
Y coordinate is 2
(-2,2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 3.
Point C
Answer:
X coordinate is -4
Y coordinate is 1
(-4,1)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 4.
Point D
Answer:
X coordinate is 3
Y coordinate is -3
(3,-3)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Write the percent as a decimal.
Question 5.
62%
Answer:
62 ÷ 100 = 0.62

Question 6.
7%
Answer:
7 ÷ 100 = 0.07

Question 7.
133%
Answer:
133 ÷ 100 = 1.33

Question 8.
0.45%
Answer:
0.45 ÷ 100 = 0.0045

Question 9.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of the time you spend online to the time your friend spends online. You are online for 6 hours. How many hours does your friend spend online?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 5
Answer:
Number of hours i was online = 6
Ratio of time spend online by me and my friend = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Time spend by my friend in online = \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{6}{x}\)
6 × 3 = x × 2
x = 18 ÷ 2
x=9
Time spend by my friend in online = 9 Hours.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

STRUCTURE Plot the ordered pairs in a coordinate plane. Then plot another point to form a rectangle. (See Exploration 1, p. 377.)
Question 10.
(3, 2), (3, 6), (- 5, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-10
Plot the points (3, 2), (3, 6), (- 5, 2)
In order to form a rectangle we need to mark (-5,6) as shown in the above graph .

Question 11.
(- 4, 7), (- 1, 7), (- 4, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-11
Explanation:
Plot the points (- 4, 7), (- 1, 7), (- 4, – 2)
In order to form a rectangle we need to mark (-1,-2) as shown in the above graph .

DRAWING A POLYGON Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 12.
A (4, 7), B (6, 2), C(0, 0)
Answer:
Plot the points A (4, 7), B (6, 2), C(0, 0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-12

Question 13.
D (\(\frac{1}{2}\), 2), E (- 5, 5), F (- 4, 1)
Answer:
D (\(\frac{1}{2}\), 2) = D (0.5 , 2)
Plot the points D (0.5 , 2), E (- 5, 5), F (- 4, 1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-13

Question 14.
G (1\(\frac{1}{2}\), 4), H(1\(\frac{1}{2}\), – 8), J (5, – 8), K (5, 4)
Answer:
G (1\(\frac{1}{2}\), 4)= G (\(\frac{3}{2}\), 4) = G ( 1.5 , 4)
H(1\(\frac{1}{2}\), -8)= H(\(\frac{3}{2}\), -8) = H ( 1.5 , -8)
Plot the points G ( 1.5 , 4), H ( 1.5 , -8), J (5, – 8), K (5, 4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-14

Question 15.
L (- 3, 2), M (- 3, 5), N (2, 2), P (2, – 1)
Answer:
L (- 3, 2), M (- 3, 5), N (2, 2), P (2, – 1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-15

Question 16.
Q (0, 4), R (- 3, 8), S (- 7, 4), T (- 1, – 2), U (7, – 2)
Answer:
Plot the points Q (0, 4), R (- 3, 8), S (- 7, 4), T (- 1, – 2), U (7, – 2)

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-16

Question 17.
V(- 4, – 2), W(- 3, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)), X (2, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)), Y (4, 0), Z (1, – 4)
Answer:
W(- 3, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\))= W(- 3, \(\frac{7}{2}\)) = W(-3, 3.5)
X (2, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\))= X (2, \(\frac{7}{2}\)) = X(2, 3.5)
Plot the points V(- 4, – 2),W(-3, 3.5), X(2, 3.5), Y (4, 0), Z (1, – 4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-17

Question 18.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws a triangle with vertices A(3, −1), B (4, 3), and C (−1, 2). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 6
Answer:
No
Explanation:
As per the above graph the point A drawn as (3,1) not (3,-1).The Point A is drawn in Quadrant I, Here the x-coordinate is positive and y-coordinate is also positive.
The point (3,-1) will be represented in Quadrant IV, Here the x-coordinate is positive and y-coordinate is also negative.

FINDING DISTANCES Find the distance between the points.
Question 19.
(4, 6), (9, 6)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-19

Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|9| – |4| = 9-4=5
So the distance between the points (4, 6), (9, 6) is 5

Question 20.
(5, 10), (5, 4)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|10| – |4| = 2
So the distance between the points (5, 10), (5, 4) is 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-20

Question 21.
(3, 0), (3, – 2)
Answer:

Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the Sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|0| +  |-2| = 2
So the distance between the points (3, 0), (3, – 2) is 2

Question 22.
(5, – 2), (- 6, – 2)
Answer:

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|5| + |-6| = 5 + 6=11
So the distance between the points (5, – 2), (- 6, – 2) is 11

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-22

Question 23.
(- 1, 12), (- 1, – 3)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the Sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|12| +  |-3| = 12 + 3 =15
So the distance between the points (- 1, 12), (- 1, – 3) is 15

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-23

Question 24.
(- 7, 8), (7, 8)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-7| + |7| = 7 + 7 = 14
So the distance between the points (- 7, 8), (7, 8) is 14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-24

Question 25.
(- 6, 5), (- 6, – 3.5)
Answer:

Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the Sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|5| +  |-3.5| = 5 + 3.5 = 8.5
So the distance between the points (- 6, 5), (- 6, – 3.5) is 8.5

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-25

Question 26.
(- 2.5, 3), (5, 3)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is sum of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-2.5| + |5| = 2.5 + 5 = 7.5
So the distance between the points (- 2.5, 3), (5, 3) is 7.5

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-26

Question 27.
(4.5, – 1.5), (4.5, 7.25)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|-1.5| + |7.25| = 1.5 + 7.25 = 8.75
So the distance between the points (4.5, – 1.5), (4.5, 7.25) is 8.75

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-27

GEOMETRY Find the perimeter and the area of the polygon with the given vertices.
Question 28.
C (1, 1), D (1, 4), E (4, 4), F (4, 1)
Answer:
The polygon formed is square .
The area of the square = s × s = 3 × 3 = 9
The perimeter of the square = 4 s = 4 × 3 = 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-28

Question 29.
J (- 1, – 2), K(- 6, – 2), L (- 6, – 8), M (- 1, – 8)
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 6 × 5 = 30
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (length + breadth) = 2 ( 6 + 5) = 22
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-29

Question 30.
N (- 4, 2), P (5, 2), Q (5, 5), R (- 4, 5)
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 9 × 3 = 27
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (length + breadth) = 2 ( 9 + 3) = 24
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-30

Question 31.
S (- 11, – 8), T (- 11, 0), U (0, 0), V (0, – 8)
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 11 × 8 = 88
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (length + breadth) = 2 ( 11 + 8) = 38
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-31

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The coordinates of several stars drawn in a coordinate plane are (8, 0), (7, −3), (3, −2.5), (3.5, 0.5), (−1, 3), (−3, 5), and (−7, 6). Plot the locations of the stars. Draw a constellation by connecting the points.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 7.1
Answer:
Plot the given points (8, 0), (7, −3), (3, −2.5), (3.5, 0.5), (−1, 3), (−3, 5), and (−7, 6).
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-32

Question 33.
STRUCTURE
The coordinate plane shows three vertices of a parallelogram. Find two possible points that could represent the fourth vertex.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-33
The fourth vertex is Z(-5,-3) as shown in the above graph.

Question 34.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Polygon JKLMNP represents a bus route. Each grid square represents 9 square miles. What is the shortest distance, in miles, from Station P to Station L using the bus route? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 8
Answer:
Shortest distance between L to P is from PNML = 9 × 9 = 81 square miles
(Total grids from PNML = 9)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-34

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In a topographical map of a city, the vertices of the city limits are A(−7, 3), B (1, 3), C (1, −4), D (−3, −1.5), and E (−7, −1.5). The coordinates are measured in miles. What is the area of the city?
Answer:
Plot the given points A(−7, 3), B (1, 3), C (1, −4), D (−3, −1.5), and E (−7, −1.5)
Area of city = area of rectangle ABEF + area of triangle CDF
Area of Rectangle ABEF = length × breadth = 8 × 4.5 = 36
Area of triangle CDF = (Height × base) ÷ 2 =(4 × 2.5) ÷ 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-35

Question 36.
DIG DEEPER!
A map shows that the vertices of a backyard are W (−100, −70), X (−100, 0), Y (0, 0), and Z (−60, −70). The coordinates are measured in feet. The line segment XZseparates the backyard into a lawn and a garden. How many times larger is the lawn than the garden?
Answer:
Plot the given points W (−100, −70), X (−100, 0), Y (0, 0), and Z (−60, −70).
From the graph we can say that the 2 times larger the lawn than a garden.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-36

OPEN-ENDED Draw a polygon with the given conditions in a coordinate plane where the vertices are not all in the same quadrant.
Question 37.
a square with a perimeter of 20 units
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-37

Question 38.
a rectangle with a perimeter of 18 units
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-38

Question 39.
a rectangle with an area of 24 units2
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 6 × 4 = 24 units2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-39

Question 40.
a triangle with an area of 15 units2
Answer:
After plotting the points in the graph
Area of triangle = (Height × base) ÷ 2 =(6 × 5) ÷ 2 = 15 units2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-40

Question 41.
PRECISION
The vertices of a rectangle are (1, 0), (1, a), (5, a), and (5, 0). The vertices of a parallelogram are (1, 0), (2, b), (6, b), and (5, 0). The values of a and b are both positive and a > b. Which polygon has a greater area? Explain.
Answer:
The vertices of a rectangle are A(1, 0), B(1, a), C(5, a), and D(5, 0).
After plotting the above points in the graph we consider a = 3 to form a rectangle.
The vertices of a parallelogram are A(1, 0), E(2, b), F(6, b), and D(5, 0).
After plotting the above points in the graph we consider b = 2 to form a parallelogram
The area of the rectangle is greater than area of the parallelogram which can be easily noticed from the graph .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-41

Lesson 8.7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities

EXPLORATION 1

Understanding Inequality Statements
Work with a partner. Create a number line on the floor with both positive and negative integers.
a. For each statement, stand at a number on your number line that makes the statement true. On what other numbers can you stand?
•Class starts more than 3 minutes late.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 1
Answer:
c > 3
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Exploration-1
above 3 all points are solutions for above inequality statement.
• You need at least 3 peaches for a recipe.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 2
Answer:
n  ≥ 3.
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Exploration-1-a-2
Here the mark starts at 3 the point is closed circle which means here 3 is also included .
3 and above will be the solutions for the inequality equations.

• The temperature is at most 3 degrees Celsius.
Answer:
t ≤ 3
Explanation:
Here in the number line we observe that a circle is marked at point 3 it means it is not included and less than 3 are the solutions of the inequality equations
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Exploration-1-a-3
• After playing a video game for 5 minutes, you have fewer than 3 points.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 3
Answer:
x+5 < 3
b. How can you represent the solutions of each statement in part(a) on a number line?
Answer:
An Inequality is a mathematical sentence that compares expressions. It contains symbols like < , > ,≤, ≥.
based on the phrases the symbol is used and expressions are written .

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 4

An inequality is a mathematical sentence that compares expressions. It contains the symbols <, >, ≤, or ≥. To write a word sentence as an inequality, look for the following phrases to determine where to place the inequality symbol.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 5

Try It

Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 1.
A number n is greater than 1.
Answer:
A number n is greater than 1
n          >           1
An inequality is n>1

Question 2.
Twice a number p is fewer than 7.
Answer:
Twice a number p is fewer than 7.
2p                  <        7
An inequality equation is 2p>7

Question 3.
A number w minus 3 is less than or equal to 10.
Answer:
An inequality equation is w-3 ≤ 10

Question 4.
A number z divided by 2 is at least −6.
Answer:
An inequality equation is z ÷ 2  ≥ -6

Tell whether 3 is a solution of the inequality.
Question 5.
b + 4 < 6
Answer:
b + 4 < 6
b < 6 – 4
b < 2
No as b is less than 2

Question 6.
9 – n ≥ 6
Answer:
9 – n ≥ 6
9 + 6 ≥ n
15 ≥ n

Question 7.
10 ≤ 18 ÷ x
Answer:
10 ≤ 18 ÷ x = x ≤ 18 ÷ 10
x ≤ 1.8

Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 8.
a < 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-8
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 9. f ≤ 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-9
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 10. n > 0
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-10
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 11.
– 3 ≤ p
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-11
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Write “both” inequalities.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 6
Answer:
Statement I – n ≤ 3
Statement II -n ≤ 3
Statement III -n ≤ 3
Statement IV-n ≥ 3 ≤

CHECKING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the given value is a solution of the inequality.
Question 13.
p + 5 ≤ 12; p = 6
Answer:
p + 5 ≤ 12
put p = 6
6 + 5 = 11
11 ≤ 12 is true
so the given value is the solution of the inequality .

Question 14.
w – 12 < 4; w = 16
Answer:
w – 12 < 4
put w = 16
16 – 12 =4
4 < 4 is not true
so the given value is not a solution for the inequality .

GRAPHING AN INEQUALITY Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 15.
n > 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-15
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 16.
q ≤ – 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-16

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 17.
5 < s
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-17
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 18.
To obtain a babysitting license, you still need to train for at least 6 hours and 45 minutes. Describe the amounts of time that you can train and still not obtain a license.
Answer:
Time required to train for babysitting license ≤ 6 hours 45 minutes.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
The farthest away a drone can fly is 200 meters. A building is 380 meters tall. You control the drone from a floor that is halfway to the top of the building. Can the drone reach the top of the building? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 7
Answer:
Distance a drone can fly = 200 metres
Height of a building = 380 metres tall
floor height = half of the building = 380 ÷ 2 = 190 metres.
Distance a drone can travel from floor = 190 metres + 200 = 390 metres.
390 > Distance of a building .
390 > 380
It means that drone can reach the top of the building .

Question 20.
Each visit to a water park costs $19.95. An annual pass to the park costs $89.95. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of times you would need to visit the park for the pass to be a better deal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 8
Answer:
Cost of water park for 1 visit= $19.95
Cost of Annual pass to water park = $89.95.
Number of visits in Annual pass = $89.95 ÷ $19.95 = 4.5
Number of visits = n
n ≥ 4.5

Writing and Graphing Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.7

Review & Refresh

Find the distance between the points.
Question 1.
(2, 8), (6, 8)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-1

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|6| – |2| = 6 – 2 = 4
So the distance between the points (2, 8), (6, 8) is 4

Question 2.
(5, 9), (7, 9)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-2
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|7| – |5| = 7- 5 = 2
So the distance between the points (5, 9), (7, 9) is 2

Question 3.
(- 3, 6), (- 3, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-3

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same X-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|6| + |-3| = 6 + 3 = 9
So the distance between the points (- 3, 6), (- 3, – 2) is 9

Solve the equation. Check your solution
Question 4.
x + 3 = 12
Answer:
x + 3 = 12
x = 12 – 3
x = 9
solution is 9

Question 5.
x – 6 = 8
Answer:
x – 6 = 8
x = 8 + 6
x = 14
solution is 14

Question 6.
\(\frac{t}{12}\) = 4
Answer:
\(\frac{t}{12}\) = 4
t = 4 × 12
t = 48

Question 7.
8x = 72
Answer:
8x = 72
x = 72 ÷ 8
x = 9

Question 8.
A stack of boards is 24 inches high. e thickness of each board is \(\frac{3}{8}\) inch. How many boards are in the stack?
A. \(\frac{1}{9}\)
B. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
C. 9
D. 64
Answer:
Height of boards = 24 inches
Thickness of each board = \(\frac{3}{8}\) = 0.375 inch
Number of boards in stack = 24  ÷ 0.375 = 64 boards
Option D is the answer.

Find the area of the parallelogram.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 9
Answer:
Height of the Parallelogram = 3 inches
Base of the Parallelogram = 4 inches.
Area of the Parallelogram =  base × height = 3 × 4 =12 inches.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 10
Answer:
Height of the Parallelogram = 5 m
Base of the Parallelogram = 7 m
Area of the Parallelogram =  base × height = 7 × 5 = 35 metres

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 11
Answer:
Height of the Parallelogram = 15 m
Base of the Parallelogram = 8.5 m
Area of the Parallelogram =  base × height = 15 × 8.5 = 127.5 sq metres

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

UNDERSTANDING INEQUALITY STATEMENTS Choose a number that makes the statement true. What other numbers make the statement true? (See Exploration 1, p. 383.)

Question 12.
You are less than 3 miles from home.
Answer:
Y < 3.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-12

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 13.
You need at least $5 for lunch.
Answer:
Y  ≥ 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-13
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 14.
You buy more than 2 movie tickets.
Answer:
Y > 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-14
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 15.
A game lasts no more than 10 minutes.
Answer:
G ≤ 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-15
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

WRITING INEQUALITIES Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 16.
A number k is less than 10.
Answer:
k < 10

Question 17.
A number a is more than 6.
Answer:
n > 6

Question 18.
A number z is fewer than \(\frac{3}{4}\).
Answer:
z < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 19.
A number b is at least −3.
Answer:
b ≥ -3

Question 20.
One plus a number y is no more than −13.
Answer:
1 + Y ≤ – 13

Question 21.
A number x divided by 3 is at most 5.
Answer:
x ÷ 3 ≤ 5

CHECKING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the given value is a solution of the inequality.
Question 22.
x – 1 ≤ 7; x = 6
Answer:
x – 1 ≤ 7
put x =6
6 – 1 = 5
5 ≤ 7
above statement is True
Yes, the given value is a solution of the inequality.

Question 23.
y + 5 < 13; y = 17
Answer:
y + 5 < 13
put = 17
17 + 5 = 22
22 < 13
above statement is wrong
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 24. 3z > 6; z = 3
Answer:
3z > 6
put z = 3
3 × 3 = 9
9 > 6
above statement is True
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 25.
6 ≤ \(\frac{b}{2}\); b = 10
Answer:
6 ≤ \(\frac{b}{2}\)
6 ≤ \(\frac{10}{2}\)
6 ≤ 5
The above statement is wrong .
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 26.
c + 2.5 < 4.3; c = 1.8
Answer:
c + 2.5 < 4.3
Put c = 1.8
1.8 + 2.5 = 4.3
4.3 < 4.3
above statement is wrong
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 27.
a ≤ 0; a = -5
Answer:
a ≤ 0
put a = -5
– 5 ≤ 0
above statement is True
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

MATCHING Match the inequality with its graph.
Question 28.
x ≥ – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-28
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 29.
x < – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-29
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 30.
x > – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-30
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 31.
x ≤ – 2
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 12
Option C is correct.
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

GRAPHING AN INEQUALITY Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 32.
a > 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-32
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 33.
n ≥ 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-33
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 34.
3 ≥ x
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-34
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 35.
y < \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
y < \(\frac{1}{2}\) = y < 0.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-35
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 36.
x < \(\frac{2}{9}\)
Answer:
x < \(\frac{2}{9}\)
x < 0.2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-36
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 37. -3 ≥ c
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-37
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 38. m > – 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-38
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 39.
0 ≤ b
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-39
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 40.
1.5 > f
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-40
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 41.
t ≥ – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
t ≥ – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = t ≥ – 0.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-41
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 42.
t ≥ – 1.6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-42
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 43.
\(\frac{7}{3}\) ≥ z
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{3}\) ≥ z
2.3 ≥ z
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-43
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

OPEN-ENDED Write an inequality and a word sentence that represent the graph.
Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 13
Answer:
n < 1
Here in the number line the 1 is not selected and all the numbers are less than 1 so the inequality equation is
n < 1
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 14
Answer:
Here in the number line the 1 is selected and all the numbers are less than 1 so the inequality equation is
n ≤ 1
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 15
Answer:
Here in the number line the 1 is selected and all the numbers are greater than -4 so the inequality equation is
-4 ≤ n
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 47.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 16
Answer:
Here in the number line the 5 is not selected and all the numbers are greater than 0 so the inequality equation is
0 < n
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend graphs the inequality. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 17
Answer:
Yes, my friend is true .
Here in the number line the 1 is not selected and all the numbers are greater than 1 so the inequality equation is
x > 1
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 18
Answer:
Here in the number line the -1 is not selected and all the numbers are less than -1 so the inequality equation is
-1 > x
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 50.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The world record for the farthest flight by hoverboard is 2252.4 meters. Write and graph an inequality that represents the distances that would set a new world record.
Answer:
Distance of the farthest flight by hoverboard = 2252.4
For new record the distance should be more than this distance.
Therefore the inequality of a new world record is w > 2252.4

Question 51.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You are fishing and are allowed to keep at most 3 striped bass. Each striped bass must be no less than 18 inches long.
a. Write and graph an inequality that represents the numbers of striped bass you are allowed to keep.
b. Write and graph an inequality that represents the lengths of striped bass you are allowed to keep.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 19
Answer:
Number of striped bass allowed = n ≤ 3
Length of stripped bass = l ≥ 18
Answer a :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-51-b
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Answer b:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-51-b

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 52.
REASONING
You have $33. You want to buy a necklace and one other item from the list.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 20
a. Write an inequality that represents the situation.
b.Can the other item be a T-shirt? Explain.
c. Can the other item be a book? Explain.
Answer a :
Total Amount  = t ≤ $33

Answer b:
Yes
Explanation:
Total Amount = $33
Amount for necklace = $16
Amount for T-Shirt = $15
Total Amount for necklace and T-Shirt = 16 + 15 = 31.
Therefore the required amount is 31 which is less than 33.
So it is possible to buy both .

Answer c :
No
Total Amount = $33
Amount for necklace = $16
Amount for Book = $20
Total Amount for necklace and Book = 16 + 20 = 36.
Therefore the required amount is 36 which is greater than 33.
So it is not possible to buy both .

Question 53.
LOGIC
For a food to be labeled low sodium, there must be no more than 140 milligrams of sodium per serving.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 21
a. Write and graph an inequality that represents the amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving.
Answer:
Amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving = S ≤ 140
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-53-a
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

b.Write and graph an inequality that represents the amount of sodium in a serving that does not qualify as low sodium.
Answer:
Amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving which doesnot qualify = S > 140
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-53-b
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

c. Does the food represented by the nutrition facts label qualify as a low-sodium food? Explain.
Answer:
As per the above picture
Total sodium = 300 grams.
Sodium used for nutrition facts label qualify = 13 % of 300 grams = (13 × 300) ÷ 100 = 3 × 13 = 39 grams.
Amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving =140 milligrams = 0.149 grams
So the food represented by the nutrition facts label doesnot qualify as a low-sodium food.

CRITICAL THINKING Determine whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.
Question 54.
A number that is a solution of the inequality x > 5 is also a solution of the inequality x ≥ 5.
Answer:
Sometimes
Explanation:
Only when 5 is not a solution . above 5 all will be the solutions for the equations.

Question 55.
A number that is a solution of the inequality 5 ≤ x is also a solution of the inequality x > 5.
Answer:
Sometimes.
Explanation:
Only when 5 is not a solution . above 5 all will be the solutions for the equations.

5Question 6.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A subway ride costs $1.50. A 30-day subway pass costs $36. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of subway rides you would need to take for the pass to be a better deal.
Answer:
Cost of one ride of subway = $1.50
cost of 30-day subway = $36.
Number of rides in 30-day subway = $36 ÷ $1.50 = 24 rides.
Yes it is a fair deal because you pay only for 24 rides out of 30 rides.
r ≤ 24 .

Question 57.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Fifty people are seated in a movie theater. The maximum capacity of the theater is 425 people. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of additional people who can be seated.
Answer:
Number of people in theater = 50
Maximum Capacity = 425
The Numbers of additional people who can be seated = 50 + x < 425 .

Question 58.
CRITICAL THINKING
The map shows the elevations above sea level for an area of land.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 22
a Graph the possible elevations of A. Write the set of elevations as two inequalities.
Answer:
Point A = 0 – 100 ft
possible elevations of A ≤ 100.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-58-a
b. Graph the possible elevations of C. How can you write this set of elevations as a single inequality? Explain.
Answer:
Point C = 400 – 500
possible elevations of  400 < C ≤  500.

c. What is the elevation of B? Explain.
Answer:
Point C = 200 – 300
possible elevations of  200 < B ≤  300.

Lesson 8.8 Solving Inequalities

EXPLORATION 1

Using Tape Diagrams
Work with a partner. In Section 6.2 Exploration 1, the tape diagram below was used to model the equation x + 4 = 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 1
a. Suppose that x +4 is greater than 12. How can you change the equation to represent the new relationship between x + 4 and 12?
Answer:
x + 4 ≥ 12
To Change the equation to represent the new relationship
x + 4 ≥ 12   subtract 4 from both sides of the equation we get ,
x ≥ 8
b. A student finds the possible values of x using the tape diagrams below. What is the solution? How can you find the solution algebraically?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 2.1
Answer:
None of the above diagrams help us to know the solutions.
c. Describe the relationship between 4x and 20 as shown by the tape diagram below. What can you conclude about x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 2
Answer:
4x + y  = 20
Explanation:
Total 4x is not equal to 20 something if we add to 4x then only the sum becomes 20 .

Try It

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 1.
x – 2 < 3
Answer:
x – 2 < 3
add 2 on both sides
x -2 + 2 < 3 + 2
x < 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-1

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 2.
10 ≥ z – 1
Answer:
10 ≥ z – 1 ( add by 1)
11 ≥ z
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-2

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 3.
y + 2 ≥ 17
Answer:
y + 2 ≥ 17
y ≥ 17 – 2 ( subtract by 2)
y ≥ 15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-3

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 4.
p ÷ 3 ≥ 2
Answer:
p ÷ 3 ≥ 2
p ≥ 2 × 3 ( multiply by 3 )
p ≥ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-4

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 5.
1 < \(\frac{s}{7}\)
Answer:
1 < \(\frac{s}{7}\)
7 < s (multiply by 7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-5

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 6. 11k ≤ 33
Answer:
11k ≤ 33
k ≤ 3 (divided by 11 )
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-6

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 7. \(\frac{3}{2}\)m > 1
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{2}\)m > 1
1.5m > 1 divide by 1.5
m > 0.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-7
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{5}\)q ≤ 6
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{5}\)q ≤ 6
0.6q ≤ 6
divide by 0.6
q ≤ (6 ÷ 0.6 )
q ≤ 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-8
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 9.
5 > \(\frac{5t}{6}\)
Answer:
5 > \(\frac{5t}{6}\)
multiply by 6
5 × 6 > 5t
30 > 5t
divide by 5
6 > t
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-9

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 10.
n + 6 < 10
Answer:
n + 6 < 10
subtract 6 on both sides
n < 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-10

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 11.
h – 13 ≥ 7
Answer:
h – 13 ≥ 7
add 13 on both sides
h ≥ 20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-11

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 12.
5g > 45
Answer:
5g > 45
divide by 9 on both sides
g > 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-12

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 13.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)k ≤ 6
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)k ≤ 6
divide by \(\frac{4}{3}\)
k ≤ 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-13

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

OPEN-ENDED
Write an inequality that the graph represents. Then use the Addition Property of Inequality to write another inequality that the graph represents.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 3
Answer:
x > 2
Then add 2 on both sides
x + 2 > 4.

Question 15.
REASONING
How is the graph of the solution of 2x ≥ 10 different from the graph of the solution of 2x = 10?
Answer:
2x ≥ 10
divide by 2
x ≥ 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-15-a
Here including 5 and above all are the solutions of the given inequality equation .

Question 16
OPEN-ENDED
Write two inequalities that have the same solution set: one that you can solve using division and one that you can solve using subtraction.
Answer:

Question 17.
A small pizza costs $4.50, and a salad costs $3.75. You plan to buy two small pizzas and four salads. Write and solve an inequality to find the additional amounts you can spend to get free delivery.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 4
Answer:
Cost of pizza = $4.50
Cost of Salads = $3.75.
Free delivery on more than or equal to $40
d ≥ 40
Cost of  2 pizza = $4.50 × 2 = $9
Cost of 4 Salads = $3.75. × 4 = $15
Total Amount = $9 +$ 15 = $ 26.
Therefore , It is less than 40$ so free delivery is not possible .

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
Students at a playground are divided into 5 groups with at least 6 students in each group.
a. Find the possible numbers of students at the playground.
b. Suppose the students are divided into 5 equal groups. How does this change your answer in part(a)?
Answer a :
Number of Groups = 5
Number of students in each group = 6
Total students at play ground = 5 × 6 = 30
Answer b :
It doesnot change the answer because earlier there are 5 groups and even now we have 5 groups .

Solving Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.8

Review & Refresh

Tell whether the given value is a solution of the inequality.
Question 1.
n + 4 > 15; n = 9
Answer:
n + 4 > 15;
Put n = 9 in LHS
9 + 4 = 13
13 > 15 The statement is wrong
So it is not a solution for the given inequality .

Question 2.
s – 12 ≤ 8; s = 20
Answer:
s – 12 ≤ 8
Put s = 20 in LHS
20 – 12
8 ≤ 8 The statement is wrong as it is equal to 8 but not greater than 8 .
So it is not a solution for the given inequality .

Question 3.
\(\frac{z}{4}\) ≥ 7; z = 32
Answer:
latex]\frac{z}{4}[/latex] ≥ 7 (mutlipy by 4)
z ≥ 7 × 4
z ≥ 28
Put z = 32
32 ≥ 28 is true
as 32 is greater than 28.
so the given number is the solution for the inequality equation.

Question 4.
6g < 48; g = 8
Answer:
6g < 48
Put g = 8 in LHS
6 × 8 = 48
48 < 48 is wrong as both are equal .
so the given number is not a solution for the inequality equation .

Find the area of the triangle.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 5
Answer:
Height of the triangle = 8mm
Base of the triangle = 14mm
Area of the Triangle = base × height = 14 × 8 =112 sq.mm

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 6
Answer:
Height of the triangle = 6 inches
Base of the triangle = 3.5 inches
Area of the Triangle = base × height = 6 × 3.5 = 21 sq.inches

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 7
Answer:
Height of the triangle = 6 yd
Base of the triangle = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2.5 yd
Area of the Triangle = base × height = 6 × 2.5 = 15 sq.yds

Write the product as a power.
Question 8.
7 × 7
Answer:
72
As we have 2 7 ‘s  so the power is 2
Explanation:
The exponent is the amount of times the number will be multiplied by itself.

Question 9.
12 × 12 × 12 × 12
Answer:
124
As we have 4,12 ‘s  so the power is 4
Explanation:
The exponent is the amount of times the number will be multiplied by itself.

Question 10.
1.4 × 1.4 × 1.4
Answer:
1.43
As we have 3, 1.4 ‘s  so the power is 3
Explanation:
The exponent is the amount of times the number will be multiplied by itself.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING TOOLS Describe the relationship shown by the tape diagram. What can you conclude about x? (See Exploration 1, p. 391.)
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 8
Answer:
1 + 2x < 9
Explanation:
1 + 2x is some part of 9 but not equal to 9 as 9 is greater than 1 + 2x. so the inequality equation is 1 + 2x < 9

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 9
Answer:
6x > 24
Explanation:
24 is some part of 6x . an 6x is greater than 24. So the inequality equation is 6x > 24

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 13.
x – 4 < 5
Answer:
x – 4 < 5 (add 4)
x < 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-13

Question 14. 5 + h > 7
Answer:
14. 5 + h > 7
14.5 move towards RHS we get
h > 7 -14.5
h > – 7.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-14

Question 15.
3 ≥ y – 2
Answer:
3 ≥ y – 2
add 2 on both sides
5 ≥ y
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-15

Question 16.
y – 21 < 85
Answer:
y – 21 < 85
add 21 on both sides
y < 106
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-16

Question 17. 18 > 12 + x
Answer:
18 > 12 + x
subtract 12 on both sides we get ,
6 > x
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-17

Question 18.
\(\frac{m}{8}\) < 4
Answer:
\(\frac{m}{8}\) < 4
Multiply by 8 on both sides we get,
m < 8 × 4
m < 32
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-18

Question 19. n ÷ 6 > 2
Answer:
n ÷ 6 > 2
multiply by 6 on both sides we get,
n > 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-19

Question 20.
12x < 96
Answer:
12x < 96
divide by 12 on both sides we get,
x< 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-20

Question 21.
\(\frac{1}{11}\)c ≥ 9
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{11}\)c ≥ 9
multiply by 11 on both sides we get,
c ≥ 9 × 11
c ≥ 99
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-21

Question 22.
8w ≤ 72
Answer:
8w ≤ 72
divide by 8 on both sides we get,
w ≤ 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-22

Question 23.
7.2 < x + 4.2
Answer:
7.2 < x + 4.2
subtract 4.2 on both sides we get,
3 < x
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-23

Question 24.
12.7 ≥ s – 5.3
Answer:
12.7 ≥ s – 5.3
add 5.3 on both sides we get,
12.7 + 5.3 ≥ s
18 ≥ s
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-24

Question 25.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + n
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + n
0.75 ≤ 0.5 + n
subtract 0.5 on both sides we get,
0.25 ≤ n

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-25

Question 26.
7.5 p ≤ 45
Answer:
7.5 p ≤ 45
divide by 7.5 we get,
p ≤ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-26

Question 27.
\(\frac{5}{9}\)v ≤ 45
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{9}\)v ≤ 45
multiply by \(\frac{9}{5}\) on both sides we get,
v ≤ 81
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-27

Question 28.
\(\frac{5x}{8}\) ≥ 30
Answer:
\(\frac{5x}{8}\) ≥ 30
Multiply by \(\frac{8}{5}\) on both sides we get,
x ≥ 48
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-28

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the inequality. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 10
Answer:
No ,
Explanation:
we subtracted 19 on both sides we get
28 – 9 = 19
t – 9 – 9 = t – 18
so the inequality equation after change is
19 ≥ t – 18.

Question 30
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 11
Answer:
Yes it is right.

WRITING INEQUALITIES Write the word sentence as an inequality. Then solve the inequality.
Question 31.
Five more than a number p is less than 17.
Answer:
5 + p < 17

Question 32.
Three less than a number b is more than 15.
Answer:
3 – b > 15

Question 33.
Eight times a number n is less than 72.
Answer:
8n < 72

Question 34.
A number t divided by 32 is at most 4.25.
Answer:
t ÷ 32 ≤ 4.25

Question 35.
225 is no less than \(\frac{3}{4}\) times a number w.
Answer:
225 ≥ \(\frac{3}{4}\)w

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your carry-on bag can weigh at most 40 pounds. Write and solve an inequality that represents how much more weight you can add to the bag and still meet the requirement.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 12
Answer:
Weight of a bag ≤ 40
weight of the bag as per above image = 22
how much weight can be added = 40 – 22 = 18
22 + 18 ≤ 40

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
It costs $x for a round-trip bus ticket to the mall. You have $24. Write and solve an inequality that represents how much money you can spend for the bus ticket and still have enough to buy a hat that costs $18.99.
Answer:
Cost of bus ticket = $x
Total Amount with me = $24
Cost of Hat = $18.99
Amount can spend for bus ticket = $24 – $18.99 = $5.01
So Cost of bus ticket can be $5.01 ≥ x

Question 38.
GEOMETRY
The length of a rectangle is 8 feet, and its area is less than 168 square feet. Write and solve an inequality that represents the possible widths of the rectangle.
Answer:
Length of a rectangle = 8 feet.
Area of Rectangle < 168
Width of rectangle < Area ÷ length = 168 ÷ 8 = 21
width of rectangle can be < 21

Question 39.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A ticket to a dinosaur exhibit costs $7.50. A one-year pass to the exhibit costs $30. When is the one-year pass a better deal? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 13
Answer:
Cost of ticket = $7.50
Cost of 1 year pass =$30
Number of times can go in one year = 30 ÷7.50 =4
The deal is fair because you pay only for 4 times to go and rest of the year it will be free.
So the one year pass is more beneficial.

Question 40.
REASONING
A thrill ride at an amusement park holds a maximum of 12 people per ride.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 14
a. Find the possible numbers of rides needed for 15,000 people.
Answer:
Number of people for 1 ride = 12
Number of rides for 15,000 people = 15000 ÷ 12 = 1250 rides.

b. Is it reasonable for 15,000 people to ride the thrill ride in one day? Explain.
Answer:
The park opens from 10:00 a.m to 10:00 p.m
we cannot say the 15,000 people can ride in 1 day or not because we dont know for how much time will one ride takes.

Question 41.
OPEN-ENDED
Give an example of a real-life situation in which you can list all the solutions of an inequality. Give an example of a real-life situation in which you cannot list all the solutions of an inequality.
Answer:
Real-life situation of Inequalities.

Speed limit Legal speed on the highway ≤ 65 miles per hour
Credit card Monthly payment ≥ 10% of your balance in that billing cycle
Text messaging Allowable number of text messages per month ≤ 250
Travel time Time needed to walk from home to school ≥ 18 minutes

real-life situation in which you cannot list all the solutions of an inequality are Money . money should be given exactly not greater or lesser.

Question 42.
LOGIC
Describe the solution of 7x < 7x. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
7x < 7x
No solution.
Explanation:
this equation is wrong as both are equal . no solution can be possible if the inequality equation is wrong.

Question 43.
NUMBER SENSE
The possible values of x are given by x− 3 ≥ 2. What is the least possible value of 5x?
Answer:
x− 3 ≥ 2
add 3 on both sides we get,
x ≥ 5
Multiply by 5 on both sides we get,
5x ≥ 5 × 5
5x ≥ 25

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 44.
x + 9 – 3 ≤ 14
Answer:
x + 9 – 3 ≤ 14
x + 6 ≤ 14
subtract 6 on both sides we get ,
x≤ 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-44

Question 45.
44 > 7 + s + 26
Answer:
44 > 7 + s + 26
44 > 33 + s
subtract 33 on both sides we get,
11 > s
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-45

Question 46.
6.1 – 0.3 ≥ c + 1
Answer:
6.1 – 0.3 ≥ c + 1
5.8 ≥ c + 1
Subtract 1 on both sides we get,
4.8 ≥ c
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-46

Question 47.
2n < 4.6 × 12
Answer:
2n < 4.6 × 12
2n < 55.2
Divide by 2 on both sides we get,
n < 27.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-47

Question 48.
32 ≥ 2h + 6h
Answer:
32 ≥ 2h + 6h
32 ≥ 8h
Divide by 8 on both sides we get,
4 ≥ h
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-48

Question 49.
2\(\frac{2}{5}\)b – 1\(\frac{3}{10}\)b ≤ 6\(\frac{3}{5}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{12}{5}\)b – \(\frac{13}{10}\)b ≤ \(\frac{33}{5}\)
2.4b – 1.3b ≤  6.6
1.1b ≤ 6.6
Divide by 1.1 on both sides we get,
b ≤ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-49

Question 50.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The high score for a video game is 36,480. Your current score is 34,280. Each dragonfly you catch is worth 1 point. You also get a 1000-point bonus for reaching 35,000 points. Find the possible numbers of dragonflies you can catch to earn a new high score.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 15
Answer:
High score of video game = 36,480
Current score =34,280
Score required to get 35,000 points = 35000 – 34280 = 720
You need to catch 720 dragon flies to get 35000 score after that 1000 bonus will be added so pesent score will be
34280 + 720 +1000 =36000
For new record how many dragon flies we should catch = 36480 – 36000 = 480
More than 480 then new record will be formed.
so possible number of dragon flies should we  catch for new record = 720 + 480 = 1200
more than 1200 .

Question 51.
REASONING
A winning football team more than doubled the offensive yards gained by its opponent. The opponent gained 272 offensive yards. The winning team had 80 offensive plays. Find the possible numbers of yards per play for the winning team. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Opponent offensive yards = 272
Winning team offensive yards = double he offensive yards gained by its opponent =20 × 272 = 5440
Winning Team offensive plays = 80
possible numbers of yards per play for the winning team = 5440 yards.

Question 52.
DIG DEEPER!
You complete two events of a triathlon. Your goal is to finish with an overall time of less than 100 minutes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 16
a. Find the possible numbers of minutes you can take to finish the running event and still meet your goal.
b. The running event is 3.1 miles long. Estimate how many minutes it would take you to run 3.1 miles. Would this time allow you to reach your goal? Explain your reasoning.
Answer a :
Total Time is less than 100 minutes.
Time for swimming = 18.2
Time for Biking = 45..4
Time for Running = 100 – 18.2 – 45.4 =36.4
Time for running should be lesser or equal to 36.4 to reach the goal time.
Answer b:
Time for running should be lesser or equal to 36.4 to reach the goal time.
Goal length =3.1 miles.
To reach goal he should travel 3.1 miles in less than or equal to 36.4 minutes.

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Graph the numbers that are solutions of both inequalities.
Question 53.
x + 7 > 9 and 8x ≤ 64
Answer:
x + 7 > 9
subtract 7 on both sides we get,
x >2

8x ≤ 64
Divide by 8 on both sides we get,
x ≤ 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-53

Question 54.
z – 3 ≤ 8 and 6z < 72
Answer:
z – 3 ≤ 8
add 3 on both sides we get,
z ≤ 11

6z < 72
Divide by 6 on both sides we get,
z < 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-54

Question 55. w + 5 ≥ 8 and 4w > 20
Answer:
w + 5 ≥ 8
subtract 5 on both sides we get,
w ≥ 3

4w > 20
Divide 4 on both sides we get,
w > 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-55

Question 56.
g – 6 ≤ 1 and 3g ≥ 21
Answer:
g – 6 ≤ 1
Add 6 on both sides we get,
g ≤ 7

3g ≥ 21
Divide by 3 on both sides we get,
g ≥ 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-56

Question 57.
2.7 + k ≥ 5.3 and 0.8k ≤ 3.36
Answer:
2.7 + k ≥ 5.3
Subtract 2.7 on both sides we get,
k ≥ 2.6

0.8k ≤ 3.36
Divide by 0.8 on both sides we get,
k ≤ 4.2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-57

Question 58.
p + \(\frac{3}{4}\) < 3 and \(\frac{1}{4}\)p > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer:
p + \(\frac{3}{4}\) < 3
p + 0.75 < 3
Subtract 0.75 on both sides we get,
p < 2.25

\(\frac{1}{4}\)p > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
0.25p > 0.375
Divide by 0.25 on both sides we get,
p > 1.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-58

Question 59.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are selling items from a catalog for a school fundraiser. Find the range of sales that will earn you at least $40 and at most $50.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 17
Answer:
Earn $5 for every $50 in sales + take one catalog.
$50 > 1 + $5
If you sell at most $50 that is $50 ≤ if it equal to 50 only  you get $5 and 1 catalog.
If you sellat least $40 that is 40 ≥ if it is greater or equal to 40 only you get $5 and 1 catalog .

CRITICAL THINKING Let a > b> 0 and x > y> 0. Tell whether the statement is always true. Explain your reasoning.
Question 60.
a + x > b + y
Answer:
It is true
Explanation:
a > b> 0 and x > y> 0. in this both a and x are greater numbers. and if both numbers are added then the resultant will always be greater.

Question 61.
a – x > b – y
Answer:
Cant say as it depends on the values.
Explanation:
take a example take a=2 b=1 x=3 y= 2
2-3 = -2
1-2 = -1
-2 < -1
It is not true

Question 62.
ax > by
Answer:
It is true
Explanation:
a > b> 0 and x > y> 0. in this both a and x are greater numbers. and if both numbers are multipied then the resultant will always be greater.

Question 63.
\(\frac{a}{x}\) > \(\frac{y}{b}\)
Answer:
Cant say as it depends on the values.

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
You use a coordinate plane to design a kite for a competition. The vertices of the design are A(0, 0), B(13.5, 9), C(27, 0), and D(13.5, −36). The coordinates are measured in inches. Find the least number of square yards of fabric you need to make the kite.

Understand the problem.
You know the vertices of your kite design in a coordinate plane, where the coordinates are measured in inches. You are asked to find the least number of square yards of fabric needed to make the kite.

Make a plan.
First, draw a diagram of the design in a coordinate plane. Then decompose the figure into two triangles to find the area of the kite in square inches. Finally, convert the area from square inches to square yards.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cc 1

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer:

Question 2.
You have $240 in a savings account. You deposit $60 per month. The tape diagram represents the ratio of money deposited to money withdrawn each month. Find the monthly change in your account balance. How long will it take for the account to have a balance of $0? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cc 2
Answer:

Question 3.
A cord made of synthetic fiber can support 630 pounds, which is at least 450% of the weight that can be supported by a cord made of steel. Graph the possible weights that can be supported by the steel cord.
Answer:
Synthentic fibre = 630 pounds

Performance Task

Launching a CubeSat
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Designing a CubeSat.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cc 3

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cr 1

Graphic Organizers

You can use a Summary Triangle to explain a concept. Here is an example of a Summary Triangle for integers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
1. opposites
2. rational number
3. absolute value
4. coordinate plane
5. inequalities
6. solving inequalities using addition or subtraction
7. solving inequalities using multiplication or division
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cr 3

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 1

8.1 Integers (pp. 345–350)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of negative numbers and that they are used along with positive numbers to describe quantities.

Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 1.
An elevator goes down 8 floors.
Answer:
Down indicates negative number
-8

Question 2.
You earn $12.
Answer:
Earn indicates + number
so , +$12

Graph the integer and its opposite
Question 3.
-16
Answer:
The opposite of -16 is 16

Question 4.
13
Answer:
The opposite of 13 is -13

Question 5.
4
Answer:
The opposite of 4 is -4

Question 6.
– 100
Answer:
The opposite of -100 is 100

Identify the integer represented by the point on the number line.
Question 7.
A
Answer:
The point A represents 1
Explanation:
As it is exactly marked between 0 and 2

Question 8.
B
Answer:
The point B represents 10
Explanation:
It is marked on point 10

Question 9.
C
Answer:
The point C represents 7
Explanation:
As it is marked exactly in between 6 and 8.

Question 10.
D
Answer:
The point D represents -6
Explanation:
It is marked on point -6

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 2

8.2 Comparing and Ordering Integers (pp. 351–356)
Learning Target: Compare and order integers.

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 11
Answer:
4 > -7
Explanation:
All positive numbers are greater than negative numbers.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 12
Answer:
-1 < 0
Explanation:
All positive numbers are greater than negative numbers.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 13
Answer:
-5 > -8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 14.
– 5, 4, 2, – 3, – 1
Answer:
-5, -3, -1, 2, 4

Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 15.
5, – 20, – 10, 10, 15
Answer:
-20, -10, 5, 10, 15
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 16.
– 7, – 12, 9, 2, – 8
Answer:
-12, -8, -7, 2, 9
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 17.
Order the temperatures − 3°C, 8°C, − 12°C, − 7°C, and 0°C from coldest to warmest.

Answer: 
− 12°C, − 7°C, − 3°C, 0°C, 8°C
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 18.
Your teacher writes five different integers on a note card that are between −10 and 14. When the integers are ordered from least to greatest, the middle number is 1. How many of the integers are positive? negative? Explain.
Answer:

8.3 Rational Numbers (pp. 357–362)
Learning Target: Compare and order rational numbers.

Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 19.
–\(\frac{2}{5}\)
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{5}\) = -0.4
The opposite of -0.4 is 0.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-19
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 20.
1\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer:
1\(\frac{3}{4}\)=\(\frac{7}{4}\) = 1.75
The opposite of 1.75 is -1.75
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-20
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 21.
– 1.2
Answer:
The opposite of -1.2 is 1.2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-21
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 22.
2.75
Answer:
The opposite of 2.75 is -2.75
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-22
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 23
Answer:
-2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = – = -2.1
-2\(\frac{5}{6}\) = –\(\frac{17}{6}[/late[latex]\frac{13}{6}\)x] =-2.8

-2.1 > -2.8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 24
Answer:
–\(\frac{1}{3}\)= -0.3
–\(\frac{1}{8}\) = – 0.125
-0.3  <  -0.125
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 25
Answer:
-3.27 < -2.68
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 26.
– 2.04, – 3, – 2.4, – 2.19, – 5.8
Answer:
-5.8 < -3 < 2.4 < -2.19 < -2.04
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 27.
– 3\(\frac{7}{8}\), 4, – 3\(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Answer:
– 3\(\frac{7}{8}\) = – \(\frac{31}{8}\) = -3.8
– 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) = –\(\frac{15}{4}\) = – 3.75
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.5
\(\frac{1}{6}\) = 0.16
-3.8, 4, -3.75, 0.5, 0.16
-3.8<-3.75<0.16<0.5<4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 28.
Write a number that is greater than −7.81 and less than −7.
Answer:
-7>x>-7.81
it can be -7.1, -7.2 , ……

Question 29.
A dog buries a small bone −1\(\frac{5}{6}\) inches into the dirt. The dog buries a larger bone −1\(\frac{3}{4}\) inches into the dirt. Which bone is buried deeper?
Answer:
Small bone buried at −1\(\frac{5}{6}\) = −\(\frac{11}{6}\) = -1.83
Larger bone buried at −1\(\frac{3}{4}\) = −1\(\frac{7}{4}\) = – 1.75
Distance cant be in negative just compare the values and say which bone is buried deepest.
Small bone is buried deeper .

8.4 Absolute Value (pp. 363–368)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of absolute value.

Find the absolute value.
Question 30.
|- 8|
Answer:
The Absolute value of |- 8| = 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 31.
|13|
Answer:
The Absolute value of |13| = 13
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 32.
|3 \(\frac{6}{7}\)|
Answer:
|3 \(\frac{6}{7}\)|=|\(\frac{27}{7}\)|=|3.8|
The Absolute value of |3.8| = 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 33.
|- 1.34|
Answer:
The Absolute value of|- 1.34|= 1.34
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Copy and complete the statement using <, > , or =.
Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 34
Answer:
The Absolute value of|-2|= 2
2 = 2

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 35
Answer:
The Absolute value of |4.4|= 4.4
The Absolute value of |- 2.8 |= 2.8

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 36
Answer:
The Absolute value of |\(\frac{1}{6}\)|= \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 0.16
The Absolute value of |-\(\frac{2}{9}\)| = \(\frac{2}{9}\) = 0.22
0.16 < 0.22

Order the values from least to greatest.
Question 37.
– 15, |- 21|, |19|, – 20, 25
Answer:
The Absolute value of |-21|= 21
The Absolute value of |19|= 19
– 15, 21, 19, – 20, 25
-20<-15<19<21<25

Question 38.
0, |- 1|, – 2, |2|, – 3
Answer:
The Absolute value of |-1|= 1
The Absolute value of |2|= 2
0, 1, – 2, 2, – 3
-3< -2 < 0 < 1 < 2

Question 39.
Simplify −|− 35 |.
Answer:
The Absolute value of |-35|= 35
−|− 35 |= -35

Question 40.
The latitude of Erie, Pennsylvania, is 42.129. The latitude of Sydney, Australia, is −33.865. Positive values of latitude are north of the equator, negative values of latitude are south of the equator, and the latitude of the equator is 0. Which city is closest to the equator?
Answer:
latitude of Erie, Pennsylvania = 42.129.
latitude of Sydney, Australia = −33.865.
42.129>0>-33.865
latitude of Sydney, Australia is closest to the Equator

8.5 The Coordinate Plane (pp. 369–376)
Learning Target: Plot and reflect ordered pairs in all four quadrants of a coordinate plane.

Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 41
Question 41.
Point J
Answer:
The Point J is located at (-2,0)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is-2
The y- coordinate is 0

Question 42.
Point K
Answer:
The Point K is located at (-2,-4)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is -2
The y- coordinate is -4

Question 43.
Point L
Answer:
The Point L is located at (5,2)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is 5
The y- coordinate is 2

Question 44.
Point M
Answer:
The Point M is located at (-1,3)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is -1
The y- coordinate is 3

Question 45.
Point N
Answer:
The Point N is located at (3,-4)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is 3
The y- coordinate is -4

Question 46.
Point P
Answer:
The Point J is located at (1,0)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is 1
The y- coordinate is 0

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 47.
A (1, 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-47

X coordinate is 1
Y coordinate is 3
(1,3)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 48.
B (0, 3)
Answer:
X coordinate is 0
Y coordinate is 3
(0,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-48
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 49.
C (4, 2)
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is 2
C (4, 2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-49
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 50.
D (- 3, 1)
Answer:
X coordinate is -3
Y coordinate is 1
(-3,1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-50
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Reflect the point in (a) the x-axis and (b) the y-axis.
Question 51.
(4, 1)
Answer:
Plot (4,1) , (4,-1) and (-4,1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-51
Explanation:
To reflect (4,1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 1 is -1
To reflect (4,1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 4 is -4
So the reflection of (4,1)in the x-axis is (4,-1)
So the reflection of (4,1)in the y-axis is(-4,1)

Question 52.
(- 2, 3)
Answer:
Plot (- 2, 3) , (-2,-3) and (2,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-52

Explanation:
To reflect (- 2, 3) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 3 is -3
To reflect (- 2, 3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -2 is 2
So the reflection of (- 2, 3) in the x-axis is (-2,-3) 
So the reflection of(- 2, 3) in the y-axis is (2,3)

Question 53.
(2, – 5)
Answer:
Plot (2, – 5) , (2, 5) and (-2,-5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-53
Explanation:
To reflect (2, – 5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -5 is 5
To reflect(2, – 5)in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2 is -2
So the reflection of(2, – 5) in the x-axis is (2, 5)
So the reflection of (2, – 5) in the y-axis is(-2,-5)

Question 54.
(- 3.5, – 2.5)
Answer:
Plot (- 3.5, – 2.5), (- 3.5,  2.5) and (3.5, – 2.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-54
Explanation:
To reflect (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -3.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -2.5 is 2.5
To reflect (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -2.5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -3.5 is 3.5
So the reflection of (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the x-axis is (- 3.5,  2.5)
So the reflection of (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the y-axis is (3.5,  -2.5)

Reflect the point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis.
Question 55.
(1, 2)
Answer:
Plot (1,2) , (1,-2) and (-1,-2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-55
Explanation:
To reflect (1,2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 1,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 2 is -2
To reflect (1,-2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 1 is -1
So the reflection of (1,2)  in the x-axis is (1,-2)
So the reflection of (1,-2) in the y-axis is(-1,-2)

Question 56.
(- 4, 6)
Answer:
Plot (- 4, 6) , (-4,-6) and (4, -6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-56
Explanation:
To reflect (- 4, 6) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 6 is -6
To reflect (- 4, -6) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -6,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -4 is 4
So the reflection of (- 4, 6) in the x-axis is (-4,-6)
So the reflection of (-4,-6) in the y-axis is (4, -6)

Question 57.
(3, – 4)
Answer:
Plot (3, – 4) , (3,  4) and (-3,  4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-57
Explanation: 
To reflect (3, – 4)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -4 is 4
To reflect (3,  4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 3 is -3
So the reflection of (3, – 4) in the x-axis is (3,  4)
So the reflection of (3,  4) in the y-axis is (-3,  4)

Question 58.
(- 3, – 3)
Answer:
Plot (- 3, – 3) , (-3, 3) and (3, 3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-58
Explanation:
To reflect (- 3, – 3)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -3 is 3
To reflect (-3, 3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -3 is 3
So the reflection of (- 3, – 3) in the x-axis is (-3, 3)
So the reflection of(-3, 3) in the y-axis is (3, 3)

Question 59.
Use the map of the town.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 59
a. Which building is located at(−1, 1)?
b. Name a building on the positive x-axis.
c. In which quadrant is the bank located?
d. Write two different ordered pairs that represent the location of the train station.
e. You can find the original location of the movie theater by reflecting its location in the y-axis. What building is now in that location?
Answer a :
The Building which is located at (−1, 1) is Drug store

Answer b :
The building on the positive x-axis. is Hospital.

Answer c :
The bank located is located in Quadrant II.

Answer d :
The two different ordered pairs that represent the location of the train station are (-1,-3), (-2,-3)

Question 60.
Name the ordered pair that is 5 units right and 2 units down from (−3, 4).
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-60
Explanation:
The ordered pair is located at (-3,4) it is then moved to 5 units right and the 2 units down then the new point is located at ( 2, 2)

Question 61.
A point is reflected in the x-axis. The reflected point is (3, −9). What is the original point?
Answer:
The reflected point is (3, −9)
The point is (3 , 9)
Explanation: 
The reflected point in the x axis is (3, -9) It means x-axis reflection means it has same x coordinate and the y coordinate will be the opposite of the y-coordinate. when opposite is -9 then the y coordinate will be 9 .

8.6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane (pp. 377–382)
Learning Target: Draw polygons in the coordinate plane and find distances between points in the coordinate plane.

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 62.
A (3, 2), B (4, 7), C (6, 0)
Answer:
Plot the given points .
The polygon formed after plotting given points is triangle.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-62

Question 63.
A (1, 2), B (1, – 7), C (5, – 7), D (8, 2)
Answer:
Plot the given points A (1, 2), B (1, – 7), C (5, – 7), D (8, 2)
The polygon formed is Trapezoid
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-question-7

Question 64.
E (−1, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)), F(1, 0), G(-2, 0), H(-4, -3\(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
E (−1, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)) = E (−1, \(\frac{7}{2}\)) = E ( -1, 3.5)
H(-4, -3\(\frac{1}{2}\)) = H(-4, –\(\frac{7}{2}\)) = H ( -4, – 3.5)
Plot the points E ( -1, 3.5), F(1, 0), G(-2, 0), H ( -4, – 3.5).
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-64

Find the distance between the points.
Question 65.
(4, – 2), (4, – 5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-65

Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|-5| – |-2| = 3
So the distance between the points (4, – 2), (4, – 5) is 3

Question 66.
(7, 2), (- 4, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-66

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-4| + |7| = 4 + 7 = 11
So the distance between the points (7, 2), (- 4, 2) is 11

Question 67.
(- 1, 6), (- 1, – 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-67
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same X-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|6| + |-3| = 6 + 3 = 9
So the distance between the points (- 1, 6), (- 1, – 3) is 9

Question 68.
(- 5, – 8) , (- 9, – 8)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-68
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-9| – |-5| = 9 – 5 = 4
So the distance between the points (- 5, – 8) , (- 9, – 8) is 4

Find the perimeter and the area of the polygon with the given vertices.
Question 69.
T (2, 7), U (2, 9), V (5, 9), W(5, 7)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-69
Explanation:
Plot the given points
The polygon formed is rectangle.
The length of the rectangle = 3 units
The breadth of the rectangle = 2 units
Area of the Rectangle = length × Breadth = 3 × 2 = 6 sq.units

Question 70.
P (4, – 3), Q (4, 2), R (9, 2), S (9, -3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-70
Explanation:
Plot the given points
The polygon formed is Square.
Side of the square = 5
Area of the Square = side × side = 5 × 5 = 25 sq.units

Question 71.
W (- 12, – 2), X (- 12, 13), Y (5, 13), Z (5, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-71
Explanation:
Plot the given points
The polygon formed is rectangle.
The length of the rectangle = 17 units
The breadth of the rectangle = 15 units
Area of the Rectangle = length × Breadth = 17 × 15 = 255 sq.units

Question 72.
You design the quilt shown using a coordinate plane in which the coordinates are measured in inches. The vertices of the quilt are (−3, 5), (−3, −7), (9, 5), and (9, −7).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 72
a. Find the perimeter and the area of the quilt.
b. The quilt is made of identical-sized square pieces. What is the area of one of the square pieces?
Answer a :
The polygon formed is Square
Side of the square = 12
Perimeter of the square = 4 × side = 4 × 12 = 48 units
Area of the square = side × side = 12 × 12 = 144 sq units

Answer b :
Here the polygon is square
As per given figure we can see that 12 small squares are formed inside the square.
Total Side of the square = 12
The side is having 4 squares. to find the side of small square we should divide side of big square by 4
Side of small square  = 12 ÷ 4 = 3
Side of small square = 3
Area of small square = side × side = 3 × 3 = 9 sq units

Question 73.
Draw a rectangle with a perimeter of 14 units in a coordinate plane where the vertices are in two quadrants.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-73
The length of the rectangle = 4 units
The breadth of the rectangle = 3 units

Question 74.
Draw a triangle with an area of 21 square units in a coordinate plane where the vertices are not all in the same quadrant.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-74

8.7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities (pp. 383 – 390)
Learning Target: Write inequalities and represent solutions of inequalities on a number line.

Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 75.
A number m is less than 5.
Answer:
m < 5

Question 76.
Three times a number h is at least − 12.
Answer:
3h ≥ – 12

Tell whether x = 8 is a solution of the inequality.
Question 77.
\(\frac{x}{2}\) ≥ 3
Answer:
\(\frac{x}{2}\) ≥ 3
Multiply by 2 on both sides we get,
x ≥ 6
Put x = 8 then
8 ≥ 6 is true.
So the given number is a solution for the inequality equation.

Question 78.
13 – x > 5
Answer:
13 – x > 5
subtract 13 on both sides we get
– x > -8
Mutlipy by – on both sides we get,
x > 8
Put x= 8 we get,
8 > 8 is wrong.
8 cant be the solution for the inequality equation .

Question 79.
19 > 2x
Answer:
19 > 2x
Divide by 2 on both sides we get,
9.5 > x
put x = 8 we get,
9.5 > 8 is true.
So the 8 is the solution for the inequality equation .

Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 80.
x < 0
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-80

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 81.
a ≥ 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-81

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 82.
n ≤ – 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-82
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 83.
The speed limit on a road is 35 miles per hour. Write and graph an inequality that represents the legal speeds on the road.
Answer:
Speed limit = S = 35 miles per hour
S ≤ 35
Speed should be 35 or less but not greater than 35 .
Below graph shows the speed limit
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-83
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 84.
Write an inequality and a word sentence that represent the graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 84
Answer:
x < 3
You lose 3$ in a match .

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

8.8 Solving Inequalities (pp. 391–398)
Learning Target: Write and solve inequalities.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 85.
x + 1 > 3
Answer:
x + 1 > 3
subtract 1 on both sides we get,
x > 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-85
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 86.
y + 8 ≥ 9
Answer:
y + 8 ≥ 9
subtract 8 on both sides we get,
y ≥ 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-86
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 87.
k – 7 ≤ 0
Answer:
k – 7 ≤ 0
Add 7 on both side we get,
k ≤ 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-87
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 88.
9n ≥ 63
Answer:
9n ≥ 63
Divide 9 on both sides we get,
n ≥ 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-88
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 89.
24 < 11 + x
Answer:
24 < 11 + x
subtract 11 on both sides we get,
13 < x
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-89
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 90.
x ÷ 2 < 4
Answer:
x ÷ 2 < 4
Multiply by 2 on both sides we get,
x < 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-90
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 91. 4 ≤ n – 4
Answer:
4 ≤ n – 4
Add 4 on both sides we get,
8 ≤ n
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-91
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 92.
10p > 40
Answer:
10p > 40
Divide 10 on both sides we get,
p > 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-92
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 93
s – 1.5 < 2.5
Answer:
s – 1.5 < 2.5
Add 1.5 on both sides we get,
s < 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-93
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 94.
\(\frac{5}{3}\)x ≤ 10
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{3}\)x ≤ 10
Multiply by \(\frac{3}{5}\) on both sides we get,
x ≤ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-94
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 95.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + m ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + m ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
0.25 + m ≤ 0.5
Subtract 0.25 on both sides we get,
m ≤ 0.25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-95
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 96.
\(\frac{3}{11}\)k < 15
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{11}\)k < 15
multiply by \(\frac{11}{3}\) on both sides we get,
k < 55
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-96
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 97.
Write two inequalities that have the same solution set and can be solved using different operations.
Answer:
s – 15 < 25
4s  < 160
These are two equations which have same set of solutions that is s < 40.

Question 98.
You have $15 to spend on a ticket to a movie and snacks. Find the possible amounts you can spend on snacks.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 98
Answer:
Total Amount with me = $15
Cost of movie theater = $ 6
Cost of snacks = $15 – $6 =$ 9
Possible amount can spend on snacks can be lesser than or equal to $9.

Question 99.
You want to use a square section of your yard for a chicken pen. You have at most 52 feet of fencing to form the pen. Find the possible lengths of each side of the chicken pen.
Answer:
fencing area of the pen = 52 feet.
Fencing is around the square borders which means it is the perimeter of the square
Perimeter of the square = 4 × side = 52
side = 52 ÷ 4 =13
Possible lengths of each side of the chicken pen = 13 feet.

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Practice Test

Order the values from least to greatest.
Question 1.
0, – 2, 3, 1, – 4
Answer:
0, – 2, 3, 1, – 4
-4<-2<0<1<3
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 2.
– 8, |- 3|, |5|, 4, – 5
Answer:
Absolute values of |- 3| = 3 and  |5|= 5
– 8, 3, 5, 4, – 5
-8<-5<3<4<5
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 3.
– 2.46, – 2.5, – 2, 1, – 2.293
Answer:
– 2.46, – 2.5, – 2, 1, – 2.293
-2.5<-2.46<-2.293<-2.1
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 14.
23
Answer:
The opposite of 23 is – 23.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-14

Question 15.
– 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
– 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) = – \(\frac{4}{3}\) = – 1.3
The opposite of -1.3 is 1.3.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-15

Find the absolute value.
Question 16.
|7|
Answer:
The absolute value of |7| = 7
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x . All absolute values are positive.

Question 17.
|- 11|
Answer:
The Absolute value of |- 11| = 11
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x . All absolute values are positive.

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 8
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{3}\) = -0.66
–\(\frac{3}{5}\) = – 0.6
– 0.66 < – 0.6
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 9
Answer:
Absolute value of |2.5| is 2.5
2.5 = 2.5

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 20.
J (4, 0)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-20

Question 21.
L (1.5, – 3.5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-21

Question 22.
M (- 2, – 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-22

Question 23.
Reflect (- 5, 1) in (a) the x-axis, (b) the y -axis, and (c) the y -axis followed by the -axis.
Plot the points (- 5, 1) , (-5, -1), (5, 1) and (5, -1)
Answer a :
(- 5, 1)
Explanation:
To reflect(- 5, 1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 1 is -1
So the reflection of (- 5, 1) in the x-axis is (-5, -1)
Answer b :
Explanation:
To reflect (- 5, 1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5 is 5
So the reflection of (- 5, 1) in the x-axis is (5, 1)
Answer c :
To reflect(- 5, 1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 1 is -1
To reflect (- 5, -1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5 is 5
So the reflection of (- 5, 1) in the x-axis is (-5, -1)
So the reflection of (- 5, -1) in the y-axis is (5, -1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-23

Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 24.
x ≥ 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-24

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 25.
m ≤ – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-25

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 26.
x – 3 < 7
Answer:
x – 3 < 7
Add 3 on both sides we get,
x < 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-26
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 27.
12 ≥ n + 6
Answer:
12 ≥ n + 6
Subtract 6 on both sides we get,
6 ≥ n
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-27

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 28.
\(\frac{4}{3}\)b ≤ 12
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{3}\)b ≤ 12
Multiply \(\frac{3}{4}\) on both sides we get,
b ≤ 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-28

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 29.
72 < 12p
Answer:
72 < 12p
Divide by 12 on both sides we get,
6 < p
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-29

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 30.
A hurricane has wind speeds that are greater than or equal to 74 miles per hour. Write an inequality that represents the possible wind speeds during a hurricane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 20
Answer:
Wind speed is greater than or equal to 74 miles per hour .
w ≥ 74

Question 31.
Two vertices of a triangle are F (1, – 4) and G(6, – 4). Find two possible points that represent the third vertex so that the triangle has an area of 20 square units.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-31
Explanation:
The possible two vertices are H(6,0) and D(6,-8).
Area of triangle = 20 ( Base × Height)
When base is 5 units from graph after plotting the given points it will be known
we have to mark H and D so that the height of triangle should have 4 units ( 20 ÷ 5) .

Question 32.
The table shows the melting points (in degrees Celsius) of several elements. Compare the melting point of mercury to the melting point of each of the other elements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 22
Answer:
Mercury > Randon
-38.83 > -71
Mercury < Bromine
-38.38 < -7.2
Mercury < Cesium
-38.38 < 28.5
Mercury <Francium
-38.38 < 27

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 1
Question 1.
What is the value of the expression when a = 6, b = 5, and c = 4?
8a – 3c + 5b
A. 11
B. 53
C. 61
D. 107
Answer:
8a – 3c + 5b
Take a = 6, b = 5, and c = 4
8×6 -3×4 + 5×5
= 48 – 12 + 25
=48 +13
=61
Option C is correct

Question 2.
Point p is plotted in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 2
What are the coordinates of point?
F. (- 5, – 3)
G. (- 5, 3)
H. (- 3, – 5)
I. (3, – 5)
Answer:
P(-5,3)
The x- coordinate is -5
The y coordinate is 3

Question 3.
What is the value of that makes the equation true?
a + 6 = 18
Answer:
a + 6 = 18
a = 18 – 6
a = 12
When a = 12 then the equation becomes true.

Question 4.
Which list of values is in order from least to greatest?
A. 2, |- 3|, |4|, – 6
B. – 6, |4| , 2, |- 3|
C. – 6, |- 3| , 2, |4|
D. – 6, 2, |- 3|, |4|
Answer:
Option D
-6, 2, |- 3|, |4|
Absolute values of |- 3|is 3 and  |4| is 4
so we get the order as.
-6, 2, 3, 4

Question 5.
What is the height of the parallelogram?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 5
F. 6 meters
G. 12 meters
H. 75 meters
I. 1350 meters
Answer:
Area of the parallelogram = 90sq mtrs.
Base of the parallelogram = 15m
Area of the parallelogram = Base × Height
Height of the parallelogram = 90 ÷ 15 = 6 metres.

Question 6.
Which property is illustrated by the statement?
4 + (6 + n) = (4 + 6) + n
A. Associative Property of Addition
B. Commutative Property of Addition
C. Associative Property of Multiplication
D. Distributive Property
Answer:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.

Question 7.
Which number line shows the graph of x ≥ 5?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 7
Answer:
Number line F shows x ≥ 5.

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 8.
Which number is the greatest?
A. \(\frac{7}{8}\)
B. 0.86
C. \(\frac{22}{25}\)
D. 85%
Answer:
A. \(\frac{7}{8}\) = 0.875
B. 0.86
C. \(\frac{22}{25}\) =0.88
D. 85% = 0.85
Option is the greatest number 0.88

Question 9.
What is the area of the shaded region?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 9
F. 23 units2
G. 40 units2
H. 48 units2
I. 60 units2
Answer:
Area of the Rectangle = Length × Breadth = 7 × 8 =56 units2
Area of the triangle = base × Height = 4 × 4 =16 units2
Area of the shaded region = Area of the rectangle – Area of the Triangle = 56 – 16 = 40 units2

Question 10.
Write 23.5% as a decimal.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 10
Answer:
23.5% when % is removed we should divide the number by 100
23.5 ÷ 100 = 0.235 .
The decimal point is moved two points to the left .

Question 11.
Use grid paper to complete the following.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 11
Part A Draw an x-axis and a y-axis of a coordinate plane. Then plot and label the point (2, 3).
Part B Plot and label four points that are 3 units away from (2, – 3).
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane- Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Cumulative-Practice-Question-11

Question 12.
What is the perimeter of the rectangle with the vertices shown below?
A (- 4, – 1), B (- 4, 7), C (1, 7), D (1, – 1)
A. 8 units
B. 13 units
C. 26 units
D. 40 units
Answer:
Option C = 26 units
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane- Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Cumulative-Practice-Question-12
Explanation:
From the graph we know
length of the rectangle = 8
Breadth of the rectangle =5
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2 ( length + breadth) = 2 ( 8 + 5) = 2 ( 13) = 26 units

Question 13.
Which net does not form a cube?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 13
Answer:
2, 3, 5, 10, 11 and 16 cannot make a cube and they are non-nets.
Option G does not form a cube.

Question 14.
Which value of makes the equation true?
\(\frac{3}{4}\)y = 12
A. 9
B. 11\(\frac{1}{4}\)
C. 12\(\frac{3}{4}\)
D. 16
Answer:
Option A is correct
Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)y = 12
Divide by \(\frac{4}{3}\) on both sides we get,
y = 9

Hope you are happy with the information given above. Get the Big Ideas Math Answer Grade 6 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pdf’s for free of cost. You can get the various information of all math concepts at our site. Therefore, save our site to your favourites and also share it with your friends and peers to make your preparation success. Click on the subscribe button to get the instant updates of all the math concepts and preparation materials.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5

Get Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency Answer Key pdf for free of cost. This handy BIM 3rd Grade 5th Chapter Patterns and Fluency Solutions are useful while preparing for the test. Students who want to score good marks in the exam have to prepare well by referring to Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency. Hence download Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 5th Chapter Patterns and Fluency Answers PDF.

Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency

The different lessons in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency Book are Identify Patterns in the Multiplication Table, Use the Multiplication Table, and Complete Multiplication Tables. Use the link mentioned below to get the solutions for all the problems of BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency.

Check out topicwise Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency available here during your practice sessions. Make the most of them and score better grades in your exams. You can access whichever topic you feel like preparing by tapping on the links listed here.

Lesson 1: Identify Patterns in the Multiplication Table

Lesson 2: Use the Multiplication Table

Lesson 3: Complete Multiplication Tables

Lesson 4: More Problem Solving

Performance Task

Lesson 5.1 Identify Patterns in the Multiplication Table

Explore and Grow

Complete the table
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 1
Answer:

Structure
Describe a pattern you notice

Think and Grow: The Multiplication Table

Example
Identify the property shown by the pattern in the multiplication table.
(1 × 3) + (1 × 5) = 1 × (3 + 5)
(2 × 3) + (2 × 5) = 2 × (3 + 5)
(3 × 3) + (3 × 5) = 3 × (3 + 5)
Describe the pattern in your own words.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 2
What property does the pattern show?
Answer:
It shows the Distributive property. The distributive property tells us how to solve expressions in the form of a(b + c).  The distributive property is sometimes called the distributive law of multiplication and division.
Distributive property => a(b+c)=ab+ac.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Show how the Distributive Property works for other columns above.
Answer: As per distributive property. b and c are presented on column.It is represented in above figure clearly.

Question 2
Describe the pattern shown by the shaded products in the multiplication table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 3
Look at the factors of the shaded products that are the same. What do you notice?
What property explains this pattern?
Shade a different diagonal in the table that shows a similar pattern as the shaded products
Answer:
It shows the products are same (a x b) = (b x a) equations. whatever may be the order but multiplication of of any two numbers will always be the same in vice versa.
This is a commutative property.
The commutative property states that the numbers on which we operate can be moved or swapped from their position without making any difference to the answer. The property holds for Addition and Multiplication, but not for subtraction and division.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the multiplication table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 4

Question 3.
Shade the rows for 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 one color. Describe the pattern in the products.
Answer:
The products end in 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8; the products are even.

Question 4.
Compare the rows for 2 and 4. Describe the pattern in the products.
Answer:
The products of 4 are the products of 2 doubled.

Question 5.
Shade the rows for 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 another color. Describe the pattern in the products. What do you notice about the products and their factors?
Answer:
The products repeat–even, odd.

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 5
Answer:
No, It cannot be.
Explanation:
An odd times even is always even.It means when an even number is multiplied by odd number product will be even.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Does the multiplication table above have more even products or more odd products? Explain.
Answer:
Sometimes there are even numbers next to each other in the table. However, there are never odd numbers next to each other.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton earns the same amount of money each week. The multiplication table shows the amount (in dollars) he earns after 2 weeks, 4 weeks, and 6 weeks. If the pattern continues, how much money will he earn after 10 weeks?
Describe the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 6
Newton will earn $ _____ after 10 weeks.
Answer:
Money earned in one week = 8
Money earned in 10 weeks = 8 x 10 = 80.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You plant a 10-inch-tall bamboo cane in the ground. It grows thesame number of inches each day. Find and shade the pattern inthe multiplication table above. How many inches does the bamboo grow each day?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 7
How tall is the bamboo after 6 days? If the pattern continues, how tall will the bamboo be after 8 days?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 8

Answer:
As per tablular form given for every 2 days it goes 3 inches.
Bamboo tree growth after 8 days = 3 x 8 = 24 inches.

DIG DEEPER!
A different type of bamboo grows two times as fast. Explain how you can use the multiplication table tofind how many inches this bamboo will grow in 8 days
Answer:
Bamboo tree growth is 2 times faster than old bamboo tree so, 2 days growth is 2 x 3 = 6 inches.
Bamboo tree growth after 8 days = 8 x 6 =48 inches.

Identify Patterns in the Multiplication Table Homework & Practice 5.1

Question 1.
Use the multiplication table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 9
Look at the shaded products. Describe the pattern.
Look at the factors of the shaded products that are the same. What do you notice?
What property explains this pattern?
What do you notice about the factors of the shaded product that does not repeat? Explain why you think this happens.
Shade a different diagonal in the table that shows a similar pattern as the shaded products.
Answer:
It shows the products are same (a x b) = (b x a) equations. whatever may be the order but multiplication of of any two numbers will always be the same in vice versa.
This is a cummutative property.
The commutative property states that the numbers on which we operate can be moved or swapped from their position without making any difference to the answer. The property holds for Addition and Multiplication, but not for subtraction and division.

Question 2.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says the product of a number and 6 is double the product of that same number and 3. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 10
Answer:
As per above condition equation formed => a x 6 = 2(a x 3)
=> 6a=6a.
Therefore, It is true.

Question
Modeling Real Life
A 10-pound GrA 10-pound great Dane puppy gains the same number of against the same number of pounds each week. The multiplication table shows how many pounds she gains after 2 weeks, 4 weeks, and 6 weeks. How many pounds does she gain each week?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.1 11
How much does the puppy weigh after 6 weeks?
If she continues togain the same number of pounds each week, how much will she weigh after 7 weeks?
Another puppy gains 6 pounds in 2 weeks and 12 pounds in 4 weeks. How many pounds does he gain each week?
Answer:
As per table for 2 weeks it gains 4 pounds then one week it gains 2 pounds.
It is clear that each week it gains = 2 pounds.
After 7 weeks it gains = 7 x 2 =14 pounds.

Another puppy gains 6 pounds in 2 weeks and 12 pounds in 4 weeks. so it is clear that it gains 3 pounds in one week.
one week weight gain = 6 by 2 = 3 pounds.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
A total of 20 horses are divided equally into 4 races. How many horses are in each race?
Answer:
Total number horses = 20
No. of races = 4
Number of horses in each race= 20/4 = 5 horses .

Lesson 5.2 Use the Multiplication Table

Explore and Grow

Use the multiplication table to complete the equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 1
3 × 1 = _____
5 × ____ = 15
15 ÷ ____ = 3
15 ÷ 3 = ____
Answer:
3 × 1 = _3____

5 × __3__ = 15

15 ÷ ____ = 3
__5___x 3=15

.

15 ÷ 3 = ____
3x__5__=15.

Structure
How can you use the multiplication table to divide?
Answer:
convert the equation into multiplication form.
and represent the product and factors in the multiplication table
Explanation: 12÷3=____.
3 x ____ = 12.
3 x 4 = 12.

Think and Grow: Use the Multiplication Table

Example
Use the multiplication table to find 6 × 3.
Think: Find the number where the row for 6 and the column for 3 meet.
6 × 3 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 2
Example
Use the multiplication table to find 72 ÷ 8.
Think: Find 72 in the row for 8. In what column is 72?
A related fact is 8 × __9__ = 72.
So, 72 ÷ 8 = __9___

Show and Grow

Use the multiplication table.

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 1

a X b = c

where a,b are factors and c is the product

a is represented in rows and b is represented in columns.

common point where a and b intersect gives c .

Question 1.
4 × 7 = ____
Answer: 28

Question 2.
10 × 9 = ____
Answer: 90

Question 3.
1 × 6 = ____
Answer:6

 

Question 4.
20 =5 X ____
5 × ____ = 20
Answer: 4

Question 5.
12 ÷ 2 = ____
2 × ____ = 12
Answer:6

Question 6.
27 ÷ 9 = ____
9 × _____ = 27
Answer:3

Question 7.
32 ÷ 4 = _____
4 × ____ = 32
Answer:8

Question 8.
49 ÷ 7 = ____
7 × ____ = 49
Answer:7

Question 9.
56 ÷ 8 = _____
8 × _____ = 56
Answer:7

Write the related multiplication equation. Then use the multiplication table to complete the related facts.
Question 10.
42 ÷ 6 = ____
Answer:

6 x ____ = 42

6 x 7=42

Question 11.
64 ÷ 8 = _____
Answer:

8 x ____ = 64

8 x 8 = 64

Question 12.
35 ÷ 7 = ____
Answer:

7 x ____ = 35

7 x 5 = 35

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the related multiplication equation. Then use the multiplication table to complete the related facts.
Question 13.
8 ÷ 2 = ____
Answer:

2 x ____ = 8

2 x 4 = 8

Question 14.
21 ÷ 3 = ____
Answer:

3 x ____ = 21

3 x 7 = 21

Question 15.
50 ÷ 10 = _____
Answer:

10 x ____ = 50

10 x 5 = 50.

Question 16.
24 ÷ 8 = _____
Answer:

8 x ____ = 24

8 x 3 = 24.

Question 17.
54 ÷ 9 = _____
Answer:

9 x ____ = 54

9 x 6 = 54

Question 18.
40 ÷ 5 = _____
Answer:

5 x ____ = 40

5 x 8 = 40

Question 19.
63 ÷ 7 = _____
Answer:

7 x ____ = 63

7 x 9 = 63

Question 20.
25 ÷ 5 = ____
Answer:

5 x ____ = 25

5 x 5 = 25

Question 21.
56 ÷ 8 = _____
Answer:

8 x ____ = 56

8 x  7= 56

Question 22.
5 × 2 = ____
Answer: 10

Question 23.
6 × 6 = ____
Answer:  36

Question 24.
9 × 5 = ____
Answer: 45

Question 25.
4 × 10 = ____
Answer: 40

Question 26.
2 × 8 = ____
Answer: 16

Question 27.
10 × 10 = ____
Answer: 100

Question 28.
Precision
Explain how to use the multiplication table to solve
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 3
Answer:
a x b = c
Where a is represented in row and b is represented in the column of the tabular form then c is the intersection point.
36 = 4 x ____
36= 4 x 9.

Question 29.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which equation does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 4
Answer:
6 x 2 = 12 doesnot belong to other three equation here the product is 12 where other 3 equations has product as 6 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A frozen treat tray has 12 molds arranged in 3 equal rows. How many columns of molds are in the tray?
Use the multiplication table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 5
There are _______ columns of molds.
Answer:
Number of molds = 12
Number of rows = 3
Number of columns = 12 ÷  3
= 4 molds.

Show and Grow

Use the multiplication table to solve.
Question 30.
There are 28 pictures hanging on a classroom wall. They are arranged in 7 equal columns. How many rows of pictures are there?
Answer:
Total Number of pictures = 28
Number of columns = 7
Number of rows = 28 ÷  7
= 4 rows.

Question 31.
A street vendor has 24 drums to sell. She arranges them into equal rows. What are three different ways she can arrange the drums? Describe each arrangement by the number of rows and columns.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 6
Answer:
The number of drums=24.
Number of rows = 2
Number of columns = 24 ÷  2 = 12 .

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
A stage crew sets up 2 equal arrays of chairs for a school concert. There are 6 rows and 7 columns of chairs in each array. Are there enough chairs for 80 people?
Answer:
Number of rows = 6
Number of columns = 7
Number of chairs in one array = 6 x 7 = 42.
The number of array = 2 .
Total Number of chairs in 2 arrays = 2 x 42 = 84 chairs .
Therefore, 84 chairs are available for 80 people. so enough chairs are available.

Use the Multiplication Table Homework & Practice 5.2

Use the Multiplication Table
Question 1.
5 × 6 = _____
Answer: 30

Question 2.
9 × 7 = _____
Answer: 63

Question 3.
3 × 8 = _____
Answer: 24

Question 4.
14 ÷ 7 = _____
7 × ____ = 14
Answer: 2

Question 5.
16 ÷ 4 = ____
4 × ____ = 16
Answer: 4

Question 6.
30 ÷ 10 = ____
10 × _____ = 30
Answer: 3

Write the related multiplication or division equation. Then use the multiplication table to complete the related facts.
Question 7.
9 ÷ 9 = ____
Answer:
9 x ____ = 9
9 x 1 = 9

Question 8.
24 ÷ 4 = _____
Answer:
4 x ____ = 24
4 x 6 = 24.

Question 9.
18 ÷ 2 = ____
Answer:
2 x ____ = 18
2 x 9 = 18.

Question 10.
6 × 10 = ____
Answer: 60

Question 11.
1 × 5 = _____
Answer: 5

Question 12.
7 × 8 = ____
Answer: 56

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says that 8 ÷ 2 = 16. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
No.
Explanation:
8 ÷ 2 =4.

Question 14.
Precision 
Explain how to use the multiplication table to solve
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 7
Answer:
Covert the above equation in multiplication form.
7 x ____ = 28.
7 x 4 = 28.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
There are 30 umbrellas arranged in 5 equal rows. How many columns of umbrellas are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 8
Answer:
Number of Umbrellas = 30
Number of rows = 5
Number of columns = 30÷5
= 6.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 20 sweet potato slices divided equally between 2 oven trays. There are 2 rows of slices on each tray. How many columns are on each tray?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 9
Answer:
Total Number of sweet potatoes = 20.
The number of ovens=2.
Number of potatoes in each tray=20 ÷ 2 = 10.
The number of rows in each tray = 2.
Number of columns in each tray = 10 ÷ 2 = 5.

Review & Refresh

Find the product
Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 10
Answer:80

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 11
Answer:50

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 12
Answer:100

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.2 13
Answer:70

Find the missing factor.
Question 21.
10 × ____ = 90
Answer:10 x 9=90

Question 22.
60 = 10 × _____
Answer:60=10 x 6

Question 23.
____ × 10 = 0
Answer:0 x 10= 0

Lesson 5.3 Complete Multiplication Tables

Explore and Grow

  1. Complete the table
    Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.3 1
    Answer:

Critique Reasoning
Describe how you completed the table. Compare your method to your partner’s method. How are they the same? How are they different?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Complete Multiplication Tables

Example
Complete the table
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.3 2
Answer:

Step 1: Use multiplication or division to find the missing factors
2 × __8__ = 16 or 16 ÷ __8__ = 2
__5__ × 4 = 20 or 20 ÷ 4 = __5__

Step 2: Use multiplication to find the missing products
2 × 4 = __8___
2 × 9 = __18__
5 × 9 = __45___
6 × 4 = ____24_
6 × 8 = ____48_
6 × 9 = ___54__

Show and Grow

Complete the table.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 5 Patterns and Fluency 5.3 3
Answer:

Question 2.

Read more

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time Download Pdf links are available here. This Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time has solutions that can be understood by anyone easily. In this chapter each and every question was explained in a simple manner. The topics included in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell-Time are Tell Time to the Hour, Half Hour, Hour and Half Hour, etc. You can understand this chapter by seeing the pictures shown below. Hence scroll down this page and start practicing from now itself.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time

The Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time helps students for solving assignments and also for preparing for exams. Not only Students, teachers can also use BIM Grade 1 Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time as every question was solved in a simple way. By this teachers will not face any difficulty in making students understand the concepts. Click the below links and start your preparation. Test yourself by solving the problems given at the end of the chapter.

Lesson: 1 Tell Time to the Hour

Lesson: 2 Tell Time to the Half Hour

Lesson: 3 Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour

Lesson: 4 Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks

Performance Task

Tell Time Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
above
below
next to

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-Vocabulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the word.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 2
Answer:
3 o’ clock
Explanation:
The hour hand, the shorter of the two hands, completes 1 rotation ( 360° )  in 12 hours in a normal 12-hour analogue. The minute hand, the longer hand, completes 1 rotation through 360° in 60 minutes.
As the hour hand is pointing 3 and minutes hand is at 12 means 00 minutes
Thus the time is 3 ‘ 0 clock .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 3
Answer:
Digital clock showing time 3’o clock
Explanation:
In digital clock the time is represented with 4 numbers and two numbers are seperated with a colon in the middle.
the first two numbers indicates the hour and the other two numbers after the colon indicates the minutes. 00 minutes is indicated as 0 ‘ clock.
As the hour is showing 3 so the time is 3 ‘ 0 clock .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 4
Answer:
Hour hand
Explanation:
The red hand in the above clock is shorter hand called as a hour hand. It indicates the hour. It is between 3 and 4 so the time is half past 3′ o clock

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 5
Answer:
longer hand – Minutes hand
Explanation:
The blue hand in the above watch indicates the minute hand. it is showing 6 in the watch means 30 minutes.

Lesson 12.1 Tell Time to the Hour

Explore and Grow

Write the missing numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Clocks are used to measure time. A clock in general has 12 numbers written on it, from 1 to 12, an hour hand, and a minute hand.

Show and Grow

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 7
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
3 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 3 in the above clock. so the time is 3 o ‘ clock

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 8
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
7 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 7 in the above clock so the time is 7 o ‘ clock

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 9
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
1 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 1 in the above clock so the time is 1 o ‘ clock

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 10
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
9 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 9 in the above clock. so the time is 9 o ‘ clock

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 11
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
6 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 6 in the above clock. so the time is 6 o ‘ clock

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 12
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
11 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 11 in the above clock. so the time is 11 o ‘ clock

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 13
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
8 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 8 in the above clock. so the time is 8 o ‘ clock

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 14
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
12 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 12 in the above clock. so the time is 12 o ‘ clock

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 15
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
4 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 4 in the above clock. so the time is 4 o ‘ clock

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 10.
5 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 5 in the above clock. so the time is 5 o ‘ clock

Question 11.
10 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation:
To represent 10 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 10 .

Question 12.
2 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12
Explanation:
To represent 2 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 2 .

Question 13.
MP Precision
You wake up at 7 o’clock. Which clock shows the time you wake up?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 19
Answer:
I waked at 7 o’clock. the correct figure is second figure .
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 7 in the second clock. so the time is 7 o ‘ clock

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You eat dinner I hour later than your friend. Show and write the time you eat dinner.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 20
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 21

__________ o’ clock
Answer:
My friend had dinner at 5 o’ clock
I had my dinner at= 5 o’ clock + 1 hour = 6 o’ clock
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
I had my dinner at one hour later than my friend = 5 o’ clock + 1 hour = 6 o’ clock
To represent 6 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 6.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
Math class starts 1 hour earlier than science class. Show and write the time math class starts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 22
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 23

__________ o’ clock
Answer:
Time of science class =10 o’ clock
Time of Math class = 10 o’ clock – 1 hour = 9 o’ clock
Explanation:
Math class starts 1 hour earlier than science class that means one hour before 10 o’ clock.
One hour before 10 o’ clock is 9 o’clock.
To represent 9 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 9.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Show-Grow-Question-14

Tell Time to the Hour Practice 12.1 Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 24
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
10 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 10 in the above clock. so the time is 10 o ‘ clock

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 25
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
5 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 5 in the above clock. so the time is 5 o ‘ clock

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 26
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
1 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 1 in the above clock. so the time is 1 o ‘ clock

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 4.
4 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-4
Explanation:
To represent 4 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 4.

Question 5.
12 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-5
Explanation:
To represent 12 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 12.

Question 6.
8 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-6
Explanation:
To represent 8 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 8.

Question 7.
MP Precision
You eat a snack at 2 o’clock. Which clock shows the time you eat a snack?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 30
Answer:
The time we eat snacks is at 2 o’clock. which is the first orange clock showing the time 2 .
Explanation:
To represent 2 o’ clock the short hand – hour hand should point to 2.only in the first orange clock the hour hand is pointing to 2 o’clock.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend gets on the bus I hour later than you. Show and write the time your friend gets on the bus.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 31
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 32

__________ o’ clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-8
Time when i get into the bus is at 7 o’clock.
My friend get into bus 1 hour later than me = 7 o’clock + 1 hour  = 8 o’clock
Explanation:
My friend get into bus 1 hour later than me.one hour later than 7 o’ clock.
One hour after 7 o’ clock is 8 o’clock.
To represent 8 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 8.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
6 – ? = 4
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 33
6 – _________ = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-9
2 + 4 = 6
Explanation:
As per the above figure we observe that there are two sections in one section we contain 2 circles and in other sections we have 4 circles .
Total number of circles in all = 6 = 2 + 4 .
from there we get 6 – 2 = 4 .

Question 10.
8 – ? = 4
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 34
8 – _________ = 3
Answer:
8 – 5 = 3
8 = 3 + 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-10
Explanation:
To get 8 we need to add 3 to 5
so 8 – 5 = 3

Lesson 12.2 Tell Time to the Half Hour

Explore and Grow

Draw the hour hand and tell the time.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 35
The hour hand points to the 3.
It is __________ o’clock.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 3.
It is 3 o’clock.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 36
The hour hand points between the 3 and the 4.
It is half past ___________ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Explore-Grow-2
Explanation:
The hour hand points between the 3 and the 4.
It is half past 3 . so Time is 3 : 30
Show and Grow

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 37
half past __________
Answer:
half past 10 o’ clock
Time is 10:30
Explanation:
Half-past ten is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 10:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 10 and 11.
so the Time is 10:30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 38
half past __________
Answer:
half past 8 o’ clock
Time is 8:30
Explanation:
Half-past 8 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 8:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 8 and 9.
so the Time is 8:30.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 39
half past __________
Answer:
half past 5 o’ clock
Time is 5:30
Explanation:
Half-past 5 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 5 and 6.
so the Time is 5:30.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 40
half past __________
Answer:
half past 3 o’ clock
Time is 3:30
Explanation:
Half-past 3 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 3:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 3 and 4.
so the Time is 3:30.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 41
half past __________
Answer:
half past 12 o’ clock
Time is 12:30
Explanation:
Half-past 12 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 12:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 12 and 1.
so the Time is 12:30.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 42
half past __________
Answer:
half past 2 o’ clock
Time is 2:30
Explanation:
Half-past 2 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 2:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 2 and 3.
so the Time is 2:30.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 43
half past __________
Answer:
half past 7 o’ clock
Time is 7:30
Explanation:
Half-past 7 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 7:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 7 and 8.
so the Time is 7:30.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 44
half past __________
Answer:
half past 4 o’ clock
Time is 4:30
Explanation:
Half-past 4 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 4:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 4 and 5.
so the Time is 4:30.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 45
half past __________
Answer:
half past 5 o’ clock
Time is 5:30
Explanation:
Half-past 5 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 5 and 6.
so the Time is 5:30.

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 10.
half past 6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
To indicate half past 6 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 6 and 7 .
Half-past 6 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 6:00.
so the Time is 6:30.

Question 11.
1 o’clock
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 47
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation:
To indicate half past 1 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 1 and 2 .
Half-past 1 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 1:00.
so the Time is 1:30.

Question 12.
half past 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 48
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12
Explanation:
To indicate half past 9 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 9 and 10 .
Half-past 9 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 9:00.
so the Time is 9:30.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Is it time for lunch or recess?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 49
Answer:
Lunch time – half past 11
Explanation:
The short hand or hour hand in between 11 and 12 . so the time is half past 11.
So the time is 11 : 30

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Soccer practice lasts a half hour. Show and circle the time practice ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 50
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 51
half past 3      5 o’ clock       half past 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
The Time when soccer match started is  half past 4 that is 4 : 30 as per the above figure.
match lasts only half hour that is 30 minutes
So match ends at 4:30 + 30 minutes = 5 o’ clock
the time practice ends =5 o’ clock.
Explanation:
To represent 5 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 5 .

Show and Grow

Question 14.
A television show lasts a half hour. Show and circle the time the show ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 52
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 53
7 o’clock         half past 7        6 o’clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Show-Grow-Question-14
The Time when Television show started is  half past 6 that is 6 : 30 as per the above figure.
Television show lasts only half hour that is 30 minutes
So show ends at 6:30 + 30 minutes = 7 o’ clock
the time practice ends =7 o’ clock.
Explanation:
To represent 7 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 7 .

Tell Time to the Half Hour Practice 12.2

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 54
half past _____________
Answer:
half past 1 o’ clock
Time is 1:30
Explanation:
Half-past 1 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 1:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points is in between 1 and 2.
so the Time is 1:30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 55
half past _____________
Answer:
half past 5 o’ clock
Time is 5:30
Explanation:
Half-past 5 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points is in between 5 and 6.
so the Time is 6:30.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 56
half past _____________
Answer:
half past 12 o’ clock
Time is 12:30
Explanation:
Half-past 12 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 12:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points is in between 12 and 1.
so the Time is 12:30.

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 4.
half past 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 57
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-4
Explanation:
To indicate half past 9 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 9 and 10 .
Half-past 9 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 9:00.
so the Time is 9:30.

Question 5.
half past 2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 58
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-5
Explanation:
To indicate half past 2 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 2 and 3 .
Half-past 2 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 2:00.
so the Time is 2:30.

Question 6.
10 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 59
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-6
Explanation:
To indicate half past 10 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 10 and 11 .
Half-past 10 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 10:00.
so the Time is 10:30.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Is it time for art class or math class?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 60
Answer:
Art class half past 9
Explanation:
The short hand or hour hand in between 9 and 10 . so the time is half past 9.
So the time is 9 : 30 . It is art class at half past 9 .

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Your music class lasts a half hour. Show and circle the time your music class ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 61
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 62
half past 12            half past 1          2 o’clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-8
The Time when Music class started is at 1 o’clock as per the above figure.
Music class lasts only half hour that is 30 minutes
So Music class ends at 1:00 + 30 minutes = 1 : 30
the time practice ends = 1 : 30.
Explanation:
To represent half past 1 or 1:30 we need to point short hand – hour hand in between 1 and  2 .

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Your friend has 9 peanuts. You have 2 fewer than your friend. How many peanuts do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 63
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 64
___________ ○ ___________ = ___________ peanuts
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-9
Explanation:
Number of peanuts with my friend = 9
Number of peanuts with me are 2 fewer than my friend means two less peanuts than my friend
So, Number of peanuts with me = 9 – 2 = 7 peanuts.

Lesson 12.3 Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour

Explore and Grow

Complete the sentences.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 65
The hour hand points to the __________ .
The minute hand points to the __________ .
It is __________ o’clock.
Answer:
The hour hand points to the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 2 o’clock.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 66
The hour hand points halfway between the __________ and the __________ .
The minute hand points to the __________ .
It is half past __________ .
Answer:
The hour hand points halfway between the 2 and the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 6.
It is half past 2 .
The time is 2 : 30

Show and Grow

Write the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 67
__________
Answer:
7 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 7 o’clock.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 68
__________
Answer:
2 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 2 o’clock.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 69
__________
Answer:
half past 9
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 9 and the 10 .
The minute hand points to the 6 means 30 minutes
It is half past 9 .
The time is 9 : 30

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 70
__________
Answer:
8 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 8 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 8 o’clock.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 71
__________
Answer:
half past 12
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 12 and the 1 .
The minute hand points to the 6 . it means 30minutes
It is half past 12 .
The time is 12 : 30

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 72
__________
Answer:
The hour hand points halfway between the 1 and the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 1 .
The time is 1 : 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw to show the time.

Question 7.
half past 5
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 73
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Question-7
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 5 and the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 5 .
The time is 5 : 30

Question 8.
6 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8
6 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 6 o’clock.

Question 9.
half past 10
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 75
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9
It is half past 10
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 10 and the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 10 .
The time is 10 : 30

Question 10.
3 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 76
Answer:
3 o’clock
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 3 o’clock.

Question 11.
11 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 11 o’clock.

Question 12.
half past 4
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 78
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12

Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4 : 30

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton shows half past 6. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 79
Answer:
No
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-13
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 6 and the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 6 .
The time is 6 : 30

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You spend an hour at the park. Show and write the time you leave.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 80
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 81

____________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
I arrive at park = 11 : 00
I spend one hour in park
Time I leave from park = 11 : 00 + 1 hour = 12:00
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 12 o’clock.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You spend a half hour on your homework. Show and write the time you finish.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 82
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 83

____________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Show-Grow-Question-14
I started my home work at 3 : 00
Time spend on home work = half and hour = 30 minutes.
Time to finish home work = 3:00 + 30 minutes = 3 : 30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 3 and the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 3 .
The time is 3 : 30

Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour Practice 12.3

Write the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 84
____________
Answer:
Time is 11:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 11 and the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 11 .
The time is 11 : 30

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 85
____________
Answer:
Time is 3 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 3 o’clock.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 86
____________
Answer:
Time is 1 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 1 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 1 o’clock.

Draw to show the time.

Question 4.
5 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 87
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-4
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 5 o’clock.

Question 5.
half past 7
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 88
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-5
Time is 7:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 7 and the 8 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 7 .
The time is 7 : 30

Question 6.
half past 2
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 93
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-6
Time is 2:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 2 and the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 2 .
The time is 2 : 30

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes shows 12 o’clock. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 89
Answer:
Yes
Time is 12 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 12 o’clock.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You play tag for an hour. Show and write the time you stop playing tag.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 90
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 91

________________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-8
The Time I started playing tag = 9 : 00
Duration of play tag = 1 hour.
The Time I stopped playing tag = 9:00 + 1 hour = 10: 00
Time is 10 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 12 o’clock.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Circle the cube. Draw a rectangle around the sphere.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 92
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-9
Explanation:
Cube – A solid body having six equal square sides.
Sphere – A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices .

Lesson 12.4 Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks

Explore and Grow

Show the time on the analog clock. What is the same about the clocks? What is different?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 94
The time is __________ o’clock.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Explore-Grow-1
Explanation:
Time is 4 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 95
The time is half past _________ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Explore-Grow-2

Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4 : 30

Show and Grow

Show the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 96
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Time is 9 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 9 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 97
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 7 and the 8 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 7 .
The time is 7 : 30

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 98
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation:
Time is 12 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 99
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 2 and the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 2 .
The time is 2 : 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Show the time.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 100
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Time is 2 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 101
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 11 and the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 11 .
The time is 11 : 30

Draw to show the time.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 102
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 8 and the 9 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 8 .
The time is 8 : 30

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 103
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8
Explanation:
Time is 4 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

DIG DEEPER!
Complete the clocks to show the same time.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 104
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-DIG-DEEPER-Question-9
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the hour hand is between 9 and 10 .
In digital clock we notice 30 minutes:
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 9 : 30.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 105
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-DIG-DEEPER-Question-10
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the Minutes hand is at 12.
In digital clock we notice hour as 1 o’clock
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 1:00.

Question 11.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which time does not belong with the other three? Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 106
Answer:
Figure 1 , 2 and 4 describes half past 3 time whereas figure 3 describes half past 4 time .
Figure 3 is different from other 3 figures.
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 3 and the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 3 .
The time is 3 : 30

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A play starts 1 hour later than a movie. Show and circle the time the play starts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 107
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 108
half past 2           half past 4               3 o’clock            4 o’clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Time when Movie started = 3:30
Time when play starts is one hour later than movie
Time when play starts = 3:30 + 1 hour = 4:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4:30

Show and Grow

Question 12.
Tumbling starts a half hour later than dance. Show and circle the time tumbling starts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 109
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 110
half past 5            4 o’clock               6 o’clock                half past 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-12
Time when dance started = 5:00
Tumbling starts a half hour later than dance
Time when tumbling starts = 5:00 + 0:30 minutes = 5:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 5 and the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 5 .
The time is 5:30

Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks Practice 12.4

Show the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 111
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-1
Explanation:
Time is 7 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 112
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-2
Explanation:
Time is 4 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 113
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-3
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 10 and the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 10 .
The time is 10:30

Draw to show the time.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 114
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-4
Explanation:
As per the digital clock the time is 12:30 . The same time is represented in analog clock
The hour hand points halfway between the 12 and the 1 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 12 .
The time is 12:30

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 115
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-5
Explanation:
As per the digital clock the time is 11:00 . The same time is represented in analog clock
Time is 11 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 116
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-6
Explanation:
As per the digital clock the time is 4:30 . The same time is represented in analog clock
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4:30

Question 7.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which time does not belong with the other three? Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 117
Answer:
The figure does not belong to the 3 figures as it shows time as 7:30 and all other 3 figures shows time as 6:30 or half past 6
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 6 and the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 6 .
The time is 6:30

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Bowling starts I hour later than ice skating. Show and circle the time bowling starts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 118
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 119
half past 5            5 o’clock            half past 4               3 o’ clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-8
Time when Ice skating starts = 4:00
Bowling starts I hour later than ice skating
Time when bowling starts = 4:00 + 1:00 = 5:00
Explanation:
Time is 5 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 12

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Circle the cone. Draw a rectangle around the cylinder.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 120
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-9
Explanation:
Cone-A cone is a shape formed by using a set of line segments or the lines which connects a common point, called the apex or vertex, to all the points of a circular base.
Cylinder-A cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Tell Time Performance Task

Question 1.
Your class is on a field trip to a nature center.
Complete the schedule.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 121

Field Trip Schedule
Activity Time
Arrive 9:00
The Wildlife Walk 9:30
Scavenger Hunt 10 : 30
Pond study 11:30
Lunch 12:00
Recess 12:30
Live Animal Show 1:00
Leave 2: 00

a. The Pond Study starts at the time shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 122
Answer: 11:30

b. The Wildlife Walk starts at half past 9
Answer:
9:30

c. The Scavenger Hunt starts 1 hour after the Wildlife Walk starts.
Answer: 10 :30

d. Recess starts a half hour after lunch.
Answer: 12:30

e. You leave 1 hour before 3:00.
Answer: 2:00

Question 2.
Lunch lasts a half hour. Write the time that lunch ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 123
Answer: 12:30
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Performance-Task-Question-2

Question 3.
Draw the time the Live Animal Show starts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 124
Answer: 1:00
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Performance-Task-Question-3

Tell Time Chapter Practice

Tell Time to the Hour Homework & Practice 12.1

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 125
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
1 o’clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 1 in the above clock. so the time is 1 o ‘ clock

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 126
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
11 o’clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 11 in the above clock. so the time is 11 o ‘ clock

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 127
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
8 o’clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 8 in the above clock. so the time is 8 o ‘ clock

Tell Time to the Half Hour Homework & Practice 12.2

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 4.
half past 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 128
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.2-Question-4
Explanation:
To represent half past 9 we need to point short hand or hour hand in halfway between 9 and 10 .
Half-past 6 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 9:00.
so the Time is 9:30.

Question 5.
2 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 129
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.2-Question-5
Explanation:
As the hour hand or short hand is pointing 2 in the above clock. so the time is 2 o ‘ clock

Question 6.
half past 5
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 130
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.2-Question-6
Explanation:
To represent half past 5 we need to point short hand or hour hand in halfway between 5 and 6 .
Half-past 6 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
so the Time is 5:30.

Question 7.
MP Precision
Is it time to brush your teeth or go to bed?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 131
Answer:
Brush teeth : half past 7
Explanation:
As per the above clock it shows the short hand or hour hand is halfway pointing between 7 and 8. It is half past 7
so the Time is 7:30.

Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour Homework & Practice 12.3

Write the time.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 132
__________
Answer:
Time is 6 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 133
__________
Answer:
The time is 10:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 10 and the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 10

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 134
__________
Answer:
The time is 3:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 3 and the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 3

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You read for a half hour. Show and write the time you stop reading.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 135
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 136
___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-11
Time when i started reading = 4:00
You read for a half hour
Time when i stopped reading = 4:00 + 0:30 = 4:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4

Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks Homework & Practice 12.4

Complete the clocks to show the same time.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 137
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-and-Digital-Clocks-Homework-Practice-12.4-Question-12
Time is 1:30
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the hour hand is between 1 and 2 .
In digital clock we notice 30 minutes:
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 1:30.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 138
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-and-Digital-Clocks-Homework-Practice-12.4-Question-13
Time is 9:00
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the hour hand is pointing 9
In digital clock we notice 00 minutes:
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 9:00.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 139
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-and-Digital-Clocks-Homework-Practice-12.4-Question-14
Time is 12:30
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the minutes hand is pointing 6
In digital clock we notice hour as 12
From the above two given statements, we can conclude the time is 12:30

Conclusion:

Hope the Answer Key for Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time is helpful for all the primary level students. Students who are lagging in this concept can overcome their difficulties by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time. Keep in touch with our website i.e, bigideasmathanswers.com to get the latest updates regarding the BIM Grade 1 Solution Key for all Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates

Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pdf is available here. The candidates who are searching for Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Solution Key can easily get it here. Stop your search for accurate and detailed information, you can find each and every detail of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pdf here. You can download the pdf for free of cost in the below sections. Free Solutions are available here as per your convenience and also you can get the chapter-wise material.

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates

There are various topics involved in 6th Grade Ratios and Rates Solution Key. The topics are Ratio tables, Graphing Ratio Relationships, Using Tape Diagrams, Ratios, and so on. All the topics important formulae, solved examples, videos, and free pdfs are given below which helps you for the best practice. You can solve all the problems any number of times and can score the highest marks in the exam. These pdfs or answer keys help you to complete the homework or assignment in the desired time.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Ratios

Lesson: 2 Using Tape Diagrams

Lesson: 3 Using Ratio Tables

Lesson: 4 Graphing Ratio Relationships

Lesson: 5 Rates and Unit Rates

Lesson: 6 Converting Measures

Performance Task

Ratios and Rates STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Human Circulatory System
Watch the STEAM Video “Human Circulatory System.” Then answer the following questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 1
1. Enid says the heart pumps about 5 liters of blood each minute. How can you find the amount of blood the heart pumps for any given number of minutes?

Answer:
Enid says the heart pumps about 5 liters of blood each minute.
5 × 1 = 5 liters
We have multiply the number of minutes with 5

2. Explain how you can estimate the amount of blood your heart pumps in one heart beat.

Answer: Multiply your body surface area by the cardiac index to determine the liters of blood pumped by your heart in one minute.

3. The table shows the amounts of blood contained in several different types of blood vessels. How can you make meaningful comparisons of the amounts?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 2

Answer:
1 liter = 1000 ml
The volume of Aorta and large arteries is 300 ml
300/1000 = 0.3 = 30%
Small arteries = 0.4L
0.4 × 1000 = 400ml = 40%
40% of blood contained in small arteries
Small veins = 2.43qt
2.43 qt = 2.299L
Large Veins = 0.24 gal
0.24 gal = 0.908L

Performance Task

Oops! Unit Conversion Mistakes
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be shown unit conversion mistakes in the following real-life situations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3
In each situation, you will analyze and correct the mistake in the unit conversion. How accurate must conversions be in real-life situations?

Ratios and Rates Getting Ready for Chapter

Chapter Exploration

Work with a partner. What portion of the rectangle is red? How did you write your answer?
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 4
Answer: 4 : 12

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 12 potions
when we count we get Four-twelfths of the portion of the rectangle is red

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 5
Answer: 6 : 18

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 18 potion
when we count we get Six out of eighteen of the portion of the rectangle is red

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 6
Answer: 5 : 9

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 9 potion
when we count we get Five out of nine of the portion of the Square is red

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 7
Answer: 4 : 9

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 9 potion
when we count we get four out of nine of the portion of the Square is red

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 8
Answer: 6 : 9

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 9 potion
when we count we get six out of nine of the portion of the Square is red

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 9
Answer: 16 : 24

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 24 potion
when we count we get sixteen out of twenty-four of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 10
Answer: 4 : 12

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 12 potion
when we count we get four out of twelve of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 11
Answer: 5 : 12

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 12 potion
when we count we get five out of twelve of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 12
Answer: 6 : 6

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 6 potion
when we count we get six out of six of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 10.
Work with a partner. In Exercises 1–9, which of the rectangles have the same portion of red tiles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: 6 : 6 portion of the rectangles have the same portion of red tiles
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-12
Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 6 potions
when we count we get six out of six of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Work with a partner. Use square color tiles to build two different-sized rectangles that represent the description.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 13
Question 11.
Five-sixths of the tiles are blue.
Answer: 5 : 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-11

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 5 : 6 of the tiles are blue.

Question 12.
Three-fourths of the tiles are yellow.
Answer: 3 : 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-12

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 3 : 4 of the tiles are yellow

Question 13.
Four-fifths of the tiles are green.
Answer: 4 : 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-13

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 4 : 5 of the tiles are green

Question 14.
Five-sevenths of the tiles are red.
Answer: 5 : 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-14

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 5 : 7 of the tiles are red

Question 15.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Work with a partner. The soccer committee has 8 girls and 6 boys. The tennis committee has 9 girls and 8 boys. A friend tells you that the tennis committee has a greater portion of girls than the soccer committee. Is your friend correct? Explain. If not, how many boys could you add to the soccer committee so that your friend is correct?
Answer:
Given,
The soccer committee has 8 girls and 6 boys. The tennis committee has 9 girls and 8 boys.
The ratio of soccer committee is 8:6
The ratio of tennis committee is 9:8
Compare both the ratios
8 < 9
Thus number of girls in tennis committee are more than soccer committee.
Thus we can say that your friend is correct.

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
ratio
rate
equivalent rates
equivalent ratios
unit rate

Answer:
Ratio – a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
Rate – a measure, quantity, or frequency, typically one measured against another quantity or measure.
Equivalent rates – Equivalent rates are rates that are equal.
Equivalent ratio – Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
Unit Rate – A unit rate is a rate with 1 in the denominator.

Lesson 3.1 Ratios

A ratio is a comparison of two quantities. Consider two quantities a and b. The ratio a : b indicates that there are a units of the first quantity for every b units of the second quantity.

EXPLORATION 1

Writing Ratios
Work with a partner. A science class has two times as many girls as it has boys.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 1
a. Discuss possible numbers of boys and girls in the science class.

Answer: 24 girls and 12 boys in the science class
b. What comparisons can you make between your class and the science class? Can you determine which class has more girls? more boys? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Number of girls and boys in your class are 42.
Number of girls = 22
Number of boys = 20
Compare the number of girls in your class and science class
22: 24
Thus there are more girls in science class.
20:12
Thus there are more boys in your class.

c. Write three ratios that you observe in your classroom. Describe what each ratio represents.
Answer:
36:42 – This represents number of students in science class and your class
22:24 – This represents number of girls in science class and your class
20:12 – This represents number of boys in science class and your class

EXPLORATION 2

Using Ratios in a Recipe
Work with a partner. The ratio of iced tea to lemonade in a recipe is 3 : 1. You begin by combining 3 cups of iced tea with 1 cup of lemonade.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 2
a. You add 1 cup of iced tea and 1 cup of lemonade to the mixture. Does this change the taste of the mixture?

Answer:
3 + 1: 1 + 1
4:2
No it will not change the taste of the mixture.
b. Describe how you can make larger amounts without changing the taste.
Answer: If the number of portions and the size of each portion change, you will have to find a conversion factor using a similar approach.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 3

Try It

Write the indicated ratio using the coins in Example 1.
Question 1.
dimes to pennies
Answer:  1 : 10

Explanation:
we have to convert the coins from dimes to pennies.
we know that A dime is worth 10 pennies.
so the ratio is 1 : 10

Question 2.
quarters to the total number of coins.
Answer: 25 : 40

The number \(\frac{a}{b}\) associated with the ratio a : b is called the value of the ratio. It describes the multiplicative relationship between the quantities in a ratio.

Question 3.
An elephant sanctuary contains adult and baby elephants. The ratio of adult elephants to baby elephants is 5 : 1. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 4
Answer: five adult elephants and one baby elephant

Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 4.
1 : 1 and 6 : 6
Answer:  The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 1 : 1 and 6 : 6 are Equivalent

Question 5.
1 : 2 and 3 : 4
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
hence the 1 : 2 and 3 : 4 The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Question 6.
8 : 3 and 6 : 16
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
hence the 8 : 3 and 6 : 16 ratios are Not Equivalent.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

WRITING AND INTERPRETING RATIOS Write the ratio. Then find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 5
Question 7.
sharks to dolphins
Answer: 4 : 5

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 4 : 5 of sharks to dolphins by observing the picture given

Question 8.
dolphins : animals
Answer: 5 : 0

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 5 : 0 of dolphins: animals by observing the picture given

IDENTIFYING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Determine whether the ratios are equivalent. Explain your reasoning.
Question 9.
2 : 3 and 24 : 36
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 3 and 24 : 36 are Equivalent

Question 10.
5 : 7 and 20 : 28
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 5 : 7 and 20 : 28 are Equivalent

Question 11.
3 : 10 and 9 : 25
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
hence the 3 : 10 and 9 : 25 ratios are Not Equivalent.

Question 12.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 6
Answer:
Option B and C has same question but different words.

Question 13.
The ratio of wolves to cougars in a forest is 5 : 3. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 7
Answer: 5 to 3

Explanation: A ratio takes one number and divides it into another number to determine a decimal that can later be converted to a percentage if desired The ratio of wolves to cougars in a forest is 5 : 3 so the interpret the value of the ratio is 5 to 3.

Question 14.
You are kayaking at a pace of 63 feet every 12 seconds. Your friend’s pace is 21 feet every 3 seconds. Are you and your friend kayaking at the same pace? If not, who is faster?
Answer: No, Me and my friend kayaking are not at the same pace. my friend is faster.

Explanation:
Given,
You are kayaking at a pace of 63 feet every 12 seconds
Your friend’s pace is 21 feet every 3 seconds
So if I am kayaking at apace of 63 feet for every 12 seconds. then dividing 63 feet by 12 seconds we get 5.25 feet per second.
In the same way friend’s pace is 21 feet every 3 seconds. the dividing 21 feet by 3 second we get 7 feet per second.
Hence me and my friend are not at the same pace.
7 feet per second my friend is faster than me

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
The ratio of Jet Ski rentals to boat rentals at a store is 7 : 2. If the number of boat rentals doubles and the number of Jet Ski rentals stays the same, then the number of boat rentals is how many times the number of Jet Ski rentals?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 8
Answer: 0.571 times less than jet Ski rental
Given,
he ratio of Jet Ski rentals to boat rentals at a store is 7 : 2
If the number of boat rentals doubles then we get 2 × 2 = 4 boats
the number of Jet Ski rentals stays the same that is 7
then the number of boat rentals is how many times the number of Jet Ski rental is divide 4 by 7 we get  0.571 times less than jet Ski rental

Ratios Homework & Practice 3.1

Review & Refresh

Divide. Check your answer.
Question 1.
15.4 ÷ 2.2
Answer: 7

Explanation:
Given 15.4 ÷ 2.2
so divide 15.4 by 2.2 we get 7

Question 2.
56.07 ÷ 8.9
Answer: 6.9

Explanation:
Given 56.07 ÷ 8.9
so divide 56.07 by 8.9 we get 6.9

Question 3.
\(\sqrt [ 8.43 ]{ 12.645 } \)
Answer: 0.8164

Explanation:
Given \(\sqrt [ 8.43 ]{ 12.645 } \)
so divide square root of 8.43 by 12.645 we get 0.8164

Question 4.
\(\sqrt [ 11.6 ]{ 51.62 } \)
Answer: 0.474

Explanation:
Given \(\sqrt [ 11.6 ]{ 51.62 } \)
so divide square root of 11.6 by 51.62 we get 0.474

Find the value of the power.
Question 5.
82
Answer: 8 × 8 = 64

Explanation:
given 82
so by multiplying 8 × 8, we get 64

Question 6.
16
Answer: 1

Explanation:
given 1 power of 6
so by multiplying 1 × 1 × 1 ×1 × 1 × 1 we get 1

Question 7.
34
Answer: 81

Explanation:
given 3 power of 4
so by multiplying 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 we get 81

Question 8.
26
Answer: 64

Explanation:
given 2 power of 6
so by multiplying 2 × 2 × 2 ×2 × 2 × 2 we get 64

The Venn diagram shows the prime factors of two numbers. Identify the numbers. Then find the GCF and the LCM of the two numbers.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 9
Answer:
By using the venn diagram we can find the prime factors of the two numbers.
2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 5 = 540
2 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 = 450
LCM of 540 and 450 are
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 450:
450, 900, 1350, 1800, 2250, 2700, 3150, 3600
Multiples of 540:
540, 1080, 1620, 2160, 2700, 3240, 3780
Therefore,
LCM(450, 540) = 2700
GCF of 540 and 450 are
The factors of 450 are: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 15, 18, 25, 30, 45, 50, 75, 90, 150, 225, 450
The factors of 540 are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 27, 30, 36, 45, 54, 60, 90, 108, 135, 180, 270, 540
Then the greatest common factor is 90.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 10
Answer:
By using the venn diagram we can find the prime factors of the two numbers.
2 × 2 × 2 × 3 = 24
2 × 3 × 5 × 7 = 210
LCM of 24 and 210:
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 24:
24, 48, 72, 96, 120, 144, 168, 192, 216, 240, 264, 288, 312, 336, 360, 384, 408, 432, 456, 480, 504, 528, 552, 576, 600, 624, 648, 672, 696, 720, 744, 768, 792, 816, 840, 864, 888
Multiples of 210:
210, 420, 630, 840, 1050, 1260
Therefore,
LCM(24, 210) = 840
GCF of 24 and 210:
The factors of 24 are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24
The factors of 210 are: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 10, 14, 15, 21, 30, 35, 42, 70, 105, 210
Then the greatest common factor is 6.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING RATIOS You mix the amounts of iced tea and lemonade shown. Describe how you can make larger amounts without changing the taste. (See Exploration 2, p. 107.)
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 11
Answer:
There are 2 iced tea and 1 lemonade.
So, we can make 2:1 iced tea and lemonade without changing the taste.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 12
Answer: 2:3
There are 2 iced tea and 3 lemonade.
So, we can make 2:3 iced tea and lemonade without changing the taste.

WRITING RATIOS Write the ratio.
Question 13.
frogs to turtles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 13
Answer: 2 : 5

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are two frogs and five turtles in the shown image.
hence frogs to turtles is 2 : 5

Question 14
basketballs to soccer balls
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 14
Answer: 6 : 4

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are six basketballs and four soccer balls in the shown image.
hence basketballs to soccer balls are 6 : 4

Question 15.
calculators : pencils
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 15
Answer: 2 : 6

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are two calculators and six pencils in the shown image.
hence calculators : pencils are 2 : 6

Question 16.
shirts : pants
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 16
Answer: 3 : 6

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are three shirts and six pants in the shown image.
hence shirts : pants are 3 : 6

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Twelve of the 28 students in a class own a dog. What is the ratio of students who own a dog to students who do not?
Answer: 12 : 28

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
Given Twelve of the 28 students in a class own a dog we get 12 students who have dogs out of 28 students
so in the students who do not have dogs are 28
hence the ratio of students who own a dog to students who do not is 12 : 28

Question 18.
LOGIC
Name two things that you would like to have in a ratio of 5 : 1 but not in a ratio of 1 : 5. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
5 students in 1 class gives the ratio 5:1
It is not possible to have 1 student in 5 classes.

OPEN-ENDED Describe a real-life relationship that can be represented by the ratio.
Question 19.
1 out of every 7
Answer: 1 : 7

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
hence 1 out of every 7 is 1 : 7

Question 20.
5 to 26
Answer: 5 : 26

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
hence 5 to 26 7 is   5 : 26

Question 21.
2 per 5
Answer: 2 : 5

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
hence 2 per 5 is 2 : 5

Question 22.
7 : 1
Answer:  7 out of  1

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
Hence 7 : 1 is 7 out of  1

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
During a given month, the ratio of sunny days to rainy days is 4 : 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 17
a. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.

Answer:
Let us consider the month be April
The number of days in April are 30.
4:1
4 × 6 = 24 days
1 × 6 = 6 days
24 + 6 = 30 days
b. In another month, the number of sunny days is 5 times the number of rainy days. Write the ratio of sunny days to rainy days.
Answer: 5:1

Explanation:
Given,
In another month, the number of sunny days is 5 times the number of rainy days.
The ratio of the sunny days to rainy days is 5 : 1

IDENTIFYING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 24.
2 : 3 and 4 : 9

Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 3 and 4 : 9 are Not Equivalent

Question 25.
3 : 8 and 9 : 24

Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 3 : 8 and 9 : 24 are Equivalent

Question 26.
1 : 4 and 2 : 6

Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 1 : 4 and 2 : 6 are Not Equivalent

Question 27.
5 : 3 and 15 : 12
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 5 : 3 and 15 : 12 are Not Equivalent

Question 28.
6 : 10 and 12 : 20
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 6 : 10 and 12 : 20 are Equivalent.

Question 29.
2 : 3 and 4 : 5
Answer: The ratios are not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 3 and 4 : 5 are not Equivalent.

Question 30.
28 : 32 and 7 : 8
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 28 : 32 and 7 : 8 are Equivalent.

Question 31.
24 : 100 and 6 : 25
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 28 : 32 and 7 : 8 are Not Equivalent.

Question 32.
85 : 210 and 340 : 735
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 85 : 210 and 340 : 735  are Not Equivalent.

WRITING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Write a ratio that is equivalent to the given ratio. Justify your answer.
Question 33.
3 : 1
Answer: 6: 2

Explanation:
The equivalent ratio of 3:1 is 6:2
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
6:2 = 3:1

Question 34.
7 : 2
Answer: 14: 4

Explanation:
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
The equivalent ratio of 7 : 2 is 14:4
7 × 2 : 2 × 2 = 14:4

Question 35.
6 : 6
Answer: 12:12

Explanation:
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
The equivalent ratio of 6:6 is 12:12
6 × 2 : 6 × 2 = 12:12

Question 36.
0 : 8
Answer: 0:16

Explanation:
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
The equivalent ratio of 0:8 is 0:16
0 × 2: 8 × 2 = 0 : 16

WRITING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Fill in the blank so that the ratios are equivalent.
Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 18
Answer:  18
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.1-18

Explanation:
Since
3 : 9 = 6 : X
Then we know
9/3 = X/6
Multiplying both sides by 6 cancels on the right
6 × (9/3) = (X/6) × 6
6 × (9/3) = X
Then solving for X
X = 6 × (9/3)
X = 18
Therefore
3 : 9 = 6 : 18
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 19
Answer: 24
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.1-19
Explanation:
Since
2 : 6 = 8 : X
Then we know
6/2 = X/8
Multiplying both sides by 8 cancels on the right
8 × (6/2) = (X/8) × 8
8 × (6/2) = X
Then solving for X
X = 8 × (6/2)
X = 24
Therefore
2 : 6 = 8 : 24
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 20
Answer: 21
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.1-20

Explanation:
Since
X : 6 = 7 : 2
Then we know
X/6 = 7/2
Multiplying both sides by 6 cancels on the left
6 × (X/6) = (7/2) × 6
X = (7/2) × 6
Then solving for X
X = 6 × (7/2)
X = 21
Therefore
21 : 6 = 7 : 2
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.

Question 40.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that the two ratios are equivalent. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 21
Answer: incorrect, The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 4 : 8 and 8 : 12  are Not Equivalent. after add 4 each to the ratios

Question 41.
OPEN-ENDED
A non-Newtonian liquid demonstrates properties of both a solid and a liquid. A recipe for a non-Newtonian liquid calls for 1 cup of water and 2 cups of cornstarch. Find two possible combinations of water and cornstarch that you can use to make a larger batch. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Given,
A non-Newtonian liquid demonstrates properties of both a solid and a liquid.
A recipe for a non-Newtonian liquid calls for 1 cup of water and 2 cups of cornstarch
The ratio of water and cornstarch is 1 : 2
The possible combinations of water and cornstarch are
You can multiply 3 to each number in the first ratio to obtain the numbers in the second ratio, the ratios are equivalent.
1 × 3 : 2 × 3 = 3 : 6
You can multiply 5 to each number in the first ratio to obtain the numbers in the second ratio, the ratios are equivalent.
1 × 5 : 2 × 5 = 5 : 10

Question 42.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are downloading songs to your tablet. The ratio of pop songs to rock songs is 5 : 4. You download 40 pop songs. How many rock songs do you download?
Answer: 32

Explanation:
Given,
. The ratio of pop songs to rock songs is 5 : 4. You download 40 pop songs.
Let number of rock songs be x
5 : 4 :: 40 :: x
5 × x = 4 × 40
5x = 160
x = 160/5
x = 32
Therefore, number of rock songs = 32.

Question 43.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In the contiguous United States, the ratio of states that border an ocean to states that do not border an ocean is 7 : 9. How many of the states border an ocean?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 22
Answer: 7

Explanation:
Given,
the ratio of states that border an ocean to states that do not border an ocean is 7 : 9.
So states that border an ocean is 7
and states that do not border an ocean is 9
hence the states border an ocean is 7

Question 44.
REASONING
The value of a ratio is \(\frac{4}{3}\). The second quantity in the ratio is how many times the first quantity in the ratio? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: The second quantity is 1.3333 times the first quantity in the ratio.

Explanation:
A ratio is given to us which is 4:3.
What we need to find out is, the second quantity in the ratio is how many times the first quantity in the ratio.
The definition of ratio is, the quantitative relation between two amounts showing the number of times one value contains or is contained within the other.
So according to the definition of ratio we get:
4/3 = 1.33
So we can say that 4 contains 3, 1.3333 times in it.
So the second quantity is 1.3333 times the first quantity in the ratio.

Question 45.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A train moving at a constant speed travels 3 miles every 5 minutes. A car moving at a constant speed travels 12 miles every 20 minutes. Are the vehicles traveling at the same speed? If not, which is faster?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 23
Answer:
Both vehicles traveling at the same speed 0.6 miles per minute

Explanation:
Given
A train moving at a constant speed travels 3 miles every 5 minutes.
by dividing 3 miles by 5 minutes we get 0.6 miles per minute
A car moving at a constant speed travels 12 miles every 20 minutes.
by dividing 12 miles by 20 minutes we get 0.6 miles per minute
Hence both vehicle have the same speed

Question 46.
CRITICAL THINKING
To win a relay race, you must swim 200 yards before your opponent swims 190 yards. You swim at a pace of 50 yards every 40 seconds. Your opponent swims at a pace of 10 yards every 8.5 seconds. Who wins the race? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Explanation:
Given
You swim at a pace of 50 yards every 40 seconds
By dividing 50 yards by 40 seconds we get 1.25 yards per second
Your opponent swims at a pace of 10 yards every 8.5 seconds.
By dividing 10 yards by 8.5 seconds we get 1.17 yards per second
You swim at a pace of 50 yards every 40 seconds  for completing 200 yards you take 160 seconds
your opponent swims at a pace of 10 yards every 8.5 seconds  for completing 190 yards you take 162.3  seconds
hence you won the race by completing 200 yards in 160 seconds before your opponent completes 190 yards at 162.3 seconds

Question 47.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 3 boys for every 2 girls in a dance competition. Does it make sense for there to be a total of 9 people in the competition? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given,
There are 3 boys for every 2 girls in a dance competition.
3:2=5
so girls are 2:5
set up the proportion
2/5=x/9
5x=18
x=3.6 girls
another way you can look at it is because there are 3 boys for every 2 girls, add 2 more girls, you’ll get 3 more boys
that makes the total of 10 people so 9 is impossible

Question 48.
GEOMETRY
Use the blue and green rectangles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 24
a. Find the ratio of the length of the blue rectangle to the length of the green rectangle. Repeat this for width, perimeter, and area.

Answer:
The ratio of the length of the blue rectangle to the length of the green rectangle is 2 : 4
The ratio of the width of the blue rectangle to the width of the green rectangle is 3 : 6
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
Blue rectangle:
2(3) + 2(2) = 6 + 4 = 10
Green Rectangle:
2(6) + 2(4) = 12 + 8 = 20
Ratio of perimeter of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 10 : 20
Area of the rectangle = lb
Blue rectangle:
A = 2 × 3 = 6
Green Rectangle:
A = 4 × 6 = 24
Ratio of Area of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 6 : 24
b. Compare your ratios in part(a).
Answer:
The ratio of the length of the blue rectangle to the length of the green rectangle is 2 : 4 equivalent to 1 : 2
The ratio of the width of the blue rectangle to the width of the green rectangle is 3 : 6 equivalent to 1 : 2
Ratio of perimeter of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 10 : 20 equivalent to 1 : 2
Ratio of Area of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 6 : 24 equivalent to 1 : 4

Question 49.
STRUCTURE
The ratio of the side lengths of a triangle is 2 : 3 : 4. The shortest side is 15 inches. What is the perimeter of the triangle? Explain.
Answer: 67.5 inches

Explanation:
Given that,
The ratio of the side lengths of a triangle is 2 : 3 : 4. The shortest side is 15 inches.
Let
x = the first side
y = the second side
z = the third side
We know that
x/y = 2/3
y = 1.5x
x/z = 2/4
z = 2x
x = 15 inches
Substitute the value of x in both the equations
y = 1.5(15) = 22.5 in
z = 2(15) = 30 in
Now find the perimeter of the triangle
P = x + y + z
P = 15 + 22.5 + 30 = 67.5 inches

Question 50.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A restaurant sells tokens that customers use to play games while waiting for their orders.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 25
a. Which option is the best deal? Justify your answer.
b. What suggestions, if any, would you give to the restaurant about how it could modify the prices of tokens?
Answer:
It would be 90 tokens
0.50 * 10 = $5
0.50 *25 = $12.5
0.50 * 50 = $25
0.50 * 90 = $45
on 90 tokens you save $5 which is the most.

Question 51.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 12 boys and 10 girls in your gym class. If 6 boys joined the class, how many girls would need to join for the ratio of boys to girls to remain the same? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Given,
There are 12 boys and 10 girls in your gym class.
12/10=6/5
6 boys joined: 18/(of girls)=6/5, #of girls=18×5/6=15
5 more girls will keep the same ratio 6/5

Lesson 3.2 Using Tape Diagrams

You can use a visual model, called a tape diagram, to represent the relationship between two quantities in a ratio.

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Tape Diagram
Work with a partner. The tape diagram models the lengths of two snowboarding trails.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 1
a. What can you determine from the tape diagram?

Answer:
We determine from the tape diagram that the beginner trail has one rectangle and the expert trial has four rectangles.

b. Choose a length for one of the trails. What conclusions can you make from the tape diagram? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Let the length of one rectangle is 10.
The length of the beginner trail is 10.
Length of the expert trail is 4 × 10 = 40
1 : 4
c. Suppose you know the combined length of the trails or the difference in the lengths of the trails. Explain how you can use that information to find the lengths of the two trails. Provide an example with your explanation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 2
Answer:
Let the length of one rectangle is 10.
Now let us combine the length to find the length of the expert trail.
The expert trail contains 4 rectangles.
So, multiply 10 with 4.
4 × 10 = 40
Example:
The tape diagram represents the ratio of gifts received to gifts given. You received 4 gifts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 3

You can use tape diagrams to represent ratios and solve ratio problems.

Try It

Question 1.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of gifts received to gifts given. You received 4 gifts. How many gifts did you give?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 3
Answer: 1 : 4

Explanation:
given
The tape diagram represents the ratio of gifts received to gifts given.
You received 4 gifts
the ratio by observing the given image is 1 : 4
hence you gave 1 gift

Question 2.
There are 8 bones in a large snake for every 3 bones in a small snake. The small snake has 150 bones. How many bones does the large snake have?
Answer: 400

Explanation:
Given,
There are 8 bones in a large snake for every 3 bones in a small snake.
The small snake has 150 bones.
150/3 = 50 bones
50 × 8 = 400 bones
Thus the large snake has 400 bones.

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 3 when the ratio of your monthly allowance to your friend’s monthly allowance is 2 to 3.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
STRUCTURE
What ratio is represented by the tape diagram? Can you use the tape diagram to model the ratio 6 : 9? Can you use the tape diagram to model the ratio 8 : 16? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 4
Answer:

Question 5.
REASONING
You are given a tape diagram and the total value of the parts. How can you find the value of 1 part?
Answer:

Question 6.
DRAWING A TAPE DIAGRAM
Describe two ways that you can represent the ratio 12 : 4 using a tape diagram.
Answer:

USING A TAPE DIAGRAM You are given the number of tickets in a bag and the ratio of winning tickets to losing tickets. How many of each kind of ticket are in the bag?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 5
Question 7.
35 tickets; 1 to 4
Answer: 7 : 28

Explanation:
Number of winning tickets = 7
Number of losing tickets = 28
The ratio of winning tickets and losing tickets are 7 : 28
We get 1 : 4
Thus the answer is 7 : 28

Question 8.
80 tickets; 2 : 8
Answer: 16 : 64

Explanation:
Total number of tickets = 80
The ratio of winning tickets to losing tickets is 2 : 8
Let 2x be the winning tickets and 8x be the losing tickets
2x + 8x = 80
10x = 80
x = 80/10 = 8
Number of winning tickets = 2x = 2(8) = 16
Number of losing tickets = 8x = 8(8) = 64
The ratio of winning tickets and losing tickets are 16 : 64

Question 9.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of the numbers of planets in two different solar systems. There are 8 planets in Solar System B. How many planets are in Solar System A?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 6
Answer:
The ratio of the numbers of planets in two different solar systems is 3 : 4
Given that
There are 8 planets in Solar System B.
Solar System B contains 4 rectangles
4 × 2 = 8
Solar System A contains 3 rectangles
3 × 2 = 6
Therefore the solar system A contains 6 planets.

Question 10.
You and your friend play an arcade game. You score 5 points for every 9 points that your friend scores. You score 320 points less than your friend. How many points do you each score?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 7
Answer:
Given
You and your friend play an arcade game.
You score 5 points for every 9 points that your friend scores.
You score 320 points less than your friend.
Each time you score you gain 4 less points than your friend so, you can do this equation
9x – 320 = 5x
9x – 5x = 320
4x = 320
x = 320/4
x = 80
9x = 9(80) = 720
5x = 5(80) = 400
720 – 400 = 320

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Your team wins 18 medals at a track meet. The medals are gold, silver, and bronze in a ratio of 2 : 2 : 5. How many of each medal were won by your team?
Answer: The team won 4 gold medals, 4 silver medals and 10 bronze medals.

Explanation:
Given,
Total medals won = 18
Ratio of gold, silver and bronze = 2:2:5
Let,
x be the original number.
Therefore,
Gold medals = 2x
Silver medals = 2x
Bronze medals = 5x
According to given statement
2x + 2x + 5x = 18
9x = 18
x = 2
Gold medals = 2x = 2(2) = 4
Silver medals = 2x = 2(2) = 4
Bronze medals = 5x = 5(2) = 10

Using Tape Diagrams Homework & Practice 3.2

Review & Refresh

Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 1.
11 : 4 and 22 : 8
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 11 : 4 and 22 : 8 are Equivalent.

Question 2.
12 : 18 and 2 : 3
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 12 : 18 and 2 : 3 are Equivalent.

Question 3.
56 : 81 and 7 : 9
Answer: The ratios are not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 56 : 81 and 7 : 9 are not Equivalent.

Question 4.
2 : 12 and 6 : 24
Answer: The ratios are not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 12 and 6 : 24 are not Equivalent.

Multiply. Write the answer in the simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{7}{10}\) . \(\frac{5}{7}\)
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
\(\frac{7}{10}\) . \(\frac{5}{7}\)
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 35 and 70 using
GCF(35,70) = 35
35÷35 divided by 70÷35= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore:
\(\frac{7}{10}\) . \(\frac{5}{7}\) is 12

Question 6.
2\(\frac{1}{3}\) . \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
1×33×4=312
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 3 and 12 using
GCF(3,12) = 3
3÷3 divided by 12÷3= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore:
as given in question 2\(\frac{1}{3}\) . \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 2 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
we get \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 7.
5\(\frac{3}{8}\) . 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer: 13 \(\frac{7}{16}\)

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
5\(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{43}{8}\)
2\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
\(\frac{43}{8}\) × \(\frac{5}{2}\) = \(\frac{215}{16}\)
Now convert it into the mixed fractions
\(\frac{215}{16}\) = 13 \(\frac{7}{16}\)

Question 8.
Melissa earns $7.40 per hour working at a grocery store. She works 14.25 hours this week. How much does she earn?
A. $83.13
B. $105.45
C. $156.75
D. $1054.50
Answer: $105.45

Explanation:
Given,
Melissa earns $7.40 per hour working at a grocery store.
She works 14.25 hours this week.
14.25 × 7.40 = $105.45
Thus Melissa earns $105.45 this week

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A TAPE DIAGRAM Use the tape diagram in Exploration 1 to answer the question. (See Exploration 1, p. 115.)
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 8
Question 9.
The beginner trail is 200 meters long. How long is the expert trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 200 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 200 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
200m/5 = 40m.
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 40 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×40m = 160m long.

Question 10.
The expert trail is 1200 meters long. How long is the beginner trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 1200 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 1200 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
1200m/5 = 240m
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 240 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×240m = 960m long.

Question 11.
The combined length of the trails is 2000 meters. How long is each trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 2000 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 2000 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
2000m/5 = 400m.
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 400 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×400m = 1600m long.

Question 12.
The expert trail is 750 meters longer than the beginner trail. How long is each trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 750 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 750 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
750m/5 = 150m
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 150 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×150m = 600m long.

INTERPRETING A TAPE DIAGRAM The tape diagram represents the ratio of the time you spend tutoring to the time your friend spends tutoring. You tutor for 3 hours. How many hours does your friend spend tutoring?
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 9
Answer:
So you have one block, and your friend has two.
We know that you work for 3 hours, this means that your only block must represent 3 hours.
And all the blocks represent the same amount of time, then each one of the two blocks of your friend also represents 3 hours.
Then in total, he tutored for 3 hours + 3 hours = 6 hours.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 10
Answer:
In this case, you still have only one block, but now your friend has 5.
Using the same reasoning as above, we can conclude that each block represents 3 hours, and your friend has 5 of them
this means that he tutored for:
5×3 hours = 15 hours

DRAWING A TAPE DIAGRAM A bag contains red marbles and blue marbles. You are given the number of red marbles in the bag and the ratio of red marbles to blue marbles. Find the number of blue marbles in the bag.
Question 15.
10 red marbles; 5 to 1
Answer:
red : blue=5:1
red/blue=5
red= 10
so blue= 2

Question 16.
3 red marbles; 3 : 7
Answer:
red : blue=3:7
red/blue=3/7
red= 3
so blue= 7

Question 17.
12 red marbles; 4 : 3
Answer:
red : blue=4:3
red/blue= 12/9
red= 12
so blue= 9

Question 18.
6 red marbles; 2 for every 5
Answer:
red : blue=2:5
red/blue= 2×3 : 5×3
red= 6
so blue= 15

Question 19.
18 red marbles; 6 to 9
Answer:
red : blue=6:9
red/blue=18/27
red= 18
so blue= 27

Question 20.
12 red marbles; 3 : 4
Answer:
red : blue=3:4
red/blue=12/16
red= 12
so blue= 16

USING A TAPE DIAGRAM A bowl contains blueberries and strawberries. You are given the total number of berries in the bowl and the ratio of blueberries to strawberries. How many of each berry are in the bowl?
Question 21.
16 berries; 3 : 1
Answer:
no of strawberries = 4
no of blueberries = 12

Explanation:
total berries :- 16
ration :- 3:1
no of strawberries :- 1x
no of blueberries :- 3x
3x + 1x = 16
4x = 16
x = 4

Question 22.
10 berries; 2 for every 3
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 3x
no of blueberries :- 2x
2x + 3x = 10
5x = 10
x = 2
no of strawberries :- 3x = 3(2) = 6
no of blueberries :- 2x = 2(2) = 4

Question 23.
12 berries; 1 to 2
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 2x
no of blueberries :- 1x
1x + 2x = 12
3x = 12
x = 4
no of strawberries :- 2x = 2(4) = 8
no of blueberries :- 1x = 1(4) = 4

Question 24.
20 berries; 4 : 1
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 1x
no of blueberries :- 4x
1x + 4x = 20
5x = 20
x = 4
no of strawberries :- 1x = 1(4) = 4
no of blueberries :- 4x = 4(4) = 16

Question 25.
48 berries; 9 to 3
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 3x
no of blueberries :- 9x
3x + 9x = 48
12x = 48
x = 4
no of strawberries :- 3x = 3(4) = 12
no of blueberries :- 9x = 9(4) = 36

Question 26.
46 berries; 11 for every 12
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 12x
no of blueberries :- 11x
12x + 11x = 46
23x = 46
x = 2
no of strawberries :- 12x = 12(2) = 24
no of blueberries :- 11x = 11(2) = 22

Question 27.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You separate bulbs of garlic into two groups: one for planting and one for cooking. The tape diagram represents the ratio of bulbs for planting to bulbs for cooking. You use 6 bulbs for cooking. Each bulb has 8 cloves. How many cloves of garlic will you plant?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 11
Answer:
Given,
You separate bulbs of garlic into two groups: one for planting and one for cooking.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of bulbs for planting to bulbs for cooking.
You use 6 bulbs for cooking. Each bulb has 8 cloves.
6 : 8
6 × 6 = 36
36 × 8 = 288
Thus you plant 288 cloves of garlic.

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Methane gas contains carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms in the ratio of 1 : 4. A sample of methane gas contains 92 hydrogen atoms. How many carbon atoms are in the sample? How many total atoms are in the sample?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 12
Answer:
Methane: 1 carbon and 4 hydrogens
A sample of methane gas contains 92 hydrogen atoms.
1 : 4 :: x : 92
x = number of carbons
x = 92/4
x = 23 carbons
Total atoms = hydrogen atoms + carbon atoms
= 92 + 23
= 115 atoms

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
There are 8 more girls than boys in a school play. The ratio of boys to girls is 5 : 7. How many boys and how many girls are in the play?
Answer:
Given,
There are 8 more girls than boys in a school play. The ratio of boys to girls is 5 : 7
5x = 5(4) = 20 boys
7x = 7(4) = 28 girls
To find how many more girls there are than boys in the play,
We have to subtract the number of girls and number of boys
28 – 20 = 8
Thus it means there are 8 more girls than boys in the school play.

Question 30.
DIG DEEPER!
A baseball team sells tickets for two games. The ratio of sold tickets to unsold tickets for the first game was 7 : 3. For the second game, the ratio was 13 : 2. There were 240 unsold tickets for the second game. How many tickets were sold for the first game?
Answer: 1260 tickets were sold on the first game

Explanation:
For the second game, the ratio was 13 : 2.
Total ratio = 13 + 2 = 15
There were 240 unsold tickets for the second game.
Let the total number of tickets for the second game be x.
240 = 2/15 × x
2x = 15 × 240 = 3600
x = 3600/2 = 1800
1800 tickets were sold for the second time.
Assuming total number of tickets for the first game is equal to total number of tickets for the second game.
Therefore total number of tickets sold for the first game is 1800
The ratio of sold tickets to unsold tickets for the first game was 7: 3
Total ratio 7 + 3 = 10
Number of tickets sold for the first game would be 7/10 × 1800 = 12600/10 = 1260 tickets

Question 31.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You have $150 in a savings account and you have some cash. The tape diagram represents the ratio of the amounts of money. You want to have twice the amount of money in your savings account as you have in cash. How much of your cash should you deposit into your savings account?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 13
Answer: $200

Explanation:
We know that:
You have $150 in a savings account.
This is represented with two tiles.
Then each tile represents:
$150/2 = $75
And in cash you have 5 tiles, then in cash you have:
5×$75 = $375.
Then the problem is:
You have $150 in the savings account
You have $375 in cash.
You want to deposit a quantity such that you have twice the amount of money in your savings account as you have in cash.
Suppose that you move a quantity X from cash to the savings account, then now we have the situation:
Sav. Acc. = $150 + X
Cash = $375 – X
And we want that:
Sav. Acc. = 2×Cash
($150 + X) = 2×($375 – X)
Let’s solve this for X.
$150 + X = $750 – 2×X
3×X = $750 – $150 = $600
X = $600/3 = $200
You should deposit $200 in the Savings account.

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
A fish tank contains tetras, guppies, and minnows. The ratio of tetras to guppies is 4 : 2. The ratio of minnows to guppies is 1 : 3. There are 60 fish in the tank. How many more tetras are there than minnows? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 14
Answer: 30

Explanation:
A fish tank contains tetras, guppies, and minnows.
The ratio of tetras to guppies is 4 : 2.
The ratio of minnows to guppies is 1 : 3. There are 60 fish in the tank.
Let number of tetras be t
number of guppies be g
number of minnows be m
Ratio of tetras to guppies is 4:2, or reducing, 2:1
m = g/3
Also, total there are 60 fish
t + g + m = 60
2g + g + g/3 = 60
Now finding t and m:
m = g/3 = 18/3 = 6
m = 6
t = 2g
t = 2(18)
t = 36
There are 36 tetras and 6 minnows. So, there are 36 – 6 = 30 more tetras than minnows

EXPLORATION 1

Making a Table of Equivalent Ratios
Work with a partner. You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
a. You measure 2 cups of the milk for a recipe and pour it into a pitcher. You repeat this four more times. Make a table to show the numbers of calories and cups in the pitcher as you add the milk.
b. Describe any relationships you see in your table.
c. Describe ways that you can find equivalent ratios using different operations.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 1
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Creating a Double Number Line
Work with a partner.
a. Represent the ratio in Exploration 1 by labeling the increments on the double number line below. Can you label the increments in more than one way?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 2
b. How can you use the double number line to find the number of calories in 3 cups of milk? 3.5 cups of milk?
Answer:

Lesson 3.3 Using Ratio Tables

You can find and organize equivalent ratios in a ratio table. You can generate a ratio table by using repeated addition or multiplication.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 3

Try It

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-4

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-5

You can also generate a ratio table by using subtraction or division. In summary, you can find equivalent ratios by:
• adding or subtracting quantities in equivalent ratios.
• multiplying or dividing each quantity in a ratio by the same number.

Try It

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-6
2:10 = 1:5
4:20 = 1:5
3:15 = 1:5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-7
The ratio is 12:1
The equivalent ratios are
24:2 = 12:1
48:4 = 12:1
36:3 = 12:1

Question 5.
WHAT IF?
You eat 21 crackers. How much sodium do you consume?
Answer:
BIg Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates
Add the middle two columns
120 + 20 = 140
18 + 3 = 21 crackers
Thus you consume 140 mg sodium.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

COMPLETING A RATIO TABLE Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-8
The missing values in the ratio are 4, 12, 18
The ratio is 2:6
The equivalent ratio of 2:6 are 4:12, 6:18

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-9
The missing values in the ratio are 56, 7, 20
The ratio is 2:8
The equivalent ratio of 2:8 are 14:56, 7:28, 5:20

Question 8.
WRITING
Explain how creating a ratio table using repeated addition is similar to creating a ratio table using multiplication.
Answer:
Ratio tables are constructed in a special way. Each pair of values in the table will be equivalent to the same ratio. You can use repeated addition or multiplication to create a ratio table. There is a constant value that we can multiply the values in the first column by to get the values in the second column.

Question 9.
You mix 7 tablespoons of vinegar for every 4 tablespoons of baking soda to produce a chemical reaction. You use 15 tablespoons of baking soda. How much vinegar do you use?
Answer:
Given,
You mix 7 tablespoons of vinegar for every 4 tablespoons of baking soda to produce a chemical reaction.
You use 15 tablespoons of baking soda.
Case 1:
Tablespoon of vinegar taken = 7
Tablespoon of baking soda taken = 4
The ratio between v and b = 7:4
Case 2:
Tablespoon of vinegar taken = x
Tablespoon of baking soda taken = 15
The ratio between v and b = x:15
7:4 : : x:15
7 × 15 = 4 × x
4x = 105
x = 105/4
x = 26.25
Thus you use 26.25 teaspoons.

Question 10.
You make a carbonated beverage by adding 7 ounces of soda water for every 3 ounces of regular water. Your friend uses 11 ounces of soda water for every 4 ounces of regular water. Whose beverage is more carbonated?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 10
Answer:
The proportion of soda in the drink will show us how carbonated a beverage is. The proportion of soda is the ounce of soda divided by the sum of the soda and water.
The proportion of soda in the first beverage
7/(7+3) = 7/10 = 0.7
The proportion of soda in the first beverage
11/(11+4) = 11/15 = 0.73
Therefore the second beverage is more carbonated.

Using Ratio Tables Homework & Practice 3.3

Review & Refresh

A bag contains green tokens and black tokens. You are given the number of green tokens in the bag and the ratio of green tokens to black tokens. Find the number of black tokens in the bag.
Question 1.
green tokens; 4 for every 1
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 4x
no of black tokens:- 1x
x = 1
no of green tokens:- 4x = 4(1) = 4
no of black tokens:- 1x = 1() = 1

Question 2.
6 green tokens; 2 : 7
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 2x
no of black tokens:- 7x
2x + 7x = 6
9x = 6
x = 6/9
x = 2/3
no of green tokens:- 2x = 2(2/3) = 4/3
no of black tokens:- 7x = 7(2/3) = 14/3

Question 3.
24 green tokens; 8 to 5
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 8x
no of black tokens:- 5x
8x + 5x = 24
13x = 24
x = 24/13
no of green tokens:- 8x = 8(24/13) = 14.7
no of black tokens:- 5x = 5(24/13) = 9.23

Question 4.
36 green tokens; 3 for every 4
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 3x
no of black tokens:- 4x
3x + 4x = 36
7x = 36
x = 36/7
no of green tokens:- 3x = 3(36/7) = 15.42
no of black tokens:- 4x = 4(36/7) = 20.57

Find the GCF of the numbers.
Question 5.
8, 16
Answer: 8

Explanation:
The factors of 8 are: 1, 2, 4, 8
The factors of 16 are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
Then the greatest common factor is 8.

Question 6.
48, 80
Answer: 16

Explanation:
The factors of 48 are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 48
The factors of 80 are: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 40, 80
Then the greatest common factor is 16.

Question 7.
15, 45, 100
Answer: 5

Explanation:
The factors of 15 are: 1, 3, 5, 15
The factors of 45 are: 1, 3, 5, 9, 15, 45
The factors of 100 are: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100
Then the greatest common factor is 5.

Evaluate the expression.
Question 8.
35 – 2 × 42
Answer:
35 – 2 × 42
35 – 2 × 16
35 – 32 = 3

Question 9.
12 ÷ (1 + 33 – 24)
Answer:
12 ÷ (1 + 33 – 24)
12 ÷ (1 + 27 – 16)
12 ÷ (28 – 16)
12 ÷ 12 = 1

Question 10.
82 ÷ [(11 – 3) . 2]
Answer:
82 ÷ [(11 – 3) . 2]
82 ÷ [8 . 2]
82 ÷ 16
64 ÷ 16 = 4

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 11
Answer:
Given Area = 48 sq. yd
Length = 8 yd
Width = x
Area of the rectangle = l × w
48 = 8 × x
x = 48/8 = 6
x = 6 yd
Thus the width of the rectangle = 6 yd
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2(8) + 2(6)
P = 16 + 12
P = 28
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle = 28 yards

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 12
Answer:
Given Area = 132 sq. mm
Length = 12 mm
Width = x
Area of the rectangle = l × w
132 = 12 × x
x = 132/12 = 11
x = 11 mm
Thus the width of the rectangle = 11 mm
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2(12) + 2(11)
P = 24 + 22
P = 46
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle = 46 mm

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A RATIO TABLE Use a ratio table to find the number of calories in the indicated number of cups of milk from Exploration 1. Explain your method. (See Exploration 1, p. 121.)
Question 13.
16 cups
Answer:
You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
1 cup = 180/2 = 90 calories
16 cups = 16 × 90 = 1440 calories

Question 14.
18 cups
Answer:
You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
1 cup = 180/2 = 90 calories
18 cups = 18 × 90 = 1620 calories

Question 15.
5.5 cups
Answer:
You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
1 cup = 180/2 = 90 calories
5.5 cups = 5.5 × 90 = 495 calories

COMPLETING RATIO TABLES Find the missing value(s) in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-15
The ratio is 1 : 5
The equivalent ratio with 10 is 2 : 10

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-16
The ratio is 3 : 5
The equivalent ratio is 6 : 10, 9 : 15

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-17
The ratio is 6 : 3
The equivalent ratio is 24 : 12, 18 : 9

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-18
The ratio is 2 : 14
The equivalent ratio is 1 : 7, 3 : 21, 18 : 126

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-19

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-20

Question 22.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend creates a ratio table for the ratio 5 : 3. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 21
Answer: No your friend is incorrect. Because 125 : 27 is not the equivalent ratio of 5 : 3

COMPLETING RATIO TABLES Complete the ratio table to solve the problem.
Question 23.
For every 3 tickets you sell, your friend sells 4 tickets. You sell a total of 12 tickets. How many tickets does your friend sell?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 22
Answer:
The ratio is 3 : 4
So divide 12 by 3 = 4 and sells 16 tickets
Thus the ratio is 12 : 16 = 3 : 4

Question 24.
A store sells 2 printers for every 5 computers. The store sells 40 computers. How many printers does the store sell?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 23
Answer:
Let us think of 2 printers for every 5 computers as a set.
First let us determine hoe many sets were sold to get to 40 computers
5x = 40
x = 8
2x = 2(8) = 16
This means 16 printers were sold.

Question 25.
First and second place in a contest use a ratio to share a cash prize. When first place pays $100, second place pays $60. How much does first place pay when second place pays $36?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 24
Answer: $60

Explanation:
Given,
First and second place in a contest use a ratio to share a cash prize. When first place pays $100, second place pays $60.
Let x be the pay of the first place when the second place pays $36
100/60 = x/36
x = $60

Question 26.
A grade has 81 girls and 72 boys. The grade is split into groups that have the same ratio of girls to boys as the whole grade. How many girls are in a group that has 16 boys?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 25
Answer:
A grade has 81 girls and 72 boys. The grade is split into groups that have the same ratio of girls to boys as the whole grade.
We have to find how many girls are in a group that has 16 boys
81 : 72 = x : 16
16 × 81 = 1296
1296/72 = 18
Therefore the value of girls numbers is 18.
The new ratio will be 18 : 16

USING A DOUBLE NUMBER LINE Find the missing quantity in the double number line.
Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 26
Answer:
The equivalent ratio of 460 : 4 is 1840 : 16
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-26

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 27
Answer:
The equivalent ratio of 700 : 14 is 1050 : 21
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-27

Question 29.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A company sets sales goals for employees each month.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 28
a. At her current pace, how many items will Kristina sell in 28 days? Is she on track to meet the goal? Explain.
b. At his current pace, how many dollars worth of product will Jim sell in 28 days? Is he on track to meet the goal? Explain.
Answer:

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A gold alloy contains 15 milligrams of gold for every 4 milligrams of copper. A jeweler uses 48 milligrams of copper to make the alloy. How much gold does the jeweler use to make the alloy?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 29
Answer:
There are 180 milligrams of gold in the alloy.

Explanation:
We know that for every 4 milligrams of copper, there are 15 milligrams of gold.
if 48 milligrams of copper are used, we can separate them in “sets” of 4 milligrams.
We have 48/4 = 12 sets.
And for each one of these 12 sets, there are 15 milligrams of gold, then the total amount of gold in the alloy is:
12×15mg = 180 mg

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You make candles by adding 2 fluid ounces of scented oil for every 22 fluid ounces of wax. Your friend makes candles by adding 3 fluid ounces of the same scented oil for every 37 fluid ounces of wax. Whose candles are more fragrant? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: Your candles are more fragrant

Explanation:
Given,
You make candles by adding 2 fluid ounces of scented oil for every 22 fluid ounces of wax.
Your friend makes candles by adding 3 fluid ounces of the same scented oil for every 37 fluid ounces of wax.
Compare 2/22 and 3/37
2/22 > 3/37
By this we can say that your candles are more fragrant.

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A mint milk shake contains 1.25 fluid ounces of milk for every 4 ounces of ice cream. A strawberry milk shake contains 1.75 fluid ounces of milk for every 5 ounces of ice cream. Which milk shake is thicker? Explain.
Answer:

CRITICAL THINKING Two whole numbers A and B satisfy the following conditions. Find A and B.
Question 33.
A + B = 30
A : B is equivalent to 2 : 3.
Answer:
Let A = 2x
Let B = 3x
2x + 3x = 30
5x = 30
x = 30/5 = 6
x = 6
A = 2x = 2(6) = 12
B = 3(6) = 18
A : B = 12 : 18

Question 34.
A + B = 44
A : B is equivalent to 4 : 7.
Answer:
Let A = 4x
Let B = 7x
4x + 7x = 44
11x = 44
x = 44/11
x = 4
A = 4x = 4(4) = 16
B = 7x = 7(4) = 28
A : B = 16 : 28

Question 35.
A – B = 18
A : B is equivalent to 11 : 5.
Answer:
Let A = 11x
Let B = 5x
11x – 5x = 18
6x = 18
x = 18/6
x = 3
A = 11x = 11(3) = 33
B = 5x = 5(3) = 15
33 – 15 = 18
A : B = 33 : 15

Question 36.
A – B = 25
A : B is equivalent to 13 : 8.
Answer:
Let A = 13x
Let B = 8x
13x – 8x = 25
5x = 25
x = 5
A = 13x = 13(5) = 65
B = 8(5) = 40
A : B = 65 : 40

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A nutrition label shows that there are 161 calories in 28 grams of dry roasted cashews. You eat 9 cashews totaling 12 grams.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 30
a. Do you think it is possible to find the number of calories you consume? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
There are 161 calories in 28 grams. You eat 9 cashews totaling 12 grams.
We need to find out how many calories in 12 grams
For that we make a proportion
Calories/grams = calories/grams
161/28 = x/12
28x = 161 × 12
x = 1932/28
x = 69
There are 69 calories in 12 grams

b. How many cashews are in one serving?
Answer:
Divide 161 by 28 to get the calorie count for one gram
Multiply that by 12 to work out how many calories you have eaten in the 9 cashews 161/28 = 5.75
5.75 x 12 = 69

Question 38.
REASONING
The ratio of three numbers is 4 : 5 : 3. The sum of the numbers is 54. What are the three numbers?
Answer:
Let it be x.
4x + 5x + 3x = 54
12x = 54
x = 54/12
x = 4.5
Now 4x = 4× 4.5 = 18
3x = 3 × 4.5
=13.5
5x = 5× 4.5 = 22.5

Question 39.
CRITICAL THINKING
Seven out of every 8 students surveyed own a bike. The difference between the number of students who own a bike and those who do not is 72. How many students were surveyed?
Answer:
So if x people were surveyed, 7/8 people owned a bike and 1/8 did not.
The difference between them is 72
7/8 × x – 1/8 = 72
So, this means that,
6/8 x = 72
Let us simpify
3/4 × x = 72
1/4 × x = 24
and multiply by 4
x = 96
So 96 people were surveyed

Question 40.
LOGIC
You and a classmate have a bug collection for science class. You find 5 out of every 9 bugs in the collection. You find 4 more bugs than your classmate. How many bugs are in the collection?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 31
Answer:
Let b represent the total amount bugs.
5/9 × b = 4/9 × b + 4
1/9 × b = 4
b = 4 × 9
b = 36
There are 36 bugs in the collection.

Question 41.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You earn $72 for every 8 hours you spend shoveling snow. You earn $60 for every 5 hours you spend babysitting. For every 3 hours you spend babysitting, you spend 2 hours shoveling snow. You babysit for 15 hours in January. How much money do you earn in January?
Answer: $90

Explanation:
Earning for 8 hours shoveling snow = $72
Amount per hour = $72/8 = $9
3 hours of babysitting = 2 hours shoveling snow
Babysitting hours in January = 15 hours
Hours of shoveling snow in January = (15/3) x 2 = 10 hours
Amount earned in January = Hours shoveling snow x Hourly Rate
= 10 x $9 = $90
That is, you earn $90 in January.

Question 42.
DIG DEEPER!
You and a friend each have a collection of tokens. Initially, for every 8 tokens you had, your friend had 3. After you give half of your tokens to your friend, your friend now has 18 more tokens than you. Initially, how many more tokens did you have than your friend?
Answer: 30 token

Explanation:
Initially, for every 8 tokens I had, my friend had 3.
Therefore, ratio of tokens that me and my friend is 8 : 3
Let I have 8 x tokens and my friend has 3 x tokens, where x is any number.
Then again according to the question,
After I gave half of your friend, my friend now has 18 more tokens than you.
That is, (3x + 4x) – 4x = 18
7x – 4x = 18
3x = 18
x = 6
Therefore , Initially the difference between me and my friend’s token = 8 x – 3 x = 5 x = 5 × 6 = 30

Lesson 3.4 Graphing Ratio Relationships

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Coordinate Plane
Work with a partner. An airplane travels 300 miles per hour.
a. Represent the relationship between distance and time in a coordinate plane. Explain your choice for labeling and scaling the axes.
b. Write a question that can be answered using the graph. Exchange your question with another group. Answer their question and discuss the solution with the other group.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 1
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Identifying Relationships in Graphs
Work with a partner. Use the graphs to make a ratio table. Explain how the blue, red, and green arrows correspond to the ratio table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 2
Answer:

For a ratio of two quantities, you can use equivalent ratios to create ordered pairs of the form (first quantity, second quantity). You can plot these ordered pairs in a coordinate plane and draw a line, starting at(0, 0), through the points.

Try It

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 3
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 4
Answer:

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 2 when the cost of the dark chocolate cashews is $15 per pound.
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
GRAPHING A RATIO RELATIONSHIP
Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 5
Answer:

Question 5.
CRITICAL THINKING
Use what you know about equivalent ratios to explain why the graph of a ratio relationship passes through (0, 0).
Answer:

Question 6.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which ordered pair does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 6
Answer: (24, 4) does not belong with the other three.
(4, 1) (8, 2) (12, 3) are the equivalent ordered pairs.

Question 7.
You are skateboarding at a pace of 30 meters every 5 seconds. Your friend is in-line skating at a pace of 9 meters every 2 seconds. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Who is faster?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 7
Answer:

Question 8.
You buy 2.5 pounds of pumpkin seeds and 2.5 pounds of sunflower seeds. Use a graph to find your total cost. Then use the graph to determine how much more you pay for pumpkin seeds than for sunflower seeds.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 8
Answer:

Graphing Ratio Relationships Homework & Practice 3.4

Review & Refresh

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.4-9
The pattern of chickens is multiple of 8.
So, the missing values in the ratio table is 16.
The pattern of Eggs is multiple of 6.
So, the missing values in the ratio table is 18.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.4-10
The missing values are 1, 12, 5
The equivalent ratios are 3 : 1, 12:4, 15:5

Write the name of the decimal number.
Question 3.
7.1
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
7.1 can be written as seven and one.

Question 4.
3.54
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
3.54 can be written as three and five four

Question 5.
13.6
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
13.6 can be written as thirteen and six

Question 6.
8.132
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
8.132 can be written as eight and one thirty two

Write two equivalent ratios that describe the relationship.
Question 7.
baseballs to gloves
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 11
Answer: The ratio from baseballs to gloves is 8: 4
The equivalent ratios are 2 : 1, 16 : 8

Question 8.
ladybugs to bees
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 12
Answer: The ratio from ladybugs to bees is 12 : 4
The equivalent ratios are 3 : 1 and 24 : 8

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A COORDINATE PLANE Represent the relationship between distance and time in a coordinate plane. (See Exploration 1, p. 129.)
Question 9.
A train travels 45 miles per hour.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Answer Key img_1

Question 10.
A motorcycle travels 70 kilometers per hour.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_1

Question 11
A snail travels 80 centimeters per minute.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_2

Question 12.
A whale travels 800 yards per minute.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_3

GRAPHING RATIO RELATIONSHIPS Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 13
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_4

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_5

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_6

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_7

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 17
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_8

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_9

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A radio station collects donations for a new broadcast tower. The cost to construct the tower is $25.50 per inch.
a. Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
b. How much does it cost to fund 4.5 inches of the construction?
Answer:

Question 20.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your school organizes a clothing drive as a fundraiser for a class trip. The school earns $100 for every 400 pounds of donated clothing.
a. Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
b. How much money does your school earn for donating 2200 pounds of clothing?
Answer:

Question 21.
NUMBER SENSE
Just by looking at the graph, determine who earns a greater hourly wage. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 19
Answer: By seeing the above graph we can say that you earns greater hourly wage.

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An airplane traveling from Chicago to Los Angeles travels 15 miles every 2 minutes. On the return trip, the plane travels 25 miles every 3 minutes. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Does the plane fly faster when traveling to Los Angeles or to Chicago?
Answer:

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your freezer produces 8 ice cubes every 2 hours. Your friend’s freezer produces 24 ice cubes every 5 hours. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Whose freezer produces ice faster?
Answer:

Question 24.
CHOOSE TOOLS
A chemist prepares two acid solutions.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 20
a. Use a ratio table to determine which solution is more acidic.
b. Use a graph to determine which solution is more acidic.
c. Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:

Question 25.
DIG DEEPER!
A company offers a nut mixture with 7 peanuts for every 3 almonds. The company changes the mixture to have 9 peanuts for every 5 almonds, but the number of nuts per container does not change.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 21
a. How many nuts are in the smallest possible container?
b. Graph each ratio relationship. What can you conclude?
c. Almonds cost more than peanuts. Should the company change the price of the mixture? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 26.
STRUCTURE
The point (p, q) is on the graph of values from a ratio table. What are two additional points on the graph?
Answer:

Lesson 3.5 Rates and Unit Rates

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Diagram
Work with a partner. The diagram shows a story problem.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 1
a. What information can you obtain from the diagram?
b. Assuming that the car travels at a constant speed, how far does the car travel in 3.25 hours? Explain your method.
c. Draw a speedometer that shows the speed of the car. How can you use the speedometer to answer part(b)?
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Using Equivalent Ratios
Work with a partner. Count the number of times you can clap your hands in 12 seconds. Have your partner record your results. Then switch roles with your partner and repeat the process.
a. Using your results and your partner’s results, write ratios that represent the numbers of claps for every 12 seconds.
b. Explain how you can use the ratios in part(a) to find the numbers of times you and your partner can clap your hands in 2 minutes, in 2.5 minutes, and in 3 minutes.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 2
Answer:

A rate is a ratio of two quantities using different units. You solved various ratio problems in the previous sections that involved rates. Now you will use unit rates to solve rate problems.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 3

Try It

Question 1.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 1 when you add 4 pints of water for every 3 cups of concentrate.
Answer:

Question 2.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 2 when the space junk travels 3 miles every 5 seconds.
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

FINDING UNIT RATES Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 3.
revolutions in 50 seconds
Answer:

Question 4.
1400 words for every 4 pages
Answer:
1400 – 4 pages
x – 1 page
4 × x = 1400
x = 1400/4
x = 350
Thus 350 words for every 1 page.

Question 5.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which rate does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 4
Answer: 20 pounds per 4 feet does not belong with the other three.

Explanation:
8 pounds for every 2 feet
8/2 = 4 feet
12 pounds per 3 feet
12/3 = 4 feet
20 pounds per 4 feet
20/4 = 5 feet
24 pounds for every 6 feet
24/6 = 4 feet

Question 6.
You buy 10 pounds of birdseed at Store A for $11.50. Your friend buys 15 pounds of birdseed at Store B for $19.50. How much less would you spend by buying 20 pounds of birdseed at the store with the better deal?
Answer: Store A

Explanation:
Given,
You buy 10 pounds of birdseed at Store A for $11.50.
10 pounds – $11.50
1 pound – $1.15
20 pounds = 20 × 1.15 = $23
Your friend buys 15 pounds of birdseed at Store B for $19.50.
15 pounds – $19.50
1 pound – $1.3
1.3 × 20 = $26
$23 < $26

Question 7.
A person hikes 4 miles in 2.5 hours. Find the unit rate in miles per hour. Then find the unit rate in hours per mile. How is each unit rate useful in a real-life situation?
Answer: 1.6 kilometer per hour

Explanation:
The unit rate is the number of miles in 1 hour.
Given,
Distance = 4 miles
Time = 2.5 hours
So if he hike 4 miles in 2.5 hours
then he will hike x mile in 1 hour
x = 4/2.5
x = 1.6 miles per hour

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You buy 11 bagels with a $20 bill. How much change do you receive? How many more bagels could you buy?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 5
Answer:

Rates and Unit Rates Homework & Practice 3.5

Review & Refresh

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_11

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_12

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_13

Divide. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{10}{3}\) = \(\frac{10}{15}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) ÷ 6
Answer: \(\frac{1}{16}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{3}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{16}\)

Question 7.
3\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2
Answer: 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
3\(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{19}{6}\)
\(\frac{19}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Question 8.
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 2\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer: 2

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{16}{3}\)
2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
\(\frac{16}{3}\) × \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{48}{24}\) = 2

Add or subtract.
Question 9.
6.94 + 12.301
Answer: 19.241

Question 10.
8.753 – 7.71
Answer: 1.043

Question 11.
14.532 – 6.613
Answer: 7.919

Question 12.
The winner in an election for class president received \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the 240 votes. How many votes did the winner receive?
A. 60
B. 150
C. 180
D. 320
Answer: 180

Explanation:
Given,
The winner in an election for class president received \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the 240 votes.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × 240 = 180
The winner receive 180 votes.
Thus the correct answer is option C

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Use the ratio in Exploration 2 to estimate the number of times you can clap your hands in the given amount of time. (See Exploration 2, p. 135.)
Question 13.
0.5 minute
Answer:

Question 14.
1.75 minutes
Answer:

Question 15.
2.25 minutes
Answer:

FINDING UNIT RATES Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 16.
24 animals in 2 square miles
Answer: 12 animals

Explanation:
Given,
24 animals in 2 square miles
24/2 = 12
12 animals in 1 square mile

Question 17.
$100 for every 5 guests
Answer: $20

Explanation:
Given,
$100 for every 5 guests
100/5 = $20
$20 per guest.

Question 18.
$28 saved in 4 weeks
Answer: $7

Explanation:
Given,
$28 saved in 4 weeks
28/4 = $7
$7 per week

Question 19.
18 necklaces made in 3 hours
Answer: 6 necklaces

Explanation:
Given,
18 necklaces made in 3 hours
18/3 = 6
6 necklaces made in 1 hour

Question 20.
270 miles in 6 hours
Answer: 45 miles per hour

Explanation:
Given,
270 miles in 6 hours
270/6 = 45
45 miles in 1 hour

Question 21.
228 students in 12 classes
Answer: 24 students per class

Explanation:
Given,
228 students in 12 classes
228/12 = 24
24 students in 1 class

Question 22.
2520 kilobytes in 18 seconds
Answer: 140 kilobytes per second

Explanation:
Given,
2520 kilobytes in 18 seconds
2520/18 = 140 kilobytes
140 kilobytes per second

Question 23.
880 calories in 8 servings
Answer: 110 calories in 1 serving

Explanation:
Given,
880 calories in 8 servings
880/8 = 110
110 calories in 1 serving

Question 24.
1080 miles on 15 gallons
Answer: 72 miles in 1 gallon

Explanation:
Given,
1080 miles on 15 gallons
1080/15 = 72 miles
72 miles in 1 gallon

Question 25.
$12.50 for 5 ounces
Answer: 2.5

Explanation:
Given,
$12.50 for 5 ounces
12.50/5 = 2.5
$2.5 per ounce

USING UNIT RATES Find the missing values in the ratio table.
Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 10
Answer:

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 11
Answer:

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Lightning strikes Earth 1000 times in 10 seconds.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 12
a. How many times does lightning strike in 12 seconds?
b. How many seconds does it take for lightning to strike 7250 times?
Answer:

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You earn $35 for washing 7 cars.
a. How much do you earn for washing 4 cars?

Answer:
Given,
You earn $35 for washing 7 cars.
7 cars = $35
1 car = x
x × 7 = $35
x = 35/7 = 5
Thus you earn $5 per car
4 cars = 4 × 5 = $20
You earn $20 for washing 4 cars..

b. You earn $45. How many cars did you wash?
Answer:
you earn $5 per car
45/5 = 9
You wash 9 cars for $45

COMPARING RATES Decide whether the rates are equivalent.
Question 30.
24 laps in 6 minutes
72 laps in 18 minutes
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
24:6 = 4 : 1
72 : 18 = 4 : 1
Thus the rates are equivalent.

Question 31.
126 points for every 3 games
210 points for every 5 games
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given
126 points for every 3 games
210 points for every 5 games
126 : 3 = 42 : 1
210 : 5 = 42 : 1
Thus the rates are equivalent.

Question 32.
15 breaths for every 36 seconds
90 breaths for every 3 minutes
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given
15 breaths for every 36 seconds
90 breaths for every 3 minutes
15 : 36 = 0.41
90 : 180 = 0.5
Thus the rates are not equivalent.

Question 33.
$16 for 4 pounds
$1 for 4 ounces
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given
$16 for 4 pounds
$1 for 4 ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 64 ounces
16 : 64 = 1 : 4
Thus the rates are equivalent.

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An office printer prints 25 photos in 12.5 minutes. A home printer prints 15 photos in 6 minutes. Which printer is faster? How many more photos can you print in 12 minutes using the faster printer?
Answer: The home printer is faster

Explanation:
Given,
An office printer prints 25 photos in 12.5 minutes. A home printer prints 15 photos in 6 minutes.
23 photos in 12.5 minutes
12.5 is half of 25 and therefore this is a two to one ratio
So 2 photos print in 1 minute with the office printer.
And 4 photos in 2 minutes.
The home printer prints 15 photos in 6 minutes.
Since 15 is not divisible by 6 without a remainder divide both by 3.
So 5 photos in 2 minutes. This is faster than the office printer.
This leaves you with an answer of 30 photos in 12 minutes.

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You jog 2 kilometers in 12 minutes. Your friend jogs 3 kilometers in 16.5 minutes. Who jogs faster? How much sooner will the faster jogger finish a five-kilometer race?
Answer:
First, we have to calculate the speed of person 1 and 2.
Speed = Distance/time
Speed of person 1 = 2/12 = 0.167 km/min
Speed of person 2 = 3/16.5 = 0.182 km/min
From this we conclude that, person 2 jogs faster as compared to person 1.
Now we have to calculate the time taken by the faster jogger to finish a 5 kilometer race.
Faster jogger speed = 0.182 km/min
Distance = 5 km
S = d/t
Time = 27.5 min
Thus, the time taken by the faster jogger finish a 5 kilometer race will be, 27.5 minutes.

Question 36.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A softball team has a budget of $200 for visors. The athletic director pays $90 for 12 sun visors. Is there enough money in the budget to purchase 15 more sun visors? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: $112.5

Explanation:
An athletic director pays $90 for 12 sun visors for the softball team.
The rate per sun visor is equal to $90/12 = $7.5
So the athletic director should pay
$7.5 × 15 = $112.5

Question 37.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the amounts of food collected by two homerooms. Homeroom A collects 21 additional items of food. How many more items does Homeroom B need to collect to have more items per student?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 13
Answer:

Question 38.
REASONING
A runner completed a 26.2-mile marathon in 210 minutes.
a. Estimate the unit rate, in miles per minute.
b. Estimate the unit rate, in minutes per mile.
c. Another runner says, “I averaged 10-minute miles in the marathon.” Is this runner talking about the unit rate described in part(a) or in part(b)? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 14
Answer:

Question 39.
DIG DEEPER!
You can complete one-half of a job in an hour. Your friend can complete one-third of the same job in an hour. How long will it take to complete the job if you work together?
Answer:
Given,
You can complete one-half of a job in an hour. Your friend can complete one-third of the same job in an hour
1 1/2 + 1 1/3 = 1/x
has to be between 1/4 min to 1/6 hours. first guess is about (1/2)(1/4+1/6) = 5/24= 0.21 hours
2 + 3 = 1/x
5 = 1/x
x = 1/5 = 0.20 hours

Lesson 3.6 Converting Measures

EXPLORATION 1

Estimating Unit Conversions
Work with a partner. You are given 4 one-liter containers and a one-gallon container.
a. A full one-gallon container can be used to fill the one-liter containers, as shown below. Write a unit rate that estimates the number of liters per gallon.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 1
b. A full one-liter container can be used to partially foll the one-gallon container, as shown below. Write a unit rate that estimates the number of gallons per liter.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 2
c. Estimate the number of liters in 5.5 gallons and the number of gallons in 12 liters. What method(s) did you use? What other methods could you have used?
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Converting Units in a Rate
Work with a partner. The rate that a caterpillar moves is given in inches per minute. Using the rulers below, how can you convert the rate to centimeters per second? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 3
Answer:

The U.S. customary system is a system of measurement that contains units for length, capacity, and weight. The metric system is a decimal system of measurement, based on powers of 10, that contains units for length, capacity, and mass. Key Vocabulary U.S. customary system, p. 142 metric system,p. 142 You can use unit rates and ratio tables to convert measures within the same system and between systems.

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 4

Try It

Question 1.
Convert 48 feet to yards.
Answer: 16 yards

Explanation:
Convert from feets to yards
We know that
1 yard = 3 feet
So, 48 feet = 48/3 = 16 yards

Question 2.
Convert 7 miles to kilometers. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Answer:
Convert from miles to kilometers.
1 mile = 1.6 km
7 miles = 7 × 1.6 = 11.2 kilometers

Question 3.
Convert 20 quarts to liters. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Answer:
Convert from quarts to liters.
1 quart = 0.94 liters
20 quarts = 20 × 0.94 = 18.92 liters

Question 4.
Convert 60 kilometers per hour to miles per hour. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Answer:
Convert from kilometers per hour to miles per hour.
1 kilometer per hour = 0.621 miles per hour
60 kilometer per hour = 37.28 miles per hour

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal

Question 5.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 5
Answer:
“Find the number of inches in 5 centimeters” has different words.

CONVERTING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 6
Answer:
Convert from meters per minute to feet per minute.
1 meter per minute = 3.2 feet per minute
12 meter per minute = 39.37 feet per minute

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 7
Answer:
Convert from feet per second to yard per minute
12 feet per second = 240 yard per minute

Question 8.
Will all of the water from a full two-liter bottle fit into a two-quart pitcher? Explain.
Answer:
1 liter = 1.05669 quarts
q/L = 1.05669/1
q/2 = 1.05669/1
q = 2 × 1.05669
q = 2.11338

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The speed of light is about 300,000 kilometers per second. The Sun is about 93 million miles from Earth. How many minutes does it take for sunlight to reach Earth?
Answer:

Question 10.
A race car driver’s goal is to complete a 1000-kilometer auto race in 4 hours or less. The driver’s average speed is 4200 meters per minute. Does the driver meet the goal? If not, how much faster (in meters per minute) must the driver be to meet the goal?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 8
Answer:

Converting Measures Homework & Practice 3.6

Review & Refresh

Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 1.
102 beats per 2 minutes
Answer: 51 per minute

Explanation:
102 beats per 2 minutes
102/2 = 51 beats per minute

Question 2.
60 shirts for every 5 clothing racks
Answer: 12 for 1 clothing racks

Explanation:
60 shirts for every 5 clothing racks
60/5 = 12
12 for 1 clothing racks

Question 3.
$100 donated for every 5 volunteers
Answer: 20 for 1 volunteer

Explanation:
$100 donated for every 5 volunteers
100/5 = 20
$20 donated for 1 volunteer

Question 4.
30 milliliters every 4 hours
Answer: 7.5 ml per hour

Explanation:
30 milliliters every 4 hours
30/4 = 7.5
So, 7.5 ml per hour

Question 5.
What is the LCM of 6, 12, and 18?
A. 6
B. 18
C. 36
D. 72
Answer: C

Explanation:
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 6:
6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48
Multiples of 12:
12, 24, 36, 48, 60
Multiples of 18:
18, 36, 54, 72
Therefore,
LCM(6, 12, 18) = 36
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Write the prime factorization of the number.
Question 6.
56
Answer: 2 x 2 x 2 x 7

Explanation:
56 = 2 × 28
= 2 × 2 × 14
= 2 × 2 × 2 × 7
Thus the prime factorization of the number 56 is 2 x 2 x 2 x 7

Question 7.
74
Answer: 2 × 37

Explanation:
74 = 2 × 37
Thus the prime factorization of the number 74 is 2 x 37

Question 8.
63
Answer: 3 × 3 × 7

Explanation:
63 = 3 × 21
= 3 × 3 × 7
Thus the prime factorization of the number 63 is 3 × 3 × 7

Question 9.
132
Answer: 2 x 2 x 3 x 11

Explanation:
132 = 2 × 66
= 2 × 2 × 33
= 2 × 2 × 3 × 11
Thus the prime factorization of the number 132 is 2 x 2 x 3 x 11

Write the product as a power.
Question 10.
6 × 6
Answer: The product of 6×6 is 6²

Question 11.
18 × 18 × 18 × 18
Answer: The product of 18×18×18×18 is 18⁴

Question 12.
12 × 12 × 12 × 12 × 12
Answer: The product of 12×12×12×12×12 is 12⁵

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING MEASURES Answer the question. Explain your answer. (See Explorations 1 & 2, p. 141.)
Question 13.
Which juice container is larger: 2 L or 1 gal?
Answer:
Convert from liters to gal
1 liter = 0.26 gal
2 liter = 0.52 gal
1 gal = 3.78 liter
Thus the juice container with 1 gal is larger

Question 14.
Which is longer:1 in. or 2 cm?
Answer: 1 inch is longer than 2 cm

Explanation:
Convert from inches to cm
1 inch = 2.54 cm
2.54 cm > 2 cm

CONVERTING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 9
Answer: 6 cups

Explanation:
Convert from pints to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
3 pints = 3 × 2 cups = 6 cups

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 10
Answer: 1.5 L

Explanation:
Convert from mL to L
1000 mL = 1 L
1500 mL = 1.5 L

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 11
Answer: 2.5 lb

Explanation:
Convert from ounces to lb
1 ounce = 0.0625
40 oz = 2.5 lb

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 12
Answer: 60 in.

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 = 60 inches
So, 5 ft = 60 in.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 13
Answer: 24 qt

Explanation:
Convert from gallons to quarts
1 gal = 4 qt
6 gal = 6 × 4 qt = 24 qt
So, 6 gal = 24 qt

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 14
Answer: 480 mm

Explanation:
Convert from cm to mm
1 cm = 10 mm
48 cm = 48 × 10 mm = 480 mm
So, 48 cm = 480 mm

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 15
Answer: 5 m

Explanation:
Convert from cm to m
1 cm = 0.01 m
500 cm = 500 × 0.01 m = 5 meters
So, 500 cm = 5 meters

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 16
Answer: 6

Explanation:
Convert from grams to kilograms
1 kg = 1000 g
6000g = 6 kg

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 17
Answer:

Explanation:
Convert from fl ounce to cups
1 fl oz = 0.125 cups
32 fl ouz = 4 cups

CONVERTING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 18
Answer: 13 qt

Explanation:
Convert from liters to quarts.
1 L = 1.05 qt
12 L = 12.608 qt
12 L ≈ 13 qt

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 19
Answer: 46 ft

Explanation:
Convert from meters to feet
1 meter = 3.28 feet
14 meter = 45.93 feet
14 m ≈ 46 feet

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 20
Answer: 1 m

Explanation:
Convert from feet to meter
1 feet = 0.3 m
4 feet = 1.21 m
4 ft ≈ 1 m

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 21
Answer: 29 kg

Explanation:
Convert from lb to kgs.
1 lb = 0.45 kg
64 lb = 29.02 kg
64 lb ≈ 29 kg

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 22
Answer: 0.186 mi

Explanation:
Convert from kg to miles
1 km = 0.621 miles
0.3 km = 0.186 miles

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 23
Answer: 191 cm

Explanation:
Convert from inches to centimeters.
1 inch = 2.54 centimeter
75.2 inch = 191.008 centimeter
75.2 in ≈ 191 cm

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 24
Answer: 34 lb

Explanation:
Convert from kg to lb
1 kg = 2.20 lb
17 kg = 37.47 lb
17 kg ≈ 34 lb

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 25
Answer: 6 inches

Explanation:
Convert from cm to inches.
1 cm = 0.39 in
15 cm = 5.90 in
15 cm ≈ 6 in

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 26
Answer: 14 km

Explanation:
Convert from miles to kilometers
1 mile = 1.609 km
9 miles = 14.48 km
9 miles ≈ 14 km

Question 33.
GRAPHING RELATIONSHIPS
Represent the relationship between each pair of units in a coordinate plane.
a. feet and yards
b. pounds and kilograms
Answer:

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Earth travels 30 kilometers each second as it revolves around the Sun. How many miles does Earth travel in 1 second?
Answer:

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The Mackinac Bridge in Michigan is the third-longest suspension bridge in the United States.
a. How high above the water is the roadway in meters?
b. The bridge has a length of 26,372 feet. What is the length in kilometers?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 27
Answer:

USING CONVERSION FACTORS Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 28
Answer: 90 gal

Explanation:
Convert from cubic feet to the gallon
1 cu ft = 7.48 gal
12 cu ft = 12 × 7.48 gal = 89.76 gal
12 cu ft ≈ 90 gal

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 29
Answer: 6 L

Explanation:
Convert from quart to liter
1 qt = 0.94 L
6 qt = 5.67 L
6 qt ≈ 6 L

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 30
Answer: 1 gal

Explanation:
Convert from liters to gal
1 L = 0.264 gal
5 L = 5 × 0.264 gal = 1.32 gal
5 L ≈ 1 gal

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 31
Answer: 8 miles per hour

Explanation:
Convert from km per hour to miles per hour
1 km per hour = 0.621 miles per hour
13 km per hour = 8.07 miles per hour

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 32
Answer: 1320 liter per hour

Explanation:
Convert from liter per minute to liter per hour
1 liter per minute = 60 liter per hour
22 liter per minute = 1320 liter per hour

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 33
Answer: 0.175 miles per second

Explanation:
Convert from miles per hour to miles per second.
1 miles per hour = 0.0002 miles per second
63 miles per hour = 0.175 miles per second

Question 42.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend converts 8 liters to quarts. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 34
Answer:
Convert from liters to quarts
1 liter = 1.05 qt
8 liter = 8.45 qt (approx)
Yes, your friend is correct.

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The diagram shows the number of quarts of blood the human heart pumps per minute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 35
a. How many quarts of blood does the human heart pump per hour?

Answer:
1 hour = 60 minutes
The heart pumps 5 quarts of blood per minute
1 min = 5 quarts
60 min = 60 × 5 quarts = 300 quarts
Thus the heart pumps 300 quarts of blood per hour.

b. How many liters of blood does the human heart pump per minute?
Answer:
Given,
The heart pumps 5 quarts of blood per minute
Convert from quarts to liters
1 quart = 0.94 L
5 quarts = 4.73 L
Thus it pumps 4.73 L of blood per minute.

Question 44.
PROBLEM SOLVING
After washing dishes, water drips from the faucet. The graph shows the number of cups of water that drip from the faucet over time. How many gallons of water drip from the faucet in 24 hours?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 36
Answer:

COMPARING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 37
Answer: <

Explanation:
Convert from ounce to kg
1 oz = 0.02kg
30 oz = 0.85kg
Thus 30 oz < 8 kg

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 38
Answer: <

Explanation:
Convert from feet to centimeter
1 feet = 30.48 cm
6 feet = 182.88
Thus 6 feet < 300 cm

Question 47.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 39
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from gal to liter
1 gal = 3.78L
3 gal = 11.35L
Thus 3 gal > 6L

Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 40
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from inches to mm.
1 in = 25.4mm
10 in = 254 mm
Thus 254mm > 200 mm

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 41
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from lb to grams
1 lb = 453.5g
5 lb = 2268g
2268g > 1200g
Thus 5 lb > 1200g

Question 50.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 42
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from meters to feet
1 meter = 3.28 ft
1500 meter = 4921.26 ft
4921.26 ft > 3000 ft
Thus 1500 m > 3000 ft

USING DERIVED UNITS Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 43
Answer: 112 miles per hour

Explanation:
Convert from km per min to miles per hour
1 km per min = 37.28 miles per hour
3 km per min = 111.84 miles per hour
3 km per min ≈ 112 miles per hour

Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 44
Answer: 1.13 qt per minute

Explanation:
Convert from gal per hour to qt per minute
1 gal per hour = 0.06 qt per minute
17 gal per hour = 1.13 qt per minute

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 45
Answer: 4 inches per second

Explanation:
Convert from cm per minute to inches per second
1 cm per minute = 0.006 inches per second
600 cm per minute = 3.93 inches per second
600 cm per minute ≈ 4 inches per second

Question 54.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You are riding on a zip line. Your speed is 15 miles per hour. What is your speed in feet per second?
Answer: 22 feet per second

Explanation:
Given,
You are riding on a zip line. Your speed is 15 miles per hour.
Convert from mile per hour to feet per second
1 mile per hour = 1.46 feet per second
15 miles per hour = 22 feet per second

Question 55.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Thunder is the sound caused by lightning. You hear thunder 5 seconds after a lightning strike. The speed of sound is about 1225 kilometers per hour. About how many miles away was the lightning?
Answer:

Question 56.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Boston, Massachusetts, and Buffalo, New York, are hit by snowstorms that last 3 days. Boston accumulates snow at a rate of 1.5 feet every 36 hours. Buffalo accumulates snow at a rate of 0.01 inch every minute. Which city accumulates more snow in 3 days? How much more snow?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 46
Answer:

Question 57.
DIG DEEPER!
You travel 4000 feet every minute on a snowmobile.
a. The evening speed limit for snowmobiles in your state is 55 miles per hour. Is your speed less than or equal to the speed limit? Justify your answer.
b. What is your pace in minutes per mile?
c. You are 22 miles from your house at 6:00 P.M. If you continue to travel at this speed, do you reach your house in time for dinner at 6:30 P.M.?
Answer:

Question 58.
REASONING
The table shows the flying speeds of several birds.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 47
a. Which bird is the fastest? Which is the slowest?
b. The peregrine falcon has a dive speed of 322 kilometers per hour. Is the dive speed of the peregrine falcon faster than the flying speed of any of the birds? Explain.
Answer:

Question 59.
STRUCTURE
Consider the conversion facts 1 inch = 2.54 centimeters and 1 centimeter ≈ 0.39 inch.
a. Write an expression for the exact number of inches in 1 centimeter.
b. Use a calculator to evaluate your expression in part(a). Explain why measurement conversions may be slightly different when converting between metric units and U.S. customary units using the conversion facts in the back of the book.
Answer:

Question 60.
DIG DEEPER!
One liter of paint covers 100 square feet. How many gallons of paint does it take to cover a room whose walls have an area of 800 square meters?
Answer:
Given,
One liter of paint covers 100 square feet.
First, convert 800 square meters to square feet. I calculated it to be 8611.13 sq ft
100 sq.ft/1 L x L = 8611.13.
Now convert L to gallons.
1gallon = 3.785 L

Ratios and Rates Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
You mix water, glue, and borax in the ratio of 3 : 1 : 2 to make slime. How many gallons of each ingredient should you use to make 0.75 gallon of slime?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know the ratio of the ingredients in the slime and that you are making 0.75 gallon of slime. You are asked to find the number of gallons of each ingredient needed to make 0.75 gallon of slime.

Make a plan.
Represent the ratio 3 : 1 : 2 using a tape diagram. Because there are 6 parts that represent 0.75 gallon, divide 0.75 by6 to find the value of one part of the tape diagram. Then use the value of one part to find the number of gallons of each ingredient you should use.

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer:

Question 2.
You buy yogurt cups and frozen fruit bars for a party. Yogurt cups are sold in packages of six. The ratio of the number of yogurt cups in a package to the number of frozen fruit bars in a package is 3 : 2. What are the least numbers of packages you should buy in order to have the same numbers of yogurt cups and frozen fruit bars?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cc 2
Answer:

Question 3.
The greatest common factor of two whole numbers is 9. The ratio of the greater number to the lesser number is 6 : 5. What are the two numbers? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Performance Task

Oops! Unit Conversion Mistakes
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Human Circulatory System.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cc 3

Ratios and Rates Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 1

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Definition and Example Chart to organize information about a concept. Here is an example of a Definition and Example Chart for the vocabulary term ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 3
1. value of a ratio
2. equivalent ratios
3. tape diagram
4. ratio table
5. rate
6. unit rate
7. conversion factor

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 4

3.1 Ratios (pp. 107–114)
Learning Target: Understand the concepts of ratios and equivalent ratios.

Write the ratio.
Question 1.
butterflies : caterpillars
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 5
Answer: 3 : 2

Explanation:
There are 3 butterflies and 2 caterpillars
Thus the ratio is 3 : 2

Question 2.
saxophones : trumpets
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 6
Answer: 6 : 3

Explanation:
There are 6 saxophones and 3 trumpets
Thus the ratio is 6: 3 and the equivalent ratio is 1 : 2

Question 3.
The ratio of hydrogen atoms to nitrogen atoms in a container is 2 : 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 7
a. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.
b. In another container, the number of hydrogen atoms is 3 times the number of nitrogen atoms. Write the ratio of hydrogen atoms to nitrogen atoms.
Answer:

Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 4.
5 : 2 and 30 : 12
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
30/12 = 5/2
5 : 2 = 5 : 2
Thus the ratios are equivalent

Question 5.
4 : 3 and 8 : 7
Answer: No

Explanation:
4/3 ≠ 8/7
Thus the ratios are not equivalent

Question 6.
6 : 4 and 18 : 6
Answer: No

Explanation:
6 : 4 and 18 : 6
6/4 = 3/2
18/6 = 3
3/2 ≠ 3
Thus the ratios are not equivalent

Question 7.
18 : 12 and 3 : 2
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
18 : 12 and 3 : 2
18/12 = 3/2
3 : 2 = 3 : 2
Thus the ratios are equivalent

Question 8.
Write two equivalent ratios that have values of \(\frac{5}{7}\)
Answer: \(\frac{10}{14}\) and \(\frac{15}{21}\)

Question 9.
During a chess match, there are 12 pieces left on the board. The ratio of white pieces to black pieces is 2 : 1. How many white pieces are on the board?
Answer:

Question 10.
You run at a pace of 2 miles every 17 minutes. Your friend runs at a pace of 3 miles every 24 minutes. Are you and your friend running at the same pace? If not, who is running faster?
Answer:

3.2 Using Tape Diagram (pp. 115-120)
Learning Target: Use tape diagrams to model and solve ratio problems.

The tape diagram represents the ratio of the time you spend reading to the time your friend spends reading. You read for 8 hours. How many hours does your friend spend reading?
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 11
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 12
Answer:

Question 13.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of customers to guides on a mountain climbing trip. There are 6 guides on the trip. How many customers are on the trip?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 13
Answer:

A container has peppermint gum and spearmint gum. You are given the number of pieces of peppermint gum in the container and the ratio of peppermint gum to spearmint gum. Find the number of pieces of spearmint gum in the container.
Question 14.
24 peppermint; 8 to 5
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 8 : 5
8 + 5 = 13
8/13 × x = 24
x = 24 × 13/8
x = 39
5/13 × 39 = 15

Question 15.
18 peppermint; 2 : 3
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 2 : 3
2 + 3 = 5
2/5 × x = 18
x = 18 × 5/2
x = 45
Number of spearmint gum will be now
Ratio of spearmint/total ratio × total number of gums = number of spearmint
3/5 × 45 = 27
Thus the number of spearmint gum = 27

Question 16.
32 peppermint; 8 to 7
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 8 : 7
8 + 7 = 15
8/15 × x = 32
x = 32 × 15/8
x = 4 × 15
x = 60
Number of spearmint gum will be now
Ratio of spearmint/total ratio × total number of gums = number of spearmint
7/15 × 60 = 28

Question 17.
40 peppermint; 5 : 2
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 5 : 2
5 + 2 = 7
5/7 × x = 40
x = 40 × 7/5
x = 8 × 7
x = 56
Number of spearmint gum will be now
Ratio of spearmint/total ratio × total number of gums = number of spearmint
2/7 × 56 = 16

A theater sells adult tickets and student tickets. You are given the total number of tickets sold and the ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold. How many of each type of ticket are sold?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 18
Question 18.
120 tickets; 6 to 4
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 6 : 4
6 + 4 = 10
6/10 = x/120
6 × 120 = x × 10
10x = 720
x = 720/10 = 72
x = 72
The number of student tickets would be 120 – 72 = 48 student tickets

Question 19.
165 tickets; 8 to 7
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 8 : 7
8 + 7 = 15
8/15 = x/165
8 × 165 = x × 15
1320 = 15x
x = 1320/15
x = 88
The number of student tickets would be 165 – 88 = 77 student tickets

Question 20.
210 tickets; 16 : 5
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 16 : 5
16 + 5 = 21
16/21 = x/210
16 × 210 = x × 21
3360 = 21x
x = 3360/21
x = 160
The number of student tickets would be 210 – 160 = 50 student tickets

Question 21.
248 tickets; 5 : 3
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 5 : 3
5 + 3 = 8
5/8 = x/248
5 × 248 = 8 × x
1240 = 8x
x = 1240/8
x = 155
The number of student tickets would be 248 – 155 = 93 student tickets

Question 22.
You perform 7 sit-ups for every 2 pull-ups as part of an exercise routine. You perform 25 more sit-ups than pull-ups. How many sit-ups and how many pull-ups do you perform?
Answer: 35 sit ups and 10 pullups

Explanation:
Given,
You perform 7 sit-ups for every 2 pull-ups as part of an exercise routine.
You perform 25 more sit-ups than pull-ups.
so we know that for 7 situps you do 2 pullups
so the possible values would be
7,2
14,4
21, 6
28, 8
35, 10, and so on
so now you just look at which two numbers have a difference of 25
when subtracting them, you’ll notice that 35 and 10 have a difference of 25.

3.3 Using Ratio Tables (pp. 121-128)
Learning Target: Use ratio tables to represent equivalent ratios and solve ratio problems.

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-24

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-25

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-26

Find the missing quantity in the double number line.
Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-27

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-28

Question 29.
Use all four operations to complete the ratio table. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-29

Question 30.
A song has 12 beats every 5 seconds. How many beats are there in 30 seconds?
Answer: 72 beats in 30 seconds

Explanation:
Given,
A song has 12 beats every 5 seconds.
5 seconds = 12 beats
1 second = 12/5 = 2.4 beats
30 seconds = 30 × 2.4 beats = 72 beats
Thus 72 beats are there in 30 seconds.

Question 31.
On New Year’sEve, the Times Square ball is lowered 47 feet every 20 seconds. How long does it take for the ball to be lowered 141 feet?
Answer: 60 seconds

Explanation:
On New Year’sEve, the Times Square ball is lowered 47 feet every 20 seconds.
All you have to do is cross multiply and isolate x.
47/20 × 141/x
47x = 2820
x = 60 seconds

Question 32.
Welder A charges $300 for every 4 hours of labor. Welder B charges $240 for every 3 hours of labor. Which welder offers a better deal?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 32
Answer:
Welder A has a better deal because for each hour welder A would charge $75 while welder B would charge $80
Welder A:
300/4 = $75
Welder B:
240/3 = $80

Question 33.
You make lemonade by adding 11 cups of water for every 3 cups of lemon juice. Your friend makes lemonade by adding 9 cups of water for every 2 cups of lemon juice. Whose lemonade is more watered down?
Answer:
Well first I did was I found out that both 3 and 2 go into 12.
2 goes into 12 6 times. 9 × 6 is 54.
3 goes into 12 four times.
11 × 4 is 44.
54 is greater than 44 therefore the answer would be your friend.

3.4 Graphing Ratio Relationships (pp. 129-134)
Learning Target: Represent ratio relationships in a coordinate plane.

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 34
Answer:

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 35
Answer:

Question 36.
You buy magnesium sulfate for $1.50 per pound.
a. Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
b. How much does 3.5 pounds of magnesium sulfate cost?
Answer:

Question 37.
A 5-ounce can of tuna costs $0.90. A 12-ounce can of tuna costs $2.40. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Which is the better buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 37
Answer:

3.5 Rates and Unit Rates (pp. 135–140)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of a unit rate and solve rate problems.

Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 38.
12 stunts in 4 movies
Answer: 3

Explanation:
12 stunts in 4 movies
12/4 = 3
3 stunts in 1 movie

Question 39.
3600 stitches in 3 minutes
Answer: 1200

Explanation:
3600 stitches in 3 minutes
3600/3 = 1200
1200 stiches in 1 minute

Question 40.
$18 for 6 pounds
Answer: 3

Explanation:
$18 for 6 pounds
18/6 = 3
$3 for 1 pound

Question 41.
240 people in 5 buses
Answer: 48

Explanation:
240 people in 5 buses
240/5 = 48
48 people in 1 bus

Question 42.
A train travels 120 miles in 3 hours. Write two unit rates that describe the relationship between the number of miles and the number of hours the train travels.
Answer:

Question 43.
Mercury orbits the Sun 3 times in 264 days.
a. How many times does Mercury orbit the Sun in 440 days?
b. How many days does it take Mercury to orbit the Sun 8 times?
Answer:

Question 44.
A cyclist travels 4 miles in 20 minutes. At this rate, how many miles does the cyclist travel in 30 minutes?
Answer:
Given,
A cyclist travels 4 miles in 20 minutes.
20/4 = 5 minutes
1 mile in 5 minutes
30 minutes divided by 5
30/5 = 6 minutes
So, 6 miles in 6 minutes

Decide whether the rates are equivalent.
Question 45.
18 keystrokes in 3 seconds
48 keystrokes in 16 seconds
Answer: No

Explanation:
18 keystrokes in 3 seconds
48 keystrokes in 16 seconds
18 : 3 :: 48 : 16
6 : 1 :: 3 : 1
The rates are not equivalent

Question 46.
210 miles in 3 hours
780 miles in 12 hours
Answer: No

Explanation:
210 miles in 3 hours
780 miles in 12 hours
210 : 3 = 70
780 : 12 = 65
The rates are not equivalent

Question 47.
You and a friend are picking up trash on a beach. You fill 2 bags with trash in 28 minutes. Your friend fills 3 bags with trash in 48 minutes. Who fills bags with trash faster? How much sooner will the faster person fill 7 bags with trash?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 47
Answer:
Divide 28 minutes by the 2 bags of trash.
You fill 1 bag of trash every 14 minutes.
28 ÷ 2 = 14
Your friend fills 1 bag of trash every 16 minutes.
48 ÷ 3 = 16
7 bags × 16 min = 105 min
7 bags × 14 min = 98 min
105 – 98 = 7 minutes

3.6 Converting Measures (pp. 141–148)
Learning Target: Use ratio reasoning to convert units of measure.

Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 48
Answer: 20 fl. oz

Explanation:
Convert from cups to fluid ounces
1 cup = 8 fluid ounce
2.5 cups = 20 fluid ounces

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 49
Answer: 4 yd

Explanation:
Convert from feet to yards
1 feet = 0.33 yard
12 feet = 4 yards

Question 50.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 50
Answer: 3.5

Explanation:
Convert from milligrams to grams
1 mg = 0.001 g
3500 mg = 3.5 grams

Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 51
Answer:
Convert from liters to quarts
1 L = 1.05 qt
3 L = 3.17 qt
Thus 3 L ≈ 3 qt

Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 52
Answer: 23 cm

Explanation:
Convert from inches to centimeters
1 in = 2.54 cm
9.2 in = 23.36 cm
9.2 in ≈ 23 cm

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 53
Answer: 7 kg

Explanation:
Convert from lb to kg
1 lb = 0.45 kg
15 lb = 6.80 kg
15 lb ≈ 7 kg

Question 54.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 54
Answer: $120

Explanation:
Convert from hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
1 min = $2
60 min = x
x = 60 × 2
x = $120

Question 55.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 55
Answer: 52

Explanation:
Convert from gal to qt
1 gal = 4 qt
13 gal = 52 qt

Question 56.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 56
Answer: 0.040

Question 57.
Explain how to use conversion factors to find the number of fluid ounces in any given number of quarts of a liquid.
Answer:

Question 58.
Water flows through a pipe at a rate of 10 gallons per minute. How many gallons of water flow through the pipe in an hour?
Answer:
Given,
Water flows through a pipe at a rate of 10 gallons per minute.
1 hour = 60 minute
1 minute = 10 gallon
60 minutes = 60 × 10 gallon = 600 gallon
Thus 600 gallons of water flow through the pipe in an hour.

Question 59.
Germany suggests a speed limit of 130 kilometers per hour on highways. Is the speed shown greater than the suggested limit?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 59
Answer:

Question 60.
The distance between two stars increases at a rate of 3 centimeters per month. What is the rate in inches per year?
Answer: 14.17 inches

Explanation:
Given,
The distance between two stars increases at a rate of 3 centimeters per month.
3 cm – 1 month
1 year = 12 months
3 × 12 = 36 centimeters
Convert from centimeters to inches
36 centimeters = 14.17 inches

Ratios and Rates Practice Test

Question 1.
Write the ratio of scooters to bikes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 1
Answer:
There are 3 scooter and 3 bikes
Thus the ratio of scooters to bikes is 3 : 3

Question 2.
Determine whether the ratios 8 : 7 and 15 : 14 are equivalent.
Answer: The ratios 8 : 7 and 15 : 14 are not equivalent.
The equivalent ratio of 8:7 is 16 : 14.

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-3
The missing values are 12, 18
The ratio is 2:1
The equivalent ratio of 2 : 1 is 12 : 6 and 36 : 18

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-4
The missing values are 54, 10
The ratio is 2 : 9
The equivalent ratio of 2 : 9 is 12 : 54 and 10 : 45

Question 5.
Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Answers img_2

Question 6.
You travel 224 miles in 4 hours. Find the unit rate.
Answer: 56

Explanation:
Given,
You travel 224 miles in 4 hours.
1 hour = x
4 × x = 224
x = 224/4
x = 56 miles
The unit rate is 56 miles.

Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-7

Explanation:
Convert from centimeters to inches.
1 cm = 0.39
6 cm = 6 × 0.39
6 cm = 2.34 inches

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-8

Explanation:
Convert from liters to gal
1 liter = 0.26 gal
30 liter = 7.92 gal

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-9

Explanation:
Convert from hours to week
1 hour = 0.005 = 5/1000
10 gal/h = 2000/wk

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-10

Explanation:
Convert from feet to meters
1 feet = 0.30m
4 feet = 1.21 m
4 ft ≈ 1m

Question 11.
During a baseball season, Team A scores 9 runs for every 7 runs that Team B scores. The total number of runs scored by both teams is 1440. How many runs does each team score?
Answer:
Team A scores 810
Team B scores 630

Explanation:
During a baseball season, Team A scores 9 runs for every 7 runs that Team B scores.
The total number of runs scored by both teams is 1440.
Let b scores x runs
Then a scores x + (2 × x/7)
Because every 7 runs of b, a is scores more 2 runs.
Total number of runs scored by both teams is 1440
a + b = 1440
x + (2 × x/7) + x = 1440
(16 × x)/7 = 1440
16 × x = 1440 × 7
16x = 10080
x = 10080/16
x = 630
Thus team b scores 630 runs
Team a scores is x + (2 × x/7) = 810 runs

Question 12.
At a movie theater, the ratio of filled seats to empty seats is 6 : 5. There are 120 empty seats. How many seats are filled?
Answer: 144

Explanation:
Given,
At a movie theater, the ratio of filled seats to empty seats is 6 : 5. There are 120 empty seats.
Number of filled = 6
Number of empty = 5
120/5 = 24 then multiply it by 6 to get 144.
Thus the number of filled seats = 144

Question 13.
You and your friend mix water and citric acid. You add 3 cups of citric acid for every 16 cups of water. Your friend adds 2 cups of citric acid for every 12 cups of water. Whose mixture is more acidic?
Answer: A’s mixture is more acidic

Explanation:
Given,
You and your friend mix water and citric acid.
You add 3 cups of citric acid for every 16 cups of water.
Your friend adds 2 cups of citric acid for every 12 cups of water.
A add 3 cups of citric acid for every 16 cups of water, the ratio = 3/16
B adds 2 cups of citric acid for every 12 cups of water = 2/12
LCM of 16 and 12 are 48
16 – 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96
12 – 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72
A – 3/16 × 3/3 = 9/48
B – 2/12 × 4/4 = 8/48
We found that in terms of 48 cups of water, friend A mixes 9 cups of acid while friend B mixes 8 cups of acid, means A is adding more acid than B and hence friend A’s mixture is more acidic.

Question 14.
Determine which windsurfer is faster. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 14
Answer: The second windsurfer is faster than the first windsurfer.
First convert from meter to feet
1 meter = 3.28
5 meter = 16.40
Convert from minute to second
1 min = 60 sec
16.40 × 60 = 984 feet
984 feet is greater than 720 feet

Question 15.
In a rectangle, the ratio of the length to the width is 5 : 2. The length of the rectangle is 13.875 feet greater than the width. What are the perimeter and the area of the rectangle?
Answer:
P = 64.75 feet
A = 213.91 feet

Explanation:
Given,
In a rectangle, the ratio of the length to the width is 5 : 2.
The length of the rectangle is 13.875 feet greater than the width.
13.875 ÷ 3 = 4.625 feet
4.625 × 5 = 23.125 feet
So, the length of the rectangle is 23.125 feet
4.625 × 2 = 9.25 feet
So, the width of the rectangle is 9.25 feet
We know that, Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2(23.125) + 2(9.25)
P = 64.75 feet
Area of the rectangle = l × w
A = 23.125 × 9.25
Area = 213.91 sq. feet

Ratios and Rates Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 1
Question 1.
Which number is equivalent to \(\frac{2}{9}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{5}\)?
A. \(\frac{8}{14}\)
B. \(\frac{5}{18}\)
C. \(\frac{7}{13}\)
D. 3\(\frac{3}{5}\)
Answer: \(\frac{5}{18}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal (inverse) of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{2}{9}\) × \(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{10}{36}\)
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 10 and 36 using
GCF is 2
\(\frac{10}{36}\) ÷ \(\frac{2}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{18}\)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Your speed while waterskiing is 22 miles per hour. How fast are you traveling in kilometers per hour? Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 2
Answer: 35 kilometers

Explanation:
Given,
Your speed while waterskiing is 22 miles per hour.
Convert from miles to kilometers
1 mile = 1.609 kilometer
22 miles = 22 × 1.609 = 35.40 kilometers

Question 3.
Which number is equivalent to the expression below?
2 . 42 + 3(6 ÷ 2)
F. 25
G. 41
H. 73
I. 105
Answer:
2 . 42 + 3(6 ÷ 2)
2 . 42 + 3(3)
2 . 42 + 9
2 × 16 + 9
32+9 = 41
Thus the correct answer is option G.

Question 4.
The tape diagram models the ratio of red beads to green beads in a bracelet. The bracelet uses 12 red beads. How many green beads are in the bracelet?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 4
A. 4 green beads
B. 8 green beads
C. 12 green beads
D. 20 green beads
Answer: 8 green beads

Explanation:
Given,
The tape diagram models the ratio of red beads to green beads in a bracelet. The bracelet uses 12 red beads.
From the above figure we observe that there are 3
3 × 4 = 12
1 box = 4 beads
There are 2 green boxes
2 × 4 = 8
Thus there 8 green beads in the bracelet.

Question 5.
What is the least common multiple of 8, 12, and 20?
F. 24
G. 40
H. 60
I. 120
Answer: 120

Explanation:
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 8:
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 112, 120, 128, 136
Multiples of 12:
12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 108, 120, 132, 144
Multiples of 20:
20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160
Therefore,
LCM(8, 12, 20) = 120
Thus the correct answer is option I.

Question 6.
Which number is equivalent to 2.34 × 1.08 × 5.6?
A. 12.787632
B. 14.15232
C. 23.5872
D. 14,152.32
Answer: 14.15232

Explanation:
Multiply the three numbers
2.34 × 1.08 × 5.6 we get 14.15232
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 7.
The school store sells 4 pencils for $0.50. At this rate, what is the cost (in dollars) of 10 pencils?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 6
Answer: $1.25

Explanation:
Given,
The school store sells 4 pencils for $0.50.
Cost of 1 pencil is 0.50/4 = 0.125
0.125 × 10 = 1.25
Thus the cost of 10 pencils is $1.25

Question 8.
A factor tree for 14,700 is shown. Which factor of 14,700 is not a perfect square?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 7
F. 25
G. 49
H. 196
I. 588
Answer:
The given number is 14700
Now we prime factorize the number.
14700 = 147 × 100
= 7 × 21 × 10 × 10
= 7 × 7 × 3 × 5 × 2 × 5 × 2
= 2 × 2 × 3 × 5 × 5 × 7 × 7
We see that each of 2, 5 and 7 appears twice in the factorization. But 3 appears only once, for which the number 14700 is not a perfect square.
∴ we divide 14700 by 3 to get a perfect square.
∴ the perfect square number is
= 14700 ÷ 3
= 4900
= 70²
588 is not a perfect square
Thus the correct answer is option I.

Question 9.
Which of the following is a ratio of frogs to snakes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 8
A. 4 : 8
B. 8 : 12
C. 8 : 4
D. 4 : 12
Answer: 8:4

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can write the ratio from frogs to snakes.
There are 8 frogs
There are 4 snakes
8:4
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 10.
Which expression is equivalent to 36?
F. 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3
G. 3 × 5
H. 5 × 5 × 5
I. 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3
Answer: 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3
The expression equivalent to 36 is 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3
Thus the correct answer is option F.

Question 11.
Which is the correct order of operations when evaluating 5 + 4 × 23?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 11
A. k, t, u
B. n, s, q
C. m, k, r
D. m, p, l
Answer: k, t, u

Explanation:
The correct order of operations when evaluating 5 + 4 × 23 is Add 5 and 4, Multiply 9 and 2 and Evaluate 18³
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 12.
The ratio of scrambled eggs to hard-boiled eggs served at a restaurant is 6 : 2.
Part A Make a ratio table showing three possible combinations of
Part B Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 12
Part C Use the graph to find the number of hard-boiled eggs served when the restaurant serves 15 scrambled eggs.
Answer:
Part A – The three possible combinations are
3 : 1
12 : 4
18 : 6
Part B –
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cp-12
Part C-
The ratio is 3:1
The ratio for 15 scrambled eggs
15 :5

Conclusion:

From the above-given links, you can Download Middle School Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates. With the help of the direct links given above you can download various preparatory materials for free of cost. Therefore, make use of the links and practice well for the exams. Stay tuned to our site to get the trending updates on BIM 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter-wise along with the guide to score top marks in the exam. Clear all your doubts through the below comment section given.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Worried about Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers? Stop your worry now! We are providing the complete material of Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers pdf here. You can make your learning as fun with the help of various tricks mentioned here. Check the answer key provided here which helps you to know the step by step procedure of every problem.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers helps you to build self confidence and grip on the subject. Download BIM Grade 7 Chapter 1 Pdf and complete your preparation. In the below sections, we are providing the complete guide to various topics of chapter 1 i.e., Adding Integers, Adding Rational Numbers, Subtracting Integers, Subtracting Rational Numbers, Adding and Subtracting Rational Number and so on.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Check Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers here. With the help of this material, you can attend the mock tests and know the areas in which you are weak. Attending mock tests is the most important aspect of clearing the exams. If you know the weak areas, then you can easily work on them and become perfect in that concept.

Big Ideas Math 7th Grade Solution Key Chapter 1 pdf is available here. You can get it for free of cost where the questions and step by step solutions are provided. Tap on the below given links and get access to each concept. Refer to important questions, concepts and prepare timetable according to the topics present in each chapter.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Rational Numbers

Lesson: 2 Adding Integers

Lesson: 3 Adding Rational Numbers

Lesson: 4 Subtracting Integers

Lesson: 5 Subtracting Rational Numbers

Chapter: 1 – Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers STEAM VIDEO/Performance

STEAM Video

Freezing Solid

The Celsius temperature scale is defined using the freezing point,0°C, and the boiling point,100°C, of water. Why do you think the scale is defined using these two points?
Watch the STEAM Video “Freezing Solid.” Then answer the following questions.
1. In the video, Tony says that the freezing point of wax is 53°C and the boiling point of wax is 343°C.
a. Describe the temperature of wax that has just changed from liquid form to solid form. Explain your reasoning.
b. After Tony blows out the candle, he demonstrates that there is still gas in the smoke. What do you know about the temperature of the gas that is in the smoke?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 165
c. In what form is wax when the temperature is at 100°C, the boiling point of water? Consider wax in solid, liquid, and gaseous forms. Which is hottest? coldest?

Performance Task

Melting Matters

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the STEAM concepts you learned to answer the questions in the Video Performance Task. You will answer questions using the melting points of the substances below.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 3
You will graph the melting points of the substances on a number line to make comparisons. How is the freezing point of a substance related to its melting point? What is meant when someone says it is below freezing outside? Explain.

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Getting Ready for Chapter 1

Getting Ready for Chapter

Chapter Exploration

Question 1.
Work with a partner. Plot and connect the points to make a picture.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 4.1

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding and Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Getting-Ready-for-Chapter-1-Question-1

Question 2.
Create your own “dot-to-dot” picture. Use atleast 20 points.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding and Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Getting-Ready-for-Chapter-1-Question-2

Vocabulary

The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 5

Lesson 1.1 Rational Numbers

Recall that integers are the set of whole numbers and their opposites. A rational number is a number that can be written as \(\frac{a}{b}\), where a and b are integers and b ≠ 0.

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Number Line

Work with a partner. Make a number line on the floor. Include both negative numbers and positive numbers.
a. Stand on an integer. Then have your partner stand on the opposite of the integer. How far are each of you from 0? What do you call the distance between a number and 0 on a number line?
Answer :
I stood on 4 and my friend stood on -4
The distance between 0 and 4 is 4 units
The distance between 0 and -4 is 4 units.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-a
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .

b. Stand on a rational number that is not an integer. Then have your partner stand on any other number. Which number is greater? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-b
I stand on 3/2 and my friend stands on 2.5
2.5 > 3/2
Explanation:
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

c. Stand on any number other than 0 on the number line. Can your partner stand on a number that is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 7

  • greater than your number and farther from 0?
  • greater than your number and closer to 0?
  • less than your number and the same distance from 0?
  • less than your number and farther from 0?

Answer 1 :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-1
Answer 2 :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-2
Answer 3 :
less than your number and the same distance from 0 will be only the opposite of the number .
The opposite of 1.5 is – 1.5 .

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-3
Answer 4 :
less than your number and farther from 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-4

For each case in which it was not possible to stand on a number as directed, explain why it is not possible. In each of the other cases, how can you decide where your partner can stand?

1.1 Lesson

Try It
Find the absolute value.

Question 1.
| 7 |
Answer:
The Absolute value of 7 is 7
The distance between 0 and 7 is 7
| 7 |  = 7
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8
Answer:
The Absolute value of -5/3 is 5/3
The distance between 0 and -5/3 is 5/3
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8 = 5/3
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-2

Question 3.
| -2.6 |
Answer:
The Absolute value of -2.6 is 2.6
The distance between 0 and -2.6 is 2.6
| -2.6 | = 2.6
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-3

Try It

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8.1
Answer:
| 9 | = 9
| -9| = 9
both the values are same | 9 | = | -9 |
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-4
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8.2
Answer:
|\(\frac{1}{2}\)| =\(\frac{1}{2}\)
–\(\frac{1}{2}\)    <  –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-5
so –\(\frac{1}{2}\)    <  –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8.3
Answer:
|-4.5| =|4.5|
7  > -4.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-6
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
VOCABULARY
Which of the following numbers are integers?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 9
Answer:
9,-1, 15 are integers
Explanation:
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ……) So, every natural number is an integer, every whole number is an integer, and every negative number is an integer. … The set of integers does not include fractions i.e p/q form or numbers which are in decimals eg: 2.4, 3.2 etc.

Question 8.
VOCABULARY
What is the absolute value of a number?
Answer:
The absolute value of a number means the distance from 0.
Example :-
5 is 5 units away from 0.
So the absolute value of that -5 is 5.
You cannot have negative distance, so it has to be positive.
The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive .

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 10.1
Answer:
|-\(\frac{7}{2}\)|=\(\frac{7}{2}\) = 3.5
3.5 = |-3.5|
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-9
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 10.2
Answer :
|\(\frac{11}{4}\)| = 2.75
|-2.8| = 2.8
2.75 < 2.8
2.75 and  2.8 . Graph both the points on number line .Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-10

Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 11.
WRITING
You compare two numbers, a and b. Explain how a > b and | a | < | b | can both be true statements.
Answer:
Take
a = 2
b = -4
Compare we get
a > b  ,  2 > -4
| a | = | 2 | = 2
| b | = | -4 | = 4
Compare we get
| a | < | b | ,  2 < 4
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-11

Question 12.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 10

Answer :
Third number -6 is different
Explanation:
| 6 | = 6
| -6 | = – 6
Arrange the numbers in order
6 , 6 , – 6 , 6
The 3rd number that is -6 is a negative all other numbers are positive numbers so -6 is different from others.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 13.
An airplane is at an elevation of 5.5 miles. A submarine is at an elevation of 10.9 kilometers. Which is closer to sea level? Explain.
Answer:
Airplane is closer to sea level as it is only 8.85 kilometres away from sea level
Explanation:
airplane is at an elevation of 5.5 miles =  5.5
1 mile = 1.6 kilometres
5.5 miles = 8.85 kilometres.
submarine is at an elevation of 10.9 kilometres. =  10.9 kms
Airplane is closer to sea level as it is only 8.85 kilometres away from sea level
8.85 < 10.9

Question 14.
The image shows the corrective powers (in diopters) of contact lenses for eight people. The farther the number of diopters is from 0, the farsightedness greater the power of the lens. Positive diopters correct nearsightedness and negative diopters correct nearsightedness. Who is the most nearsighted? the most farsighted? Who has the best eyesight?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 11
Answers:
The people with nearsightedness are with Positive diopters  = 0.75 , 2.5, 1.5
0.75>1.5>2.5
the most nearsighted is 0.75 that is patient 2
The people with are farsightedness are with Negative diopters = -1.25, -3.75, -2.5, -4.75,-7.5
-7.5<-4.75<-3.75<-2.5<-1.25
the most farsighted is -7.5 that is patient 7
The best eyesight is for patient who has sight of 0 , after that patient 2 as best sight.

Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 1.1

Review & Refresh

Write the ratio.

  1. deer to bears
  2. bears to deer
  3. bears to animals
  4. animals to deer

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 12
Answer:
Number of Animals = 10
Number of Deer = 6
Number of Bears = 4
1. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Deer}{Number of Bears}\) = \(\frac{6}{4}\)=\(\frac{3}{2}\)

2. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Bears}{Number of Deer}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)=\(\frac{2}{3}\)

3. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Bears}{Number of Animals}\) = \(\frac{4}{10}\)=\(\frac{2}{5}\)

4. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Animals}{Number of Deer}\) = \(\frac{10}{6}\)= \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Find the GCF of the numbers.

Question 5.
8, 20
Answer:
Factors of 8 = 2 × 2 × 2
Factors of 20 = 2 × 2 × 5
The common in both numbers = 2 × 2 = 4
4 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Question 6.
12, 30
Answer:
Factors of 12 = 2 × 2 × 3
Factors of 30 = 2 × 3× 5
The common in both numbers = 2 × 3 = 6
6 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Question 7.
7, 28
Factors of 7 = 7
Factors of 28 = 2 × 2 × 7
The common in both numbers = 7
7 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Question 8.
48, 72
Factors of 48 = 2 × 2 × 2 ×2 × 3
Factors of 72 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3
The common in both numbers = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3= 24
24 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

NUMBER SENSE
Determine which number is greater and which number is farther from 0. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 3.)

Question 9.
4, -6
Answer:
4 > -6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-9
Explanation:
As distance cant be negative. so the -6 is farther from 0.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 13
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{2}\) = 3.5
– 3.25 < 3.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-10
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 14
Answer:
–\(\frac{4}{5}\) = – 0.8
– 0.8 > -1.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-11
Explanation:
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

FINDING ABSOLUTE VALUES
Find the absolute value.

Question 12.
| 8 |
Answer :
The Absolute value of 8 is 8
The distance between 0 and 8 is 8
| 8 |  = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-12
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 13.
| -2 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of -2 is 2
The distance between 0 and -2 is 2
| -2 |  = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-13
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative.

Question 14.
| -10 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of -10 is 10
The distance between 0 and -10 is 10
| -10 |  = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-14
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative.

Question 15.
| 10 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 10 is 10
The distance between 0 and 10 is 10
| 10 |  = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-15
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 16.
| 0 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 0 is 0
The distance between 0 and 0 is 0
| 0 |  = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-16
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 15

Answer:
The Absolute value of \(\frac{1}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{1}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
| \(\frac{1}{3}\) |  = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-17
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 16

Answer:
The Absolute value of \(\frac{7}{8}\) is \(\frac{7}{8}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{7}{8}\) is \(\frac{7}{8}\)
| \(\frac{7}{8}\) |  = \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-18
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 17

Answer:
The Absolute value of –\(\frac{5}{9}\) is \(\frac{5}{9}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{5}{9}\) is \(\frac{5}{9}\)
| –\(\frac{5}{9}\) |  = \(\frac{5}{9}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-19
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 18

Answer:
The Absolute value of \(\frac{11}{8}\) is \(\frac{11}{8}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{11}{8}\) is \(\frac{11}{8}\)
| \(\frac{11}{8}\) |  = \(\frac{11}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-20
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 21.
| 3.8 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 3.8 is 3.8
The distance between 0 and 3.8 is 3.8
| 3.8 |  = 3.8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-28
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 22.
| -5.3 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of -5.3 is 5.3
The distance between 0 and -5.3 is 5.3
| -5.3 |  = 5.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-22
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 19

Answer:
The Absolute value of –\(\frac{15}{4}\) is \(\frac{15}{4}\)
The distance between 0 and –\(\frac{15}{4}\) is \(\frac{15}{4}\)
| –\(\frac{15}{4}\)|  = \(\frac{15}{4}\) = 3.75
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-23
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 24.
| 7.64 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 7.64 is 7 .64
The distance between 0 and 7.64 is 7.64
| 7.64 |  = 7.64
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-24
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 25.
| -18.26 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 18.26 is 18.26
The distance between 0 and -18.26 is 18.26
| -18.26 |  = 18.26
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-25
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 20

Answer:
4\(\frac{2}{5}\)=\(\frac{22}{5}\) = 4.4
The Absolute value of 4\(\frac{2}{5}\) is 4.4
The distance between 0 and 4.4 is 4.4
| 4.4 |  = 4.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-26
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 21

Answer:
-5\(\frac{1}{6}\) = –\(\frac{31}{6}\) =-5.1
The Absolute value of -5.1 is 5.1
The distance between 0 and -5.1 is 5.1
| -5.1 |  = 5.1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-27
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 22
Answer:
|-5| = 5
Graph 2 and 5
2 < 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-28
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 23
Answer:
|-1| = 1
|-8| = 8
Graph 1 and 8
1 < 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-29
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 24
Answer:
|5| = 5
|-5| = 5
Both are equal
|5| = |-5|
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-30
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 25
Answer:
|-2| = 2
Graph 2 and 0
|-2| > 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-31
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 26
Answer:
|-\(\frac{7}{8}\)| = I-0.875I = 0.875
Graph 0.4 and 0.8
0.4  < 0.875
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-32
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 27
Answer:
|4.9| = 4.9
|-5.3| = 5.3
Graph 4.9 and 5.3
|4.9| < |-5.3|
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-33
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 28
Answer:
|4.7| =4.7
1/2 = 0.5
– 4.7  <  0.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-34
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 29
Answer:
|-\(\frac{3}{4}\)| =\(\frac{3}{4}\)
|-\(\frac{3}{4}\)|  > -|\(\frac{3}{4}\)|
Graph \(\frac{3}{4}\) and –\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-35
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 30
Answer:
-|1\(\frac{1}{4}\)| = –\(\frac{5}{4}\) = -1.25
-|-1\(\frac{3}{8}\)| = –\(\frac{11}{8}\) = -1.375
Graph -1.25 and – 1.375
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-36
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend compares two rational numbers. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 31
Answer:
No,
Explanation:
Absolute value of |-10| is 10
10  > -10
All Negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 32
Answer:
Yes,
Explanation:
|-\(\frac{4}{5}\)| = \(\frac{4}{5}\) = 0.8
-|\(\frac{1}{2}\)| = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) = – 0.5
0.8 > – 0.5
All Negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.

Question 39.
OPEN-ENDED
Write a negative number whose absolute value is greater than 3
Answer:
Negative number -4
|-4| = 4
|-4| > 3

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The summit elevation of a volcano is the elevation of the top of the volcano relative to sea level. The summit elevation of Kilauea, a volcano in Hawaii, is 1277 meters. The summit elevation of Loihi, an underwater volcano in Hawaii, is -969 meters. Which summit is higher? Which summit is closer to sea level?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 33

Answer:
Summit elevation of Kilauea, a volcano in Hawaii = 1277 meters.
Summit elevation of Loihi, an underwater volcano in Hawaii, = -969 meters.
1277 > -969
The lesser summit is closer to the sea level
The summit is higher is elevation of Kilauea,a volcano in Hawaii

Question 41.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The freezing point of a liquid is the temperature at which the liquid becomes a solid.
a. Which liquid in the table has the lowest freezing point?
b. Is the freezing point of mercury or butter closer to the freezing point of water, 0°C?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 34
Answer:
a. The liquid which has low freezing point is Airplane Fuel that is -53 °C.
b. The Freezing point of mercury = -39 °C
The Freezing point of butter = 35 °C
The Freezing point of water = 0 °C
-39 > 0 > 35 °C
The Freezing point of butter is closer to freezing point of water .

ORDERING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Order the values from least to greatest.

Question 42.
8, | 3 |, -5, |-2|, -2
Answer:
| 3 | = 3
|-2| = 2
8, 3, -5, 2, -2
-5 < -2 < 2 < 3 <8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-42
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 43.
| -6.3 |, -7.2, 8, | 5 |, -6.3
Answer:
| -6.3 | = 6.3
| 5 | = 5
6.3 , -7.2, 8, 5 , -6.3
-7.2 < -6.3 < 5 < 6.3 < 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-43
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 35
Answer :
| 3.5 | = 3.5
| -1.8 | = 1.8
| 2.7 | = 2.7
3\(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{17}{5}\) = 3.4
3.5, 1.8, 4.6, 3.4, 2.7
1.8 < 2.7 < 3.4 < 3.5 < 4.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-44
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 36
Answer:
|-\(\frac{3}{4}\)|=\(\frac{3}{4}\)
|\(\frac{5}{8}\)| = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
|\(\frac{1}{4}\)| = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
|-\(\frac{1}{2}\)|= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
|-\(\frac{7}{8}\)|= \(\frac{7}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) < \(\frac{1}{2}\) < \(\frac{5}{8}\) <\(\frac{3}{4}\)  < \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-45
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 46.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows golf scores, relative to par.
a. The player with the lowest score wins. Which player wins?
b. Which player is closest to par?
c. Which player is farthest from par?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 37
Answer a :
Player 3 < Player 4 < Player 2 < Player 5 < Player 1
-4 < -1 < 0 < 2 < 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-46
The Lowest score is -4 of player 3
Answer b :
The player closest to par is player 2 (0)
Answer c :
The player is farthest from par is  player 1 (5)

Question 47.
DIG DEEPER!
You use the table below to record the temperature at the same location each hour for several hours. At what time is the temperature coldest? At what time is the temperature closest to the freezing point of water, 0°C?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 38
Answer :
3:00 p.m < 11:00 am <10:00 am < 2:00 p.m < 12:00 p.m  < 1:00 p.m
-3.4 < – 2.7 < -2.6 < -1.25 < -0.15 < 1.6
The Temperature which is coldest is  – 3.4 °C  at 3:00 p.m
Time is the temperature closest to the freezing point of water, 0°C is  – 1.25 at 2:00 p.m
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-47

Reasoning
Determine whether n ≥ 0 or n ≤ 0

Question 48.
n + | -n | = 2n
Answer:
| -n | = n
n + n = 2n
Above statement is true.

Question 49.
n + | -n | = 0
Answer:
| -n | = n
n + n = 2n not equal to 0
So, above equation is not equal to 0 .

TRUE OR FALSE?
Determine whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.

Question 50.
If x < 0, then | x | = −x
Answer:
False
| x | = x
Whatever the value may be | x |  of all numbers is positive .
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .

Question 51.
The absolute value of every rational number is positive.
Answer:
True.
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .

Lesson 1.2 Adding Integers

EXPLORATION 1
Using Integer Counters to Find Sums

Work with a partner. You can use the integer counters shown at the left to find sums of integers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 39
a. How can you use integer counters to model a sum? a sum that equals 0?
Answer:
+1 + ( – 1 ) = 0

b. What expression is being modeled below? What is the value of the sum?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 40
Answer :
– 3 + (+2) = -1
The Value of the sum  = -1.
c. INDUCTIVE REASONING
Use integer counters to complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers- Lesson-1.2-Adding-Integers-Exploration-1-c
d. How can you tell whether the sum of two integers is positive, negative, or zero ?
Answer:
Adding two positive integers always yields a positive sum
Adding two negative integers always yields a negative sum.
e. Write rules for adding

  1. two integers with the same sign,
  2. two integers with different signs, and
  3. two opposite integers.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 42

Answer e :
1.
There are two cases to consider when adding integers. When the signs are the same, you add the absolute values of the addends and use the same sign.
2.
When the signs are different, you find the difference of the absolute values and use the same sign as the addend with the greater absolute value.
3.
Rule: The sum of any integer and its opposite is equal to zero.
Summary: Adding two positive integers always yields a positive sum; adding two negative integers always yields a negative sum.

1.2 Lesson

Try It

Use a number line to find the sum.

Question 1.
-2 + 2
Answer:
2 + 2 =0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -2 to represent -2. Then draw an arrow 2 units to the right representing adding +2.
So, -2 + 2 =0

Question 2.
4 + (-5)
Answer:
4 + (-5) = -1.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-2
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 4 to represent 4. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing adding -5.
So, 4 + (-5) = -1

Question 3.
-3 + (-3)
Answer:
-3 + (-3) = -6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-3
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing adding -3.
So, -3 + (-3) = -6

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 4.
7 + 13
Answer:
Words: Add absolute values of the integers. Then use the common sign.
Numbers :  7 + 13 = 20

Question 5.
– 8 + (-5)
Answer:
Words: Add absolute values of the integers. Then use the common sign.
Numbers :   – 8 + (-5) = -13

Question 6.
– 2 + (-15)
Answer:
Words: Add absolute values of the integers. Then use the common sign.
Numbers : – 2 + (-15) = -17

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 7.
-2 + 11
Answer:
Words :  Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .
Numbers : -2 + 11 = 9

Question 8.
9 + (-10)
Answer:
Words :  Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .
Numbers :  9 + (-10) = -1

Question 9.
-31 + 31
Answer:
Words :  Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .
Numbers :  -31 + 31 = 0

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the sum of two integers.
Answer:
To add two Positive integers using a number line:

  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.
To add two integers of positive plus negative integer  using a number line:
  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is Negative, move that many units to the Left from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.


ADDING INTEGERS

Find the sum. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 11.
– 8 + 20
Answer:
– 8 + 20 = 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-11
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -8 to represent -8. Then draw an arrow 20 units to the right representing adding 20.
So, -8 + 20 = 12

Question 12.
30 + (-30)
Answer:
30 + (-30) = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-12
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 30 to represent 30. Then draw an arrow 30 units to the left representing adding -30.
So,30 + (-30) = 0

Question 13.
– 10 + (-18)
Answer:
– 10 + (-18) = -28
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-13
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -10 to represent -10. Then draw an arrow -18 units to the left representing adding -18.
So,- 10 + (-18) = -28

Question 14.
NUMBER SENSE
Is 3 + (-4) the same as -4 + 3? Explain.
Answer:
3 + (-4) = – 1
-4 + 3 = -1
Explanation:
If the order of the addends changes, the sum stays the same. If the grouping of addends changes, the sum stays the same.
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .

LOGIC
Tell whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.

Question 15.
The sum of two negative integers is always negative.
Answer:
True .
Explanation:
– 2 + (- 3) = – 5
-4 + ( – 5 ) = – 9
Then Use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value.

Question 16.
The sum of an integer and its absolute value is always 0.
Answer:
Sometimes, if the integer is negative then the statement is true.
Example:
Sum of a negative integer and its absolute value is always 0
-4 and  | -4| =  | 4|
-4 + 4 = 0

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 17.
At 12:00 P.M., the water pressure on a submarine is 435 pounds per square inch. From 12:00 P.M. to 12:30 P.M., the water pressure increases 58 pounds per square inch. From 12:30 P.M. to 1:00 P.M., the water pressure decreases 116 pounds per square inch. What is the water pressure at 1:00 P.M.?
Answer:
At 12:00 P.M. The water presure on a submarine = 435 pounds per square inch.
From 12:00 P.M. to 12:30 P.M., the water pressure increases 58 pounds per square inch.
From 12:00 P.M. to 12:30 P.M., the water pressure on a submarine = 435 + 58 = 493 pounds per square inch.
From 12:30 P.M. to 1:00 P.M., the water pressure decreases 116 pounds per square inch.
From 12:30 P.M. to 1:00 P.M., the water pressure on a submarine = 493 + 58 = 551 pounds per square inch.
Therefore the water pressure at 1:00 P.M. = 551 pounds per square inch.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
The diagram shows the elevation changes between checkpoints on a trail. The trail begins atan elevation of 8136 feet. What is the elevation at the end of the trail?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 43
Answer:
The elevation at the start of the trail = 8136 Feet
The elevation gets decreases by 174 ft .
now the elevation is at = 8136 – 174 = 7962
From 7962 feet the elevation increased by 250 feet
Now The elevation is at = 7962 + 250 = 8212
8212 feet the elevation decreases by  182 feet
Now The elevation is at = 8212 – 182 = 8030
Now the elevation is increased by 282 feet .
Now The elevation at the end = 8030 + 282 = 8312 feets.

1.2 Practice

Review & Refresh

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 44

Answer:
| -7| = 7
5 < 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-1
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 45
Answer:
| -2.6| = 2.6
| -2.06| = 2.06
2.6 > 2.06
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 46
Answer:
|-\(\frac{3}{5}\)| = 0.6
|\(\frac{5}{8}\)| = 0.625
0.6 > – 0.625
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-3
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Add.

Question 4.
8.43 + 5.21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-4
Explanation:
Write down the numbers, one under the other, with the decimal points lined up. Put in zeros so the numbers have the same length . Then add, using column addition, remembering to put the decimal point in the answer.

Question 5.
2.316 + 4.09
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Write down the numbers, one under the other, with the decimal points lined up. Put in zeros so the numbers have the same length . Then add, using column addition, remembering to put the decimal point in the answer.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 47
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{9}\) + \(\frac{3}{9}\) = \(\frac{5 + 3 }{9}\) =\(\frac{8}{9}\)
Explanation:
Step 1: Make sure the bottom numbers (the denominators) are the same.
Step 2: Add the top numbers (the numerators), put that answer over the denominator.
Step 3: Simplify the fraction (if needed)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 48
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Lcm of 2 , 8  is 8 Multiply 1/2 with 4 in numerator and denominator we get,
\(\frac{4}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
= \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Explanation:
Step 1: Make sure the bottom numbers (the denominators) are the same.
Step 2: Add the top numbers (the numerators), put that answer over the denominator.
Step 3: Simplify the fraction (if needed)

Question 8.
The regular price of a photograph printed on a canvas is $18. You have a coupon for 15% off. How much is the discount?
A. $2.70
B. $3
C. $15
D. $15.30
Answer:
Price of a photograph = $18
Discount = 15% off
Discount price = 15% of $18 = \(\frac{15}{100}\) × 18 = \(\frac{27}{10}\) = 2.7
Discount Price = 2.7$

Question 9.
Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 49
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-9

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING INTEGER COUNTERS
Use integer counters to complete the table. (See Exploration 1, p. 9.)

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 50
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-10 and 11

USING NUMBER LINES
Write an addition expression represented by the number line. Then find the sum.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 51
Answer:
3 + ( – 4) = -1
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to 3 represent first integer that is 3 and from 3 the arrow moves to left representing adding -4 to the first integer and ends at -1 which is the sum.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 52
Answer:
-2 + 4 = 2
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to -2 represent first integer that is -2 and from -2 the arrow moves to right representing adding 4 to the first integer and ends at 2 which is the sum.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 53
Answer:
5 + ( -1) = 4
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to 5 represent first integer that is 5 and from 5 the arrow moves to left representing adding -1 to the first integer and ends at 4 which is the sum.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 54
Answer:
-5 + 2 = -3
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to -5 represent first integer that is -5 and from -5 the arrow moves to right representing adding 2 to the first integer and ends at -3 which is the sum.

ADDING INTEGERS
Find the sum. Use integer counters or a number line to verify your answer.

Question 16.
6 + 4
Answer:
6 + 4 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-16
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 6 to represent 6. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding 4. The arrow ends at 10 showing the sum.
So, 6 + 4 = 10

Question 17.
– 4 + (-6)
Answer:
– 4 + (-6) = -10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-17
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -4 to represent -4. Then draw an arrow 6 units to the left representing adding -6. The arrow ends at -10 showing the sum.
So,- 4 + (-6) = -10

Question 18.
-2 + (-3)
Answer:
-2 + (-3) = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-18
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -2 to represent -2. Then draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing adding -3. The arrow ends at -5 showing the sum.
So, -2 + (-3) = -5

Question 19.
-5 + 12
Answer:
-5 + 12 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-19
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -5 to represent -5. Then draw an arrow 12 units to the right representing adding 12. The arrow ends at 7 showing the sum.
So, -5 + 12 = 7

Question 20.
5 + (-7)
Answer:
5 + (-7) = -2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-20
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 5 to represent 5. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing adding -7. The arrow ends at -2 showing the sum.
So, 5 + (-7) = -2

Question 21.
8 + (-8)
Answer:
8 + (-8) = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-21
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 8 to represent 8. Then draw an arrow 8 units to the left representing adding -8. The arrow ends at 0 showing the sum.
So, 8 + (-8) = 0

Question 22.
9 + (-11)
Answer:
9 + (-11) = -2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-22
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 9 to represent 9. Then draw an arrow 11 units to the left representing adding -11. The arrow ends at -2 showing the sum.
So, 9 + (-11) = -2

Question 23.
-3 + 13
Answer:
-3 + 13 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-23
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 13 units to the right representing adding 13. The arrow ends at 10 showing the sum.
So, -3 + 13 = 10

Question 24.
-4 + (-16)
Answer:
-4 + (-16) = -20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-24
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -4 to represent -4. Then draw an arrow 16 units to the left representing adding -16. The arrow ends at -20 showing the sum.
So, -4 + (-16) = -20

Question 25.
-3 + (-1)
Answer :
-3 + (-1) = -4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-25
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 6 to represent 6. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding 4. The arrow ends at 10 showing the sum.
So, -3 + (-1) = -4

Question 26.
14 + (-5)
Answer:
14 + (-5) = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-26
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 14 to represent 14. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing adding -5. The arrow ends at 9 showing the sum.
So, 14 + (-5) = 9

Question 27.
0 + (-11)
Answer:
0 + (-11) = -11
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-27
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -11 to represent -11.  The arrow ends at -11 showing the sum.
So, 0 + (-11) = -11

Question 28.
-10 + (-15)
Answer :
-10 + (-15) = – 25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-28
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -10 to represent -10. Then draw an arrow 15 units to the left representing adding -15. The arrow ends at -25 showing the sum.
So, -10 + (-15) – 25

Question 29.
-13 + 9
Answer :
-13 + 9 = -4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-29
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -13 to represent -13. Then draw an arrow 9 units to the right representing adding 9. The arrow ends at -4 showing the sum.
So, -13 + 9 = -4

Question 30.
-18 + 18
Answer:
-18 + 18 = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-30
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -18 to represent -18. Then draw an arrow 18 units to the right representing adding 18. The arrow ends at 0 showing the sum.
So, -18 + 18 = 0

Question 31.
-25 + (-9)
Answer :
-25 + (-9) = -36
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-31
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -25 to represent -25. Then draw an arrow 9 units to the left representing adding -9. The arrow ends at -36 showing the sum.
So, -25 + (-9) = -36

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the sum. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 55
Answer :
9 + ( -6 ) = 3
Yes it is right.
Explanation:
|9| > |-6|  so subtract |-6|   from |9| we get 3.
Use the sign of greater number that is  +

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 56
Answer :
No , it is wrong.
Explanation:
|-10| = |10| so add |10| to |10| we get 20
Use the sign of greater number that is  –

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The temperature is 3°F at 7:00 A.M. During the next 4 hours, the temperature increases 21°F. What is the temperature at 11:00 A.M.?
Answer :
The temperature at 7:00 A.M = 3°F
After 4 hours temperature increases to 21°F
The temperature at 11:00 A.M. = 3°F  + 21°F = 24°F

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your bank account has a balance of -$12. You deposit $60. What is your new balance?
Answer :
Current bank balance =-$12
Money deposited = $60
New balance = -12 +60 = 48 $.

Question 36.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A lithium atom has positively charged protons and negatively charged electrons. The sum of the charges represents the charge of the lithium atom. Find the charge of the atom.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 57
Answer :
Number of positively charged protons = 3
Number of negatively charged electrons = -3
Sum of the charges = 3 + (-3) = 0

Question 37.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two integers with different signs that have a sum of 25. Write two integers with the same sign that have a sum of -25.
Answer:
Two integers with different signs have sum of 25 are 36, -11
Two integers with same signs have sum of -25 are -16 , -9

USING PROPERTIES
Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you find the sum using mental math. Then find the sum.

Question 38.
9 + 6 + (-6)
Answer :
9 + 6 + ( -6) = 9 + ( 6 + ( -6)) = 9 + 0 = 9
We have one is positive and another 6 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one is positive and another 6 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 39.
-8 + 13 + (-13)
Answer:
-8 + 13 + (-13) = -8 + (13 + (-13) ) = -8
13 + ( -13) = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 13 is positive and another 13 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 40.
9 + (-17) + (-9)
Answer:
9 + (-17) + (-9) = (-17) + ( 9 + (-9) ) = – 17
9 + (-9) = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 9 is positive and another 9 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 41.
7 + (-12) + (-7)
Answer:
7 + (-12) + (-7) = (-12) + ( 7 + (-7)) = -12
7 + (-7) = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 7 is positive and another 7 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 42.
-12 + 25 + (-15)
Answer:
-12 + 25 + (-15) = 25 + ( -12 + (-15) ) = 25 – 25 = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 25 is positive and another 25 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 43.
6 + (-9) + 14
Answer :
6 + (-9) + 14 = (6 + 14 ) + ( – 9 ) = 20 +( -9) = 11
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.

ADDING INTEGERS

Find the sum.

Question 44.
13 + (-21) + 16
Answer :
13 + (-21) + 16
= (13 + 16) + ( -21)
= 29 + ( -21)
= 8

Question 45.
22 + (-14) + (-12)
Answer :
22 + (-14) + (-12)
= 22 + ((-14) + (-12))
= 22 + (-26)
= -4

Question 46.
-13 + 27 + (-18)
Answer:
-13 + 27 + (-18)
= 27 + (-13 + (-18))
= 27 + (-31)
= -4

Question 47.
-19 + 26 + 14
Answer:
-19 + (26 + 14)
=- 19 + 40
= – 21

Question 48.
-32 + (-17) + 42
Answer:
-32 + (-17) + 42
=(-32 + (-17) ) + 42
=-49 + 42
= -7

Question 49.
-41 + (15) + (-29)
Answer:
-41 + (15) + (-29)
=(-41 + (-29)) + 15
= -70 + 15
= – 55

DESCRIBING A SUM
Describe the location of the sum, relative to p, on a number line.

Question 50.
p + 3
Answer:
p + 3 = 0
Moving 3 to other side it becomes -3
p = – 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-50

Question 51.
p + (-7)
Answer :
p + (-7) = 0
Moving  – 7 to other side it becomes +7
p = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-51

Question 52.
p + 0
Answer :
p + 0 = 0
p = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-52

Question 53.
p + q
Answer :
p + q = 0
p = – q
As q value is not mentioned so cannot estimate p value.

ALGEBRA
Evaluate the expression when a = 4, b = -5, and c = -8.

Question 54.
a + b
Answer:
a + b
Take a = 4, b = -5, we get
4 + ( -5) = -1

Question 55.
-b + c
Answer:
-b + c
Take c = -8, b = -5, we get
-(-5) + (-8) = 5 + (-8) = -3

Question 56.
| a + b + c |
Answer:
| a + b + c |
Take a = 4, b = -5, and c = -8, we get
| 4 + (-5) + (-8) | =| -9|  = 9

Question 57.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the income and expenses for a school carnival. The school’s goal was to raise $1100. Did the school reach its goal? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 58
Answer:
Income of games = $650
Income on concessions =$530
Income on Donations = $52
Total Income = $650 + $530 + $52 = $1232
Expenses on Flyers = -$28
Expenses on Decorations = -$75
Total Expenses = -($28 + $75) =-$103
School Amount = Total Income + Total Expenses = $1232 +(-$103) = 1129$
Yes the school reaches its goal as the school amount = $1129.

OPEN-ENDED
Write a real-life story using the given topic that involves the sum of an integer and its additive inverse.

Question 58.
income and expenses

Question 59.
the amount of water in a bottle

Question 60.
the elevation of a blimp

MENTAL MATH
Use mental math to solve the equation.

Question 61.
d + 12 = 2
Answer:
d + 12 = 2
d = 2 – 12
d = – 10

Question 62.
b + (-2) = 0
Answer:
b + (-2) = 0
b = 2

Question 63.
-8 + m = -15
Answer:
-8 + m = -15
m = -15 + 8
m = – 7

Question 64.
DIG DEEPER!
Starting at point A, the path of a dolphin jumping out of the water is shown.
a. Is the dolphin deeper at point C or point E? Explain your reasoning.
b. Is the dolphin higher at point B or point D? Explain your reasoning.
c. What is the change in elevation of the dolphin from point A to point E?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 59
Answer:
From A the dolphin gets started
At B the dolphin is +24 feet
At C the dolphin is (+24 – 18)feet = 6 feet
At D the dolphin is (6 + 15 ) = 21 feet.
At E the dolphin is (21 – 13 ) = 8 feet.
Answer a :
The dolphin is deeper at Point E
Point E > Point D
8 > 6
Answer b :
The Dolphin is higher at  Point B
Point B > Point D
24 > 21 feet.
Answer c :
The change in elevation of the dolphin from point A to point E is 8 feets.

Question 65.
NUMBER SENSE
Consider the integers p and q. Describe all of the possible values of p and q for each circumstance. Justify your answers.
a. p + q = 0
b. p + q < 0
c. p + q > 0
Answer a :
The values of the integers p and q are
p = 3
q = – 3
p + q = 3 + (-3) = 0

Answer b :
The values of the integers p and q are
p = 3
q = -4
p + q = 3 + (-4) = -1
p + q < 0
-1 <0

Answer c:
The values of the integers p and q are
p = 3
q = 4
p + q = 3 + (4) = 7
p + q > 0
7 <0

Question 66.
PUZZLE
According to a legend, the Chinese Emperor Yu-Huang saw a magic square on the back of a turtle. In magic square, the numbers in each row and in each column have the same sum. This sum is called the magic sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 60
Copy and complete the magic square so that each row and each column has a magic sum of 0. Use each integer from 4 to 4 exactly once.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-66

Lesson 1.3 Adding Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1

Adding Rational Numbers
Work with a partner.
a. Choose a unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on each number line. What addition expressions are being modeled? What are the sums?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 61
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.3-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-a
b. Do the rules for adding integers apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.
Answer :
Yes
Explanation:
The rules for adding integers apply to other real numbers, including rational numbers. Add their absolute values. Give the sum the same sign. Find the difference of their absolute values.
If the two rational expressions that you want to add or subtract have the same denominator you just add/subtract the numerators which each other. When the denominators are not the same in all expressions that you want to add or subtract as in the example below you have to find a common denominator.

c. You have used the following properties to add integers. Do these properties apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.

  • Commutative Property of Addition
  • Associative Property of Addition
  • Additive Inverse Property

Answer c :
Yes, Commutative property of addition and associative Property of addition are applied to all rational numbers.
Explanation:
Associative Property
Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Distributive Property
Distributive property states that for any three numbers x, y and z we have
x × ( y + z ) = (x × y) +( x × z)

1.3 Lesson

Try It
Find the sum. Write your answer in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 62
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 62
Because the signs are same
=|-\(\frac{1}{2}\)| + |-\(\frac{3}{2}\)|
= |\(\frac{4}{2}\)| = 2
Both the signs are negative so, use a negative sign in the sum .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 63
Answer :
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 63= –\(\frac{5}{8}\)
= -1\(\frac{3}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= –\(\frac{11}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Lcm of 8 , 4 are 8
= –\(\frac{11}{8}\) + \(\frac{6}{8}\)
Both the signs are different
=|\(\frac{6}{8}\)| – |-\(\frac{11}{8}\)|
=\(\frac{6}{8}\) – \(\frac{11}{8}\)
=-\(\frac{5}{8}\)
 |\(\frac{6}{8}\)|  < |–\(\frac{11}{8}\)|
So use negative sign.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 64
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 64
Both the numbers have different signs.
write 4 as \(\frac{8}{2}\)
=|\(\frac{8}{2}\)| – |-\(\frac{7}{2}\)|
= \(\frac{8}{2}\) – \(\frac{7}{2}\)
=\(\frac{1}{2}\)
So use positive sign as \(\frac{8}{2}\) > \(\frac{7}{2}\)

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 4.
-3.3 + (-2.7)
Answer:
-3.3 + (-2.7)
=|-3.3| + |-2.7|
=3.3 +2.7
=6.0
Use negative sign as both numbers are negative. so, sum = -6.0

Question 5.
-5.35 + 4
Answer:
-5.35 + 4
=|-5.35|  – |4|
= 5.35 – 4
=-1.35
Use negative sign as |-5.35|  > |4| so, sum = -1.35

Question 6.
1.65 + (-0.9)
Answer:
=1.65 + (-0.9)
=|1.65|  – |-0.9|
= 1.65 – 0.9
= 0.75
|1.65|  > |-0.9|  so use positive sign so sum = 0.75

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the sum of two rational numbers.
Answer:
Step 1 : first make the denominators of the numbers equal
Step 2 : Second, draw a number line.
Step 3 : Mark the first Rational number from 0 on the number line.
Step 4 :Next, if the second Rational Number is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first Rational Number … or Next, if the second Rational Number is Negative, move that many units to the left from the location of the first Rational Number
Step 5 :Your answer will be the point you end on.

ADDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the sum.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 65
Answer:
= –\(\frac{7}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Both the signs are different write \(\frac{1}{5}\) as \(\frac{2}{10}\)
=|\(\frac{2}{10}\)| – |-\(\frac{7}{10}\)|
=\(\frac{2}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\)
=-\(\frac{5}{10}\)
 |\(\frac{2}{10}\)|  < |–\(\frac{7}{10}\)|
So use negative sign.  so sum is –\(\frac{5}{10}\)

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 66
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 66
Because the signs are same
LCM of the denominators = 3 × 4 = 12
So –\(\frac{3}{4}\) should be multiplied with 3 to  Numerator and Denominator
and –\(\frac{1}{3}\) should be multiplied with 4 to  Numerator and Denominator we get,
=|-\(\frac{9}{12}\)| + |-\(\frac{4}{12}\)|
= –\(\frac{13}{12}\)
Both the signs are negative so, use a negative sign in the sum .
So sum is –\(\frac{13}{12}\)

Question 10.
-2.6 + 4.3
Answer:
=4.3 + (-2.6)
=|4.3|  – |-2.6|
= 4.3 – 2.6
= 1.7
|4.3|  > |-2.6|  so use positive sign so sum = 1.7

Question 11.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 67

Answer :
Add -4.5 and 3.5
Find the sum of -4.5 and 3.5
The above two statements means the same which sum of the numbers.
Where as , What is the distance between -4.5 and 3.5 and what is -4.5 increased by 3.5 ? these two statements are different from the above statements.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
A bottle contains 10.5 cups of orange juice. You drink 1.2 cups of the juice each morning and 0.9 cup of the juice each afternoon. How much total juice do you drink each day? When will you run out of juice?
Answer:
Volume of orange juice = 10.5 cups
Volume of juice drank in morning = 1.2 cups
Volume of juice drank in afternoon = 0.9 cups
Total Volume of juice drank in one day = 1.2 + 0.9 cups = 2.1 cups
Number of days juice gets completed = 10.5 ÷ 2.1 = 5 days.
You will run out of juice on 5 th day .

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the changes in elevation of a hiker each day for three days. How many miles of elevation must the hiker gain on the fourth day to gain mile of elevation over \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile of elevation over the four days?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 68
Answer:
Change in Elevation on first day = –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Change in elevation on Second day = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Change in elevation on third day = –\(\frac{1}{5}\)
Total change in elevation for 3 days = –\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)  + (-\(\frac{1}{5}\) )
Lcm of 2,4 and 5 is 20
= –\(\frac{5}{20}\) + \(\frac{10}{20}\) + (-\(\frac{4}{20}\) )
= \(\frac{1}{20}\)
Gain in elevation = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Change in elevation on fourth day = C
C + \(\frac{1}{20}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
C = \(\frac{1}{4}\)  – \(\frac{1}{20}\) ( \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = \(\frac{5}{20}\) )
= \(\frac{5}{20}\) – \(\frac{1}{20}\) = \(\frac{4}{20}\) =\(\frac{1}{5}\)
Change in elevation on fourth day = \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Adding Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 1.3

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 1.
3 + 12
Answer:
3 + 12 = 15
|3| + |12| = 15
Both the signs are same so use positive sign to the sum .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 3 to represent 3. Then draw an arrow 12 units to the right representing adding +12.The arrows end at showing the sum
So, 3 + 12 = 15

Question 2.
5 + (-7)
Answer:
5 + (-7)
|5| – |-7|
= 5 – 7
= -2
|5| < |-7| so use negative sign.
so , sum is  – 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-2
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 5 to represent 5. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing adding -7.The arrows end at showing the sum
So, 5 + (-7) = -2

Question 3.
-4 + (-1)
Answer :
-4 + (-1)
|-4| + |-1|
= 4 + 1
= -5
Both have the same signs
so , sum is  – 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-3
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -4 to represent -4. Then draw an arrow 1 units to the left representing adding -1.The arrows end at showing the sum
So,
-4 + (-1) -5

Question 4.
-6 + 6
Answer:
-6 + 6
|-6| – |6|
= 6 – 6
= 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-4
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -6 to represent -6. Then draw an arrow 6 units to the right representing adding +6.The arrows end at showing the sum
So,
-6 + 6 = 0

Subtract.

Question 5.
69 – 38
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-5

Question 6.
82 – 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-6

Question 7.
177 – 63
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-7

Question 8.
451 – 268
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-8

Question 9.
What is the range of the numbers below?
12, 8, 17, 12, 15, 18, 30
Answer :
8, 12 , 12 , 15 , 17, 18, 30
Smallest number = 8
Largest number = 30
Range = largest number – smallest number = 30 – 8 = 22
Explanation:
The range is the difference between the largest and smallest numbers. The midrange is the average of the largest and smallest number.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING TOOLS
Choose a unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on the number line. Write the addition expression being modeled. Then find the sum. (See Exploration 1, p. 17.)

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 69
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-10
-2 + ( 5) = 3
-2 + 5
|-2| – |5|
= 2 – 5
= 3
|-2| < |5| so use positive sign so, sum is 5
Explanation:
An arrow is drawn from 0 to -2 represent -2 . Then another arrow is drawn from -2 to 3 represent adding of -5. then the arrow ends at 3 showing the sum .

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 70
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-11
5 + (-4)
|5| – |-4|
= 5 – 4
= 1
|5| > |-4| so use positive sign so, sum is 1
Explanation:
An arrow is drawn from 0 to 5 represent 5 . Then another arrow is drawn from 5 to 1 represent adding of -4 then the arrow ends at 1 showing the sum .

ADDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 71
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-12

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 72
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-13

Question 14.
-4.2 + 3.3
Answer :
-4.2+ 3.3
|-4.2| – |3.3|
= 4.2 – 3.3
= 0.9
|-4.2| > |3.3|
so , sum is  – 0.9

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 73

Question 16.
12.48 + (-10.636)
Answer :
12.48 + (-10.636)
|12.48| – |-10.636|
= 12.48 – 10.636
= 1.844
|12.48| > |-10.636|
so , sum is  1.844

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 741

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-17

Question 18.
-20.25 + 15.711
Answer :
-20.25 + 15.711
|-20.25| – |15.711|
= 20.25 – 15.711
=  – 4.539
|20.25| > |15.711|
so , sum is  – 4.539

Question 19.
-32.306 + (-24.884)
Answer :
-32.306 + (-24.884)
|-32.306| + |-24.884|
= 32.306 + 24.884
= – 7.422
Both the signs are same
so , sum is  – 7.422

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 75
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-20

Question 21.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the sum. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 76
Answer :
No, the sum is -3.95
Explanation :
The procedure to solve above sum is right but in the last after adding the numbers he should put negative symbol to the sum as both the addends are negative.
The sum of negative numbers will always be negative .

OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life situation that can be represented by the addition expression modeled on the number line.

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 77
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-22
Explanation:
The coin is buried under ground of 1.6 metres. then again it is removed from ground and buried with increase of 0.6 length from previous buried length . Now where is the coin located.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 78
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-23
Explanation:
Rahul gained 1.25$ on his birthday and spent 1.25$ on video game . how much money is left over with rahul .

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You eat \(\frac{3}{10}\) of a coconut. Your friend eats \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the coconut. What fraction of the coconut do you and your friend eat?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 79
Answer :
Coconut part eaten by me = \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Coconut part eaten by friend = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Total Coconut eaten by me and my friend = \(\frac{3}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) is written as \(\frac{2}{10}\)
= \(\frac{3}{10}\) + \(\frac{2}{10}\)
= \(\frac{5}{10}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Total Coconut eaten by me and my friend = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your bank account balance is $20.85. You deposit $15.50. What is your new balance?
Answer :
My Account Balance = $20.85
Deposited Money = $15.50
New Balance = $20.85 + $15.50 = .635

Question 26.
NUMBER SENSE
When is the sum of two negative mixed numbers an integer?
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-26

Question 27.
WRITING
You are adding two rational numbers with different signs. How can you tell if the sum will positive, negative, or zero?
Answer :
The sign of the sum will always be the sign of the absolute value of the greater number.
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-27

Question 28.
DIG DEEPER!
The table at the left shows the water level (in inches) of a reservoir for three months compared to the yearly average. Is the water level for the three-month period greater than or less than the yearly average? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 81

Answer :
Water level in june month = -2\(\frac{1}{8}\) = –\(\frac{17}{8}\)
Water level in July month = 1\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Water level in August month  = –\(\frac{7}{8}\)
Average of Yearly = Water level in (June  + July + August ) ÷ 3
= (-\(\frac{17}{8}\) + \(\frac{5}{4}\) + (-\(\frac{7}{8}\) )) ÷ 3
Take \(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{10}{8}\) as it is multiplied by 2 with numerator and denominator
= (-\(\frac{17}{8}\) + \(\frac{10}{8}\) + (-\(\frac{7}{8}\) )) ÷ 3
= –\(\frac{14}{8}\) ÷ 3
= –\(\frac{7}{4}\) ÷ 3
= –\(\frac{7}{12}\)
Average of Yearly = –\(\frac{7}{12}\)
3 months water level = –\(\frac{7}{4}\)
–\(\frac{7}{4}\)  > –\(\frac{7}{12}\)
3 months water level is greater than average of yearly .

USING PROPERTIES

Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you find the sum using mental math. Then find the sum.

Question 29.
4.5 + (-6.21) + (-4.5)
Answer :
4.5 + (-6.21) + (-4.5)
we know 4.5 – 4.5 = 0, we get
4.5 – 4.5 – 6.21 = -6.21
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 82
Answer :
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 82
= Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-30

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 83
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-31

ADDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the sum. Explain each step.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 84
Answer :
Converting the fraction form into decimal form
4\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{19}{4}\) = 4.75
= 6 + 4.75 + (-2.5)
add | 6|+ | 4.75 |we get,
= | 10.75 | –  | -2.5 |
= | 8.55|
6 is greater number so we get positive sign for the sum.
Therefore sum = 8.55

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 85
Answer :
Convert the fraction form into decimal form we get ,
\(\frac{4}{5}\) = 0.8
= -4.3 + 0.8 + 12
absolute values of the numbers
= | -4.3 |  + | 0.8 | + | 12 |
add | 0.8 | + | 12 | = | 12.8 |
= | -4.3 |  + | 12.8 |
= 12.8 – 4.3
= 8.5
12 is greater number so sum sign is positive
Therefore sum  = 8.5

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 86
Answer :
Convert the fraction forms into decimal forms we get,
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{16}{3}\) = 5.33
-3\(\frac{1}{6}\) = –\(\frac{19}{6}\)  = -3.16
we get equation as ,
5.33 + 7.5 + (-3.16)
=| 5.33 | + | 7.5 |  – | -3.16 |
= 5.33 + 7.5 – 3.16
= 12.53 – 3.16
= 9.37
as 7.5 is greater than all numbers so sum sign will be positive.
Therefore sum = 9.37

Question 35.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table at the right shows the annual profits (in thousands of dollars) of a county fair from 2013 to 2016. What must the 2017 profit be (in hundreds of dollars) to break even over the five-year period?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 87
Answer :
Profit in  2013 = 2.5
Profit in 2014 = 1.4
Profit in 2015 = -3.3
Profit in 2016 = -1.4
Total Profit from 2013 to 2016 = 2.5 + 1.4 + ( -3.3 ) + (-1.4) = | 2.5 | + | 1.4 | – | -3.3 | – | -1.4 | = 2.5 + 1.4 -3.3 -1.4=2.5 – 3.3 = -0.8
– 3.3 is greater than all numbers so sum sign is negative.
The 2017 profit should be to break even over the five-year period is greater than -0.8 .

Question 36.
REASONING
Is | a + b | = | a | + | b | true for all rational numbers a and b? Explain.
Answer :
Sometimes based on the values of a and b
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-36

Question 37.
REPEATED REASONING
Evaluate the expression.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 88
Answer :
\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-37

Lesson 1.4 Subtracting Integers

EXPLORATION 1
Using Integer Counters to Find Differences

Work with a partner.

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 89
a. Use integer counters to find the following sum and difference. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 90
Answer :
4 + (-2) = 2 and 4 – 2 = 2
Explanation:
When -2 is added to 4 or when2 is subtracted from 4 we get the same sum and difference.

b. In part (a), you removed zero pairs to find the sums. How can you use integer counters and zero pairs to find -3 – 1?
c. INDUCTIVE REASONING
Use integer counters to complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 91
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Exploration-1-c
d. Write a general rule for subtracting integers.
Answer :
To subtract integers, change the sign on the integer that is to be subtracted. If both signs are positive, the answer will be positive. If both signs are negative, the answer will be negative. If the signs are different subtract the smaller absolute value from the larger absolute value.

1.4 Lesson

Try It

Use a number line to find the difference.

Question 1.
1 – 4
Answer :
1 – 4 = – 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-1
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 1 represent 1 . Then , Draw an arrow 4 units to the left to represent subtracting 4, or adding -4.
So,  1 – 4 = – 3

Question 2.
-5 – 2
Answer :
-5 – 2 = -7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-2
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to -5 represent -5 . Then , Draw an arrow 2 units to the left to represent subtracting 2, or adding -2.
So, -5 – 2 = -7

Question 3.
6 – (-5)
Answer :
6 – (-5) = 11
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-3

Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 6 represent 6 . Then, Draw an arrow 5 units to the right to represent subtracting -5, or adding 5.
So,  16 – (-5) = 11

Try It

Question 4.
8 – 3
Answer :
=8 – 3
=8 + ( – 3)      Add opposite of 3
=5                  Add
The difference is 5

Question 5.
9 – 17
Answer :
= 9 – 17
= 9 + ( – 17)      Add opposite of 17
= -8                  Add
The difference is -8

Question 6.
-3 – 3
Answer :
= -3 – 3
= -3 + ( – 3)      Add opposite of 3
= -6                  Add
The difference is -6

Question 7.
-14 – 9
Answer :
= -14 – 9
= -14 + ( – 9)      Add opposite of 9
= -25                 Add
The difference is -25

Question 8.
10 – (-8)
Answer :
= 10 – ( -8 )
= 10+ ( 8)      Add opposite of -8
= 18               Add
The difference is 18

Question 9.
-12 – (-12)
Answer :
= -12 – ( -12 )
= -12 + ( 12)      Add opposite of -12
= -24                 Add
The difference is -24

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the difference of two integers.
Answers :

To Subtract two Positive integers using a number line:

  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.
To Subtract two integers of positive plus negative integer  using a number line:
  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is Negative, move that many units to the Left from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.

MATCHING
Match the subtraction expression with the corresponding addition expression. Explain your reasoning.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 93

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 94

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 95

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 96

SUBTRACTING INTEGERS
Find the difference. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 15.
10 – 12
Answer :
10 – 12 = -2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-15
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 10 represent 10 . Then, Draw an arrow 12 units to the left to represent subtracting 12, or adding -12.
So,  10 – 12 = -2

Question 16.
6 – (-8)
Answer :
6 – (-8) = 14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-16
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 6 represent 6 . Then, Draw an arrow 8 units to the right to represent subtracting -8, or adding 8.
So,  6 – (-8) = 14

Question 17.
-7 – (-4)
Answer :
-7 – (-4) = -3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-17
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to -7 represent -7 . Then, Draw an arrow 4 units to the left to represent subtracting -4, or adding 4.
So,  -7 – (-4) = -3

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 18.
A polar vortex causes the temperature to decrease from 3°C at 3:00 P.M. to -2°C at 4:00 P.M. The temperature continues to change by the same amount each hour until 8:00 P.M. Find the total change in temperature from 3:00 P.M. to 8:00 P.M.
Answer :
Temperature decrease from 3°C at 3:00 P.M. to -2°C at 4:00 P.M
Temperature decrease from 3:00 P.M. to 4:00 P.M = 3°C – (-2°C) = 5 °C
For one hour it decreases 5 °C
From to 3:00 P.M. to 8:00 P.M. = 5 hours
Temperature decrease from 3:00 P.M. to 8:00 P.M. = 5 hours × 5 °C = 25 °C

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
While on vacation, you map several locations using a coordinate plane in which each unit represents 1 mile. A cove is at(3, 7), an island is at(5, 4), and you are currently at (3, 4). Are you closer to the cove or the island? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 97
Answer :
Island is close to the cove
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-19

Subtracting Integers Homework & Practice 1.4

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 98
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-1

Question 2.
-8.75 + 2.43
Answer :
=2.43 – 8.75
=2.43 + (-8.75)   Add opposite of  8.75
= -6.32
The difference is  – 6.32

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 99
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-3

As both the numbers are negative so, sum is negative.

Add.

Question 4.
2.48 + 6.711
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-4

Question 5.
12.807 + 7.116
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-5

Question 6.
18.7126 + 14.033
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-6

Write an addition expression represented by the number line. Then find the sum.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 100
Answer :
– 1 + (-3)             Add opposite of 3
= -4                     Add
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to -1 represent -1 and then an arrow from -1 drawn towards right represent – 3  units . so the sum is -4. the arrows end showing the sum at -4.
– 1 + (-3) = -4

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 101
Answer :
2 + ( – 5 )      add opposite of 5
= -3
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to 2 represent 2 and then an arrow from 2 drawn towards left represent – 5  units . so the sum is -3. the arrows end showing the sum at -3.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING INTEGER COUNTERS
Use integer counters to find the difference. (See Exploration 1, p. 23.)

Question 9.
5 – 3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-9
Explanation:
A Positive counter and negative counter form zero pair .
Take 5 positive counters and 3 negative counters then 3 zero pairs will be canceled and only 2 positive counters are left, the sum is +2

Question 10.
1 – 4
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-10
Explanation:
A Positive counter and negative counter form zero pair .
Take 1 positive counters and 4 negative counters then 1 zero pair will be canceled and only 3 negative counters are left, the sum is -3

Question 11.
-2 – (-6)
Answer :
Convert the equation in addition form
-2 – (-6) = -2 + 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-11
Explanation:
A Positive counter and negative counter form zero pair .
Take 6 positive counters and 2 negative counters then 2 zero pair will be canceled and only 4 positive counters are left, the sum is +4

USING NUMBER LINES
Write an addition expression and write a subtraction expression represented by the number line. Then evaluate the expressions.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 102
Answer :
4 – 3 = 1
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to 4 represent 4 and then an arrow from 4 drawn towards left represent  3  units . so the sum is 1. the arrows end showing the sum at 1.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 103
Answer :
-2 + 5 = 3
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to -2 represent -2 and then an arrow from -2 drawn towards right represent 5  units . so the sum is 3. the arrows end showing the sum at +3.

SUBTRACTING INTEGERS
Find the difference. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 14.
4 – 7
Answer :
Words : To subtract an integer add its opposite .
Numbers : 4 – 7 = 4 + (-7) = -3
Model : Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-14
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4 represent 4 . Then, Draw an arrow 47units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at – 3 showing the difference.
So,  4 – 7 = -3

Question 15.
8 – (-5)
Answer :
8 – (-5) = 13
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-15
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 8 represent 8 . Then, Draw an arrow 5 units to the right to represent subtracting -5, or adding 5. The arrow ends at 13 showing the difference.
So, 8 – (-5) = 13

Question 16.
– 6 – (-7)
Answer :
– 6 – (-7) = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-16
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -6 represent -6 . Then, Draw an arrow 7 units to the left to represent subtracting -7, or adding 7. The arrow ends at 1 showing the difference.
So, – 6 – (-7) = 1

Question 17.
– 2 – 3
Answer :
– 2 – 3 = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-17
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -2 represent -2 . Then, Draw an arrow 3 units to the left to represent subtracting 3, or adding -3. The arrow ends at – 5 showing the difference.
So, – 2 – 3 = -5

Question 18.
5 – 8
Answer :
5 – 8 = – 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-18
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 5 represent 5 . Then, Draw an arrow 8 units to the left to represent subtracting 8, or adding -8. The arrow ends at – 3 showing the difference.
So, 5 – 8 = – 3

Question 19.
-4 – 6
Answer :
-4 – 6 = – 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-19
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4 represent -4 . Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the left to represent subtracting 6, or adding -6. The arrow ends at – 10 showing the difference.
So, -4 – 6 = – 10

Question 20.
-8 – (-3)
Answer:
-8 – (-3) = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-20
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -8 represent -8 . Then, Draw an arrow 3 units to the Right to represent subtracting -3, or adding 3. The arrow ends at – 5 showing the difference.
So, -8 – (-3) = -5

Question 21.
10 – 7
Answer :
10 – 7 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-21
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 10 represent 10 . Then, Draw an arrow 7 units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at 3 showing the difference.
So, 10 – 7 = 3

Question 22.
– 8 – 13
Answer :
– 8 – 13 = -21
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-22
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -8 represent -8 . Then, Draw an arrow 13 units to the left to represent subtracting 13, or adding -13. The arrow ends at – 21 showing the difference.
So, – 8 – 13 = – 21

Question 23.
15 – (-2)
Answer :
15 – (-2) = 17
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-23
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 15 represent 15 . Then, Draw an arrow 2 units to the Right to represent subtracting -2 or adding 2. The arrow ends at 17 showing the difference.
So, 15 – (-2) = 17

Question 24.
-9 – (-13)
Answer :
-9 – (-13) = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-24
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -9 represent -9 . Then, Draw an arrow 13 units to the Right to represent subtracting -13, or adding 13. The arrow ends at 4 showing the difference.
So, -9 – (-13) = 4

Question 25.
-7 – (-8)
Answer:
-7 – (-8) = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-25
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4 represent 4 . Then, Draw an arrow 47units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at – 3 showing the difference.
So, -7 – (-8) = 1

Question 26.
– 6 – (-6)
Answer :
– 6 – (-6) = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-26
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -6 represent -6 . Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the left to represent subtracting -6, or adding 6. The arrow ends at 0 showing the difference.
So, – 6 – (-6) = 0

Question 27.
-10 – 12
Answer :
-10 – 12 = -22
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-27
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -10 represent -10 . Then, Draw an arrow 12 units to the left to represent subtracting 12, or adding -12. The arrow ends at – 22 showing the difference.
So, -10 – 12 = -22

Question 28.
32 – (-6)
Answer :
32 – (-6) = 38
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-28
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 32 represent 32. Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the Right to represent subtracting -6, or adding 6 The arrow ends at 38 showing the difference.
So, 32 – (-6) = 38

Question 29.
0 – (-20)
Answer :
0 – (-20) = 20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-29
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from  0 to 20 which represent 20 .
So, 0 – (-20) = 20

Question 30.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the difference. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 104

Answer :
Yes
Explanation :
7 – (- 12 )
= 7  + 12            Add opposite of -12
= 19                    Add

Question 31.
A scientist records the water temperature and the air temperature in Antarctica. The water temperature is -2°C. The air is 9°C colder than the water. Which expression can be used to find the air temperature? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 105
Answer :
-2 – 9  is the correct option
Explanation :
Temperature of water = -2°C.
The air is 9°C colder than the water It means
Temperature of Air = -2 – 9 °C. = – 11 °C

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A shark is 80 feet below the surface of the water. It swims up and jumps out of the water to a height of 15 feet above the surface. Find the vertical distance the shark travels. Justify your answer.
Answer :
The shark is located at  = – 80 feet
The height of shark when jumps = + 15 feet .
The vertical Distance traveled by shark = 80 + 15  feet = 95 feet (As distance cant be negative )
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-32

Question 33.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The figure shows a diver diving from a platform. The diver reaches a depth of 4 meters. What is the change in elevation of the diver?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 106
Answer :
The diver reaches a depth of 4 meters.
Height of diver diving from a platform = 10 metres
The change in elevation of the driver  =10 – (-4) = 10 + 4 = 14 metres.

Question 34.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two different pairs of negative integers, x and y, that make the statement x – y = 1 true.
Answer :
Let x = 1 and y = 2
x – y
= 1 – 2
= -1
Let x = 2 and  y = 3
x – y
= 2 – 3
= – 1
From Above values of x and y the statement x – y = -1 is explained

USING PROPERTIES
Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you evaluate the expression using mental math. Then evaluate the expression.

Question 35.
2 – 7 + (-2)
Answer :
2 + (-2) is zero pair
=2 – 7 + (-2)         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= 2 – 2 – 7
= – 7

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 36.
– 6 – 8 + 6
Answer :
6 + (-6) is zero pair
=-6 – 8 + 6         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= -6 + 6- 8
= – 8
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 37.
8 + (-8 – 5)
Answer :
8 – 8 = 0 zero pair
8 + (-8 – 5)
= (8 – 8)- 5  (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= -5
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 38.
-39 + 46 – (-39)
Answer :
39 + (-39) is zero pair
=-39 + 46 – (-39)         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= -39 + 39+ 46
= 46
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 39.
[13 + (-28)] – 13
Answer :
13 + (-13) is zero pair
=[13 + (-28)] – 13         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= [13 + (-13)] – 28
= – 28
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 40.
-2 + (-47 – 8)
Answer :
– 2 + (-47 – 8)
= -2 – 8 +(-47)      add -2 – 8
= – 10 + (-47 )
= – 57
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

ALGEBRA

Evaluate the expression when k = -3, m = -6, and n = 9.

Question 41.
4 – n
Answer :
4 – n
Take  n = 9 we get,
4 – 9 = – 5

Question 42.
m – (-8)
Answer :
m – (-8)
Take m = ( -6)
= (-6) – ( -8)
= -6 + 8
= -2

Question 43.
-5 + k – n
Answer :
-5 + k – n
Take k =-3 and  n = 9
– 5 + (-3) – 9
= -5 – 3 – 9
= -8 – 9
= – 17

Question 44.
| m – k |
Answer :
| m – k |
Take  m = (-6) and k = (-3)
| (-6) – (-3) |
= | -6 + 3 |
= | – 3 |
= 3

Question 45.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the record monthly high and low temperatures for a city in Alaska.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 107
a. Which month has the greatest range of temperatures?
Answer :
Range in Jan = 56 – (-35) = 91
Range in Feb = 57 – ( -38) = 95
Range in Mar = 56 – (-24 ) = 80
Range in Apr =72 – (-15) = 87
Range in May = 82 – 1 = 81
Range in Jun = 92 – 29 = 63
Range in Jul = 84 – 34 = 50
Range in Aug = 85 -31 = 54
Range in Sep = 73 – 19 = 54
Range in Oct = 64 – (-6) = 70
Range in Nov = 62 – (-21 ) = 83
Range in Dec = 53 – (-36) = 89

The Greatest Range of temperature is in February = 95
b. What is the range of temperatures for the year?
Answer :
Range of Year =  (Jan  + Feb + March +April +May +June +July +Aug +Sep +Oct +Nov +Dec ) ÷ 12
=  (91 + 95 + 80 +87 + 81 + 63 + 50 + 54 + 54 + 70 + 83 + 89 ) ÷ 12
= 897 ÷ 12 = 74.75

REASONING
Tell whether the difference of the two integers is always, sometimes, or never positive. Explain your reasoning.

Question 46.
two positive integers
Answer :
True
Explanation :
Example :
2 integers are 2 , 4
4 – 2 = 2

Question 47.
a positive integer and a negative integer
Answer :
True
Explanation
Take X = 5 and Y = -6
X – Y = 5 – (-6) = 5 + 6 = 11

Question 48.
two negative integers
Answer :
Sometimes based on the values of integers
Explanation :
Take x = – 2 , y = – 4
x – y = (-2) – (-4) = -2 + 4 = 2
Here the difference is positive.

Take x = – 6 , y = – 2
x – y = -6 – (-2) = -6 + 2 = – 4
Here the difference is negative.

Question 49.
a negative integer and a positive integer
Answer :
Sometimes
Take X = -8 and Y = 3
X-Y = -8 – 3 = -8 + 3 = -5
Here we got negative differences

NUMBER SENSE
For what values of a and b is the statement true?

Question 50.
| a – b | = | b – a |
Answer :
True
Explanation:
Take a = -3 and b = 2
| a – b | = | (-3) – 2 | = | -3 – 2 | = | -5 | = 5
| b – a | = | 2 – (-3) | = | 2 + 3 | = | 5 | = 5
| a – b | = | b – a |

Question 51.
| a – b | = | a | – | b |
Answer :
False
Explanation :
| a – b | = | a | – | b |
Take a = -3 and b = 2
| a – b | = | (-3) – 2 | = | -3 – 2 | = | -5 | = 5
| -3 | – | 2 | = 3 – 2 = 1
| a – b | is not equal to | a | – | b |

Lesson 1.5 Subtracting Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1

Subtracting Rational Numbers

Work with a partner.
a. Choose a unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on each number line. What expressions involving subtraction are being modeled? What are the differences?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 108
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.5-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-a
b. Do the rules for subtracting integers apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.
Answer :

When subtracting rational numbers we follow the rules for subtracting integers.
  • KEEP the sign of the first number the same.
  • CHANGE subtraction to addition.
  • CHANGE the sign of the second number to the opposite, positive becomes negative, negative becomes positive

c. You have used the commutative and associative properties to add integers. Do these properties apply in expressions involving subtraction? Explain your reasoning.
Answer :
No properties are followed
Explanation:
Properties of subtraction:

  • Subtracting a number from itself.
  • Subtracting 0 from a number.
  • Order property.
  • Subtraction of 1

EXPLORATION 2
Finding Distances on a Number Line
Work with a partner.
a. Find the distance between 3 and 2 on a number line.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.5-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-2-a
b. The distance between 3 and 0 is the absolute value of 3, because |3 – 0 | = 3. How can you use absolute values
to find the distance between 3 and 2? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 109
Answer b :
The distance between 3 and 0 is the absolute value of 3, because |3 – 0 | = 3.
The Distance between 3 and 2 is  |3 – 2 | = 1
Explanation :
Absolute values of all numbers are positive

1.5 Lesson

Try It

Find the difference. Write your answer in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 110
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 111
Answer :

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 112
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-3

Try It

Find the difference.

Question 4.
-2.1 – 3.9
Answer :
– 2.1 – 3.9 = – 6.0
both have negative signs so, difference also have negative sign .

Question 5.
-8.8 – (-8.8)
Answer :
0
Explanation :
Rewrite the differences as a sum by adding the opposite.
=  – 8.8 + 8.8
= 8.8 + ( -8.8 )
Because the signs are different and |8.8 | = |- 8. 8 |
we get ,
= 0  ( zero pair )

Question 6.
0.45 – (-0.05)
Answer :
0.45 – (-0.05)
= 0.45 + 0.05
= 0. 50

Try It

Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 113
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-7

Question 8.
7.8 – 3.3 – (-1.2) + 4.3
Answer :
7.8 – 3.3 – (-1.2) + 4.3
= 7.8 – 3.3 + 1.2 + 4.3
Add all the positive numbers
= 7.8 + 1.2 + 4.3 – 3.3
=9.0 + 4.3 – 3.3
= 13.3 – 3.3
= 10.0

Try It

Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.

Question 9.
– 3 and 9
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-9
The distance between -3 and 9 is 12 units

Question 10.
-7.5 and -15.3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-10
Explanation :
The distance between -7.5 and -15.3 = 15.3 – 7.5 = -7.8

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 114
Answer :
1\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1.5

–\(\frac{2}{3}\) = –\(\frac{2}{3}\) = – 0.6
Distance between 1.5 and  -0.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-11
Explanation :
Distance between 1.5 and  -0.6 = 1.5 + 0.6 = 2.1

Self-Assessmentfor Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the difference of two rational numbers.
Answer :
Difference of two rational numbers using a number line:

  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.
Difference of two rational numbers using a number line:
  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is Negative, move that many units to the Left from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.

SUBTRACTING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the difference. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 13.
4.9 – 1.6
Answer :
4.9 – 1.6 = 3.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-13
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4.9 represent 4.9 . Then, Draw an arrow 1.6 units to the left to represent subtracting 1.6, or adding -1.6. The arrow ends at 3.3 showing the difference.
So, 4.9 – 1.6 = 3.3

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 115
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-14
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 7/8 represent 7/8 . Then, Draw an arrow 6/8 units to the right to represent subtracting -6/7, or adding 6/8. The arrow ends at 13/8 showing the difference.
So, Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 115= \(\frac{13}{8}\)

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 116
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-15

Self-Assessmentfor Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
A parasail is \(\frac{3}{100}\) mile above the water. After 5 minutes, the parasail is \(\frac{1}{50}\) mile above the water. Find and interpret the change in height of the parasail.
Answer :
Height of parasail above water = \(\frac{3}{100}\)
After 5 mins Height of parasil above water \(\frac{1}{50}\)
change in height of the parasail = \(\frac{3}{100}\) – \(\frac{1}{50}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{1}{50}\)  as \(\frac{2}{100}\)
change in height of the parasail = \(\frac{3}{100}\) – \(\frac{2}{100}\) = \(\frac{1}{100}\)

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You withdraw $55 from a bank account to purchase a game. Then you make a deposit. The number line shows the balances of the account after each transaction.
a. Find and interpret the distance between the points.
b. How much money was in your account before buying the game?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 117
Answer :
a : Distance between the points. = $6.18 + $25.32 = $ 31.50
b : Withdrawal amount = $55
Balance after withdrawal = -$25.32
Money before buying the game = $55 +(-25.32$) = $29.68

Subtracting Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 1.5

Review & Refresh

Find the difference. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 1.
9 – 5
Answer :
9 – 5
= 9 + (- 5)                    Add opposite of 5
= 4                               Add
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 9 represent 9 . Then, Draw an arrow 5 units to the left to represent subtracting 5, or adding -5. The arrow ends at 4 showing the difference.
So, 9 + (- 5)  = 4

Question 2.
– 8 – (-8)
Answer :
– 8 – (-8)
8 – 8  = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-2
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 8 represent 9 . Then, Draw an arrow 8 units to the left to represent subtracting 8, or adding -8. The arrow ends at 0 showing the difference.
So, 8 – 8  = 0

Question 3.
– 12 – 7
Answer :
– 12 – 7 = – 19
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-3

Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -12 represent -12 . Then, Draw an arrow 7 units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at -19 showing the difference.
So, – 12 – 7 = – 19

Question 4.
12 – (-3)
Answer :
12 – (-3)
= 12 + 3
=15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-4

Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 12 represent 12 . Then, Draw an arrow 3 units to the right to represent subtracting -3, or adding 3. The arrow ends at 15 showing the difference.
So, 12 – (-3) = 15

Find the volume of the prism.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 118
Answer :
Edge of a cube = 4 ft
Volume of cube = a × a × a = 4 × 4 × 4 = 12ft^3

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 119
Answer :
Width of cuboid = 3m
Height of cuboid = 3m
Length of cuboid = 5m
Volume of cuboid = length × width × height = 5 × 3 × 3 = 45 m^3

Order the values from least to greatest.

Question 7.
6, | 3 |, | -4 |, 1, -2
Answer :
The absolute values are  | 3 | = 3 and | -4 | = 4
6, 3, 4, 1, – 2
-2, 1, 3, 4, 6 order from least to greatest
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 8.
| 4.5 |, -3.6, 2, | -1.8 |, 1.2
Answer :
| 4.5 | = 4.5 and  | -1.8 | = 1.8
4.5 , -3.6, 2, 1.8, 1.2
-3.6 < 1.2< 1.8 < 2 < 4.5 order from least to greatest

Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Choosea unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on the number line. Write an expression involving subtraction that is being modeled. Then find the difference. (See Exploration 1, p. 29.)

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 120
Answer :
\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-9
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to \(\frac{3}{4}\) represent \(\frac{3}{4}\). Then, Draw an arrow \(\frac{1}{4}\) units to the left to represent subtracting –\(\frac{1}{4}\), or adding –\(\frac{1}{4}\). The arrow ends at \(\frac{1}{2}\) showing the difference.
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 121
Answer :
-1 – (-\(\frac{3}{4}\)) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-10
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to -1 represent -1. Then, Draw an arrow -1 units to the right to represent subtracting –\(\frac{5}{4}\), or adding \(\frac{5}{4}\). The arrow ends at \(\frac{1}{4}\) showing the difference.
So, -1 – (-\(\frac{3}{4}\)) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)

SUBTRACTING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the difference. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 122
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 123
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-12

Question 13.
-1 – 2.5
Answer :
– 1 + (- 2.5)       add opposite of 2.5
= – 3.5               add

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 124
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-14

Question 15.
5.5 – 8.1
Answer :
5.5 – 8.1 = 5.5 + (-8.1 )                Add opposite of 8.1
= – 2.6                           Add

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 124.1
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-16

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 125
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-17

Question 18.
-4.62 – 3.51
Answer :
-4.62 – 3.51
= -4.62 + (-3.51)  Add opposite of 3.51
= |-4.62 | + |-3.51 |
=4.62 + 3.51
= -8.13
Both the values are negative so use negative sign in the difference
So, -4.62 – 3.51 = -8.13

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 126

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-19

Question 20.
-7.34 – (-5.51)
Answer :
Answer :
-7.34 – (-5.51)
= -7.34 + 5.51
= | 7.34| – |5.51 |
=7.34 – 5.51
= – 1.83
| -7.34|  > |5.51 | use negative sign to the difference
So, -7.34 – (-5.51) = – 1.83

Question 21.
6.673 – (-8.29)
Answer :
6.673 – (-8.29)
= 6.673 + 8.29
=14.963

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 127
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-22Question 23.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Question 23.
Your friend finds the difference. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 128

Answer :
No
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-23

OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life situation that can be represented by the subtraction expression modeled on the number line.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 129
Answer :
4.5 – 6 = -1.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-24
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4.5 represent 4.5 . Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the left to represent subtracting 6, or adding -6. The arrow ends at -1.5 showing the difference.
So, 9 + (- 5)  = 4

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 130
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-25
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to –\(\frac{5}{8}\) represent –\(\frac{5}{8}\). Then, Draw an arrow \(\frac{5}{8}\)units to the left to represent subtracting –\(\frac{5}{8}\), or adding \(\frac{5}{8}\). The arrow ends at 0 showing the difference.
So, –\(\frac{5}{8}\)  – ( –\(\frac{5}{8}\) ) = 0

Question 26.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your water bottle is \(\frac{5}{6}\) full. After tennis practice, the bottle is \(\frac{3}{8}\) full. How much of the water did you drink?
Answer :
Amount of water in the bottle = \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Amount of water in the bottle after drinking = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Amount of water drank = \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{20}{24}\) and \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{24}\)
Amount of water drank = \(\frac{20}{24}\) – \(\frac{9}{24}\) = \(\frac{11}{24}\)
Therefore, Amount of water drank = \(\frac{11}{24}\)

Question 27.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You have 2\(\frac{2}{3}\) ounces of sodium chloride. You want to replicate an experiment that uses 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) ounces of sodium chloride. Do you have enough sodium chloride? If not, how much more do you need?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 130.1

Answer :
Amount of sodium chloride with me = 2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
Amount of sodium chloride required for experiment = 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) =\(\frac{11}{4}\)
Amount of sodium chloride more required for experiment = \(\frac{11}{4}\) – \(\frac{8}{3}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{11}{4}\) = \(\frac{33}{12}\) and \(\frac{8}{3}\) =\(\frac{24}{12}\)
Amount of sodium chloride more required for experiment = \(\frac{33}{12}\) – \(\frac{24}{12}\)
= \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Question 28.
REASONING
When is the difference of two decimals an integer? Explain.
Answer :
The difference between 2 decimals is an integer when the portion of each decimal to the right of the decimal point is the same,
Explanation:
example:
8.25 – 7.25 = 1
The decimal position of two numbers is same that is 0.25

USING PROPERTIES
Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you evaluate the expression. Then evaluate the expression.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 131
Answer :
\(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
=  \(\frac{2}{3}\)  ( as \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\) =0, zero pair)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 132
Answer :
\(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) – ( – \(\frac{3}{5}\) )
= \(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) + \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Add \(\frac{2}{5}\) and \(\frac{3}{5}\) we get,
= \(\frac{5}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{5}\) = \(\frac{10}{10}\)
= \(\frac{10}{10}\)  – \(\frac{7}{10}\)
= \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Therefore \(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) – ( – \(\frac{3}{5}\) ) = \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 31.
8.5 + 3.4 – 6.5 – (-1.6)
Answer :
8.5 + 3.4 – 6.5 – (-1.6)
= 8.5 + 3.4 – 6.5 + 1.6
= 8.5 + 3.4 + 1.6 – 6.5
= 8.5 + 5.0 – 6.5   { as (3.4 + 1.6 = 5.0)}
= 13.5 – 6.5   { as 8.5 + 5.0 =13.5)}
= 7.0

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 133
Answer :
-1\(\frac{3}{4}\) – (-8\(\frac{1}{3}\)) – ( -4\(\frac{1}{4}\))
= –\(\frac{7}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\) + \(\frac{17}{4}\)
=\(\frac{17}{4}\) –\(\frac{7}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\)
= \(\frac{10}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\)
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{2}\) = \(\frac{15}{6}\) and  \(\frac{25}{3}\) = \(\frac{50}{6}\)
= \(\frac{15}{6}\) + \(\frac{50}{6}\)
= \(\frac{65}{6}\)
-1\(\frac{3}{4}\) – (-8\(\frac{1}{3}\)) – ( -4\(\frac{1}{4}\)) = \(\frac{65}{6}\)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 33.
2.1 + (5.8 – 4.1)
Answer :
2.1 + (5.8 – 4.1)
= 2.1 + 1.7
= 3.8

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 134
Answer :
2\(\frac{3}{8}\) – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) + 3\(\frac{1}{8}\) – (-\(\frac{1}{2}\) )
= \(\frac{19}{8}\) – \(\frac{9}{2}\) + \(\frac{25}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{19}{8}\) +\(\frac{25}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) – \(\frac{9}{2}\)
= \(\frac{44}{8}\) – \(\frac{8}{2}\)
= \(\frac{11}{2}\) – \(\frac{8}{2}\)
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)
2\(\frac{3}{8}\) – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) + 3\(\frac{1}{8}\) – (-\(\frac{1}{2}\) ) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

FINDING DISTANCE ON A NUMBER LINE
Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.

Question 35.
2.7 and 5.9
Answer :
The distance between 2.7 and 5.9 on a number line = | 2.7 – 5.9| = |-3.2 | = 3.2
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 135
Answer :
The distance between –\(\frac{7}{9}\) and –\(\frac{2}{9}\) on a number line = | –\(\frac{7}{9}\) – (-\(\frac{2}{9}\) )| = | –\(\frac{7}{9}\) + \(\frac{2}{9}\) | =| –\(\frac{5}{9}\) |= \(\frac{5}{9}\)
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 37.
-2.2 and 8.4
Answer :
The distance between -2.2 and 8.4 on a number line = | -2.2 – 8.4| = | -10.6 | = 10.6
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 136
Answer :
The distance between \(\frac{3}{4}\)and \(\frac{1}{8}\) on a number line = | \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) |
Rewrite \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= | \(\frac{3}{8}\) +\(\frac{1}{8}\) | =| \(\frac{4}{8}\) |= 2
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 39.
-1.85 and 7.36
Answer :
The distance between -1.85 and 7.36 on a number line = | – 1.85 – 7.36| = | – 9.21 |= 9.21
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 137
Answer :
-3\(\frac{2}{3}\)= – \(\frac{11}{3}\) =-3.6
-7 and -3.6
The distance between -7 and -3.6 on a number line = | -7 – (-3.6)| = | -7 + 3.6 | =| -3.4 |= 3.4
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 41.
2.491 and -3.065

Answer :
The distance between 2.491 and -3.065 on a number line = | 2.491 – (-3.065)| = | 2.491 + 3.065 | =|5.556  |= 5.556
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 138
Answer :
-2\(\frac{1}{2}\) =-\(\frac{5}{2}\) = – \(\frac{10}{4}\)
-5\(\frac{3}{4}\) = –\(\frac{23}{4}\)
The distance between – \(\frac{10}{4}\)  and –\(\frac{23}{4}\) a number line = | – \(\frac{10}{4}\)  – (-\(\frac{23}{4}\) )| = | – \(\frac{10}{4}\) + \(\frac{23}{4}\)  | = | – \(\frac{13}{4}\) |=  \(\frac{13}{4}\)
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 139
Answer :
-1\(\frac{1}{3}\) = –\(\frac{4}{3}\) = –\(\frac{16}{12}\)
12\(\frac{7}{12}\) = \(\frac{151}{12}\)
The distance between –\(\frac{16}{12}\) and \(\frac{151}{12}\)  on a number line = | –\(\frac{16}{12}\) – \(\frac{151}{12}\) |=| –\(\frac{167}{12}\) |= \(\frac{167}{12}\)=13.91
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 44.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The number line shows the temperatures at 2:00 A.M. and 2:00 P.M. in the Gobi Desert. Find and interpret the distance between the points.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 140
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 141
Answer :
Temperature at 2 A.M inthe Gobi Desert= -13 °F
Temperature at 2 P.M in the Gobi Desert = 38 °F
Distance between the two points as per above figure = -13 °F – (-38 °F) = |-13 + 38 | = |25| = 25
Explanation
The Distance between two numbers is the absolute values of the difference of the numbers .

Question 45.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A new road that connects Uniontown to Springville is 4\(\frac{1}{3}\) miles long. What is the change in distance when using the new road instead of the dirt roads?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 142
Answer :
Distance between Springville to union town using L-shaped road = 2\(\frac{3}{8}\) + 3\(\frac{5}{6}\)
= \(\frac{19}{8}\) + \(\frac{23}{6}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{19}{8}\) = \(\frac{57}{24}\) and  \(\frac{23}{6}\) = \(\frac{92}{24}\)
= \(\frac{57}{24}\) + \(\frac{92}{24}\)
= \(\frac{149}{24}\)
Change in distance from old to new road = \(\frac{149}{24}\) – 4\(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{149}{24}\) – \(\frac{13}{3}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{13}{3}\) = \(\frac{104}{24}\)
= \(\frac{149}{24}\) – \(\frac{104}{24}\)
= \(\frac{45}{24}\)
= \(\frac{15}{8}\)
Change in distance from old to new road = \(\frac{15}{8}\).

FINDING DISTANCE IN A COORDINATE PLANE
Find the distance between the points in a coordinate plane.

Question 46.
(-4, 7.8), (-4, -3.5)
Answer :
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2
d=√(-4−(-4))2+(-3.5−7.8)2
d=√(-4+4)-2+(-11.3)2
d=√(-11.3)2
d = 11.3
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 47.
(-2.63, 7), (1.85, 7)
Answer :
d=√(1.85−(-2.63))2+(7−7)2
d=√(1.85+2.63)2+(0)2
d=√(4.48)2
d=4.48
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 143
Answer :
–\(\frac{1}{2}\) = -0.5
\(\frac{5}{8}\) = 0.625
d=√(0.625−(-0.5))2+(-1−(-1))2
d=√(0.625+0.5)2+(-1+1)2
d=√(1.125)2+(0)2
d=1.125
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 144
Answer :
2\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{7}{3}\) = 2.3
-5\(\frac{2}{9}\) = –\(\frac{47}{9}\) = -5.2
d=√(6−6)2 + (-5.2−2.3)2
d=√(0)2 + (-7.5)2
d=7.5
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 50.
(-6.2, 1.4), (8.9, 1.4)
Answer :
d=√(8.9−(-6.2))2+(1.4−1.4)2
d=√(8.9+6.2)2+(0)2
d=√(15.1)2
d=15.1
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 146
Answer :
7\(\frac{1}{7}\) = \(\frac{50}{7}\)
1\(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{9}{5}\)=\(\frac{18}{10}\)
–\(\frac{9}{10}\)
d=√(\(\frac{50}{7}\)−\(\frac{50}{7}\))2+(-\(\frac{9}{10}\)−\(\frac{18}{10}\))2
d=√(0)2+(-\(\frac{27}{10}\))2
d = \(\frac{27}{10}\)
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 52.
DIG DEEPER!
The figure shows the elevations of a submarine.
a. Find the vertical distance traveled by the submarine.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 146.1
b. Find the mean hourly vertical distance traveled by the submarine.
Answer a :
Elevation of submarine 3 hours ago = -725.6 ft
Elevation of submarine now = -314.9 ft
Vertical Distance traveled by submarine =  |-725.6 – (-314.9) | = |-725.6 + 314.9 |=|-410.7 | = 410.7
Answer b :
Vertical distance traveled in 3 hours = 410.7
Hourly vertical distance traveled by the submarine = 410.7 ÷ 3 = 136.9 feets

Question 53.
LOGIC
The bar graph shows how each month’s rainfall compares to the historical average.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 147
a. What is the difference in rainfall of the wettest month and the driest month?
Answer :
Rainfall of the wettest month = july = 2.36
Rainfall of the driest month =April = -1.67
The difference in rainfall of the wettest month and the driest month = 2.36 – (-1.67) = 2.36 +1.67 = 4.03

b. What do you know about the total amount of rainfall for the year?
Answer :
Rainfall in the Jan month = -0.45
Rainfall in the Feb month = -0.88
Rainfall in the Mar month = 0.94
Rainfall in the Apr month =-1.67
Rainfall in the May month =-0.96
Rainfall in the Jun month = 0.83
Rainfall in the Jul month = 2.36
Rainfall in the Aug month = 1.39
Rainfall in the Sep month = 0.35
Rainfall in the Oct month = -1.35
Rainfall in the Nov month = -0.90
Rainfall in the Dec month = -1.39
The total amount of rainfall for the year = Rainfall in the (Jan + Feb +mar + APR + may +jun +Jul +Aug +Sep +Oct +Nov +DEC ) months
= -0.45 + (-0.88) +0.94 + (-1.67) + (0.96) + 0.83 + 2.36 + 1.39 +0.35 +(-1.35)+ (-0.9) + (-1.39)
= 4.22

Question 54.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two different pairs of negative decimals, x and y that make the statement x – y = 0.6 true.
Answer :
Take x = -1 and y = -1.6
Explanation:
Take x = -1 and y = -1.6
x – y = -1 – (-1.6) = -1 +1.6 = 0.6
Then the above statement is proved .

REASONING
Tell whether the difference of the two numbers is always, sometimes, or never positive. Explain your reasoning.

Question 55.
two negative fractions
Answer :
Sometimes
Explanation :
Take x =- \(\frac{1}{3}\) and y =- \(\frac{2}{3}\)
x – y = – \(\frac{1}{3}\) – ( – \(\frac{2}{3}\)) = – \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
– \(\frac{1}{3}\) – ( – \(\frac{2}{3}\)) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 56.
a positive decimal and a negative decimals
Answer :
Always
Because the operation – (-) becomes positive so adding of two numbers take place so difference will be the positive number .
Answer :
Take x = 5.6 and y = – 2.4
x – y =5.6 – ( -2.4) = 5.6 + 2.4 =8.0

Question 57.
STRUCTURE
Fill in the blanks to complete the decimals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 148
Answer :
5.54 – 9.51 = -3.61

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
A land surveyor uses a coordinate plane to draw a map of a park, where each unit represents 1 mile. The park is in the shape of a parallelogram with vertices (-2.5, 1.5), (-1.5, -2.25), (2.75, -2.25), and (1.75, 1.5). Find the area of the park.
Understand the problem.
You know the vertices of the parallelogram-shaped parkand that each unit represents 1 mile. You are asked to find the area of the park.
Make a plan.
Use a coordinate plane to draw a map of the park. Then find the height and base length of the park. Find the area by using the formula for the area of a parallelogram.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Connecting-Concepts-Question-1

Base of the parallelogram = 4.25
Height of the parallelogram = 3.75
Area of the parallelogram = base × height  = 4.25 × 3.75 = 15.9375 sq.units

Question 2.
The diagram shows the height requirement for driving a go-cart. You are 5\(\frac{1}{4}\) feet tall. Write and solve an inequality to represent how much taller you must be to drive a go-cart.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 149
Answer :
My Height = 5\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Height Required for driving a go-cart = 5\(\frac{1}{3}\)
Height more required for me for driving = 5\(\frac{1}{3}\) – 5\(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{16}{3}\) – \(\frac{21}{4}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{16}{3}\) =\(\frac{64}{12}\) and \(\frac{21}{4}\) = \(\frac{63}{12}\)
= \(\frac{64}{12}\) – \(\frac{63}{12}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Height more required for me for driving == \(\frac{1}{12}\)
H ≥ \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Performance Task

Melting Matters

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Freezing Solid.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 150

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 151

Graphic Organizers

You can use a Definition and Example Chart to organize information about a concept. Here is an example of a Definition and Example Chart for the vocabulary term absolute value.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 152

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. integers
  2. rational numbers
  3. adding integers
  4. Additive Inverse Property
  5. adding rational numbers
  6. subtracting integers
  7. subtracting rational numbers

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 153
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-7

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 154

1.1 Rational Numbers (pp. 3-8)

Find the absolute value.

Question 1.
| 3 |
Answer :
Absolute value of 3 is 3
| 3 | = 3
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 2.
| -9 |
Answer :
Absolute value of -9 is 9
| -9 | = 9
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 155
Answer :
Absolute value of Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 155is \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 4.
| -5.2 |
Answer :
| -5.2 | = 5.2
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 156
Answer :
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 156= \(\frac{6}{7}\)

Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 6.
| 4.15 |
Answer :
| 4.15 | = 4.15

Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 157
Answer :
|-2| = 2
2 > -2
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 158
Answer :
|-\(\frac{1}{3}\)| = \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 0.33
|-\(\frac{5}{6}\)| =\(\frac{5}{6}\) = 0.3
0.33 > 0.3
|-\(\frac{1}{3}\)| > |-\(\frac{5}{6}\)|
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 159
Answer :
|1.7| = 1.7
-1.7   = -1.7
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 10.
Order Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 160 and −2 from least to greatest.
Answer :
|2.25| = 2.25
|-1.5| = 1.5
|2\(\frac{1}{2}\)| = |\(\frac{5}{2}\)| =\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2.5
1\(\frac{1}{4}\)=\(\frac{5}{4}\) = 1.25
2.25, 1.5, 1.25, 2.5 and – 2
-2 < 1.25 < 1.5 < 2.25 < 2.5
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 11.
Your friend is in Death Valley, California, at an elevation of −282 feet. You are near the Mississippi River in Illinois at an elevation of 279 feet. Who is closer to sea level?
Answer :
My friend is at Death Valley, California, at an elevation = −282 feet. = | -282 | =282 feet
I am at the Mississippi River in Illinois at an elevation = 279 feet. = | 279 |= 279 feet
Who is closer to sea level = 0 is 279 feet that means 279 > 282 feet
I am closer to sea level .

Question 12.
Give values for a and b so that a < b and | a | > | b |.
Answer :
Take a = -5 and b = 2
– 5 < 2
| a | = | -5 | = 5 and  | b | = | 2 | = 2
| 5 | > | 2 |
Hence proved a < b and | a | > | b |

Question 13.
The map shows the longitudes (in degrees) for Salvador, Brazil, and Nairobi, Kenya.Which city is closer to the Prime Meridian?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 160.1
Answer :
Longitudes of Salvador = -38.5108 (in degrees)
Distance of Longitudes of Salvador from prime meridian = | -38.5108| = 38.5108
Longitudes of Nairobi = 36.8167 (in degrees) = 36.8167
Distance of Longitudes of Nairobi from prime meridian = | 36.8167 | = 36.8167
Which is closer to prime meridian = | -38.5108| > | 36.8167 |
So, Longitudes of Nairobi from prime meridian is closer to prime meridian .

1.2 Adding Integers (pp. 9-16)

Question 14.
Write an addition expression represented by the number line. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 189

Find the sum. Use a number line to verify your answer.
Answer :
– 3 + 4 = 1
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding +2.The arrow ends at 1, showing the sum.
So,- 3 + 4 = 1

Question 15.
-16 + (-11)
Answer :
-16 + (-11)
=|-16 | +| -11 |
= 16 + 11
= -27
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 16.
-15 + 5
Answer :
-15 + 5
= |-15 | – |5 |
= 15 – 5
= -10  as |-15 | > |5 | so use negative sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 17.
100 + (-75)
Answer :
100 – 75
= |100 | – |-75 |
= 100 – 75
= 25  as |100 | > |-75 | so use positive sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 18.
-32 + (-2)
Answer :
-32 + (-2)
=|-32 | +| -2 |
= 32 + 2
= -34   (both the numbers are negative so use negative symbol in the sum)
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Answer :
-16 + (-11)
=|-16 | +| -11 |
= 16 + 11
= -27
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 19.
-2 + (-7) + 15
Answer :
-2 + (-7) + 15
=|-2 | +| -7 | + 15
= -9 + 15
= 6
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 20.
9 + (-14) + 3
= 9 + 3 +(-14)
=12 +(-14)
= |12 | – |-14 |
= 12 – 14
= 2  as |-14 | > |12 | so use negative sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 21.
During the first play of a football game, you lose 3 yards. You gain 7 yards during the second play. What is your total gain of yards for these two plays?
Answer :
First play of a foot ball game i lose 3 yards = -3 yards
Second play of a foot ball i gain 7 yards = + 7 yards
Total gain of yards for these two plays = -3 + 7 = 4

Question 22.
Write an addition expression using integers that equals -2. Use a number line to justify your answer.
Answer :
Take x = 3 and y = – 5
x + y
=3 +(-5)
= |3 | – |-5 |
= 3 – 5
= -2  as |-5 | > |3 | so use negative sign.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Adding-Integers-Question-22
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .
Draw an arrow from 0 to 3 to represent +3. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing adding -5.

Question 23.
Describe a real-life situation that uses the sum of the integers -8 and 12.
Answer :
During the first play of a basketball game, you lose 8 yards. You gain 12 yards during the second play. What is your total loss of yards for these two plays.
First play of a Basketball ball game i lose 8 yards = -8 yards
Second play of a basket ball i gain 12 yards = + 12 yards
Total loss of yards for these two plays = 8 + ( -12 ) = -4

1.3 Adding Rational Numbers (pp. 17–22)

Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 162
Answer :
\(\frac{9}{10}\) +(-\(\frac{4}{5}\))
Rewrite –\(\frac{4}{5}\) = –\(\frac{8}{10}\)
= |\(\frac{9}{10}\) | – |-\(\frac{8}{10}\) |
=  \(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{8}{10}\)
= 1  as |\(\frac{9}{10}\) | > |-\(\frac{4}{5}\) | so use positive sign.
\(\frac{9}{10}\) +(-\(\frac{4}{5}\)) = 1
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 163
Answer :
-4\(\frac{5}{9}\) = –\(\frac{41}{9}\)
=-\(\frac{41}{9}\)+\(\frac{8}{9}\)
=|-\(\frac{41}{9}\) | – |\(\frac{8}{9}\)|
=\(\frac{41}{9}\) –\(\frac{8}{9}\)
= – \(\frac{33}{9}\)
–\(\frac{41}{9}\)+\(\frac{8}{9}\)= = – \(\frac{33}{9}\)
|-\(\frac{41}{9}\) | > |\(\frac{8}{9}\)| so, use negative sign
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 26.
-1.6 + (-2.4)
Answer :
-1.6 + (-2.4)
=|-1.6 | +| -2.4 |
= 1.6 + 2.4
= -4.0
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 27.
Find the sum of Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 190. Explain each step.
Answer :
– 4 + 6 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + (-2.7)
Convert the fraction form into decimal form
6 \(\frac{2}{5}\)= \(\frac{32}{5}\) =6.4
– 4 + 6.4 + (-2.7)
add negative numbers , we get,
-4 – 2.7 + 6.4
= -6.7 +6.4
= |-6.7 | – |6.4 |
= 6.7 – 6.4
= -0.3  as |-6.7 | > |6.4 | so use negative sign.
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 28.
You open a new bank account. The table shows the activity of your account for the first month. Positive numbers represent deposits and negative numbers represent withdrawals. What is your balance (in dollars) in the account at the end of the first month?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 191
Answer :
Deposit on 3/5 = 100
Withdrawal on 3/12 = 12.25
Deposit on 3/16 = 25.82
Deposit on 3/21 = 14 .95
Withdrawal on 3/ 29 = 18.56
Total Balance in the end of the month = Total deposits – Total withdrawals = ( 100 + 25.82 + 14.95 ) -( 12.25 + 18.56 ) = 140.77 – 30.81 = 109.96

1.4 Subtracting Integers (pp. 23–28)

Find the difference. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 29.
8 – 18
Answer :
8 – 18 = -10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-29
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 8 to represent 8. Then draw an arrow 18 units to the left representing subtract 18 or adding -18.
So, 8 – 18 = -10

Question 30.
-16 – (-5)
Answer :
-16 – (-5) = -16 +5 = -11
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-30

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to -16 to represent -16. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the right representing subtract -5 or adding +5.
So, -16 – (-5) = -11

Question 31.
-18 – 7
Answer :
-18 – 7 = -25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-31
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -18 to represent -18. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing subtracting 7 or,adding -7.
The arrow ends at -25 showing the difference.

So,-18 – 7 = – 25

Question 32.
-12 – (-27)
Answer :
-12 – (-27) =-12 + 27 = 15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-32

Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -12 to represent -12. Then draw an arrow 27 units to the right representing subtracting -27 or,adding 27.
The arrow ends at 15 showing the difference.
So, -12 – (-27) = 15

Question 33.
Your score on a game show is -300. You answer the final question incorrectly, so you lose 400 points. What is your final score?
Answer :
My score on game show = -300
Final question score = -400
Total score = – 300 + (-400 ) = -300 – 400 = -700

Question 34.
Oxygen has a boiling point of -183°C and a melting point of -219°C. What is the temperature difference of the melting point and the boiling point?
Answer :
Boiling point = -183°C
Melting point = -219°C
Temperature difference of the melting point and the boiling point = – 183 – (-219) = – 183 + 219 = 36 °C

Question 35.
In one month, you earn $16 for mowing the lawn, $15 for baby sitting, and $20 for allowance. You spend $12 at the movie theater. How much more money do you need to buy a $45 video game?
Answer :
Money earned in mowing the lawn =$16
Money earned for baby sitting = $15
Money earned for allowance = $20
Money spend on Movie Theater = $12
Total Money = Total Money earned – Money spend = (16+15+20) – (12 ) = 51 – 12 = 39
Cost price of video game = $45
More money required to buy video game = cost price of video game – Total Money with me = 45 – 39 = 6$

Question 36.
Write a subtraction expression using integers that equals -6.
Answer :
x – y = -6
Take x = -3 and y =3
x – y =-3 – 3 = -6

Question 37.
Write two negative integers whose difference is positive.
Answer :
Take x= -5 and y = -10
x – y = – 5 – (-10) = – 5 + 10 = 5
difference is positive

1.5 Subtracting Rational Numbers (pp. 29–36)

Find the difference. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 192
Answer :
–\(\frac{5}{12}\) – \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{25}{60}\) and \(\frac{3}{10}\)= \(\frac{18}{60}\)
= –\(\frac{25}{60}\) – \(\frac{18}{60}\)
= –\(\frac{43}{60}\) (as both have same signs)

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 193
Answer :
3\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
= \(\frac{15}{4}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{15}{4}\)  = \(\frac{30}{8}\)
= \(\frac{30}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Add opposite of  – \(\frac{30}{8}\)
= \(\frac{30}{8}\) + (- \(\frac{7}{8}\))
Add
= \(\frac{23}{8}\)
3\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\) = \(\frac{23}{8}\) .

Question 40.
3.8 – (-7.45)
Answer :
3.8 – (-7.45)
Add opposite of -7.45
3.8 + 7.45 = 11.25

Question 41.
Find the distance between -3.71 and -2.59 on a number line.
Answer :
The distance between -3.71 and -2.59 on a number line = | – 3.71 – (-2.59)| = | – 3.71 + 2.59 | =| -1.12 |= 1.12
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 42.
A turtle is 20\(\frac{5}{6}\) a pond. It dives to a depth of 32\(\frac{1}{4}\) inches. What is the change in the turtle’s position?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 167
Answer :
The turtle is at  = 20\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Turtle drives to a depth = 32\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Change in the turtle’s position = 20\(\frac{5}{6}\) – 32\(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{125}{6}\) – \(\frac{129}{4}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{125}{6}\) = \(\frac{250}{12}\) and \(\frac{129}{4}\) =\(\frac{387}{12}\)
= \(\frac{250}{12}\) – \(\frac{387}{12}\)
= –\(\frac{137}{12}\)
Change in the turtle’s position = –\(\frac{137}{12}\)

Question 43.
The lowest temperature ever recorded on Earth was -89.2°C at Soviet Vostok Station in Antarctica. The highest temperature ever recorded was 56.7°C at Greenland Ranch in California. What is the difference between the highest and lowest recorded temperatures?
Answer :
The lowest temperature ever recorded on Earth = -89.2°C
The highest temperature ever recorded = 56.7°C
The difference between the highest and lowest recorded temperatures = 56.7 – ( -89.2 ) = 56.7 + 89.2 = 145.9°C

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Practice Test

Practice Test

Find the absolute value.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 168
Answer :
|-\(\frac{4}{5}\)| = \(\frac{4}{5}\)
Explanation :
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 2.
| 6.43 |
Answer :
| 6.43 | = 6.43
Explanation :
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 3.
| – 22 |
Answer :
| – 22 | = 22
Explanation :
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 169
Answer :
| – 8 | = 8
4 < 8
Explanation :

Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 170
Answer :
| – 7 | = 7
7 > -12
Explanation :
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers. The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 171
Answer :
| 3 | = 3
-7 < 3
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers. The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Add or subtract. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 7.
-6 + (-11)
Answer :
-6 + (-11)
=|-6 | +| -11 |
= 6 + 11
= -7
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 8.
2 – (-9)
Answer :
2 – (-9)
= 2 + 9    add opposite of -9
= 11         add
2 – (-9) = 11

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 172
Answer :
–\(\frac{4}{9}\)+ (- \(\frac{23}{18}\))
Rewrite –\(\frac{4}{9}\) = –\(\frac{8}{18}\)
= |-\(\frac{8}{18}\) | + |- \(\frac{23}{18}\) |
= \(\frac{8}{18}\) + \(\frac{23}{18}\)
= –\(\frac{31}{18}\)  as both signs are negative so use negative sign in the difference
–\(\frac{4}{9}\)+ (- \(\frac{23}{18}\)) = –\(\frac{31}{18}\)
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 173
Answer :
\(\frac{17}{12}\) – (- \(\frac{1}{8}\) )
Rewrite –\(\frac{17}{12}\)  = –\(\frac{34}{24}\) and –\(\frac{1}{8}\) =- \(\frac{3}{24}\)
= \(\frac{34}{24}\) +  \(\frac{3}{24}\)
= \(\frac{31}{24}\)  as | \(\frac{17}{12}\) | > | \(\frac{1}{8}\) | so use positive sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 11.
9.2 + (-2.8)
Answer :
9.2 + (-2.8)           add opposite of 2.8
= 9.2 – 2.8
= 6.4

Question 12.
2.86 – 12.1
Answer :
2.86 + (-12.1)          add opposite of 12.1
= 9.24

Question 13.
Write an addition expression and write a subtraction expression represented by the number line. Then evaluate the expressions.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 174
Answer :
3 + (-4) = -1
Explanation :
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 3 to represent 3. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the left representing adding -4.
So, 3 + (-4) = -1

Question 14.
The table shows your scores, relative to par, for nine holes of golf. What is your total score for the nine holes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 175
Answer :
Total score of nine holes = score of ( 1st +2nd +3rd + 4th + 5th + 6th + 7th + 8th + 9 th ) holes
= 1 + (-2) + (-1) + 0 + (-1) + 3 + (-1) + (-3) + 1 = -3

Question 15.
The elevation of a fish is 27 feet. The fish descends 32 feet, and then rises 14 feet. What is its new elevation?
Answer :
Elevation of a fish = 27 feet
Fish descends = -32 feet
Fish Rises = 14 feet.
New elevation = 27 – 32 + 14 = 41 – 32 = 9 feet

Question 16.
The table shows the rainfall (in inches) for three months compared to the yearly average. Is the total rainfall for the three-month period greater than or less than the yearly average? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 176
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 177
Answer :
Rainfall in October = -0.86
Rainfall in November = 2.56
Rainfall in December = -1.24
Total rainfall for the three-month period = rainfall in October +rainfall in November + rainfall in December = -0.86+2.56+ (-1.24) = 0.86+2.56-1.24 = 2.18
Average Rainfall of Yearly = Total rainfall for the three-month period ÷ 3 months = 2.18 ÷ 3 = 0.726
2.18 >0.726
The total rainfall for the three-month period greater than the yearly average .

Question 17.
Bank Account A has $750.92, and Bank Account B has $675.44. Account A changes by –$216.38, and Account B changes by – $168.49. Which account has the greater balance? Explain.
Answer :
Final balance of A > Final balance of B = $534.54 > $534.54
Explanation :
Bank Account of A = $750.92
Account A changes = -$216.83
Final balance of A= $750.92 – $216.83 = $534.54
Bank Account of B = $675.44
Account A changes = -$168.49
Final balance of B = $675.44  – $168.49 = $506.45
Therefore Final balance of A > Final balance of B = $534.54 > $534.54

Question 18.
On January 1, you recorded the lowest temperature as 23°F and the highest temperature as 6°C. A formula for converting from degrees Fahrenheit F to degrees Celsius C is Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 194 What is the temperature range (in degrees Celsius) for January 1?
Answer :
Lowest temperature = 23°F
Highest temperature = 6°C.
Converting lowest temperature into Celsius C  = \(\frac{5}{9}\) 23°F – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
= \(\frac{115}{9}\) °F – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
= – \(\frac{45}{9}\) = -5
Lowest temperature = 23°F = -5°C

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
A football team gains 2 yards on the first play, loses 5 yards on the second play, loses 3 yards on the third play, and gains 4 yards on the fourth play. What is the team’s total gain or loss?
A. a gain of 14 yards
B. a gain of 2 yards
C. a loss of 2 yards
D. a loss of 14 yards

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 178
Answer :
Option c – a loss of 2 yards
Explanation :
Gain on First play = 2 yards
Loss on Second play = -5 yards
Loss on third play = -3 yards
Gain on fourth play = 4
Total Gain = 2 + 4 = 6
Total Loss  = -5 + (-3) = – 8
Total loss > total gain
|-8| > |6|
So overall there is a loss
Team Loss = 6 + (- 8 ) = – 2 loss

Question 2.
Which expression is not equal to 0?
F. 5 – 5
G. -7 + 7
H. 6 – (-6)
I. -8 – (-8)
Answer :
Option F = 5 – 5 = 0
Option G= -7 + 7 = 0
Option H = -6 – (-6) = 6 + 6 = 12
Option I = -8 – (-8) = -8 + 8 = 0
Explanation :
The sum of a number and its addictive inverse , or opposite , is 0 .
Example  a + (-a) = 0

Question 3.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 179
A. -4.5
B. -0.5
C. 0.5
D. 4.5
Answer :
Option C
Explanation :
|-2 – (-2.5 )| = |-2 + 2.5|= |0.5|  = 0.5

Question 4.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 179.1
17 – (-8)
Answer :
17 – (-8) = 17 + 8 = 25

Question 5.
What is the distance between the two numbers on the number line?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 180
Answer :
Option H = 1\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Rewrite –\(\frac{7}{4}\)  =-\(\frac{14}{8}\)
The distance between –\(\frac{7}{4}\)  and \(\frac{3}{8}\)  on a number line = | –\(\frac{14}{8}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\) | =| –\(\frac{11}{8}\)  |= 1\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 6.
What is the value of the expression when a = 8, b = 3, and c = 6?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 181
A. -65
B. -17
C. 17
D. 65
Answer :
Option C
Explanation :
Take a = 8, b = 3, and c = 6
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 181= | 8×8 – 2(8)(6) + 5(3) | = | 64 – 96 + 15| =| 79 – 96 | = | -17 | = 17

Question 7.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 182
Answer :
-9.74 + (- 2.23)
=|-9.74 | +| -2.23 |
= 9.74 + 2.23
= -11.97   (both the numbers are negative so use negative symbol in the sum)
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 8.
Four friends are playing a game using the spinner shown. Each friend starts with a score of 0 and then spins four times. When you spin blue, you add the number to your score. When you spin red, you subtract the number from your score. The highest score after four spins wins. Each friend’s spins are shown. Which spins belong to the winner?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 183
F. 6, 7, 7, 6
G. -4, -4, 7, -5
H. 6, -5, -4, 7
I. -5, 6, -5, 6
Answer :
F. 6+7-7-6 = 0
G. -4+(-4)+ 7-(-5) = 8-7+5 = 4
H. 6+(-5)- (-4) +7= 6 -5+4+7 =12
I. -5-6+ (-5)- 6 = -22

Question 9.
What number belongs in the box to make the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 184
Answer :
Option A = \(\frac{3}{17}\)
Explanation :
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{17}{3}\)
= \(\frac{7}{2}\) × \(\frac{3}{17}\)
The missing term is \(\frac{3}{17}\)

Question 10.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 185
F. -346
G. 0.59
H. 5.9
I. 59
Answer :
Option I
Explanation :
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 185= 2.95 ÷ 0.05 = 295 ÷ 5 = 59

Question 11.
You leave school and walk 1.237 miles west. Your friend leaves school and walks 0.56 mile east. How far apart are you and your friend?
A. 0.677 mile
B. 0.69272 mile
C. 1.293 miles
D. 1.797 miles
Answer :
Distance between me and my friend = | 1.237 – 0.56 | = 0.677
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 12.
Which property does the equation represent?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 185.1
F. Commutative Property of Addition
G. Associative Property of Addition
H. Additive Inverse Property
I. Addition Property of Zero
Answer :
Option G. -Associative Property of Addition
Explanation:
Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 13.
The values of which two points have the greatest sum?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 186
A. R and S
B. R and U
C. S and T
D. T and U
Answer :
Option B. – R and U is having greatest sum
R = -2.9
S = -0.3
T = 0.6
U =1.1
A. R and S = -2.9 + (-0.3) = -3.2
B. R and U = -2.9 + 1.1 = 4.0
C. S and T = -0.3 +0.6 = 0.3
D. T and U = 0.6 + 1.1 = 1.7

Question 14.
Consider the number line shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 187
Part A
Use the number line to explain how to add -2 and -3.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Cumulative-Practice-Question-14-A
-2 + (-3) = -2 – 3 = -5
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing subtract 3 or adding -3.The arrows end at -5 showing the sum .
So, -2 + (-3) = -5
Part B
Use the number line to explain how to subtract 5 from 2.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Cumulative-Practice-Question-14-B
2 – 5 = -3
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 2 to represent 2. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing subtract 5 or adding -5. The arrow ending at-3 showing the difference .
So, 2 – 5 = -3

Question 15.
Which expression represents a negative value?
F. 2 – | -7 + 3 |
G. | -12 + 9 |
H. | 5 | + | 11 |
I. | 8 – 14 |
Answer :
Option F = -2
Explanation:
F. 2 – | -7 + 3 | = 2 – 4 = – 2
G. | -12 + 9 | = | -3| = 3
H. | 5 | + | 11 | = 5 + 11 = 16
I. | 8 – 14 | = | -6 | = 6

Final Verdict:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers helps you in preparing the time table. With the help of the above given material you can know your mistakes and resolve your mistakes. Stay tuned to bigideasmathanswers.com to get the problems and solutions. We wish all the candidates best of luck for their preparation. Stay tuned to our site and get all the updates.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Enhance your skills with the help of Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20. The mathematics of the elementary and middle school curriculum is not trivial. Starting from infancy and continuing throughout the preschool period, they develop a basic skills, concepts, and misconceptions about numbers and mathematics. Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 from here.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Test yourself by solving the problems from Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20. Make maths as your favorite subject by learning the simple tricks from Bigideas Math Answers Grade K Ch 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20. Tap the below links to learn the chapter according to the list of the topics.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Model and Count 20

Lesson: 2 Count and Write 20

Lesson: 3 Count to Find How Many

Lesson: 4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Lesson: 5 Order Numbers to 20

Lesson: 6 Compare Numbers to 20

Chapter: 9 – Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Vocabulary

Directions:
Count the fruit in each group. Write each number. Is the number of apples equal to the number of bananas? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 v 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-

Vocabulary Cards
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 v 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 v 3

Lesson 9.1 Model and Count 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place 20 linking cubes on the carpet. Slide the cubes to the ten frames.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.1 Model and Count 20

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice3


Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.2

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.5

Lesson 9.2 Count and Write 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Use linking cubes to show how many ants are in the story Ants at the Picnic. Write how many ants are in the story.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count the grasshoppers. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow...

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the animals in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life-

Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.2

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the insects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.5

Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many

Explore and Grow

Directions:
You have 14 crayons in your box. Your friend has 11 crayons in his box. Use linking cubes to show the crayons in each box.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many..

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the group that has the given number of objects.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle any group that has the given number of objects.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
You have 20 coins in your piggy bank. You drop and break your piggy bank. Did you find all of your coins? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Think and Grow- Modeling Real Life

Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the group that has the given number of objects.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.2

Directions:
3 and 4 Circle any group that has the given number of objects. 5 You have 20 toys in your piñata. You break your piñata. Did you find all of your toys? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 9
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.5

Lesson 9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:

  • Place 11 linking cubes on the ten frames. Trace the number.
  • Place another cube on the ten frames. Write the number to tell how many.
  • Place 1 more cube on the ten frames. Write the number to tell how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-9.4-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count. 3 Count forward from 11and stop at 16. Write the numbers you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Apply and Grow-Practice1.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Apply and Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Apply and Grow-Practice3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • Your teacher labels the class cubbies and stops at 7. Count forward to finish labeling the cubbies. Write the numbers you count.
  • Label the first cubby with a number from 1 to 16. Count forward from your number to finish labeling the cubbies. Write the numbers you count.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4

Directions:
1 and 2 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.2

Directions:
3 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count. 4 Count forward from 14 and stop at 19. Write the numbers you count. 5 Your teacher is numbering tags and stops at 12. Count forward to finish numbering the tags. Write the numbers you count. 6 Write a number from 1 to 16 on the first tag. Count forward from your number to finish numbering the tags. Write the numbers you count.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.6

Lesson 9.5 Order Numbers to 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place 11 linking cubes on the ten frames. Place more cubes on the ten frames as you count forward to 20. Trace or write the missing numbers.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5 Order Numbers to 20

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5 Order Numbers to 20-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice.2

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Line up the students for lunch by writing the numbers in order. Circle the student who is first. Underline the student who is last.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5

Directions:
1 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5.1

Directions:
2 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order. 3 Line up the train cars by writing the numbers in order. Circle the train car that is first. Underline the train car that is last.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5.3

Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place linking cubes on the ten frames to show the numbers. Which number is greater than the other number? Which number is less than the other number?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Write each number.
  • Is the number of green dots equal to the number of yellow dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.
  • Compare the numbers of red dots and blue dots. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • Compare the numbers of yellow dots and red dots. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number. 1 Is the number of blue bouncy balls equal to the number of green bouncy balls? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 2 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • You have 14 balls. Your friend has a number of balls that is 1 more than 12. Draw the balls. Write the numbers. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • You have 18 balls. Your friend has a number of balls that is greater than 15 and less than 17. Draw the balls. Write the numbers. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 6
Answer:
I am having more balls than my Friend has in both the cases.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6

Directions:
1 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Write each number. Is the number of blue dots equal to the number of red dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.1

Directions:
2 Count the bouncy balls in each group. Write each number. Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 Count the dots on each domino. Write each number. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. 4 You have 13 balls. Your friend has a number of balls that is 1 more than 19. Draw the balls. Write the numbers. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 10
Answer:
I am having less Balls than my friend has.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.4.

Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Performance Task

Directions: 1 Use the clues to fond the number of fruit in each crate. Write each number.

  • The number of apples is more than 16 but less than 18.
  • The number of bananas is more than 15 but less than 17.
  • The number of oranges is more than 18 but less than 20.
  • The number of pears is 1 more than the number of oranges.
  • The number of pineapples is 1 less than the number of oranges.
  • Write the numbers in order.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Performance Task.1

Number Boss
Directions:
Each player flips a card and places it on the page. Compare the numbers. The player with the greater number takes both cards. If the numbers are equal, flip the cards again. The player with the greater number takes all the cards. Repeat until all cards have been used.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 2

Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Count the paste jars. Color the boxes to show how many. 2 Count the insects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

9.1 Model and Count 20

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Chapter Practice-9.1 Model and Count 20.1

9.2 Count and Write 20

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter Practice-9.2 Count and Write 20.2

Directions:
3 Circle any group that has the given number of objects. 4 You have 20 erasers in your box. You drop your box. Did you find all of your erasers? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 5 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count.

9.3 Count to Find How Many

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter Practice-9.3 Count to Find How Many.3

Question 4.
Big
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter Practice-9.3 Count to Find How Many.4

9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter-9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20-Count to Find How Many.5

Directions:
6 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count. 7 Line up the students for recess by writing the numbers in order. Circle the student who is first. Underline the student who is last.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter-9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20-Count to Find How Many.6

9.5 Order Numbers to 20

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -9.5 Order Numbers to 20.7

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number. 8 Is the number of yellow dots equal to the number of blue dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 9 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 10 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

9.6 Compare Numbers to 20

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.6 Compare Numbers to 20.8

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.6 Compare Numbers to 20.9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.6 Compare Numbers to 20.10

Final Words

We believe that the details provided in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 have brought a smile to your face. The Answer Key for Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 is prepared by the subject experts. Bookmark our website i.e, bigideasmathanswers.com to get the latest information about the Big Ideas Math Grade K Answers Chapters that is from 1 to 13.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11

Improve your performance skills by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Book Grade 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data. You can acquire the free pdf of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data. We have presented the Grade 1 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data in pdf format so that you can practice online or offline mode.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data

Take the given pdf as a reference and score maximum marks in the exams. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Ch 11 Represent and Interpret Data helps you built self-confidence in yourself. Unlimited practice will make you master maths. In this chapter we will discuss the topics like Sort and Organize Data, Read and Interpret Picture Graphs, Bar Graphs, etc. It is necessary to practice with the Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data to score maximum marks in the exams.

Lesson: 1 Sort and Organize Data

Lesson: 2 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Lesson: 3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Lesson: 4 Represent Data

Lesson: 5 Solve Problems Involving Data

Performance Task

Represent and Interpret Data Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
category
mark

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Vocabulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to match.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Vocabulary-Define-It
Explanation:
Bar chart – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Picture graph – A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Lesson 11.1 Sort and Organize Data

Explore and Grow

Explain how you can sort the objects.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Here we can classify the given data in two tabular forms .
In First tabular column we can classify it based on favorite item.
we have pencils – 3 ; Crayons – 3 and Markers – 3
In Second tabular column we can classify it based on favorite Color.
we have yellow color – 3 items , Green color – 3 items and Blue color – 3 items.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
As per the above given figure we can see the number of stickers in the given figure
we observe
The number of umbrellas – 4
The number of bucket – 5
The number of Crab – 6

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
As per the above given figure we can see the number of balls in the given figure
we observe
The number of balls Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
The number of Foot balls – 5 + 3 = 8
The number of Soccer ball – 5
The number of Basket ball – 3

Question 3.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 6
There are 7 tigers. The numbers of foxes and raccoons are the same.
There are 7 foxes. There are 3 raccoons.
Answer:
The numbers of foxes and raccoons are the same and There are 7 foxes are true statements as per the given information in the tabular column .
Explanation:
There are 7 tigers statement is false because as per the tabular column there are 10 tigers
There are 3 raccoons statement is false because as per the tabular column there are 7 raccoons

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 7
How many sunny days are there? ________ days
Is the number of cloudy days greater than or less than the number of rainy days?
greater than           less than
Answer:
Number of sunny days =  5 + 3 = 8
Number of cloudy days = 4
Number of rainy days = 3
Therefore Number of cloudy days are greater than Number of rainy days.
4 > 3 .
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 8
How many sunflowers are there? ___________ sunflowers
Is the number of roses greater than or less than the number of daisies?
greater than           less than
Answer:
Number of sunflowers = 2
Number of roses = 5 + 1 = 6
Number of daisies =5 + 2 = 7
The Number of roses are lesser than number of daises
6 > 7
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Sort and Organize Data Practice 11.1

Question 1.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Sort-Organize-Data-Practice-11.1-Question-1
Explanation:
As per the above given figure we can see the number of Insects
we observe
The number of Insects in Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
The number of Caterpillars =5 + 2 = 7
The number of Flies = 5 + 3 = 8
The number of lady bugs = 2

Question 2.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 10
9 students like princess movies.
4 students like superhero movies.
Princess movies are the most favorite
Answer:
9 students like princess movies is correct
Princess movies are the most favorite is correct
Explanation:
As per the given tally chart of Favorite movie we notice
The number of students like super heroes movies= 5
The number of students like Princess movies = 5 + 4 = 9
The number of students like Mystery movies = 5
Princess movies are the most favorite is correct because more number of students likes this movie

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 11
How many students chose fruit? ________ students
Is the number of students who chose yogurt greater than or less than the number of students who chose cereal?
greater than               less than
Answer:
Number of students chose fruit = 4 students.
Number of students chose Yogurt = 5 students.
Number of students chose Cereal = 5 + 1 = 6 students.
Number of students chose Yogurt are less than Number of students chose Cereal
5 < 6

Review & Refresh

Compare.

Question 4.
45 ○ 55
Answer:
45 < 55

Question 5.
74 ○ 47
Answer:
74 > 47

Question 6.
22 ○ 22
Answer:
22 = 22

Lesson 11.2 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Explore and Grow

How are the graphs similar? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 13
Each ○ = 1 counter.
Answer:
The First picture is the Tally chart of Yellow and Red color counters.
Tally chart marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
In this tally chart we see Red color shows group of five counters and another 1 counter total = 5 + 1 = 6 counters.
Yellow color shows four counters with four vertical lines.
The second graph is the Picture graph. A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
In this each counter is marked as ○. In this picture chart we notice the red color counter has 6 counters marked with 6 ○.
In the yellow color we have 4 counters marked with four ○ .
In both the charts the representation is different from each other .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 14
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 = 1 student.
How many students chose museum? _________
Which trip is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 16
Answer:
As we have 8 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 in the museum row that means 8 students chose the museum trip
as Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 = 1 student
Number of students chose museum = 8
Number of students chose Zoo = 6
Number of students chose play = 2
The trip which is least favorite is play as only two students chooses it .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 17
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 18 = 1 student.
How many students chose pasta? _________
How many students chose soup? _________
Which lunch is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 19
Answer:
As per the above picture graph we know Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 18 = 1 student.
Number of students chose pasta = 5
Number of students chose soup = 3
Number of students chose Taco = 8
Explanation:
The least favorite lunch is soup because less students chooses it compared to pasta and Taco
Only 3 students chooses soup so it is least Favorite.

Question 3.
Writing
In Exercise 2. how do you know which lunch is the most favorite?

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Number of students chose pasta = 5
Number of students chose soup = 3
Number of students chose Taco = 8
Taco is the favorite lunch
Explanation:
Taco lunch is chose by 8 number of students compared to soup and pasta 5 and 3 respectively.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 20

Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose rides greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose animals?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chose Rides are greater than number of students chose animals .
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses Rides = 5
Number of students chooses Animals = 2
Number of students chooses Games = 4
Number of students chose Rides are greater than number of students chose animals .
5 > 2 .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 22
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose frog greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose bear?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students who chose frog are lesser than number of students chose bear.
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses frog = 3
Number of students chooses Bear = 6
3 < 6.
3 lesser than 6 so Number of students who chose frog are lesser than number of students chose bear.

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Practice 11.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 23
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 = 1 student.
How many students chose summer? ________
How many students chose fall? _________
Which season is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 25
Answer:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses summer = 7
Number of students chooses Fall = 4
Winter is the least favorite among other seasons.
Explanation:
Number of students chose spring = 3
Number of students chooses summer = 7
Number of students chooses Fall = 4
Number of students chooses Winter = 1.
Among all 4 seasons only winter season is chosen by only one student compared to other seasons .

Question 2.
Writing
How do you know which category has the least when looking at a picture graph?

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Winter
Explanation:
Less number of Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 means less number of students chosen so Winter is least favorite has it has only one Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 26
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose water greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose juice?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses water = Number of students chooses Juice .
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses water =4
Number of students chooses juice = 4
As both juice and water have equal number students that is 4 so both are equal .
Number of students chooses water = Number of students chooses Juice = 4

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
31 + 40 = ___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-and-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Practice-11.2-Review-Refresh-Question-4
Explanation:
Step 1: Write the numbers one below the other as per the places of the digits.
Step 2 :Start adding from the ones digit. Write the sum under the ones digit.If the sum of the ones digit is greater than 9, write the ones digit of the sum under the ones and carry forward its tens digit to the tens column.
Step 3: Add the tens digits.(If there was a carry forward digit, add it along)

Numbers are arranged as shown in above picture . then add the numbers in one place 1 + 0 = 1
Then add the values in tens place 3 + 4 = 7.
Therefore sum = 71
Lesson 11.3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Question 5.
62 + 20 = ___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-and-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Practice-11.2-Review-Refresh-Question-5
Explanation:
Step 1: Write the numbers one below the other as per the places of the digits.
Step 2 :Start adding from the ones digit. Write the sum under the ones digit.If the sum of the ones digit is greater than 9, write the ones digit of the sum under the ones and carry forward its tens digit to the tens column.
Step 3: Add the tens digits.(If there was a carry forward digit, add it along)

Numbers are arranged as shown in above picture . then add the numbers in one place 2 + 0 = 2
Then add the values in tens place 6 + 2 = 8.
Therefore sum = 82

Explore and Grow

How are the graphs similar? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 28

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 30
Answer:
Picture Graph – A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
Here as per the given diagram the representation is done with Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27
Bar Graph – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Here as per the given diagram the representation is done in strips with different colors .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 31
How many students chose coins? ______________
Which object is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 32
Answer:
Number of students chooses coins = 6
The object which s least favorite is stickers
Explanation:
Number of students chooses Rocks = 4
Number of students chooses Stickers = 2
Number of students chooses Coins = 6
Compared with Rocks and Coins the stickers are chosen less that is only 2 students .
The object which s least favorite is stickers

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 33
How many students chose card games?
____________

How many students chose board games?
____________

Which activity is the most favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 34
Answer:
Number of students chooses card games = 5
Number of students chooses board games =6
The most favorite activity is Board games as it chosen by 6 number of students .
Explanation:
Number of students chooses card games = 5 (as bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses board games =6 (as bar is marked up to 6)
Number of students chooses puzzles = 2 (as bar is marked up to 2)
Compared to card games and puzzles , the board games are chosen by more students that is 6 number of students.
So , The most favorite activity is Board games

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the activities in Exercise 2 from the most favorite to the least favorite.

_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Board games (6) , Card games (5) and Puzzles (2).

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 35

Is the number of students who chose firefighter greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose doctor?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses firefighter are greater than number of students chooses than doctor .
Explanation:
Number of students chooses firefighter = 5 (bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses Police Officer = 7 (bar is marked up to 7)
Number of students chooses Doctor =4 (bar is marked up to 4)
Compare the students of firefighter and Doctor = 5 > 4
So Number of students chooses firefighter are greater than number of students who chooses doctor .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 36
Is the number of students who chose bike greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose kite?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses bike are equal to the number of students who chooses kite.
Explanation:
Number of students chooses bike = 6
Number of students chooses kite = 6
Both have same number of students.
So Number of students chooses bike are equal to the number of students who chooses kite = 6

Read and Interpret Bar Graphs Practice 11.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 37
How many students chose reading? _____________
How many students chose kickball? _____________
Which activity is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 38
Answer:
Number of students chooses Reading = 3
Number of students chooses Computer = 5
Least Favorite activity is Reading
Explanation:
Number of students chooses Reading = 3 (the bar is marked up to 3)
Number of students chooses Computer = 5 (the bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses Kickball = 6 (the bar is marked up to 6)
Among three activities the Reading is chosen by only 3 students .
Compared to other two activities it is less chosen by  the students .

Question 2.
Writing
How do you know which category has the most when looking at a bar graph?

___________________________________________

___________________________________________

___________________________________________

___________________________________________
Answer:
The category which has the most is Kick ball as it is marked up to 6 bars.
longer the bar marking the most favorite is the activity .

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 39
Is the number of pairs of shorts greater than, less than, or equal to the number of shirts?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of pairs of shorts is lesser than the number of the shirts.
Explanation:
Number of Shirts = 5 (as the bar is marked up to 5 )
Number of Shorts = 4 (as the bar is marked up to 4 )
Number of Shirts are greater than Number of shirts = 5 > 4.
So, Number of pairs of shorts is lesser than the number of the shirts.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
9 + 1 + 7 = ____________
Answer:
9+ 1 + 7 = 17

Question 5.
6 + 3 + 6 = ___________
Answer:
6 + 3 + 6 =15

Lesson 11.4 Represent Data

Explore and Grow

Use your color tiles to complete the tally chart and the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 40
Each ○ = 1 color tile.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Explore-Grow
Number of Red Tiles = 4
Number of Blue Tiles = 6
Number of Yellow Tiles = 2
Bar chart – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different colors .
The number of students who chooses Blue color = 6 ( group of 5 + 1 )
The number of students who chooses pink color = 5 (group of 5 )
The number of students who chooses Yellow color = 2
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with respective colors and marking the respective number of students as per the color .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 42
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 43
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
We should complete the Picture graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Farm Animals .
The number of students who chooses Pig = 4
The number of students who chooses Cow = 6 ( group of 5 + 1 )
The number of students who chooses Horse = 5 ( group of 5 )
The same is represented in the Picture chart representing the Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15  = 1 student with respective Farm Animals and marking the respective number of students in the picture graph

Question 3.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 44
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Sports .
The number of students who chooses Swimming = 4
The number of students who chooses Karate = 2
The number of students who chooses Soccer = 5 (group of 5 )
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with Sports and marking the bars with respective number of students with different colors .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You ask 10 students whether they are right-handed or left-handed. 2 are left-handed. The rest are right-handed. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 45
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 46
Each Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 47 = 1 student.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
Number of students = 10
Number of students left handed = 2
Number of students Right handed = 10 – 2 = 8
Represent Eight Students with Eight Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 in the above figure .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
You ask 11 students whether they like the swings or the slide. 5 like the swings. The rest like the slide. Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 48
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 49
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
Number of students = 11
Number of students like swing = 5
Number of students like slide = 11 – 5 = 6
Mark the slide up to 6 with yellow color as bars.

Represent Data Practice 11.4

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 50
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-1
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Winter Activities. .
The number of students who chooses Sledding = 6 (Group of 5 + 1)
The number of students who chooses Skating = 3
The number of students who chooses Snowman = 4
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars  and marking the bars with respective number of students with different colors .

Question 2.
Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 52
Each ○ = 1 balloon.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-2
Explanation:
We should complete the Picture graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 2 different Balloons .
The number of students who chooses Blue balloon = 5 ( group of 5)
The number of students who chooses Red balloon = 2
The same is represented in the Picture chart representing the Each ○ = 1 balloon with respective Balloons color and marking the respective number of students in the picture graph

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You ask 8 students whether they buy or pack their lunches. 6 students buy. The rest pack. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 53
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 54
Each Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 55 = 1 student.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-3
Explanation:
Total Number of students = 8
Number of students who buys lunch = 6
Number of students who packs their lunches = 8 – 6 = 2
Now mark 2 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 55 in the pack category as 2 students pack there lunches in the picture graph

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new equation.

Question 4.
2 + 6 = _____________
_____________ + _____________ = _____________
Answer:
2 + 6 = 8
6 + 2 = 8
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same .

Question 5.
_____________ = 8 + 1
_____________ = _____________ + _____________
Answer:
9 = 8 + 1
9 = 1 + 8
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same.

Lesson 11.5 Solve Problems Involving Data

Explore and Grow

Complete the bar graph to show 19 toys in all.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 56

Write a question about your graph. Have your partner answer the question.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.5-Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Total Number of Toys = 19
Number of Stuffed animals = 6
Number of Cars = 8
Number of Dinosaurs = 5
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars  and marking the bars with respective number of Toys with different colors .
My Partner answered the question with different numbers. but the overall number of toys = 19 .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 57
Each Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 58 = 1 student.
How many more students like butterflies than birds? _________ students
How many students were asked? _________ students
Answer:
Number of students like bats = 4
Number of students like butterflies = 7
Number of students like birds = 6
Number of more students like butterflies than birds = 7 – 6 = 1 students
Number of students asked = total number of students
Total number of students = Number of students like( Bats + Butterflies + Birds ) = 4 + 7 + 6=17.
Therefore Number of students asked = 17.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 59
Each Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 60 = 1 student.
How many fewer students chose circle than square? _________ fewer students
How many students chose square or triangle?_________ students
Answer:
Number of students chooses square = 7
Number of students chooses Circle = 5
Number of students chooses Triangle = 7
Number of Fewer students chose circle than square = 7 – 5 = 2 students
Number of students chooses square = Number of students chooses Triangle = 7

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 9 students to name their favorite rainy-day activity. Complete the bar graph to show how many chose reading. Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 61
Answer:
Number of students asked favorite rainy-day activity = 9
Number of students likes Games = 3
Number of students likes Painting = 1
Number of students likes Reading = total number of students – games – painting =9 – 3 – 1
= 9 – 4 = 9 – 5
Number of students likes Reading = 5
Explanation:
Now the number of students like reading is marked with bars up to 5 with Yellow color as shown in the below figure .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.5-Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Show-Grow-Question-3

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 62
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many more hits did Newton hit than Descartes? _________ More Hits
Answer:
Number of Hits by me = 4
Number of hits by Newton = 5
Number of hits by Descartes = 2
Number of more hits by Newton than Descartes = 5 – 2 = 3

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Write and answer a question using the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 63
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 64
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Who Laps more runs than me ? ________ runs.
Answer:
Number of lap runs by me = 2
Number of lap runs by Descartes = 5 ( group of 5)
Number of lap runs by Newton = 1.
Descartes lap runs more than me
Number of lap runs more than me = 5 – 2 = 3.
Therefore number of runs more than me by Descartes = 3

Solve Problems Involving Data Practice 11.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 65
How many more dogs are there than penguins? _________ more dogs
How many bears and dogs are there in all? _________ bears and dogs
Answer:
Number of Bears = 7
Number of Penguins = 2
Number of Dogs = 5
Number of dogs more than penguins = 5 – 2 = 3
3 more dogs are there than penguins
Number of Bears and Dogs = 7 + 5 = 12

Question 2.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 19 students to name their favorite fruit. Complete the tally chart to show how many chose apples. Explain how you know.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 66
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Total Number students = 19
Number of students like Banana = 5+2 = 7
Number of students like Orange = 2
Number of students like apple = 19 – 7 – 2 = 19 – 9 = 10
Explanation:
Now mark 10 apples in the above tally graph with 2 sets of group of 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-2

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 67
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many more students like potato than carrot ? _________ more Potatoes .
Explanation:
Number of students like carrots = 3
Number of Students like Potatoes = 6
Number of more students like potatoes than carrots = 6 – 3 = 3
Therefore 3 more students like potatoes than carrot .

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
51 + 40 = __________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-4

Question 5.
76 + 3 = __________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-5

Represent and Interpret Data Performance Task

Question 1.
Ask your classmates about their eye colors. Use your data to complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 68
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Performance-Task-Question-1
Total number of class mates = 15
Number of class mates with black eye color = 9
Number of class mates with brown eye color = 4
Number of class mates with blue eye color = 2
All the above data is marked in the tally graph as shown in above figure .

Question 2.
Use your tally chart to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 69
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Performance-Task-Question-2

Question 3.
Describe two ways to tell how many students you asked.

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Number of students with black eyes = 9
Number of students with brown eyes = 4
Number of students with blue eyes = 2
The Total Number of students asked = Number of students with (black eyes + brown eyes + blue eyes)
= 9 + 4 = 2 = 15
By counting the number of bars will also say the total number of students .

Question 4.
Write and answer a question about your graphs.

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Is the number of Students with brown greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students with blue eyes?
greater than         less than             equal to
Explanation:
Number of students with brown eyes = 4
Number of students with blue eyes = 2
Therefore Number of students with brown eyes are greater than number of students with blue eyes.

Represent and Interpret Data Chapter Practice

Sort and Organize Data Homework & Practice 11.1

Complete the tally chart.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 70
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Chapter-Practice-Sort-Organize-Data-Homework-Practice-11.1-Question-1
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart of Number of Cars
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
Number of red cars = 4 (represented with four vertical lines)
Number of white cars = 3 (represented with three vertical lines)
Number of blue cars = 5 (represented with four vertical lines and the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 71
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Chapter-Practice-Sort-Organize-Data-Homework-Practice-11.1-Question-2
Explanation:
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart of Number of pets
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
Number of Cats = 4 (represented with four vertical lines)
Number of Dogs = 2 (represented with two vertical lines)
Number of Fishes = 8 (represented with four vertical lines and the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four and three vertical lines)

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Homework & Practice 11.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 72
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 73 = 1 student.
How many students chose science? ____________
Which subject is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 74
Answer:
Numbers of Students Who likes Art = 5
Number of students who likes Math = 6
Number of students who likes Science = 4
Among the three subjects the less favorite subject is Science .
As it has less number of students .

Read and Interpret Bar Graphs Homework & Practice 11.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 75
How many students chose turtle? __________
Which is the most favorite sea creature? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 76
Answer:
Number of students choose turtle = 5
Number of students choose jellyfish = 2
Number of students choose Shark = 6
Among the three sea creature shark was chosen by more number of student compared with other two .
Therefore Most Favorite sea creature is Shark .

Represent Data Homework & Practice 11.4

Question 5.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Homework-Practice-11.2-Question-3
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers Beads of 3 different colors.
The number of Beads of Blue color = 5 ( group of 5)
The number of Beads of Red color = 2
The number of Beads of  Yellow color = 4
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with respective colors and marking the respective number of Beads as per the color .

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You ask 13 students whether they like volleyball or basketball. 7 like volleyball. The rest like basketball. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 78
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 79 = 1 student.
Answer:
Total Number of Students = 13
Number of Students who likes Volley ball = 7
Number of students who likes Basketball = 13 – 7 = 6
Now Number of students who likes basketball is represented with 7 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 79 in the above figure.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Homework-Practice-11.4-Question-6

Solve Problems Involving Data Homework & Practice 11.5

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 80
How many fewer students chose green than purple? ____________ fewer students
How many students were asked? ____________ students
Answer:
Number of Students who like purple = 5 + 4 =9
Number of Students who likes Green = 5
Number of Students who likes Orange = 2
Number of Fewer Students choose Green than purple = 9 – 5 = 4
Number of Students were asked =Numbers of Students who likes (purple + green +orange )
= 9 + 5 + 2 = 16
Therefore Number of Students were asked = 16

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 81

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many students were asked? ____________ students
Answer:
Number of Students who like Computer = 4
Number of Students who likes Stuffed Animals = 3
Number of Students who likes Train = 6
Number of Students were asked =Numbers of Students who likes (Computer + Stuffed Animals + Train )
= 4 + 3 + 6 = 13
Therefore Number of Students were asked = 13

Represent and Interpret Data Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Match each number on the left with a number that is 10 more.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 82
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-1

Question 2.
Complete.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 83
56 + 6 = __________
Answer:
56 + 6 = 62
60 + 2 = 62
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-2

Question 3.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 84
____________, ____________, ____________
Answer:
Yellow , Blue , Red
Explanation:
Red is the longest line
Blue is second longest line
Yellow is third line which is less than both

Question 4.
Shade the circle next to the number that tells how many horns there are.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 85
○ 3
○ 10
○ 6
○ 19
Answer:
Number of horns = 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-4

Question 5.
Shade the circle next to the sum.
12 + 5 = ____________
○ 15
○ 17
○ 16
○ 7
Answer:
12+5=17
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-5

Question 6.
There are 85 pages in a book. You read 10 of them. How many pages are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 86
○ 95
○ 85
○ 75
○ 80
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Total Number of pages in a book = 85
Number of pages read by me = 10
Remaining number pages left to read = 85 – 10 = 75.

Question 7.
Is each sentence true?
52 is greater than 36.       Yes         No
100 < 90                          Yes         No
75 is less than 57.            Yes         No
89 > 81                            Yes         No
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-7

Question 8.
You collect 22 cans for a food drive. Your friend collects 36. How many cans do you and your friend collect in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 87

______________ cans
Answer:
Total Number of Cans collected by me = 22
Total Number of cans collected by my friend = 36
Total Number of cans collected by me and my friend = 22 + 36 = 58

Question 9.
Measure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 88
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-9
we need to know the measure of the given figure
From the above figure it is clearly marked that it measures 13 cms long .

Question 10.
Shade the circles next to the choices that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 89
○ 50 – 30
○ 5 tens – 2 tens
○ 50 – 20
○ 3 tens – 2 tens
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
We notice in the given figure we have 5 tens in that 2 tens were crossed that means 2 tens were subtracted so remaining number of tens = 5 tens – 2 tens .

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 90
How many students chose ham? ___________

Which sandwich is the least favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 91
Answer:
As per the given bar graph we observe
Number of students choose ham  = 2
Numbers of students choose turkey = 4
Number of students choose Cheese = 4
Number of students choose turkey = Number of students choose Cheese = 4
So only ham is left with 2 less than turkey and cheese
Therefore ham sandwich is the least favorite

Question 12.
Use each card once to write an addition equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 92
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
2 + 3 =5
3 + 2 =5
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same .

Conclusion:

Hence Download a Free pdf of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data from the direct links. Also, test yourself by solving the questions given at the end of the chapter. Along with this chapter, you can also find other Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapters. Stay with us to get the latest updates regarding the Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Answer Key Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13

Practice is the only way to get complete knowledge. So, solving every different problem available on Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles will lead you to get a grip on complete concepts. As we have given simple tricks and techniques on Big Ideas Grade 4 Chapter 13 Solution Key, students can easily learn maths. All the answers and explanations will lead the students to promote to high grades without any struggle. Refer to Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Grade 4 Answer Key PDF for quick support. Become a pro in maths using BIM Grade 4 Answer Key.

Big Ideas 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Math Book Answer Key

Make your preparation easy and clear all the exams without hesitation by preparing with Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Answers Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles PDF. Big Ideas Grade 4 Chapter 13 Solution Key is prepared by highly experienced math experts. Great research is made before the preparation of Big Ideas Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Answer Key PDF. Students can get the best preparation by referring to our BIM Grade 4 Chapter 13 material.

Lesson: 1 Points, Lines and Rays

Lesson: 2 Identify and Draw Angles

Lesson: 3 Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

Lesson: 4 Understand Degrees

Lesson: 5 Find Angle Measures

Lesson: 6 Measure and Draw Angles

Lesson: 7 Add Angle Measures

Lesson: 8 Find Unknown Angle Measures

Performance Task

Lesson 13.1 Points, Lines and Rays

Explore and Grow

Use a straightedge to connect the dots A through Z. Describe the picture you make. How many points do you connect? How many line segments do you make?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 1
Answer:
Points connected are 25.
Line segments used are 25.

Structure
Draw your own connect-the-dots picture on another sheet of paper. Have your partner use a straightedge to connect the dots to make your picture. How many points did your partner connect? How many line segments did your partner make?
Answer:
Yes, he used line segments to connect the dots. He connected 20 dots and 19 line segments.

Think and Grow: Points, Lines, Line Segments, and Rays

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 2

Example
Draw and label \(\overline{L M}\)
\(\overline{L M}\) is a ___
Another name for \(\overline{L M}\) is ___
Answer:
Line segments are represented by a single overbar with no arrowheads over the letters representing the two endpoints.
The line segment Represented as \(\overline{L M}\)

Example
Draw and label \(\overrightarrow{S T}\)
\(\overrightarrow{S T}\) is a ___
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3

Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{S T}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-and-Draw-Lines-and-Angles-ST

Ray \(\overrightarrow{S T}\)

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Name the figure shown. Write how to say the name.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3.1

Answer:
It is a line segment vu. Line segments are represented by a single overbar with no arrowheads over the letters representing the two endpoints.
It is represented as \(\overline{V U}\)

Question 2.
Draw and label two points P and Q on the line shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3.2
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3.3

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Name the figure shown. Write how to say the name.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 4
Answer:
It is called as point B.
A point in geometry is a location. It has no size i.e. no width, no length and no depth. A point is shown by a dot and named in capital letter.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 5
Answer:
It is called as \(\overrightarrow{C D}\). The symbol of a ray is →.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 6

Draw and label the figure.
Answer:

Question 7.
\(\overline{G H}\)
Answer:
\(\overline{G H}\) means a line segment. It is said as line segment GH.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles- Lesson 13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Show-Grow-Question-7

 

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 7
Answer:
It is a ray. It is said as rayBig Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles- Lesson 13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Show-Grow-Question-8

Question 9.
\(\overrightarrow{L M}\)
Answer:
It means a ray. It is said as ray LM.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles- Lesson 13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Show-Grow-Question-9

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 8

Question 10.
Name a ray.
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{A D}\).

Question 11.
Name a point that lies on two lines.
Answer:  E .

Question 12.
Name two different line segments.
Answer: DE and EF.
\(\overline{D E}\) and \(\overline{E F}\)

Question 13.
Logic
Your friend says he can draw two line segments between two points, and may be even more. His drawing is shown. Explain why this is not possible.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 9
Answer:
Only one line can be drawn passing through any two points but a number of lines can be drawn through a point.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
There are direct ferry routes between each pair of cities on the map. Draw line segments to represent all of the possible ferry routes. How many ferry routes did you draw in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 10
Start at Poole. Draw a line segment from Poole to each of the other cities. Repeat this process until a route is shown between each city.
You draw __ ferry routes in all.
Answer:
3 Possible routes.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
There are direct flights between each pair of cities on the map. Draw line segments to represent all of the possible flight routes. How many flights routes did you draw in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 11
Answer:
Total 10 routes were found.

Question 15.
Which road signs contain a figure that looks like a ray?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 12
Answer:
One way road sign look like a ray.

Question 16.
Which letters in the banner can be made by drawing line segments? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 13 ,
Answer:
Letters – W,E,L,M AND E.

Points, Lines and Rays Homework & Practice 13.1

Name the figure shown. Write how to say the name.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 14
Answer:
It is said as Line segment EF and represented as \(\overline{E F}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 15
Answer:
It is said as ray GH and represented as \(\overrightarrow{G H}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 16
Answer:
It is said as line JK and represented as Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 7

Draw and label the figure.

Question 4.
two points L and M on the line shown
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 17
Answer:

Question 5.
\(\overrightarrow{N O}\)
Answer:

It is represented as \(\overrightarrow{N O}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Points-Lines-Rays—Homework-Practice-13.1-Question-6.jpg

Use the figure.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 19

Question 7.
Name a line segment.
___CE____

Question 8.
Name two different rays.
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{C D}\) and \(\overrightarrow{E F}\).

Question 9.
Name two different lines
Answer
\(\overline{D B}\)and \(\overline{A E}\).

Question 10.
Writing
Explain the difference between a line and a line segment.

Line-segment

1. It has two end points.

2. The length of a line-segment is definite. So, it can be measured.

3. The symbol of a line-segment is _____

Line

1. There are no end points in a line.

2. There are no end points. So, length of a line cannot be measured.

3. The symbol of a line is ↔

Question 11.
Structure
Name the figure in as many ways as possible.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 20
Answer:
\(\overline{X Y}\),\(\overline{Y Z}\) and \(\overline{X Z}\).
\(\overrightarrow{Y Z }\)
LINE – XZ

Question 12.
Structure
Draw and label a figure that has four points, two rays, and one line segment.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Points-Lines-Rays—Homework-Practice-13.1 -Question-12

\(\overrightarrow{R S }\) and \(\overrightarrow{Q S}\).
\(\overline{P S}\)

DIG DEEPER!
Write whether the statement is true or false. If false, explain.

Question 13.
A line segment is part of a line. _______
Answer: Yes

Question 14.
A ray is part of a line segment. ____
Answer:
No
Explanation:
Line-segment- It has two end points. But where as Ray has a starting point but no other end point.

Question 15.
There are an infinite number of points on a line. ___
Answer: Yes

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
There are direct helicopter flights between each pair of resorts on the map. Draw line segments to represent all of the possible flight routes. How many flight routes did you draw in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 20.1
Answer:
Total possible flight routes are 6 routes.

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
Which road signs contain a figure that looks like it is made of only line segments?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 21
Answer:
Road signs – +,T and Y are made of line segments.

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 22
Answer:
0.15 < 0.16.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 23
Answer:
2.4 < 2.42

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 24
Answer:
6.90 = 6.9

Lesson 13.2 Identify and Draw Angles

Explore and Grow

Draw the hands of the clock to represent the given time.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 25
For each clock, describe the angle that is formed by the minute hand and the hour hand.
Answer:

Reasoning
Explain how line segments, rays, and angles can be related.

Think and Grow: Angles

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 26

Angles can be either right, straight, acute, or obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 27

Example
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 28
Write three names for the angle and classify it.
Three names for the angle are
___, ____ and ____.
The angle opens ___ a right angle and less than a straight line.
So, it is an __ angle.
Answer:
Three names for the angle are actue, obtuse and right angles.
The angle opens more than a right angle and less than a straight line.
So, it is an obtuse angle.

Show and Grow

write a name for the angle and classify it.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 29
Answer:
It is a right angle called as P.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 30
Answer:
It is a straight angle. It can be represented as XYZ, ZYX.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write a name for the angle and classify it.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 31
Answer:
It is a obtuse angle. It is represented as Q.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 32
Answer:
It is a actue angle. It is represented as MNO or ONM.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 33
Answer:
It is a straight angle. It can be represented as RST, TSR.

Draw and label the angle.

Question 7.
∠XYZ is right

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.2-Identify-Draw-Angles-Question-7.jpg

Question 8.
∠JKL is straight.
Answer:

Use the figure. Use three letters to name each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 34

Question 9.
Name an acute angle.
Answer:
∠CFD

Question 10.
Name two different obtuse angles.
Answer:
∠CFG and ∠ACF.

Question 11.
Name two different straight angles.
Answer:
∠BDF and ∠CDE.

Question 12.
Name three different right angles.
Answer:
∠CFD , ∠CFG and ∠BDF.

Question 13.
Structure
Draw to complete each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 35
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Which angle of the skateboard ramp is acute?
You need to find an angle that is open less than a right angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 36
Angle A opens __more than __ a right angle and less than a straight line.
Angle B _is equal__ a right angle.
Angle C opens _less than__ a right angle.
Angle _∠C__ is an acute angle.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
Use three letters to name an angle of the wind turbine that is obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 37
Answer:
∠VTU.

Question 15.
Trace and label two right angles, two obtuse angles, and two acute angles in the painting.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 38
Answer:

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
How many different angles are in the window? Name all of the different angles.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 39
Answer:
Right angles – ∠AFC , ∠BFD , ∠CFE
Obtuse angles – ∠AFD and ∠BFE.
Acute angles – ∠AFB, ∠BFC , ∠CFD and ∠DFE.
Straight angles – ∠AFE.

Identify and Draw Angles Homework & Practice 13.2

Write a name for the angle and classify it.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 40
Answer:
∠O is straight angle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 41
Answer:
∠TUV is a right angle as TU is perpendicular to UV .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 42
Answer:
∠XYZ is a obtuse angle as, we can see clearly angle formed is more than 90 degrees.

Draw and label the angle.

Question 4.
∠ABC is obtuse.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Homework-Practice-13.2- Question-4

Question 5.
∠MNO is acute.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Homework-Practice-13.2- Question-5

Use the figure. Use three letters to name each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 43

Question 6.
Name an acute angle.
Answer: ∠BFC

Question 7.
Name a straight angle.
Answer: ∠DEF

Question 8.
Name two different right angles.
Answer: ∠DEA and ∠DEG.

Question 9.
Name three different obtuse angles
Answer: ∠EFJ and ∠EFC.

Question 10.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 44
Answer:
The above figure contains ∠JKL a angle.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Can you make a straight angle using an acute angle and an obtuse angle that share a common ray? Draw a picture to support your answer.
Answer:
Yes
Explanation:
The total sum of a straight angle =180.
As per the figure,
The Obtuse angle = 120 degrees.
The acute angle = 60 degrees.
Therefore The straight angle = Obtuse angle + Acute angle.
= 120 + 60
= 180 degrees.

Question 12.
Structure
Write a capital letter that has more than two right angles.
Answer: B

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Use three letters to name the angles of the flag of the Czech Republic that are obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 45
Answer:
∠AFC and ∠EFC are obtuse angles.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
Horses see an object with binocular both eyes at the same time using vision. Classify the angle that describes the horse’s binocular vision.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 46
Answer:
The angle that formed in binocular vision is Acute angle.

Review & Refresh

Question 15.
Write 1\(\frac{7}{12}\) as a fraction.
Answer:

(1 x 12 ) + 7 =19

Question 16.
Write \(\frac{9}{6}\) as a mixed number.
Answer:

Lesson 13.3 Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

Explore and Grow

Use a straightedge to draw and label a figure for each description. If a figure cannot be drawn, explain why.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 47

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Explore-Grow

Reasoning
Find the figure that shows two lines that cross once. How many angles are formed by two lines? Name and classify the angles of the figure above.
Answer:
Four angles are formed – ∠FOJ , ∠FOH ,∠GOJ and ∠GOH.

Think and Grow: Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

You can describe a pair of lines as intersecting, parallel, or perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 48

Example
Draw and label the lines with the given description.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 49
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 50
Answer:

Show and Grow

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 51
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Show-Grow-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 52
Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 53
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 54

Answer:

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 55

Question 5.
Name a pair of lines that appear to be parallel.
Answer:
AC ll DF.

Question 6.
Name two lines that are perpendicular.
Answer:
BE ⊥ DF and DE ⊥ EB.

Question 7.
Name two intersecting lines.
Answer:
DE and EB
CB and BE

Question 8.
Reasoning
All perpendicular lines are also intersecting lines. Are all intersecting lines perpendicular? Explain.
Answer:
Perpendicular Lines means which bisect the lines at right angles .But where as the intersecting lines meet at one point but doesnot form right angles.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 56

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Which street appears to be parallel to 2nd Street?
Look for a street that will not intersect with 2nd street.
___ Street appears to be parallel to 2nd Street.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 57
Answer:
3rd street.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Which trail appears to be parallel to Fox Trail?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 58
Answer:
Wolf Run Trail

Question 11.
Which trail appears to be perpendicular to Fox Trail?
Answer:
Oak Trail.

Question 12.
Trace and label a pair of line segments that appear to be parallel and a pair of line segments that appear to be perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 60
Answer:

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Design three paths for a park. Two of the paths are perpendicular. Label these paths as Path 1 and Path 2. The third path intersects both perpendicular paths at exactly one point. Label this path as Path 3.
Answer:

Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines Homework & Practice 13.3

Example

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 60.1

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 61
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 62
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Practice-Homework-Question-2

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 63

Question 3.
Name a pair of lines that appear to be parallel.
Answer:
AG ll CJ

Question 4.
Name two lines that are perpendicular.
Answer:
BE ⊥ DF
HE DF

Question 5.
Name two intersecting lines.
Answer:
CJ and DF .

Question 6.
Structure
Name two line segments that appear to be parallel. Then name two line segments that appear to be perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 63.1
Answer:
AB ll DC and AD⊥ DC .

Question 7.
Reasoning
Can two lines that share a point be parallel? Explain.
Answer:
Two Lines can be parallel but a point cannot be a parallel.
Explanation:
Parallel lines are co planar lines that do not intersect. In two dimensions, parallel lines have the same slope . We can write the equation of a line parallel to a given line if we know a point on the line and an equation of the given line. y=2x+3 .

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 64l
Answer:
No, It cannot be an acute angle. Because it is a right angle.
Explanation:
As line SW is perpendicular to line UV and line SW is parallel to line TX then from figure it is clear that line TX will be perpendicular to line UV.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 65
Modeling Real Life
Which street appears to be parallel to Park Avenue?
Answer:
Peach Street.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Which street appears to be perpendicular to Peach Street?
Answer:
Lake Road

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Trace and label a pair of line segments that appear to be parallel and a pair of line segments that appear to be perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 66
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent amount of time.

Question 12.
20 min = ___ sec
Answer:
1min = 60sec
20 mins = 20 x 60
= 1200 sec.

Question 13.
6 yr = ___ wk
Answer:
1 year = 52 weeks.
6 years = 6 x 52
= 312 weeks

Lesson 13.4 Understand Degrees

Explore and Grow

Find the elapsed time for each set of clocks. Describe, in your own words, the turn that the minute hand makes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 67
Answer:
Elapsed time is the time or difference between a beginning time and an ending time.

Reasoning
Explain how elapsed time shown by an analog clock relates to angles formed in a circle.
Answer:
On a clock, we can see different kinds of angles based on its amplitude; void, acute, straight, obtuse, flat angles—even a full angle.

Think and Grow: Degrees

Angles are measured in units called degrees. Think of dividing a circle into 360 equal parts. An angle that turns through \(\frac{1}{360}\) of a circle measures 1°, and is called a“one-degree angle.” A full turn through the entire circle is 360°.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 68
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 69

Example
Find the measure of the angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 70
An angle that turns \(\frac{1}{360}\) of a circle measures _1__ degrees.
An angle that turns through \(\frac{20}{360}\) of a circle measures _20__ degrees.
So, the measure of the angle is _20 degrees__.

Example
Find the measure of a right angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 71
Answer:
22.5 degrees.

Show and Grow

Find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 72
Answer:
60 degrees.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 73

Answer:
45 degrees.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the measure of the angle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 74
Answer:
85 degrees

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 75
Answer:
120 degrees.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 76
Answer:
45 degrees.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 77
Answer:
(1/9) x (—/—) = —–/360
=40 degrees.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 78
Answer:
(1/2) x (—/—) = —–/360
=180 degrees.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 79
Answer:
(1/5) x (—/—) = —–/360
=360/5=72 degrees.

Question 9.
A circle is divided into 8 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =8
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/8 part of angle formed = 360/8 =45 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 2 parts = 2 x 45 =90 degrees.

Question 10.
A circle is divided into 4 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 3 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =4
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/4 part of angle formed = 360/4 =90 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 3 parts = 3 x 45 =135 degrees.

Classify the angle as right, straight, acute or obtuse.

Question 11.
30°
Answer:
Acute angle
An acute angle lies between 0 degree and 90 degrees, or in other words; an acute angle is one that is less than 90 degrees.

Question 12.
120°
Answer:
Obtuse angle
It is the angle which lies between 90 degrees and 180 degrees or in other words; an obtuse angle is greater than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees.

Question 13.
90°
Answer:
Right angle
A right angle is always equal to 90 degrees.

Question 14.
180°
Answer:
Straight angle
A straight angle is 180 degrees. It is just a straight angle because the angle between its arms is 180 degrees.

Reflex Angle

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Both circles are divided into sixths. Your friend says the measure of Angle D is greater than the measure of Angle C. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 80
Answer:
No
Explanation:
Both the angles are divided into 6 equal parts irrespective of size of the circle. Both the angles C and D will be equal. As the sum of the circles is 360 degrees for all circles ,when divided equally the angles will be equal.

Question 16.
Reasoning
Does each figure show the same angle? If not, which two angles are shown? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 81
Answer:
Both the Angles are equal.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Spokes divide the Ferris wheel into 20 equal parts. What is the angle measure of 1 part?
Write a fraction that represents 1 part.
Because the Ferris wheel has 20 equal parts,
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 82
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 83
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 17.
The game spinner is divided into10 equal parts. What is the angle measure of 1 part?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 84
Answer:
Number of parts divided=10
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/10 part of angle formed = 360/10 =36 degree.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
A circular quesadilla is cut into 8 equal pieces. Five pieces are eaten. What is the angle measure formed by the remaining pieces?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 85
Answer:
Total Number of parts divided = 8.
Total sum of angle = 360 degrees.
Angle of each part = 360/8 degrees = 45 degrees.
Number of parts eaten = 5
Angle of 5 parts = 5 x 45 degrees = 225 degrees.
Angle formed by remaining parts = 360- 225 degrees =135 degrees
or
Number of remaining parts =3
Angle of remaining parts = 3 x 45 degrees. = 135 degrees.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
When a light wave hits an object, the object reflects a colored light at an angle to your eye. The color of the reflected light is the color you see. What fraction of a circle is shown by the angle? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 86
Answer:
Reflected angle = 30 degrees.
Total sum of angle = 360 degrees.
Fraction angle reflected in circle = 30 / 360 degrees = 1 /12 fraction.

Understand Degrees Homework & Practice 13.4

Find the measure of each angle

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 87
Answer:
50 degrees

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 88
Answer:
(1/3) x (—/—) = —–/360
= 360/3 = 120 degrees.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 89
Answer:
(1/12) x (—/—) = —–/360
= 360/12 = 30 degrees.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 90
Answer:
(1/10) x (—/—) = —–/360
=360/10 = 36 degrees.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 91
Answer:
(1/6) x (—/—) = —–/360
= 360/6 = 60 degrees.

Question 6.
A circle is divided into 5 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =5
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/5 part of angle formed = 360/5 =72 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 2 parts = 2 x 72 =144 degrees.

Question 7.
A circle is divided into 10 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 3 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =10
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/10 part of angle formed = 360/10 =36 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 3 parts = 3 x 36 =108 degrees.

Classify the angle as right, straight, acute, obtuse

Question 8.
90°
Answer:
Right angle
A right angle is always equal to 90 degrees.

Question 9.
45°
Answer:
Acute angle
An acute angle lies between 0 degree and 90 degrees, or in other words; an acute angle is one that is less than 90 degrees.

Question 10.
160°
Answer:
Obtuse angle
It is the angle which lies between 90 degrees and 180 degrees or in other words; an obtuse angle is greater than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees.

Question 11.
60°
Answer:
Acute angle
An acute angle lies between 0 degree and 90 degrees, or in other words; an acute angle is one that is less than 90 degrees.

Question 12.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which angle measure does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 92
Answer:
1/8 of a circle

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend uses the equation to find an angle a measure. Explain what the letters a and b represent.
360° ÷ a = b
Answer:
Where a is the Number of parts where circle is divided.
b is the angle of 1 part.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
The steering wheel is divided into 3 equal parts. Find the angle measure of 1 part.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 93
Answer:
Number of parts =3
The total sum of angle in circle = 360.
The measure of 1/3 part of the angle formed = 360/3 =120 degrees.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend take pie-shaped pieces from a circular quiche. Your friend takes \(\frac{2}{8}\) of the quiche. You take a piece with an angle measure of 72°. Who takes a larger piece? Explain.
Answer:
It Is given that pie taken your friend is 2/8 So it is clear that quinche is divided into 8 parts.
Number of parts =8
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/8 part of angle formed = 360/8 =45 degree.
Piece taken by friend is 2/8 = 2 x 45 = 90 degrees.
Piece taken by you measures 72 degrees.
Therefore Your Friend takes larger piece.

Review & Refresh

Multiply

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 94
Answer:
=7 x (7/2)
=1/2 = 0.5

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 95
Answer:
= 10 x (53/6)
=88.33

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 96
Answer:
=4 x (51/8)
=51/2
=25.5

Lesson 13.5 Find Angle Measures

Explore and Grow

How many triangular pattern blocks can you put together around one vertex?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 97
Answer: 2
How can you determine the measure of each angle in a triangular pattern block?
Answer:
If we add all three angles in any triangle we get 180 degrees.
So, the measure of (angle A + angle B + angle C) = 180 degrees.

Repeated Reasoning
Find all of the angle measures of the other pattern blocks. Organize your results in the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 98
Answer:

Think and Grow: Find Angle Measures

Example
Use the pattern block to find the measure of the angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 99
Each angle of the pattern block has a measure of _60__.
The angle is equal to _60 degrees__ of the angles of the pattern block.
So, the measure of the angle is __60 degrees_.

Example
Use the pattern block to find the measure of the angle.
Each acute angle of the pattern block has a measure of _30__.
The angle is equal to _30__ of the acute angles of the pattern block.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 100
So, the measure of the angle is _150 degrees__.

Show and Grow

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 101

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 102

Answer:

Question 3.
Use pattern blocks to find how many 60° angles are in a straight angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 103
Answer:

Total 3 triangles are used.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 104

Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 105

Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 106

Answer:

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 107

Answer:

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 108

Answer:

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 109

Answer:

Question 10.
How many 90° angles are in a straight angle? Explain.
Answer: 2
A straight has 180 degree as its sum of angle.
One right angle = 90 degrees.
=90 x2 =180.
So if we have 2 right angles the its sum will be equal to 180 degrees.

Question 11.
How many 30° angles are in a 150° angle? Explain.
Answer:
=150/30=5 times.

Question 12.
Structure
Use two different pattern blocks to form an obtuse angle. Find the angle measure. Draw a model to support your Answer.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the measure of the smaller angle formed by the clock hands. Then explain how you could find the measure of the larger angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 110
Answer:
The angle formed at 3 clock = 90°.
The sum of angles=360°
The larger angle = 360° – 90°=270°

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A circular compass is divided into 8 equal sections. What is the measure of each angle formed at the center of the compass?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 111
A full turn through a circle is 360°. So, divide 360° by 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 112
Each angle formed at the center of the compass is __45°_.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You have a circular craft table. You divide the table into 3 equal sections. What is the measure of each angle formed at the center of the table?
Answer:
Number of sections =3
The total sum of angle in circle = 360°.
The measure of 1/3 part of the angle formed at the center of the table = 360°/3 =120°

Question 15.
A chef has a wheel of cheese that is cut into6 equal pieces. The chef uses 2 pieces. What is the angle measure formed by the missing pieces?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 113
Answer:
Number of parts =6
Total sum of angle in circle = 360°.
Measure of 1/6 part of angle formed= 360°/6 =60°
Chef uses 2 peices
Angle formed by used peices = 2 x 60° =120°
Therefore, the angle measure formed by the missing pieces = 120°

Question 16.What is the angle measure formed by the remaining slices?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 114

Answer:
Number of parts =5
Total sum of angle in circle = 360°.
Measure of 1/5 part of angle formed= 360°/5 =72°
used peices = 2
Angle formed by Remaining peices = 3 x 72° =216°
Therefore, the angle measure formed by the remaining pieces = 216°

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You make a tile pattern for a border on a wall. Each tile is the same size and shape as a pattern block. Draw two ways you can arrange 1 triangle tile and 1 hexagon tile to create a straight angle.
Answer:

Find Angle Measures Homework & Practice 13.5

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 115
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 116
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 117

Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 118

Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 119
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 120
Answer: The angle formed is 80°. It cannot be represented by pattern blocks.

Question 7.
How many 30° angles are in a right angle? Explain.
Answer:
Right angle =90°
How many 30° angles we have in right angle = 90°/30°=3

Question 8.
Structure
Draw to show how you can use three different pattern blocks to form a straight angle.
Answer:

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the measure of the angle shown is 120°. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 121
Answer:
No, As the angle is 130°.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
The hands of a clock form a straight angle. What time could it be? Explain.
Answer:
The time as per mage is 6 o clock.
Explanation:

  • One hand is very thin and moves very fast. It’s called the seconds hand. Every time it moves, a second has gone by.
  • Another hand is thick and long like the seconds hand. It’s called the minutes hand. Every time it moves one little tick, a minute has gone by. Every 60 times it moves a whole step, an hour has gone by.
  • The last hand is thick, too, but smaller than the minutes hand. It’s called the hours hand. Every time it moves one big tick, an hour has gone by. Every 24 times it moves a whole step, a day has gone by

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
The scale is divided into 5 equal sections by each whole kilogram measurement. What is the measure of each angle formed at the center of the scale? What is the mass of the bananas?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 122
Answer:
The whole Kilogram is divided into 5 parts
1kg = 1000 grams
=1000 grams / 5
=200 grams.
As per the image the weight of banans showing mark on one.
one unit = 200 grams.
Therefor, weight of bananas = 200 grams.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
The gasoline tank gauge is divided into 4 equal sections. What are the measures of the angles formed at the starting point of the red arrow?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 123
Answer:
The gasoline is in a shape of semi circle.
Sum of the angles = 180°
Number of sections divided = 4 parts. (equal).
Angle of each section : 180° /4 = 45° .
Therefore the measures of the angles formed at the starting point of the red arrow = 45° .

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the rectangle.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 124
Answer:
Area of Rectangle = length X breadth.
AREA = 19 m x 16 m = 304 sq m.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 125
Answer:
Area of Rectangle = length X breadth.
AREA = 28 in x 15 in =420 sq in.

Lesson 13.6 Measure and Draw Angles

Explore and Grow

Find the measure of each angle. Then classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 126
Answer:

Construct Arguments
Does the angle shown have a measure of 90°? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 127
Answer:
The intersecting line form right angle =90 degrees
The angle marked = ?
The total angle = 360 degrees.
The marked angle= 360 – 90 = 270 degrees.

Think and Grow: Measure and Draw Angles

Example
A protractor is a tool for measuring and drawing angles.

Find the measure of ∠STU. Then classify it.
Step 1: Place the center of the protractor on the vertex of the angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 128
Step 2: Align one side of the angle, \(\overrightarrow{T U}\), with 0° mark on the inner scale of the protractor.
Step 3: Find where the other side of the angle, \(\overrightarrow{T S}\), passes through the inner scale.
So, the measure of ∠STU is ___. It is an ___ angle.

Example
Draw ∠ABC that measures 65°.
Step 1: Place the center of the protractor on point. Align \(\overrightarrow{B C}\) with the 0° mark on the inner scale of the protractor.
Step 2: Use the same scale to draw a point at 65°. Label the point A.
Step 3: Use the protractor to draw \(\overrightarrow{B A}\).
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 129

Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the measure of ∠DEF. Then classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 130

Answer:

Question 2.
Use a protractor to draw ∠XYZ that measures 110°.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 131

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the measure of the angle. Then classify it.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 132

Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 133

Answer:

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 5.
25°
Answer:

Question 6.
160°

Answer:

Question 7.
180°
Answer:

Question 8.
48°
Answer:

Question 9.
Writing
Why does one side of the angle you are measuring have to be lined up with the straight side of the protractor?
Answer:
We see two sets of degrees along the edge: an inner and outer scale. Both scales go from 0 to 180, but they run in opposite directions. If the angle opens to the right side of the protractor, use the inner scale. If the angle opens to the left of the protractor, use the outer scale.
To mark 0° on the inner scale of the protractor. So that we can next mark the angle we want to measure.

Question 10.
Precision
Newton says the measure of ∠ABC is 130°. Explain what he did wrong.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 134

Answer:
The ∠ABC is 50 degrees not 130 degrees .
To measure an angle ABC, we place the mid point of the protractor on the vertex B of the angle. The base AB arm falls along with the base line of the protractor as shown in the figure above
The angle is measured on the protractor counting from 0 up to the point where the arm BC lies. In the above figure ∠ABC = 50°.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A contractor builds two roofs. How much greater is the angle measure of Roof A than the angle measure of Roof B?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 135
Use a protractor to measure the angle of each roof.
The angle measure of Roof A is _50°_ and the angle measure of Roof B is _40°__.
Subtract the angle measure of Roof B from the angle measure of Roof A.
_50°__ − _40°__ = _10°__
The angle measure of Roof A is _10°__ greater than the angle measure of Roof B.

Show and Grow0

Question 11.
An inspector compares two ramps. How much greater is the angle measure of Ramp B than the angle measure of Ramp A?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 136
Answer:

Ramp A angle is 10 degrees and Ramp B angle is 20 degrees
Ramp B angle is 10 degrees greater.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
On a trail map, two straight trails intersect. One of the angles formed by the intersection is 70. What are the other three angle measures?
Answer:
A trail is formed with 4 angles.
Sum of the angles in trial = 360°.
if one angle =70°
Sum of other 3 angles = 360° – 70° = 290 °.

Measure and Draw Angles Homework & Practice 13.6

Find the measure of the angle. Then classify it.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 137

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 138

Answer:

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 3.
40°
Answer:

Question 4.
125°
Answer:

Question 5.
Reasoning
Measure the angles of each quadrilateral. What do you notice about the sum of the angle measures of each quadrilateral?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 139
Answer:
The angles of the square are 90° each .
The angles of Quadilateral are two angles are 90°.
And other angles are 50°.
For every quadrilateral, the sum of the interior angles will always be 360°.

Question 6.
Precision
Use a protractor to draw a triangle with the angle measures of 0°. Describe your drawing.
Answer:

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a protractor to draw a triangle with the angle measures of 90°, 35°, and 55°.
Answer:

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A snowboarder compares 2 mountain trails. How much greater is the angle measure of Trail B than the angle measure of Trail A?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 140

Answer:
The angle is 5° greater.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
On a map, there is a Y-intersection where one straight road branches off into two straight roads. One of the angles formed by the intersection measures 45°. Give two possible measures for the other angles formed by the intersection.
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent length

Question 10.
5 km = ___ m.
Answer:
1km = 1000m
5 km = 5 x 1000 m = 5000m

Question 11.
7 m = ___ mm.
Answer:
1m = 1000mm
7 m = 7 x 1000 mm = 7000mm

Lesson 13.7 Add Angle Measures

Explore and Grow

Use a protractor to draw ∠PQR that measures 70°.
Draw another angle that measures 30° and shares side \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q} R}\). Label your angle. How many angles are in your figure? What do you notice about their measures?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 141
Make a copy of ∠PQR. Draw and label a different angle that measures 30° and shares \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q} R}\). How many angles are in your figure? What do you notice about their measures?

Construct Arguments
What conclusions can you make from your figures above?
Answer:
The Above triangle formed is a scalene triangle- has no equal side.

Think and Grow: Add Angle Measures

When an angle is decomposed into parts that do not overlap, the angle measure of the whole equals the sum of the angle measures of the parts.
Two angles are adjacent when they share a common side and a common vertex, but no other points in common. When two or more adjacent angles form a larger angle, the sum of the measures of the smaller angles is equal to the measure of the larger angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 142
Example
Find the measure of ∠WXY.
∠WXY and ∠ZXY are adjacent. The measure of ∠WXZ is equal to the sum of the measures of and ∠ZXY. Complete the equation.
_41°__ + __32°_ = _73°__
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 143
So, the measure of ∠WXY is _73°__.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the equation to find the ∠PQR.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 144

Answer:
∠PQR = ∠PQS +∠SQR
= 43° + 77° =120°

Question 2.
Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to complete the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 145

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 146
Answer:
∠QRS= ∠QRT +∠TRS
= 62° + 19° =81°

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 147

Answer:
∠ABC = ∠ABD +∠DBC
= 66° + 37° =103°

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 148

Answer:
∠MNO = ∠MNQ +∠QNP +∠PNO
= 45° + 87° +22°
=154° .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 149

∠VWX = ∠VWZ +∠ZWY +∠YWX
= 36° + 38° +73°
=147° .

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to write an equation.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 150
Answer:
∠M= ∠LMO +∠OMN +∠LMN
= 100° + 80° +180°
=360°
° .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 151

Answer:
∠W= ∠SWT +∠TWU +∠UWV +∠VWS
= 120° + 60° + 90° + 90°
=360°

Question 9.
Number Sense
The sum of seven adjacent angle measures that share a vertex is 154°. Each angle has the same measure. What is the measure of each angle?
Answer:
The sum of seven equal angles = 154°.
Measure of each angle = 154°/7 = 22°.

Question 10

DIG DEEPER!
∠PRS is adjacent to ∠QRS in Exercise 3. The measure of ∠PRS is 9°. Find the measure of ∠QRP. Classify angle ∠QRP.
Answer:
∠QRP = 9°
Two angles are adjacent when they share a common side and a common vertex, but no other points in common. When two or more adjacent angles form a larger angle, the sum of the measures of the smaller angles is equal to the measure of the larger angle.

Think and Grow : Modeling Real Life

Example
A store installs 3 security cameras on the same light post. Each camera has a viewing angle of 28°. The viewing angles of the cameras are adjacent. What is the total viewing angle of the cameras?
Add the viewing angle measures of the cameras.
28° + 28° + 28° = _84°__
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 152
The total viewing angle of the cameras is __84°_

Show and Grow

Question 11.
A landscaper installs 3 sprinklers in 1 location in the grass. Each sprinkler has a spraying angle of 90°. The spraying angles of the sprinklers are adjacent. What is the total spraying angle of the sprinklers?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 152.1

Answer:
As 3 sprinklers are adjacent all the 3 angles are equal.
Each angle of the sprinkler = 90°
Total spraying angle of the sprinklers= 3 X 90° = 270°

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You use 4 rhombus tiles and 4 trapezoid tiles to make the pattern for a mosaic. Each tile is the same size and shape as a pattern block. What is the measure ∠NUQ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 153
Answer:
As we know th pattern blocks of trapezoid have 60° and rhombus have 30°.
Each tile is the same size and shape as a pattern block
∠NUQ= 30° + 60°+ 60° =150°

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
You make the pattern for a quilt. Each rhombus is the same size and shape. Name all of the 60° angles in the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 154

Answer:
All 60° angles in the pattern = ∠AHC +∠BHD +∠CHE+∠DHF +∠EHG.

Add Angle Measures Homework & Practice 13.7

Write an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 155

Answer:
∠EFG= ∠EFH +∠HFG
= 27° + 44°
=71°

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 156

Answer:
∠JKL= ∠JKM +∠MKL
= 53° + 85°
=138°

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 157

Answer:
∠PQR= ∠PQT +∠TQS +∠SQR
= 68° + 47° +54°
=316°

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 158

Answer:
∠VWX= ∠VWZ +∠ZWY +∠YWX
= 19° + 42° +35°
=96°

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to write an equation.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 159

Answer:

∠D= ∠CDB +∠BDA +∠ADC
= 120° + 60° +180°
=360°

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 160

Answer:
∠N= ∠JNM +∠MNL +∠LNK + ∠KNJ
= 150° + 30°+90° + 90°
=360°

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Is it possible for the sum of two acute adjacent angle measures to be greater than the measure of a right angle? If so, draw a sketch to support your answer.
Answer:
Here ∠ABC and ∠CBD are both acute angles.
∠ABD= ∠ABC +∠CBD
= 60°+60°
=120°
sum of two acute adjacent angle=120° is more than 90° .

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a protractor to measure the angle. Then decompose the angle into 2 parts so that one part is 25° greater than the other. What is the measure of each part?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 161
Answer:
The measure of given angle = 120°
The given angle is divided into two parts one angle is 25° greater than other.
The measure each part = a + ( a + 25°) = 120°
120° – 25° =2a
105° = 2a
a=55.5°
a + 25° = 77.5°

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A carpenter glues 3 identical pieces of wood next to each other to make the table shown. The 30° angles of the pieces of wood are adjacent. What is the total angle of the table formed by the pieces of wood?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 162
Answer:
Angle of each wood piece = 30°
As all angles are adjacent so angle of other wood pieces will be same.
so all 3 angles = 30° each.
Total angles = 3 x 30° = 90° .

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You use 3 triangle pattern blocks and 3 rhombus pattern blocks to make the pattern for an art project. What is the measure of ∠ADE?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 163
Answer:
The pattern block angle of triangle = 60°
The pattern block angle of Rhombus = 60°
∠ADE = ∠ADB + ∠BDE. = 60°+60° =120°

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 164
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 165

Answer:

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 166

Answer:

Lesson 13.8 Find Unknown Angle Measures

Explore and Grow

Draw and label ∠EDF where point F is between the rays of ∠CDE. Explain how you can find the measure of ∠CDF.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 167
Answer:
∠CDE=∠CDF + ∠EDF
= 45 + 45 =90°  (USING PROTACTOR).

Explanation:

Draw and label ∠LMP. Explain how you can find the measure of ∠NMP.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 168
Answer:

Reasoning
Draw Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 169 in your figure above. Explain how you can find all of the angle measures in your figure. What do you notice?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 169is a which bisect the LN. so angles are divided into 2 parts equally. Using protractor we can find the measure of the angles.
This are complementary angles.

Think and Grow: Find Unknown Angle Measures

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 169.1

Example
Find the measure of ∠DEG.
∠DEG and ∠GEF are complementary. The sum of their measures is 90.°
Step 1: Write an equation to find the measure of ∠DEG.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 171

Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Write and solve an equation to find the measure of ∠NLM.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 172

Answer:
Supplementary angles form a straight line and have a sum of 180 degrees.
∠NLM=180°- ∠KLN
= 180° – 62° = 118°

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write and solve an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 172.1
Answer:
Complementary angles form a right angle (L shape) and have a sum of 90 degrees.
∠MKL=90°- ∠MKJ
= 90° – 45° = 45°

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 173
Answer:
Supplementary angles form a straight line and have a sum of 180 degrees.
∠MNP=180°- ∠PNO
= 180° – 22° = 158°

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 174
Answer:
∠TRU= ∠SRQ -∠SRT -∠URQ
= 90° – 30° – 40°
=20°

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 175

Answer:
∠YWZ= ∠XWV -∠VWZ -∠YWX
= 180° – 31°-111°
=38°

Question 6.
Find the measures of ∠AEB, ∠AED, and ∠DEC.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 176

∠AEB= ∠AEC -∠BEC
= 180° – 67° = 113°
∠DEC= ∠DEB -∠BEC
= 180° – 67° = 113°
∠AED= ∠AEC -∠DEC
= 180° – 113° = 67°

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Write and solve equations to find the measure of ∠KMJ.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 177

Answer:
∠KME= ∠KMG -∠GME
= 180° – 124° = 56°
∠KMJ= ∠JME -∠KME
= 90° – 56° = 34°

Question 8.
Writing
Define complementary angles and supplementary angles in your own words.
Answer:
Complementary angles form a right angle (L shape) and have a sum of 90 degrees.
Supplementary angles form a straight line and have a sum of 180 degrees.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The foul lines on a baseball field are perpendicular. A baseball player hits a ball as shown. What is the measure of the angle between the path of the ball and the 1st base foul line?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 178
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
The 3rd base foul line and 1st base foul line are perpendicular.
So, the measure of the angle between the foul lines is _90° __.
Write an equation to find the measure of the angle between the path of the ball and the 1st base foul line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 179

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Runway 1 and Runway 2 are perpendicular. What is the measure of the missing angle between Runway 1 and Runway 3?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 180

Answer:
Angle between Runway 1 and Runway 3= 90 – Angle between Runway 2 and Runway 3.
=90 – 58 =32°

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
What is the measure of the missing g angle between View Street and Elm Street?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 181
Answer:
Angle between View Street and Elm Street=360 – Angle between IIIstreet and view street – Angle between elm street and IIIstreet.
=360- 90 -152
=118°

Find Unknown Angle Measures Homework & Practice 13.8

Write and solve an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
∠JKM
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 182
Answer:
∠JKM= ∠JKL -∠MKL
= 90° – 9° = 81°

Question 2.
∠PNM
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 183

∠PNM= ∠MNO -∠PNO
= 180° – 145° = 35°

Question 3.
∠QRU
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 184
Answer:
∠QRU= ∠QRS -∠URT-∠TRS
= 90°-28° – 13°
=49°

Question 4.
∠ZWV
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 185
Answer:
∠ZWV= ∠VWX -∠ZWY-∠YWX
= 180°- 32° – 24°
=124°

Question 5.
Reasoning
∠ABC and ∠CBD are adjacent. ∠ABC is a right angle.
∠CBD is acute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 186
Answer:
∠ABD=∠ABC-∠CBD
= 90 – 35 = 65°

Question 6.
Structure
Which equations can you use to find the measure of angle ∠MKJ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 187

Answer:
180 – 57 = x

Question 7.
Open-Ended
An acute angle and an obtuse angle are adjacent and supplementary. What might the measures of each angle be?
Answer:

let,  be obtuse angle and  be acute angle.
So, 
That means (obtuse angle) and (acute angle) are supplementary

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Newton bounces a ball off of a wall to Descartes. \(\overline{A D}\)⊥\(\overline{D B}\). The measures of ∠ADC and ∠BDE are equivalent. Find the measures of ∠ADC and ∠BDE.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 188

Answer:
∠ADC and ∠BDE. are equal
∠CDE= ∠ADC + ∠BDE – ∠BDA.
180 = a + a – ∠BDA.
∠BDA.=180 -2a

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Owls see an object with both eyes at the same time using binocular vision. What angle measure describes the owl’s binocular vision? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 189
Answer:
left monocular + Binocular vision = 180
Binocular vision = 180 – 110=70 degrees.

Review & Refresh

Write the fraction as a money amount and as a decimal

Question 10.
\(\frac{49}{100}\)
Answer:
0.49

Question 11.
\(\frac{25}{100}\)
Answer:
0.25

Question 12.
\(\frac{7}{100}\)
Answer:
0.07

Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Performance Task 13

A rural town is expanding and needs to plan the construction of new roads.

Question 1.
What is another name for Main Street?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 190
Answer:
Line AC.

Question 2.
Use the directions to complete the map.
a. Draw Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 191 and label it with a street name of your choice.
b. The library will be at point E on Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 191.1 and on the other side of Main Street as the school. Plot and label the library E at point E.
c. Draw a new road through point E that is perpendicular to Main Street. Label it with a street name of your choice.

Question 3.
City planners want to construct a new residential neighborhood southeast of the town hall.
a. The measure of ∠ABD is \(\frac{1}{6}\) of 360°. What is the measure of the angle?
Answer:
∠ABD=(1/6) x 360 =60 degree.
b. Classify ∠DBC. What is its measure?
Answer:
∠DBC=180 -∠ABD = 180-60 = 120 degrees.
c. Draw a road from point B to the new neighborhood. The road divides ∠DBC exactly in half.
Answer:

Question 4.
Is the distance between the supermarket and the police station more than or less than a mile? Explain.
Answer:
Distance between the supermarket and the police station= AB + BC
= (1/4) + (5/8).
=(2+5)/8
=7/8.=0.8 mile
which is less than 1 mile.

Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Activity

Geometry Dots

Directions:

  1. Players take turns connecting two dots, each using a different color.
  2. On your turn, connect two dots, vertically or horizontally. If you close a square around an angle, find the measure of the angle inside the square. If you do not close a square, your turn is over.
  3. Continue playing until you find all of the angle measures.
  4. The player that finds the most angle measures wins!

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 192

Answer:

Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Chapter Practice 13

13.1 Points, Lines and Rays

Name the figure. Write how to say the name.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 193
Answer:
It is a point said as Point F

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 194
Answer:

It is said as line GH. and represented as GH with overhead arrow.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 195
Answer:
It is a ray JK .It is represented with Over head arrow to left.

Draw and label the figure.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 196
Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 197
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Chapter-Practice 13-13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Question-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 198
Answer:

Use the figure

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 199

Question 7.
Name a line segment.
Answer: CE

Question 8.
Name two different rays.
Answer: CA and  CB.

13.2 Identify and Draw Angles

Question 9.
Write a name for the angle and classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 200
Answer:
∠SRQ. It is a obtuse angle.

Question 10.
∠TUV is a right angle. Draw and label the angle.
Answer:

13.3 Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 11.

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 201

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 202
Answer:

13.4 Understand Degrees

Find the measure of each angle.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 203

Answer:
115°

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 204

Answer:
=(1/5) x(—–/—–)= —-/360.
=72°/360°

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 205

Answer:
=1/4 x 360
=90°

Question 16.
A circle is divided into 12 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts?
Answer:
Number parts divided = 12
Total sum of the angles = 360°
Angle of 1 part = 360°/12. = 30°.
The measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts = 2 x 30°. = 60°.

Question 17.
Which one Doesn’t Belong? Which angle measure does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 206
Answer:
1/6 of a circle = 360/6 = 60°.
60/360 of a circle = 1/6.
60°
1/8 of a circle = 360°/8=45°
Therefore 1/8 of a circle is different.

13.5 Find Angle Measures

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 207

Answer:

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 208

Answer:

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 209
Answer:

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 210

Answer:

 

13.6 Measure and Draw Angles

Question 22.
Find the measure of the angle. Then classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 211

Question 23.
Use a protractor to draw a 45° angle.
Answer:

Modeling Real Life
On a map, two straight railroad tracks intersect. One of the angles formed by the intersection is 30°. What are the three other angle measures?

13.7 Add Angle Measures

Question 25.
Write an equation to find the measure ∠EFG.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 212

Answer:
∠EFG = ∠EFH+∠HFG.
=37° + 48° = 85°.

Question 26.
Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to write an equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 213

Answer:

13.8 Find Unknown Angle Measures

Write and solve an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 214
Answer:
Complementary angles =90°.
∠ABD = ∠ABC-∠DBC.
=90°-27° = 63°.

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 215

Answer:
Supplementary angle =180°
∠HFG = ∠EFG-∠EFH.
=180° + 42° = 38°.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 216

Answer:
Complementary angles =90°.
∠MKL = ∠LKJ-∠MKN-∠NKJ.
=90°-45°-22°= 23°.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 217

Answer:
Supplementary angles =180°.
∠SPR = ∠OPQ-∠OPS-∠RPQ.
=180°-25°-52°= 103°.

Conclusion: 

The solutions provided in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles are prepared by the subject experts. So Download Bigideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles for free and start practicing the problems. Also, bookmark our page to get the Solution Key of Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9

Avail free Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 Answer Key PDF on this page. This handy Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 9th Chapter Add Numbers within 1,000 contains solutions for each and every question in the textbook. Students can download BIM Book Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 Answers PDF and prepare well for the test.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000

Practicing Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Book Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 will help the students who want to score good marks in the examination. We advise you to refer the different topics such as Add 10 and 100, Use a Number Line to Add Hundreds and Tens, Use a Number Line to Add Three-Digit Numbers, Use Compensation to Add Three-Digit Numbers, Use Partial Sums to Add Three-Digit Numbers, Use Models to Add Three-Digit Numbers, Add Three-Digit Numbers, and so on.

By learning all those lessons, students can know various methods of adding numbers below 1000. Students have to work hard right from the beginning days of their school to be strong in the basics of math. Solve all the questions and verify whether your method of solving and the solution is correct or not by checking Big Ideas Math Book Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000. Tap on the link given below to learn that particular concept.

Vocabulary

Lesson 1 Add 10 and 100

Lesson 2 Use a Number Line to Add Hundreds and Tens

Lesson 3 Use a Number Line to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 4 Use Compensation to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 5 Use Partial Sums to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 6 Use Models to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 7 Add Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 8 Add Up to 4 Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 9 Explain Addition Strategies

Performance task 

Add Numbers within 1,000 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 1
Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 2
Answer:

Define It
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 3

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 5

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 v 7

Answer:

Lesson 9.1 Add 10 and 100

Explore and Grow

Model 231. Make a quick sketch of your model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 1
231

Model 10 more than 231. Make a quick sketch of your model.
231 + 10 = _____

Model 100 more than 231. Make a quick sketch of your model.
231 + 100 = _____
Answer:
Model 10 more than 231. Sketch of it:

231 + 10 = 241.

231 + 100 = 331. Sketch of it:

231 + 100 = 331.

Model 100 more than 231.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
317 + 10 = _____
317 + 100 = _____
Answer:
317 + 10 = 327.
317 +100 = 417.

Explanation:

Question 2.
168 + 10 = _____
168 + 100 = _____
Answer:
168 + 10 = 178.
168 + 100 = 268.

Explanation:

.

Question 3.
223 + 10 = _____
223 + 100 = _____
Answer:
223 + 10 = 233.
223 + 100 = 323.

Explanation:

Question 4.
490 + 10 = ____
490 + 100 = _____

Answer:
490 + 10 = 500.
490 + 100 = 590.

Explanation:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
731 + 10 = _____
Answer:
731 + 10 = 741

Explanation:

Question 6.
674 + 100 = _____
Answer:
674 + 100 = 774.

Explanation:

Question 7.
620 + 10 = ____
Answer:
620 + 10 = 630.

Explanation:

Question 8.
713 + 10 = ____
Answer:
713 + 10 = 723.

Explanation:

Question 9.
564 + 100 = _____
Answer:
564 + 100 = 664.

Explanation:

Question 10.
349 + 10 = _____
Answer:
349 + 10 = 359.

Explanation:

Question 11.
456 + 100 = ____
Answer:
456 + 100 = 556.

Explanation:

Question 12.
802 + 100 = _____
Answer:
802 + 100 = 902.

Explanation:

Question 13.
192 + 10 = ____
Answer:
192 + 10 = 202.

Explanation:

Question 14.
900 + 100 = ____
Answer:
900 + 100 = 1000.

Explanation:

Question 15.
349 + ____ = 449
Answer:
349 + 100 = 449.

Explanation:
349 + ??? = 449.
449 – 349 =???
100 = ???
Hence, 349 + 100 = 449.

Question 16.
____ + 10 = 791
Answer:
781 + 10 = 791.

Explanation:
??? + 10 = 791
791-10 = ???
781 = ???
Hence, 781 + 10 = 791.

Question 17.
Number Sense
Use each number once to complete the equations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 2
____ + 10 = ____
_____ + _____ = 512
Answer:
312 + 10 = 322
412 + 10 = 422
100 + 10 = 110
322 + 10 = 332
412 + 100 = 512

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You and a friend play skee ball. Your score is 290. Your friend’s score is 220. On the last roll, you score 10 more and your friend scores 100 more. Who wins?
Addition equations:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 3
You Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
My score = 290
Friends score = 220
In the last roll,10 runs more my score
=> 290+ 10 = 300.
In the last roll,100 runs more my friend score
=> 220 + 100 = 320.
DIFFERENCE:
My friends score – My score=
320 – 300 = 20 runs.
COMPARE:

Hence, my friend wins the match by 20 runs.

Show and Grow

Question 18.
You and a friend play a card game. Your score is 420. Your friend’s score is 530. In the last round, you score 100 more and your friend scores 10 more. Who wins?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 4
You Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
My score = 420
Friends score = 530
In the last round ,100 runs more my score
=> 420+ 100 = 520.
In the last roll,10 runs more my friend score
=> 530 + 10 = 540.
DIFFERENCE:
My friends score – My score=
540 – 520 = 20 .
COMPARE:

Hence, my friend wins the match by 20.

Question 19.
You spin the wheel and score 100 points. Your friend scores 335. On the last spin, you score275 more and your friend scores 10 more. Who wins?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 5
You Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
My score = 100 points
Friends score = 335 points
In the last spin ,275 runs more my score
=> 100+ 275 = 375 points.
In the last spin,10 runs more my friend score
=> 335 + 10 = 345 points.
DIFFERENCE:
My  score – My  friends score=
375 – 345 = 30 points.
COMPARE:

Hence, I win the match by 30points.

Add 10 and 100 Homework & Practice 9.1

Question 1.
850 + 100 = _____
Answer:
850 +100 =950.

Question 2.
625 + 10 = ____
Answer:
625 + 10 = 635.

Question 3.
704 + 10 = ____
Answer:
704 + 10 = 714.

Question 4.
294 + 100 = ____
Answer:
294 + 100 = 394.

Question 5.
556 + 100 = ____
Answer:
556 + 100 = 656.

Question 6.
471 + 100 = _____
Answer:
471 + 100 =571.

Question 7.
308 + 100 = ____
Answer:
308 + 100 =408.

Question 8.
149 + 10 = _____
Answer:
149 + 10 =159.

Question 9.
690 + 10 = ____
Answer:
690 + 10 =700.

Question 10.
990 + 10 = _____
Answer:
990 + 10 =1000.

Question 11.
621 + ____ = 631
Answer:
621 + 10 = 631.

Question 12.
____ + 100 = 613
Answer:
513 + 100 = 613.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that 847 + 10 = 947. Is your friend correct? Explain.
_____________________________
_____________________________
Answer:
Your friend says that 847 + 10 = 947.
847 + 10 = 857.
Hence, my Friend is not correct because the total is 857 not 947.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
You pick 220 blueberries. Your friend picks 200. You pick 10 more and your friend picks 100 more. Who picks more blueberries?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 6
You Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of blueberries I picked up  = 220
Number of blueberries my friend picked up = 200
10 more Blueberries I picked up later
Total number of blueberries I has => 220 + 10 = 230.
100 more Blueberries my Friend picked up later
Total number of blueberries my friends has=>200 + 100 =300.
DIFFERENCE:
Total number of blueberries my friends has  – Total number of blueberries I have
=>300 – 230
=> 70.
COMPARE:

Hence, my friend wins because he has 70 blueberries more than me.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
You download 100 songs. Your friend downloads 125. Then you download 145 more and your friend downloads 10 more. Who downloads more songs?
You Friend
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of songs I downloaded = 100
Number of songs my friend downloaded = 125
Number of songs I downloaded more = 145
Total number of songs I downloaded = 100 + 145 = 245.
Number of songs my friend downloaded more = 10
Total number of songs my friend downloaded = 125 + 10 = 135.
DIFFERENCE:
Total number of songs I downloaded – Total number of songs my friend downloaded
= 245 – 135
= 110.
Hence, I downloaded 110 songs more than my friend.

Review & Refresh

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 7
Answer:
DIFFERENCE:
56 – 8 = 48.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 8
Answer:
DIFFERENCE:
73 – 5 = 68.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.1 9
Answer:
DIFFERENCE:
41 – 26 = 15.

Lesson 9.2 Use a Number Line to Add Hundreds and Tens

Explore and Grow

Show how to skip count by tens five times on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 1
154 + _____ = ____
Answer:

ADDITION:
154 + 5(10)
=154 + 50
= 204.
Hence, 154 + 50 = 204.

Show how to skip count by hundreds five times on the number line.
1Q
154 + _____ = _____
Answer:

ADDITION:
154 + 5(100)
=154 + 500
= 654.
Hence, 154 + 500 = 654.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
380 + 340 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 3
Answer:

ADDITION:
380+ 3(100) +40
= 380 + 300 +40
=680 + 40
= 720.
Hence, 380 + 340 = 720.

Question 2.
462 + 270 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 4
Answer:

ADDITION:
462 +2(100) + 70
=462 + 200 + 70
= 662 + 70
=732.
Hence, 462 + 270 = 732.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
550 + 210 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 5
Answer:

ADDITION:
550 + 2(100) + 10
= 550 + 200 + 10
= 750 + 10
= 760.
Hence, 550 + 210 = 760.

Question 4.
725 + 160 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 6
Answer:

ADDITION:
725 + 100 + 60
=825 + 60
=885.
Hence, 725 + 160 = 885.

Question 5.
469 + 350 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 7
Answer:

ADDITION:
469 + 3( 100) + 50
= 469 + 300 +50
=769 + 50
=819.
Hence, 469 + 350 = 819.

Question 6.
Reasoning
Complete the number line and the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 8
____ + ____ = _____
Answer:

ADDITION:
720 + 100 + 100
=820 + 100
=920.
SUBTRACTION:
960 -920 = 40
Hence, 720 + 100 +100 +40 =960.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A post office has 330 large envelopes and some small envelopes. There are560 envelopes in all. How many small envelopes are there?
Addition equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 9
______ small envelopes
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of large envelopes post office has = 330
Total number of envelopes post office has = 560
Number of small envelopes post office has = ???
=> Total number of envelopes post office has  – Number of large envelopes post office has
=> 560 – 330 = 230.

Hence, Number of small envelopes post office has = 230.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
A postal carrier delivers 280 letters and some post cards. She delivers 390 pieces of mail in all. How many postcards does she deliver?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 10
_____ postcards
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of letters delivered by postal carrier = 280
Total Number of pieces mails delivered by the postal carrier = 390
Number of postcards delivered by the postal carrier = ???
=>Total Number of pieces mails delivered by the postal carrier  –  Number of letters delivered by postal carrier
=>  390 – 280 = 110.
Hence, the number of postcards delivered by the postal carrier = 110.

Question 8.
There are some children and 180 adults on a subway. There are 300 passengers in all. How many children are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 11
_____ children
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of adults on the subway = 180
Total number of passengers on the subway = 300
Number of children on the subway = ???
=> Total number of passengers on the subway – Number of adults on the subway
=> 300 – 180
=> 120.
Hence, the Number of children on the subway = 120.

Use a Number Line to Add Hundreds and Tens Homework & Practice 9.2

Question 1.
150 + 610 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 12
Answer:

ADDITION:
150 + 6(100) + 10
=> 150 +600 + 10
=> 750 +10
=>760.
Hence, 150 + 610 = 760.

Question 2.
291 + 450 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 13
Answer:

ADDITION:
291 + 4(100) + 5(10)
=> 291 + 400 +50
=> 691 + 50
=> 741.
Hence, 291 + 450 = 741.

Question 3.
553 + 250 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 14
Answer:

ADDITION:
553 +2(100) +5(10)
=>553 + 200 + 50
=>753 + 50
=>803.
Hence, 553 + 250 = 803.

Question 4.
Number Sense
Write the equation shown by the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 15
____ + ____ = ______
Answer:
ADDITION:
430 + 100  +100  +100 + 10 + 10
=>530 +100+ 100 + 10 + 10
=> 630 + 100 + 10 + 10
=> 730 +  10 + 10
=> 740 + 10
=> 750.
Hence, 430 + 100  +100  +100 + 10 + 10 = 750.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A carpenter has 320 nails and some screws. There are 470 nails and screws in all. How many screws are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 16
______ screws
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of nails a carpenter has = 320
Total number of nails and screws a carpenter has = 470
Number of screws a carpenter has = ??
SUBTRACTION:
Number of screws a carpenter has = Total number of nails and screws a carpenter has – Number of nails a carpenter has
= 470 – 320
=150.
Hence, Number of screws a carpenter has = 150.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
A concession stand sells some drinks and 260 hot dogs. There were 400 drinks and hot dogs sold in all. How many drinks were sold?
______ drinks
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of hot dogs a concession stand sells = 260
Total number of drink a concession stand sold = 400
Number of drinks sold = ??
SUBTRACTION:
Number of drinks sold = Total number of drink a concession stand sold – Number of hot dogs a concession stand sells
= 400 – 260
= 140.
Hence, Number of drinks sold = 140.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Show 416 two ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.2 17
Answer:
ONE WAY: TABLE WAY

ADDITION:
=> 4(100) + 1(10)  + 6(1)
=> 400 + 10 + 6
=> 410 + 6
=>416.
OTHER WAY: NUMBER LINE WAY

ADDITION:
0+4(100) +1(10) + 6(1)
= 0 + 400 + 10 + 6
= 400 + 10 + 6
= 410 + 6
= 416.

Lesson 9.3 Use a Number Line to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Use each sum as the missing addend in the next equation.
425 + 200 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 1

How does this help you find 425 + 222?
___________________
____________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
To Find 425 + 222 = ???
ADDITION:
425 + 200 = 625.

625 + 20 = 645.

645 + 2 = 647.

Hence, 425 + 222 = 647.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
371 + 145 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 2
Answer:

ADDITION:
371 + 100 +45
= 471 + 45
= 516.
Hence, 371 + 145 = 516.

Question 2.
419 + 237 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 3
Answer:

ADDITION:
419 + 100 + 100 + 37
=519 + 100 + 37
=619 +37
= 656.
Hence, 419 + 237 = 656.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
524 + 312 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 4
Answer:

ADDITION:
524 + 100 + 100 + 100 +12
= 624 + 100 + 100 +12
= 724 + 100 +12
= 824 + 12
= 836.
Hence, 524 + 312 = 836.

Question 4.
645 + 108 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 5
Answer:

ADDITION:
645 + 100 + 8
= 745 + 8
= 753.
Hence, 645 + 108 = 753.

Question 5.
836 + 74 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 6
Answer:

ADDITION:
836 + 74
= 910.
Hence, 836 + 74 = 910.

Question 6.
Number Sense
Write the equation shown by the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 7
_____ + ______ = ______
Answer:
EQUATION:
326+ 200 + 50 + 2
= 526 +  50 + 2
= 576 + 2
=578.
Hence, 326+ 200 + 50 + 2 = 578.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 289 boys and 323 girls running in a race. How many runners are there in all?
Addition equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 8
_____ runners
Answer:
Number of boys running in the race = 289
Number of girls running in the race = 323
Total Number of runners in all = ???
ADDITION:
Total Number of runners in all = Number of boys running in the race – Number of girls running in the race
= 289 + 323
= 612.

Hence, Total Number of runners in all = 612.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
A textbook has 478 pages in Volume 1 and443 pages in Volume 2. How many pages are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 9
_____ pages
Answer:
Total number of pages in the text book = 921.
Number of pages in Volume 1 in the text book = 478
Number of pages in Volume 2 in the text book = 443
Total number of pages in the text book = ???
ADDITION:
Total number of pages in the text book = Number of pages in Volume 1 in the text book + Number of pages in Volume 2 in the text book
= 478 + 443
= 921.
Hence, the total number of pages in the text book = 921.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
The pictures show your fitness tracker before and after you take a walk. How many steps did you take on your walk?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 10
_____ steps

Answer:
Total number of steps taken in the walk = 1027.

Explanation:
GIVEN:
Number of steps took after = 132
Number of steps took after = 895
Total number of steps taken in the walk = ???
ADDITION:
Total number of steps taken in the walk = Number of steps took after + Number of steps took after
= 132 + 895
= 1027.
Hence, Total number of steps taken in the walk = 1027.

Use a Number Line to Add Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.3

Question 1.
291 + 407 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 11
Answer:
291 + 407 = 698.

Explanation:

ADDITION:
291 + 100 +100 + 100 + 100 + 7
= 391 + 100 + 100 + 100 + 7
= 491 + 100 + 100 + 7
= 591 + 100 + 7
= 691 + 7
= 698.
Hence, 291 + 407 =698.

Question 2.
752 + 138 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 12
Answer:
752 + 138 = 890.

Explanation:

ADDITION:
752 + 100 + 38
= 852 + 38
= 890.
Hence, 752 + 138 = 890.

Question 3.
372 + 319 =_____
 Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 13
Answer:
372 + 319 = 691.

Explanation:

ADDITION:
372 + 100 + 100 + 100 + 19
= 472 + 100 + 100 + 19
= 572 + 100 + 19
= 672 + 19
= 691.
Hence, 372 + 319 = 691.

Question 4.
Structure
Use the number lines to show 257 + 321 two ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 14
257 + 321 = _____
Answer:
257 + 321 = 578.

Explanation:
ONE WAY: NUMBERLINE REPRESENTATION

OTHER WAY: EQUATION WAY REPRESENTATION:
257 + 100 + 100 + 100 + 21
= 357 + 100 + 100 + 21
= 457+ 100 + 21
= 557 + 21
= 578.
Hence, 257 + 321 = 578.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A florist has 416 daisies and152 roses. How many flowers are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 15
______ flowers
Answer:
Total number of flowers a florist has = 568.

GIVEN:
Number of daisies a florist has = 416
Number of roses a florist has = 152
Total number of flowers a florist has = ???

Explanation:
ADDITION:
Total number of flowers a florist has = Number of daisies a florist has
Number of roses a florist has
= 416 + 152
= 568.
Hence, Total number of flowers a florist has = 568.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
A school has 872 students.139 students are in the second grade. How many students are not in second grade?
______ students
Answer:
Number of students not in second grade = 733.

GIVEN:
Total number of students present in school =872
Number of students in second grade = 139
Number of students not in second grade = ???

Explanation:
SUBTRACTION:
Number of students not in second grade = Total number of students present in school – Number of students in second grade
= 872 – 139
= 733.
Hence, Number of students not in second grade = 733.

Review & Refresh

Draw more lines to show fourths.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 16
Answer:

Explanation:
1/4 of the figure is shaded.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.3 17
Answer:

Explanation:
3/4 of the figure is shaded.

Lesson 9.4 Use Compensation to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Add to the model to make 300. Make a quick sketch of your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 1
Answer:
What number did you add to make 300? _____
How can this help you find 296 + 124?
____________________
____________________

GIVEN:
In the figure given, the number count is 296.
given number = 300
what should be added to 296 to make 300?
SUBTRACTION:
300 – 296 = 4.

Hence, 4 should b added to 296 to make it 300.

This help in the calculating the sum easily .
296 + 124 = 420.

 

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use compensation to add.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 2
Answer:
GIVEN:
294 + 148 =??
Add 6 to 294.
subtract 6 from 148.
294 + 148
+6        -6
300 + 142 = 442.
Hence, 294 + 148 = 442.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use compensation to add.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 3
Answer:
GIVEN:
628 + 206 = ???
Add 2 to 628
Subtract 2 from 206.
628  +  206
+  2        – 2
630  +   204 = 834.
Hence, 628 + 206 = 834.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 4
Answer:
703 + 145 =???
Add 5 to 145.
Subtract 5 from 703.
703 + 145
–  5     + 5
698 +  150 = 848.
Hence, 703 + 145 = 848.

Question 4.
490 + 367 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 5
____ + ____ = _____
Answer:
490 + 367 =??
Add 3 to 367.
Subtract 3 from 490.
490  +  367
–  3       + 3
487  +  370 = 857.
Hence, 490 + 367 = 857.

Question 5.
172 + 520 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 6
_____ + _____ = ______
Answer:
172 + 520 =???
Add 8 to 172.
Subtract 8 from 520.
172   +    520
+ 8         –   8
180   +    512 =  692.
Hence, 172 + 520 = 692.

Question 6.
614 + 275 = ______
Answer:
614  + 275 =???
Add 6 to 614.
Subtract 6 from 275.
614    +   275
+6           –  6
620    +   269 = 889.
Hence,  614 + 275 =889.

Question 7.
308 + 549 = _____
Answer:
308 + 549 = ???
Add 2 to 308.
Subtract 2 from 549.
308   +    549
+2            – 2
310   +    547 = 857.
Hence, 308 + 549 = 857.

Question 8.
Reasoning
Show two different ways to use compensation to find 406 + 113.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 7
Answer:
ONE WAY:
406 + 113 = ??
Add 4 to 406.
Subtract 4 from 113.
406     +    113
+ 4            –  4
410     +    109 = 519.

OTHER WAY:
406 + 113 = ???
Add 7 to 113.
Subtract 7 from 406.
406     +    113
–  7            + 7
399   +      120 = 519.
Hence, 399 + 120 = 519.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You want to raise $500 in 2 days. Do you reach your goal?
Addition equation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 8
Yes     No
Answer:
GIVEN:
You want to raise $500 in 2 days.
Amount raised in day 1 = $283
Amount raised in day 2 = $205
ADDITION:
Total amount raised in day 1 and day 2 = $283 + $205 = $ 488.
SUBTRACTION:
Amount to be raised in two days = $500
Difference in amount = Amount to be raised in two days – Total amount raised in day 1 and day 2
= $500 – $488
= $2.
Hence, more $2 required to reach the goal.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
A museum wants a weekend total of 700 guests. Does the museum reach the goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 9
Yes No
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total guests in the museum = 700
Number of guests on Saturday = 338
Number of guests on Sunday = 389
ADDITION
Total number of guests on Saturday and Sunday = 338 + 389 = 727
SUBTRACTION:
Difference in the guests total = Total number of guests on Saturday and Sunday – Total guests in the museum
= 727 – 700 = 27.
Hence, the museum reaches the goal by 27 guests more.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You want to score 400 in 3 bowling games. What score do you need in the third game to reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 10
Answer:
Score to be needed  in 3 bowling games = 400
Score in game 1 = 107
Score in game 2 = 144
ADDITION:
Total score in game 1 and game 2 = 107 + 144 = 251.
SUBTRACTION:
Score needed in the third game to reach your goal = score to be needed  in 3 bowling games – Total score in game 1 and game 2
= 400 – 251
= 149.
Hence, Score needed in the third game to reach your goal = 149.

Use Compensation to Add Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.4

Use compensation to add.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 11
Answer:
393 + 122 = ???
Add 7 to 393.
Subtract 7 from 122.
393   +   122
+7          –  7
400    +  115 = 515.
Hence, 393 + 122 = 515.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 12
Answer:
GIVEN:
106 + 614 =???
Add 4 to 106.
Subtract 4 from 614.
106     +    614
+4              – 4
110     +    610 = 720.
Hence, 106 + 614 = 720.

Question 3.
237 + 315 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 13
_____ + _____ = ______
Answer:
GIVEN:
237 + 315 = ???
Add 3 to 237
Subtract 3 from 315
237   +   315
+ 3          –  3
240   +   312 = 552.
Hence, 237 + 315 = 552.

Question 4.
285 + 320 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 14
_____ + _____ = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
285  +  320 ==?
Add 5 to 285
Subtract 5 from 320
285   +  320
+ 5         – 5
290   +  315 = 605.
Hence, 285 + 320 = 605.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses compensation to find 550 + 298. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 15
Answer:
GIVEN:
550 + 298 = 852
550   +  298
Add 2 to 298
Subtract 2 from 550
550   +   298
– 2         +  2
552   +   300 = 852.
Hence, my friend compensation is correct because 550 + 298 = 852.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Newton wants to read 571 pages in two weeks. He reads 321 pages in the first week and196 pages in the second week. Does he reach his goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 16
Yes No
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number pages newton wants to read in two weeks = 571
Number of pages he read in first week = 321
Number of pages he read in second week = 196
Did he reach his goal ??
ADDITION:
Total number of pages he read in first week and second week = 321 + 196 = 517
SUBTRACTION:
Number of pages left for reading by newton =  Total number pages newton wants to read in two weeks – Total number of pages he read in first week and second week
= 571 – 517
= 54.
Hence ,No Newton did not reach his goal because he read only 517 pages out of 571 pages.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
You need 850 points to get to level 4 in a video game. How many points do you need in level 3to reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 17
______ points
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total points to go into level 4 in a video game = 850
Scored points in level 1 = 348
Scored points in level 2 = 297
Needed points in level 3 =???
ADDITION:
Total points scored in both level 1 and level 2 in a video game = 348 +297 = 645.
SUBTRACTION:
Needed points in level 3 = Total points to go into level 4 in a video game – Total points scored in both level 1 and level 2 in a video game
= 850 – 645
= 205.
Hence, Needed points in level 3 = 205.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 18
Answer:
SUBTRACTION:
95 – 38 = 57.
Hence, difference of 95 – 38 = 57.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 19
Answer:
SUBTRACTION:
82 – 40 = 42.
Hence, difference of 82 – 40 = 42.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.4 20
Answer:
SUBTRACTION:
59 -21 =38.
Hence, difference of 59 -21 = 38.

Lesson 9.5 Use Partial Sums to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Model each number. Make quick sketches of your models. Then solve.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 1
_____ + ____ = _____
324 + 215 = _____
Answer:

Hence, 324 + 215 = 539.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 2
Answer:

236 + 359 = ???
236 + 359 = 695.
Hence,  Sum of 236 + 359 = 695.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 3
Answer:

582 + 173 =???
582 + 173 = 755.
Hence, Sum of 582 + 173 = 755.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 4
Answer:

364 + 432 = ???
364 + 432 = 796.
Hence, Sum of 364 + 432 = 796.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 5
Answer:

454  + 488 = ???
454  + 488 = 942.
Hence, Sum of 454  + 488 = 942.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 6
Answer:

145 + 341 = ???
145 + 341 = 486.
Hence, Sum of 145 + 341 = 486.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 7
Answer:

576 + 248 = ???
576 + 248 = 824.
Hence, Sum of 576 + 248 = 824.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 8
Answer:

217 + 435 =???
217 + 435 = 652.
Hence, Sum of  217 + 435 = 652.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 9
Answer:

532 + 129 = ???
532 + 129 = 661.
Hence, sum of 532 + 129 = 661.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 10
Answer:

651 + 237 = ???
651 + 237 = 888.
Hence, Sum of 651 + 237 = 888.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 11
Answer:

779 + 130 = ???
779 + 130 = 909.
Hence, Sum of 779 + 130 = 909.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 12
Answer:

362 + 217 = ???
362 + 217 = 579.
Hence, Sum of 362 + 217 = 579.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 13
Answer:

806 + 115 = ???
806 + 115 = 921.
Hence, Sum of 806 + 115 = 921.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 14
Answer:

448 + 312 = ???
448 + 312 = 760.
Hence, Sum of 448 + 312 = 760.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 15
Answer:

581 + 243 = ???
581 + 243 = 824.
Hence, Sum of 581 + 243 = 824.

Question 15.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which expression does not belong with the other three?
200 + 300 + 50 + 20 + 5 + 6
581
500 + 70 + 11
500 + 80 + 5 + 6
Answer:
Expression 1:
200 + 300 + 50 + 20 + 5 + 6
=500 + 50 + 20 + 5 + 6
= 550 + 20 + 5 + 6
= 570 + 5 + 6
= 575 + 6
= 581.
Expression 2:
581
Expression 3:
500 + 70 + 11
= 570 + 11
= 581.
Expression 4:
500 + 80 + 5 + 6
=580 + 5 +6
= 585 + 6
= 591.
Hence, Expression 4 does not belong with the other three Expressions because the number given is not matching other three answers..

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A video rental store has 348 fewer video games than movies. There are 116 video games. How many movies are there?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 16
_____ movies
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of video games a video rental store has= 116
Let the number of movies be X
Difference of video games and movies = 348
EQUATION:
X – 116 = 348
=> X = 348 + 116
=> X = 464.


Hence, the number of movies rental store has = 464.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
A library has 477 fewer magazines than books. There are 243 magazines. How many books are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 17
____ books
Answer:
GIVEN:
Let the number of books = X
Number of magazines = 243
Difference of books and magazines = 477
EQUATION:
=> X – 243 = 477
=> X = 477 +243
=> X = 720
Hence, total number of books in the library = 720.

Question 17.
A clothing store has some shirts on hangers. There are 214 shirts on shelves. The store has 356 shirts in all. How many shirts are on hangers?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 18
_____ shirts
Answer:
Number of shirts in all clothing store has = 356
Number of shirts on shelves = 214
Number of shirts on hangers = ???
SUBTRACTION:
Number of shirts on hangers = Number of shirts in all clothing store has – Number of shirts on shelves
= 356 -214 = 142.
Hence, Number of shirts on hangers = 142.

Use Partial Sums to Add Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 19
Answer:

ADDITION:
442 + 215 = 657.
Hence, Sum of 442 + 215 = 657.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 20
Answer:

ADDITION:
336 +465 = 801.
Hence, Sum of 336 +465 = 801.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 21
Answer:

ADDITION:
451 + 401 = 852.
Hence, Sum of 451 + 401 = 852.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 22
Answer:

ADDITION:
371 +248 = 619.
Hence, Sum of 371 +248 = 619.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 23
Answer:

ADDITION:
672 + 283 = 955.
Hence, Sum of 672 + 283 = 955.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 24
Answer:

ADDITION:
527 + 106 = 633.
Hence, Sum of 527 + 106 = 633.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
Hundreds = 7
Tens = 0
Ones = 8
EXPLANATION:
— 4  5
+ 3 —  3
= 7  0  8
4 + 6 = 10
1 + 3 + 3 =7
MISSING NUMBERS ARE :
Hundreds place = 3
tens place = 6
ADDITION: 345 + 363 = 708.
Hence, missing numbers are 3 and 6.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
There are 180 fewer muffins than rolls. There are 425 muffins. How many rolls are there?
______ rolls
Answer:
Total number of muffins = 425
Let the number of rolls be X
Difference  in the muffins and rolls = 180
EQUATION:
X – 180 = 425
=> X = 425 – 180
=> X = 245
Hence, the number of rolls = 245.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A truck driver drives 672 miles on Monday. He drives some more miles on Tuesday. He drives 954 miles in all. How many miles did he drive on Tuesday?
_____ miles
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of miles driver drove on Monday = 672
Number of miles driver drove in all = 954
Number of miles driver drove on Tuesday = ???
SUBTRACTION:
Number of miles driver drove on Tuesday = Number of miles driver drove in all – Number of miles driver drove on Monday
= 954 – 672
= 282.
Hence, Number of miles driver drove on Tuesday = 282.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
Circle the closed shapes with only 3 vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.5 26
Answer:

Hence, shapes having only 3 vertices are circled.

Lesson 9.6 Use Models to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Model to solve. Make a quick sketch of your model.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 1
Answer:
GIVEN:
327 + 458 =???
ADDITION:

327 + 458 = 785.
Hence, Sum of 327 + 458 = 785.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
383 + 255 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 2
Answer:
GIVEN:
383 + 255 = ???
ADDITION:

383 + 255 = 638.
Hence, Sum of 383 + 255 = 638.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
238 + 354 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 3
Answer:
GIVEN:
238 + 354 = ???
ADDITION:

238 + 354 = 592.
Hence, Sum of 238 + 354 = 592.

Question 3.
692 + 147 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 4
Answer:
GIVEN:
692 + 147 = ???
ADDITION:

692 + 147 =  839
Hence, sum of 692 + 147 = 839.

Question 4.
553 + 250 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 5
Answer:
GIVEN:
553 + 250 = ???
ADDITION:

553 + 250 =  803.
Hence, Sum of 553 + 250 =  803.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your school wants to collect 750 canned goods. Your school collects 432 cans of soup and386 cans of vegetables. Does your school reach the goal? Explain.
Models:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 6
Yes No
____________________
____________________
Answer:
Number of canned goods school wants to collect   = 750
Number of cans of soup school collected =  432
Number of cans of vegetables school collected = 386
ADDITION:
Total number of cans of soup and cans of vegetables school collected
= 432 + 386 = 818.

SUBTRACTION:
Number of canned goods school wants to collect  –  Total number of cans of soup and cans of vegetables school collected
= 818 – 750
= 68.
Yes, school reached its goal by 68 more than its wanted goods.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
A charity needs 600 volunteers. 328 people sign up on Saturday and 219 people sign up on Sunday. Are there enough volunteers? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 7
Yes No
______________________
______________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of volunteers in a charity = 600
Number of people signed up on Saturday = 328
Number of people signed up on Sunday = 219
ADDITION:
Total number of people signed up on  Saturday and Sunday = 328 + 219 = 547.
NO, there are not enough volunteers because:
SUBTRACTION:
Total number of volunteers in a charity – Total number of people signed up on  Saturday and Sunday
= 600 – 547
= 53.
Hence, no there are not enough because 53 more people are required to sign up into the charity.

Use Models to Add Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.6

Question 1.
614 + 250 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 8
Answer:
GIVEN:
614 + 250 = ???
ADDITION:

614 + 250 = 864.
Hence, 614 + 250 = 864.

Question 2.
192 + 717 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 9
Answer:
GIVEN:
192 + 717 = ???
ADDITION:

192 + 717 = ???
Hence, Sum of 192 + 717 = 909.

Question 3.
Open-Ended
Complete the addition problem so that you need to regroup to add.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 10
Answer:
GIVEN:
235 + 32? = ???
ADDITION:

253 + 325 = 578.
REGROUPING OF NUMBERS:
Add 7 to 235.
Subtract 7 from 325.
253    +     325
+  7           –   7
260    +     318 = 578.
Hence, Sum of 253 + 325 = 578.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
The cafeteria needs 700 trays. They have 312 brown trays and 342 orange trays. Does the cafeteria have enough trays? Explain.
Yes No
_____________________________
_____________________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of trays cafeteria needs = 700
Number of brown trays cafeteria has = 312
Number of  orange trays cafeteria has = 342
ADDITION:
Total  number of brown and orange trays cafeteria has = 312 + 342 = 654
SUBTRACTION:
Total number of trays cafeteria needs – Total  number of brown and orange trays cafeteria has
= 700 – 654
= 46.
Hence, there are no enough trays in the cafeteria.46 more trays the cafeteria needs.

Review & Refresh

Draw to show the time.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 11
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.6 12
Answer:

Lesson 9.7 Add Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Find each sum.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 1
Answer:
GIVEN:
445 + 254 = ???
253 + 318 = ???
627 + 194 =???
ADDITION:

445 + 254 = 699
253 + 318 =  571
627 + 194 = 821
Hence, Sum of 445 + 254 = 699
253 + 318 =  571
627 + 194 = 821.

Compare the problems. How are they the same? How are they different?
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
They are same with the process of adding and they are different in the results.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 2
Answer:
GIVEN:
184+438 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, sum of 184+438 = 622.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 3
Answer:
GIVEN:
227 + 267 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 227 + 267 = 494.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 4
Answer:
GIVEN:
421 + 354 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 421 + 354 = 775.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 5
Answer:
GIVEN:
279 + 514 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 279 + 514 = 793.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 6
Answer:
GIVEN:
313 + 288 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 313 + 288 = 601.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 7
Answer:
GIVEN:
396 + 156 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 396 + 156 = 552.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 8
Answer:
GIVEN:
659 + 258 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 659 + 258 = 917.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 9
Answer:
GIVEN:
463 + 485 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 463 + 485 = 948.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 10
Answer:
GIVEN:
298 + 378 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 298 + 378 = 676.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 11
Answer:
GIVEN:
245 + 605 = ???
ADDITION:

245 + 605 = 810
Hence, Sum of 245 + 605 = 810.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 12
Answer:
GIVEN:
450 + 291 = ???
ADDITION:

450 + 291 = 741.
Hence, Sum of 450 + 291 = 741.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 13
Answer:
GIVEN:
198 + 527 = ???
ADDITION:

198 + 527 = 725.
Hence, Sum of 198 + 527 = 725.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 14
Answer:
GIVEN:
742 + 116 = ???
ADDITION:

742 + 116 = 858.
Hence, Sum of 742 + 116 = 858.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 15
Answer:
GIVEN:
537 + 176 = ???
ADDITION:

537 + 176 = 713.
Hence, Sum of 537 + 176 = 713.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 16
Answer:
GIVEN:
382 + 351 = ???
ADDITION:

382 + 351 = 733.
Hence, Sum of 382 + 351 = 733.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 17
Answer:
GIVEN:
463 + 194 = ???
ADDITION:

463 + 194 = 657.
Hence, Sum of 463 + 194 = 657.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 18
Answer:
GIVEN:
186 + 567 = ???
ADDITION:

186 + 567 = 753.
Hence, Sum of 186 + 567 = 753.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 19
Answer:
GIVEN:
623 + 298 = ???
ADDITION:

623 + 298 = 921.
Hence, Sum of 623 + 298 = 921.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 20
Answer:
GIVEN:
462 + ___43 = 705.
SUBTRACTION:
=> 705 – 462 = 243.

1___7 + 115 = 252.
SUBTRACTION:
=> 252 – 115 = 137.

395 + 14___ = 540.
SUBTRACTION:
=> 540 – 395 = 145.

Hence, Sum of  462 + 343 = 705.
147 + 115 = 252.
395 + 145 = 540.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A puzzle has 540 pieces. You put 254 pieces together. Your friend puts 286 pieces together. Did you and your friend use all of the pieces?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 21
Addition equation:
Yes         No
Answer:
Total number of pieces the puzzles has = 540
Number of pieces kept together by me = 254
Number of pieces kept together by my Friend = 286
ADDITION:
Total number of pieces kept together = Number of pieces kept together by me + Number of pieces kept together by my Friend
= 254 + 286
= 540.
Hence, my friend and me used all the pieces of puzzle.
Yes ,its a addition equation.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
A sticker book has 800 stickers. You use 413 of them. Your friend uses 377. Did you and your friend use all of the stickers?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 22
Yes No
Answer:
Total number of stickers a sticker book has = 800
Number of stickers used by me =413
Number of stickers used by my Friend = 377
ADDITION:
Total number of stickers used = Total number of stickers used by me and my Friend
= 413 + 377 = 790.
Number of stickers remaining = Total number of stickers a sticker book has – Total number of stickers used by me and my Friend
= 800 -790
= 10.
Number of stickers remaining = 10.
Hence, NO we did not use all stickers. There are 10 more stickers to be used.

Question 21.
A bus has 850 miles to travel. How many miles does the bus have left to travel?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 23
______ miles
Answer:
Total number of miles the bus travels = 850
Number of miles bus travelled on day 1 = 423
Number of miles bus travelled on day 2 = 417
ADDITION:
Number of miles bus travelled on day 1 and day 2 = 423 + 417 = 840.
DIFFERENCE:
Number of miles left out for the bus to travel =Total number of miles the bus travels – Number of miles bus travelled on day 1 and day 2
= 850 – 840
= 10.
Hence, Number of miles left out for the bus to travel =10.

Add Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.7

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 24
Answer:
GIVEN:
341 + 278 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 341 + 278 = 619.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
705 + 126 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 705 + 126 = 831.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 26
Answer:
GIVEN:
582 + 249 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of  582 + 249 = 831.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 27
Answer:
GIVEN:
573 + 338 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 573 + 338 = 911.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 28
Answer:
GIVEN:
264 + 310 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 264 + 310 = = 574.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 29
Answer:
GIVEN:
516 + 156 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 516 + 156 = 672.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 30
Answer:
GIVEN:
490 + 137 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 490 + 137 = 627.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 31
Answer:
GIVEN:
625 + 297 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 625 + 297 = = 922.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 32
Answer:
GIVEN:
364 + 386 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 364 + 386 = 750.

Question 10.
Open-Ended
Complete the addition problem so that you do not need to regroup to add.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 33
Answer:
GIVEN:
256 + 3____3 = ???

Missing number = 4
ADDITION:
256 + 343 = 599.
Hence, Sum of 256 + 343 = 599.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
The art room has 645 markers. One class is using 312 markers. Another class is using 209. Are both classes using all the markers?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 34
Yes No
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of Markers art room has = 645
Number of markers one class using = 312
Number of markers another class using = 209
ADDITION:
Total Number of markers used by one class and another class = 312 + 209 = 521
SUBTRACTION:
Number of markers unused = Number of Markers art room has – Total Number of markers used by one class and another class
= 645 – 521
= 124.
Hence, Number of markers unused = 124.
NO, all markers are not used.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
340 water balloons need to be filled. You fill 122 and your friend fills 145. How many more water balloons need to be filled?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.7 35
____ water balloons
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of balloons needed to be filled = 340
Number of balloons filled by me = 122
Number of balloons filled by my friend = 145
ADDITION:
Total Number of balloons filled by me and my friend = 122 + 145 =  267.
SUBTRACTION:
Number of balloons more to be filled = Number of balloons needed to be filled – Total Number of balloons filled by me and my friend
= 340 – 267
= 73.
Hence, Number of balloons more to be filled = 73.

Review & Refresh

Use place value to find the missing numbers.
Question 13.
324, 325, ____, 327, _____, _____, ______
Answer:
GIVEN:
324, 325, ____, 327, _____, _____, ______
SUBTRACTION:
=> 325 – 324 = 1  (PLACE VALUE)
ADDITION:
325 + 1 = 326
327 + 1 = 328
328 + 1 = 329
329 + 1 = 330
Hence, the missing number sequence =324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330.

Question 14.
463, 473, ____, 493, ____, _____, ______
Answer:
GIVEN:
463, 473, ____, 493, ____, _____, ______
SUBTRACTION:
=> 473- 463 = 10(PLACE VALUE)
ADDITION:
463 + 10 = 473
473 + 10 = 483
483 + 10 = 493
493 + 10 = 503
503 + 10 = 513
513 + 10 = 523
Hence, the missing number sequence = 463, 473, 483, 493, 503, 513, 523.

Lesson 9.8 Add Up to 4 Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Use any strategy to solve.
Newton has 19 red balloons, 23 green balloons,31 yellow balloons, and 17 blue balloons. How many balloons does he have in all?
_____ balloons
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of red balloons Newton has = 19
Number of green balloons Newton has = 23
Number of yellow balloons Newton has = 31
Number of blue balloons Newton has = 17
ADDITION:
Total number of balloons Newton has = Number of red balloons Newton has + Number of green balloons Newton has + Number of yellow balloons Newton has  + Number of blue balloons Newton has
= 19 + 23 + 31 + 17
= 42 + 31 + 17
= 73 + 17
= 90.
Hence, Total number of balloons Newton has = 90.

Compare your strategy to your partner’s strategy. How are your strategies the same? How are they different?
______________________
_______________________
Answer:
Strategy of mine and my friends are different yet the process to calculate the sum of the numbers is same.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 1
Answer:
GIVEN:
26 + 88 + 32 = ???
ADDITION:
26 + 88 + 32
= 114 + 32
= 146.
Hence, Sum of 26 + 88 + 32 = 146.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 2
Answer:
GIVEN:
60 + 15 + 55 = ???
ADDITION:
60 + 15 + 55
= 75 + 55
= 130.
Hence, Sum of 60 + 15 + 55 = 130.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 3
Answer:
GIVEN:
77 + 96 +24 = ???
ADDITION:
77 + 96 +24
= 173 + 24
= 197.
Hence, Sum of 77 + 96 +24 = 197.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 4
Answer:
GIVEN:
57 + 13 + 33+ 48 = ???
ADDITION:
57 + 13 + 33+ 48
= 70 + 33+ 48
= 103 + 48
= 151.
Hence, Sum of 57 + 13 + 33+ 48 = 151.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 5
Answer:
GIVEN:
89 + 62 +10 + 51 = ???
ADDITION:
89 + 62 +10 + 51
= 151 + 10 + 51
= 161 + 51
= 212.
Hence, Sum of 89 + 62 +10 + 51 = 212.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 6
Answer:
GIVEN:
95 + 71 + 46 + 53 = ???
ADDITION:
95 + 71 + 46 + 53
= 166 + 46 + 53
= 212 + 53
= 265.
Hence, Sum of 95 + 71 + 46 + 53 = 265.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 7
Answer:
GIVEN:
17 + 84 + 23 = ???
ADDITION:
17 + 84 + 23
= 101 + 23
= 124.
Hence, Sum of 17 + 84 + 23 = 124.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 8
Answer:
GIVEN:
21 + 42 + 39 = ???
ADDITION:
21 + 42 + 39
= 63 + 39
= 102.
Hence, Sum of 21 + 42 + 39 = 102.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 9
Answer:
GIVEN:
92 + 58 + 19 = ???
ADDITION:
92 + 58 + 19
= 150 + 19
= 169.
Hence, Sum of 92 + 58 + 19 = 169.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 10
Answer:
GIVEN:
58 + 12 + 6 + 24 = ???
ADDITION:
58 + 12 + 6 + 24
= 70 + 6 + 24
= 76 + 24
= 100.
Hence, Sum of 58 + 12 + 6 + 24 = 100.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 11
Answer:
GIVEN:
42 + 26 + 33 + 14 = ???
ADDITION:
42 + 26 + 33 + 14
= 68 + 33 + 14
= 101 + 14
= 115.
Hence, Sum of 42 + 26 + 33 + 14 = 115.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 12
Answer:
GIVEN:
13 + 52 + 37 + 48 = ???
ADDITION:
13 + 52 + 37 + 48
= 65 + 37 + 48
= 102 + 48
= 150.
Hence, Sum of 13 + 52 + 37 + 48 = 150.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 13
Answer:
GIVEN:
64 + 20 + 35 + 56 = ???
ADDITION:
64 + 20 + 35 + 56
= 84 + 35 + 56
=  119 + 56
= 175.
Hence, Sum of 64 + 20 + 35 + 56 = 175.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 14
Answer:
GIVEN:
36 + 92 + 40 + 15 = ???
ADDITION:
36 + 92 + 40 + 15
= 128 + 40 + 15
= 168 + 15
= 183.
Hence, Sum of 36 + 92 + 40 + 15 = 183.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 15
Answer:
GIVEN:
19 +  3 + 47 + 25 = ???
ADDITION:
19 +  3 + 47 + 25
= 22 + 47 + 25
= 69 + 25
= 94.
Hence, Sum of  19 + 3 + 47 + 25 = 94.

Question 16.
Number Sense
Solve. Which two digits in the ones place did you add first? Explain.
7 + 15 + 36 + 25 = _______
______________________
______________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
7 + 15 + 36 + 25 = ???
The two digits in ones place added first are 5 number.
= 15 + 25 + 36 + 7
= 40 + 36 + 7
= 76 + 7
= 83.
Hence, Sum of 7 + 15 + 36 + 25  = 83.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

How many seeds does your class plant in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 16
Addition problem:
_____ seeds
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of Sunflower plant seeds = 81
Number of Marigold plant seeds = 92
Number of Pumpkin plant seeds = 83
Number of Tomato plant seeds = 78
ADDITION:
Total number of plants seeds = Number of Sunflower plant seeds + Number of Marigold plant seeds + Number of Pumpkin plant seeds + Number of Tomato plant seeds
= 81 + 92 + 83 + 78
= 173 + 83 + 78
= 256 + 78
= 334.
Hence, the total number of plants seeds = 334.

Show and Grow

Question 17.
How many fish are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 17
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of Angelfish = 43
Number of Rainbow fish = 37
Number of Swordtail = 29
Number of Tetra = 59
Total Number of all fishes = Number of Angelfish + Number of Rainbow fish + Number of Swordtail + Number of Tetra
= 43 + 37 + 29 + 59
= 80 + 29 + 59
= 109 + 59
= 168.
Hence, Total Number of all fishes = 168.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
You need 100 craft sticks for a project. You have a 24-pack, a 32-pack, and a 36-pack. How many more craft sticks do you need?
______ more craft sticks
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of craft sticks needed for a project = 100
Number of packs in first pack = 24
Number of packs in second pack = 32
Number of packs in third pack = 36
ADDITION:
Total number of packs in all three packs = Number of packs in first pack + Number of packs in second pack + Number of packs in third pack = 24 + 32 + 36 = 92.
SUBTRACTION:
Number of stickers needed = Number of craft sticks needed for a project – Total number of packs in all three packs
= 100 – 92
=8.
Hence, Number of stickers needed = 8.

Add Up to 4 Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.8

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 18
Answer:
GIVEN:
43 + 62 + 18 =???
ADDITION:
43 + 62 + 18
=105 + 18
= 123.
Hence, Sum of 43 + 62 + 18 = 123.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 19
Answer:
GIVEN:
74 + 30 +69 = ???
ADDITION:
74 + 30 +69
= 104 + 69
= 173.
Hence, Sum of 74 + 30 +69 = 173.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 20
Answer:
GIVEN:
34 + 57 + 27 = ???
ADDITION:
34 + 57 + 27
= 91 + 27
= 118.
Hence, Sum of 34 + 57 + 27 = 118.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 21
Answer:
GIVEN:
51 + 16 + 6 + 24 = ???
ADDITION:
51 + 16 + 6 + 24
= 67 + 6 + 24
= 73 + 24
= 97.
Hence, Sum of 51 + 16 + 6 + 24 = 97.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 22
Answer:
GIVEN:
84 + 62 + 10 + 31 = ???
ADDITION:
84 + 62 + 10 + 31
= 146 + 10 + 31
= 156 + 31
= 187.
Hence, Sum of 84 + 62 + 10 + 31 = 187.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 23
Answer:
GIVEN:
66 + 49 + 34 +21 = ???
ADDITION:
66 + 49 + 34 +21
= 115 + 34 + 21
= 149 + 21
= 170.
Hence, Sum of 66 + 49 + 34 +21 = 170.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 24
Answer:
GIVEN:
50 + 26 + 45 + 44 = ???
ADDITION:
50 + 26 + 45 + 44
= 76 + 45 + 44
= 121 + 44
= 165.
Hence, Sum of 50 + 26 + 45 + 44 = 165.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
73 + 14 + 26 + 27 = ???
ADDITION:
73 + 14 + 26 + 27
= 87 + 26 + 27
= 113 + 27
= 140.
Hence, Sum of 73 + 14 + 26 + 27 = 140.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 26
Answer:
GIVEN:
65 + 8 + 32 + 71 = ???
ADDITION:
65 + 8 + 32 + 71
= 73 + 32 + 71
= 105 + 71
= 176.
Hence, Sum of 65 + 8 + 32 + 71 = 176.

Question 10.
Number Sense
Find the missing number.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 27
Answer:
GIVEN:
38 + 41 + ____ + 52 = 159.
Let the missing number be X.
ADDITION:
38 + 41 + X + 52 = 159
=> 79 + X + 52 = 159
=> X + 131 = 159
=> X = 159 – 131
=> X = 28.
EQUATION:
38 + 41 + 28 + 52 = 159.
Hence, missing number = 28.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
How many sandwiches are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.8 28
______ sandwiches
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of Turkey Sandwiches = 59
Number of Ham Sandwiches = 23
Number of Cheese Sandwiches = 35
Number of Peanut Butter Sandwiches = 45
ADDITION:
Total number of all sandwiches = Number of Turkey Sandwiches + Number of Ham Sandwiches + Number of Cheese Sandwiches + Number of Peanut Butter Sandwiches
= 59 + 23 +35 + 45
= 162.
Hence, the total number of all sandwiches = 162.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You need 210 votes to win a school election. You receive 67 votes from the first grade and 93 votes from the second grade. How many more votes do you need?
____ votes
Answer:
Number of votes required to win school election = 210
Number of votes received from first grade = 67
Number of votes received from second grade = 93
ADDITION:
Total number of votes received from first and second grade = 67 + 93 = 160
SUBTRACTION:
Number of votes required to win the election = Number of votes required to win school election – Total number of votes received from first and second grade
= 210 – 160 = 50.
Hence, Number of votes required to win the election =  50.

Review & Refresh

Write a number that makes the statement true.
Question 13.
865 < _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
865 < _____.
Hence, 865 < 900.

Question 14. _____ > 374
Answer:
GIVEN: _____ > 374
Hence,  415 > 374.

Question 15.
736 = ____
Answer:
GIVEN:
736 = _____
Hence, 736 = 736.

Question 16.
451 > _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
451 > ______
Hence, 451 > 389.

Lesson 9.9 Explain Addition Strategies

Explore and Grow

Use two different strategies to find 274 + 519.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.9 1
Answer:
ONE WAY :COMPENSATION METHOD
274 + 519 = ???
Add 6 to 274.
Subtract 6 from 519.
274     +     519
+  6             –   6
280     +     513  = 793.
Hence, Sum of 274 + 519 = 793.
OTHER WAY: USE MODELS TO ADD

Hence, Sum of 274 + 519 = 793.
Explain why you chose one of your strategies.
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
I choose COMPENSATION METHOD and USE MODELS TO ADD for adding numbers because its easy to understand and easy to calculate the addition also.

Show and Grow

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 1.
379 + 240 = ____
___________________
____________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
379 + 240 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 379 + 240 = 619.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 2.
426 + 355 = _____
___________________
___________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
426 + 355 = ???

Hence, Sum of 426 + 355 = 781.

Question 3.
671 + 219 = _____
____________________
____________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
671 + 219 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 671 + 219 = 890.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses compensation to solve. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.9 2
____________________
____________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
182 + 506 = 688
ADDITION:
182     +    506
+6               -6
188     +    500 = 688
Hence, my friend compensation is correct because sum of 182 + 506 = 688.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
You have 567 pennies in a piggy bank and 428 in a jar. How many pennies do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.9 3
Addition equation:
______ pennies
_______________________
_______________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of pennies in  piggy bank = 567
Number of pennies in a jar = 428
ADDITION:
Total number of pennies in piggy bank and a jar = Number of pennies in  piggy bank  + Number of pennies in a jar
= 567 + 428 =  995.
Hence, the total number of pennies in piggy bank and a jar = 995.

Show and Grow

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 5.
A beekeeper has 494 worker bees and 376 drone bees. How many bees does he have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.9 4
______ bees
___________________
___________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of worker bees a beekeeper has = 494
Number of drone bees a beekeeper has = 376
ADDITION:
Total number of worker bees and drone bees  a beekeeper has = 494 + 376 = 870
Hence, the total number of worker bees and drone bees a beekeeper has = 870.

Question 6.
There are 365 days in one year. How many days are there in two years?
______ days
______________________
______________________
Answer:
CONVERTION:
1 YEAR = 365 DAYS
2 YEARS =????
MULTIPLICATION:
=> 2 x 365 = 730 days.
Hence, Number of days in 2 years = 730.

Explain Addition Strategies Homework & Practice 9.9

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 1.
656 + 181 = _____
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
656 + 181 = ???

Hence, Sum of 656 + 181 = 837.

Question 2.
567 + 348 = ______
______________________
______________________
Answer:

Hence, Sum of 567 + 348 =915.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.9 5
Answer:
SUBTRACTION:
765 – 541 = 224
870 – 358 = 512
542 – 108 = 434

Hence, 541 + 224 = 765
358 + 512 = 870
108 + 434 = 542.

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
A farmer has 415 tomato plants and 250 pepper plants. How many plants does he have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 9.9 6
_____ plants
___________________
___________________
Answer:
Number of tomatoes plants farmer has = 415
Number of pepper plants farmer has = 250
ADDITION:
Total number of tomatoes plants and pepper plants farmer has = 415 + 250 = 665
Hence , the total number of tomatoes plants and pepper plants farmer has = 665.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You practice the trumpet for 45 minutes each day. How many minutes do you practice in 4 days?
______ minutes
_________________________
________________________
Answer:
GIVEN:
Practice time of the trumpet each day = 45 minutes
Practice time of the trumpet in 4 days= ???
MULTIPLICATION:
=> 4 x 45 = 180 minutes.
Hence, Practice time of the trumpet in 4 days=  180 minutes.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
97 − 71 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
97 – 71 = ???
DIFFERENCE:
97 – 71 =26.
Hence, 97 – 71 =26.

Question 7.
56 − 14 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
56 – 14 = ???
DIFFERENCE:
56 – 14 = 42
Hence, 56 – 14 = 42.

Add Numbers within 1,000 Performance Task

A store has four different robot kits.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 1
Question 1.
How many parts are there in the green, purple, and orange kits?
______ parts
Answer:
GIVEN:
FOUR different robot kits.
Number of robot parts in green kit = 280
Number of robot parts in purple kit = 157
Number of robot parts in orange kit = 360
ADDITION:
Total number of robot parts in green, purple, and orange kits = 280 + 157 + 360
= 437 + 360 = 797.
Hence, Total number of robot parts in green, purple, and orange kits = 797.

Question 2.
The orange kit has 183 fewer parts than the yellow kit. How many parts are in the yellow kit?
______ parts
Answer:
Let robot parts in yellow kit be X
Number of robot parts in orange kit = 183
Difference in Number of robot parts in orange and yellow kit = 360
= X – 183 = 360
=> X = 360 + 183
=> X = 543.
Hence, robot parts in yellow kit = 543.
Question 3.
Your friend wants to buy two kits so that he has700 parts. Which two kits should he buy?
_____ and ______
Answer:
GIVEN:
Your friend wants to buy two kits so that he has700 parts.
Number of robot parts in green kit = 280
Number of robot parts in purple kit = 157
Number of robot parts in orange kit = 360
Number of robot parts in yellow kit = 543
Check the sum of four kits robot parts to each other.
280 + 157 = 437                     157 + 280 = 437
280 + 360 = 640                     157 + 360 = 517
280 + 543 = 823                     157 + 543 = 700

360+ 280 = 640
360 + 157 = 517
360 + 543 = 903
Therefore, 157 + 543 = 700.
ADDITION:
Two kits that have to be purchased = Number of robot parts in purple kit +  Number of robot parts in yellow kit =157 + 543 = 700.
Hence, Two kits that have to be purchased =700.

Question 4.
a. You have some robot parts at home. You buy two purple kits and one orange kit. Now you have 774 parts. How many parts did you have to start?
_______ parts
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of robot parts in purple kit = 157
Two purple kit  robot parts total = 2 x 157 = 314
Number of robot parts in orange kit = 360
Total parts in Two purple kit and orange kit = 314 + 360 = 674
Total number of robot parts had= 774
DIFFERENCE:
Number of robot parts required to start =  Total number of robot parts had – Total robot parts in Two purple kit and orange kit
= 774 – 674
= 100
Hence, Number of robot parts required to start are 100 more.

b. Your cousin has 450 robot parts at home. She buys a kit and now has 36 more parts than you. Which kit did she buy?
______ kit
Answer:
GIVEN:
Number of robot parts my cousin has = 450
Number of robot parts me having = 674
Number of robot parts she has more than me = 36
=> 674 + 36 = 710
Checking the sum of kits with my friends kit
=> 450 + 280 =730
450 + 157 = 607
450 + 360 = 810
450 + 543 = 993
CONDITION GIVEN:
She buys a kit and now has 36 more parts than you.
=> 450 + 280 = 730.
Hence, Kit my friend purchased is green kit.

Add Numbers within 1,000 Activity

Three in a Row: Three-Digit Addition
To Play: Players take turns. On your turn, spin both spinners. Add the two numbers and cover the sum. Continue playing until someone gets three in a row.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 2

Add Numbers within 1,000 Chapter Practice

9.1 Add 10and 100

Question 1.
230 + 10 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
230 + 10 = ???
ADDITION:
230 + 10 = 240.
Hence, Sum of 230 + 10 = 240.

Question 2.
419 + 10 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
419 + 10 = ???
ADDITION:
419 + 10 = 429.
Hence, Sum of 419 + 10 = 429.

Question 3.
623 + 100 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
623 + 100 = ???
ADDITION:
623 + 100 = 723.
Hence, Sum of 623 + 100 = 723.

Question 4.
899 + 10 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
899 + 10 = ???
ADDITION:
899 + 10 = 999.
Hence, Sum of 899 + 10 = 999.

Question 5.
384 + 100 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
384 + 100 = ???
ADDITION:
384 + 100 = 484.
Hence, sum of 384 + 100 = 484.

Question 6.
167 + 100 = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
167 + 100 = ???
ADDITION:
167 + 100 = 267.
Hence, sum of 167 + 100 = 267.

9.2 Use a Number Line to Add Hundreds and Tens

Question 7.
592 + 340 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 7
Answer:

ADDITION:
592 + 100 + 100 + 100 + 40
= 692 + 100 + 100 + 40
= 792 + 100 + 40
= 892 + 40
= 932.
Hence, Sum of 592 + 100 + 100 + 100 + 40 = 932.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 170 football stickers and some baseball stickers. You have 360 stickers in all. How many baseball stickers do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 8
_______ baseball stickers
Answer:
GIVEN:
Total number of stickers in all = 360
Number of football stickers = 170
Number of baseball stickers = ???
SUBTRACTION:
Number of baseball stickers = Total number of stickers in all – Number of football stickers
= 360 – 170
= 130.
Hence, Number of baseball stickers = 130.

9.3 Use a Number Line to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Question 9.
365 + 342 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 9
Answer:

ADDITION:
365 +100 + 100 + 100 + 42
= 465 + 100 + 100 + 42
= 565 + 100 + 42
= 665 + 42
= 707.
Hence, 365 +100 + 100 + 100 + 42 = 707.

Question 10.
604 + 217 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 10
Answer:

ADDITION:
604 + 100 + 100 + 17
= 704 + 100 + 17
= 804 + 17
= 821.
Hence, Sum of 604 + 100 + 100 + 17 = 821.

9.4 Use Compensation to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Use Compensation to Add
Question 11.
205 + 631 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 11
_____ + ____ = _____
Answer:
205 + 631 = ???
Add 5 to 205.
Subtract 5 from 631.
205   +    631
+   5          –  5
210     +   626 = 836.
Hence, Sum of 205 + 631 = 836.

Question 12.
452 + 311 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 12
_____ + ____ = _____
Answer:
GIVEN:
452 + 311 = ???
Add 8 to 452.
Subtract 8 from 311.
452      +    311
+ 8             –   8
460      +    302 = 762.
Hence, Sum of 452 + 311 = 762.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton uses compensation to find 198 + 267. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 13
Answer:
GIVEN:
198 + 267 = ???
Add 2 to 198.
Subtract 2 from 267.
198    +    267
+ 2           –  2
200    +   265 = 465.
Hence, Newton compensation is not correct because the sum of 198 + 267 = 465 not 467.

9.5 Use Partial Sums to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 14
Answer:
GIVEN: 264 + 483 =???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 264 + 483 = 747.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 15
Answer:
GIVEN:
807 + 123 = ??
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 807 + 123 = 933.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 16
Answer:
GIVEN:
325 + 324 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 325 + 324 = 649.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 17
Answer:
GIVEN:
640 + 293 = ???
ADDITION:

Hence, Sum of 640 + 293 = 933.

9.6 Use Models to Add Three-Digit Numbers

Question 18.
395 + 410 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 18
Answer:
GIVEN:
395 + 410 = ???

Hence, Sum of 395 + 410 = 805.

9.7 Add Three-Digit Numbers

Question 19.
Number Sense
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 19
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 19
SUBTRACTION:
918 – 561 = 357.
379 – 264 = 115.
792 – 646 = 146.

ADDITION:
561 + 357 = 918.
115 + 264 = 379.
646 + 146 = 792.
Hence, the missing numbers are  357, 115 and 146.

9.8 Add Up to 4 Two-Digit Numbers

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 20
Answer:
GIVEN:
54 + 32 + 20 = ???
ADDITION:
54 + 32 + 20
= 86 + 20
= 106.
Hence, 54 +32 +20 = 106.

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 21
Answer:
GIVEN:
43 + 58 +17 = ???
ADDITION:
43 + 58 +17
= 101 + 17
=118.
Hence, 43 + 58 +17 = 118.

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 22
Answer:
GIVEN:
16 + 81 + 74 = ???
ADDITION:
16 + 81 + 74
= 97 + 74
= 151.
Hence, 16 +61 + 74 = 151.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 23
Answer:
GIVEN:
92 + 52+ 38 +41 = ???
ADDITION:
92 + 52+ 38 +41
= 144 + 38 +41
= 182 + 41
= 223.
Hence, 92 + 52+ 38 +41 = 223.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 24
Answer:
GIVEN:
90+ 5 +13 + 48 = ???
ADDITION:
66 + 44 +30 +9
= 95 + 13 + 48
= 108 + 48
= 156.
Hence, 90+ 5 +13 + 48 = 156.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 chp 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
66 + 44 +30 +9 = ???
ADDITION:
66 + 44 +30 +9
= 110+30 +9
= 140 + 9
= 149.
Hence, 66 + 44 +30 +9 = 149.

9.9 Explain Addition Strategies

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 26.
538 + 176 = ______
________________________
_________________________
Answer:
EQUATION METHOD:
538 + 100 + 10 + 10 +10 + 10  + 10 + 10 + 10 + 6
=638 + 10 + 10 +10 + 10  + 10 + 10 + 10 + 6
= 648 + 10 +10 + 10  + 10 + 10 + 10 + 6
= 658 + 10 + 10  + 10 + 10 + 10 + 6
= 668 + 10  + 10 + 10 + 10 + 6
= 678 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 6
= 688 + 10 + 10 + 6
= 698 + 10 + 6
= 708 +6
= 714.

Conclusion:

We have given a detailed explanation for each and every topic discussed in Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 9 Add Numbers within 1,000 Solutions. We have also provided the exercise problems along with the answers to help in practising the Add Numbers within 1,000 chapter. Stay tuned to our website to get the answers for all chapters of grade 2.